The Third Wave - Alvin Toffler

ALVIN TOFFLER

Bantam Books by Alvin Toffler

Ask your bookseller for the books you have missed
FUTURE SHOCK THE THIRD WAVE

This edition contains the complete text
of the original hardcover edition.

NOT ONE WORD HAS BEEN OMITTED.

THE THIRD WAVE

A Bantam Book I published in association with William Morrow & Co.,

Inc.

PRINTING HISTORY William Morrow edition published March 1980
5 printings September 1980
A Literary Guild Selection October 1979
A Selection of Preferred Choice Bookplan October 1979 and
the Macmillan Book Club May 1980.

Serialized in Industry Week, February 1980; East/West Network,
February 1980; Across the Board, March 1980; Independent News
Alliance, March 1980; Rotarian, April 1980; Mechanix Illustrated, May
1980; Reader's Digest, May 1980; Video Review, May 1980; Journal of
Insurance, July 1980; Reader's Digest (Canada), August 1980; and
Modern Office Procedures, September 1980.

Bantam edition /April 1981 13 printings through May 1989

THE THIRD WAVE also appears in translation: French (Editions
Deneol); German (Bertelsmann); Japanese (NHK Books); Spanish
(Plaza y Janes and Editorial Diana); Danish (Chr. Erichsens Forlag);
Dutch (Uilgenerij L.J. Veen); Hebrew (Am Oved); Portuguese
(Distribuidora Record); Serbo-Croatian (Jugoslavia); Swedish) (Esselte
Info AB); Turkish (Altin Kitaplar); Chinese (Dushu-Peking); U.K.
(William Collins & Sons); India (Pan Books); Greece (Edition Cactus);
Poland (Pantswowy Instytut Wydawniczy); Romania (Editura Politica);
Portuguese (Livros do Brazil); Indonesia (P.T. Pantja Simpati); Korea
(Korean Economic Daily).

All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1980 by Alvin Toffler.

Cover art copyright © 1981 by Bantam Books.

No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted

in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,

including photocopying, recording, or by any information

storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing

from the publisher. For information address: Bantam Books.

ISBN 0-553-24698-4 Published simultaneously in the United States
and Canada

Bantam Books are published by Bantam Books, a division of Bantam
Doubleday Dell Publishing Group, Inc. Its trademark, consisting of the
words "Bantam Books" and the portrayal of a rooster, is Registered in

U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. Marca Regis-
trada. Bantam Books, 666 Fifth Avenue, New York, New York 10103.

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA KR 22 21 20 19 18
17 16 15 14 13

FOR HEIDI

Whose convincing arguments helped me decide to write The Third
Wave. Her tough, tenacious criticism of my ideas and her
professionalism as an editor are reflected on every page.

Her contributions to this book extend far beyond those one would
expect of a colleague, an intellectual companion, a friend, lover and
wife.

Did we come here to laugh or cry? Are we dying or being born?

Terra Nostra by Carlos Fuentes
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
A COLLISION OF WAVES

1 / SUPER-STRUGGLE

The Revolutionary Premise The Leading Edge Waves of the Future
Goldbugs and Assassins

THE SECOND WAVE

2 / THE ARCHITECTURE OF CIVILIZATION

The Violent Solution Living Batteries The Technological Womb The
Vermilion Pagoda The Streamlined Family The Covert Curriculum
Immortal Beings The Music Factory The Paper Blizzard

3 /THE INVISIBLE WEDGE

The Meaning of the Market The Sexual Split

4 / BREAKING THE CODE Standardization Specialization
Synchronization Concentration Maximization Centralization

CONTENTS

5 / THE TECHNICIANS OF POWER

The Integrators The Integrational Engine The Power Pyramids The
Super-Elites

6 / THE HIDDEN BLUEPRINT Mechano-Mania

The Represento-Kit The Global Law Factory The Reassurance Ritual

7 / A FRENZY OF NATIONS

Changing Horses The Golden Spike
8 /THE IMPERIAL DRIVE

Gas Pumps in the Garden The Margarine Plantation Integration a
VAmericain Socialist Imperialism

9 / INDUST-REALITY The Progress Principle The Software of Time
Repackaging Space The "Sjuff" of Reality The Ultimate Why

10 / CODA: THE FLASH FLOOD
THE THIRD WAVE

11 / THE NEW SYNTHESIS

12 / THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

The Sun and Beyond Tools of Tomorrow Machines in Orbit Into the
Depths The Gene Industry The Techno-Rebels

13 / DE-MASSIFYING THE MEDIA A Warehouse of Images The De-
massified Media Blip Culture

CONTENTS

14 / THE INTELLIGENT ENVIRONMENT Enhancing the Brain
The Social Memory

15 / BEYOND MASS PRODUCTION Mouse Milk and T-Shirts The
Presto Effect

The Death of the Secretary?

16 / THE ELECTRONIC COTTAGE Doing Homework
The Telecommuters

The Home-Centered Society

17 / FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE The Pro-Nuclear Campaign Non-
Nuclear Life-Styles

The Child-free Culture

"Hot" Relationships

Love Plus

The Campaign for Child Labor
The Electronic Expanded Family

Parental Malpractice
Easing into Tomorrow

18 / THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS Kabuki Currency

The Accelerative Economy The De-massified Society Redefining the
Corporation A Pentagon of Pressures The Multipurpose Corporation
Many Bottom Lines

197 DECODING THE NEW RULES The End ofNine-to-Five The
Sleepless Gorgon Schedule-a-Friend Computers and Marijuana The
Post-Standardized Mind The New Matrix Small-Within-Big Is Beautiful
The Organization of the Future

20 / THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER The Invisible Economy
CONTENTS

Overeaters and Widows The Do-It-Yourselfers Outsiders and Insiders
Prosumer Life-Styles Third Wave Economics The End of Marketization

21 / THE MENTAL MAELSTROM The New Image of Nature Designing
Evolution The Progress Tree The Future of Time Space Travelers
Wholism and Halfism The Cosmic Playroom The Termite Lesson

221 THE CRACK-UP OF THE NATION Abkhazians and lexicons From
the Top Down The Global Corporation The Emerging "T-Net" Planetary
Consciousness Myths and Inventions

23 / GANDHI WITH SATELLITES The Second Wave Strategy The
Broken Success Model The First Wave Strategy The Third Wave
Question Sun, Shrimp, and Chips The Original Prosumers The Starting
Line

24 / CODA: THE GREAT CONFLUENCE
Tomorrow's Basics

The Concept of Practopia
The Wrong Question
CONCLUSION

25 / THE NEW PSYCHO-SPHERE
The Attack on Loneliness
Telecommunity

The Heroin Structure

CONTENTS

The Secret of the Cults Life-Organizers and Semi-Cults

26 / THE PERSONALITY OF THE FUTURE

Growing Up Different The New Worker The Prosumer Ethic The
Configurative Me

27 / THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM The Black Hole
Private Armies

The Messiah Complex
The World Web
The Inter-Weave Problem
The Decisional Speedup
The Collapse of Consensus
The Decisional Implosion

28 / TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY Minority Power

Semi-Direct Democracy Decision Division The Expanding Elites The
Coming Super-Struggle A Destiny to Create

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS NOTES

BIBLIOGRAPHY INDEX

INTRODUCTION

In a time when terrorists play death-games with hostages, as
currencies careen amid rumors of a third World War, as embassies
flame and storm troopers lace up their boots in many lands, we stare in
horror at the headlines. The price of gold — that sensitive barometer of
fear — breaks all records. Banks tremble. Inflation rages out of control.
And the governments of the world are reduced to paralysis or
imbecility.

Faced with all this, a massed chorus of Cassandras fills the air with
doom-song. The proverbial man hi the street says the world has "gone
mad," while the expert points to all the trends leading toward
catastrophe.

This book offers a sharply different view.

It contends that the world has not swerved into lunacy, and that, in fact,
beneath the clatter and jangle of seemingly senseless events there lies
a startling and potentially hopeful pattern. This book is about that
pattern and that hope.

The Third Wave is for those who think the human story, far from
ending, has only just begun.

A powerful tide is surging across much of the world today, creating a
new, often bizarre, environment in which to work, play, marry, raise
children, or retire. In this bewildering context, businessmen swim
against highly erratic economic currents; politicians see their ratings
bob wildly up and down; universities, hospitals, and other institutions
battle desperately against inflation. Value systems splinter and crash,
while the lifeboats of family, church, and state are hurled madly about.

Looking at these violent changes, we can regard them as

4

2 THE THIRD WAVE

isolated evidences of instability, breakdown, and disaster. Yet, if we
stand back for a longer view, several things become apparent that
otherwise go unnoticed.

To begin with, many of today's changes are not independent of one
another. Nor are they random. For example, the crack-up of the
nuclear family, the global energy crisis, the spread of cults and cable
television, the rise of flextime and new fringe-benefit packages, the
emergence of separatist movements from Quebec to Corsica, may all
seem like isolated events. Yet precisely the reverse is true. These and
many other seemingly unrelated events or trends are niter-connected.
They are, in fact, parts of a much larger phenomenon: the death of
industrialism and the rise of a new civilization.

So long as we think of them as isolated changes and miss this larger
significance, we cannot design a coherent, effective response to them.
As individuals, our personal decisions remain aimless or self-
canceling. As governments, we stumble from crisis to crash program,
lurching into the future without plan, without hope, without vision.

Lacking a systematic framework for understanding the clash of forces
in today's world, we are like a ship's crew, trapped in a storm and
trying to navigate between dangerous reefs without compass or chart.
In a culture of warring specialisms, drowned in fragmented data and
fine-toothed analysis, synthesis is not merely useful — it is crucial.

For this reason, The Third Wave is a book of large-scale synthesis. It
describes the old civilization in which many of us grew up, and
presents a careful, comprehensive picture of the new civilization
bursting into being in our midst.

So profoundly revolutionary is this new civilization that it challenges all
our old assumptions. Old ways of thinking, old formulas, dogmas, and
ideologies, no matter how cherished or how useful hi the past, no
longer fit the facts. The world that is fast emerging from the clash of
new values and technologies, new geopolitical relationships, new life-
styles and modes of communication, demands wholly new ideas and
analogies, classifications and concepts. We cannot cram the
embryonic world of tomorrow into yesterday's conventional
cubbyholes. Nor are the orthodox attitudes or moods appropriate.

Thus, as the description of this strange new civilization unfolds in these
pages, we will find reason to challenge the chic pessimism that is so
prevalent today. Despair — salable and self-indulgent — has dominated
the culture for a decade or

INTRODUCTION 3

more. The Third Wave concludes that despair is not only a sin (as C.

P. Snow, I believe, once put it), but that it is also unwarranted.

I am under no Pollyannaish illusions, It is scarcely necessary today to
elaborate on the real dangers facing us — from nuclear annihilation and
ecological disaster to racial fanaticism or regional violence. I have
written about these dangers myself in the past, and will no doubt do so
again. War, economic debacle, large-scale technological disaster — any
of these could alter future history in catastrophic ways.

Nevertheless, as we explore the many new relationships springing
up — between changing energy patterns and new forms of family life, or
between advanced manufacturing methods and the self-help
movement, to mention only a few — we suddenly discover that many of
the very same conditions that produce today's greatest perils also open
fascinating new potentials.

The Third Wave shows us these new potentials. It argues that, in the
very midst of destruction and decay, we can now find striking
evidences of birth and life. It shows clearly and, I think, indisputably,
that — with intelligence and a modicum of luck — the emergent
civilization can be made more sane, sensible, and sustainable, more
decent and more democratic than any we have ever known.

If the main argument of this book is correct, there are powerful reasons
for long-range optimism, even if the transitional years immediately
ahead are likely to be stormy and crisis-ridden.

As I've worked on The Third Wave in the past few years, lecture
audiences have repeatedly asked me how it differs from my earlier
work Future Shock.

Author and reader never see quite the same things in a book. I view
The Third Wave as radically different from Future Shock in both form
and focus. To begin with, it covers a much wider sweep of time — past
as well as future. It is more prescriptive. Its architecture is different.

(The perceptive reader will find that its structure mirrors its central
metaphor — the clash of waves.)

Substantively, the differences are even more pronounced. While
Future Shock called for certain changes to be made, it emphasized the
personal and social costs of change. The Third Wave, while taking
note of the difficulties of adapta-

4 THE THIRD WAVE

tion, emphasizes the equally important costs of not changing certain
things rapidly enough.

Moreover, while in the earlier book I wrote of the "premature arrival of
the future," I did not attempt to sketch the emergent society of
tomorrow in any comprehensive or systematic way. The focus of the
book was on the processes of change, not the directions of change.

In this book, the lens is reversed. I concentrate less on acceleration, as
such, and more on the destinations toward which change is carrying
us. Thus one work focuses more heavily on process, the other on
structure. For these reasons, the two books are designed to fit
together, not as source and sequel, but as complementary parts of a
much larger whole. Each is very different. But each casts light on the
other.

In attempting so large-scale a synthesis, it has been necessary to
simplify, generalize, and compress. (Without doing so, it would have
been impossible to cover so much ground in a single volume.) As a
result, some historians may take issue with the way this book divides
civilization into only three parts — a First Wave agricultural phase, a
Second Wave industrial phase, and a Third Wave phase now
beginning.

It is easy to point out that agricultural civilization consisted of quite
different cultures, and that industrialism itself has actually gone through
many successive stages of development One could, no doubt, chop
the past (and the future) into 12 or 38 or 157 pieces. But, in so doing,
we would lose sight of the major divisions hi a clutter of subdivisions.

Or we would require a whole library, instead of a single book, to cover
the same territory. For our purposes, the simpler distinctions are more
useful, even if gross.

The vast scope of this book also required the use of other shortcuts.
Thus I occasionally reify civilization itself, arguing that First Wave or
Second Wave civilization "did" this or that. Of course, I know, and
readers know, that civilizations don't do anything; people do. But
attributing this or that to a civilization now and then saves time and
breath.

Similarly, intelligent readers understand that no one — historian or
futurist, planner, astrologer, or evangelist — "knows" or can "know" the
future. When I say something "will" happen, I assume the reader will
make appropriate discount for uncertainty. To have done otherwise
would have burdened the book with an unreadable and unnecessary
jungle of reservations. Social forecasts, moreover, are never value-free
or

INTRODUCTION 5

scientific, no matter how much computerized data they use. The Third
Wave is not an objective forecast, and it makes no pretense to being
scientifically proven.

To say this, however, is not to suggest that the ideas in this book are
whimsical or unsystematic. In fact, as will soon become apparent, this
work is based on massive evidence and on what might be called a
semi-systematic model of civilization and our relationships to it.

It describes the dying industrial civilization in terms of a "techno-
sphere," a "socio-sphere," an "info-sphere," and a "power-sphere,"
then sets out to show how each of these is undergoing revolutionary
change in today's world. It attempts to show the relationships of these
parts to each other, as well as the "bio-sphere" and "psycho-sphere" —
that structure of psychological and personal relationships through
which changes in the outer world affect our most private lives.

The Third Wave holds that a civilization also makes use of certain
processes and principles, and that it develops its own "super-ideology"
to explain reality and to justify its own existence.

Once we understand how these parts, processes, and principles are
interrelated, and how they transform one another, touching off powerful
currents of change, we gain a much clearer understanding of the giant
wave of change battering our lives today.

The grand metaphor of this work, as should already be apparent, is
that of colliding waves of change. This image is not original. Norbert
Elias, in his The Civilizing Process, refers to "a wave of advancing
integration over several centuries." In 1837, a writer described the
settlement of the American West in terms of successive "waves" — first
the pioneers, then the farmers, then the business interests, the "third
wave" of migration. In 1893, Frederick Jackson Turner cited and
employed the same analogy in his classic essay The Significance of
the Frontier in American History. It is not, therefore, the wave metaphor
that is fresh, but its application to today's civ-ilizational shift.

This application proves to be extremely fruitful. The wave idea is not
only a tool for organizing vast masses of highly diverse information. It
also helps us see beneath the raging surface of change. When we
apply the wave metaphor, much that was confusing becomes clear.

The familiar often appears in a dazzlingly fresh light.

s

THE THIRD WAVE

Once I began thinking in terms of waves of change, colliding and
overlapping, causing conflict and tension around us, it changed my
perception of change itself. In every field, from education and health to
technology, from personal life to politics, it became possible to
distinguish those innovations that are merely cosmetic, or just
extensions of the industrial past, from those that are truly revolutionary.

Even the most powerful metaphor, however, is capable of yielding only
partial truth. No metaphor tells the whole story from all sides, and
hence no vision of the present, let alone the future, can be complete or
final. When I was a Marxist during my late teens and early twenties —
now more than a quarter of a century ago — I, like many young people,
thought I had all the answers. I soon learned that my "answers" were
partial, one-sided, and obsolete. More to the point, I came to
appreciate that the right question is usually more important than the
right answer to the wrong question.

My hope i« thai The Third Wave, at the same time that it provides
answers, asks many fresh questions.

The recognition that no knowledge can be complete, no metaphor
entire, is itself humanizing. It counteracts fanati-cism. It grants even to
adversaries the possibility of partial I mill, and to oneself the possibility
of error. This possibility is especially present in large-scale synthesis.
Yet, as the critic George Steiner has written, "To ask larger questions
is to risk getting things wrong. Not to ask them at all is to constrain the
life of understanding."

In a time of exploding change — with personal lives being torn apart, the
existing social order crumbling, and a fantastic new way of life
emerging on the horizon — asking the very largest of questions about
our future is not merely a matter of intellectual curiosity. It is a matter of
survival.

Whether we know it or not, most of us are already engaged in either
resisting — or creating — the new civilization. The Third Wave will, I
hope, help each of us to choose.

SUPER-STRUGGLE

A new civilization is emerging in our lives, and blind men everywhere
are trying to suppress it. This new civilization brings with it new family
styles; changed ways of working, loving, and living; a new economy;
new political conflicts; and beyond all this an altered consciousness as
well. Pieces of this new civilization exist today. Millions are already
attuning their lives to the rhythms of tomorrow. Others, terrified of the
future, are engaged in a desperate, futile flight into the past and are
trying to restore the dying world that gave them birth.

The dawn of this new civilization is the single most explosive fact of our
lifetimes.

It is the central event — the key to understanding the years immediately
ahead. It is an event as profound as that First Wave of change
unleashed ten thousand years ago by the invention of agriculture, or
the earthshaking Second Wave of change touched off by the industrial
revolution. We are the children of the next transformation, the Third
Wave.

We grope for words to describe the full power and reach of this
extraordinary change. Some speak of a looming Space Age,

Information Age, Electronic Era, or Global Village. Zbigniew Brzezinski
has told us we face a "technetronic age." Sociologist Daniel Bell
describes the coming of a "post-industrial society." Soviet futurists
speak of the S.T.R. — the "scientific-technological revolution." I myself
have written extensively about the arrival of a "super-industrial
society." Yet none of these terms, including my own, is adequate.

Some of these phrases, by focusing on a single factor, nar-

10

THE THIRD WAVE

row rather than expand our understanding. Others are static, implying
that a new society can come into our lives smoothly, without conflict or
stress. None of these terms even begins to convey the full force,
scope, and dynamism of the changes rushing toward us or of the
pressures and conflicts they trigger.

Humanity faces a quantum leap forward. It faces the deepest social
upheaval and creative restructuring of all time. Without clearly
recognizing it, we are engaged in building a remarkable new civilization
from the ground up. This is the meaning of the Third Wave.

Until now the human race has undergone two great waves of change,
each one largely obliterating earlier cultures or civilizations and
replacing them with ways of life inconceivable to those who came
before. The First Wave of change — the agricultural revolution — took
thousands of years to play itself out. The Second Wave — the rise of
industrial civilization — took a mere three hundred years. Today history
is even more accelerative, and it is likely that the Third Wave will
sweep across history and complete itself in a few decades. We, who
happen to share the planet at this explosive moment, will therefore feel
the full impact of the Third Wave in our own lifetimes.

Tearing our families apart, rocking our economy, paralyzing our
political systems, shattering our values, the Third Wave affects
everyone. It challenges all the old power relationships, the privileges
and prerogatives of the endangered elites of today, and provides the
backdrop against, which the key power struggles of tomorrow will be
fought

Much in this emerging civilization contradicts the old traditional
industrial civilization. It is, at one and the same time, highly
technological and anti-industrial.

The Third Wave brings with it a genuinely new way of life based on
diversified, renewable energy sources; on methods of production that
make most factory assembly lines obsolete; on new, non-nuclear
families; on a novel institution that might be called the "electronic
cottage"; and on radically changed schools and corporations of the
future. The emergent civilization writes a new code of behavior for us
and carries us beyond standardization, synchronization, and
centralization, beyond the concentration of energy, money, and power.

This new civilization, as it challenges the old, will topple bureaucracies,
reduce the role of the nation-state, and give

SUPER-STRUGGLE 11

rise to semiautonomous economies in a postimperialist world, It
requires governments that are simpler, more effective, yet more
democratic than any we know today. It is a civilization with its own
distinctive world outlook, its own ways of dealing with time, space,
logic, and causality.

Above all, as we shall see, Third Wave civilization begins to heal the
historic breach between producer and consumer, giving rise to the

"prosumer" economics of tomorrow. For ihis reason, among many, it
could — with some intelligent help 11 tun us — turn out to be the first
truly humane civilization in It corded history.

THE REVOLUTIONARY PREMISE

Two apparently contrasting images of the future grip the popular
imagination today. Most people — to the extent that they bother to think
about the future at all — assume the world they know will last
indefinitely. They find it difficult to Imngine a truly different way of life
for themselves, let alone a totally new civilization. Of course they
recognize that things arc changing. But they assume today's changes
will somehow pass them by and that nothing will shake the familiar
economic framework and political structure. They confidently expect
the future to continue the present

This straight-line thinking comes in various packages. At one level it
appears as an unexamined assumption lying be-hind the decisions of
businessmen, teachers, parents, and politicians. At a more
sophisticated level it comes dressed up hi statistics, computerized
data, and forecasters* jargon. Either way it adds up to a vision of a
future world that is essentially "more of the same" — Second Wave
industrialism writ even larger and spread over more of this planet

Recent events have severely shaken this confident image of the future.
As crisis after crisis has crackled across the headlines, as Iran erupted,
as Mao was de-deified, as oil prices skyrocketed and inflation ran wild,
as terrorism spread and governments seemed helpless to stop it, a
bleaker vision has become increasingly popular. Thus, large numbers
of people — fed on a steady diet of bad news, disaster movies,
apocalyptic Bible stories, and nightmare scenarios issued by
prestigious think tanks — have apparently concluded that today's
society cannot be projected into the future because there is no future.

For them, Armageddon is only minutes away. The earth is racing
toward its final cataclysmic shudder.

On the surface these two visions of the future seem very different. Yet
both produce similar psychological and political effects. For both lead
to the paralysis of imagination and will.

If tomorrow's society is simply an enlarged, Cinerama version of the
present, there is little we need do to prepare for it. If, on the other
hand, society is inevitably destined to self-destruct within our lifetime,
there is nothing we caw do about it. In short, both these ways of
looking at the future generate privatism and passivity. Both freeze us
into inaction.

Yet, in trying to understand what is happening to us, we are not limited
to this simpleminded choice between Armageddon and More-of-the-
Same. There are many more clarifying and constructive ways to think
about tomorrow — ways that prepare us for the future and, more
important, help us to change the present.

This book is based on what I call the "revolutionary premise." It
assumes that, even though the decades immediately ahead are likely

to be filled with upheavals, turbulence, perhaps even widespread
violence, we will not totally destroy ourselves. It assumes that the
jolting changes we are now experiencing are not chaotic or random but
that, in fact, they form a sharp, clearly discernible pattern. It assumes,
moreover, that these changes are cumulative — that they add up to a
giant transformation in the way we live, work, play, and think, and that
a sane and desirable future is possible. In short, what follows begins
with the premise that what is happening now is nothing less than a
global revolution, a quantum jump in history.

Put differently, this book flows from the assumption that we are the
final generation of an old civilization and ,the first generation of a new
one, and that much of our personal confusion, anguish, and
disorientation can be traced directly to the conflict within us, and within
our political institutions, between the dying Second Wave civilization
and the emergent Third Wave civilization that is thundering in to take
its place.

When we finally understand this, many seemingly senselesi events
become suddenly comprehensible. The broad patterns of change
begin to emerge clearly. Action for survival be-1 comes possible and
plausible again. In short, the revolutionary premise liberates our
intellect and our will.

SUPER-STRUGGLE 1>

THE LEADING EDGE

To say the changes we face will be revolutionary, however, is not
enough. Before we can control or channel them wo need a fresh way
to identify and analyze them. Without this we are hopelessly lost.

One powerful new approach might be called social "wave-front"
analysis. It looks at history as a succession of rolling waves of change
and asks where the leading edge of each wave is carrying us. It
focuses our attention not so much on the continuities of history
(important as they are) as on the discontinuities — the innovations and
breakpoints. It identifies key change patterns as they emerge, so that
we can influence them.

Beginning with the very simple idea that the rise of agriculture was the
first turning point hi human social development, and that the industrial
revolution was the second great breakthrough, it views each of these
not as a discrete, one-time event but as a wave of change moving at a
certain velocity.

Before the First Wave of change, most humans lived in small, often
migratory groups and fed themselves by foraging, fishing, hunting, or
herding. At some point, roughly ten millennia ago, the agricultural
revolution began, and it crept slowly across the planet spreading
villages, settlements, cultivated land, and a new way of life.

This First Wave of change had not yet exhausted itself by the end of
the seventeenth century, when the industrial revolution broke over
Europe and unleashed the second great wave of planetary change.

This new process — industrialization — began moving much more rapidly

across nations and continents. Thus two separate and distinct change
processes were rolling across the earth simultaneously, at different
speeds.

Today the First Wave has virtually subsided. Only a few tiny tribal
populations, in South America or Papua Now Guinea, for example,
remain to be reached by agriculture. But the force of this great First
Wave has basically been spent.

Meanwhile, the Second Wave, having revolutionized life in Europe,
North America, and some other parts of the globe in a few short
centuries, continues to spread, as many countries, until now basically
agricultural, scramble to build steel mills, auto plants, textile factories,
railroads, and food processing

14

THE THIRD WAVE

plants. The momentum of industrialization is still felt. The Second
Wave has not entirely spent in force.

But even as this process continues, another, even more important, has
begun. For as the tide of industrialism peaked in the decades after
World War II, a little-understood Third Wave began to surge across the
earth, transforming everything it touched.

Many countries, therefore, are feeling the simultaneous impact of two,
even three, quite different waves of change, all moving at different
rates of speed and with different degrees of force behind them.

For the purposes of this book we shall consider the First Wave era to
have begun sometime around 8000 B.C. and to have dominated the
earth unchallenged until sometime around A.D. 1650-1750. From this
moment on, the First Wave lost momentum as the Second Wave
picked up steam. Industrial civilization, the product of this Second
Wave, then dominated the planet in its turn until it, too, crested. This
latest historical turning point arrived in the United States during the
decade beginning about 1955 — the decade that saw white-collar and
service workers outnumber blue-collar workers for the first time. This
was the same decade that saw the widespread introduction of the
computer, commercial jet travel, the birth control pill, and many other
high-impact innovations. It was precisely during this decade that the
Third Wave began to gather its force in the United States. Since then it
has arrived — at slightly different dates — in most of the other industrial
nations, including Britain, France, Sweden, Germany, the Soviet
Union, and Japan. Today all the high-technology nations are reeling
from the collision between the Third Wave and the obsolete, encrusted
economies and institutions of the Second.

Understanding this is the secret to making sense of much of the
political and social conflict we see around us.

WAVES OF THE FUTURE

Whenever a single wave of change predominates in any given society,
the pattern of future development is relatively easy to discern. Writers,
artists, journalists, and others discover the "wave of the future." Thus in
nineteenth-century Europe many thinkers, business leaders,
politicians, and ordinary people held a clear, basically correct image of
the fu-

SUPER-STRUGGLE 15

ture. They sensed that history was moving toward the ultimate triumph
of industrialism over premechanized agriculture, and they foresaw with
considerable accuracy many of the changes that the Second Wave
would bring with it: more powerful technologies, bigger cities, faster
transport, mass education, and the like.

This clarity of vision had direct political effects. Parties and political
movements were able to triangulate with respect to the future.
Preindustrial agricultural interests organized a rearguard action against
encroaching industrialism, against "big business," against "union
bosses," against "sinful cities." Labor and management grappled for
control of the main levers of the emergent industrial society. Ethnic and
racial minorities defining their rights in terms of an improved role in the
industrial world, demanded access to jobs, corporate positions, urban
housing, better wages, mass public education, and so forth.

This industrial vision of the future had important psychological effects
as well. People might disagree; they might engage in sharp,
occasionally even bloody, conflict. Depressions and boom times might
disrupt their lives. Nevertheless, in general, (he shared image of an
industrial future tended to define options, to give individuals a sense
not merely of who or what they were, but of what they were likely to
become. It provided a degree of stability and a sense of self, even in
the midst of extreme social change.

In contrast, when a society is struck by two or more giant\ waves of
change, and none is yet clearly dominant, the image V of the future is
fractured. It becomes extremely difficult to \ sort out the meaning of the
changes and conflicts that arise A JL The collision of wave fronts creates
a raging ocean, full or clashing currents, eddies, and maelstroms which
conceal the deeper, more important historic tides.

In the United States today — as in many other countries — the"| collision
of Second and Third Waves creates social tensions, I dangerous
conflicts, and strange new political wave fronts that I cut across the
usual divisions of class, race, sex, or party. This \ collision makes a
shambles of traditional political vocabularies I and makes it very
difficult to separate the progressives from the \ reactionaries, friends
from enemies. All the old polarizations and coalitions break up.
Unions and employers, despite their differences, join to fight
environmentalists. Blacks and Jews, once united in the battle against
discrimination, become adversaries.

16

THE THIRD WAVE

In many nations, labor, which has traditionally favored "progressive"
policies such as income redistribution, now often holds "reactionary"
positions with respect to women's rights, family codes, immigration,
tariffs, or regionalism. The traditional "left" is often pro-centalization,
highly nationalistic, and antienvironmentalist.

At the same time we see politicians, from Valery Giscard d'Estaing to
Jimmy Carter or Jerry Brown, espousing "conservative" attitudes
toward economics and "liberal" attitudes toward art, sexual morality,
women's rights, or ecological controls. No wonder people are confused
and give up trying to make sense of their world.

The media, meanwhile, report a seemingly endless succession of
innovations, reversals, bizarre events, assassinations, kidnappings,
space shots, governmental breakdown, commando raids, and
scandals, all seemingly unrelated.

The apparent incoherence of political life is mirrored in personality
disintegration. Psychotherapists and gurus do a land-office business;
people wander aimlessly amid competing therapies, from primal
scream to est. They slip into cults and covens or, alternatively, into a
pathological privatism, convinced that reality is absurd, insane, or
meaningless. Life may indeed be absurd in some large, cosmic sense.
But this hardly proves that there is no pattern in today's events. In fact,
there is a distinct, hidden order that becomes detectable as soon as
we learn to distinguish Third Wave changes from those associated with
the diminishing Second Wave.

An understanding of the conflicts produced by these colliding wave
fronts gives us not only a clearer image of alternative futures but an X
ray of the political and social forces acting on us. It also offers insight
into our own private roles in history. For each of us, no matter how
seemingly unimportant, is a living piece of history.

The crosscurrents created by these waves of change are reflected in
our work, our family life, our sexual attitudes and personal morality.
They show up in our life-styles and voting behavior. For in our personal
lives and in our political acts, whether we know it or not, most of us in
the rich countries are essentially either Second Wave people
committed to maintaining the dying order, Third Wave people
constructing a radically different tomorrow, or a confused, self-
canceling mixture of the two.

SUPER-STRUGGLE 17

GOLDBUGS AND ASSASSINS

The conflict between Second and Third Wave groupings In, in fact, the
central political tension cutting through our society today. Despite what
today's parties and candidates may preach, the infighting among them
amounts to little more than a dispute over who will squeeze the most
advantage from what remains of the declining industrial system. Put
differently, they are engaged in a squabble for the proverbial deck
chairs on a sulking Titanic.

The more basic political question, as we shall see, is not who controls
the last days of industrial society but who shapes the new civilization
rapidly rising to replace it. While short-range political skirmishes
exhaust our energy and attention, a far more profound battle is already
taking place beneath the surface. On one side are the partisans of the
industrial past; on the other, growing millions who recognize that the
most urgent problems of the world — food, energy, arms control,
population, poverty, resources, ecology, climate, the problems of the
aged, the breakdown of urban community, the need for productive,
rewarding work — can no longer be resolved within the framework of
the industrial order.

This conflict is the "super-struggle" for tomorrow.

This confrontation between the vested interests of the Second Wave
and the people of the Third Wave already runs like an electric current
through the political life of every nation. Even in the non-industrial
countries of the world, all the old battle lines have been forcibly
redrawn by the arrival of the Third Wave. The old war of agricultural,
often feudal, interests against industrializing elites, either capitalist or
socialist, takes on a new dimension hi light of the coming
obsolescence of industrialism. Now that Third Wave civilization is
making its appearance, does rapid industrialization imply liberation
from neocolonialism and poverty — or does it, in fact, guarantee
permanent dependency?

It is only against this wide-screen background that we can begin to
make sense of the headlines, to sort out our priorities, to frame
sensible strategies for the control of change in our lives.

As I write this, the front pages report hysteria and hostages in Iran,
assassinations hi South Korea, runaway speculation in gold, friction
between Blacks and Jews in the U.S., big increases in West German
military spending, cross burnings on Long Island, a giant oil spill hi the
Gulf of Mexico, the big-

18

THE THIRD WAVE

gest antinuclear rally in history, and a battle between the rich nations
and the poor over the control of radio frequencies. Waves of religious
revivalism crash through Libya, Syria, and the U.S.; neofascist fanatics
claim "credit" for a political assassination in Paris. And General Motors
reports a breakthrough into technology needed for electric
automobiles. Such disconnected news -clips cry out for integration or
synthesis.

Once we realize that a bitter struggle is now raging between those who
seek to preserve industrialism and those who seek to supplant it, we
have a powerful new key to understanding the world. More important —
whether we are setting policies for a nation, strategies for a
corporation, or goals for one's own personal life — we have a new tool
for changing that world.

To use this tool, however, we must be able to distinguish clearly those
changes that extend the old industrial civilization from those which
facilitate the arrival of the new. We must, in short, understand both the
old and the new, the Second Wave industrial system into which so
many of us were born and the Third Wave civilization that we and our
children will inhabit.

In the chapters that follow, we return for a closer look at the first two
waves of change as a preparation for our exploration of the third. We
shall see that Second Wave civilization was not an accidental jumble of
components, but a system with parts that interacted with each other in
more or less predictable ways — and that the fundamental patterns of
industrial life were the same hi country after country, regardless of
cultural heritage or political difference. This is the civilization that
today's "reactionaries" — both "left-" and "right-wing" — are fighting to
preserve. It is this world that is threatened by history's Third Wave of
civilizational change.

THE ARCHITECTURE
OF CIVILIZATION

Three hundred years ago, give or take a half-century, an explosion
was heard that sent concussive shock waves racing across the earth,
demolishing ancient societies and creating a wholly new civilization.
This explosion was, of course, the industrial revolution. And the giant
tidal force is set loose on the world — the Second Wave — collided with
all the institutions of the past and changed the way of life of millions.

During the long millennia when First Wave civilization reigned
supreme, the planet's population could have been divided into two
categories — the "primitive" and the "civilized." The so-called primitive
peoples, living in small bands and tribes and subsisting by gathering,
hunting, or fishing, were those who had been passed over by the
agricultural revolution.

The "civilized" world, by contrast, was precisely that part of the planet
on which most people worked the soil. For wherever agriculture arose,
civilization took root. A From China and India to Benin and Mexico, in
Greece and Rome, civilizations rose and fell, fought and fused in
endless, colorful admixture.

However, beneath their differences lay fundamental similarities. In all
of them, land was the basis of economy, life, culture, family structure,
and politics. In all of them, life was organized around the village. In all
of them, a simple division of labor prevailed and a few clearly defined
castes and classes arose: a nobility, a priesthood, warriors, helots,
slaves or serfs. In all of them, power was rigidly authoritarian. In all of
them, birth determined one's position in life. And hi all of

22

THE THIRD WAVE

them, the economy was decentralized, so that each community
produced most of its own necessities.

There were exceptions — nothing is simple in history. There were
commercial cultures whose sailors crossed the seas, and highly
centralized kingdoms organized around giant irrigation systems. But
despite such differences, we are justified in seeing all these seemingly
distinctive civilizations as special cases of a single phenomenon:
agricultural civilization — the civilization spread by the First Wave.

During its dominance there were occasional hints of things to come.
There were embryonic mass-production factories in ancient Greece
and Rome. Oil was drilled on one of the Greek islands in 400 B.C. and
in Burma in A.D. 100. Vast bureaucracies flourished in Babylonia and
Egypt. Great urban metropolises grew up in Asia and South America.
There was money and exchange. Trade routes crisscrossed the
deserts, oceans, and mountains from Cathay to Calais. Corporations
and incipient nations existed. There was even, in ancient Alexandria, a
startling forerunner of the steam engine.

Yet nowhere was there anything that might remotely have been termed
an industrial civilization. These glimpses of the future, so to speak,
were mere oddities in history, scattered through different places and
periods. They never were brought together into a coherent system, nor
could they have been. Until 1650-1750, therefore, we can speak of a
First Wave world. Despite patches of primitivism and hints of the
industrial future, agricultural civilization dominated the planet and
seemed destined to do so forever.

This was the world in which the industrial revolution erupted, launching
the Second Wave and creating a strange, powerful, feverishly
energetic countercivilization. Industrialism was more than smokestacks
and assembly lines. It was a rich, many-sided social system that
touched every aspect of human life and attacked every feature of the
First Wave past. It produced the great Willow Run factory outside
Detroit, but it also put the tractor on the farm, the typewriter in the
office, the refrigerator in the kitchen. It produced the daily newspaper
and the cinema, the subway and the DC-3. It gave us cubism and
twelve-tone music. It gave us Bauhaus buildings and Barcelona chairs,
sit-down strikes, vitamin pills, and lengthened life spans. It
universalized the wristwatch and the ballot box. More important, it
linked all these things together — assembled them, like a machine — to
form the most

THE ARCHITECTURE OF CIVILIZATION
23

powerful, cohesive and expansive social system the world had ever
know: Second Wave civilization.

THE VIOLENT SOLUTION

As the Second Wave moved across various societies it touched off a
bloody, protracted war between the defenders of the agricultural past
and the partisans of the industrial future. The forces of First and

Second Wave collided head-on, brushing aside, often decimating, the
"primitive" peoples encountered along the way.

In the United States, this collision began with the arrival of the
Europeans bent on establishing an agricultural, First Wave civilization.
A white agricultural tide pushed relentlessly westward, dispossessing
the Indian, depositing farms and agricultural villages farther and farther
toward the Pacific.

But hard on the heels of the farmers came the earliest in-dustrializers
as well, agents of the Second Wave future. Factories and cities began
to spring up in New England and the mid-Atlantic states. By the middle
of the nineteenth century, the Northeast had a rapidly growing
industrial sector producing firearms, watches, farm implements,
textiles, sewing machines, and other goods, while the rest of the
continent was still ruled by agricultural interests. Economic and social
tensions between First Wave and Second Wave forces grew in
intensity until 1861, when they broke into armed violence.

The Civil War was not fought exclusively, as it seemed to many, over
the moral issue of slavery or such narrow economic issues as tariffs. It
was fought over a much larger question: would the rich new continent
be ruled by farmers or industrializers, by the forces of the First Wave or
the Second? Would the future American society be basically
agricultural or industrial? When the Northern armies won, the die was
cast. The industrialization of the United States was assured. From that
time on, in economics, in politics, in social and cultural life, agriculture
was in retreat, industry ascendant. The First Wave ebbed as the
Second came thundering in.

The same collision of civilizations erupted elsewhere as well. In Japan
the Meiji Restoration, beginning in 1868, re-played in. unmistakably
Japanese terms the same struggle be-tween agricultural past and
industrial future. The abolition of feudalism by 1876, the rebellion of the
Satsuma clan in 1877,

24

THE THIRD WAVE

the adoption of a Western-style constitution in 1889, were all
reflections of the collision of the First and Second Waves in Japan —
steps on the road to Japan's emergence as a premier industrial power.

In Russia, too, the same collision between First and Second Wave
forces erupted. The 1917 revolution was Russia's version of the
American Civil War. It was fought not primarily, as it seemed, over
communism but once again over the issue of industrialization. When
the Bolsheviks wiped out the last lingering vestiges of serfdom and
feudal monarchy, they pushed agriculture into the background and
consciously accelerated industrialism. They became the party of the
Second Wave.

In country after country, the same clash between First Wave and
Second Wave interests broke out, leading to political crisis and
upheavals, to strikes, uprisings, coups d'etat, and wars. By the mid-

twentieth century, however, the forces of the First Wave were broken
and the Second Wave civilization reigned over the earth.

Today an industrial belt girdles the globe between the twenty-fifth and
sixty-fifth parallels in the Northern Hemisphere. In North America,
some 250 million people live an industrial way of life. In Western
Europe, from Scandinavia south to Italy, another quarter of a billion
humans live under industrialism. Eastward lies the "Eurassian"
industrial region — Eastern Europe and the western part of the Soviet
Union — and there we find still another quarter of a billion people living
out their lives in industrial societies. Finally, we come to the Asian
industrial region, comprising Japan, Hong Kong, Singapore, Taiwan,
Australia, New Zealand, and parts of South Korea and the Chinese
mainland, and yet another quarter billion industrial people. In all,
industrial civilization embraces roughly one billion human beings — one
fourth the population of the globe.*

Despite dizzying differences of language, culture, history, and
politics — differences so deep that wars are fought over them — all these
Second Wave societies share common fea-

*For the purposes of this book, I shall define the world industrial
system, circa 1979, as comprising North America; Scandinavia; Britain
and Ireland; Europe, both East and West (except for Portugal, Spain,
Albania, Greece, and Bulgaria); the U.S.S.R.; Japan, Taiwan, Hong
Kong, Singapore, Australia, and New Zealand. Of course, there are
other nations that might arguably be included — as well as industrial
nodes in essentially non-industrial nations: Monterrey and Mexico City
in Mexico, Bombay in India, and many others.

THE ARCHITECTURE OF CIVILIZATION 25

lures. Indeed, beneath the well-known differences lies a hidden
bedrock of similarity.

And to understand today's colliding waves of change wo must be able
to identify clearly the parallel structures of all industrial nations — the
hidden framework of Second Wave civilization. For it is this industrial
framework itself that is now being shattered.

LIVING BATTERIES

The precondition of any civilization, old or new, is energy. First Wave
societies drew their energy from "living batteries" — human and animal
muscle-power — or from sun, wind, and water. Forests were cut for
cooking and heating. Waterwheels, some of them using tidal power,
turned millstones. Windmills creaked in the fields. Animals pulled the
plow. As late as the French Revolution, it has been estimated, Europe
drew energy from an estimated 14 million horses and 24 million oxen.
All First Wave societies thus exploited energy sources that were
renewable. Nature could eventually replenish the forests they cut, the
wind that filled their sails, the rivers that turned then* paddle wheels.
Even animals and people were replaceable "energy slaves.*'

All Second Wave societies, by contrast, began to draw their energy
from coal, gas, and oil — from irreplaceable fossil fuels. This

revolutionary shift, coming after Newcomen invented a workable steam
engine in 1712, meant that for the first time a civilization was eating
into nature's capital rather than merely living off the interest it provided.

This dipping into the earth's energy reserves provided a hidden
subsidy for industrial civilization, vastly accelerating its economic
growth. And from that day to this, wherever the Second Wave passed,
nations built towering technological and economic structures on the
assumption that cheap fossil fuels would be endlessly available. In
capitalist and communist industrial societies alike, in East and West,
this same shift has been apparent — from dispersed to concentrated
energy, from renewable to non-renewable, from many different sources
and fuels to a few. Fossil fuels formed the energy base of all Second
Wave societies.

26 THE THIRD WAVE

THE TECHNOLOGICAL WOMB

The leap to a new energy system was paralleled by a gigantic advance
in technology. First Wave societies had relied on what Vitruvius, two
thousand years ago, called "necessary inventions." But these early
winches and wedges, catapults, winepresses, levers, and hoists were
chiefly used to amplify human or animal muscles.

The Second Wave pushed technology to a totally new level. It
spawned gigantic electromechanical machines, moving parts, belts,
hoses, bearings, and bolts — all clattering and ratcheting along. And
these new machines did more than augment raw muscle. Industrial
civilization gave technology sensory organs, creating machines that
could hear, see, and touch with greater accuracy and precision than
human beings. It gave technology a womb, by inventing machines
designed to give birth to new machines in infinite progression — i.e.,
machine tools. More important, it brought machines together in
interconnected systems under a single roof, to create the factory and
ultimately the assembly line within the factory.

On this technological base a host of industries sprang up to give
Second Wave civilization its defining stamp. At first there were coal,
textiles, and railroads, then steel, auto manufacture, aluminum,
chemicals, and appliances. Huge factory cities leaped into existence:
Lille and Manchester for textiles, Detroit for automobiles, Essen and —
later — Magnitogorsk for steel, and a hundred others as well.

From these industrial centers poured millions upon endless millions of
identical products — shirts, shoes, automobiles, watches, toys, soap,
shampoo, cameras, machine guns, and electric motors. The new
technology powered by the new energy system opened the door to
mass production.

THE VERMILION PAGODA

Mass production, however, was meaningless, without parallel changes
in the distribution system. In First Wave societies, goods were normally
made by handcraft methods. Products were created one at a time on a
custom basis. The same was largely true of distribution.

It is true that large, sophisticated trading companies had been built up
by merchants in the widening cracks of the old

THE ARCHITECTURE OF CIVILIZATION

feudal order in the West. These companies opened trade routes
around the world, organized convoys of ships and camel caravans.
They sold glass, paper, silk, nutmeg, tea, wine and wool, indigo and
mace.

Most of these products, however, reached consumers through tiny
stores or on the backs and wagons of peddlers who fanned out into the
countryside. Wretched communications and primitive transport
drastically circumscribed the market. These small-scale shopkeepers
and itinerant vendors could offer only the slenderest of inventories, and
often they were out of this or that item for months, even years, at a
time.

The Second Wave wrought changes in this creaking, overburdened
distribution system that were as radical, in their ways, as the more
publicized advances made in production. Railroads, highways, and
canals opened up the hinterlands, and with industrialism came
"palaces of trade** — the first department stores. Complex networks of
jobbers, wholesalers, commission agents, and manufacturers*
representatives sprang up, and in 1871 George Huntington Hartford,
whose first store hi New York was painted vermilion and had a
cashier's cage shaped like a Chinese pagoda, did for distribution what
Henry Ford later did for the factory. He advanced it to an entirely new
stage by creating the world's first mammoth chain-store system — The
Great Atlantic and Pacific Tea Company.

Custom distribution gave way to the mass distribution and mass
merchandising that became as familiar and central a component of all
industrial societies as the machine itself.

What we see, therefore, if we take these changes together, is a
transformation of what might be called the "techno-sphere." All
societies — primitive, agricultural, or industrial — use energy; they make
things; they distribute things. In all societies the energy system, the
production system, and the distribution system are interrelated parts of
something larger. This larger system is the techno-sphere, and it has a
characteristic form at each stage of social development

As the Second Wave swept across the planet, the agricultural techno-
sphere was replaced by an industrial techno-sphere: non-renewable
energies were directly plugged into a mass production system which,
in turn, spewed goods into a highly developed mass distribution
system.

28 THE THIRD WAVE

THE STREAMLINED FAMILY

This Second Wave techno-sphere, however, needed an equally
revolutionary "socio-sphere" to accommodate it. It needed radically
new forms of social organization.

Before the industrial revolution, for example, family forms varied from
place to place. But wherever agriculture held sway, people tended to
live in large, multigenerational households, with uncles, aunts, in-laws,
grandparents, or cousins all living under the same roof, all working
together as an economic production unit — from the "joint family" in
India to the "zadruga" in the Balkans and the "extended family" in
Western Europe. And the family was immobile — rooted to the soil.

As the Second Wave began to move across First Wave societies,
families felt the stress of change. Within each household the collision
of wave fronts took the form of conflict, attacks on patriarchal authority,
altered relationships between children and parents, new notions of
propriety. As economic production shifted from the field to the factory,
the family no longer worked together as a unit. To free workers for
factory labor, key functions of the family were parceled out to new,
specialized institutions. Education of the child was turned over to
schools. Care of the aged was turned over to poor-houses or old-age
homes or nursing homes. Above all, the new society required mobility.

It needed workers who would follow jobs from place to place.

Burdened with elderly relatives, the sick, the handicapped, and a large
brood of children, the extended family was anything but mobile.
Gradually and painfully, therefore, family structure began to change.
Tom apart by the migration to the cities, battered by economic storms,
families stripped themselves of unwanted relatives, grew smaller, more
mobile, and more suited to the needs of the new techno-sphere.

The so-called nuclear family — father, mother, and a few children, with
no encumbering relatives — became the standard, socially approved,
"modern" model in all industrial societies, whether capitalist or socialist.
Even in Japan, where ancestor worship gave the elderly an
exceptionally important role, the large, close-knit, multigenerational
household began to break down as the Second Wave advanced. More
and more nuclear units appeared. In short, the nuclear family became
an identifiable feature of all Second Wave societies,

THE ARCHITECTURE OF CIVILIZATION 29

marking them off from First Wave societies just as surely as fossil
fuels, steel mills, or chain stores.

THE COVERT CURRICULUM

As work shifted out of the fields and the home, moreover, children had
to be prepared for factory life. The early mine, mill, and factory owners
of industrializing England discovered, as Andrew Ure wrote in 1835,
that it was "nearly impossible to convert persons past the age of
puberty, whether drawn from rural or from handicraft occupations, into
useful factory hands." If young people could be prefitted to the
industrial system, it would vastly ease the problems of industrial
discipline later on. The result was another central structure of all
Second Wave societies: mass education.

Built on the factory model, mass education taught basic reading,
writing, and arithmetic, a bit of history and other subjects. This was the
"overt curriculum.' 1 But beneath it lay an invisible or "covert curriculum"
that was far more basic. It consisted — and still does in most industrial
nations — of three courses: one in punctuality, one in obedience, and
one in rote, repetitive work. Factory labor demanded workers who
showed up on time, especially assembly-line hands. It demanded
workers who would take orders from a management hierarchy without
questioning. And it demanded men and women prepared to slave
away at machines or in offices, performing brutally repetitious
operations.

Thus from the mid-nineteenth century on, as the Second Wave cut
across country after country, one found a relentless educational
progression: children started school at a younger and younger age, the
school year became longer and longer (in the United States it climbed
35 percent between 1878 and 1956), and the number of years of
compulsory schooling irresistibly increased.

Mass public education was clearly a humanizing step for-ward. As a
group of mechanics and workingmen in New York City declared in
1829, "Next to life and liberty, we consider education the greatest
blessing bestowed upon mankind." Nevertheless, Second Wave
schools machined generation after generation of young people into a
pliable, regimented work force of the type required by
electromechanical technology and the assembly line.

Taken together, the nuclear family and the factory -si

30 THE THIRD WAVE

school formed part of a single integrated system for the preparation of
young people for roles in industrial society. In this respect, too, Second
Wave societies, capitalist or communist, North or South, were all alike.

IMMORTAL BEINGS

In all Second Wave societies a third institution arose that extended the
social control of the first two. This was the invention known as the
corporation. Until then, the typical business enterprise had been owned
by an individual, a family, or a partnership. Corporations existed, but
were extremely rare.

Even as late as the American Revolution, according to business
historian Arthur Dewing, "no one could have concluded" that the
corporation — rather 4han the partnership or individual proprietorship —
would become the main organizational form. As recently as 1800 there
were only 335 corporations in the United States, most of them devoted
to such quasi-public activities as building canals or running turnpikes.

The rise of mass production changed all this. Second Wave
technologies required giant pools of capital — more than a single
individual or even a small group could provide. So long as proprietors
or partners risked their entire personal fortunes with every investment,
they were reluctant to sink their money in vast or risky ventures. To

encourage them, the concept of limited liability was introduced. If a
corporation collapsed, the investor stood to lose only the sum invested
and no more. This innovation opened the investment floodgates.

Moreover, the corporation was treated by the courts as an "immortal
being" — meaning it could outlive its original investors. This meant, in
turn, that it could make very long-range plans and undertake far bigger
projects than ever before.

By 1901 the world's first billion-dollar corporation — United States
Steel — appeared on the scene, a concentration of assets unimaginable
in any earlier period. By 1919 there were half a dozen such
behemoths. Indeed, large corporations became an in-built feature of
economic life in all the industrial nations, including socialist and
communist societies, where the form varied but the substance (in
terms of organization) remained very much the same. Together these
three — the nuclear family, the factory -style school, and the giant
corporation —

THE ARCHITECTURE OF CIVILIZATION 31

became the defining social institutions of all Second Wave societies.

And, throughout the Second Wave world — in Japan as well as in
Switzerland, Britain, Poland, the U.S., and the U.S.S.R. — most people
followed a standard life trajectory: reared in a nuclear family, they
moved en masse through fac torylike schools, then entered the service
of a large corporation, private or public. A key Second Wave institution
dominated each phase of the life-style.

THE MUSIC FACTORY

Around these three core institutions a host of other organizations
sprang up. Government ministries, sports clubs, churches, chambers
of commerce, trade unions, professional organizations, political parties,
libraries, ethnic associations, recreational groups, and thousands of
others bobbed up in the wake of the Second Wave, creating a
complicated organizational ecology with each group servicing,
coordinating, or counterbalancing another.

At first glance, the variety of these groups suggests randomness or
chaos. But a closer look reveals a hidden pattern. In one Second Wave
country after another, social inventors, believing the factory to be the
most advanced and efficient agency for production, tried to embody its
principles in other organizations as well. Schools, hospitals, prisons,
government bureaucracies, and other organizations thus took on many
of the characteristics of the factory — its division of labor, its hierarchical
structure and its metallic impersonality.

Even in the arts we find some of the principles of the factory. Instead of
working for a patron, as was customary during the long reign of
agricultural civilization, musicians, artists, composers, and writers were
increasingly thrown on the mercies of the marketplace. More and more
they turned out "products" for anonymous consumers. And as this shift
occurred in every Second Wave country, the very structure of artistic
production changed.

Music provides a striking example. As the Second Wave arrived,
concert halls began to crop up in London, Vienna, Paris, and
elsewhere. With them came the box office and the impresario — the
businessman who financed the production and then sold tickets to
culture consumers.

The more tickets he could sell, naturally, the more money
32

THE THIRD WAVE

he could make. Hence more and more seats were added. In turn,
however, larger concert halls required louder sounds — music that
could be clearly heard in the very last tier. The result was a shift from
chamber music to symphonic forms.

Says Curt Sachs in his authoritative History of Musical Instruments,
"The passage from an aristocratic to a democratic culture, in the
eighteenth century, replaced the small salons by the more and more
gigantic concert halls, which demanded greater volume." Since no
technology existed yet to make this possible, more and more
instruments and players were added to produce the necessary volume.
The result was the modern symphony orchestra, and it was for this
industrial institution that Beethoven, Mendelssohn, Schubert, and
Brahms wrote their magnificent symphonies.

The orchestra even mirrored certain features of the factory in its
internal structure. At first the symphony orchestra was leaderless, or
the leadership was casually passed around among the players. Later
the players, exactly like workers in a factory or bureaucratic office,
were divided into departments (instramental sections), each
contributing to the overall output (the music), each coordinated from
above by a manager (the conductor) or even, eventually, a straw boss
farther down the management hierarchy (the first violinist or the section
head). The institution sold its product to a mass market — eventually
adding phonograph records to its output. The music factory had been
born.

The history of the orchestra offers only one illustration of the way the
Second Wave socio-sphere arose, with its three core institutions and
thousands of varied organizations, all adapted to the needs and style
of the industrial techno-sphere. But a civilization is more than simply a
techno-sphere and a matching socio-sphere. All civilizations also
require an "info-sphere" for producing and distributing information, and
here, too, the changes brought by the Second Wave were remarkable.

THE PAPER BLIZZARD

All human groups, from primitive times to today, depend on face-to-
face, person-to-person communication. But systems were needed for
sending messages across time and space as well. The ancient
Persians are said to have set up towers or "call-posts," placing men
with shrill, loud voices atop them to

THE ARCHITECTURE OF CIVILIZATION 33

relay messages by shouting from one tower to the next. The Romans
operated an extensive messenger service called the cursus publicus.
Between 1305 and the early 1800's, the House of Taxis ran a form of
pony express service all over Europe. By 1628 it employed twenty
thousand men. Its couriers, clad in blue and silver uniforms,
crisscrossed the continent carrying messages between princes and
generals, merchants and money lenders.

During First Wave civilization all these channels were reserved for the
rich and powerful only. Ordinary people had no access to them. As the
historian Laurin Zilliacus states, even "attempts to send letters by other
means were looked upon with suspicion or . . . forbidden" by the
authorities. In short, while face-to-face information exchange was open
to all, the newer systems used for carrying imformation beyond the
confines of a family or a village were essentially closed and used for
purposes of social or political control. They were, in effect, weapons of
the elite.

The Second Wave, as it moved across country after country, smashed
this communications monopoly. This occurred not because the rich
and powerful grew suddenly altruistic but because Second Wave
technology and factory mass production required "mass-ive"
movements of information that the old channels simply could no longer
handle.

The information needed for economic production in primitive and First
Wave societies is comparatively simple and usually available from
someone near at hand. It is mostly oral or gestural hi form. Second
Wave economies, by contrast, required the tight coordination of work
done at many locations. Not only raw materials but great amounts of
information had to be produced and carefully distributed.

For this reason, as the Second Wave gained momentum every country
raced to build a postal service. The post'office was an invention quite
as imaginative and socially useful as the cotton gin or the spinning
jenny and, to an extent forgotten today, it elicited rhapsodic
enthusiasm. The American orator Edward Everett declared: "I am
compelled to regard the Post-office, next to Christianity, as the right
arm of our modern civilization."

For the post office provided the first wide open channel for industrial-
era communications. By 1837 the British Post Office was carrying not
merely messages for an elite but some 88 million pieces of mail a
year — an avalanche of commnm.., tions by the standards of the day.

By 1960, at about Hu-

34

THE THIRD WAVE

the industrial era peaked and the Third Wave began its surge, that
number had already climbed to 10 billion. That same year the U.S.

Post Office was distributing 355 pieces of domestic mail for every man,
woman, and child in the nation.*

The surge in postal messages that accompanied the industrial
revolution merely hints, however, at the real volume of information that
began to flow in the wake of the Second Wave. An even greater
number of messages poured through what might be called "micro-
postal systems" within large organizations. Memos are letters that
never reach the public communications channels. In 1955, as the
Second Wave crested in the United States, the Hoover Commission
peeked inside the files of three major corporations. It discovered,
respectively, thirty-four thousand, fifty-six thousand, and sixty-four
thousand documents and memos on file for each employee on the
payroll!

Nor could the mushrooming informational needs of industrial societies
be met in writing alone. Thus the telephone and telegraph were
invented hi the nineteenth century to carry then: share of the ever-
swelling communications load. By 1960 Americans were placing some
256 million phone calls per day — over 93 billion a year — and even the
most advanced telephone systems and networks in the world were
often overloaded.

All these were essentially systems for delivering messages from one
sender to one receiver at a time. But a society developing mass
production and mass consumption needed ways to send mass
messages, too — communications from one sender to many receivers
simultaneously. Unlike the preindus-trial employer, who could
personally visit each of his handful of employees in their own homes if
need be, the industrial employer could not communicate with his
thousands of workers on a one-by-one basis. Still less could the mass
merchandiser or distributor communicate with his customers one by
one. Second Wave society needed — and not surprisingly invented —
powerful means for sending the same message to many people at
once, cheaply, rapidly, and reliably. ,

Postal services could carry the same message to millions — but not
quickly. Telephones could carry messages quickly —

* The amount of mail provides a good, instant index to the level of
traditional industrialization in any country. For Second Wave societies,
the average hi 1960 was 141 pieces of mail per person. By contrast, in
First Wave societies the level was barely a tenth of that — twelve per
person per year in Malaysia or Ghana, four per year in Colombia.

THE ARCHITECTURE OF CIVILIZATION

35

but not to millions of people simultaneously. This gap came to be filled
by the mass media.

Today, of course, the mass circulation newspaper and magazine are
so standard a part of daily life in every one of the industrial nations that
they are taken for granted. Yet the rise of these publications on a
national level reflected the convergent development of many new
industrial technologies and social forms. Thus, writes Jean-Louis
Servan-Schreiber, they were made possible by the coming together of

"trains to transport the publications throughout a [European-size]
country in a single day; rotary presses capable of turning out dozens of
millions of copies in several hours; a network of telegraph and
telephones ... above all a public taught to read by compulsory
education, and industries needing to mass distribute their products." ,

In the mass media, from newspapers and radio to movies and
television, we find once again an embodiment of the basic principle of
the factory. All of them stamp identical messages into millions of
brains, just as the factory stamps out identical products for use in
millions of homes. Standardized, mass-manufactured "facts,"
counterparts of standardized, mass-manufactured products, flow from
a few concentrated image-factories out to millions of consumers.
Without this vast, powerful system for channeling information, industrial
civilization could not have taken form or functioned reliably.

Thus there sprang up in all industrial societies, capitalist and socialist
alike, an elaborate info-sphere — communication channels through
which individual and mass messages could be distributed as efficiently
as goods or raw materials. This info-sphere intertwined with and
serviced the techno-sphere and the socio-sphere, helping to integrate
economic production with private behavior.

Each of these spheres performed a key function in the larger system,
and could not have existed without the others. The techno-sphere
produced and allocated wealth; the socio-sphere, with its thousands of
interrelated organizations, allocated roles to individuals in the system.
And the info-sphere , allocated the information necessary to make the
entire system work. Together they formed the basic architecture of
society.

We see here in outline, therefore, the common structures of all Second
Wave nations — regardless of their cultural or climatic differences,
regardless of their ethnic and religious

36

THE THIRD WAVE

heritage, regardless of whether they call themselves capitalist or
communist.

These parallel structures, as basic in the Soviet Union and Hungary as
in West Germany, France, or Canada, set the limits within which
political, social, and cultural differences were expressed. They
emerged everywhere only after bitter political, cultural, and economic
battles between those who attempted to preserve the older First Wave
structures and those who recognized that only a new civilization could
solve the painful problems of the old.

The Second Wave brought with it a fantastic extension of human hope.
For the first time men and women dared to believe that poverty,
hunger, disease, and tyranny might be overthrown. Utopian writers and
philosophers, from Abbe Morelly and Robert Owen to Saint-Simon,
Fourier, Proudhon, Louis Blanc, Edward Bellamy, and scores of others,
saw in the emerging industrial civilization the potential for introducing

peace, harmony, employment for all, equality of wealth or of
opportunity, the end of privilege based on birth, the end of all those
conditions that seemed immutable or eternal during the hundreds of
thousands of years of primitive existence and the thousands of years
of agricultural civilization.

If today industrial civilization seems to us something less than
Utopian — if it appears, in fact, to be oppressive, dreary, ecologically
precarious, war-prone, and psychologically repressive — we need to
understand why. We will be able to answer this question only if we look
at the gigantic wedge that split the Second Wave psyche into two
warring parts.

THE INVISIBLE WEDGE

The Second Wave, like some nuclear chain reaction, violently split
apart two aspects of our lives that had always, until then, been one. In
so doing, it drove a giant invisible wedge into our economy, our
psyches, and even our sexual selves.

At one level, the industrial revolution created a mar-velously integrated
social system with its own distinctive technologies, its own social
institutions, and its own information channels — all plugged tightly into
each other. Yet, at another level, it ripped apart the underlying unity of
society, creating a way of life filled with economic tension, social
conflict, and psychological malaise. Only if we understand how this
invisible wedge has shaped our lives throughout the Second Wave era
can we appreciate the full impact of the Third Wave that is beginning to
reshape us today.

The two halves of human life that the Second Wave split apart were
production and consumption. We are accustomed, for example, to
think of ourselves as producers or consumers. This wasn't always true.
Until the industrial revolution, the vast bulk of all the food, goods, and
services produced by the human race was consumed by the producers
themselves, their families, or a tiny elite who managed to scrape off the
surplus for their own use.

In most agricultural societies the great majority of people were
peasants who huddled together in small, semi-isolated communities.
They lived on a subsistence diet, growing just barely enough to keep
themselves alive and their masters happy. Lacking the means for
storing food over long periods,

37

38

THE THIRD WAVE

lacking the roads necessary to transport their product to distant
markets, and well aware that any increase in output was likely to be
confiscated by the slave-owner or feudal lord, they also lacked any
great incentive to improve technology or increase production.

Commerce existed, of course. We know that small numbers of intrepid
merchants carried goods for thousands of miles by camel, wagon, or
boat We know that cities sprang up dependent on food from the
countryside. By 1519, when the Spaniards arrived in Mexico, they were
astonished to find thousands of people in Tlatelolco engaged in buying
and selling jewels, precious metals, slaves and sandals, cloth,
chocolate, ropes, skins, turkeys, vegetables, rabbits, dogs, and pottery
of a thousand kinds. The Fugger Newsletter, private dispatches
prepared for German bankers in the sixteenth and seventeenth
centuries, give colorful evidence of the scope of trade by that time. A
letter from Cochin, in India, describes in detail the trials of a European
merchant who arrived with five ships to buy pepper for transport to
Europe. "A pepper store is fine business," he explains, "but it requires
great zeal and perseverance." This merchant also shipped cloves,
nutmeg, flour, cinnamon, mace, and various drugs to the European
market.

Nevertheless, all this commerce represented only a trace element in
history, compared with the extent of production for immediate self-use
by the agricultural slave or serf. Even as late as the sixteenth century,
according to Fernand Braudel, whose historical research on the period
is unsurpassed, the entire Mediterranean region — from France and
Spain at one end to Turkey at the other — supported a population of
sixty to seventy million, of which 90 percent lived on the soil, producing
only a small amount of goods for trade. Writes Braudel, "60 percent or
perhaps 70 percent of the overall production of the Mediterranean
never entered the market economy." And if this was the case in the
Mediterranean region, what should we assume of Northern Europe,
where the rocky soil and long cold winters made it even more difficult
for peasants to extract a surplus from the soil?

It will help us understand the Third Wave if we conceive of the First
Wave economy, before the industrial revolution, as consisting of two
sectors. In Sector A, people produced for their own use. In Sector B,
they produced for trade or exchange. Sector A was huge; Sector B
was tiny. For most

THE INVISIBLE WEDGE

people, therefore, production and consumption wen- IM-...I into a
single life-giving function. So complete was HUM umiy that the Greeks,
the Romans, and the medieval I (mop- .m •< did not distinguish
between the two. They lacked even n w«>i.i for consumer. Throughout
the First Wave era only n liny fraction of the population was dependent
on the maikri; most people lived largely outside it. In the words of the hi
sic i-rian R. H. Tawney, "pecuniary transactions were a fringe on a
world of natural economy."

The Second Wave violently changed this situation. Instead of
essentially self-sufficient people and communities, it created for the
first time in history a situation in which the overwhelming bulk of all
food, goods, and services was destined for sale, barter, or exchange. It
virtually wiped out of existence goods produced for one's own
consumption — for use by the actual producer and his or her family —
and created a civilization in which almost no one, not even a farmer,

was self-sufficient any longer. Everyone became almost totally
dependent upon food, goods, or services produced by somebody else.

In short, industrialism broke the union of production and consumption,
and split the producer from the consumer. The fused economy of the
First Wave was transformed into the split economy of the Second
Wave.

THE MEANING OF THE MARKET

The consequences of this fission were momentous. Even now we
scarcely understand them. First, the marketplace — once a minor and
peripheral phenomenon — moved into the very vortex of life. The
economy became "marketized" And this happened in both capitalist
and socialist industrial economies.

Western economists tend to think of the market as a purely capitalist
fact of life and often use the term as though it were synonymous with
''profit economy." Yet from all we know of history, exchange — and
hence a marketplace — sprang up earlier than, and independently of,
profit. For the market, properly speaking, is nothing more than an
exchange network, a switchboard, as it were, through which goods or
services, like messages, are routed to their appropriate destinations. It
is not inherently capitalist. Such a switchboard

40

THE THIRD WAVE

is just as essential to a socialist industrial society as it is to profit-
motivated industrialism.*

In short, wherever the Second Wave struck and the purpose of
production shifted from use to exchange, there had to be a mechanism
through which that exchange could take place. There had to be a
market. But the market was not passive. The economic historian Karl
Polanyi has shown how the market, which was subordinated to the
social or religio-cul-tural goals of early societies, came to set the goals
of industrial societies. Most people were sucked into the money
system. Commercial values became central, economic growth (as
measured by the size of the market) became the primary goal of
governments, whether capitalist or socialist.

For the market was an expansive, self-reinforcing institution. Just as
the earliest division of labor had encouraged commerce in the first
place, now the very existence of a market or switchboard encouraged
a further division of labor and led to sharply increased productivity. A
self-amplifying process had been set in motion.

This explosive expansion of the market contributed to the fastest rise in
living standards the world had ever experienced.

In politics, however, Second Wave governments found themselves
increasingly torn by a new kind of conflict born of the split between
production and consumption. The Marxist emphasis on class struggle
has systematically obscured the larger, deeper conflict that arose

between the demands of producers (both workers and managers) for
higher wages, profits, and benefits and the counter-demand of
consumers

* The market as a switchboard must exist whether trade is based on
money or barter. It must exist whether or not profit is siphoned out of it,
whether prices follow supply and demand or are fixed by the state,
whether the system is planned or not, whether the means of production
are private or public. It must exist even in a hypothetical economy of
self-managed industrial firms in which workers set their own wages
high enough to eliminate profit as a category.

So overlooked is this essential fact, so closely has the market been
identified with only one of its many variants (the profit-based, private-
property model, in which prices reflect supply and demand), that there
is not even a word in the conventional vocabulary of economics to
express the multiplicity of its forms.

Throughout these pages, the term "market" is used in its full generic
sense, rather than hi the customary restrictive way. Semantics aside,
however, the basic point remains: wherever producer and consumer
are divorced, some mechanism is needed to mediate between them.
This mechanism, whatever its form, is what I call the market.

THE INVISIBLE WEDGE

(including the very same people) for lower prices. The seesaw of
economic policy rocked on this fulcrum.

The growth of the consumer movement in the United States, the recent
uprisings in Poland against government -decreed price hikes, the
endlessly raging debate in Britain about prices and incomes policy, the
deadly ideological (struggles in the Soviet Union over whether heavy
industry or consumer goods should receive first priority, are all aspects
of the profound conflict engendered in any society, capitalist or
socialist, by the split between production and consumption.

Not only politics but culture, too, was shaped by this cleavage, for it
also produced the most money-minded, grasping, commercialized, and
calculating civilization in history. One need scarcely be a Marxist to
agree with The Communist Manifesto's famous accusation that the
new society "left remaining no other nexus between man and man than
naked self-interest, than callous 'cash payment.'" Personal
relationships, family bonds, love, friendship, neighborly and community
ties all became tinctured or corrupted by commercial self-interest.

Correct in identifying this dehumanization of interpersonal bonds, Marx
was incorrect, however, in attributing it to capitalism. He wrote, of
course, at a time when the only industrial society he could observe was
capitalist hi form. Today, after more than half a century of experience
with industrial societies based on socialism, or at least state socialism,
we know that aggressive acquisitiveness, commercial corruption, and
the reduction of human relationships to coldly economic terms are no
monopoly of the profit system.

For the obsessive concern with money, goods, and things is A
reflection not of capitalism or socialism, but of industrial-Jnm. It is a
reflection of the central role of the marketplace in all societies hi which
production is divorced from consumption, in which everyone is
dependent upon the marketplace rather than on his or her own
productive skills for the necessities of life.

In such a society, irrespective of its political structure, not only products
are bought, sold, traded, and exchanged, but labor, ideas, art, and
souls as well. The Western purchasing agent who pockets an illegal
commission is not so different from the Soviet editor who takes
kickbacks from authors in return for approving their works for
publication, or the plumber who demands a bottle of vodka to do what
he is paid to do. The French or British or American artist who

42 THE THIRD WAVE

writes or paints for money alone is not so different from the Polish,
Czech, or Soviet novelist, painter, or playwright who sells his creative
freedom for such economic perquisites as a dacha, bonuses, access to
a new car or otherwise unobtainable goods.

Such corruption is inherent in the divorce of production from
consumption. The very need for a market or switchboard to reconnect
consumer and producer, to move goods from producer to consumer,
necessarily places those who control the market in a position of
inordinate power — regardless of the rhetoric they use to justify that
power.

This divorce of production from consumption, which became a defining
feature of all industrial or Second Wave societies, even affected our
psyches and our assumptions about personality. Behavior came to be
seen as a set of transactions. Instead of a society based on friendship,
kinship, or tribal or feudal allegiance, there arose in the wake of the
Second Wave a civilization based on contractual ties, actual or implied.
Even husbands and wives today speak of marital contracts.

The cleavage between these two roles — producer and consumer —
created at the same time a dual personality. The very same person
who (as a producer) was taught by family, school, and boss to defer
gratification, to be disciplined, controlled, restrained, obedient, to be a
team player, was simultaneously taught (as a consumer) to seek
instant gratification, to be hedonistic rather than calculating, to
abandon discipline, to pursue individualistic pleasure — in short, to be a
totally different kind of person. In the West especially, the full firepower
of advertising was trained on the consumer, urging her or him to
borrow, to buy on impulse, to "Fly now, pay later," and, in so doing, to
perform a -patriotic service by keeping the wheels of the economy
turning.

THE SEXUAL SPLIT

Finally, the same giant wedge that split producer from consumer in
Second Wave societies also split work into two kinds. This had an
enormous impact on family life, sexual roles, and on our inner lives as
individuals.

One of the most common sexual stereotypes in industrial society
defines men as "objective" in orientation, and women as "subjective." If
there is a kernel of truth here, it probably

THE INVISIBLE WEDGE

43

lies not in some fixed biological reality but in the psychological effects
of the invisible wedge.

In First Wave societies most work was performed in the fields or in the
home, with the entire household toiling together as an economic unit
and with most production destined for consumption within the village or
manor. Work life and home life were fused and intermingled. And since
each village was largely self-sufficient, the success of the peasants in
one place was not dependent upon what happened in another. Even
within the production unit most workers performed a variety of tasks,
swapping and shifting roles as demanded by the season, by sickness,
or by choice. The pre-industrial division of labor was very primitive. As
a result, work in First Wave agricultural societies was characterized by
low levels of interdependency.

The Second Wave, washing across Britain, France, Germany, and
other countries, shifted work from field and home to factory, and
introduced a much higher level of interdependency. Work now
demanded collective effort, division of labor, coordination, the
integration of many different skills. Its success depended upon the
carefully scheduled cooperative behavior of thousands of far-flung
people, many of whom never laid eyes on one another. The failure of a
major steel mill or glass factory to deliver needed supplies to an auto
plant could, under certain circumstances, send repercussions
throughout a whole industry or regional economy.

The collision of low- and high-interdependency work produced severe
conflict over roles, responsibilities, and rewards. The early factory
owners, for example, complained that their workers were
irresponsible — that they cared little about the efficiency of the factory,
that they went fishing when most needed, engaged hi horseplay, or
turned up drunk. In- fact, most of the early industrial workers were rural
folk who were accustomed to low interdependency, and had little or no
understanding of their own role in the overall production process or of
the failures, breakdowns, and malfunctions occasioned by their
"irresponsibility." Moreover, since most of them earned pitiful wages,
they had little incentive to care.

In the clash between these two work systems, the new forms of work
seemed to triumph. More and more production was transferred to the
factory and office. The countryside was stripped of population. Millions
of workers became part of high-interdependence networks. Second
Wave work

44

THE THIRD WAVE

overshadowed the old backward form associated with the First Wave.

This victory of interdependence over self-sufficiency, however, was
never fully consummated. In one place the older form of work
stubbornly held on. This place was the home.

Each home remained a decentralized unit engaged in biological
reproduction, in child-rearing, and in cultural transmission. If one family
failed to reproduce, or did a poor job of rearing its children and
preparing them for life in the work system, its failures did not
necessarily endanger the accomplishment of those tasks by the family
next door. Housework remained, in other words, a low-
interdependency activity.

The housewife continued, as always, to perform a set of crucial
economic functions. She "produced." But she produced for Sector A —
for the use of her own family — not for the market.

As the husband, by and large, marched off to do the direct economic
work, the wife generally stayed behind to do the indirect economic
work. The man took responsibility for the historically more advanced
form of work; the woman was left behind to take care of the older,
more backward form of work. He moved, as it were, into the future; she
remained in the past.

This division produced a split in personality and inner life. The public or
collective nature of factory and office, the need for coordination and
integration, brought with it an emphasis on objective analysis and
objective relationships. Men, prepared from boyhood for their role in
the shop, where they would move in a world of interdependencies,
were encouraged to become "objective." Women, prepared from birth
for the tasks of reproduction, child-rearing, and household drudgery,
performed to a considerable degree in social isolation, were taught to
be "subjective" — and were frequently regarded as incapable of the kind
of rational, analytic thought that supposedly went with objectivity.

Not surprisingly, women who did leave the relative isolation of the
household to engage in interdependent production were often accused
of having been defeminized, of having grown cold, tough, and —
objective.

Sexual differences and sex role stereotypes, moreover, were
sharpened by the misleading identification of men with production and
women with consumption, even though men also consumed and
women also produced. In short, while women

THE INVISIBLE WEDGE 48

were oppressed long before the Second Wave began to roll across the
earth, the modern "battle of the sexes" can be traced in large measure
to the conflict between two work-styles, and beyond that to the divorce
of production and con sumption. The split economy deepened the
sexual split as well.

What we have seen so far, therefore, is that once the invisible wedge
was hammered into place, separating producer from consumer, a
number of profound changes followed: A market had to be formed or
expanded to connect the two; new political and social conflicts sprang
up; new sexual roles were defined. But the split implied far more than
this. It also meant that all Second Wave societies would have to
operate in similar fashion — that they would have to meet certain basic
requirements. Whether the object of production was profit or not,
whether the "means of production" were public or private, whether the
market was "free" or "planned," whether the rhetoric was capitalist or
socialist made no difference.

So long as production was intended for exchange, instead of use, so
long as it had to flow through the economic switchboard or market,
certain Second Wave principles had to be followed.

Once these principles are identified, the hidden dynamics of all
industrial societies are laid bare. Moreover, we can anticipate how
Second Wave people typically think. For these principles added up to
the basic rules, the behavioral code book, of Second Wave civilization.

BREAKING THE CODE

Every civilization has a hidden code — a set of rules or principles that
run through all its activities like a repeated design. As industrialism
pushed across the planet, its unique hidden design became visible. It
consisted of a set of six interrelated principles that programmed the
behavior of millions. Growing naturally out of the divorce of production
and consumption, these principles affected every aspect of life from
sex and sports to work and war.

Much of the angry conflict in our schools, businesses, and
governments today actually centers on these half-dozen principles, as
Second Wave people instinctively apply and defend them and Third
Wave people challenge and attack them. But that is getting ahead of
the story.

STANDARDIZATION

The most familiar of these Second Wave principles is standardization.
Everyone knows that industrial societies turn out millions of identical
products. Fewer people have stopped to notice, however, that once the
market became important, we did more than simply standardize Coca-
Cola bottles, light bulbs, and auto transmissions. We applied the same
principle to many other things. Among the first to grasp the importance
of this idea was Theodore Vail who, at the turn of the century, built the
American Telephone & Telegram Company into a giant*

*Not to be confused with the multinational ITT, the International
Telephone & Telegraph Corporation.

46

BREAKING THE CODE 47

Working as a railway postal clerk in the late 1860's, Vail had noticed
that no two letters necessarily went to their destinations via the same
route. Sacks of mail traveled back and forth, often taking weeks or
months to reach their destinations. Vail introduced the idea of
standardized routing — all letters going to the same place would go the
same way — and helped revolutionize the post office. When he later
formed AT&T, he set out to place an identical telephone in every
American home.

Vail standardized not only the telephone handset and all its
components but AT&Ts business procedures and administration as
well. In a 1908 advertisement he justified his swallowing up small
telephone companies by arguing for "a clearing-house of
standardization" that would ensure economy in "construction of
equipment, lines and conduits, as well as hi operating methods and
legal work," not to mention "a uniform system of operating and
accounting." What Vail recognized is that to succeed in the Second
Wave environment, "software" — i.e., procedures and administrative
routines — had to be standardized along with hardware.

Vail was only one of the Great Standardizes who shaped industrial
society. Another was Frederick Winslow Taylor, a machinist turned
crusader, who believed that work could be made scientific by
standardizing the steps each worker performed. In the early decades
of this century Taylor decided that there was one best (standard) way
to perform each job, one best (standard) tool to perform it with, and a
stipulated (standard) tune hi which to complete it.

Armed with this philosophy, he became the world's leading
management guru. In his time, and later, he was compared with Freud,
Marx, and Franklin. Nor were capitalist employers, eager to squeeze
the last ounce of productivity from their workers, alone in their
admiration for Taylorism, with its efficiency experts, piece-work
schemes, and rate-busters. Communists shared their enthusiasm.
Indeed, Lenin urged that Taylor's methods be adapted for use in
socialist production. An industrializer first and a Communist second,
Lenin, too, was a zealous believer hi standardization.

In Second Wave societies, hiring procedures as well as work were
increasingly standardized. Standardized tests were used to identify
and weed out the supposedly unfit, especially in the civil service. Pay
scales were Standardized throughout whole industries, along with
fringe benefits, lunch hours, holidays, and grievance procedures. To
prepare youth for the job

48

THE THIRD WAVE

market, educators designed standardized curricula. Men like Binet and
Terman devised standardized intelligence tests. School grading
policies, admission procedures, and accreditation rules were similarly
standardized. The multiple-choice test came into its own.

The mass media, meanwhile, disseminated standardizing imagery, so
that millions read the same advertisements, the same news, the same

short stories. The repression of minority languages by central
governments, combined with the influence of mass communications,
led to the near disappearance of local and regional dialects or even
whole languages, such as Welsh and Alsatian. "Standard" American,
English, French, or, for that matter, Russian, supplanted "nonstan-
dard" languages. Different parts of the country began to look alike, as
identical gas stations, billboards, and houses cropped up everywhere.
The principle of standardization ran through every aspect of daily life.

At an even deeper level, industrial civilization needed standardized
weights and measures. It is no accident that one of the first acts of the
French Revolution, which ushered the age of industrialism into France,
was an attempt to replace the crazy-quilt patchwork of measuring
units, common in preindustrial Europe, with the metric system and a
new calendar. Uniform measures were spread through much of the
world by the Second Wave.

Moreover, if mass production required the standardization of
machines, products, and processes, the ever-expanding market
demanded a corresponding standardization of money, and even
prices. Historically, money had been issued by banks and private
individuals as well as by kings. Even as late as the nineteenth century
privately minted money was still in use in parts of the United States,
and the practice lasted until 1935 hi Canada. Gradually, however,
industrializing nations suppressed all nongovernmental currencies and
managed to impose a single standard currency in their place.

Until the nineteenth century, moreover, it was still common for buyers
and sellers hi industrial countries to haggle over every sale in the time-
honored fashion of a Cairo bazaar. In 1825 a young Northern Irish
immigrant named A. T. Stewart arrived in New York, opened a dry-
goods store, and shocked customers and competitors alike by
introducing a fixed price for every item. This one-price policy — price
standardization — made Stewart one of the merchant princes of his

BREAKING THE CODE

49

era and cleared away one of the key obstacles to the development of
mass distribution.

Whatever their other disagreements, advanced Second Wave thinkers
shared the conviction that standardization was efficient. At many
levels, therefore, the Second Wave brought a flattening out of
differences through a relentless application of the principle of
standardization.

SPECIALIZATION

A second great principle ran through all Second Wave societies:
specialization. For the more the Second Wave eliminated diversity in
language, leisure, and life-style, the more it needed diversity in the
sphere of work. Accelerating the division of labor, the Second Wave
replaced the casual jack-of-all-work peasant with the narrow, purse-

lipped specialist and the worker who did only one task, Taylor-fashion,
over and over again.

As early as 1720 a British report on The Advantages of the East India
Trade made the point that specialization could get jobs done with "less
loss of time and labour." In 1776 Adam Smith opened The Wealth of
Nations with the ringing assertion that "the greatest improvement in the
productive powers of labour . . . seem[s] to have been the effects of the
division of labour."

Smith, in a classic passage, described the manufacture of a pin. A
single old-style workman, performing all the necessary operations by
himself, he wrote, could turn out only a handful of pins each day — no
more than twenty and perhaps not oven one. By contrast, Smith
described a "manufactory" he Inul visited in which the eighteen
different operations required to make a pin were carried out by ten
specialized workers, each performing only one or a few steps.

Together they were able to produce more than forty-eight thousand
pins per day-over forty-eight hundred per worker.

By the nineteenth century, as more and more work shifted into the
factory, the pin story was repeated again and again on an even-larger
scale. And the human costs of specialization escalated accordingly.
Critics of industrialism charged that highly specialized repetitive labor
progressively dehumanized the worker.

By the time Henry Ford started manufacturing Model Ts in 1908 it took
not eighteen different operations to complete

50

THE THIRD WAVE

a unit but 7,882. In his autobiography, Ford noted that of these 7,882
specialized jobs, 949 required "strong, able-bodied, and practically
physically perfect men," 3,338 needed men of merely "ordinary"
physical strength, most of the rest could be performed by "women or
older children," and, he continued coolly, "we found that 670 could be
filled by legless men, 2,637 by one-legged men, two by armless men,
715 by one-armed men and 10 by blind men." In short, the specialized
job required not a whole person, but only a part. No more vivid
evidence that overspecialization can be brutalizing has ever been
adduced.

A practice which critics attributed to capitalism, however, became an
inbuilt feature of socialism as well. For the extreme specialization of
labor that was common to all Second Wave societies had its roots in
the divorce of production from consumption. The U.S.S.R., Poland,

East Germany, or Hungary can no more run their factories today
without elaborate specialization than can Japan or the United States —
whose Department of Labor in 1977 published a list of twenty thousand
identifiably different occupations.

In both capitalist and socialist industrial states, moreover,
specialization was accompanied by a rising tide of profession-alization.
Whenever the opportunity arose for some group of specialists to

monopolize esoteric knowledge and keep newcomers out of their field,
professions emerged. As the Second Wave advanced, the market
intervened between a knowledge-holder and a client, dividing them
sharply into producer and consumer. Thus, health in Second Wave
societies came to be seen as a product provided by a doctor and a
health-delivery bureaucracy, rather than a result of intelligent self-care
(production for use) by the patient. Education was supposedly
''produced'' by the teacher in the school and "consumed" by the
student.

All sorts of occupational groups from librarians to salesmen began
clamoring for the right to call themselves professionals — and for the
power to set standards, prices, and conditions of entry into their
specialties. By now, according to Michael Pertschuk, Chairman of the
U.S. Federal Trade Commission, "Our culture is dominated by
professionals who call us 'clients' and tell us of our 'needs.'"

In Second Wave societies even political agitation was conceived of as
a profession. Thus Lenin argued that the masses could not bring about
a revolution without professional help. What was needed, he asserted,
was an "organiza-

BREAKING THE CODE

51

tion of revolutionaries" limited in membership to "people whose
profession is that of a revolutionary."

Among communists, capitalists, executives, educators, priests, and
politicians, the Second Wave produced a common mentality and a
drive toward an ever more refined division of labor. Like Prince Albert
at the great Crystal Palace Exhibition of 1851, they believed that
specialization was "the moving power of civilization." The Great
Standardizes and The Great Specializes marched hand in hand.

SYNCHRONIZATION

The widening split between production and consumption also forced a
change in the way Second Wave people dealt with time. In a market-
dependent system, whether the market is planned or free, time equals
money. Expensive machines cannot be allowed to sit idly, and they
operate at rhythms of their own. This produced the third principle of
industrial civilization: synchronization.

Even in the earliest societies work had to be carefully organized in
time. Warriors often had to work in unison to trap their prey. Fishermen
had to coordinate then* efforts in rowing or hauling hi the nets. George
Thomson, many years ago, showed how various work songs reflected
the requirements of labor. For the oarsmen, time was marked by a
simple two-syllable sound like O— op! The second syllable indicated
the moment of maximum exertion while the first was the time for
preparation. Hauling a boat, he noted, was heavier work than rowing,
"so the moments of exertion are spaced in longer intervals," and we
see, as in the Irish hauling cry Ho-H-ho-hupi, a longer preparation for
the final effort.

Until the Second Wave brought in machinery and silenced* the songs
of the worker, most such synchronization of effort was organic or
natural. It flowed from the rhythm of the seasons and from biological
processes, from the earth's rotation and the beat of the heart. Second
Wave societies, by contrast, moved to the beat of the machine.

As factory production spread, the high cost of machinery and the close
interdependence of labor required a much more refined
synchronization. If one group of workers in a plant was late in
completing a task, others down the line would be further delayed. Thus
punctuality, never very important in agricultural communities, became
a social necessity, and

52

THE THIRD WAVE

clocks and watches began to proliferate. By the 1790's they were
already becoming commonplace hi Britain. Their diffusion came, in the
words of British historian E. P. Thompson, "at the exact moment when
the industrial revolution demanded a greater synchronization of labor."

Not by coincidence, children hi industrial cultures were taught to tell
time at an early age. Pupils were conditioned to arrive at school when
the bell rang so that later on they would arrive reliably at the factory or
office when the whistle blew. Jobs were timed and split into sequences
measured hi fractions of a second. "Nine-to-five" formed the temporal
frame for millions of workers.

Nor was it only working life that was synchronized. In all Second Wave
societies, regardless of profit or political considerations, social life, too,
became clock-driven and adapted to machine requirements. Certain
hours were set aside for leisure. Standard-length vacations, holidays,
or coffee breaks were interspersed with the work schedules.

Children began and ended the school year at uniform times. Hospitals
woke all their patients for breakfast simultaneously. Transport systems
staggered under rush hours. Broadcasters fitted entertainment into
special time slots — "prime time," for example. Every business had its
own peak hours or seasons, synchronized with those of its suppliers
and distributors. Specialists in synchronization arose — from factory
expediters and schedulers to traffic police and tune-study men.

By contrast, some people resisted the new industrial time system. And
here again sexual differences arose. Those who participated hi Second
Wave work — chiefly men — became the most conditioned to clock-time.

Second Wave husbands continually complained that their wives kept
them waiting, that they had no regard for time, that it took them forever
to dress, that they were always late for appointments. Women,
primarily engaged in noninterde-pendent housework, worked to less
mechanical rhythms. For similar reasons urban populations tended to
look down upon rural folk as slow and unreliable. "They don't show up
on time! You never know whether they'll keep an appointment." Such
complaints could be traced directly to the difference between Second

Wave work based on heightened interdependence and the First Wave
work centered in the field and the home.

BREAKING THE CODE

Once the Second Wave became dominant even the most intimate
routines of life were locked into the industrial pacing system. In the
United States and the Soviet Union, in Singapore and Sweden, in
France and Denmark, Germany and Japan, families arose as one, ate
at the same time, commuted, worked, returned home, went to bed,
slept, and even made love more or less in unison as the entire
civilization, in addition to standardization and specialization, applied
the principle of synchronization.

CONCENTRATION

The rise of the market gave birth to yet another rule of Second Wave
civilization — the principle of concentration.

First Wave societies lived off widely dispersed sources of energy.
Second Wave societies became almost totally dependent on highly
concentrated deposits of fossil fuel.

But the Second Wave concentrated more than energy. It also
concentrated population, stripping the countryside of people and
relocating them in giant urban centers. It even concentrated work.

While work in First Wave societies took place everywhere — in the
home, hi the village, in the fields — much of the work in Second Wave
societies was done in factories where thousands of laborers were
drawn together under a single roof.

Nor was it only energy and work that were concentrated. Writing in the
British social science journal New Society, Stan Cohen has pointed out
that, with minor exceptions, prior to industrialism "the poor were kept at
home or with relatives; criminals were fined, whipped or banished from
one settlement to another; the insane were kept hi their families, or
supported by the community, if they were poor." All thes.e groups
were, hi short, dispersed throughout the community.

Industrialism revolutionized the situation. The early nineteenth century,
in fact, has been called the time of the Great Incarcerations — when
criminals were rounded up and concentrated in prisons, the mentally ill
rounded up and concentrated in "lunatic asylums," and children
rounded up and concentrated in schools, exactly as workers were
concentrated in factories.

Concentration occurred also in capital flows, so that Second Wave
civilization gave birth to the giant corporation and, beyond that, the
trust or monopoly. By the mid-1960s, the

54 THE THIRD WAVE

Big Three auto companies in the United States produced 94 percent of
all American cars. In Germany four coca panics — Volkswagen,
Daimler-Benz, Opel (GM), and Ford-Werke — together accounted for 91
percent of production. In France, Renault, Citroen, Simca, and

Peugeot turned out virtually 100 percent. In Italy, Fiat alone built 90
percent of all autos.

Similarly, in the United States 80 percent or more of aluminum, beer,
cigarettes, and breakfast foods were produced by four or five
companies in each field. In Germany 92 percent of all the plasterboard
and dyes, 98 percent of photo film, 91 percent of industrial sewing
machines, were produced by four or fewer companies in each
respective category. The list of highly concentrated industries goes on
and on.

Socialist managers were also convinced that concentration of
production was "efficient." Indeed, many Marxist ideologues in the
capitalist countries welcomed the growing concentration of industry in
capitalist countries as a necessary step along the way to the ultimate
total concentration of industry under state auspices. Lenin spoke of the
"conversion of all citizens into workers and employees of one huge
'syndicate' — the whole state." Half a century later the Soviet economist
N. Lelyukhina, writing in Voprosy Ekonomiki could report that "the
USSR possesses the most concentrated industry in the world."

Whether in energy, population, work, education, or economic
organization, the concentrative principle of Second Wave civilization
ran deep — deeper, indeed, than any ideological differences between
Moscow and the West.

MAXIMIZATION

The split-up of production and consumption also created, in all Second
Wave societies, a case of obsessive "macro-philia" — a kind of Texan
infatuation with bigness and growth. If it were true that long production
runs in the factory would produce lower unit costs, then, by analogy,
increases in scale would produce economies in other activities as well.
"Big" became synonymous with "efficient," and maximization became
the fifth key principle.

Cities and nations would boast of having the tallest skyscraper, the
largest dam, or the world's biggest miniature golf

BREAKING THE CODE 55

course. Since bigness, moreover, was the result of growth, most
industrial governments, corporations, and other organizations pursued
the ideal of growth frenetically.

Japanese workers and managers at the Matsushita Electric Company
would jointly chorus each day:

... Doing our best to promote production,

Sending our goods to the people of the world,

Endlessly and continuously.

Like water gushing from a fountain.

Grow, industry, Grow, Grow, Grow!

Harmony and sincerity!

Matsushita Electric!

In 1960, as the United States completed the stage of traditional
industrialism and began to feel the first effects of the Third Wave of
change, its fifty largest industrial corporations had grown to employ an
average of 80,000 workers each. General Motors alone employed
595,000, and one utility, Vail's AT&T, employed 736,000 women and
men. This meant, at an average household size of 3.3 that year, that
well over 2,000,000 people were dependent upon paychecks from this
one company alone — a group equal to one half the population of the
entire country when Hamilton and Washington were stitching it into a
nation. (Since then AT&T has swollen to even more gargantuan
proportions. By 1970 it employed 956,000 — having added 136,000
employees to its work force in a single twelve-month period.)

AT&T was a special case and, of course, Americans were peculiarly
addicted to bigness. But macrophilia was no monopoly of ib.e
Americans. In France in 1963 fourteen hundred firms — a mere V* of 1
percent of all companies — employed fully 38 percent of the work force.
Governments in Germany, Britain, and other countries actively
encouraged mergers to create even larger companies, in the belief that
larger scale would help them compete against the American giants.

Nor was this scale maximization simply a reflection of profit
maximization. Marx had associated the "increasing scale of industrial
establishments" with the "wider development of their material powers.'*
Lenin, in turn, argued that "huge enterprises, trusts and syndicates had
brought the mass production technique to its highest level of
development." His first order of business after the Soviet revolution
was to con-

56

THE THIRD WAVE

solidate Russian economic life into the smallest possible number of the
largest possible units. Stalin pushed even harder for maximum scale
and built vast new projects — the steel complex at Magnitogorsk,
another at Zaporozhstal, the Balkhash copper smelting plant, the
tractor plants at Kharkov and Stalingrad. He would ask how large a
given American installation was, then order construction of an even
larger one.

In The Cult of Bigness in Soviet Economic Planning, Dr. Leon M.
Herman writes: "In various parts of the USSR, hi fact, local politicians
became involved in a race for attracting the ‘world's largest projects.'"
By 1938 the Communist party warned against "gigantomania," but with
little effect Even today Soviet and East European communist leaders
are victims of what Herman calls "the addiction to bigness.*'

Such faith in sheer scale derived from narrow Second Wave
assumptions about the nature of "efficiency." But the macrophilia of

industrialism went beyond mere plants. It was reflected in the
aggregation of many different kinds of data into the statistical tool
known as Gross National Product, which measured the "scale'* of an
economy by totting up the value of goods and services produced in it
This tool of the Second Wave economists had many failings. From the
point of view of GNP it didn't matter whether the output was in the form
of food, education and health services, or munitions. The hiring of a
crew to build a home or to demolish one both added to GNP, even
though one activity added to the stock of housing and the other
subtracted from it GNP also, because it measured only market activity
or exchanges, relegated to insignificance a whole vital sector of the
economy based on unpaid production — child-rearing and housework,
for example.

Despite these shortcomings, Second Wave governments around the
world entered into a blind race to increase GNP at all costs,
maximizing "growth" even at the risk of ecological and social disaster.
The macrophiliac principle was built so deeply into the industrial
mentality that nothing seemed more reasonable. Maximization went
along with standardization, specialization, and the other industrial
ground rules.

CENTRALIZATION

Finally, all industrial nations developed centralization into a fine art.
While the Church and many First Wave rulers

BREAKING THE CODE

57

knew perfectly well how to centralize power, they dealt with far less
complex societies and were crude amateurs by contrast with the men
and women who centralized industrial societies from the ground floor
up.

All complicated societies require a mixture of both centralized and
decentralized operations. But the shift from a basically decentralized
First Wave economy, with each locality largely responsible for
producing its own necessities, to the integrated national economies of
the Second Wave led to totally new methods for centralizing power.
These came into play at the level of individual companies, industries,
and the economy as a whole.

The early railroads provide a classic illustration. Compared with other
businesses they were the giants of their day. In the United States in
1850 only forty-one factories had a capitalization of 250 thousand
dollars or more. By contrast, the New York Central Railroad as early as
1860 boasted a capitalization of 30 million dollars. To run such a
gargantuan enterprise, new management methods were needed.

The early railroad managers, therefore, like the managers of titte space
program in our own era, had to invent new techniques. They
standardized technologies, fares, and schedules. They synchronized
operations over hundreds of miles. They created specialized new
occupations and departments. They concentrated capital, energy, and

people. They fought to maximize the scale of then* networks. And to
accomplish all this they created new forms of organization based on
centralization of information and command.

Employees were divided into "line" and "staff." Daily reports were
initiated to provide data on car movements, loadings, damages, lost
freight, repairs, engine miles, et cetera. All this information flowed up a
centralized chain of command until it reached the general
superintendent who made the decisions and sent orders down the line.

The railroads, as business historian Alfred D. Chandler, Jr., has
shown, soon became a model for other large organizations, and
centralized management came to be regarded as an advanced,
sophisticated tool in all the Second Wave nations.

In politics, too, the Second Wave encouraged centralization. In the
United States, as early as the late 1780's, this was illustrated by the
battle to replace the loose, decentralist Articles of Confederation with a
more centralist Constitution. Generally the First Wave rural interests
resisted the concentration of power in the national government, while
Second

58 THE THIRD WAVE

Wave commercial interests led by Hamilton argued, in The Federalist
and elsewhere, that a strong central government was essential not
only for military and foreign policy reasons but for economic growth.

The resultant Constitution of 1787 was an ingenious compromise.
Because First Wave forces were still strong, the Constitution reserved
important powers to the states rather than the central government. To
prevent overly strong central power it also called for a unique
separation of legislative, executive, and judicial powers. But the
Constitution also contained elastic language that would eventually
permit the federal government to extend its reach drastically.

As industrialization pushed the political system toward greater
centralization, the government in Washington took on an increasing
number of powers and responsibilities and monopolized more and
more decision-making at the center. Within the federal government,
meanwhile, power shifted from Congress and the courts to the most
centralist of three branches — the Executive. By the Nixon years,
historian Arthur Schlesinger (himself once an ardent centralizer) was
attacking the "imperial presidency."

The pressures toward political centralization were even stronger
outside the United States. A quick look at Sweden, Japan, Britain, or
France is enough to make the U.S. system seem decentralized by
comparison. Jean-Franc. ois Revel, au* thor of Without Marx or Jesus,
makes this point in describing how governments respond to political
protest: "When a demonstration is forbidden in France, there is never
any doubt about the source of the prohibition. If it is a question of a
major political demonstration, it is the [central] government," he says.
"In the United States, however, when a demonstration is forbidden, the

first question everyone asks is, 'By whom?'" Revel points out that it is
usually some local authority operating autonomously.

The extremes of political centralization were found, of course, in the
Marxist industrial nations. In 1850 Marx called for a "decisive
centralization of power in the hands of the state." Engels, like Hamilton
before him, attacked decentralized confederations as "an enormous
step backward." Later on the Soviets, eager to accelerate
industrialization, proceeded to construct the most highly centralized
political and economic structure of all, submitting even the smallest of
production decisions to the control of central planners.

BREAKING THE CODE

The gradual centralization of a once decentralized economy was
aided, moreover, by a crucial invention whose very name reveals its
purpose: the central bank.

In 1694, at the very dawn of the industrial age, while Newcomen was
still tinkering with the steam engine, William Paterson organized the
Bank of England — which became a template for similar centralist
institutions hi all Second Wave countries. No country could complete
its Second Wave phase without constructing its own equivalent of this
machine for the central control of money and credit.

Paterson's bank sold government bonds; it issued government-backed
currency; it later began to regulate the lending practices of other
banks. Eventually it took on the primary function of all central banks
today: central control of the money supply. In 1800 the Banque de
France was formed for similar purposes. This was followed by the
formation of the Reichsbank in 1875.

In the United States the collision between First and Second Wave
forces led to a major battle over central banking shortly after the
adoption of the constitution. Hamilton, the most brilliant advocate of
Second Wave policies, argued for a national bank on the English
model. The South and the frontier West, still wedded to agriculture,
opposed him. Nevertheless, with the support of the industrializing
Northeast, he succeeded hi forcing through legislation that created the
Bank of the United States — forerunner of today's Federal Reserve
System.

Employed by governments to regulate the level and rate of market
activity, central banks introduced — by the back door, as it were — a
degree of unofficial short-range planning into capitalist economies.
Money flowed through every artery in Second Wave societies, both
capitalist and socialist. Both needed, and therefore created, a
centralized money pumping station. Central banking and centralized
government marched hand in hand. Centralization was another
dominating principle of Second Wave civilization.

What we see, therefore, is a set of six guiding principles, a "program"
that operated to one de*" A or another in all the Second Wave
countries. These half-dozen principles — standardization, specialization,
synchronization, concentration, maximization, and centralization — were
applied in both the capitalist and socialist wings of industrial society

because Hiry grew, inescapably, out of the basic cleavage between
pro-

60

THE THIRD WAVE

ducer and consumer and the ever-expanding role of the market.

These principles hi turn, each reinforcing the other, led relentlessly to
the rise of bureaucracy. They produced some of the biggest, most
rigid, most powerful bureaucratic organizations the world had ever
seen, leaving the individual to wander in a Kafka-like world of looming
mega-organizations. If today we feel oppressed and overpowered by
them, we can trace our problems to the hidden code that programmed
the civilization of the Second Wave.

The six principles that formed this code lent a distinctive stamp to
Second Wave civilization. Today, as we shall shortly see, every one of
these fundamental principles is under attack by the forces of the Third
Wave.

So, indeed, are the Second Wave elites who are still applying these
rules — in business, in banking, in labor relations, in government, in
education, in the media. For the rise of a new civilization challenges all
the vested interests of the old one.

In the upheavals that lie immediately ahead, the elites of all industrial
societies — so accustomed to setting the rules — will in all likelihood go
the way of the feudal lords of the past. Some will be by -passed. Some
will be dethroned. Some will be reduced to impotence or shabby
gentility. Some — the most intelligent and adaptive — will be transformed
and emerge as leaders of the Third Wave civilization.

To understand who will run things tomorrow when the Third Wave
becomes dominant, we must first know exactly who runs things today.

THE TECHNICIANS OF POWER

The question "Who runs things?" is a typically Second Wave question.
For until the industrial revolution there was little reason to ask it.
Whether ruled by kings or shamans, warlords, sun gods, or saints,
people were seldom in doubt as to who held power over them. The
ragged peasant, looking up from the fields, saw the palace or
monastery looming hi splendor on the horizon. He needed no political
scientist or newspaper pundit to solve the riddle of power. Everyone
knew who was in charge.

Wherever the Second Wave swept in, however, a new kind of power
emerged, diffuse and faceless. Those in power became the
anonymous "they." Who were "they"?

THE INTEGRATORS

Industrialism, as we have seen, broke society into thousands of
interlocking parts — factories, churches, schools, trade unions, prisons,

hospitals, and the like. It broke the line of command between church,
state, and individual. It broke knowledge into specialized disciplines. It
broke jobs into fragments. It broke families into smaller units. In doing
so, it shattered community life and culture.

Somebody had to put things back together in a different form.

This need gave rise to many new kinds of specialists whose basic task
was integration. Calling themselves executives or

62

THE THIRD WAVE

administrators, commissars, coordinators, presidents, vice* presidents,
bureaucrats, or managers, they cropped up in every business, in every
government, and at every level of society. And they proved
indispensable. They were the integrators.

They defined roles and allocated jobs. They decided who got what
rewards. They made plans, set criteria, and gave or withheld
credentials. They linked production, distribution, transport, and
communications. They set the rules under which organizations
interacted. In short, they fitted the pieces of the society together.
Without them the Second Wave system could never have run.

Marx, in the mid-nineteenth century, thought that whoever owned the
tools and technology — the "means of production" — would control
society. He argued that, because work was interdependent, workers
could disrupt production and seize the tools from their boses. Once
they owned the tools, they would rule society.

Yet history played a trick on him. For the very same inter-dependency
gave even greater leverage to a new group — those who orchestrated
or integrated the system. In the end it-was neither the owners nor the
workers who came to power. In both capitalist and socialist nations, it
was the integrators who rose to the top.

It was not ownership of the "means of production" that gave power. It
was control of the "means of integration.** Let's see what that has
meant.

In business the earliest integrators were the factory proprietors, the
business entrepreneurs, the mill owners and ironmasters. The owner
and a few aides were usually able to coordinate the labor of a large
number of unskilled "hands" and to integrate the firm into the larger
economy.

Since, in that period, owner and integrator were one and the same, it is
not surprising that Marx confused the two and laid so heavy an
emphasis on ownership. As production grew more complex, however,
and the division of labor more specialized, business witnessed an
incredible proliferation of executives and experts who, came between
the boss and his workers. Paperwork mushroomed. Soon in the larger
firms no individual, including the owner or dominant shareholder, could
even begin to understand the whole operation. The owner's decisions

were shaped, and ultimately controlled, by the specialists brought in to
coordinate the system. Thus a

THE TECHNICIANS OF POWER

63

new executive elite arose whose power rested no longer on ownership
but rather on control of the integration process.

As the manager grew in power, the stockholder grew less important.

As companies grew bigger, family owners sold out to larger and larger
groups of dispersed shareholders, few of whom knew anything about
the actual operations of the business. Increasingly, shareholders had
to rely on hired managers not merely to run the day-to-day affairs of
the company but even to set its long-range goals and strategies.

Boards of directors, theoretically representing the owners, were
themselves increasingly remote and ill-informed about the operations
they were supposed to direct. And as more and more private
investment was made not by individuals but indirectly through
institutions like pension funds, mutual funds, and the trust departments
of banks, the actual "owners" of industry were still further removed
from control.

The new power of the integrators was, perhaps, most clearly
expressed by W. Michael Blumenthal, former U.S. Secretary of the
Treasury. Before entering government Blumenthal headed the Bendix
Corporation. Once asked if he would some day like to own Bendix,
Blumenthal replied: "It's not ownership that counts — it's control. And as
Chief Executive that's what I've got! We have a shareholders' meeting
next week, and I've got ninety-seven percent of the vote. I only own
eight thousand shares. Control is what's important to me. ... To have
the control over this large animal and to use it in a constructive way,
that's what I want, rather than doing silly things that others want me to
do."

Business policies were thus increasingly fixed by the hired managers
of the firm or by money managers placing other people's money, but in
neither case by the actual owners, let alone by the workers. The
integrators took charge.

All this had certain parallels in the socialist nations. As early as 1921
Lenin felt called upon to denounce his own Soviet bureaucracy.

Trotsky, in exile by 1930, charged that there were already five to six
million managers in a class that "does not engage directly in productive
labor, but administers, orders, commands, pardons and punishes." The
means of production might belong to the state, he charged, "But the
state . . . 'belongs* to the bureaucracy." In the 1950's Mi-lovan Djilas, in
The New Class, attacked the growing power of the managerial elites in
Yugoslavia. Tito, who imprisoned Djilas, himself complained about
"technocracy, bureaucracy,

64

THE THIRD WAVE

the class enemy." And fear of managerialism was the central theme in
Mao's China.*

Under socialism as well as capitalism, therefore, the integrators took
effective power. For without them the parts of the system could not
work together. The "machine" would not run.

THE INTEGRATIONS ENGINE

Integrating a single business, or even a whole industry, was only a
small part of what had to be done. Modern industrial society, as we
have seen, developed a host of organizations, from labor unions and
trade associations to churches, schools, health clinics, and recreational
groups, all of which had to work within a framework of predictable
rules. Laws were needed. Above all, the info-sphere, socio-sphere,
and techno-sphere had to be brought into alignment with one another.

Out of this driving need for the integration of Second Wave civilization
came the biggest coordinator of all — the in-tegrational engine of the
system: big government. It is the system's hunger for integration that
explains the relentless rise of big government in every Second Wave
society.

Again and again political demagogues arose to call for smaller
government. Yet, once in office, the very same leaders expanded
rather than contracted the size of government. This contradiction
between rhetoric and real life becomes understandable the moment we
recognize that the transcendent aim of all Second Wave governments
has been to construct and maintain industrial civilization. Against this
commitment, all lesser differences faded. Parties and politicians might
squabble over other issues, but on this they were in tacit agreement
And big government was part of their unspoken program regardless of
the tune they sang, because industrial societies depend on
government to perform essential inte-grational tasks.

In the words of political columnist Clayton Fritchey, the United States
federal government never ceased to grow, even under three recent
Republican administrations, "for the

* Mao, leading the world's biggest First Wave nation, repeatedly
warned against the rise of managerial elites and saw this as a
dangerous concomitant of traditional industrialism.

THE TECHNICIANS OF POWER

65

simple reason that not even Houdini could dismantle it without serious
and harmful consequences."

Free marketeers have argued that governments interfere with
business. But left to private enterprise alone, industrialization would
have come much more slowly — if, indeed, it could have come at all.
Governments quickened the development of the railroad. They built
harbors, roads, canals, and highways. They operated postal services
and built or regulated telegraph, telephone, and broadcast systems.

They wrote commercial codes and standardized markets. They applied
foreign policy pressures and tariffs to aid industry. They drove farmers
off the land and into the industrial labor supply. They subsidized
energy and advanced technology, often through military channels. At a
thousand levels, governments assumed the integrative tasks that
others could not, or would not, perform.

For government was the great accelerator. Because of its coercive
power and tax revenues, it could do things that private enterprise could
not afford to undertake. Governments could "hot up" the
industrialization process by stepping in to fill emerging gaps in the
system — before it became possible or profitable for private companies
to do so. Governments could perform "anticipatory integration.*'

By setting up mass education systems, governments not only helped
to machine youngsters for their future roles in the industrial work force
(hence, in effect, subsidizing industry) but also simultaneously
encouraged the spread of the nuclear family form. By relieving the
family of educational and other traditional functions, governments
accelerated the adaptation of family structure to the needs of the
factory system. At many different levels, therefore, governments
orchestrated the complexity of Second Wave civilization.

Not surprisingly, as integration grew in importance both the substance
and style of government changed. Presidents and prime ministers, for
example, came to see themselves primarily as managers rather than
as creative social and political leaders. In personality and manner they
became almost interchangeable with the men who ran the large
companies and production enterprises. While offering the obligatory lip
service to democracy and social justice, the Nixons, Carters,
Thatchers, Brezhnevs, Giscards, and Ohiras of the industrial world
rode into office by promising little more than efficient management.

66

THE THIRD WAVE

Across the board, therefore, in socialist as well as capitalist industrial
societies, the same pattern emerged — big companies or production
organizations and a huge governmental machine. And rather than
workers seizing the means of production, as Marx predicted, or
capitalists retaining power, as Adam Smith's followers might have
preferred, a wholly new A — force arose to challenge both. The
technicians of power V seized the "means of integration" and, with it,
the reins of so-j cial, cultural, political, and economic control. Second
Wave I societies were ruled by the integrators,

THE POWER PYRAMIDS

These technicians of power were themselves organized into
hierarchies of elites and sub-elites. Every industry and branch of
government soon gave birth to its own establishment, its own powerful
"They."

Sports . . . religion . . . education . . . each had its own pyramid of
power. A science establishment, a defense establishment, a cultural
establishment sprang up. Power in Second Wave civilization was
parceled out to scores, hundreds, even thousands of such specialized
elites.

In turn, these specialized elites were themselves integrated by
generalist elites whose membership cut across all the specializations.
For example, in the Soviet Union and Eastern Europe the Communist
party had members in every field from aviation to music and steel
manufacture. Communist party members served as a crucial grapevine
carrying messages from one sub-elite to another. Because it had
access to all information, it had enormous power to regulate the
specialist sub-elites. In the capitalist countries, leading businessmen
and lawyers, serving on civic committees or boards, performed similar
functions in a less formal way. What we see, therefore, in all Second
Wave nations are specialized groups of integrators, bureaucrats, or
executives, themselves integrated by generalist integrators.

THE SUPER-ELITES

Finally, at yet a higher level, integration was imposed by the "super-
elites" in charge of investment allocation. Whether in finance or
industry, in the Pentagon or in the Soviet plan-

THE TECHNICIANS OF POWER 67

ning bureaucracy, those who made the major investment allocations in
industrial society set the limits within which the integrators themselves
were compelled to function. Once a truly large-scale investment
decision had been made, whether in Minneapolis or Moscow, it limited
future options. Given a scarcity of resources, one could not casually
tear out Bessemer furnaces or cracking plants or assembly lines until
their cost had been amortized. Once in place, therefore, this capital
stock fixed the parameters within which future managers or integrators
were confined. These groups of faceless decision-makers, controlling
the levers of investment, formed the super-elite in all industrial
societies.

In every Second Wave society, consequently, a parallel architecture of
elites sprang up. And — with local variation — this hidden hierarchy of
power was born again after every crisis or political upheaval. Names,
slogans, party labels and candidates might change; revolutions might
come and go. New faces might appear behind the big mahogany
desks. But the basic architecture of power remained.

Time and again during the past three hundred years, in one country
after another, rebels and reformers have attempted to storm the walls
of power, to build a new society based on social justice and political
equality. Temporarily, such movements have seized the emotions of
millions with promises of freedom. Revolutionists have even managed,
now and then, to topple a regime.

Yet each time the ultimate outcome was the same. Each time the
rebels re-created, under then* own flag, a similar structure of sub-
elites, elites, and super-elites. For this inte-grational structure and the

technicians of power who ruled it were as necessary to Second Wave
civilization as factories, fossil fuels, or nuclear families. Industralism
and the full democracy it promised were, in fact, incompatible.

Industrial nations could be forced, through revolutionary action or
otherwise, to move back and forth across the spectrum from free
market to centrally planned. They could go from capitalist to socialist
and vice versa. But like the much-cited leopard, they could not change
their spots. They could not function without a powerful hierarchy of
integrators.

Today, as the Third Wave of change begins to batter at this fortress of
managerial power, the first fleeting cracks are nppearing in the power
system. Demands for participation in in.-magement, for shared
decision-making, for worker, consumer, and citizen control, and for
anticipatory democracy

68

THE THIRD WAVE

are welling up in nation after nation. New ways of organizing along less
hierarchical and more ad-hocratic lines are springing up in the most
advanced industries. Pressures for decentralization of power intensify.
And managers become more and more dependent upon information
from below. Elites themselves, therefore, are becoming less
permanent and secure. All these are merely early warnings — indicators
of the coming upheaval in the political system.

The Third Wave, already beginning to batter at these industrial
structures, opens fantastic opportunities for social and political
renovation. In the years just ahead startling new institutions will replace
our unworkable, oppressive, and obsolete integrational structures.

Before we turn to these new possibilities, we need to press our
analysis of the dying system. We need to X-ray our obsolete political
system to see how it fitted into the frame of Second Wave civilization,
how it served the industrial order and its elites. Only then can we
understand why it is no longer appropriate or tolerable.

THE HIDDEN BLUEPRINT

Nothing is more confusing to a Frenchman than the spectacle of an
American presidential campaign: the hot-dog gulping, backslapping,
and baby kissing, the coy refusal to cast hat in ring, the primaries, the
conventions, followed by the manic frenzy of fund raising, whistle-
stopping, speechmaking, television commercials — all in the name of
democracy. By contrast, Americans find it hard to make sense of the
way the French choose their leaders. Still less do they understand the
tame British elections, the Dutch free-for-all with two dozen parties, the
Australian preferential voting system, or the Japanese wheeling and
dealing among factions. All these political systems seem frightfully
different from one another. Even more incomprehensible are the one-
party elections or pseudo-elections that take place in the U.S.S.R. and
Eastern Europe. When it comes to politics, no two industrial nations
look the same.

Yet once we tear away our provincial blinders we suddenly discover
that a set of powerful parallels lies beneath the surface differences. In
fact, it is almost as if the political systems of all Second Wave nations
were built from the same hidden blueprint.

When Second Wave revolutionaries managed to topple First Wave
elites in France, in the United States, in Russia, Japan, and other
nations, they were faced with the need to write constitutions, set up
new governments, and design almost from scratch new political
institutions. In the excitement of creation they debated new ideas, new
structures. Everywhere they fought over the nature of representation.
Who

69

70 THE THIRD WAVE

should represent whom? Should representatives be instructed how to
vote by the people — or use their own judgment? Should terms of office
be long or short? What role should parties play?

In each country a new political architecture emerged these conflicts
and debates. A close look at these structures reveals that they are built
on a combination of old Wave assumptions and newer ideas swept hi
by the industrial age.

After millennia of agriculture, it was hard for the founders of Second
Wave political systems to imagine an economy based on labor, capital,
e-ergy, and raw materials, rather than land. Land had always been at
the very center of life r self. Not surprisingly, therefore, geography was
deeply embedded in our various voting systems. Senators and
congressmen in America — and their counterparts in Britain and many
other industrial nations — are still elected not as representatives of
lontno «r.~-i <-ias<? or o'-pima.tional, ethnic, sexual, or life-style
grouping, but as representatives of the inhabitants of a particular piece
of land: a geographical district.

First Wave people were tvtvcallv immobile, and it was therefore natural
for the architects of industrial-era political systems to assume that
people would remain in one locality all their lives. Hence the nrwa A nce,
even today, of residency requirements hi voting regulations.

The pace of First Wave life was slow. Communications were so
primitive that it might take a week for a message from the Continental
Congress in Philadelphia to reach New York. A speech by Georse
Washington took weeks or months to filter through to the hinterland. As
late as 1865 it still took twelve days for London to learn that Lincoln
had been assassinated. On the unspoken assumption that things
moved slowly, representative bodies like Congress or the British
Parliament were regarded as "deliberative" — having the tune and
taking the time to think through their problems.

Most First Wave people were illiterate and ignorant. Thus it was widely
assumed that representatives, particularly if drawn from the educated

classes, would inevitably make more intelligent decisions than the
mass of voters.

But even as they built these First Wave assumptions into our political
institutions, the revolutionaries of the Second Wave also cast their
eyes on the future. Thus the architecture

THE HIDDEN BLUEPRINT

71

they constructed reflected some of the latest technological notions of
their time.

MECHANO-MANIA

The businessmen, intellectuals, and revolutionaries of the early
industrial period were virtually mesmerized by machinery. They were
fascinated by steam engines, clocks, looms, pumps, and pistons, and
they constructed endless analogies based on the simple mechanistic
technologies of their time. It was no accident that men like Benjamin
Franklin and Thomas Jefferson were scientists and inventors as well
as political revolutionaries.

They grew up in the churning cultural wake of Newton's great
discoveries. Newton had searched the heavens and concluded that the
entire universe was a giant clockwork operating with exact mechanical
regularity. La Mettrie, the French physician and philosopher, in 1748
declared man himself to be a machine. Adam Smith later extended the
analogy of the machine to economics, arguing that the economy is a
system and that systems "in many respects resemble machines."

James Madison, in describing the debates that led to the United States
Constitution, spoke of the need to "remodel" the "system," to change
the "structure" of political power, and to choose officials through
"successive filtrations." The Constitution itself was filled with "checks
and balances" like the inner works of a giant clock. Jefferson spoke of
the "machinery of government."

American political thinking continued to reverberate with the sound of
flywheels, chains, gears, checks and balances. Thus Martin Van Buren
invented the "political machine" and eventually New York City had its
Tweed machine, Tennessee its Crump machine, New Jersey its Hague
machine. Generations of American politicians, right down to the
present, prepared political "blueprints," "engineered elections," "steam-
rollered" or "railroaded" bills through Congress and the state
legislatures. In the nineteenth century in Britain, 'Lord Cromer
conceived of an imperial government that would "ensure the
harmonious working of the different parts of the machine."

Nor was this mechanistic mentality a product of capitalism. Lenin, for
example, described that state as "nothing

72

THE THIRD WAVE

more than a machine used by the capitalists to suppress the workers."
Trotsky spoke of "all the wheels and screws of the bourgeois social
mechanism" and went on to describe the function of a revolutionary
party in similarly mechanical phrases. Terming it a powerful
"apparatus," he pointed out that "as with any mechanism this is in itself
static ... the movement of the masses has ... to overcome dead
inertia. . . . Thus, the living force of steam has to overcome the inertia
of the machine before it can set the flywheel in motion."

Drenched in such mechanistic thinking, imbued with an almost blind
faith in the power and efficiency of machines, the revolutionary
founders of Second Wave societies, whether capitalist or socialist, not
surprisingly invented political institutions that shared many of the
characteristics of early industrial machines.

THE REPRESENTO-KIT

The structures they hammered and bolted together were based on the
elemental notion of representation. And in every country they made
use of certain standard parts. These components came out of what
might be called, only half facetiously, a universal represento-kit

The components were:

1. Individuals armed with the vote

2. Parties for collecting votes

3. Candidates who, by winning votes, were instantly transformed into
"representatives" of the voters

4. Legislatures (parliaments, diets, congresses, bunde-stags, or
assemblies) in which, by voting, representatives manufactured laws

5. Executives (presidents, prime ministers, party secretaries) who fed
raw material into the lawmaking machine in the form of policies, and
then enforced the resulting laws

Votes were the "atom" of this Newtonian mechanism. Votes were
aggregated by parties, which served as the "manifold" of the system.
They gathered votes from many sources and fed them into the
electoral adding machine, which blended them in proportion to party
strength or mixture, producing as

THE HIDDEN BLUEPRINT

73

its output the "will of the people" — the basic fuel that supposedly
powered the machinery of government.

The parts of this kit were combined and manipulated in different ways
in different places. In some places everyone over the age of twenty-
one was permitted to vote; elsewhere only white males were
enfranchised; in one country the entire process was merely a facade

for control by a dictator; in another the elected officials actually wielded
considerable power. Here there were two parties, there a multiplicity of
parties, elsewhere only one. Nevertheless, the historical pattern is
clear. However the parts might be modified or configured, this same
basic kit was used in constructing the formal political machinery of all
industrial nations.

Even though Communists frequently attacked "bourgeois democracy"
and ' A arliamentarianism" as a mask for privilege, arguing that the
mechanisms were usually manipulated by the capitalist class for its
own private gain, all socialist industrial nations installed similar
representational machines as soon as possible.

While holding forth a promise of "direct democracy" in some far-off
post-representational era, they relied heavily in the meantime on
"socialist representative institutions." The Hungarian Communist Ott6
Bihari, in a study of these institutions, writes, "in the course of election
the will of the working people makes its influence felt hi the
governmental organs called to life by voting.” The editor of Pravda, V.

G. Afanasyev, in his book The Scientific Management of Society
defines "democratic centralism" as including "the sovereign power of
the working people ... the election of governing bodies and leaders and
their accountability to the people."

Just as the factory came to symbolize the entire industrial techno-
sphere, representative government (no matter how denatured) became
the status symbol of every "advanced" nation. Indeed, even many non-
industrial nations — under pressure from colonizers or through blind
imitation — rushed to install the same formal mechanisms and used the
same universal represento-kit.

Nor were these "democracy machines" restricted to the national level.
They were installed at state, provincial, and local levels as well, right
down to the town or village council. To-

74 THE THIRD WAVE

day in the United States alone there are some five-hundred thousand
elected public officials and 25,869 local governmental units in
metropolitan areas, each with its own elections, representative bodies,
and election procedures.

Thousands of these representational machines are creaking and
grinding away hi nonmetropolitan regions, and tens of thousands more
around the world. In Swiss cantons and French departments, in the
countries of Britain and the provinces of Canada, in the voivodships of
Poland and the republics of the Soviet Union, in Singapore and Haifa,
Osaka and Oslo, candidates run for office and are magically
transmuted into "representatives." It is safe to say that more than one-
hundred thousand of these machines are now manufacturing laws,
decrees, regulations, and rules in Second Wave countries alone.*

In theory, just as each human being and each vote was a discrete,
atomic unit, each of these political units — national, provincial, and
local — was also regarded as discrete and atomic. Each had its own
carefully defined jurisdiction, its own powers, its own rights and duties.

The units were wired together in hierarchical arrangement, from top to
bottom, from nation to state or region or local authority. But as
industrialism matured and the economy grew increasingly integrated,
decisions taken by each of these political units touched off effects
outside its own jurisdiction, thereby causing other political bodies to act
in response.

A decision by the Diet regarding the Japanese textile industry could
influence employment in North Carolina and welfare services in
Chicago. A congressional vote to put quotas on foreign automobiles
could make additional work for local governments in Nagoya or Turin.
Thus while at one time politicians could make a decision without
upsetting conditions outside their own neatly defined jurisdiction, this
became less and less possible.

By the mid-twentieth century, tens of thousands of ostensi-

* Apart from governments as such, virtually all the political parties of
industrialism, from extreme right to extreme left, routinely went through
the traditional motions of choosing their own leaders by vote. Even
contests for precinct-level or local cell leadership typically required
some form of election, if only for the ratification of choices made from
above. And in many countries the ritual of election became a standard
part of the life of all sorts of other organizations, from trade unions and
churches to Cub Scout packs. Voting became part of the industrial way
of life.

THE HIDDEN BLUEPRINT
75

bly sovereign or independent political authorities, stretching around the
planet, were connected to one another through the circuits of the
economy, through vastly increased travel, migration, and
communication, so that they continually activated and excited one
another.

The thousands of representational mechanisms built out of
components of the represento-kit thus increasingly came to form a
single invisible supermachine: a global law factory. Now it remains only
for us to see how the levers and control wheels of this global system
were manipulated — and by whom.

THE REASSURANCE RITUAL

Born of the liberating dreams of Second Wave revolutionaries,
representative government was a stunning advance over earlier power
systems, a technological triumph more striking in its own way than the
steam engine or the airplane.

Representative government made possible orderly succession without
hereditary dynasty. It opened feedback channels between top and
bottom in society. It provided an arena in which the differences among
various groups could be reconciled peacefully.

Tied to majority rule and the idea of one-man/one-vote, it helped the
poor and weak to squeeze benefits from the technicians of power who
ran the integrational engines of society. For these reasons, the spread
of representative government was, on the whole, a humanizing
breakthrough in history.

Yet from the very beginning it fell far short of its promise. By no stretch
of the imagination was it ever controlled by the people, however
defined. Nowhere did it actually change the underlying structure of
power in industrial nations — the structure of sub-elites, elites, and
super-elites. Indeed, far from weakening control by the managerial
elites, the formal machinery of representation became one of the key
means of integration by which they maintained themselves in power.

Thus elections, quite apart from who won them, performed a powerful
cultural function for the elites. To the degree that -everyone had a right
to vote, elections fostered the illusion of equality. Voting provided a
mass ritual of reassurance, conveying to the people the idea that
choices were being made systematically, with machine-like regularity,
and hence, by, implication, rationally. Elections symbolically assured
citizens

76

THE THIRD WAVE

that they were still in command — that they could, in theory at least, dis-
elect as well as elect leaders. In both capitalist and socialist countries,
these ritual reassurances often proved more important than the actual
outcomes of many elections.

Integrational elites programmed the political machinery differently in
each place, controlling the number of parties or manipulating voting
eligibility. Yet the electoral ritual — some might say farce— was
employed everywhere. The fact that Soviet and Eastern European
elections routinely produced magical majorities of 99 to 100 percent
suggested that the need for reassurance remained at least as strong in
the centrally planned societies as in the "free world." Elections took the
steam out of protests from below.

Furthermore, despite the efforts of democratic reformers and radicals,
the integrational elites retained virtually permanent control of the
systems of representative government. Many theories have been
advanced to explain why. Most, however, overlook the mechanical
nature of the system.

If we look at Second Wave political systems with the eyes of an
engineer rather than a political scientist, we suddenly are struck by a
key fact that generally goes unobserved.

Industrial engineers routinely distinguish between two fundamentally
different classes of machine: those that function intermittently,
otherwise known as "batch-processing" machines, and those that
function uninterruptedly, called "continuous-flow" machines. An

example of the first is the commonplace punch press. The worker
brings a batch of metal plates and feeds them into the machine, one or
a few at a time, to stamp them into desired shapes. When the batch is
finished the machine stops until a new batch is brought. An example of
the second is the oil refinery which, once started up, never stops
running. Twenty-four hours a day, oil flows through its pipes and tubes
and chambers.

If we look at the global law factory, with its intermittent voting, we find
ourselves face to face with a classical batch processor. The public is
allowed to choose between candidates at stipulated times, after which
the formal "democracy machine" is switched off again.

Contrast this with the continuous flow of influence from various
organized interests, pressure groups, and power peddlers. Swarms of
lobbyists from corporations and from government agencies,
departments, and ministries testify before committees, serve on blue-
ribbon panels, attend the same receptions and banquets, toast each
other with cocktails in

THE HIDDEN BLUEPRINT

77

Washington or vodka in Moscow, carry information and influence back
and forth, and thus affect the decision-making process on a round-the-
clock basis.

The elites, in short, created a powerful continuous-flow machine to
operate alongside (and often at cross purposes with) the democratic
batch processor. Only when we see these two machines side by side
can we begin to understand how state power was really exercised in
the global law factory.

So long as they played the representational game, people had at best
only intermittent opportunities, through voting, to feed back their
approval or disapproval of the government and its actions. The
technicians of power, by contrast, influenced those actions
continuously.

Finally, an even more potent tool for social control was engineered into
the very principle of representation. For the mere selection of some
people to represent others created new members of the elite.

When workers, for example, first fought for the right to organize unions,
they were harassed, prosecuted for conspiracy, followed by company
spies, or beaten up by police and goon squads. They were outsiders,
unrepresented or inadequately represented in the system.

Once unions established themselves, they gave rise to a new group of
integrators — the labor establishment — whose members, rather than
simply representing the workers, mediated between them and the
elites in business and government. The George Meanys and Georges
Seguys of the world, despite then* rhetoric, became themselves key
members of the integrational elite. The fake union leaders in the

U.S.S.R. and Eastern Europe never were anything but technicians of
power.

In theory, the need to stand for re-election guaranteed that
representatives would stay honest and would continue to speak for
those they represented. Nowhere, however, did this prevent the
absorption of representatives into the architecture of power.
Everywhere the gap widened between the representative and the
represented.

Representative government — what we have been taught to call
democracy — was, in short, an industrial technology for assuring
inequality. Representative government was pseudore-presentative.

What we see, then, glancing backward for a moment of summary, is a
civilization heavily dependent on fossil fuels,

78

TWE THIRD WAVE

factory production, the nuclear family, the corporation, mass education,
and the mass media, all based on a widening cleavage between
production and consumption — and all managed by a set of elites
whose task it was to integrate the whole.

In this system, representative government was the political equivalent
of the factory. Indeed, it was a factory for the manufacture of collective
integrational decisions. Like most factories, it was managed from
above. And like most factories, it is now increasingly obsolete, a victim
of the advancing Third Wave.

If Second Wave political structures are increasingly out of date, unable
to cope with today's complexities — part of the trouble, as we shall see,
lies in another crucial Second Wave institution: the nation-state.

A FRENZY

OF

NATIONS

Abaco is an island. It has a population of sixty-five hundred and forms
part of the Bahamas lying off the coast of Florida. Several years ago a
group of American businessmen, arms merchants, free enterprise
ideologues, a Black intelligence agent, and a member of the British
House of Lords determined that it was time for Abaco to declare its
independence.

Their plan was to take over the island and break it away from the
Bahainian government by promising each of the native residents of the
island a free acre of land after the revolution. (This would have left over
a quarter of a million acres for use by the real estate developers and
investors behind the project.) The ultimate dream was the

establishment on Abaco of a taxless Utopia to which wealthy
businessmen, dreading the Socialist apocalypse, might flee.

Alas for free enterprise, the native Abaconians showed little inclination
to throw off their chains, and the proposed new nation was stillborn.

Nevertheless, in a world in which nationalist movements battle for
power, and in which some 152 states claim membership in that trade
association of nations, the U.N., such parodic gestures serve a useful
purpose. They force us to challenge the Very notion of nationhood.

Could the sixty-five hundred people of Abaco, whether financed by
oddball businessmen or not, constitute a nation? If Singapore with its
2.3 million people is a nation, why not New York City with its 8 million?
If Brooklyn had jet bombers would it be a nation? Absurd as they
sound, such questions will take on new significance as the Third Wave
batters

79

80

THE THIRD WAVE

at the very foundations of Second Wave civilization. For one of those
foundations was, and is, the nation-state.

Until we cut through the foggy rhetoric that surrounds the issue of
nationalism, we cannot make sense of the headlines and we cannot
understand the conflict between First and Second Wave civilizations as
the Third Wave strikes them both.

CHANGING HORSES

Before the Second Wave began rolling across Europe most regions of
the world were not yet consolidated into nations but were organized,
rather, into a mishmash of tribes, clans, duchies, principalities,
kingdoms, and other more or less local units. "Kings and princes," write
the political scientist S. E. Finer, "held powers hi bits and blobs."
Borders were ill-defined, governmental rights fuzzy. The power of the
state was not yet standardized. In one village, Professor Finer tells us,
it amounted only to the right to collect tolls on a windmill, in another to
tax the peasants, elsewhere to appoint an abbot. An individual with
property in several different regions might owe allegiance to several
lords. Even the greatest of emperors typically ruled over a patchwork
of tiny locally-governed communities. Political control was not yet
uniform. Voltaire summed it all up: In traveling across Europe, he
complained, he had to change laws as frequently as horses.

There was more to this quip than met the eye, of course, for the
frequent need to change horses reflected the primitive level of
transport and communications — which, hi turn, reduced the distance
over which even the most powerful monarch could impose effective
control. The farther from the capital, the weaker the authority of the
state.

Yet without political integration, economic integration was impossible.
Costly new Second Wave technologies could only be amortized if they
produced goods for larger-than-local markets. But how could
businessmen buy and sell over a large territory if, outside their own
communities, they ran into a maze of different duties, taxes, labor
regulations, and currencies? For the new technologies to pay off, local
economies had to be consolidated into a single national economy. This
meant a national division of labor and a national market for
commodities and capital. All this, in turn, required national political
consolidation as well.

A FRENZY OF NATIONS

81

Put simply, a Second Wave political unit was needed to match the
growth of Second Wave economic units.

Not surprisingly, as Second Wave societies began to build national
economies, a basic shift in public consciousness became evident. The
small-scale local production in First Wave societies had bred a race of
highly provincial people — most of whom concerned themselves
exclusively with then: own neighborhoods or villages. Only a tiny
handful — a few nobles and churchmen, a scattering of merchants and
a social fringe of artists, scholars, and mercenaries — had interests
beyond the village.

The Second Wave swiftly multiplied the number of people with a stake
in the larger world. With steam- and coal-based technologies, and later
with the advent of electricity, it became possible for a manufacturer of
clothing in Frankfurt, watches in Geneva, or textiles in Manchester to
produce far more units than the local market could absorb. He also
needed raw materials from afar. The factory worker, too, was affected
by financial events occurring thousands of miles away: jobs depended
on distant markets.

Bit by bit, therefore, psychological horizons expanded. The new mass
media increased the amount of information and imagery from far away.
Under the impact of these changes, localism faded. National
consciousness stirred.

Starting with the American and French revolutions and continuing
through the nineteenth century, a frenzy of nationalism swept across
the industrializing parts of the world. Germany's three hundred and fifty
petty, diverse, quarreling mini-states needed to be combined into a
single national market — das Vaterland. Italy — broken into pieces and
ruled variously by the House of Savoy, the Vatican, the Austrian
Hapsburgs, and the Spanish Bourbons — had to be united. Hungarians,
Serbs, Croats, Frenchmen, and others all suddenly developed mystical
affinities for then* fellows. Poets exalted the national spirit. Historians
discovered long-lost heroes, literature, and folklore. Composers wrote
hymns to nationhood. All at precisely the moment when
industrialization made it necessary.

Once we understand the industrial need for integration, the meaning of
the national state becomes clear. Nations are not "spiritual unities" as

Spengler termed them, or '‘mental communities" or "social souls." Nor
is a nation "a rich heritage of memories," to use Kenan's phrase, or a
"shared image of the future," as Ortega insisted.

82 THE THIRD WAVE

What we call the modern nation is a Second Wave phenomenon: a
single integrated political authority superimposed on or fused with a
single integrated economy. A ragbag collection of locally self-sufficient,
sparsely connected economies cannot, and does not, give rise to a
nation. Nor is a tightly unified political system a modern nation if it sits
atop a loose conglomeration of local economies. It was the welding of
the two, a unified political system and a unified economy, that made
the modern nation.

Nationalist uprisings triggered by the industrial revolution in the United
States, in France, in Germany and the rest of Europe, can be seen as
efforts to bring the level of political integration up to the fast-rising level
of economic integration that accompanied the Second Wave. And it
was these efforts, not poetry or mystical influences, that led to the
division of the world into distinct national units.

THE GOLDEN SPIKE

As each government sought to extend its market and its political
authority, it came up against outer limits — language differences,
cultural, social, geographic, and strategic barriers. The available
transport, communication, and energy supplies, the productivity of its
technology, all set limits on how large an area could be effectively
ruled by a single political structure. The sophistication of accounting
procedures, budgetary controls, and management techniques also
determined how far political integration could reach.

Within these limits, the integrational elites, corporate and governmental
alike, fought for expansion. The broader the territory under their control
and the bigger the economic market area, the greater their wealth and
power became. As each nation stretched its economic and political
frontiers to the utmost, it ran up not merely against these inherent limits
but also against rival nations.

To break out of these confines the integrational elites used advanced
technology. They hurled themselves, for example, into the "space
race" of the nineteenth century — the building of railroads.

In September 1825 a rail line was established that linked Stockton to
Darlington in Britain. In May 1835, on the continent, Brussels was tied
to Malines. That September in Bavaria the Nuremberg-Furth line was
laid. Next were Paris

A FRENZY OF NATIONS

83

and St. Germain. Far to the east, in April 1838, Tsarkoe Selo was
connected to St. Petersburg. For the next three decades or more,
railroad workers stitched one region to another.

The French historian Charles Moraze" explains: "The countries which
were already almost united in 1830 were consolidated by the coming of
the railway . . . those still unprepared saw new bands of steel . . .
tightening around them. ... It was as if every possible nation was
hastening to proclaim its right to exist before the railways were built, so
that it might be acknowledged as a nation by the transport system
which defined the political boundaries of Europe for over a century."

In the United States the government awarded vast land grants to the
private railroad companies, inspired, as historian Brace Mazlish has
written, by "the conviction that transcontinental roads would strengthen
the ties of union between the Atlantic and Pacific coasts." Hammering
hi the golden spike that completed the first transcontinental rail line
opened the door to a truly national market — integrated on a continental
scale. And it extended the actual, as distinct from nominal, control of
the national government. Washington could now move troops quickly
all across the continent to enforce its authority.

What one saw, therefore, hi one country after another, was the rise of
this powerful new entity — the nation. In this way the world map came to
be divided into a set of neat, nonov-crlapping patches of red, pink,
orange, yellow, or green, and the nation-state system became one of
the key structures of Second Wave civilization.

Beneath the nation lay the familiar imperative of industri-.alism: the
drive toward integration.

But the drive for integration did not end at the borders of each nation-
state. For all its strengths, industrial civilization had to be fed from
without. It could not survive unless it integrated the rest of the world
into the money system and controlled that system for its own benefit.

How it did so is crucial to any understanding of the world the Third
Wave will create.

THE IMPERIAL DRIVE

No civilization spreads without conflict. Second Wave civilization soon
launched a massive attack on the First Wave world, triumphed, and
imposed its will on millions, ultimately billions, of human beings.

Long before the Second Wave, of course, from the sixteenth century
on, European rulers had already begun to build extensive colonial
empires. Spanish priests and conquistadors, French trappers, British,
Dutch, and Portuguese or Italian adventurers fanned out across the
globe, enslaving or decimating whole populations, claiming control of
vast lands, and sending tribute home to then- monarchs.

Compared with what was to follow, however, all this was insignificant.

For the treasure these early adventurers and conquerors sent home
was, in effect, private booty. It financed wars and personal opulence —
whiter palaces, colorful pageantry, a leisurely workless life-style for the
court. But it had little to do with the still basically self-sufficient
economy of the colonizing country.

Largely outside the money system and the market economy, the serfs
who scraped a bare living from the sunbaked soil of Spain or the misty
heaths of England had little or nothing to export abroad. They scarcely
grew enough for local consumption. Nor did they depend on raw
materials stolen or purchased hi other countries. For them life went on,
one way or another. The fruits of overseas conquest enriched the
ruling class and the towns rather than the mass of ordinary people who
lived as peasants. In this sense, First Wave

THE IMPERIAL DRIVE

85

imperialism was still petty — not yet integrated into the economy.

The Second Wave transformed this relatively small-scale pilferage into
big business. It transformed Petty Imperialism into Grand Imperialism.

Here was a new imperialism aimed not at bringing back a few
trunkloads of gold or emeralds, spices and silks. Here was an
imperialism that ultimately brought back shipload after shipload of
nitrates, cotton, palm oil, tin, rubber, bauxite, and tungsten. Here was
an imperialism that dug copper mines in the Congo and planted oil rigs
hi Arabia. Here was an imperialism that sucked in raw materials from
the colonies, processed them, and very often spewed the finished
manufactured goods back into the colonies at a huge profit. Here, in
short, was imperialism no longer peripheral but so integrated into the
basic economic structure of the industrial nation that the jobs of
millions of ordinary workers came to depend on it

And not just jobs. In addition to new raw materials, Europe also
needed increasing amounts of food. As Second Wave nations turned
to manufacturing, transferring rural labor into the factories, they were
forced to import more of their foodstuffs from abroad — beef, mutton,
grain, coffee, tea, and sugar from India, from China, from Africa, from
the West Indies and Central America.

In turn, as mass manufacturing grew, the new industrial elites needed
bigger markets and fresh outlets for investment. In the 1880's and
1890's European statesmen were unabashedly open about their
objectives. "Empire is commerce,'* proclaimed the British politician
Joseph Chamberlain. The French premier Jules Ferry was even more
explicit: What France needed, he declared, were "outlets for our
industries, exports, and capital." Jolted by cycles of boom and bust,
faced with chronic unemployment, European leaders were for
generations obsessed by the fear that if colonial expansion stopped,
unemployment would lead to armed revolution at home.

The roots of Grand Imperialism were, however, more than economic.
Strategic considerations, religious fervor, idealism, and adventure all
played a part, as did racism, with its implicit assumption of white or
European superiority. Many saw imperial conquest as a divine
responsibility. Kipling's phrase, the "White Man's burden," summed up
the European's missionary zeal to spread Christianity and
"civilization" —

86 THE THIRD WAVE

meaning, of course, Second Wave civilization. For the colonizers
regarded First Wave civilizations, no matter how refined and complex,
as backward and underdeveloped. Rural people, especially if they
happened to wear dark skins, were supposedly childlike. They were
"tricky and dishonest." They were "shiftless." They did not "value life."

Such attitudes made it easier for the Second Wave forces to justify the
annihilation of those who stood in their path.

In The Social History of the Machine Gun, John Ellis shows how this
new, fantastically deadly weapon, perfected in the nineteenth century,
was at first systematically employed against "native" populations and
not against white Europeans, since it was considered unsportsmanlike
to kill an equal with it. Shooting colonials, however, was thought to be
more like a hunt than a war, so other standards applied. "Mowing down
Matabeles, Dervishes or Tibetans," writes Ellis, "was regarded more as
a rather risky kind of 'shoot' than a true military operation."

At Omdurman, across the Nile from Khartoum, this superior technology
was displayed with withering effect in 1898 when Dervish warriors led
by the Mahdi were defeated by British troops armed with six Maxim
machine guns. An eyewitness wrote: "It was the last day of Mahdism
and the greatest. ... It was not a battle but an execution." In that one
engagement twenty-eight British died, leaving behind eleven thousand
Dervish dead — 392 colonial casualities for every Englishman. Writes
Ellis: "It became another example of the triumph of the British spirit,
and the general superiority of the white man."

Behind the racist attitudes and the religious and other justifications as
the British, French, Germans. Dutch, and others spread around the
world, stood a single hard reality. Second Wave civilization could not
exist in isolation. It desperately needed the hidden subsidy of cheap
resources from the outside. Above all, it needed a single integrated
world market through which to siphon those subsidies.

GAS PUMPS IN THE GARDEN

The thrust to create this integrated world market was based on the
idea, best expressed by David Ricardo, that the division of labor ought
to be applied to nations as well as to factory workers. In a classical
passage he pointed out that if

THE IMPERIAL DRIVE

87

Britain specialized in the manufacture of textiles and Portugal in
making wine, both countries would gain. Each would be doing what it
did best. Thus the "international division of tabor," assigning
specialized roles to different nations, would enrich everyone.

This belief hardened into dogma in the generations that followed and
still prevails today, although its implications often go unnoticed. For just

as the division of labor in any economy created a powerful need for
integration and thereby gave rise to an integrational elite, so the
international division of labor required integration on a global scale and
gave rise to a global elite — a small group of Second Wave nations
which, for all practical purposes, took turns dominating large parts of
the rest of the world.

The success of the drive to create a single integrated world market can
be measured in the fantastic growth of world trade once the Second
Wave passed through Europe. Between 1750 and 1914 the value of
world trade is estimated to have multiplied more than fiftyfold, rising
from 700 million dollars to almost 40 billion dollars. If Ricardo had been
right, the advantages of this global trade should have accrued more or
less evenly to all sides. In fact, the self-serving belief that specialization
would benefit everyone was based on a fantasy of fair competition.

It presupposed a completely efficient use of labor and resources. It
presupposed deals uncontaminated by threats of political or military
force. It presupposed armVIength transactions by more or less evenly
matched bargainers. The theory, in short, overlooked nothing — except
real life.

In reality, negotiations between Second Wave merchants and First
Wave people over sugar, copper, cocoa, or other resources were often
totally lopsided. On one side of the table sat money-shrewd European
or American traders backed by huge companies, extensive banking
networks, powerful technologies, and strong national governments. On
the other one might find a local lord or tribal chieftain whose people
had scarcely entered the money system and whose economy was
based on small-scale agriculture or village crafts. On one side sat the
agents of a thrusting, alien, mechanically advanced civilization,
convinced of its own superiority and ready to use bayonets or machine
guns to prove it. On the other sat representatives of small prenational
tribes or principalities, armed with arrows and spears.

Often local rulers or entrepreneurs were simply bought off

88 THE THIRD WAVE

by the Westerners, offered bribes or personal gain in return for
sweating the native labor force, putting down resistance, or rewriting
local laws in favor of the outsiders. Once conquering a colony, the
imperial power often set preferential raw-material prices for its own
businessmen and erected stiff barriers to prevent the traders of rival
nations from bidding prices up.

Under such circumstances, it was hardly surprising that the industrial
world was able to obtain raw materials or energy resources at less
than fair-market prices.

Beyond this, prices were often further depressed in the favor of the
buyers by what might be termed "The Law of the First Price." Many raw
materials needed by Second Wave nations were virtually valueless to
the First Wave populations who had them. African peasants had no
need for chromium. Arab sheiks had no use for the black gold that lay
under their desert sands.

Where no previous history of trade existed for a given commodity, the
price set in the first transaction was crucial. And this price was often
based less on such economic factors as cost, profit, or competition
than on relative military and political strength. Typically set in the
absence of active competition, almost any price was acceptable to
ajord or tribal chief who regarded his local resources as valueless and
found himself facing a regiment of troops with Galling guns. And this
First Price, once established at a low level, depressed all subsequent
prices.

As soon as this raw material was shipped back to the industrial nations
and incorporated in final products, the low initial price was, for all
intents, frozen in place.* Eventually, as a world price was gradually
established for each commodity, all industrial nations benefited from
the fact that the First Price had been set at an "a-competitive" low
level. For many different reasons, therefore, despite much imperialist
rhetoric about the virtues of free trade and enterprise, the Second

* Example: Suppose Company A bought a raw material from Colonia
for one dollar a pound, then used it to manufacture widgets selling for
two dollars each. Any other company seeking to enter the widget
market would strive to keep its own raw-material cost at, or below, that
of Company A. Unless it had some technological or other edge, it could
not afford to pay significantly more for its raw material and still sell
widgets at a competitive price. Thus the initial price set for the raw
material, even if arrived at under the shadow of bayonets, became the
base for all subsequent negotiation.

THE IMPERIAL DRIVE

89

Wave nations profited greatly from what was euphemistically called
"imperfect competition."

Rhetoric and Ricardo aside, the benefits of expanding trade were not
evenly shared. They flowed mainly from the First Wave world to the
Second.

THE MARGARINE PLANTATION

To facilitate this flow, the industrial powers worked hard to expand and
integrate the world market As trade passed beyond national
boundaries each national market became part of a larger set of
interconnected regional or continental markets and, finally, part of the
single, unified exchange system envisioned by the integrational elites
who ran Second Wave civilization. A single web of money was woven
around the world.

Treating the rest of the world as its gas pump, garden, mine, quarry,
and cheap labor supply, the Second Wave world wrought deep
changes in the social life of the earth's non-industrial populations.
Cultures that had subsisted for thousands of years in a self-sufficient
manner, producing their own food supplies, were sucked willy-nilly into
the world trade system and compelled to trade or perish. Suddenly the

living standards of Bolivians or Malayans were tied to the requirements
of industrial economies half a planet away, as tin mines and rubber
plantations sprang up to feed the voracious industrial maw.

The innocent household product margarine provides a dramatic case
in point. Margarine was originally manufactured in Europe out of local
materials. It grew so popular, however, that these materials proved
insufficient. In 1907 researchers discovered that margarine could be
made out of coconut and palm-kernel oil. The result of this European
discovery was an upheaval hi the life-style of West Africans.

"In the main areas of West Africa," writes Magnus Pyke, former
president of the British Institute of Food Science and Technology,
"where palm oil was traditionally produced, the land was owned by the
community as a whole." Complex local customs and rules governed
the use of the palm trees. Sometimes a man who had planted a tree
was entitled to its product for the rest of his life. In some places women
had special rights. According to Pyke, the Western businessmen who
organized "the large-scale production of palm oil for the

90

THE THIRD WAVE

manufacture of margarine as a 'convenience* food for the industrial
citizens of Europe and America destroyed the fragile and complex
social system of the non-industrial Africans." Huge plantations were set
up in the Belgian Congo, in Nigeria, the Cameroons, and the Gold
Coast. The West got its margarine. And Africans became semi-slaves
on huge plantations.

Rubber offers another example. After the turn of the century when
automobile production in the United States created a sudden heavy
demand for rubber for tires and inner tubes, traders, in collusion with
local authorities, enslaved Amazonian Indians to produce it. Roger
Casement, the British consul in Rio de Janeiro, reported that the
production of four thousand tons of Putumayo rubber between 1900
and 1911 resulted in the death of thirty thousand Indians.

It can be argued that these were "excesses" and were not typical of
Grand Imperialism. Certainly the colonial powers were not unrelievedly
cruel or evil. In places they did build schools and rudimentary health
facilities for their subject populations. They improved sanitation and
water supplies. They no doubt raised the living standard for some.

Nor would it be fair to romanticize precolonial societies or to blame the
poverty of today's non-industrial populations exclusively on
imperialism. Climate, local corruption and tyranny, ignorance, and
xenophobia all contributed. There was plenty of misery and oppression
to go around long before the Europeans ever arrived.

Nevertheless, once torn out of self-sufficiency and compelled to
produce for money and exchange, once encouraged or forced to
reorganize their social structure around mining, for example, or
plantation fanning, First Wave populations were plunged into economic
dependence on a marketplace they could scarcely influence. Often

their leaders were bribed, their cultures ridiculed, their languages
suppressed. Moreover, the colonial powers hammered a deep sense
of psychological inferiority into the conquered people that stands even
today as an obstacle to economic and social development.

In the Second Wave world, however, Grand Imperialism paid off
handsomely. As the economic historian William Woodruff put it: "It was
the exploitation of these territories and the growing trade done with
them that obtained for the European family wealth on a scale never
seen before." Built deep into the very structure of the Second Wave
economy,

THE IMPERIAL DRIVE
91

feeding its ravenous need for resources, imperialism marched across
the planet.

In 1492 when Columbus first set foot in the New World, Europeans
controlled only 9 percent of the globe. By 1801 they ruled a third. By
1880, two thirds. And by 1935 Europeans politically controlled 85
percent of the land surface of the earth and 70 percent of its
population. Like Second Wave society itself, the world was divided into
integrators and inte-gratees.

INTEGRATION A L'AMERICAIN

Not all integrators were equal, however. The Second Wave nations
waged an increasingly bloody battle among themselves for control of
the emerging world economic system. English and French dominance
was challenged in World War I by rising German industrial might. The
war's destruction, the devastating cycle of inflation and depression that
followed it, the revolution in Russia, all shook the industrial world
market.

These upheavals brought on a drastic slowdown in the rate of growth
of world trade, and, even though more countries were sucked into the
trading system, the actual volume of goods traded internationally
declined. World War II further slowed extension of the integrated world
market.

By the end of World War II, Western Europe lay in smoking ruins.
Germany had been reduced to a lunar landscape. The Soviet Union
had suffered indescribable physical and human damage. Japan's
industry was shattered. Of the major industrial powers only the United
States found itself unharmed economically. By 1946-1950 the global
economy stood in such disarray that foreign trade was at its lowest
level since 1913.

Moreover, the very weakness of the war-stricken European powers
encouraged one colony after another to demand political
independence. Gandhi, Ho Chi Minh, Jomo Kenyatta, and other anti-
colonialists stepped up their campaigns to oust the, colonizers.

Even before the wartime guns stopped firing, therefore, it was apparent
that the entire world industrial economy would have to be reconstituted
on a new basis after the war.

Two nations took upon themselves the task of reorganizing
92

THE THIRD WAVE

and reintegrating the Second Wave system: the United States and the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics.

The United States until then had played a limited part in the Grand
Imperial campaign. In opening its own frontier it had decimated the
Native Americans and cordoned them off in reservations. In Mexico,
Cuba, and Puerto Rico, and the Philippines, Americans imitated the
imperial tactics of the British, the French, or the Germans. In Latin
America throughout the early decades of this century U.S. "dollar
diplomacy" helped United Fruit and other corporations guarantee low
prices for sugar, bananas, coffee, copper, and other goods.
Nevertheless, compared with the Europeans, the United States was a
junior partner in the Grand Imperial crusade.

After World War II, by contrast, the United States stood as the chief
creditor nation in the world. It had the most advanced technology, the
most stable political structure — and an irresistible opportunity to move
into the power vacuum left behind by its shattered competitors as they
were forced to withdraw from the colonies.

As early as 1941 U.S. financial strategists had begun to plan for a
postwar reintegration of the world economy along lines more favorable
to the United States. At the Bretton Woods Conference in 1944, held
under U.S. leadership, forty-four nations agreed to set up two key
integrative structures — the International Monetary Fund and the World
Bank.

The IMF compelled its member nations to peg then* currency to the
American dollar or to gold — most of which was held by the United
States. (By 1948, the United States possessed 72 percent of the whole
world's gold reserves.) The IMF thus fixed the basic relationships of the
major world currencies.

The World Bank, meanwhile, at first established to provide postwar
reconstruction funds to European nations, gradually began providing
loans to the non-industrial countries, too. These were often for the
purpose of building roads, harbors, ports, and other "infra-structure
items" to facilitate the movement of raw materials and agricultural
exports to the Second Wave nations.

Soon a third component was added to the system: the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade — GATT for short. This agreement,
again promoted originally by the United States, set out to liberalize
trade, which had the effect of

THE IMPERIAL DRIVE 93

making it difficult for the poorer, less technologically advanced
countries to protect then* tiny fledgling industries.

The three structures were wired together by a rule that prohibited the
World Bank from making loans to any country that refused to join the
IMF or to abide by the GATT.

This system made it difficult for debtors of the United States to reduce
then* obligations through currency or tariff manipulation. It
strengthened the competitiveness of U.S. industry in world markets.
And it gave the industrial powers, and especially the United States, a
strong influence on economic planning in many First Wave countries,
even after they had attained political independence.

These three interconnected agencies formed a single inte-grative
structure for world trade. And from 1944 to the early 1970's, the United
States basically dominated this system. Among nations, it integrated
the integrators.

SOCIALIST IMPERIALISM

American leadership of the Second Wave world, however, was
increasingly challenged by the rise of the Soviet Union. The U.S.S.R.
and other socialist nations portrayed themselves as anti-imperialist
friends of the colonial peoples of the world. In 1916, a year before he
took power, Lenin had written a slashing attack on the capitalist
nations for their colonial policies. His Imperialism became one of the
most influential books of the century and still shapes the thinking of
hundreds of millions around the world.

But Lenin saw imperialism as a purely capitalist phenomenon.

Capitalist nations, he insisted, oppressed and colonized other nations
not out of choice but out of necessity. A dubious iron law, put forward
by Marx, held that profits in capitalist economies showed a general,
irresistible tendency to decline over time. Because of this, Lenin held,
capitalist nations in their final stage were driven to seek "super-profits"
abroad to compensate for diminishing profits at home. Only socialism,
he argued, would free colonial peoples from their oppression and
misery, because socialism had no built-in dynamic requiring their
economic exploitation.

What Lenin overlooked is that many of the same imperatives that
drove capitalist industrial nations operated in socialist industrial nations
as well. They, too, were part of the world money system. They, too,
based their economies on the

94 THE THIRD WAVE

divorce of production from consumption. They, too, needed a market
(albeit not necessarily a profit-oriented market) to reconnect producer
and consumer. They, too, needed raw materials from abroad to feed
their industrial machines. And for these reasons they, too, needed an
integrated world economic system through which to obtain their
necessities and sell their products abroad.

Indeed Lenin, at the very same time he attacked imperialism, spoke of
socialism's aim "not only to bring the nations closer together but to
integrate them." As the Soviet analyst M. Senin has written in Socialist
Integration, Lenin by 1920 "regarded the drawing together of nations
as an objective process which . . . will finally and ultimately lead to the
creation of a single world economy, regulated by ... a common plan."
This, if anything, was lie ultimate industrial vision.

Externally, socialist industrial nations were driven by the same
resource needs as capitalist nations. They, too, needed cotton, coffee,
nickel, sugar, wheat, and other goods to feed their fast-multiplying
factories and their urban populations. The Soviet Union had (and still
has) enormous reserves of natural resources. It has manganese, lead,
zinc, coal, phosphates, and gold. But so had the United States, and
that stopped neither nation from seeking to buy from others at the
cheapest possible price.

From its inception the Soviet Union became part of the world money
system. Once any nation entered this system and accepted the
"normal" ways of doing business, it immediately locked itself into
conventional definitions of efficiency and productivity — definitions that
were themselves traceable back to early capitalism. It was compelled
to accept, almost unconsciously, conventional economic concepts,
categories, definitions, accounting methods, and units of
measurement.

Socialist managers and economists, exactly like their capitalist
counterparts, thus calculated the cost of producing their own raw
materials as against the cost of purchasing them. They faced a straight
"make or buy" decision of the kind capitalist corporations confront
every day. And it soon became apparent that buying certain raw
materials on the world market would be cheaper than trying to produce
them at home.

Once this decision was made, sharp Soviet purchasing agents fanned
out into the world market and bought at prices previously set at
artificially low levels by imperialist traders. Soviet trucks rolled on
rubber bought at prices that were

THE IMPERIAL DRIVE

95

probably determined ab initio by British merchants in Malaya. Worse,
in recent years the Soviets (who maintain troops there) paid Guinea six
dollars per ton for bauxite when the Americans were paying twenty-
three dollars. India has protested that the Russians overcharge them
30 percent on imports and pay 30 percent too little for Indian exports.
Iran and Afghanistan received subnormal prices from the Soviets for
natural gas. Thus the Soviet Union, like its capitalist adversaries,
benefited at the expense of the colonies. To have done otherwise
would have been to slow its own industrialization process.

The Soviet Union was also driven toward imperialist policies by
strategic considerations. Faced with the military might of Nazi

Germany, the Soviets first colonized the Baltic states and made war on
Finland. After World War II, with troops and the threat of invasion, they
helped install or maintain "friendly" regimes throughout most of Eastern
Europe. These countries, more industrially advanced than the U.S.S.R.
itself, were intermittently milked by the Soviets, justifying their
description as colonies or "satellites."

"There can be no doubt," writes the neo-Marxist economist Howard
Sherman, "that, in the years immediately following the Second World
War, the Soviet Union removed a certain amount of resources from
Eastern Europe without giving equal resources in payment . . . There
was some direct plunder and military reparation. . . . There were also
joint companies established with Soviet predominance hi control and
Soviet exploitation of profits from these countries. There were also
extremely unequal trade agreements that amounted to further
reparations."

At present there is apparently no direct plunder and the joint
companies have disappeared, but, adds Sherman, "There is much
evidence that most of the exchanges between the U.S.S.R. and most
East European countries are still unequal — with the U.S.S.R. coming
out best." How much "profit" is extruded by these means is difficult to
determine, given the inadequacy of published Soviet statistics. It may
well be that the costs of maintaining Soviet troops throughout Eastern
Europe actually outweigh the economic benefits. But one. fact is
indisputably clear.

While the Americans built the IMF-GATT-World Bank structure, the
Soviets moved toward Lenin's dream of a single integrated world
economic system bv creating the Council for Mutual Economic
Assistance (COMECON) and compelling

96

the Eastern European countries to join it. COMECON countries are
forced by Moscow not only to trade with one another and with the
Soviet Union but to submit their economic development plans to
Moscow for approval. Moscow, insisting on the Ricardiaji virtues of
specialization, acting exactly like the old imperialist powers vis-a-vis
African, Asian, or Latin American economies, has assigned specialized
functions to each Eastern European economy. Only Romania has
openly and staunchly resisted.

Claiming that Moscow has tried to turn it into the "petrol pump and
garden" of the Soviet Union, Romania has set out to achieve what it
calls multilateral development, meaning a fully rounded
industrialization. It has resisted "socialist integration" despite Soviet
pressures. In sum, at the very time that the United States assumed
leadership of the capitalist industrial nations and built its own self-
serving mechanisms for integrating the world economic system anew
after World War II, the Soviets built a counterpart of this system in the
part of the world they dominated.

No phenomenon as vast, complex, and transforming as imperialism
can be described simply. Its effects on religion, on education, on

health, on themes in literature and art, on racial attitudes, on the
psycho-structure of whole peoples, as well as more directly on
economics, are still being unraveled by the historians. It no doubt had
positive accomplishments to its credit as well as atrocities. But its role
in the rise of Second Wave civilisation cannot be overemphasized.

We can think of imperialism as the supercharger or accelerator of
industrial development in the Second Wave world. How rapidly would
the United States, Western Europe, Japan, or the U.S.S.R. have been
able to industrialize without infusions of food, energy, and raw
materials from outside? What if the prices of scores of commodities
like bauxite, manganese, tin, vanadium, or copper had been 30 to 50
percent higher for a period of decades?

The price of thousands of end-products would have been
correspondingly higher — in some cases, no doubt, so high as to make
mass consumption impossible. The shock of oil price increases in the
early 1970's gives only a pale hint of the potential effects.

Even if domestic substitutes had been available, the economic growth
of the Second Wave nations would in all probability have been stunted.
Without the concealed sub-

THE IMPERIAL DRIVE

97

sidles made possible by imperialism, capitalist and socialist, Second
Wave civilization might well be today where it was in 1920 or 1930.

The grand design should now be clear. Second Wave civilization cut
up and organized the world into discrete nation-states. Needing the
resources of the rest of the world, it drew First Wave societies and the
remaining primitive peoples of the world into the money system. It
created a globally integrated marketplace. But rampant industrialism
was more than an economic, political, or social system. It was also a
way of life and a way of thinking. It produced a Second Wave
mentality.

This mentality stands today as a key obstacle to the creation of a
workable Third Wave civilization.

INDUST-REALITY

As Second Wave civilization pushed its tentacles across the planet,
transforming everything with which it came in contact, it carried with it
more than technology or trade. Colliding with First Wave civilization,
the Second Wave created hot only a new reality for millions but a new
way of thinking about reality.

Clashing at a thousand points with the values, concepts, myths, and
morals of agricultural society, the Second Wave brought with it a
redefinition of God ... of justice ... of love ... of power ... of beauty. It
stirred up new ideas, attitudes, and analogies. It subverted and
superseded ancient assumptions about time, space, matter, and
causality. A powerful, coherent world view emerged that not only

explained but justified Second Wave reality. This world view of
industrial society has not had a name. It might best be termed "indust-
reality."

Indust-reality was the overarching set of ideas and assumptions with
which the children of industrialism were taught to understand then*
world. It was the package of premises employed by Second Wave
civilization, by its scientists, business leaders, statesmen,
philosophers, and propagandists.

There were, of course, countervoices, those who challenged the
dominant ideas of indust-reality, but we are concerned here not with
the side currents but with the mainstream of Second Wave thought. On
the surface, it seemed, there was no mainstream at all. Rather, it
appeared that there were two powerful ideological currents in conflict.
By the middle of the nineteenth century every industrializing nation had
its sharply 98

INDUST-REALITY

99

defined left wing and its right, its advocates of individualism and free
enterprise, and its advocates of collectivism and socialism.

This battle of ideologies, at first confined to the industrializing nations
themselves, soon spread around the globe. With the Soviet Revolution
of 1917, and the organization of a centrally directed worldwide
propaganda machine, the ideological struggle grew even more intense.
And by the end of World War II, as the United States and the Soviet
Union attempted to reintegrate the world market — or large parts of it —
on their own terms, each side was spending huge sums to spread its
doctrines to the world's non-industrial peoples.

On one side were totalitarian regimes, on the other the so-called liberal
democracies. Guns and bombs stood ready to take up where logical
arguments ended. Seldom since the great collision of Catholicism and
Protestantism during the Reformation had doctrinal lines been so
sharply drawn between two theological camps.

What few noticed, however, in the heat of this propaganda war, was
that while each side promoted a different ideology, both were
essentially hawking the same superideolagy. Their conclusions — their
economic programs and political dogmas— differed radically, but many
of their starting assump? tions were the same. Like Protestant and
Catholic missionaries clutching different versions of the Bible, yet both
preaching Christ, Marxists and anti-Marxists alike, capitalists and
anticapitalists, Americans and Russians marched forth into Africa,
Asia, and Latin America — the non-industrial regions of the world —
blindly bearing the same set of fundamental premises. Both preached
the superiority of industrialism to all other civilizations. Both were
passionate apostles of indust-reality.

THE PROGRESS PRINCIPLE

The world view they disseminated was based on three deeply
intertwined "indust-real" beliefs — three, ideas, that bound all Second
Wave nations together and' differentiated theiu from much of the rest of
the world.

The first of these core beliefs had to do with nature. While socialists
and capitalists might disagree violently about how to share its fruits,
both looked upon nature in the same way. For both, nature was an
object waiting to be exploited. I

100

THE THIRD WAVE

The idea that humans should hold dominion over nature can be traced
at least as far back as Genesis. Nevertheless, it was decidedly a
minority view until the industrial revolution. Most earlier cultures
emphasized instead an acceptance of poverty and the harmony of
humankind with its surrounding natural ecology.

These earlier cultures were not particularly gentle with nature. They
slashed and burned, overgrazed, and stripped the forests for firewood.
But their power to do damage was limited. They had no great impact
on the earth and no need for an explicit ideology to justify the damage
they did.

With the coming of Second Wave civilization one found capitalist
industrialists gouging resources on a massive scale, pumping
voluminous poisons into the air, deforesting whole regions in pursuit of
profit, without much thought about side effects or long-term
consequences. The idea that nature was there to be exploited provided
a convenient rationalization for shortsightedness and selfishness.

But the capitalists were scarcely alone. Wherever they took power,
Marxist industrializers (despite their conviction that profit was the root
of all evil) acted hi exactly the same way. Indeed, they built the conflict
with nature right into their scriptures.

Marxists pictured primitive peoples not as coexisting harmoniously with
nature but as engaged in a fierce lif e-and-death struggle against it.

With the emergence of class society, they held, the war of "man
against nature" was unfortunately transformed into a war of "man
against man." The achievement of a Communist classless society
would permit humanity to get back to its first order of business once
again — the war of man against nature.

On both sides of the ideological divide, therefore, one found the same
image of humanity standing hi opposition to nature and dominating it.
This image was a key component of indust-reality, the superideology
from which Marxist and anti-Marxist alike drew their assumptions.

A second, interrelated idea carried the argument a step fur-er. Humans
were not merely in charge of nature, they were the pinnacle of a long
process of evolution. Earlier theories of evolution existed, but it was
Darwin, in the middle of the nineteenth century, brought up hi the most
advanced industrial nation of the time, who provided scientific

underpinning for this view. He spoke of the blind workings of "natural
se-

INDUST-REALITY

101

lection'* — an inevitable process that mercilessly weeded out weak and
inefficient forms of life. Those species who survived were, by definition,
the fittest.

Darwin was chiefly concerned with biological evolution, but his ideas
had distinct social and political overtones that others were quick to
recognize. Thus the Social Darwinists argued that the principle of
natural selection worked within society as well, and that the wealthiest
and most powerful people were, by virtue of that fact, the fittest and the
most deserving.

It was only a short leap to the idea that whole societies evolve
according to the same laws of selection. Following this reasoning,
industrialism was a higher stage of evolution than the non-industrial
cultures that surrounded it. Second Wave civilization, to put it bluntly,
was superior to all the rest.

Just as Social Darwinism rationalized capitalism, this cultural
arrogance rationalized imperialism. The expanding industrial order
needed its lifeline to cheap resources, and it created a moral
justification for taking them at depressed prices, even at the cost of
obliterating agricultural and so-called primitive societies. The idea of
social evolution provided intellectual and moral support for the
treatment of non-industrial peoples as inferior — and hence unfitted for
survival.

Darwin himself wrote unfeelingly of the massacre of the aborigines of
Tasmania and, in a burst of genocidal enthusiasm, prophesied that "At
some future period ... the civilized races of man will almost certainly
exterminate, and replace, the savage races throughout the world." The
intellectual front-runners of Second Wave civilization had no doubt
about who deserved to survive.

While Marx bitterly criticized capitalism and imperialism, he shared the
view that industrialism was the most advanced form of society, the
stage toward which all other societies would inevitably advance in turn.

For the third core belief of indust-reality that linked nature and
evolution together was the progress principle — the idea that history
flows irreversibly toward a better life for humanity. This idea, too, had
plenty of preindustrial precedent. But it was only with the advance of
the Second Wave that the idea of Progress with a capital P burst into
full flower.

Suddenly, as the Second Wave pulsed over Europe a thousand throats
began to sing the same hallelujah chorus. Leibniz, Turgot, Condorcet,
Kant, Lessing, John Stuart Mill,

102 THE THIRD WAVE

Hegel, Marx, Darwin, and countless lesser thinkers all found reasons
for cosmic optimism. They argued over whether progress was truly
inevitable or whether it needed a helping hand from the human race;
over what constituted a better life; over whether progress would or
could continue ad infi-nitum. But they all nodded in agreement at the
notion of progress itself.

Atheists and divines, students and professors, politicians and scientists
preached the new faith. Businessmen and commissars alike heralded
each new factory, each new product, each new housing development,
highway, or dam as evidence of this irresistible advance from bad to
good or good to better. Poets, playwrights, and painters took progress
for granted. Progress justified the degradation of nature and the
conquest of "less advanced" civilizations.

And once more the same idea ran parallel through the works of both
Adam Smith and Karl Marx. As Robert Heil-broner has noted, "Smith
was a believer hi progress. ... In The Wealth of Nations progress was
no longer an idealistic goal of mankind, but ... a destination to which it
was driven ... a by-product of private economic aims." For Marx, of
course, these private aims produced only capitalism and the seeds of
its own destruction. But this event in itself was part of the long
historical sweep carrying humanity forward to socialism, communism,
and an even better beyond. Throughout Second Wave civilization,
therefore, three key concepts — the war with nature, the importance of
evolution, and the progress principle — provided the ammunition used
by the agents of industrialism as they explained and justified it to the
world.

Beneath these convictions lay still deeper assumptions about reality —
a set of unspoken beliefs about the very ele-mentals of human
experience. Every human being must deal with these elementals, and
every civilization describes them in a different way. Every civilization
must teach its children to grapple with tune and space. It must
explain — whether through myth, metaphor, or scientific theory — how
nature works. And it must offer some clue to why things happen as
they do.

Thus Second Wave civilization, as it matured, created a wholly new
image of reality, based on its own distinctive assumptions about time
and space, matter and cause. Picking up fragments from the past,
piecing them together in new

INDUST-REALITY

103

ways, applying experiment and empirical tests, it drastically altered the
way human beings came to perceive the world around them and how
they behaved in their daily lives.

THE SOFTWARE OF TIME

We have seen in an earlier chapter how the spread of industrialism
was dependent upon the synchronization of human behavior with the

rhythms of the machine. Synchronization was on© of the- guiding
principles of Second Wave civilization, and everywhere the people of
industrialism appeared to outsiders to be time-obsessed, always
glancing nervously at their watches.

To bring about this time-consciousness and achieve synchronization,
however, people's basic assumptions about time — their mental images
of time — had to be transformed. A new "software of time" was needed.

Agricultural populations, needing to know when to plant and when to
harvest, developed remarkable precision in the measurement of long
spans of time. But because they did not require close synchronization
of human labor, peasant peoples seldom developed precise units for
measuring short spans. They typically divided time not into fixed units,
like hours or minutes, but into loose, imprecise chunks representing
the length of time needed to perform some homely task. A farmer
might refer to an interval as "a cow milking time." In Madagascar, an
accepted unit of time was called "a rice cooking"; a moment was
known as "the frying of a locust" Englishmen spoke of a "pater noster
wyle" — the tune needed for a prayer — or, more earthily, of a "pissing
while."

Similarly, because there was little exchange between one community
or village and the next, and because work did not require it, the units in
which time was mentally packaged varied from place to place and
season to season. In medieval northern Europe, for example, daylight
was divided into equal hours. But since the interval between dawn and
sunset varied from day to day, an "hour" in December was shorter than
an "hour" in March or June.

Instead of vague intervals like a pater noster wyle, industrial societies
needed extremely precise units like hour, minute, or second. And these
units had to be standardized, interchangeable from one season or
community to the next. Today the entire world is neatly divided into
time zones.

104

THE THIRD WAVE

We speak of "standard" time. Pilots all over the globe refer back to
"Zulu" time — i.e., Greenwich Mean Time. By international convention
Greenwich, England, became the point from which all time differences
would be measured. Periodically, hi unison, as though motivated by a
single will, millions of people set their clocks back or forward an hour,
and whatever our inner, subjective sense of things may tell us when
time is dragging, or conversely when it seems to be whizzing by, an
hour is now a single interchangeable, standardized hour.

Second Wave civilization did more than cut tune up into more precise
and standard chunks. It also placed these chunks in a straight line that
extended indefinitely back into the past and forward into the future. It
made time linear.

Indeed, the assumption that time is linelike is so deeply embedded in
our thoughts that it is hard for those of us raised hi Second Wave

societies to conceive of any alternative. Yet many preindustrial
societies, and some First Wave societies even today, see time as a
circle, not a straight line. From the Mayas to the Buddhists and the
Hindus, time was circular and repetitive, history repeating itself
endlessly, lives perhaps reliving themselves through reincarnation.

The idea that time was like a great circle is found in the Hindu concept
of recurrent kalpas, each one four thousand million years long, each
representing but a single Brahma day beginning with re-creation,
ending hi dissolution, and beginning again. The notion of circular time
is found in Plato and Aristotle, one of whose students, Eudemus,
pictured himself living through the same moment again and again as
the cycle repeated itself. It was taught by Pythagoras. In Time and
Eastern Man, Joseph Needham tells us that "For the Indo-Hellenic . . .
time is cyclical and eternal.*' Moreover, while in China the idea of linear
time dominated, according to Needham, "Cyclical time was certainly
prominent among the early Taoist speculative philosophers."

In Europe, too, in the centuries preceding industrialization, these
alternative views of time coexisted. "Throughout the whole medieval
period," writes mathematician G. J. Whit-row, "the cyclic and linear
concepts of time were in conflict The linear concept was fostered by
the mercantile class and the rise of a money economy. For as long as
power was concentrated in the ownership of land, time was felt to be
plentiful and was associated with the unchanging cycle of the soil."

INDUST-REALITY

105

As the Second Wave gathered force this age-old conflict was settled:
linear time triumphed. Linear time became the dominant view in every
industrial society. East or West. Time came to be seen as a highway
unrolling from a distant past through the present toward the future, and
this conception of time, alien to billions of humans who lived before
industrial civilization, became the basis of all economic, scientific, and
political planning, whether in the executive suite of IBM, the Japanese
Economic Planning Agency, or the Soviet Academy.

It is worth noting, however, that linear time was a precondition for
indust-real views of evolution and progress. Linear time made
evolution and progress plausible. For if time were circular instead of
linelike, if events doubled back on themselves instead of moving in a
single direction, it would mean that history repeated itself and that
evolution and progress were no more than illusions — shadows on the
wall of time.

Synchronization. Standardization. Linearization. They affected the root
assumptions of the civilization and they brought massive changes in
the way ordinary people handled time in their lives. But if time itself
was transformed, space, too, had to be repackaged to fit into the new
indust-reality.

REPACKAGING SPACE

Long before the dawn of First Wave civilization, when our most distant
ancestors relied on hunting and herding, fishing, or foraging for
survival, they kept constantly on the move. Driven by hunger, cold, or
ecological mishaps, pursuing weather or game, they were the original
"high-mobiles" — traveling light, avoiding the accumulation of
cumbersome goods or property, and ranging widely over the
landscape. A band of fifty men, women, and children might need a land
area six times the size of Manhattan Island to feed them, or they might
trace a migratory path over literally hundreds of miles each year as
conditions demanded. They led what today's geographers call a
"spatially extensive*' existence.

First Wave civilization, by contrast, bred a race of "space misers." As
nomadism was replaced by agriculture, migratory trails gave way to
cultivated fields and permanent settlements. Rather than roaming
restlessly over an extensive area, the farmer and his family stayed put,
intensively working their

106 THE THIRD WAVE

tiny patch, within the larger sea of space — a sea so large as to dwarf
the individual.

By the period immediately preceding the birth of industrial civilization,
vast open fields surrounded each huddle of peasant huts. Apart from a
handful of merchants, scholars, and soldiers, most individuals lived
their lives at the end of a very short tether. They walked to the fields at
sunrise, then back again at nightfall. They traced a path to church. On
rare occasions they trekked to the next village six or seven miles away.
Conditions varied with climate and terrain, of course, but according to
historian J. R. Hale, "We should probably not be far wrong if we took
the average longest journey made by most people in their lifetimes as
fifteen miles." Agriculture produced a "spatially restricted" civilization.

The industrial storm that broke over Europe in the eighteenth century
created once again a "spatially extended" culture — but now on a nearly
planetary scale. Goods, people, and ideas were transported thousands
of miles and vast populations migrated in search of jobs. Instead of
production being widely dispersed in the fields, it was now
concentrated in cities. Huge, teeming populations were compressed
into a few tightly packed nodes. Old villages shriveled and died;
booming industrial centers sprang up, rimmed with smokestacks and
furnace fire.

This dramatic reworking of the landscape required much more complex
coordination between city and country. Thus food, energy, people, and
raw materials had to flow into the urban nodes, while manufactured
goods, fashions, ideas, and financial decisions flowed out. The two
flows were carefully integrated and coordinated in time and space.
Within the cities themselves, moreover, a much wider variety of spatial
shapes was needed. In the old agricultural system the basic physical
structures were a church, a nobleman's palace, some wretched huts,
an occasional tavern or monastery. Second Wave civilization, because
of its much more elaborate division of labor, demanded many more
specialized types of space.

Architects, for this reason, soon found themselves creating offices,
banks, police stations, factories, railroad terminals, department stores,
prisons, fire houses, asylums, and theaters. These many different
types of space had to be fitted together in logically functional ways.

The location of factories, the pathways that led from home to shop, the
relationships of rail-

INDUST-REALITY

107

road sidings to docks or truck yards, the placement of schools and
hospitals, of water pipes, power stations, conduits, gas lines, telephone
exchanges — all had to be spatially coordinated. Space had to be as
carefully organized as a Bach fugue.

This remarkable coordination of specialized spaces — necessary to get
the right people to the right places at the right moment — was the exact
spatial analogue of temporal synchronization. It was, in effect,
synchronization in space. For both time and space had to be more
carefully structured if industrial societies were to function.

Just as people had to be provided with more exact and standardized
units of tune, they also needed more precise and interchangeable units
of space. Prior to the industrial revolution, when time was still being
sliced up into crude units like pater noster wyles, spatial measures,
too, were a mishmash. In medieval England, for example, a "rood"
might be as little as sixteen and a half feet or as much as twenty-four
feet In the sixteenth century the best advice on how to arrive at a
measured rood was to select sixteen men at random as they walked
out of church, to stand them in a line "then* left feet one behind the
other," and to measure off the resulting distance. Even vaguer terms
were used, such as "a day's ride,** "an hour's walk," or "half an hour's
canter."

Such looseness could no longer be tolerated once the Second Wave
began to change work patterns, and the invisible wedge created an
ever-expanding marketplace. Precise navigation, for example, became
more and more important as trade increased, and governments offered
huge prizes to anyone who could devise better methods of keeping
merchant ship? on course. On land, too, more and more refined
measurements and more precise units were introduced.

The confusing, contradictory, chaotic variety of local customs, laws,
and trade practices that prevailed during First Wave civilization had to
be cleaned up, rationalized. Lack of precision and standard
measurement were a daily aggravation to manufacturers and the rising
merchant class. This explains the enthusiasm with which the French
revolutionaries, at the dawn of the industrial era, applied themselves to
the standardization- of distance through the metric system as well as
time through a new calendar. So important did they deem these
problems that they were among the very first items taken up when the
National Convention first met to declare a republic.

108

THE THIRD WAVE

The Second Wave of change also brought with it a multiplication and
sharpening of spatial boundaries. Until the eighteenth century the
boundaries of empires were often imprecise. Because vast areas were
unpopulated, precision was unnecessary. As population rose, trade
increased, and the first factories began to spring up around Europe,
many governments began systematically to map their frontiers.
Customs zones were more clearly delineated. Local and even private
properties came to be more carefully defined, marked, fenced, and
recorded. Maps became more detailed, inclusive, and standardized.

A new image of space arose that corresponded exactly to the new
image of time. As punctuality and scheduling set more limits and
deadlines in tune, more and more boundaries cropped up to set limits
in space. Even the linearization of time had its spatial counterpart.

In preindustrial societies straight-line travel, whether by land or sea,
was an anomaly. The peasant's path, the cowpath or Indian trail, all
meandered according to the lay of the land. Many walls curved,
bulged, or went off at irregular angles. The streets of medieval cities
folded in on one another, curved, twisted, convoluted.

Second Wave societies not only put ships on exact straight-line
courses, they also built railroads whose shining tracks stretched in
parallel straight lines as far as the eye could see. As the American
planning official Grady Clay has noted, these rail lines (the term itself is
a giveaway) became the axis off which new cities, built on grid
patterns, took shape. The grid or gridiron pattern, combining straight
lines with ninety-degree angles, lent a characteristic machine regularity
and linearity to the landscape.

Even now in looking at a city one can see a jumble of streets, squares,
circles, and complicated intersections in the older districts. These
frequently give way to neat gridirons in those parts of the city built hi
later, more industrialized periods. The same is true for whole regions
and countries.

Even farm land began, with mechanization, to show linear patterns.
Preindustrial farmers, plowing behind oxen, created curvy, irregular
furrows. Once the ox had started, the farmer did not want to stop him
and the beast curved wide at the end of the furrow, forming a kind of S-
curve pattern hi the land. Today anyone looking out the window of an
airplane sees squared off fields with ruler-straight plow marks.

The combination of straight lines and ninety-degree angles

INDUST-REALITY

109

was reflected not merely on the land and in the streets but in the
intimate spaces experienced by most men and women — the rooms
they lived in. Curved walls and non-right angles are seldom found in
industrial age architecture. Neat rectangular cubicles came to replace
irregularly shaped rooms, and high-rise buildings carried the straight

line vertically toward the sky as well, with windows forming linear or
grid patterns on the great walls facing the now straight streets.

Thus our conception of and experience of space went through a
process of linearization that paralleled the linearization of time. In all
industrial societies, capitalist or socialist, Eastern or Western, the
specialization of architectural spaces, the detailed map, the use of
uniform, precise units of measurement and, above all, the line, became
a cultural constant — basic to the new indust-reality.

THE "STUFF" OF REALITY

Second Wave civilization not only built up new images of time and
space and used them to shape daily behavior, it constructed its own
answers to the age-old question: What are things made of? Every
culture invents its own myths and metaphors in an attempt to answer
this question. For some, the universe is imagined as a swirling
"oneness." People are seen as a part of nature, integrally tied into the
lives of their ancestors and descendants, stitched into the natural world
so closely as to share in the actual "livingness" of animals, trees,
rocks, and rivers. In many societies, moreover, the individual
conceives of herself or himself less as a private, autonomous entity
than as part of a larger organism — the family, the clan, the tribe or
community.

Other societies have emphasized not the wholeness or unity of the
universe but its dividedness. They have looked upon reality not as a
fused entity but as a structure built up out of many individual parts.

Some two thousand years before the rise of industrialism Democritus
put forward the then extraordinary idea that the universe was not a
seamless whole but consisted of particles — discrete, indestructible,
irreducible, invisible, unsplit-table. He called these particles atomos. In
the centuries that followed, the idea of a universe built out of
irreducible blocks of matter appeared and reappeared. In China shortly
after Democritus' time, in the Mo Ching, a "point" was apparently

110

THE THIRD WAVE

defined as a line that had been chopped into such short segments that
it could no longer be subdivided. In India, too, the theory of the atom or
irreducible unit of reality cropped up not long after the time of Christ. In
ancient Rome the poet Lucretius expounded the atomist philosophy.
Nevertheless, this image of matter remained a minority view, often
derided or neglected.

It was not until the dawn of the Second Wave era that atomism
became a dominating idea as several streams of intermingling
influences converged to revolutionize our conception of matter.

In the middle of the seventeenth century a French abbe" named Pierre
Gassendi, an astronomer and philosopher at the Royal College in
Paris, began arguing that matter must consist of ultra-small
corpuscula. Influenced by Lucretius, Gassendi became so forceful an

advocate of the atomic view of matter that his ideas soon crossed the
English Channel and reached Robert Boyle, a young scientist studying
the compressibility of gas. Boyle transferred the idea of atomism from
speculative theory into the laboratory and concluded that even air itself
was composed of tiny particles. Six years after Gassendi's death,

Boyle published a treatise arguing that any substance — earth, for
example — that could be broken down into simpler substances is not,
and could not be, an element.

Meanwhile, Rene" Descartes, a Jesuit-trained mathematician whom
Gassendi criticized, contended that reality could only be understood by
breaking it down into smaller and smaller bits. In his own words, it was
necessary "to divide each of the difficulties under examination into as
many parts as possible." Side by side, therefore, as the Second Wave
began its surge, philosophical atomism advanced with physical
atomism.

Here was a deliberate assault on the notion of oneness — an assault
promptly joined by wave after wave of scientists, mathematicians, and
philosophers who proceeded to break the universe into even smaller
fragments, with exciting results. Once Descartes published his
Discourse on Method, writes the microbiologist Rene Dubos,
"innumerable discoveries immediately emerged from its application to
medicine." In chemistry and other fields the combination of atomic
theory and Descartes's atomic method brought startling breakthroughs.
By the mid-1700's the notion that the universe consisted of
independent separable parts and subparts was

INDUST-REALITY

111

itself conventional wisdom — part of the emerging indust-reality.

Every new civilization plucks ideas from the past and reconfigures
them in ways that help it understand itself in relationship to the world.
For a budding industrial society — a society just beginning to move
toward the mass production of assembled machine products
composed of discrete components — the idea of an assembled
universe, itself composed of discrete components, was probably
indispensable.

There were political and social reasons, too, for the acceptance of the
atomic model of reality. As the Second Wave crashed against the old
pre-existing First Wave institutions, it needed to tear people loose from
the extended family, the all-powerful church, the monarchy. Industrial
capitalism needed a rationale for individualism. As the old agricultural
civilization decayed, as trade expanded and towns multiplied in the
century or two before the dawn of industrialism, the rising merchant
classes, demanding the freedom to trade and lend and expand their
markets, gave rise to a new conception of the individual — the person
as atom.

The person was no longer merely a passive appendage of tribe, caste,
or clan but a free, autonomous individual. Each individual had the right
to own property, to acquire goods, to wheel and deal, to prosper, to

starve according to his or her own active efforts, with the
corresponding right to choose a religion and to pursue private
happiness. In short, indust-real-ity gave rise to a conception of an
individual who was remarkably like an atom — irreducible,
indestructible, the basic particle of society.

The atomic theme even appeared, as we have seen, in politics, where
the vote became the ultimate particle. It appeared in our conception of
international affairs as consisting of self-contained, impenetrable,
independent units called nations. Not only physical matter but social
and political matter were conceived in terms of "bricks" — autonomous
units or atoms. The atomic theme ran through every sphere of life.

This view of reality as composed of organized separable chunks, in
turn, fitted perfectly together with the new images of time and space,
themselves divisible into smaller and smaller definable units. Second
Wave civilization, as it expanded and overpowered both "primitive"
societies and First Wave civilization, propagated this increasingly
coherent and consistent industrial view of people, politics, and society.

112 THE THIRD WAVE

One final piece was missing, however, to complete the logical system.
THE ULTIMATE WHY

Unless a civilization has some explanation for why things happen —
even if its explanation is nine parts mystery to one part analysis — it
cannot program lives effectively. People, in carrying out the
imperatives of their culture, need some reassurance that their behavior
will produce results. And this implies some answer to the perennial
why. Second Wave civilization came up with a theory so powerful it
seemed sufficient to explain everything.

A rock smashes into the surface of a pond. Ripples swiftly radiate out
across the water. Why? What causes this event? Chances are that
children of industrialism would say, "because someone threw it."

An educated European gentlemen of the twelfth or thirteenth century,
in attempting to answer this question, would have had ideas
remarkably different from our own. He probably would have relied on
Aristotle and searched for a material cause, a formal cause, an
efficient cause, and a final cause, no one of which would, by itself,
have been sufficient to explain anything. A medieval Chinese sage
might have spoken about the yin and yang, and the force-field of
influences in which all phenomena were believed to occur.

Second Wave civilization found its answer to the mysteries of
causation in Newton's spectacular discovery of the universal law of
gravitation. For Newton, causes were "the forces impressed upon
bodies to generate motion." The conventional example of Newtonian
cause and effect is the billiard balls that strike one another and move in
response to one another. This notion of change, which focused
exclusively on outside forces that are measurable and readily
identifiable, was extremely powerful because it dovetailed perfectly
with the new indust-real notions of linear space and time. Indeed,

Newtonian or mechanistic causation, which came to be adopted as the
industrial revolution spread over Europe, pulled indust-reality together
into a hermetically sealed package.

If the world consisted of separate particles — miniature billiard balls —
then all causes arose from the interaction of these balls. One particle
or atom struck another. The first was the cause of the movement of the
next. That movement was the

INDUST-REALITY

113

effect of the movement of the first There was no action without motion
in space, and no atom could be in more than one place at one time.

Suddenly a universe that had seemed complex, cluttered,
unpredictable, richly crowded, mysterious, and messy, began to look
neat and tidy. Every phenomenon from the atom inside a human cell to
the coldest star in the distant night sky could be understood as matter
in motion, each particle activating the next, forcing it to move in an
endless dance of existence. For the atheist this view provided an
explanation of life in which, as Laplace later put it, the hypothesis of
God was unnecessary. For the religious, however, it still left room for
God, since He could be regarded as the Prime Mover who used the
cue stick to set the billiard balls in motion, then perhaps retired from
the game.

This metaphor for reality came like a shot of intellectual adrenaline into
the emerging indust-real culture. One of the radical philosophers who
helped set the climate of the French Revolution, the Baron d'Holbach,
exulted, "The universe, that vast assemblage of everything that exists,
presents only matter and motion: the whole offers to our contemplation
nothing but an immense, an uninterrupted succession of causes and
effects."

It is all there — all implied in that one short, triumphant statement: the
universe is an assembled reality, made of discrete parts put together
into an "assemblage." Matter can only be understood hi terms of
motion — i.e., movement through space. Events occur in a [linear]
succession, a parade of events moving down the line of time. Human
passions like hatred, selfishness, or love, d'Holbach went on, could be
compared to physical forces like repulsion, inertia, or traction, and a
wise political state could manipulate them for the public good just as
science could manipulate the physical world for the common good.

It is precisely from this indust-real image of the universe, from the
assumptions buried within it, that some of the most potent of our
personal, social, and political behavior patterns have come. Buried
within them was the implication that not only the cosmos and nature
but society and people behaved according to certain fixed and
predictable laws. Indeed, the greatest thinkers of the Second Wave
were precisely those who most logically and forcefully argued the
lawfulness of the universe.

Newton seemed to have discovered the laws that pro-

114 THE THIRD WAVE

grammed the heavens. Darwin had identified laws that programmed
social evolution. And Freud supposedly laid bare the laws that
programmed the psyche. Others — scientists, engineers, social
scientists, psychologists — pressed the search for still more, or
different, laws.

Second Wave civilization now had at its command a theory of causality
that seemed miraculous in its power and wide applicability. Much that
hitherto had seemed complex could be reduced to simple explanatory
formulae. Nor were these laws or rules to be accepted simply because
Newton or Marx or someone laid them down. They were subject to
experiment and empirical test. They could be validated. Using them,
we could build bridges, send radio waves into the sky, predict and
retrodict biological change; we could manipulate the economy,
organize political movements or machines, and even — so they
claimed — foresee and shape the behavior of the ultimate individual.

All that was needed was to find the critical variable to explain any
phenomenon. We could accomplish anything if only we could find the
appropriate ''billiard ball' and hit it from the best angle.

This new causality, combined with the new images of time, space, and
matter, liberated much of the human race from the tyranny of ancient
mumbo jumbo. It made possible triumphant achievements in science
and technology, miracles of conceptualization and practical
accomplishment. It challenged authoritarianism and liberated the mind
from millennia of imprisonment.

But indust-reality also created its own new prison, an industrial
mentality that derogated or ignored what it could not quantify, that
frequently praised critical rigor and punished imagination, that reduced
people to oversimplified protoplasmic units, that ultimately sought an
engineering solution for any problem.

Nor was indust-reality as morally neutral as it pretended to be. It was,
as we have seen, the militant super-ideology of Second Wave
civilization, the self-justifying source from which all the characteristic
left-wing and right-wing ideologies of the industrial age sprang. Like
any culture, Second Wave civilization produced distorting filters
through which its people came to see themselves and the universe.

This package of ideas, images, assumptions — and the analogies that
flowed from them — formed the most powerful cultural system in history.

INDUST-REALITY

115

Finally, indust-reality, the cultural face of industrialism, fitted the society
it helped to construct. It helped create the society of big organizations,
big cities, centralized bureaucracies, and the all-pervasive
marketplace, whether capitalist or socialist. It dovetailed perfectly with
the new energy systems, family systems, technological systems,

economic systems, political and value systems that together formed
the civilization of the Second Wave.

It is that entire civilization taken together, along with its institutions,
technologies, and its culture, that is now disintegrating under an
avalanche of change as the Third Wave, in its turn, surges across the
planet. We live in the final, irretrievable crisis of industrialism. And as
the industrial age passes into history, a new age is born.

CODA:

THE FLASH FLOOD

One mystery remains. Industrialism was a flash flood in history — a brief
three centuries lost in the immensity of time. What caused the
industrial revolution? What sent the Second Wave surging across the
planet?

Many streams of change flowed together to form a great confluence.

The discovery of the New World sent a pulse of energy into Europe's
culture and economy on the eve of the industrial revolution. Population
growth encouraged a movement into the towns. The exhaustion of
Britain's timber forests prompted the use of coal. In turn, this forced the
mine shafts deeper and deeper until the old horse-driven pumps could
no longer clear them of water. The steam engine was perfected to
solve this problem, leading to a fantastic array of new technological
opportunities. The gradual dissemination of indust-real ideas
challenged church and political authority. The spread of literacy, the
improvement of roads and transport — all these converged in time,
forcing open the floodgates of change.

Any search for The cause of the industrial revolution is doomed. For
there was no single or dominant cause. Technology, by itself, is not the
driving force of history. Nor, by themselves, are ideas or values. Nor is
the class struggle. Nor is history merely a record of ecological shifts,
demographic trends or communications inventions. Economics alone
cannot explain this or any other historical event. There is no
"independent variable" upon which all other variables depend. There
are only interrelated variables, boundless in complexity. Faced with
this maze of causal influences, unable even to 1 16

CODA: THE FLASH FLOOD

117

trace all their interactions, the most we can do is focus on those that
seem most revealing for our purposes and recognize the distortion
implicit in that choice. In this spirit, it is clear that of all the many forces
that flowed together to form Second Wave civilization, few had more
traceable consequences than the widening split between producer and
consumer, and the growth of that fantastic exchange network we now
call the market, whether capitalist or socialist in form.

The greater the divorce of producer from consumer — in time, in
space, and in social and psychic distance — the more the market, in all

its astonishing complexity, with all its train of values, its implicit
metaphors and hidden assumptions, came to dominate social reality.

As we have seen, this invisible wedge produced the entire modern
money system with its central banking institutions, its stock exchanges,
its world trade, its bureaucratic planners, its quantitative and
calculating spirit, its contractual ethic, its materialist bias, its narrow
measurement of success, its rigid reward systems, and its powerful
accounting apparatus, whose cultural significance we routinely
underestimate. From this divorce of producer from consumer came
many of the pressures toward standardization, specialization,
synchronization, and centralization. From it came differences in sexual
role and temperament. However we evaluate the many other forces
that launched the Second Wave, this splitting of the ancient atom of
production and/or consumption must surely rank high among them.

The shock waves of that fission are still apparent today.

Second Wave civilization did not merely alter technology, nature, and
culture. IL altered personality, helping to produce a new social
character. OF course, women and children shaped Second Wave
civilization and were shaped by it. But because men were drawn more
directly into the market matrix and the new modes of work, they took
on more pronounced industrial characteristics than women, and
women readers will perhaps forgive the use of the term Industrial Man
to sum up these new characteristics.

Industrial Man was different from all his forerunners. He was the
master of "energy slaves" that amplified his puny

power enormously. He spent much of his life in a factory -style
environment, in touch with machines and organizations that dwarfed
the individual. He learned, almost from infancy, that survival depended
as never before on money. He typi-cally grew up in a nuclear Family,
and went to a factory-style

118

THE THIRD WAVE

school. He got his basic image of the world from the mass media. He
worked for a large corporation or public agency, belonged to unions,
churches, and other organizations — to each of which he parceled out a
piece of his divided self. He identified less and less with his village or
city than with his nation. He saw himself standing in opposition to
nature — exploiting it daily in his work. Yet he paradoxically rushed to
visit it on weekends. (Indeed, the more he savaged nature, the more
he romanticized and revered it with words.) He learned to see himself
as part of vast, interdependent economic, social, and political systems
whose edges faded into complexities beyond his understanding.

Faced with this reality, he rebelled without success. He fought to make
a living. He learned to play the games required by society, fitted into
his assigned roles, often hating them and feeling himself a victim of the
very system that improved his standard of living. He sensed straight-
line time bearing him remorselessly toward trie mture with its waiting
grave. And as his wristwatch ticked off the moments, he approached

death knowing that the earth and every individual on it, including
himself, were merely part of a larger cosmic machine whose motions
were regular and relentless.

Industrial Man occupied an environment that would have been in many
respects unrecognizable to his ancestors. Even the most elementary
sensory signals were different.

The Second Wave changed the soundscape, substituting the factory
whistle for the rooster, the screech of tires for the chirruping of crickets.
It lit up the night, extending the hours of awareness. It brought visual
images no eye had ever seen before — the earth photographed from
the sky, or surrealist montages in the local cinema, or biological forms
revealed for the first time by high-powered microscopes. The odor of
night soil gave way to the smell of gasoline and the stench of phenols.
The tastes of meat and vegetables were altered. The entire perceptual
landscape was transformed.

So too was the human body, which for the first time grew to what we
now regard as its full normal height; successive generations grew taller
than their parents. Attitudes toward the body changed as well. Norbert
Elias tell us in The Civilizing Process that, whereas up to the sixteenth
century in Germany and elsewhere in Europe, "the sight of total
nakedness was an everyday rule, "nakedness came to be regarded as
shameful when the Second Wave spread. Bedroom behavior changed
as special nightclothes came into use. Eating became

CODA: THE FLASH FLOOD

119

technologized with the diffusion of forks and other specialized table
implements. From a culture that took active pleasure in the sight of a
dead animal on the table came a shift toward one in which "reminders
that the meat dish has something to do with the killing of an animal are
to be avoided to the utmost.'*.

Marriage became more than an economic convenience. War was
amplified and put on the assembly line. Changes in the parent-child
relationship, in opportunities for upward mobility, in every aspect of
human relations brought for millions a radically changed sense of self.

Faced by so many changes, psychological as well as economic,
political as well as social, the brain boggles at evaluation. By what
criteria do we judge an entire civilization? By the standard of living it
provided for the masses who lived in it? By its influence on those who
lived outside its perimeter? By its impact on the biosphere? By the
excellence of its arts? By the lengthened life span of its people? By its
scientific achievements? By the freedom of the individual?

Within its borders, despite massive economic depressions and a
horrifying waste of human life, .Second Waye civiliza-tion clearly
improved the material standard of living of the ordinary person. Critics
of industrialism, in describing the mass misery of the working class
during the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries in Britain, often
romanticize the First Wave past. They picture that rural past as warm,

communal, stable, organic, and with spiritual rather than purely
materialist values. Yet historical research reveals that these
supposedly lovely rural communities were, in fact, cesspools of
malnutrition, disease, poverty, homelessness, and tyranny, with people
helpless against hunger, cold, and the whips of their landlords and
masters.

Much has been made of the hideous slums that sprang up in or around
the major cities, of the adulterated food, disease-bearing water
supplies, the poorhouses and daily squalor. Yet, terrible as these
conditions unquestionably were, they surely represented a vast
improvement over the conditions most of these same people had left
behind. The British author John Vaizey has noted, "The picture of
bucolic yeoman England was an exaggerated one," and for significant
numbers the move to the urban slum provided "in fact a dramatic rise
in the standard of living, measured in terms of length of life, of a rise in
the physical conditions of housing, and an im-

120

THE THIRD WAVE

provement in the amount and variety of what they had to eat"

In terms of health, one need only read The Age of Agony by Guy
Williams or Death, Disease and Famine in Pre-Indus-trial England by
L. A. Clarkson to counteract those who glorify First Wave civilization at
the expense of Second. Christina Lamer, in a review of these books,
states, "The work of social historians and demographers has
highlighted the overwhelming presence of disease, pain and death in
the open countryside as well as the noxious towns. Life expectancy
was low: about 40 years in the 16th century, reduced to the mid-thirties
in the epidemic-ridden 17th century, and rising to the early forties in the
18th. ... It was rare for married couples to have long years together ...
all children were at hazard." However justly we may criticize today's
crisis-ridden, misdirected health systems, it is worth recalling that
before the industrial revolution official medicine was deadly,
emphasizing bloodletting and surgery without anesthesia.

The major causes of death were plague, typhus, influenza, dysentery,
smallpox, and tuberculosis. "It is often observed by the sages," Lamer
writes dryly, "that we have merely replaced these by a different set of
killers, but these do leave us till a little later. Pre-industrial epidemic
disease killed the young indiscriminately with the old."

Moving from health and economics to art and ideology — was
industrialism, for all its narrow-minded materialism, any more mentally
stultifying than the feudal societies that preceded it? Was the
mechanistic mentality, or indust-reality, any less open to new ideas,
even heresies, than the medieval church or the monarchies of the
past? For all we detest our giant bureaucracies, are they more rigid
than the Chinese bureaucracies of centuries ago, or ancient Egyptian
hierarchies? And as for art, are the novels and poems and paintings of
the past three hundred years in the West any less alive, profound,
revealing, or complex than the works of earlier periods or different
places?

The dark side, however, is also present. While Second Wave
civilization did much to improve the conditions of our "fathers and
mothers, it also triggered violent external conse-quences —
unanticipated side effects. Among these was the rampant, perhaps
irreparable damage done to the earth's fragile biosphere. Because of
its indust-real bias against

nature, because of its expanding population, its brute technol-
CODA: THE FLASH FLOOD
121

ogy, and its incessant need for expansion, it wreaked more
environmental havoc than any preceding age. I have read the
accounts'of horse dung in the streets of preindustrial cities (usually
offered as reassuring evidence that pollution is nothing new). I am
aware that sewage filled the streets of ancient towns. Nevertheless,
industrial society raised the problems of ecological pollution and
resource use to a radically new level, making the present and past
incommensurable.

Never before did any civilization create the means for literally
destroying not a city but a planet. Never did whole oceans face
toxification, whole species vanish overnight from the earth as a result
of human greed or inadvertence; never did mines scar the earth's
surface so savagely; never did hair-spray aerosols deplete the ozone
layer, or thermopollu-tion threaten the planetary climate.

Similar but even more complex is the question of imperial-ism. The
enslavement of Indians to dig the mines of South America, the
introduction of plantation farming in large parts of Africa and Asia, the
deliberate distortion of colonial economies to suit the needs of the
industrial nations, all left agony, hunger, disease, and deculturation in
their wake. The racism exuded by Second Wave civilization, the forced
integration of small-scale self-sufficient economies into the world trade
system, left festering wounds that have not yet begun to heal.

However, once again it would be a mistake to glamorize these early
subsistence economies. It is questionable whether the populations of
even the non-industrial regions of the earth are worse off today than
they were three hundred years ago. In terms of life span, food intake,
infant mortality, literacy, as A well as human dignity, hundreds of
millions of human beings today, from the Sahel to Central America,
suffer indescribable miseries. Yet it would be a disservice to them to
invent a fake, romantic past in our rush to judge the present. The way
into the future is not through reversion to an even more miserable past.

Just as there is no single cause that produced Second Wave
civilization, so there can be no single evaluation. I have tried to present
a picture of Second Wave civilization with its faults included. If I appear
on the one hand to condemn it and on the other to approve, it is
because simple judgments are misleading. I detest the way
industrialism crushed First Wave and primitive peoples. I cannot forget

the way it massi-fied war and invented Auschwitz and unleashed the
atom to

122 THE THIRD WAVE

incinerate Hiroshima. I am ashamed of its cultural arrogance and its
depredations against the rest of the world. I am sickened by the waste
of human energy, imagination, and spirit in our ghettos and barrios.

Yet unreasoning hatred for one's own time and people is hardly the
best basis for creation of the future. Was industrialism an air-
conditioned nightmare, a wasteland, an unmitigated horror? Was it a
world of "single vision" as claimed by the enemies of science and
technology? No doubt. But it was far more than that as well. It was, like
life itself, a bittersweet instant in eternity.

However one chooses to evaluate the fading present, it is vital to
understand that the industrial game is over, its energies spent, the
force of the Second Wave diminshing everywhere as the next wave of
change begins. Two changes, by themselves, make the "normal"
continuation of inddustrial civ-ilization no longer possible.

First, we've reached a turning point in the "war against nature." The
biosphere will simply no longer tolerate the in-dustrial assault. Second,
we can no longer rely indefinitelv on nonrenewable energy, until now
the main subsidy of industrial development.

These facts do not mean the end of technological society, or the end of
energy. But they do mean that all future technological advance will be
shaped by new environmental constraints. They also mean that until
new sources are substituted, the industrial nations will suffer recurrent,
possibly violent withdrawal symptoms, with the struggle to substitute
new forms of energy itself accelerating social and political
transformation.

One thing is apparent: we are at the end — at least for some decades —
of cheap energy. Second Wave civilization has lost one of its two most
basic subsidies.

Simultaneously that other hidden subsidy is being withdrawn: cheap
raw materials. Faced with the end of colonialism and neoimperialism,
the high technology nations will either turn inward for new substitutes
and resources, buying from one another and gradually lessening their
economic ties with the non-industrial states, or they will continue
buying from the non-industrial countries but under totally new terms of
trade. In either case costs will rise substantially, and the entire
resource base of the civilization will be transformed along with its
energy base.

CODA: THE FLASH FLOOD

These external pressures on industrial society are matched by
disintegrative pressures inside the system. Whether we focus on the
"family system in th'e United States or the telephone system in France
(which is worse today than in some banana republics), or the
commuter rail system in Tokyo (which is so bad that riders have

stormed the stations and held rail officials hostage in protest), the story
is the same: people and systems strained to the ultimate breaking
point.

Second Wave systems are in crisis. Thus we find crisis hi the welfare
systems. Crisis in the postal systems. Crisis in the school systems.
Crisis in the health-delivery systems. Crisis in the urban systems.

Crisis in the international financial system. The nation-state itself is in
crisis. The Second Wave value system is in crisis.

Even the role system that held industrial civilization together is in crisis.
This we see most dramatically in the struggle to redefine sex roles. In
the women's movement, in the demands for the legalization of
homosexuality, in the spread of unisex fashions, we see a continual
blurring of the traditional expectations for the sexes. Occupational role-
lines are blurring, too. Nurses and patients alike are redefining their
roles vis-a-vis doctors. Police and teachers are breaking out of their
assigned roles and taking illegal strike action. Paralegals are redefining
the role of attorney. Workers, more and more, are demanding
participation, infringing on tradi tional management roles. And this
society-wide crack-up of the role structure upon which industrialism
depended is far more revolutionary in its implications than all the
overtly political protests and marches by which headline writers
measure change.

Finally, this convergence of pressures — the loss of key subsidies, the
malfunctioning of the main life-support systems of the society, the
break-up of the role structure — all produce crisis in that most elemental
and fragile of structures: the personality. The collapse of Second Wave
civilization has,

created an epidpmic of personality crisis.

Today we see millions desperately searching for their own shadows,
devouring movies, plays, novels, and self-help books, no matter how
obscure, that promise to help them lo cate their missing identities. In
the United States, as we shall see, the manifestations of the
personality crisis are bizarre.

Its victims hurl themselves into group therapy, mysticism, or sexual
games. They itch for change but are terrified by it. They urgently wish
to leave their present existences and leap,

124

THE THIRD WAVE

somehow, to a new life — to become what they are not. They, want to
change jobs, spouses, roles, and responsibilities.

Even supposedly mature and complacent American businessmen are
not exempt from this disaffection with the present. The American
Management Association finds in a recent survey that fully 40 percent
of middle managers are unhappy in their jobs, and over a third dream
of an alternative career in which they feel they would be happier. Some
act on their dissatisfaction. They drop out, become farmers or ski

bums, they search for new life-styles, they return to school or simply
chase themselves faster and faster around a shrinking circle and
eventually crack under the pressure.

Rooting about in themselves for the source of their discomfort, they
undergo agonies of unnecessary guilt. They seem blankly unaware
that what they are feeling inside themselves is the subjective reflection
of a much larger objective crisis: they are acting out an unwitting
drama within a drama.

One can persist in viewing each of these various crises as an isolated
event. We can ignore the connections between the energy crisis and
the personality crisis, between new technologies and new sexual roles,
and other such hidden interrelationships. But we do so at our peril. For
what is happening is larger than any of these. Once we think in terms
of successive waves of interrelated change, of the collision of these
waves, we grasp the essential fact of our generation — that
industrialism is dying away — and we can begin searching among signs
of change for what is truly new, what is no longer industrial. We can
identify the Third Wave.

It is this Third Wave of change that will frame the rest of our lives. If we
are to smooth the transition between the old dying civilization and the
new one that is taking form, if we are to maintain a sense of self and
the ability to manage our own lives through the intensifying crises that
lie ahead, we must be able to recognize — and create — Third Wave
innovations.

For if we look closely around us we find, crisscrossing the
manifestations of failure and collapse, early signs of growth and new
potential.

If we listen closely we can hear the Third Wave already thundering on
not so distant shores.

THE THIRD WAVE

THE NEW SYNTHESIS

In January 1950, just as the second half of the twentieth century
opened, a gangling twenty-two-year-old with a newly minted university
diploma took a long bus ride through the night into what he regarded
as the central reality of our time. With his girl friend at his side and a
pasteboard suitcase filled with books under the seat, he watched a
gunmetal dawn come up as the factories of the American Midwest slid
endlessly past the rain-swept window.

America was the heartland of the world. The region ringing the Great
Lakes was the industrial heartland of America. And the factory was the
throbbing core of this heart of hearts: steel mills, aluminum foundries,
tool and die shops, oil refineries, auto plants, mile after mile of dingy
buildings vibrating with huge machines for stamping, punching, drilling,
bending, welding, forging, and casting metal. The factory was the
symbol of the entire industrial era and, to a boy raised in a semi-
comfortable lower-middle-class home, after four years of Plato and T.

S. Eliot, of art history and abstract social theory, the world it
represented was as exotic as Tashkent or Tierra del Fuego.

I spent five years in those factories, not as a clerk or personnel
assistant but as an assembly hand, a millwright, a welder, a forklift
driver, a punch press operator — stamping out fans, fixing machines in
a foundry, building giant dust-control machines for African mines,
finishing the metal on light trucks as they sped clattering and
screeching past on the assembly line. I learned firsthand how factory
workers struggled to earn a living in the industrial age.

127

128

THE THIRD WAVE

I swallowed the dust, the sweat and smoke of the foundry. My ears
were split by the hiss of steam, the clank of chains, the roar of pug
mills. I felt the heat as the white-hot steel poured. Acetylene sparks left
burn marks on my legs. I turned out thousands of pieces a shift on a
press, repeating identical movements until my mind and muscles
shrieked. I watched the managers who kept the workers in their place,
white-shirted men themselves endlessly pursued and harried by
higher-ups. I helped lift a sixty-five-year-old woman out of the bloody
machine that had just torn four fingers off her hand, and I still hear her
cries — "Jesus and Mary, I won't be able to work againl'*

The factory. Long live the factory! Today, even as new factories are
being built, the civilization that made the factory into a cathedral is
dying. And somewhere, right now, other young men and women are
driving through the night into the heart of the emergent Third Wave
civilizaion. Our task from here on will be to join, as it were, their quest
for tomorrow.

If we could pursue them to their destinations, where would we arrive?

In the launching stations that hurl flaming vehicles and fragments of
human consciousness into outer space? In oceanographic
laboratories? In communal families? In teams working on artificial
intelligence? In passionate religious sects? Are they living in voluntary
simplicity? Are they climbing the corporate ladder? Are they running
guns to terrorists? Where is the future being forged?

If we ourselves were planning a similar expedition into the future, how
would we prepare our maps? It is easy to say the future begins in the
present. But which present? Our present is exploding with paradox.

Our children are supersophisticated about drugs, sex, or space shots;
some know far more about computers than their parents. Yet
educational test scores plummet. Divorce rates continue their climb —
but so do remarriage rates. Counter-feminists arise at the exact time
that women win rights even the counterfeminists endorse. Gays
demand their rights and come charging out of the closet — only to find
Anita Bryant waiting for them.

Intractable inflation grips all the Second Wave nations, yet
unemployment continues to deepen, contradicting all our classical
theories. At the very same time, in defiance of the logic of supply and
demand, millions are demanding not merely jobs but work that is
creative, psychologically ful-

THE NEW SYNTHESIS

129

filling, or socially responsible. Economic contradictions multiply-

In politics, parties lose the allegiance of their members at the precise
moment when key issues — technology, for example — are becoming
more politicized than ever. Meanwhile, over vast reaches of the earth,
nationalist movements gain power — at the exact instant that the nation-
state comes under intensifying attack in the name of globalism or
planetary consciousness.

Faced with such contradictions, how might we see behind the trends
and counter-trends? No one, alas, has any magic answer to that
question. Despite all the computer printouts, cluster diagrams, and
mathematical models and matrices that futurist researchers use, our
attempts to peer into tomorrow — or even to make sense of today —
remain, as they must, more an art than a science.

Systematic, research can teach us much. But in the end we must
embrace— not dismiss — paradox and contradiction, hunch,
imagination, and daring (though tentative) synthesis.

In probing the future in the pages that follow, therefore, we must do
more than identifvjmafor trends. Difficult as it may be, we must resist
the temptation to be seduced by straight lines. Most people — including
many futurists — conceive of tomorrow as a mere extension of today,
forgetting that trends, no matter how seemingly powerful, do not
merely continue in a linear fashion. They reach tipping points at which
they explode into new phenomena. They reverse direction. They stop
and start. Because something is happening now, or has been
happening for three hundred years, is no guarantee that it will
continue. We shall, in the pages ahead, watch for precisely those
contradictions, conflicts, turnabouts, and breakpoints that make the
future a continuing surprise.

More important, we will search out the hidden connections among
events that on the surface seem unrelated. It does little good to
forecast the future of semiconductors or energy, or the future of the
family (even one's own family), if the forecast springs from the premise
that everything else will remain unchanged. For nothing will remain
unchanged. The future is-fluid, not frozen. It is constructed by our
shifting and changing daily decisions, and each event influences all
others.

Second Wave civilization placed an extremely heavy emphasis on our
ability to dismantle problems into their components; it rewarded us less
often for the ability to put ili«-

130

THE THIRD WAVE

pieces back together again. Most people are culturally more skilled as
analysts than synthesists. This is one reason why our images of the
future (and of ourselves in that future) are so fragmentary,
haphazard — and wrong. Our job here will be to think like generalists,
not specialists.

Today I believe we stand on the edge of a new age of synthesis. In all
intellectual fields, from the hard sciences to sociology, psychology, and
economics — especially economics — we are likely to see a return to
large-scale thinking, to general theory, to the putting of the pieces back
together again. For it is beginning to dawn on us that our obsessive
emphasis on quantified detail without context, on progressively finer
and finer measurement of smaller and smaller problems, leaves us
knowing more and more about less and less.

Our approach in what follows, therefore, will be to look forJhose
streams of change that are shaking our livesl to A re A veal the
underground connections among thgn A not simply because eacn of
tnese is important in. ItselfTbut because of the way these streams of
change run together to form even larger, deeper, swifter rivers of
change that, in turn, flow into something still larger: the Third Wave.

Like that young man who set out in mid-century to find the heart of the
present, we now begin our search for the future. This search may be
the most important of our lives.

COMMANDING

On August 8, 1960, a West Virginia-born chemical engineer named
Monroe Rathbone, sitting in his office high over Rockefeller Plaza in
Manhattan, made a decision that future historians might some day
choose to symbolize the end of the Second Wave era.

Few paid any attention that day when Rathbone, chief executive of the
giant Exxon Corporation, took steps to cut back on the taxes Exxon
paid to the oil-producing countries. His decision, though ignored by the
Western press, struck like a thunderbolt at the governments of these
countries, since virtually all their revenues derived from oil company
payments.

Within a few days the other major oil companies had followed Exxon's
lead. And one month later, on September 9, in the fabled city of
Baghdad, delegates of the hardest-hit countries met in emergency
council. Backed to the wall, they formed themselves into a committee
of oil-exporting governments. For fully thirteen years the activities of
this committee, and even its name, were ignored outside the pages of
a few petroleum industry journals. Until 1973, that is, when the Yom
Kippur War broke out and the Organization of Petroleum Exporting
Countries suddenly stepped out of the shadows. Choking off the
world's supply of crude oil, it sent the entire Second Wave economy
into a shuddering down-spin.

What OPEC did, apart from quadrupling its oil revenues, was to
accelerate a revolution that was already brewing in ihe Second Wave
techno-sphere.

131

132 THE THIRD WAVE
THE SUN AND BEYOND

In the earsplitting clamor over the energy crisis that has since followed,
so many plans, proposals, arguments, and counterarguments have
been hurled at us that it is difficult to make sensible choices.
Governments are just as confused as the proverbial man in the street.

One way to cut through the murk is to look beyond the individual
technologies and policies to the principles underlying them. Once we
do, we find that certain proposals are designed to maintain or extend
the Second Wave energy base as we have known it, while others rest
on new principles. The result is a radical clarification of the entire
energy issue.

The Second Wave energy base, we saw earlier, was premised on non-
renewability; it drew from highly concentrated, exhaustible deposits; it
relied on expensive, heavily centralized technologies; and it was
nondiversified, resting on a relatively few sources and methods. These
were the main features of the energy base in all Second Wave nations
throughout the industrial era.

Bearing these in mind, if we now look at the various plans and
proposals generated by the oil crisis we can quickly tell which ones are
mere extensions of the old and which are forerunners of something
fundamentally new. And the basic question becomes not whether oil
should sell at forty dollars per barrel or whether a nuclear reactor
should rise at Sea-brook or Grohnde. The Tar|ger A |pstinn is whether
apy A energy base designed for industrial society and premised on
these Second Wave principles can survive. Once asked in frSTtoTfiT.
the answer is inescapable.

Through the past half-century, fully two thirds of the entire world's
energy supply has come from oil and gas. Most observers today, from
the most fanatic conservationists to the deposed Shah of Iran, from
solar freaks and Saudi sheikhs to the button-down, briefcase-carrying
experts of many governments, agree that this dependency on fossil
fuel cannot continue indefinitely, no matter how many new oil fields are
discovered.

Statistics vary. Disputes rage over how long the world has before the
ultimate crunch. The forecasting complexities are enormous and many
past predictions now look silly. Yet one thing is clear: no one is
pumping gas and oil back into the earth to replenish the supply.

Whether the end comes in some climactic gurgle or, more

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

133

likely, in a succession of dizzyingly destabilizing shortages, temporary
gluts, and deeper shortages, the oil epoch is ead=. jigg. Iranians know
this. Kuwaitis and Nigerians and Vene-IzueTans know it. Saudi
Arabians know it — which is why they are racing to build an economy
based on something other than oil revenues. Petroleum companies
know it — which is why they are scrambling to diversify out of oil. (One
president of a petroleum company told me at a dinner in Tokyo not
long ago that, in his opinion, the oil giants would become industrial
dinosaurs, as the railroads have. His time frame for this was
breathtakingly short — years, not decades.)

However, the debate over physical depletion is almost beside the
point. For in today's world it is price, not physical supply, that has the
most immediate and significant impact. And here, if anything, the facts
point even more strongly to the same conclusion.

In a matter of decades energy may once more become abundant and
cheap as a result of startling technological breakthroughs or economic
swings. But whatever happens, the relative price of oil is likely to
continue its climb as we are forced to plumb deeper and deeper
depths, to explore more remote regions, and to compete among more
buyers. OPEC aside, an historic turn has taken place over the past five
years: despite massive new discoveries like those in Mexico, despite
skyrocketing prices, the actual amount of confirmed, commercially
recoverable reserves of crude oil has shrunk, not grown — reversing a
trend that had lasted for decades. Further evidence, if needed, that the
petroholic era is screeching to a halt.

Meanwhile, coal, which has supplied most of the remaining third of the
world energy total, is in ample supply, though it, too, is ultimately
depletable. Any massive expansion of coal usage, however, entails the
spread of dirty air, a possible hazard to the world's climate (through an
increase of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere), and a ravaging of the
earth as well. Even if all these were accepted as necessary risks over
the decades to come, coal cannot fit into the tank of an automobile nor
carry out many other tasks now performed by oil or gas. Plants to
gasify or liquefy coal require staggering amounts of capital and water
(much of it needed for agriculture) and are so ultimately inefficient and
costly that they, too, must be seen as no more than expensive,
diversionary, and highly temporary expedients. Nuclear technology
presents even more formidable prob-

134

THE THIRD WAVE

lems at its present stage of development. Conventional reactors rely
on uranium, yet another exhaustible fuel, and carry safety risks that are
extremely costly to overcome — if, indeed, they ever can be. No one
has convincingly solved the problems of nuclear waste disposal, and
nuclear costs are so high that until now government subsidies have
been essential to make atomic power remotely competitive with other
sources.

Fast breeder reactors are in a class by themselves. But while often
presented to the uninformed public as perpetual motion machines
because the plutonium they spew out can be used as a fuel, they, too,
remain ultimately dependent upon the world's small and non-
renewable supply of uranium. They are not only highly centralized,
incredibly costly, volatile, and dangerous, they also escalate the risks
of nuclear war and terrorist capture of nuclear materials.

None of this means that we are going to be thrown back into the
middle ages, or that further economic advance is impossible. But it
surely means that we have reached the end of one line of development
and must now start another. It means that the Second Wave energy
base is unsustainable.

Indeed, there is yet another, even more fundamental reason why the
world must and will shift to a radically new energy base. For any
energy base, whether in a village or an industrial economy, must be
suited to the society's level of technology, the nature of production, the
distribution of markets and population, and many other factors.

The rise of the Second Wave energy base was associated with
society's advance to a whole new stage of technological development.
And while fossil fuels certainly accelerated technological growth, the
exact reverse was also true. The invention of energy-thirsty, brute
technology during the industrial era spurred the ever-more-rapid
exploitation of those very fossil fuels. The development of the auto
industry, for example, caused so radical an expansion of the oil
business that at one time it was essentially a dependency of Detroit. In
the words of Donald E. Carr, formerly an oil company research
director, and author of Energy and the Earth Machine, the petroleum
industry became "a slave to one form of internal combustion engine."

Today we are once more at the edge of an historic technological leap,
and the new system of production now emerging will require a radical
restructuring of the entire energy business — even if OPEC were to fold
its tent and quietly steal away.

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

For the great overlooked fact is that the energy problem is not just one
of quantity; it is one of structure as well. We not only need a certain
amount of energy, but energy delivered in many more varied forms, in
different (and changing) loca-tions, at different times of the day, night,
and year, and for undreamed of purposes.

This, not simply OPEC's pricing decisions, explains why the world must
search for alternatives to the old energy system. That search has been
accelerated, and we are now applying vast new resources of money
and imagination to the problem. As a result we are taking a close look
at many startling possibilities. While the shift from one energy base to
the next will no doubt be darkened by economic and other upheavals,
there is another, more positive aspect to it. For never in history have so
many people plunged with such fervor into a search for energy — and
never have we had so many novel and exciting potentials before us.

It is clearly impossible to know at this stage which combination of
technologies will prove most useful for what tasks, but the array of
tools and fuels available to us will surely be staggering, with more and
more exotic possibilities becoming commercially plausible as oil prices
climb.

These possibilities range from photovoltaic-cells that convert sunlight
into electricity (a technology now being explored by Texas Instruments,
Solarex, Energy Conversion Devices, and many other companies), to a
Soviet plan for placing windmill-carrying balloons in the tropopause to
beam electricity down to earth through cables. New York City has
contracted with a private firm to burn garbage as fuel and the
Philippine Islands are building plants to produce electricity from
coconut waste. Italy, Iceland, and New Zealand are already generating
electricity from geothermal sources, tapping the heat of the earth itself,
while a five-hundred-ton floating platform off Honshu island in Japan is
generating electricity fron wave power. Solar heating units are
sprouting from rooftops around the world, and the Southern California
Edison Company is constructing a "power-tower" which will capture
solar energy through computer-controlled mirrors, fo-
cus it on a tower containing a steam boiler, and generate electricity for
its regular customers. In Stuttgart, Germany, a hydrogen-powered bus
built by Daimler-Benz has cruised I In-city streets, while engineers at
Lockheed-Calif orn in are wmk ing on a hydrogen-powered aircraft. So
many new avenues

are being explored, they are impossible to catalog in a short space.

When we combine new energy -generating technologies with new ways
to store and transmit energy, the possibilities become even more far-
reaching. General Motors has announced a new, more efficient
automobile battery for use in electric cars. NASA researchers have
come up with "Redox" — a storage system they believe can be
produced for one third the cost of conventional lead acid batteries.

With a longer time horizon we are exploring super-conductivity and
even — beyond the fringes of "respectable" science — Tesla waves as
ways of beaming energy with minimal loss.

While most of these technologies are still in their early stages of
development and many will no doubt prove zanily impractical, others
are clearly on the edge of commercial application or will be within a
decade or two. Most important is the neglected fact that big
breakthroughs often come not from a single isolated technology but
from imaginative juxta-positions or combinations of several. Thus we
may see solar photovoltaics used to produce electricity which will, in
turn, be used to release hydrogen from water so it can be used in cars.
Today we are still at the pre-takeoff stage. Once we begin to combine
these many new technologies, the number of more potent options will
rise exponentially, and we will dramatically accelerate the construction
of a Third Wave energy base.

This new base will have characteristics sharply different from those of
the Second Wave period. For much of its supply will come from
renewable, rather than exhaustible sources. Instead of being
dependent upon highly concentrated fuels, it will draw on a, variety of

widely dispersed sources. Instead of depending so heavily on tightly
centralized tech-nologies, it will combine both centralized and
decentralized energy production. And instead of being dangerously
over-reliant on a handful of methods or sources, it will be radically
diversified in its form. This very diversity will make for less waste by
allowing us to match the types and quality of energy produced to the
increasingly varied needs.

In short, we can now see for the first time the outlines of an energy
base that runs on principles almost diametrically opposed to those of
the recent, three-hundred-year past. It is also clear that this Third
Wave energy base will not come into being without a bitter fight.

In this war of ideas and money that is already raging in all

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

137

the high-technology nations, it is possible to discern not two but three
antagonists. To begin with, there are those with vested interests in the
old, Second Wave energy base. They call for conventional energy
sources and technologies — coal, oil, gas, nuclear power, and their
various permutations. They fight, in effect, for an extension of the
Second Wave status quo. And because they are entrenched in the oil
companies, utilities, nuclear commissions, mining corporations, and
their associated trade unions, the Second Wave forces seem unas-
sailably in charge.

By contrast, those who favor the advance to a Third Wave energy
base — a combination of consumers, environmentalists, scientists, and
entrepreneurs in the leading-edge industries, along with their various
allies — seem scattered, underfinanced, and often politically inept.
Second Wave propagandists regularly picture them as naive,
unconcerned with dollar realities, and bedazzled by blue-sky
technology.

Worse yet, the Third Wave advocates are publicly confused with a
vocal fringe of what might best be termed First Wave forces — people
who call not for an advance to a new, more intelligent, sustainable, and
scientifically based energy system, but for a reversion to preindustrial
past. In extreme form,

their policies would eliminate most technology, restrict mobility, cause
cities to shrivel and die, and impose an ascetic culture in the name of
conservation.

By lumping these two groups together the Second Wave lobbyists,
public relations experts, and politicians deepen the public confusion
and keep the Third Wave forces on the defensive.

Nevertheless, supporters of neither First nor Second Wave policies
can win in the end. The former are devoted to a fan-
tasy, and the latter are attempting to maintain an energy base whose
problems are intractable — in fact, insuperable.

The relentlessly rising cost of Second Wave fuels works strongly
against the Second Wave interests. The skyrocketing capital cost of
Second Wave energy technologies works against them. The fact that
Second Wave methods often require heavy inputs of energy to eke out
relatively small increments of new "net" energy works against them.

The escalating problems of pollution work against them. The nuclear
risk works against them. The willingness of thousands in many
countries to battle the police in order to stop nuclear reactors or strip
mines or giant generating plants works njviinst them. The tremendous
rising thirst of the non-indus-

138

THE THIRD WAVE

trial world for energy of its own, and for higher prices for its resources,
works against them.

In short, though nuclear reactors or coal gasification or liquefaction
plants and other such technologies may seem to be advanced or
futuristic and therefore progressive, they are, in fact, artifacts of a
Second Wave past caught in its own deadly contradictions. Some may
be necessary as temporary expedients, but they are essentially
regressive. Similarly, though the forces of the Second Wave may seem
powerful and their Third Wave critics feeble, it would be foolish to bet
too many chips on the past. Indeed, the issue is not whether the
Second Wave energy base will be overthrown, superseded by a new
one, but how soon. For the struggle over energy is inextricably
intertwined with another change of equal profundity: the overthrow of
Second Wave technology.

TOOLS OF TOMORROW

Coal, rail, textile, steel, auto, rubber, machine tool manufacture — these
were the classical industries of the Second Wave. Based on essentially
simple electromechanical principles, they used high energy inputs,
spat out enormous waste and pollution, and were characterized by
long production runs, low skill requirements, repetitive work,
standardized goods, and heavily centralized controls.

From the mid-1950's it became increasingly apparent that these
industries were backward and waning in the industrial nations. In the
United States, for example, while the labor force grew by 21 percent
between 1965 and 1974, textile employment rose by only 6 percent
and employment in iron and steel actually dropped 10 percent A similar
pattern was evident in Sweden, Czechoslovakia, Japan, and other
Second Wave nations.

As these old-fashioned industries began to be transferred to so-called
"developing" countries, where labor was cheaper and technology less
advanced, their social influence also began to die out and a set of
dynamic new industries shot up to take their place.

These new industries differed markedly from their predecessors in
several respects: they were no longer primarily electromechanichal

and no longer based on the classic science of the Second Wave era.
Instead, they rose from accelerating breakthroughs in a mix of
scientific disciplines that were rudi-

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

139

mentary or even nonexistent as recently as twenty-five years ago-
quantum electronics, information theory, molecular biology, oceanics,
nucleonics, ecology, and the space sciences. And they made it
possible for us to reach beyond the grosser features of time and
spacejwith which Second Wave industry concerned itself, to
manipulate, as Soviet physicist B. G. Kuznetsov has noted, "very small
spatial regions (say, of the radius of an atomic nucleus, i.e., 1(H3
centimeters) and temporal intervals of the order of Kh23 seconds."

It is from, these new sciences and our radically enhanced
manipulative" abilities, that the new industries arose — computers and
data processing, aerospace, sophisticated petrochemicals,
semiconductors, advanced communications, and scores of others.

In the United States, where this shift from Second Wave to Third Wave
technologies began earliest — sometime in the mid-1 950's — old
regions like the Merrimack Valley in New England sank into the status
of depressed areas while places like Route 128 outside Boston or
"Silicon Valley" in California zoomed into prominence, their suburban
homes filled with specialists in solid-state physics, systems
engineering, artificial intelligence, or polymer chemistry.

Moreover, one could track the transfer of jobs and affluence as they
followed the transfer of technology, so that the so-called "sun-belt"
states, fed by heaw defense contracts, built an advanced technological
base while the older industrial regions in the Northeast and around the
Great Lakes plunged into lassitude and near-bankruptcy. The long
running financial crisis of New York City was a clear reflection of this
technological upheaval. So, too, was the stagnation of Lorraine,
France's center of steelmaking. And so, at yet another level, was the
failure of British socialism. Thus, at the end of World War II the Labour
government spoke of seizing the "commanding heights" of industry and
did so. But the commanding heights it nationalized turned out to be
coal, rail, and steel — precisely those industries being by -passed by
the technological revolution: yesterday's commanding heights.

Regions or sectors of the economy based A n Third Wava

boomed:

nn

industries,

languished., Thjit the changeover has hardly begun. Today many
governments are consciously seeking to accelerate this structural shift
while reducing the pains of transition. Japanese planners in MITI — the
Ministry of International

140

THE THIRD WAVE

Trade and Industry — are studying new technologies to support the
service industries of the future. West German Chancellor Helmut
Schmidt and his advisers speak ofstruk-turpolitik and look to the
European Investment Bank to facilitate the move out of traditional
mass production industries.

Today, fgiir rl notmrfi of rnlatriTjndustries areJ3oised for major growth
and A jaEe A ikt AA tries of the TbinrTW0 A tra. bringing with them, once
more,

major shifts in economic power and in social and political alignments.

Electronic imd r"ini"TI"i'i 1r-u*1y fojT" one such interrelated cluster.

The electronics industry, a relative newcomer" on the world scene, now
accounts for more than $100 billion in sales per year and is expected
to hit $325 billion or even $400 billion by the late 1980's. This would
make it the world's fourth largest industry, after steel, auto, and
chemicals. The speed' with which computers have spread is so well
known it hardly needs elaboration. Costs have dropped so sharply and
capacity has risen so spectacularly that, according to Computer-world
magazine, "If the auto industry had done what the computer industry
has done in the last 30 years, a Rolls-Royce would cost $2.50 and get
2,000,000 miles to the gallon."

Today, cheap mini-computers are about to invade the American home.
By June 1979 some one hundred companies were already
manufacturing home computers. Giants like Texas Instruments were in
the field, and chains like Sears and Montgomery Ward were on the
edge of adding computers to their household wares. "Some day soon,"
chirruped a Dallas microcomputer retailer, "every home will have a
computer. It will be as standard as a toilet."

Linked to banks, stores, government offices, to neighbors' homes and
to the workplace, such computers are destined to reshape not only
business, from production to retailing, but the very nature of work and,
indeed, even the structure of the family.

Like the computer industry to which it is umbilically tied, the electronics
industry has also been exploding, and consumers have been deluged
with hand-held calculators, diode watches, and TV-screen games.
These, however, provide only the palest hint of what lies in store: tiny,
cheap climate and soil sensors in agriculture; infinitesimal medical
devices built into ordinary clothing to monitor heartbeat or stress levels
of

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

141

the wearer — these and a multitude of other applications of electronics
lurk just beyond the present.

The advance toward Third Wave industries, moreover, will be radically
accelerated by the energy crisis, inasmuch as many of them carry us
toward processes and products that are miserly in their energy
requirements. Second Wave telephone systems, for example, required
virtual copper mines beneath the city streets — endless miles of snaking
cable, conduit, relays, and switches. We are now about to convert to
fiber optic systems that use hair-thin light-carrying fibers to convey
messages. The energy implications of this switchover are staggering: it
takes about one thousandth the energy to manufacture optical fiber
that it took to dig, smelt, and process an equivalent length of copper
wire. The same ton of coal required to produce 90 miles of copper wire
can turn out 80,000 miles of fiber!

The shift to solid-state physics in electronics moves in the same
direction, each step forward producing components that require
smaller and smaller inputs of energy. At IBM, the latest developments
in L.S.I. (Large Scale Integration) technology involve components that
are activated by as little as fifty microwatts.

This characteristic of the electronic revolution suggests that one of the
most powerful conservation strategies for energy -starved high-
technology economies may well be the rapid sub-stitution of low-
energy Third Wave industries for energy-

wasting Second Wave industries.

More generally, the journal Science is correct when it states that "the
country's economic activity may be substantially altered" by the
electronics explosion. "Indeed, it is probable that reality will outstrip
fiction in the rate of introduction of new and often unexpected
applications of electronics."

The electronics explosion, however, is only one step in the direction of
an entirely new techno-sphere.

MACHINES IN ORBIT

Much the same might be said of our ventures into outer space and the
oceans, where our leap beyond the classic lech nologies of the Second
Wave is even more striking.

The space industry forms a second cluster in the emerging
142

THE THIRD WAVE

techno-sphere. Despite delays, five space shuttles may soon be
moving cargo and people back and forth between the earth and outer
space on a weekly schedule. The impact of this is as yet
underestimated by the public, but many companies in the United
States and Europe regard the "high frontier" as the source of the next
revolution in high technology and are acting accordingly.

Grumman and Boeing are working on satellites and space platforms
for energy generation. According to Business Week, "Another group of
industries only now is beginning to understand what the orbiter may
mean to them — manufacturers and processors whose products range
from semi-conductors to medicines. . . . Many high-technology
materials require delicate, controlled handling, and the force of gravity
can be a nuisance. ... In space, there is no gravity to worry about, no
need for containers, and no problem with handling poisons or highly
reactive substances. And there is a limitless supply of vacuum, as well
as super-high and super-low temperatures."

As a result, "space manufacturing" has become a hot topic among
scientists, engineers, and high-technology executives." McDonnell
Douglas offers to pharmaceutical companies "a space shuttle device
that will separate rare enzymes from human cells. Glass
manufacturers are looking at ways of making materials for lasers and
fiber optics in space. Space-produced single-crystal semiconductors
make earth-made models seem primitive. Urokinase, a blood clot dis-
solver needed for patients suffering from certain forms of blood
disease, now costs $2,500 per dose. According to Jesco von
Puttkamer, chief of space industrialization studies for NASA, it could be
manufactured in space for less than one fifth that amount.

More important are the totally new products that simply cannot be
made on earth at virtually any price. TRW, an aerospace and
electronics company, has identified four hundred different alloys that
we cannot manufacture on earth because of the pull of gravity. General
Electric, meanwhile, has begun the design of a space furnace.
Daimler-Benz and M.A.N. in West Germany are interested in the space
manufacture of ball bearings, and the European Space Agency and
individual companies like British Aircraft Corporation are also designing
equipment and products aimed at making space useful commercially.
Business Week tells its readers

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

that "such prospects are not science fiction and a growing number of
companies are deadly serious in pursuing them." Equally serious, and
even more zealous, are the supporters of Dr. Gerard O'Neill's plan for
the creation of space cities. O'Neill, a Princeton physicist, has been
indefatigably educating the public about the possibilities of building
very large scale communities in space — platforms or islands with
populations in the thousands — and has won enthusiastic support from
NASA, the governor of California (whose state economy is heavily
space dependent) and, more surprisingly, from a band of vocal ex-
hippies led by Stewart Brand, creator of the Whole Earth Catalog.

O'Neill's idea is to build a city in space, bit by bit, out of materials
mined on the moon or elsewhere in space. A colleague, Dr. Brian
O'Leary, has been studying the possibilities of mining the Apollo and
Amor asteroids. Regular conferences at Princeton bring together
experts from NASA, General Electric, U.S. energy agencies, and other
interested parties to swap technical papers on the chemical processing
of lunar and other extraterrestrial minerals and on the design and
construction of space habitats and closed ecological systems.

The combination of advanced electronics and a space pro-gram that
moves beyond terrestrial production possibilities carries the techno-
sphere to a new stage, no longer limited by Second Wave
considerations. A — •

INTO THE DEPTHS

The push into the depths of the sea provides us with a mirror image of
the drive into outer space, and lays the basis for the third cluster of
industries likely to form a major part of the new techno-sphere. The
first historic wave of social change on earth came when our ancestors
ceased to rely on foraging and hunting, and began instead to
domesticate animals and cultivate the soil. We are now at precisely
this stage in our relationship to the seas.

In a hungry world,, the ocean can help break the back of the food
problem. Properly farmed and ranched, it offers us a virtually endless
supply of desperately needed protein. Present-day commercial fishing,
which is highly industrial-ized — Japanese and Soviet factory-ships
sweep the seas —

144 THE THIRD WAVE

results in ruthless overkill and threatens the total extinction of many
forms of marine life. By contrast, intelligent "aquacul-ture" — fish
farming and herding, along with plant harvesting — could make a major
dent in the global food crisis without damaging the fragile biosphere
upon which all our lives depend.

The rush to offshore oil drilling, meanwhile, has obscured the
possibility of "growing oil" in the sea. Dr. Lawrence Raymond at the
Battelle Memorial Institute has demonstrated that it is possible to
produce algae with a high oil content, and efforts are under way to
make the process economically effective.

The oceans also offer an overwhehning array of minerals, from copper,
zinc, and tin, to silver, gold, platinum and, even more important,
phosphate ores from which to produce fertilizer for land-based
agriculture. Mining companies are eyeing the hot waters of the Red
Sea which hold an estimated $3.4 billion worth of zinc, silver, copper,
lead, and gold. About 100 companies, including some of the world's
largest, are now preparing to mine potato-shaped manganese nodules
from the sea bed. (These nodules are a renewable resource, forming
at the rate of six to ten million tons per year in a single well-identified
belt just south of Hawaii.)

Today four truly international consortia are gearing up to start ocean
mining on a multibillion dollar scale hi the mid-19 80's. One such
consortium brings together twenty-three Japanese companies, a West
German group called AMR, and the U.S. subsidiary of Canada's
International Nickel. A second links Union Miniere, the Belgian
company, with United States Steel and the Sun Company. The third
venture unites Canada's Noranda interests with Mitsubishi of Japan,
Rio TintoZinc, and Consolidated Gold Fields of the United Kingdom.
The last consortium ties Lockheed to the Royal Dutch/Shell group.

These efforts, says the Financial Times of London, are expected to
"revolutionise world mining activities for selected minerals."

In addition, Hoffmann-La Roche, the pharmaceutical company, has
been quietly scouring the seas for new drugs, such as antifungal
agents and pain-killers or diagnostic aids and drugs that stop bleeding.

As these technologies develop we are likely to witness the construction
of semi- or 'even wholly submerged "aquavil-lages" and floating
factories. The combination of zero real estate costs (at least at
present) plus cheap energy produced on

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

145

the spot from ocean sources (wind, thermal currents, or tides) can
make this kind of construction competitive with that on land.

The technical journal Marine Policy concludes that "Ocean floating
platform technology appears to be inexpensive enough and simple
enough to be within the reach of most nations of the world, as well as
numerous companies and private groups. At present, it seems likely
that the first floating cities will be built by crowded industrial societies
for the purpose of offshore housing. . . . Multinational corporations may
see them as mobile terminals for trade activities, or as factory ships.
Food companies may build floating cities to carry out mariculture
operations. . . . Corporations seeking tax havens and adventurers
seeking new lifestyles may build floating cities and declare them to be
new states. Floating cities may achieve formal diplomatic recognition ...
or become a vehicle for ethnic minorities to achieve their
independence."

Technological progress associated with the construction of thousands
of offshore oil rigs, some anchored to the bottom but many positioned
dynamically with propellers, ballast, and buoyancy controls, are
developing very rapidly and laying the basis for the floating city and
enormous new supporting industries.

Overall, the commercial reasons for moving into the sea are multiplying
so swiftly that, according to economist D. M. Leipziger, many large
corporations today, "like homesteaders in the Old West, are queuing
up waiting for the starter's pistol to stake out large areas of the ocean
floor." This also explains why the non-industrial countries are fighting to
guarantee that-the resources of the oceans become the common
heritage of the human race rather than of the rich nations alone.

If we see these various developments not as independent of one
another but as interlinked and self-reinforcing, each technological or
scientific advance accelerating others, it becomes clear that we are no
longer dealing with the same level of technology on which the Second
Wave was based. We are on the way to a radically new energy system
and a radically new technological system'.

But even these examples are small in comparison with the techno-
quake now rumbling in our molecular biology laboratories. Biological
industry will form the fourth cluster of in-

146

THE THIRD WAVE

dustries in tomorrow's economy, and may have the heaviest impact of
all.*

THE GENE INDUSTRY

With information on genetics doubling every two years, with the gene
mechanics working overtime, New Scientist magazine reports that
"genetic engineering has been going through an essential tooling up
phase; it is now ready to go into business." The distinguished science
commentator, Lord Ritchie-Calder, explains that "Just as we have
manipulated plastics and metals, we are now manufacturing living
materials."

Major companies are already in hot pursuit of commercial applications
of the new biology. They dream of placing enzymes in the automobile
to monitor exhaust and send data on pollution to a microprocessor that
will then adjust the engine. They speak of what The New York Times
calls "metal-hungry microbes that might be used to mine valuable trace
metals from ocean water." They have already demanded and won the
right to patent new life forms. Eli Lilly, Hoffmann-La Roche, G. D.
Searle, Upjohn, and Merck, not to mention General Electric, are all in
the race.

Nervous critics, including many scientists, justifiably worry that there is
a race at all. They conjure up images not of oil spills, but of "microbe
spills" that could spread disease and decimate entire populations. The
creation and accidental release of virulent microbes, however, is only
one cause for alarm. Completely sober and respectable scientists are
talking about possibilities that stagger the imagination.

Should we breed people with cowlike stomachs so they can digest
grass and hay — thereby alleviating the food problem by

* In Future Shock, where I originally touched on some of these matters
many years ago, I suggested that we would eventually be able to "pre-
design" the human body, "grow machines," chemically program the
brain, make identical carbon copies of ourselves through cloning, and
create wholly new and dangerous life-forms. "Who shall control
research into these fields?" I asked. "How shall the new findings be
applied? Might we not unleash horrors for which man is totally
unprepared?"

Some readers thought the forecast farfetched. That, however, was
before 1973 and the discovery of the recombinant DNA process.

Today the same anguished questions are being asked by citizen
protesters, congressional committees, and by scientists themselves as
the biological revolution gains runaway speed.

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

147

modifying us to eat lower down on the food chain? Should we
biologically alter workers to fit job requirements — for example, creating
pilots with faster reaction times or assembly-line workers neurologically
designed to do our monotonous work for us? Should we attempt to
eliminate "inferior" people and breed a "super-race"? (Hitler tried this,
but without the genetic weaponry that may soon issue from our
laboratories.) Should we clone soldiers to do dur fighting? Should we
use genetic forecasting to pre-eliminate "unfit" babies? Should we
grow reserve organs for ourselves — each of us having, as it were, a
"savings bank" full of spare kidneys, livers, or lungs?

Wild as these notions may sound, every one has its advocates (and
adversaries) in the scientific community as well as its striking
commercial applications. As two critics of genetic engineering, Jeremy
Rifkin and Ted Howard, state in their book Who Should Play God?,
"Broad scale genetic engineering will probably be introduced to
America much the same way as assembly lines, automobiles,
vaccines, computers and all the other technologies. As each new
genetic advance becomes commercially practical, a new consumer
need . . . will be exploited and a market for the new technology will be
created." The potential applications are myriad.

The new biology, for example, could potentially help solve the energy
problem. Scientists are now studying the idea of utilizing bacteria
capable of converting sunlight into electrochemical energy. They speak
of "biological solar cells." Could we breed life forms to replace nuclear
power plants? And if so, might we substitute the danger of a bioactive
release for the danger of radioactive release?

In the field of health, many diseases now untreatable will no doubt be
cured or prevented — and new ones, perhaps worse, introduced
through inadvertence or even malice. (Think what a profit-hungry
company could do if it developed and secretly spread some new
disease for which it alone had the cure. Even a mild, coldlike ailment
could create a massive market for the appropriate, monopolistically
controlled cure.)

According to the president of Cetus, a California company to which
many world-famous geneticists are commercially linked, "biology will
replace chemistry in importance" in the next thirty years. And in
Moscow an official policy statement urges "the wider use of micro-
organisms in the national economy. . .."

148 THE THIRD WAVE

Biology will reduce or eliminate the need for oil in the production of
plastics, fertilizer, clothes, paint, pesticides, and thousands of other
products. It will sharply alter the production of wood, wool, and other
"natural" goods. Companies like United States Steel, Fiat, Hitachi,
ASEA, or IBM will undoubtedly have their own biology divisions as we
begin to shift, over time, from manufacture to "biofacture," giving rise to
a range of products unimaginable until now. Says Theodore J. Gordon,

the head of The Futures Group, "In biology, once we get started, well
have to think about things like . . . can you make a tissue-compatible
shirt' or a 'mammary mattress' — created out of the same stuff as the
human breast."

Long before then, hi agriculture, genetic engineering will be employed
to increase the world food supply. The much-publicized Green
Revolution of the 1960's proved, in large measure, a colossal trap for
farmers hi the First Wave world because it required enormous inputs of
petroleum-based fertilizer that had to be bought abroad. The next bio-
agricultural revolution aims at reducing that dependence on artificial
fertilizer. Genetic engineering points toward high-yielding crops, crops
that grow well in sandy or salty soil, crops that fight off pests. It also
seeks to create entirely new foods and fibers, along with simpler,
cheaper, energy -conserving methods for storing and processing foods.
As though to balance off some of its awesome peril, genetic
engineering once more holds out for us the possibility of ending
widespread famine.

One must remain skeptical of these glowing promises. Yet if some of
the advocates of genetic farming are half right, the impact on
agriculture could be tremendous, ultimately altering, among other
things, relations between the poor countries and the rich. The Green
Revolution made the poor more, not less, dependent on the rich. The
bio-agricultural revolution could do the reverse.

It is too early to say with confidence how biotechnology will develop.
But it is too late to turn back to zero. We cannot undiscover what we
know. We can only fight to control its application, to prevent hasty
exploitation, to transoational-ize it, and to minimize corporate, national,
and interscientific rivalry in the entire field before it is too late.

One thing is immutably clear: we are no longer locked into the three-
hundred-year-old electromechanical frame of traditional Second Wave
technology, and can only begin to glimpse the full significance of this
historic fact.

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

Just as the Second Wave combined coal, steel, electricity, and rail
transport to produce automobiles and a thousand other life-
transforming products, the real impact of the new changes will not be
felt until we reach the stage of combining the new technologies —
linking together computers, electronic new materials from outer space
and the oceans, with ge-
netics, and allot these, in turn, with the new energy base. Bringing
these elements together will release a flood of innovation unlike any
seen before in human history. We are constructing a dramatically new
techno-sphere for a Third Wave-civilization.

THETECHNO-REBELS

The magnitude of such an advance — its importance for the future of
evolution itself— makes it critically necessary that we begin to guide it.
To adopt a hands-off, damn-the-tor-pedoes approach could spell doom

for ourselves and our children. For the power, scale, and speed of the
change is like nothing before in history, and our minds are still fresh
with news of the near-catastrophe at Three Mile Island, the tragic DC-
10 crashes, the hard-to-plug massive oil spill off the Mexican coast,
and a hundred other technological horrors. Faced with such disasters,
can we permit the development and combination of tomorrow's even
more powerful technologies to be controlled by the same shortsighted
and selfish criteria used during the Second Wave era?

The basic questions asked of new technologies during the past three
hundred years, in both capitalist and socialist nation's, have been
simple: do they contribute to economic gain or military clout? These
twin criteria are clearly no longer adequate. New technologies will have
to pass far stiffer tests — ecological and social as well as economic
and strategic.

When we look closely at what a report to the U.S. Na-tional Science
Foundation has called "technology and social shock" — a catalog of
technological calamities in recent years — we discover that most of
them are associated with Second Wave, not Third Wave technologies.
The reason is obvious: Third Wave technologies have not yet been
deployed on a grand scale. Many are still in their infancy.

Nevertheless, we can already glimpse the dangers of electronic smog,
information pollution, combat in outer space, genetic leakage, climatic
intervention, and what might be called "eco-

150

THE THIRD WAVE

logical warfare" — the deliberate induction of earthquakes, for example,
by triggering vibrations from a distance. Beyond this lies a host of other
perils associated with the advance to a new technological base.

Under these circumstances it is no surprise that recent years have
seen massive, almost indiscriminate, public resistance to new
technology. The early period of the Secotid Wave also saw attempts to
block new technology. As early as 1663, London workers tore down
the new mechanical sawmills that threatened their livelihood. In 1676
ribbon workers smashed their machines. In 1710 rioters protested the
newly introduced stocking frames. Later, John Kay, inventor of the
flying shuttle used in the textile mills, saw his home wrecked by an
infuriated mob and ultimately fled England altogether. The most
publicized example came in 1811 when machine wreckers calling
themselves Luddites destroyed their textile machines in Nottingham.

Yet this early antagonism to the machine was sporadic and
spontaneous. As one historian notes, many of the cases "were not so
much the result of hostility to the machine itself as a method of
coercing an obnoxious employer." Unlettered workingmen and women,
poor, hungry, and desperate, saw in the machine a threat to their
individual survival.

Today's rebellion against runaway technology is different. It involves a
fast-growing army of people — by no means poor or unlettered — who
are not necessarily anti-technological, or opposed to economic growth,

but who see in the uncontrolled technological thrust a threat to
themselves and to global survival.

Some fanatics among them, given the chance, might well employ
Luddite tactics. It doesn't take much to imagine the bombing of a
computer installation or a genetic laboratory or a partially constructed
nuclear reactor. One can even more easily picture some particularly
hideous technological disaster triggering a witch-hunt for the white-
coated scientists who "caused it all." Some demagogic politician of the
future may well rise to fame by investigating the "Cambridge Ten" or
the "Oak Ridge Seven."

However, most of today's techno-rebels are neither bomb-throwers nor
Luddites. They include thousands of people who are themselves
scientifically trained — nuclear engineers, bio-chemist, physicians,
public health officials, and geneticists as well as millions of ordinary
citizens. Again, unlike the Luddites, they are well organized and
articulate. They publish

their own technical journals and propaganda. They file law-suits and
draft legislation, as well as picket, march, and demonstrate.

This movement, often attacked as reactionary, is actually a

vital part of the emerging Third Wave. For its members are the leading
edge of the future in a three-way political and economic battle that
parallels, in the field of technnology, the

struggle over energy that we have described earlier.

Here, too, we see Second Wave forces on one side, First Wave
reversionists on the other, and Third Wave forces struggling against
both. Here the Second Wave forces are those who favor the old,
mindless approach to technology: ""If it works, produce it. It it sells,
produce it. If it makes us strong, build it." Imbued with obsolete, indust-
real notions of progress, many of these adherents of the Second Wave
past have vested interests in the irresponsible application of
technology. They shrug off the dangers.

On the other side, we find once more a small, vocal fringe of romantic
extremists hostile to all but the most primitive First Wave technologies,
who seem to favor a return to medieval crafts and hand labor. Mostly
middle-class, speaking from the vantage point of a full belly, their
resistance to technological advance is as blindly indiscriminate as the
support of technology by Second Wave people. They fantasize about a
return to a world that most of us — and most of them — would find
abhorrent.

Ranged against both these extremes is an increasing number of
people in every country who form the core of the techno-rebellion.

They are, without knowing it, agents of the Third Wave. They begin not
with technology but with hard questions about what kind of future
society want. They recognize that we now have so many technological
opportunities we can no longer fund, develop, and apply them all. They
argue, therefore, the need to select more carefully among them and to

choose those technologies that serve long-range social and ecological
goals. Rather than letting

technology shape our goals, they wish to assert social control

over the larger directions of the technological thrust.

The techno-rebels have not as yet formulated a clear, comprehensive
program. But if we extrapolate from their numer ous manifestos,
petitions, statements, and studies, we can identify several streams of
thought that add up to a new way of looking at technology — a positive
policy for managing the transition to a Third Wave future.

152

THE THIRD WAVE

The techno-rebels start from the premise that the earth's biosphere is
fragile, and that the more powerful our new technologies become, the
higher the risk of doing irreversible damage to the planet. Thus they
demand that all new technologies be prescreened for possible adverse
effects, that dangerous ones be redesigned or actually blocked — in
short, that tomorrow's technologies be subjected to tighter ecological
consTraints tnan ffioyTof the Second Wave era.

The techno-rebels argue that either we control technology or it controls
us — and that "we" can no longer simply be the usual tiny elite of
scientists, engineers, politicians, and businessmen. Whatever the
merits of the antinuclear campaigns that have erupted in West
Germany, France, Sweden, Japan, and the United States, the battle
against Concorde, or the rising demands for regulation of genetic
research, all reflect a widespread passionate demand for the
democratization of technological decision-making.

The techno-rebels contend that technology need not be big, costly, or
complex in order to be "sophisticated." The heavy-handed
technologies of the Second Wave seemed more efficient than they
actually were because corporations and socialist enterprises
externalized — transferred to society as a whole — the enormous costs
of cleaning up pollution, of caring for the unemployed, or dealing with
work-alienation. When these are seen as costs of production, many
seemingly efficient machines turn out to be quite the opposite.

Thus the techno-rebels favor the design of a whole range of
"appropriate technologies" intended to provide humane jobs, to avoid
pollution, to spare the environment and to produce for personal or local
use rather than for national and global markets alone. The techno-
rebellion has sparked thousands of experiments all over the world, with
just such small-scale technologies, in fields ranging from fish farming
and food processing to energy production, waste recycling, cheap
construction, and simple transport.

While many of these experiments are naive and hark back to a
mythical past, others are more practical. Some reach out for the latest
materials and scientific tools and combine them in new ways with old
techniques. Jean Gimpel, for example, the historian of medieval

technology, has built elegant models of simple tools that might prove
useful in non-industrial countries. Some of these combine new
materials with old methods. A surge of interest in the airship provides
another example — use of a by -passed technology that can now be

THE COMMANDING HEIGHTS

153

made with advanced fabrics or materials that give it much greater
payload capacity. Airships are ecologically sound and could be used
for slow but cheap and safe transport in regions where there are no
roads — Brazil, perhaps, or Nigeria. Experiments with appropriate or
alternative technologies, especially in the energy field, suggest that
some simple, small-scale technologies can be as "sophisticated" as
complex, large-scale technologies when the full range of side effects is
taken into account and when the machine is properly matched to the
task.

The techno-rebels are also disturbed by the radical imbalance of
science and technology on the face of the planet, with only 3 percent of
the world's scientists in countries containing 75 percent of the global
population. They favor devoting more technological attention to the
needs of the world's poor, and a more equitable sharing of the
resources of outer space and the oceans. They recognize that not only
are the oceans and skies part of the common heritage of the race, but
that advanced technology itself could not exist without the historic
contributions of many peoples, from the Indians and Arabs to the
ancient Chinese.

Finally, they argue that in moving into the Third Wave we must
advance, step by step, from the resource-wasteful, pollution-producing
system of production used during the Second Wave era toward a more
"metabolic" system that eliminates waste and pollution by making sure
that the output and byproduct of each industry becomes an input for
the next. The goal is a system under which no output is produced that
is not an input for another production process downstream. Such a
system is not only more efficient in a production sense, it minimizes, or
indeed, eliminates, damage to the bio-sphere.

Taken as a whole, this techno-rebel program provides the

basis for humanizing the technological thrust.

The techno-rebels are, whether they recognize it or not, agents of the
Third Wave. They will not vanish but multiply in the years ahead. For
they are as much a part of the advance to a new stage of civilization as
our missions to Venus, our amazing computers, our biological
discoveries, or our explorations of the oceanic depths.

Out of their conflict with the First Wave fantasizers and the Second
Wave advocates of technology uber alles will come sensible
technologies matched to the new, sustainable energy system toward
which we are beginning to reach. Plug-

154

ging the new technologies into this new energy base will raise to a
wholly new level our entire civilization. At its heart we will find a fusion
of sophisticated, science-based "high stream" industries, operating
within much tightened ecological and social controls, with equally
sophisticated, "low-stream" industries that operate on a smaller, more
human scale, both based on principles radically different from those
which governed the Second Wave techno-sphere. Together, these two
layers of industry will form tomorrow's "commanding heights."

But this is only a detail of a much vaster picture. For at the same time
that we are transforming the techno-sphere we are also revolutionizing
the info-sphere.

DE-MASSIYFING THE MEDIA

The espionage agent is one of the most powerful metaphors of our
time. No other figure has so successfully captured the contemporary
imagination. Films by the hundred glorify 007 and his brash fictional
counterparts. Television and paperbacks churn out endless images of
the spy as daring, romantic, amoral, larger (or smaller) than life.
Governments, meanwhile, spend billions on espionage. Agents of the
KGB, the CIA, and a score of other intelligence agencies trip over one
another from Berlin to Beirut, from Macao to Mexico City.

In Moscow, western correspondents are accused of spying. In Bonn,
chancellors fall because spies infest their ministries. In Washington,
congressional investigators simultaneously expose the misdeeds of
secret agents, American and Korean, while above, the sky itself is
rilled with spy satellites apparently photographing every inch of the
earth.

The spy is hardly new to history. It is worth asking, therefore, why at
this particular moment the theme of espionage has come to dominate
the popular imagination, throwing even private eyes, cops, and
cowboys into the shadow. When we do ask, we immediately notice one
important difference between the spy and these other culture heroes:
While fictional policemen and cowboys rely on mere pistols or their
bare fists, the fictional spy comes equipped with the latest, most exotic
technology — electronic bugs, banks of computers, infrared cameras,
cars that fly or swim, helicopters, one-man submarines, death rays,
and the like.

There is, however, a deeper reason for the rise of the spy,

156 THE THIRD WAVE

Cowboys, cops, private eyes, adventurers, and explorers — the
traditional heroes of print and celluloid — typically pursue the tangible:
they want land for cattle, they want money, they want to capture the
crook or gain the girl. Not so the spy. For the spy's basic business is
informalion — and information has become perhaps the world's fastest
growing and most important business. The spy is a living symbol of the
revolution now sweeping the info-sphere.

A WAREHOUSE OF IMAGES

An information bomb is exploding in our midst, showering us with a
shrapnel of images and drastically changing the way each of us
perceives and acts upon our private world. In shifting from a Second
Wave to a Third Wave info-sphere, we are transforming our own
psyches.

Each of us creates in his skull a mind-model of reality — a warehouse of
images. Some of these are visual, others auditory, even tactile. Some
are only "percepts" — traces of information about our environment, like
a glimpse' of blue sky seen from the corner of the eye. Others are
"linkages" that define relationships, like the two words "mother" and
child." Some are simple, others complex and conceptual, like the idea
that "inflation is caused by rising wages." Together such images add
up to our picture of the world — locating us in time, space, and the
network of personal relationships around us.

These images do not spring from nowhere. They are formed, in ways
we do not understand, out of the signals or information reaching us
from the environment. And as our environment convulses with
change — as our jobs, homes, churches, schools, and political
arrangements feel the impact of the Third Wave — the sea of
information around us also changes.

Before the advent of mass media, a First Wave child growing up in a
slowly changing village built his or her model of reality out of images
received from a tiny handful of sources — the teacher, the priest, the
chief or official and, above all, the family. As psychologist-futurist
Herbert Gerr juoy has noted: "There was no television or radio in the
home to give the child a chance to meet many different kinds of
strangers from many different walks of life and even from different
countries. . . . Very few people ever saw a foreign

DE-MASSIFYING THE MEDIA

157

city. . . . The result [was that] people had only a small number of
different people to imitate or model themselves after,

"Their choices were even more limited by the fact that the people they
could model themselves after were themselves all of limited
experience with other people." The images of the world built up by the
village child, therefore, were extremely narrow in range.

The messages he or she received, moreover, were highly redundant in
at least two senses: they came, usually, in the form of casual speech,
which is normally filled with pauses and repetitions, and they came in
the form of connected "strings" of ideas reinforced by various
information givers. The child heard the same "thou shalt nots" in
church and in school. Both reinforced the messages sent out by the
family and the state. Consensus in the community, and strong
pressures for conformity, acted on the child from birth to narrow still
further the range of acceptable imagery and behavior.

The Second Wave multiplied the number of channels from which the
individual drew his or her picture of reality. The child no longer
received imagery from nature or people alone but from newspapers,
mass magazines, radio and, later on, from television. For the most
part, church, state, home, and school continued to speak hi unison,
reinforcing one another. But now the mass media themselves became
a giant loudspeaker. And their power was used across regional, ethnic,
tribal, and linguistic lines to standardize the images flowing in society's
mind-stream.

Certain visual images, for example, were so widely mass-distributed
and were implanted in so many millions of private memories that they
were transformed, in effect, into icons. The image of Lenin, jaw thrust
out in triumph under a swirling red flag, thus became as iconic for
millions of people as the image of Jesus on the cross. The image of
Charlie Chaplin with derby and cane, or Hitler raging at Nuremberg,
the image of bodies stacked like cords of wood at Buchen-wald, of
Churchill making the V sign or Roosevelt wearing a black cape, of
Marilyn Monroe's skirt blown by the wind, of hundreds of media stars
and thousands of different, universally recognizable commercial
products — the bar of Ivory soap in the United States, the Morinaga
chocolate in Japan, the bottle of Perrier in France — all became
standard parts of a universal image-file.

158 THE THIRD WAVE

This centrally produced imagery, injected into the "mass mind” by the
mass media; helped produce the standardization of behavior required
by the Industrial production system.

Today the Third Wave is drastically altering all this. As change
accelerates in society it forces a parallel acceleration within us. New
information reaches us and we are forced to revise our image-file
continuously at a faster and faster rate. Older images based on past
reality must be replaced, for, unless we update them, our actions
become divorced from reality and we become progressively less
competent. We find it impossible to cope.

This speedup of image processing inside «s means that images grow
mqre and more A empnrary A Thrnwawav art, one-shot sitcoms, Polaroid
snapshots, Xerox copies, and disposable graphics pop up and vanish.
Ideas, beliefs, and attitudes skyrocket into consciousness, are
challenged, defied, and suddenly fade into nowhere-ness; Scientific
and psychological theories are overthrown and superseded daily.
Ideologies crack. Celebrities pirouette fleetingly across our awareness.
Contradictory political and moral slogans assail us.

It is difficult to make sense of this swirling phantasmagoria, to
understand exactly how the image-manufacturing process is changing.
For the Third Wave does more than simply accelerate our information
flows: it transforms the deep structure of information on which our daily
actions depend.

THE DE-MASSIFIED MEDIA

Throughout the Second Wave era the mass media grew more and
more powerful. Today a startling change is taking place. As the Third
Wave thunders in, the mass media, far from expanding their influence,
are suddenly being forced to share it. They are being beaten back on
many fronts at once by what I call the "de-massified media."

Newspapers provide the first example. The oldest of the Second
Wave'mass media, newspapers are losing their readers. By 1973 U.S.
newspapers had reached a combined aggregate circulation of 63
million copies daily. Since 1973, however, instead of adding circulation,
they have begun to lose it. By 1978 the total had declined to 62 million
and worse was in store. The percentage of Americans who read a
paper every day also fell, from 69 percent in 1972 to 62 per-

DE-MASSIFYING THE MEDIA

159

cent in 1977, and some of the nation's most important papers were the
hardest hit. In New York, between 1970 and 1976, the three major
dailies combined lost 550,000 readers. The Los Angeles Times, having
peaked in 1973, went on to lose 80,000 readers by 1976. The two big
Philadelphia papers dropped 150,000 readers, the two big Cleveland
papers 90,-000 and the two San Francisco papers more than 80,000.
While numerous smaller papers cropped up in many parts of the
country, major U.S. dailies like the Cleveland News, the Hartford
Times, the Detroit Times, Chicago Today, or the Long Island Press all
fell by the wayside. A similar pattern appeared in Britain where,
between 1965 and 1975, the national dailies lost fully 8 percent of their
circulation.

Nor were such losses due merely to the rise of television. Each of
today's mass-circulation dailies now faces increasing competition from
a burgeoning flock of mini-circulation weeklies, biweeklies, and so-
called "shoppers" that serve not the metropolitan mass market but
specific neighborhoods and communities within it, providing far more
localized advertising and news. Having reached saturation, the big-city
mass-circulation daily is in deep trouble. De-massified media are
snapping at its heels.*

Mass magazines offer a second example. From the mid-1950's on,
hardly a year has passed without the death in the United States of a
major magazine. Life, Look, the Saturday Evening Post — each went to
its grave, later to undergo resurrection as a small-circulation ghost of
its former self.

Between 1970 and 1977, despite a 14 million rise in U.S. population,
the combined aggregate circulation of the remaining top twenty-five
magazines dropped by 4 million.

Simultaneously, the United States experienced a population explosion
of mini-magazines — thousands of brand new magazines aimed at
small, special-interest, regional, or even local markets. Pilots and
aviation buffs today can choose among literally scores of periodicals
edited just for them. Teen-agers,

* Some publishers do not consider newspapers to be mass media
because many have small circulations and serve small communities.

But most papers, at least in the United States, are filled with nationally
produced "boilerplate" — news from the AP and UPI wires, comic strips,
crosswords, fashions, feature articles — which are largely the same
from one city to the next. To compete with the smaller, more localized
media the larger papers are increasing local coverage and adding a
variety of special-interest sections. The surviving dailies of the 1980's
and 1990's will be drastically changed by the segmentation of the
reading public.

160

THE THIRD WAVE

scuba divers, retired people, women athletes, collectors of antique
cameras, tennis nuts, skiers, and skateboarders each have their own
press. Regional magazines like New York, New West, D in Dallas, or
Pittsburgher, are all multiplying. Some slice the market up even more
finely by both region and special interest — the Kentucky Business
Ledger, for example, or Western Farmer.

With new, fast, cheap short-run printing presses, every organization,
community group, ”p61 iTicaT or religious cult and cultiet today can
afford to print its own publication. Even smaller groups churn our
periodicals on the copying machines that have become ubiquitous in
American offices. The mass magazine has lost its once powerful
influence in national life. The de-massified magazine — the mini-
magazine — is rapidly taking its plage.

But the ifnpactof the Third Wave in communications is not confine'd'to
th6 print media. Between iff A 0 and 1910 the nrrmber ot radio stations
jn tne unuea Slates climbed from 2,336, to 5,359. In a period when
population rose only 35 percent, radio stations increased by 129
percent. This means that instead of one station for every 65,000
Americans, there is now one for every 38,000, and it means the
average listener has more programs to choose from. The mass
audience is cut up among more stations.

The diversity of offerings, has also sharply increased, with different
stations appealing to specialized audience segments instead of to the
hitherto undifferentiated mass audience. All-news stations aim at
educated middle-class adults. Hard rock, soft rock, punk rock, country
rock, and folk rock stations each aim at a different sector of the youth
audience. Soul music stations aim at Black Americans. Classical music
stations cater to upper-income adults, foreign language stations to
different ethnic groups, from the Portuguese in New England to
Italians, Hispanics, Japanese, and Jews. Writes political columnist
Richard Reeves, "In Newport, R.I., I cheeked the AM radio dial and
found 38 stations, three of them religious, two programmed for blacks
and one broadcasting in Portuguese."

Relentlessly, newer forms of audio communication chip away at what
remains of the mass audience. During the 1960's tiny, cheap tape
recorders and cassette players spread like prairie fire among the
young. Despite popular misconceptions to the contrary, today's teen-

agers spend less, not more, time with their ears glued to the radio than
was the case in

DE-MASSIFYING THE MEDIA

181

the sixties. From an average of 4.8 hours a day in 1967, the amount of
radio listening time plummeted to 2.8 hours in 1977.

Then came citizens band radio. Unlike broadcast radio, which is strictly
one-way (the listener cannot talk back to the programmer), CB radios
in cars make it possible for drivers within a five- to fifteen-mile radius to
communicate with each other.

Between 1959 and 1974, only one million CB sets came into use in
America. Then, hi the words of an astounded official of the Federal
Communications Commission, "It took eight months [for us] to get the
second million and three months to get the third." CB blasted off. By
1977 some 25 million CB sets were in use, and the airwaves were
filled with colorful chatter — from warnings that "smokies" (police) were
setting speed traps, to prayers and prostitutes' solicitations. The fad is
now over, but its effects are not.

Radio broadcasters, nervous about their advertising revenues,
vigorously deny that CB has cut into radio listener-ship. But the ad
agencies are not so sure. One of them, Marsteller, Inc., conducted a
survey in New York and found that 45 percent of CB users report a 10
to 15 percent drop in listening to their regular car radios. More
significantly, the survey found that over half the CB users listened to
both their car radios and their CBs simultaneously.

In any case, the shift toward jiiyersity A in print is paralleled in radio. The
soundscape is being"de-massified along with the "printscape.

Not until 1977, however, did the Second Wave media suffer their most
startling and significant defeat. For a generation the .most powerful
and the most "massifying" of the media has, of course, been television.
In 1977 the picture tube began to flicker. Wrote Time magazine, "All
fall, broadcast and ad executives nervously peeked at the figures . . .
they could not believe what they were seeing. . . . For the first time in
history, television viewing declined."

"Nobody," mumbled one astonished ad man, "ever assumed that
viewership would go down."

Even now explanations abound. We are told the shows are even more
miserable than in the past. That there is too much of this and not
enough of that. Executive heads have rolled down the network
corridors. We have been promised this or that new type of show. But
the deeper truth is only beginning to emerge from the clouds of tele-
hype. The day of the all-

162

THE THIRD WAVE

powerful centralized network that controls image production is waning.
Indeed, a former president of NBC, charging the three main U.S.
television networks with strategic "stupidity," has predicted their share
of the prime-time viewing public would drop to 50 percent by the late
1980's. For the Third Wave communications media are subverting the
dominance of the Second Wave media lords on a broad front.

Cable television today already reaches into 14.5 million American
homes and is likely to spread with hurricane force in the early 1980's.
Industry experts expect 20 to 26 million cable subscribers by the end of
1981, with cabling available to fully 50 percent of U.S. households.
Things will move even faster once the shift is made from copper wires
to cheap fiber optic systems that send light pulsing through hair-thin
fibers. And like short-run printing presses or Xerox copiers, cable de-
massifies the audience, carving it into multiple mini-publics. Moreover,
cable systems can be designed for two-way communication so that
subscribers may not merely watch programs but actively call various
services.

In Japan, by the early 1980's entire towns will be linked to light-wave
cable, enabling users to dial requests not only for programs but for still
photographs, data, theater reservations, or displays of newspaper and
magazine material. Burglar and fire alarms will work through the same
system.

In Ikoma, a bedroom suburb of Osaka, I was interviewed on a TV show
on the experimental Hi-Ovis system, which places a microphone and
television camera on top of the TV set in the home of every subscriber,
so that viewers can become senders as well. As I was being
interviewed by the program host, a Mrs. Sakamoto, viewing the
program from her own living room, switched in and began chatting with
us in broken English. I and the viewing public saw her on the screen
and watched her little boy romping around the room as she welcomed
me to Ikoma.

Hi-Ovis also keeps a bank of video cassettes on everything from music
to cooking to education. Viewers can punch in a code number and
request the computer to play a particular cassette for them on their
screen at whatever hour they wish to see it.

Though it involves only about 160 homes, the Hi-Ovis experiment is
backed by the Japanese government and contributions from such
corporations as Fujitsu, Sumitomo Electric, Matsushita, and Kintetsu. It
is extremely advanced and already based on fiber optics technology.

DE-MASSIFYINQ THE MEDIA

163

In Columbus, Ohio, a week earlier, I had visited Warner Cable
Corporation's Qube system. Qube provides the subscriber with thirty
TV channels (as against four regular broadcast stations) and presents
specialized shows for everyone from preschoolers to doctors, lawyers,
or the "adults only" audience. Qube is the most well -developed,
commercially effective two-way cable system in the world. Providing

each subscriber with what looks like a hand-held calculator, it permits
him or her to communicate with the station by push button. A viewer
using the so-called "hot buttons" can communicate with the Qube
studio and its computer. Time, in describing the system, waxes
positively rhapsodic, noting that the subscriber can "voice his opinions
in local political debates, conduct garage sales and bid for objets d'art
in a charity auction. ... By pressing a button, Joe or Jane Columbus
can quiz a politician, or turn electronic thumbs down or up on a local
amateur talent program." Consumers can "comparison-shop the local
supermarkets" or book a table at an Oriental restaurant.

Cable, however, is not the only worry facing the networks, Video
games, have become a "hot item" in the stores. Millions of Americans
have discovered a passion for gadgets that convert a TV screen into a
Ping-Pong table, hockey rink, or tennis court. This development may
seem trivial or irrelevant to orthodox political or social analysts. Yet it
represents a wave of social learning, a premonitory training, as it were,
for life in the electronic environment of tomorrow. Not only do video
games further de-massify the audience and cut into the numbers who
are watching the programs broadcast at any given moment, but
through such seemingly innocent devices millions of people are
learning to play with the television set, to talk back to it, and to interact
with it. In the process they are changing from passive receivers to
message senders as well. They are manipulating the set rather than
merely letting the set manipulate them.

Information services, fed through the TV screen, are now already
available in Britain where a viewer with an adapter unit can push a
button and select which of a dozen or so different data services he or
she wants — news, weather, financial, sports, and so forth. This data
then moves across the TV screen as though on ticker tape. Before
long users will no doubt be able to plug a hard-copier into the TV to
capture on paper any images they wish to retain. Once again there is
wide choice where little existed before.

Video cassette players and recorders are spreading rapidly as well.
Marketers expect to see a million units in use in the United States by
1981. These not only allow viewers to tape Monday's football match for
replay on, say, Saturday (thus demolishing the synchronization of
imagery that the networks promote), but lay the basis for the sale of
films and sports events on tape. (The Arabs are not asleep at the
proverbial switch: the movie The Messenger, about the life of
Muhammad, is available in boxed cassettes with gilt Arabic lettering on
the outside.) Video recorders and players also make possible the sale
of highly specialized cartridges containing, for example, medical
instructional material for hospital staff, or tapes that show consumers
how to assemble knockdown furniture or rewire a toaster. More
fundamentally, video record-ers make it possible for anv consumer to
become, in addition, a producer of his or her, own imagery. Once again
the audience is de-massified.

Domestic satellites, finally, make it possible for individual television
stations to form temporary mini-networks for specialized programming
by bouncing signals from anywhere to anywhere else at minimal cost,
thus end-running the existing networks. By the end of 1980 cable-TV
operators will have one thousand earth stations in place to pick up

satellite signals. "At that point," says Television/Radio Age, "a program
distributor need only buy time on a satellite, presto, he has a
nationwide cable TV network ... he can selectively feed any group of
systems he chooses." The satellite, declares William J. Donnelly, vice-
president for electronic media at the giant Young & Rubicam
advertising agency, "means smaller audiences and a greater
multiplicity of nationally distributed programs."

All these different developments have one_thing in com-mon; they
slice the mass tfelevision public into segments, and each slice not only
increases, our cultural diversity, it cuts deeply into the power of the
networks that have until now so-completely dominated our imagery.
John O'Connor, the perceptive critic of The New York Times, sums it
up simply. "One thing is certain," he writes. "Commercial television will
no longer be able to dictate either what is watched or when it is
watched."

What appears on the surface to be a set of unrelated events turns out
to be a wave of closely interrelated changes sweeping across the
media horizon from newspapers and radio at one end to magazines
and television at the other. The mass

DE-MASSIFYINQ THE MEDIA

165

media are under attack. New, de-massified media are proliferating,
challenging — and sometimes even replacing — the mass media that
were so dominant in all Second Wave societies. The Third Wave thus
begins a truly new era — the age of

the de-massifled media. A new info-sphere is emerging along side the
new techno-sphere. And this will have a far-reaching impact on the
most important sphere of all, the one inside our skulls. For taken
together, these changes revoutionize our images of the world and our
ability to make some sense of it.

BLIP CULTURE

The de-massification of the media de-massifies our minds as well.
During the Second Wave era the continual pounding of standardized
imagery pumped out by the media created what critics called a "mass
mind." Today, instead of masses of people all receiving the same
messages, smaller de-massi-fied groups receive and send large
amounts of their own imagery to one another. As the entire society
shifts toward Third Wave diversity, the new media reflect and
accelerate the process.

This, in part, explains why opinions on everything from pop music to
politics are becoming less uniform. Consensus shatters. On a personal
level, we are all besieged and blitzed by fragments of imagery,
contradictory or unrelated, that shake up our old ideas and come
shooting at us in the form of broken or disembodied "blips." We live, in
fact, in a "blip culture."

"Fiction increasingly stakes out smaller and smaller chunks of territory,"
complains critic Geoffrey Wolff, adding that each novelist "apprehends
less and less of any big picture." In nonfiction, writes Daniel Laskin,
reviewing such phenomenally popular reference works as The
People's Almanac and The Book of Lists, "The idea of any exhaustive
synthesis seems untenable. The alternative is to collect the world at
random, especially its more amusing shards." But the breakup of our
images into blips is hardly confined to books or literature. It is even
more pronounced in the press and the electronic media.

In this new kind of culture, with its fractured, transitory images, we can
begin to discern a widening split between Second Wave and Third
Wave media users.

Second Wave people, yearning for the ready-to-wear moral
166

THE THIRD WAVE

and ideological certainties of the past, are annoyed and disoriented by
the information blitz. They are nostalgic for radio programs of the
1930's or movies of the 1940's. They feel cut off from the new media
environment, not merely because much of what they hear is
threatening or upsetting, but because the very packages in which
information arrives are unfamiliar.

Instead of receiving long, related "strings" of ideas, organized or
synthesized for us, we are increasingly exposed to short, modular blips
of information--ads, commands, theo-ries, shreds of news, truncated
bits and blobs that refuse to fit neatly into our pre-existing mental files.
The new imagery resists classification, partly because it often falls
outside our old conceptual categories, but also because it comes in
packages that are too oddly shaped, transient, and disconnected.
Assailed by what they perceive as the bedlam of blip culture, Second
Wave people feel a suppressed rage at the media.

Third Wave people, by contrast, are more at ease in the midst of this
bombardment of blips — the ninety-second news-clip intercut with a
thirty-second commercial, a fragment of song and lyric, a headline, a
cartoon, a collage, a newsletter item, a computer printout. Insatiable
readers of disposable paperbacks and special-interest magazines,
they gulp huge amounts of information in short takes. But they also
keep an eye out for those new concepts or metaphors that sum up or
organize blips into larger wholes. Rather than trying to stuff the new
modular data into the standard Second Wave catego-ries or
frameworks, they learn to make their own, to form their own "strings"
out of the blipped material shot at them

by the new media.

Instead of merely receiving our mental model of reality, we are now
compelled to invent it andcontinually reinvent it. This places an
enormous burden onus. But it also leads toward greater individuality, a
de-massification of personality as well as culture. Some of us crack
under the new pressure or withdraw into apathy or anger. Others

emerge as well formed, continually growing, competent individuals
able to operate, as it were, on a higher level. (In either case, whether
the strain proves too great or not, the result is a far cry from the
uniform, standardized, easily regimented robots foreseen by so many
sociologists and science fiction writers of the Second Wave era.)

Above all this, the de-massification of the civilization, which the media
both reflects and intensifies, brings with it an

enormous jump in the amount of information we all exchange with one
another. And it is this increase that explains why we are becoming an
"information society.**

For the more diverse the civilization — the more differentiated its
technology, energy forms and people — the more in-formation must flow
between its constituent parts if the entirety is to hold together,
particularly under the stress of high change. An organization, for
example, must be able to predict (more or less) how other
organizations will respond to change, if it is to plan its own moves
sensibly. And the same goes for individuals. The more uniform we are,
the less we need to know about each other in order to predict one
another's behavior. As the people around us grow more individ-ualized
or de-massified, we need more information — signals

and cues-to predict even roughly, how they are going to be-have
toward us. And unless we can make such forecasts we cannot work or
even live together.

As a result, people and organizations continually crave more
information and the entire system begins to pulse with higher and
higher flows of data. By forcing up the amount of information needed
for the social system to cohere, and the speeds at which it must be
exchanged, the Third Wave shat-ters the framework of the obsolete,
overloaded Second Wave info-sphere and constructs a new one to
take its place.

THE

INTELLIGENT

ENVIRONMENT

Many different people of the world believed — and some still do — that
behind the immediate physical reality of things lie spirits, that even
seemingly dead objects, rocks or earth, have a living force within them:
mono. The Sioux Indians called it wakan. The Algonkians, manitou.
The Iroquois, orenda. For such people the entire environment is alive.

Today, as we construct a new info-sphere for a Third Wave civilization,
we are imparting to the "dead" environment around us not life but
intelligence.

The key to this revolutionary advance is, of course, the computer. A
combination of electronic memory with programs that tell the machine
how to process the stored data, computers were still a scientific
curiosity in the early 1950's. Between 1955 and 1965, however, the

decade when the Third Wave began its surge in the United States,
they began to seep slowly into the business world. At first they were
stand-alone units of modest capacity, employed chiefly for financial
purposes. Soon machines with huge capacity began moving into
corporate headquarters and were deployed for a variety of tasks. From
1965 to 1977, says Harvey Poppel, a senior vice president of Booz
Allen & Hamilton, the management consultants, we were hi the "era of
the large central computer. .. . It represents the epitome, the ultimate
manifestation of machine age thinking. It is the crowning
achievement — a large super-computer buried hundreds of feet beneath
the center [in a] bombproof . . . antiseptic environment ... manned by a
bunch of super-technocrats."

So impressive were these centralized giants that they soon 168

THE INTELLIGENT ENVIRONMENT

lag

became a standard part of social mythology. Movie makers,
cartoonists, and science fiction writers, using them to symbolize the
future, routinely pictured the computer as an all-powerful brain — a
massive concentration of superhuman intelligence.

During the 1 970's, however, fact outraced fiction, leaving obsolete
imagery behind. As miniaturization advanced with lightning rapidity, as
computer capacity soared and prices per function plunged, small,
cheap, powerful mini-computers began to sprout everywhere. Every
branch factory, laboratory, sales office or engineering department
claimed its own. So many computers appeared, in fact, that companies
sometimes lost track of how many they had. The "brainpower" of the
computer was no longer concentrated at a single point; it was
"distributed."

This dispersion of computer intelligence is now moving ahead at high
speed. In 1977 expenditures for what is now called "distributed data
processing," or DDP, ran to $300 million in the United States.

According to the International Data Corporation, a leading market
research firm in the field, this figure will reach a solid $3 billion by
1982. Small, cheap machines, no longer requiring a specially trained
computer priesthood, will soon be as omnipresent as the typewriter.

We are "smartening" our work environment.

Outside the confines of industry and government, moreover, a parallel
process is under way based on that soon-to-be-ubiquitous gadget: the
home computer. Five years ago the number of home or personal
computers was negligible. Today it is estimated that 300,000
computers are whirring and buzzing away in living rooms, kitchens,
and dens from one end of America to the next And this is before the
major manufacturers, like IBM and Texas Instruments, launch their
sales drives. Home computers will soon be selling for little more than a
television set.

These clever machines are already being used for everything from
doing the family taxes to monitoring energy use in the home, playing
games, keeping a file of recipes, reminding their owners of upcoming

appointments, and serving as "smart typewriters." This, however,
offers only a tiny glimpse of their full potential.'

Telecomputing Corporation of America offers a service called simply
"The Source," which for minuscule costs provides the computer user
with instant access to the United Press International news wire; a vast
array of stock and com-

170 THE THIRD WAVE

modity market data; educational programs to teach children arithmetic,
spelling, French, German, or Italian; membership in a computerized
discount shoppers' club; instant hotel or travel reservations, and more.

The Source also makes it possible for anyone with a cheap computer
terminal to communicate with anyone else in the system. Bridge,
chess, or backgammon players who so desire can play games with
someone a thousand miles distant. Users can send private messages
to one another or to large numbers of people all at once, and store all
correspondence in electronic memory. The Source will even facilitate
the creation of what might be called "electronic communities" — groups
of people with shared interests. A dozen photo buffs in a dozen cities,
brought together electronically by The Source, can converse to their
heart's delight about cameras, equipment, darkroom techniques,
lighting, or color film. Months later they can retrieve their comments
from The Source's electronic memory, by subject, date, or other
category.

The dispersal of computers into the home, not to mention their
interconnection hi ramified networks, represents another advance in
the construction of an intelligent environment. Yet even this is not all.

The spread of machine intelligence reaches another level altogether
with the arrival of microprocessors and microcomputers, those tiny
chips of congealed intelligence that are about to become a part, it
seems, of nearly all the things we make and use.

Apart from their applications in manufacturing processes and business
generally, they are already embedded, or soon will be, hi everything
from air-conditioners and autos to sewing machines and scales. They
will monitor and minimize the waste of energy in the home. They will
adjust the amount of detergent and the water temperature for each
washing machine load. They will fine-tune the car's fuel system. They
will flag us when something needs repair. They will flick on the clock
radio, the toaster, the coffee maker, and the shower for us in the
morning. They will warm the garage, lock the doors, and perform a
vertiginous variety of other humble and not-so-humble tasks.

Just how far things might go within a few decades is suggested by
Alan P. Hald, a leading microcomputer distributor, in an amusing
scenario he calls "Fred the House."

According to Hald, "Home computers can already talk, interpret
speech, and control appliances. Throw in a few sen-

THE INTELLIGENT ENVIRONMENT

171

sors, a modest vocabulary, the Bell Telephone system ;nul your house
could talk to ... anyone or anything in tin-world." Many obstacles still lie
ahead, but the direction ol change is clear.

"Imagine," Hald writes. "You're at work, the phone rings. It's Fred, your
house. While monitoring the morning news n ports for stories of recent
burglaries, Fred picked up a weather bulletin warning of pending heavy
rain. This jogged Fred's bubble memories to run a routine roof
maintenance check. A potential leak was found. Before calling you,

Fred phoned Slim for advice. Slim is a ranchstyle home down the block
. . . Fred and Slim often shared data banks and each knew they were
programmed with an effective search technique for identifying
household services. . . . You've learned to trust Fred's judgment, and
approve the repairs. The rest is rather straight forward, Fred calls the
roofer..."

The fantasy is funny. Yet it spookily catches the feel of life in an
intelligent environment. Living in such an environment raises chilling
philosophical questions. Will machines take over? Can intelligent
machines, especially as they are linked together in mtercommunicating
networks, outrun our ability to understand and control them? Will Big
Brother some day be able to tap not merely our telephones but our
toasters and television sets, keeping tabs on our every move and
mood? How dependent should we allow ourselves to become on the
computer and the chip? As we pump more and more intelligence into
the material environment, won't our own minds atrophy? And what
happens if someone or something pulls the plug out of the wall? Will
we still have the basic skills needed for survival?

For each question there are innumerable counterquestions. Can Big
Brother really keep tabs on every toaster and TV set, every car engine
and kitchen appliance? When intelligence is distributed widely
throughout the entire environment, when it can be activated by users in
a thousand places at once, when computer users can communicate
with one another without going through the central computer (as they
do in many distributed networks), can Big Brother still control things?
Rather than enhancing the power of the total it:ni:m state, the
decentralization of intelligence may, in fact, w it. Alternatively, won't we
be smart enough to outfox govern ment? In The Shockwave Rider, a
brilliant, complex novel l>y John Brunner, the central character
successfully .sahoinj-es tin-efforts of the government to impose
thought control iln«>nrl<

172

THE THIRD WAVE

the computer network. Must minds atrophy? As we shall see in a
moment, the creation of an intelligent environment could have
precisely the opposite effect. In designing machines to do our bidding,
can't we program them, like Robbie in Isaac Asimov's classic tale, /,
Robot, never to harm a human? The verdict is not yet in, and, while it
would be irresponsible to ignore such issues, it would be na'ive to

assume that the cards are stacked against the human race. We have
intelligence and imagination we have not yet begun to use.

What is inescapably clear, however, whatever we choose to believe, is
that we are altering our info-sphere fundamentally. We are not merely
de-massifying the Second Wave media, we are adding whole new
strata of communication to the social system. The emerging Third
Wave info-sphere makes that of the Second Wave era — dominated by
its mass media, the post office, and the telephone — seem hopelessly
primitive by contrast.

ENHANCING THE BRAIN

In altering the info-sphere so profoundly, we are destined to transform
our own minds as well — the way we think about our problems, the way
we synthesize information, the way we anticipate the consequences of
our own actions. We are likely to change the role of literacy in bur lives.
We may even alter our own brain chemistry.

Raid's comment about the ability of computers and chip-studded
appliances to converse with us is not as blue-sky as it might seem.
"Voice data entry" terminals in existence today are already capable of
recognizing and responding to a vo-cabularly of one thousand words,
and many companies, from giants like IBM or Nippon Electric to
midgets like Heuristics, Inc., or Centigram Corporation, are racing to
expand that vo-cabularly, simplify the technology, and radically slash
the costs. Forecasts for when computers will feel at home with natural
language range from upwards of twenty years down to a mere five
years, and the implications of this development — on both the economy
and the culture — could be tremendous.

Today millions of people are excluded from the job market because
they are functionally illiterate. Even the simplest jobs demand people
capable of reading forms, on-off buttons, paychecks, job instructions,
and the like. In the Second Wave

THE INTELLIGENT ENVIRONMENT

173

world the ability to read was the most elemental skill required by the
hiring office.

Yet illiteracy is not the same as stupidity. We know that illiterate people
the world over are capable of mastering highly sophisticated skills in
activities as diverse as agriculture, construction, hunting, and music.
Many illiterates have prodigious memories and can speak several
languages fluently — something most university-educated Americans
cannot do. In Second Wave societies, however, illiterates were
economically doomed.

Literacy, of course, is more than a job skill. It is the doorway to a
fantastic universe of imagination and pleasure. Yet in an intelligent
environment, when machines, appliances, and even walls are
programmed to speak, literacy could turn out to be less paycheck-
linked than it has been for the past three hundred years. Airline

reservation clerks, stock-room personnel, machine operators, and
repairmen may be able to function quite adequately on the job bv
listening rather than reading, as a voice from the machine tells them,
step by step, what to do next or how to replace a broken part.

Computers are not superhuman. They break down. They make
errors — sometimes dangerous ones. There is nothing magical about
them, and they are assuredly not "spirits" or *'souls" in our
environment. Yet with all these qualifications, they remain among the
most amazing and unsettling of human achievements, for they
enhance our mind-power as Second Wave technology enhanced our
muscle-power, and we do not know where our own minds will
ultimately lead us.

As we grow more familiar with the intelligent environment, and learn to
converse with it from the time we leave the cradle, we will begin to use
computers with a grace and naturalness that is hard for us to imagine
today. And they will help all of us — not just a few "super-
technocrats'* — to think more deeply about ourselves and the world.

Today, when a problem arises we immediately seek to discover its
causes. However, until now even the most profound thinkers have
usually attempted to explain things in terms of a relative handful of
causal forces. For even the best human mind finds it difficult to
entertain, let alone manipulate, more than a few variables at a time.* In
consequence, when faced with a truly complicated problem — like why
a child is delinquent, or why inflation ravages an economy, or how
urbanization affects the ecology of a nearby river — we tend to focus

174

THE THIRD WAVE

on two or three factors and to ignore many others that may, singly or
collectively, be far more important.

Worse yet, each group of experts typically insists on the primal
importance of "its own" causes, to the exclusion of others. Faced with
the staggering problems of urban decay, the Housing Expert traces it
to congestion and a declining housing stock; the Transportation Expert
points to the lack of mass transit; the Welfare Expert shows the
inadequacy of budgets for day-care centers or social work; the Crime
Expert points a finger at the infrequency of police patrols; the
Economics Expert shows that high taxes are discouraging business
investment; and so on. Everyone high-mindedly agrees that all these
problems are somehow interconnected — that they form a self-
reinforcing system. But no one can keep the many complexities in
mind while trying to think through a solution to the problem.

Urban decay is only one of a large number of what Peter Ritner, in The
Society of Space, once felicitously termed "weave problems." He
warned that we would increasingly face crises that were "not
susceptible to 'cause and effect analysis' but would require 'mutual
dependence analysis'; not composed of easily detachable elements
but of hundreds of cooperating influences from dozens of independent,
overlapping sources."

Because it can remember and interrelate large numbers of causal
forces, the computer can help us cope with such problems at a deeper
than customary level. It can sift vast masses of data to find subtle
patterns. It can help assemble "blips'* into larger, more meaningful
wholes. Given a set of assumptions or a model, it can trace out the
consequences of alternative decisions, and do it more systematically
and completely than any individual normally could. It can even suggest
imaginative solutions to certain problems by identifying novel or
hitherto unnoticed relationships among people and resources.

Human intelligence, imagination, and intuition will continue in the
foreseeable decades to be far more important than the machine.
Nevertheless, computers can be expected to deepen the entire
culture's view of causality, heightening our understanding of the
interrelatedness of things, and helping us to synthesize meaningful
"wholes" out of the discon-

* While we may deal with many factors simultaneously on a
subconscious or intuitive level, systematic, conscious thinking about a
great many variables is damnably difficult, as anyone who has tried it
knows.

THE INTELLIGENT ENVIRONMENT
175

nected data whirling around us. The computer is one antidote to blip
culture.

At the same time, the intelligent environment may eventually begin to
change not merely the way we analyze problems and integrate
information, but even the chemistry of our brains. Experiments by
David Krech, Marian Diamond, Mark Rosenzweig, and Edward
Bennett, among others, have shown that animals exposed to an
"enriched" environment have larger cerebral cortices, more glial cells,
bigger neurons, more active neurotransmitters, and larger blood
supplies to the brain than animals in a control group. Can it be that, as
we complexify the environment and make it more intelligent, we shall
make ourselves more intelligent as well?

Dr. Donald F. Klein, Director of Research at New York Psychiatric
Institute, one of the world's leading neuropsychia-trists, speculates:

"Krech's work suggests that among the variables affecting intelligence
is the richness and responsiveness of the early environment. Kids
brought up in what might be called a 'stupid' environment —
understimulating, poor, unresponsive — soon learn not to take chances.
There's little margin for error, and it actually pays off to be cautious,
conservative, uninquisitive or downright passive, none of which works
wonders for the brain.

"On the other hand, kids raised in a smart, responsive environment,
which is complex and stimulating, may develop a different set of skills.
If kids can call on the environment to do things for them, they become
less dependent on parents at a younger age. They may gain a sense

of mastery or competence. And they can afford to be inquisitive,
exploratory, imaginative, and to adopt a problem-solving approach to
life. All of which may promote changes in the brain itself. At this point,
all we can do is guess. But it is not impossible that an intelligent
environment could lead us to develop new synapses and a larger
cortex. A smarter environment might make smarter people."

All this, however, only begins to hint at the larger significance of the
changes the new info-sphere brings with it. I'or the de-massification of
the media and the concomitant rise of the computer together change
our social memory.

176 THE THIRD WAVE

THE SOCIAL MEMORY

All memories can be divided into those that are purely personal or
private and those that are shared or social. Unshared private
memories die with the individual. Social memory lives on. Our
remarkable ability to file and retrieve shared memories is the secret of
our species' evolutionary success. And anything that significantly alters
the way we construct, store, or use social memory therefore touches
on the very wellsprings of destiny.

Twice before in history humankind has revolutionized its social
memory. Today, in constructing a new info-sphere, we are poised on
the brink of another such transformation.

In the beginning, human groups were forced to store their shared
memories in the same place they kept private memories — i.e., in the
minds of individuals. Tribal elders, wise men, and others carried these
memories with them hi the form of history, myth, lore, and legend, and
transmitted them to then: children through speech, song, chant, and
example. How to light a fire, the best way to snare a bird, how to lace a
raft or pound taro, how to sharpen a plowstick or care for the oxen — all
the accumulated experience of the group was stored in the neurons
and glia and synapses of human beings.

So long as this remained true, the size of the social memory was
sorely limited. No matter how good the memories of the elderly, no
matter how memorable the songs or lessons, there was only so much
storage space in the skulls of any population.

Second Wave civilization smashed the memory barrier. It spread mass
literacy. It kept systematic business records. It built thousands of
libraries and museums. It invented the file cabinet. In short, it moved
social memory outside the skull, found new ways to store it, and thus
expanded it beyond its previous limits. By increasing the store of
cumulative knowledge, it accelerated all the processes of innovation
and social change, giving Second Wave civilization the most rapidly
changing and developing culture the world until then had known.

Today we are about to jump to a whole new stage of social memory.
The radical de-massification of the media, the invention of new media,
the mapping of the earth by satellite, the monitoring of hospital patients
by electronic sensors, the

THE INTELLIGENT ENVIRONMENT

177

computerization of corporate files — all mean we are recording the
activities of the civilization hi fine-grain detail. Unless we incinerate the
planet, and our social memory with it, we shall before long have the
closest thing to a civilization with total recall. Third Wave civilization will
have at its disposal more information, and more finely organized
information, about itself than could have been imagined even a
quarter-century ago.

The shift to a Third Wave social memory, however, is more than just
quantitative. We are also, as it were, imparting life to our memory.

When social memory was stored in human brains it was continually
being eroded, refreshed, stirred about, combined and recombined in
new ways. It was active, or dynamic. It was, in the most literal sense,
alive.

When industrial civilization moved much of social memory outside the
skull, that memory became objectified, embedded in artifacts, books,
payroll sheets, newspapers, photographs, and films. But a symbol
once inscribed on a page, a photo once captured on film, a newspaper
once printed, remained passive or static. Only when these symbols
were fed into a human brain again did they come alive, to be
manipulated or recombined hi fresh ways. While Second Wave
civilization radically expanded social memory, it also froze it.

What makes the leap to a Third Wave info-sphere so historically
unprecedented a situation: it makes social memory both extensive and
active. And this combination will prove to be propulsive.

Activating this newly expanded memory will unleash fresh cultural
energies. For the computer not only helps us organize or synthesize
"blips" into coherent models of reality, it also stretches the far limits of
the possible. No library or file cabinet could think, let alone think in an
unorthodox fashion. The computer, by contrast, can be asked by us to
"think the unthinkable" and the previously unthought. It makes possible
a flood of new theories, ideas, ideologies, artistic insights, technical
advances, economic and political innovations that were, in the most
literal sense, unthinkable and unimaginable before now. In this way, it
accelerates historic change and fuels the thrust toward Third Wave
social diversity.

In all previous societies the info-sphere provided the means for
communication between humans. The Third Wave multiplies these
means. But it also provides powerful facilities, for

178

THE THIRD WAVE

the first time in history, for machine-to-machine communication and,
even more astonishing, for conversation between humans and the

intelligent environment around them. When we stand back and look at
the larger picture, it becomes clear that the revolution in the info-
sphere is at least as dramatic as that in the techno-sphere — in the
energy system and technological base of society.

The work of constructing a new civilization is racing forward on many
levels at once.

BEYOND MASS PRODUCTION

One day not long ago I drove a rented car from the snow-swathed
peaks of the Rocky Mountains down along snaky roads, then across
the high plains, and down, down again until I reached the eastern
foothills of that majestic mountain range. There in Colorado Springs,
under a brilliant sky, I made my way to a long, low building complex
that nestled along the highway, dwarfed by the peaks looming behind
me.

As I entered the building, I remembered again the factories in which I
had once worked, with all their clatter and roar, their dirt, smoke, and
suppressed anger. For years, ever since leaving our manual jobs, my
wife and I have been "factory voyeurs." In all our travels around the
globe, instead of zeroing in on ruined cathedrals and tourist clip joints
we have made it our business to see how people work. For nothing I
ells us more about their culture. And now in Colorado Springs I was
once again visiting a factory. I had been told (hat it was among the
most advanced manufacturing facilities in the world.

It soon became clear why. For, in plants like this, one glimpses the
latest hi technology and the most advanced information systems — and
the practical effects of their convergence.

This Hewlett-Packard facility turns out $100 million worth a year of
electronic apparatus — cathode-ray tubes for use in TV monitors and
medical equipment, oscilloscopes, "logic analyzers" for testing, and
even more arcane items. Of the 1 ,-700 people employed here, fully 40
percent are engineers,

179

180

THE THIRD WAVE

programmers, technicians, clerical or managerial personnel. They work
in a huge, high-ceilinged open space. One wall is a giant picture
window that frames an imposing view of Pikes Peak. The other walls
are painted bright yellow and white. The floors are light -colored vinyl,
gleaming and hospital clean.

The workers at H-P, from clerks to computer specialists,, from the plant
manager to assemblers and inspectors, are not separated spatially but
work together in open bays. Instead of shouting to one another over a
machine clatter, they speak in normal conversational tones. Because
everyone wears ordinary street clothes there are no visible distinctions
of rank or task. Production employees sit at their own benches or

desks; so many of these are decorated with trailing ivy, flowers, and
other greenery that, from some visual angles, one has the fleeing
illusion of being in a garden.

Striding through this facility, I thought how poignant it would be if I
could magically lift some of my old mates out of the foundry and auto
assembly line, put of the racket, the dirt, the hard bruising manual
labor, and the rigidly authoritarian discipline that accompanied it, and
transplant them into this new-style work environment.

They would stare in wonder at what they saw. I doubt very much that
H-P is a workers' paradise, and my blue collar friends would not be
easily fooled. They would demand to know, item by item, the pay
schedules, the fringe benefits, the grievance procedures, if any. They
would ask whether the exotic new materials being handled hi this plant
are really safe or whether there are environmental health hazards.

They would assume rightly that even under the seemingly casual
relationships some people give orders and others take them.

Nevertheless, my old friends' shrewd eyes would take in much that is
new and sharply different from the classical factories they knew. They
would notice, for example, that instead of all the H-P employees
arriving at once, punching the clock, and racing to their work stations,
they are able, within limits, to choose their own individual working
hours. Instead of being forced to stay in one work location, they are
able to move about as they wish. My old friends would marvel at the
freedom of the H-P employees, again within limits, to set their own
work pace. To talk to managers or engineers without worrying about
status or hierarchy. To dress as they wish. In short, to be individuals. In
fact, my old companions in their heavy steel-tipped shoes, dirty
overalls, and working-

BEYOND MASS PRODUCTION

181

men's caps would find it hard, I believe, to think of the place us a
factory at all.

And if we regard the factory as the home of mass production, they
would be right. For mass production is not whnt this facility is all about.
We have moved beyond mass production.

MOUSE MILK AND T-SHIRTS

It is conventional knowledge by now that the percentage of workers
employed in manufacturing in the "advanced" nations has declined in
the past twenty years. (In the United States today only 9 percent of the
total population — 20 million workers — manufacture goods for some 220
million people. The remaining 65 million workers provide services and
manipulate symbols.) And as this shrinkage of manufacturing has
accelerated in the industrial world, more and more routine
manufacturing has been farmed out to the so-called developing
countries, from Algeria to Mexico and Thailand. Like rusty used cars,
the most backward Second Wave industries are thus exported from the
rich nations to the poor.

For strategic as well as economic reasons, the rich nations cannot
afford to surrender manufacturing altogether, and they will not become
pure examples of "service societies" or "information economies." The
image of the rich world living off nonmaterial production while the rest
of the world engages in the output of material goods is highly
oversimplified. Instead, we will find the rich nations continuing to
manufacture key goods — but needing fewer workers to do so. For we
are transforming the very way goods are made.

The essence of Second Wave manufacture was the long "run" of
millions of identical, standardized products. By contrast, the essence of
Third Wave manufacture is the short run of partially or completely
customized products.

The public still tends to think of manufacture in terms of long runs, and
we do of course continue to turn out cigarettes by the billion, textiles by
the millions of yards, light bulbs, matches, bricks, or spark plugs in
astronomical quantities. No doubt we will continue to do so for some
time. Yet these are precisely the products of the more backward
industries rather than the most advanced, and today they account for
only about 5 percent of all our manufactured goods.

An analyst in Critique, a journal of Soviet studies,

182

THE THIRD WAVE

that while "the less highly developed countries — [those] with a GNP of
between U.S. $1000-2000 per capita per annum — concentrate on
mass produced manufactures" the "most highly developed countries . .

. concentrate on the export of one-off and short-run manufactured
goods depending on highly skilled labour and . . . high research costs:
computers, specialised machinery, aircraft, automated production,
systems, high technology paints, pharmaceutical products, high
technology polymers and plastics."

In Japan, West Germany, the United States, even in the Soviet Union,
in such fields as electrical manufacturing, chemicals, aerospace,
electronics, specialized vehicles, communications, and the like, we find
the trend toward de-massi-fication well developed. At Western
Electric's super-advanced plant in northern Illinois, for example,
workers make over four hundred different "circuit packs" in runs that
range from a maximum of two thousand a month all the way down to
two a month. At Hewlett-Packard in Colorado Springs, production runs
as small as fifty to one hundred units are com* mon.

At IBM, Polaroid, McDonnell Douglas, Westinghouse, and General
Electric in the United States, at Plessey and ITT in Great Britain, at
Siemens in Germany or Ericsson in Sweden, the same shift toward
short run and customized products is marked. In Norway the Aker
Group, which once accounted for 45 percent of that nation's ship
construction, has shifted to the manufacture of off-shore oil equipment.
The result: a switch from "series production" of ships to "tailor-made"
offshore products.

In chemicals, meanwhile, according to executive R. E. Lee, Exxon is
"moving to short runs in fabricated products — polypropylene and
polyethelyne in extruded plastics for pipe, sidings, panelling, etc. In
Paramins we are doing increasing custom work." Some of the runs are
so small, Lee adds, "we call them 'mouse-milk' runs."

In military production most people still think in terms of mass — but the
reality is "de-mass." We think of millions of identical uniforms, helmets,
rifles. In fact, the vast bulk of what a modern military establishment
needs is not mass produced at all. Jet fighters can be produced in runs
as small as ten to fifty at a time. Each one of these may be slightly
different, depending on purpose and branch of service. And with such
small orders, many of the components that go into the planes are
usually produced in short runs also.

BEYOND MASS PRODUCTION

183

Thus an eye-opening analysis of Pentagon spending by the number of
end-products purchased came up with the finding I hat, out of $9.1
billion spent on goods for which the number of end items was
identifiable, fully 78 percent ($7.1 billion) went for goods produced in
lots of under 100 units!

Even in fields where components are still mass-produced in very large
quantities — and in some highly advanced industries this is still the
case — the components are usually configured to form many different
end-products, each of which is in turn produced in short runs.

One need only look at the incredibly diverse vehicles whizzing down an
Arizona highway to recognize how the once relatively uniform auto
market has splintered into segments, forcing even those technological
tyrannosaurs, the auto makers, to back grudgingly into partial
customization. The car manufacturers in Europe, the United States,
and Japan now mass-manufacture components and sub-assemblies,
then plug them together in myriad ways.

At another level, note the humble T-shirt. The shirts are mass-made.

But new, cheap fast-heat presses make it economical to imprint
designs or slogans on very small batches. The result is a wild flowering
of shirts facetiously identifying the wearer as a Beethoven fan, a beer
drinker, or a porno star. Autos, T-shirts, and many other products
represent a halfway stage between mass and de-massified
manufacture.

The step beyond this, of course, is complete customization — the actual
manufacture of one-of-a-kind products. And that is clearly the direction
in which we are heading: products custom-cut for individual users.

According to Robert H. Anderson, head of the Information Services
Department at the Rand Corporation, and an expert on advanced
manufacturing: "It will be no harder in the near future to custom
produce something . . . than it is to mass produce . . . today. . . . We're
beyond the modularization stage where you make a lot of modules and

plug them together . . . and we're getting on to the stage of just plain
custom production. Just like clothes."

The shift toward customization is perhaps best symbolized by a
computer-based laser gun introduced a few years ago into the
clothing. industry. Before the Second Wave brought mass production, if
a man wanted a piece of clothing made he went to a tailor or a
seamstress, or his wife sewed it. Tn any case, it was done on a
handcraft basis, to his individual measure. All sewing was essentially
custom tailoring.

184 THE THIRD WAVE

After the arrival of the Second Wave, we began to manufacture
identical clothes on a mass-production basis. Under this system the
worker placed one layer of cloth on top of another; he laid a pattern on
top; then, with an electric cutting knife he cut around the edges of the
pattern and produced multiple, identical cutouts of the cloth. These
were then subjected to identical processing and came out identical in
size, shape, color, and so forth.

The new laser machine operates on a radically different principle. It
does not cut 10 or 50 or 100 or even 500 shirts or jackets at a time. Its
cuts one at a time. But it acutally cut faster and cheaper than the
mass-production methods employed until now. It reduces waste and
eliminates the need for inventory. For these reasons, according to the
president of Genesco, one of the largest manufacturers of apparel in
the United States, "The laser machines can be programmed to fill an
order for one garment economically." What that suggests is that some
day even standard sizes may disappear. It ma) be possible to read
one's measurements into a telephone, 01 point a video camera at
oneself, thus feeding data directly into a computer, which in turn will
instruct the machine to produce a single garment, cut exactly to one's
personal, individualized dimensions.

What we are looking at, in effect, is custom tailoring on a high-
technology basis. It is the reinstatement of a system of production that
flourished before the industrial revolution — but now built on the basis
of the most advanced, sophisticated technology. Just as we are de-
classifying the media, we are de-massifying manufacture.

Several other quite extraordinary advances are transforming the way
we make things.

As some industries move from mass to small batch production, others
are already moving beyond that toward full customization on a
continuous-flow basis. Instead of starting and stopping production at
the beginning and end of each short run, they are advancing to the
point at which the machines can continuously reset themselves, so that
the units of output — each one different from the next — stream from the
machines hi an unbroken flow. In a nutshell, we are racing

BEYOND MASS PRODUCTION

185

toward machine customization on a round-the-clock, continuous basis.

Another significant change, as we shall shortly see, brings the
customer more directly than ever before into the manufacturing
process. In some industries we are only a step removed from a
situation in which a customer-company pipes its specifications directly
into the manufacturer's computers, which will in turn control the
production line. As this practice becomes widespread, the customer
will become so integrated into the production process that we will find it
more and more difficult to tell just who is actually the consumer and
who the producer.

Finally, while Second Wave manufacture was Cartesian in the sense
that products were broken into pieces, then painstakingly reassembled,
Third Wave manufacture is post-Cartesian or "wholistic." This is
illustrated by what has happened to common manufactured products
like the wristwatch. Whereas watches once had hundreds of moving
parts, we are now able to make solid-state watches that are more
accurate and reliable — with no moving parts at all. Similarly, today's
Panasonic TV set has half as many parts as the sets of ten years ago.
As tiny microprocessors — those miracle chips again — turn up in more
and more products, they replace impressive numbers of conventional
components. Exxon introduces the "Qyx" — a new typewriter with only a
handful of moving parts as against the hundreds in the IBM Selectric.
Similarly, a well-known 35mm camera, the Canon AE-1, is now made
with 300 fewer parts than the model it superseded. Fully 175 of these
were replaced by a single Texas Instruments chip.

By intervening at the molecular level, by using computer-aided design
or other advanced manufacturing tools, we integrate more and more
functions into fewer and fewer parts, substituting "wholes" for many
discrete components. What is occurring can be compared to the rise of
photography in the visual arts. Instead of making a picture by placing
innumerable daubs of paint on a canvas, the photographer "makes"
the entire image at once by pressing a button. We are beginning to see
this "presto effect" hi manufacturing.

The pattern becomes clear, therefore. Vast changes in the techno-
sphere and the info-sphere have converged to change the way we
make goods. We are moving rapidly beyond traditional mass
production to a sophisticated mix of mass and de-massified products.
The ultimate goal of this effort is now

186

THE THIRD WAVE

apparent: completely customized goods, made with wholistic,
continuous-flow processes, increasingly under the direct control of the
consumer.

In brief, we are revolutionizing the deep structure of production,
sending currents of change through every layer of society. However,
this transformation, which will affect the student planning a career, the
business planning an investment, or the nation planning a

development strategy, can't be understood in isolation. It must be seen
in direct relationship to yet another revolution — this one in the office.

THE DEATH OF THE SECRETARY?

As fewer workers in the rich nations have engaged in physical
production, more have been needed to produce ideas, patents,
scientific formulae, bills, invoices, reorganization plans, files, dossiers,
market research, sales presentations, letters, graphics, legal briefs,
engineering specifications, computer programs, and a thousand other
forms of data or symbolic output. This rise in white-collar, technical,
and administrative activity has been so widely documented in so many
countries that we need no statistic here to make the point. Indeed,
some sociologists have seized on the increasing abstraction of
production as evidence that society has moved into a "post-industrial"
stage.

The facts are more complicated. For the growth of the white-collar
work force can be better understood as an extension of industrialism —
a further last surge of the Second Wave — than as a leap to a new
system. While it is true that work has grown more abstract and less
concrete, the actual offices in which this work is being done are
modeled directly after Second Wave factories, with the work itself
fragmented, repetitive, dull, and dehumanizing. Even today, much
office reorganization is little more than an attempt to make the office
more closely resemble a factory.

In this "symbol-factory," Second Wave civilization also created a
factory I ike caste system. The factory work force is divided into manual
and nonmanual workers. The office is similarly divided into "high
abstraction" and "low abstraction" workers. At one level we find the
high abstracters, the technocratic elites: scientists, engineers, and
managers, crwch of whose time is taken up with meetings,
conferences, business lunches, or in dictating, drafting memos, placing

BEYOND MASS PRODUCTION

187

phone calls, and otherwise exchanging information. One recent survey
estimated that 80 percent of the manager's time is spent in 150 to 300
"information transactions" daily.

At the other level we find the low abstractors — white-collar proletarians,
as it were — who, like factory workers throughout the Second Wave
period, perform endlessly routine and deadening work. Mostly female
and nommionized, this group can justifiably smile with irony at the
sociologists' talk of "post-industrialism." They are the industrial work
force of the office.

Today the office, too, is beginning to move beyond the Second Wave
and into the Third, and this industrial caste system is about to be
challenged. All the old hierarchies and structures of the office are soon
to be reshuffled.

The Third Wave revolution in the office is the result of several colliding
forces. The need for information has mushroomed so wildly that no
army of Second Wave clerks, typists, and secretaries, no matter how
large or hard-working, can possibly cope with it. In addition, the cost of
paper work has climbed so calamitously that a frantic search is
underway to control it. (Office costs have swelled to 40 or 50 percent of
all costs in many companies, and some experts estimate that the
expense of preparing a single business letter can run as high as $14 to
$18 when all the hidden factors are taken into account.) Moreover,
while the average factory worker in the United States today is
supported by an estimated $25,000 worth of technology, the office
worker, as one Xerox salesman puts it, "works with $500 or $1 000
worth of old typewriters and adding machines, and is probably among
the least productive workers in the world." Office productivity has
climbed a bare 4 percent over the past decade, and conditions in other
countries are probably even more pronounced.

Contrast this with the extraordinary decline in the cost of computers, as
measured by the number of functions performed. It has been estimated
that computer output has increased 10,000 times in the past fifteen
years, and that the per-function cost today is down 100,000-fold. The
combination of rising costs and stagnating productivity on the one hand
and computer advances on the other make an irresistible combination.
The result is likely to be nothing less than a "wordquake."

The main symbol of this upheaval is an electronic device

188 THE THIRD WAVE

called the word processor — some 250,000 of which are already at work
in U.S. offices. Manufacturers of these machines, including such titans
as IBM and Exxon, are bracing themselves to compete in what they
believe will soon be a $1 0-billion-a-year market. Sometimes called a
"smart typewriter" or a "text editor," this device fundamentally alters the
flow of information in the office, and with it the job structure. It is,
however, only one of a great family of new technologies about to
deluge the white-collar world.

In Chicago in June 1979, at the convention of the International Word
Processing Association, some 20,000 perspiring visitors trooped
through an exhibition hall to examine or try out a bewildering array of
other machines as well — optical scanners, high-speed printers,
micrographic equipment, facsimile machines, computer terminals, and
the like. They were looking at the beginning of what some term the
"paperless office" of tomorrow.

In Washington, D.C., in fact, a consulting firm known as Micronet, Inc.
has brought together the equipment of seventeen different
manufacturers into an integrated office in which paper is verboten. Any
document arriving in this office is instantly microfilmed and stored for
computer retrieval later on. This demonstration office and training
facility integrates dictating equipment, microfilm, optical scanners, and
video terminals into a functioning system. The objective, says Micronet
president Larry Stockett, is an office of the future in which "there are no
misfiles; marketing, sales, accounting and research data are always up
to the minute; information is reproduced and distributed at hundreds of

thousands of pages per hour for a fraction of a cent per page; and . . .
information is converted back and forth from print to digital to
photographic media at will."

The key to such an office of the future is ordinary correspondence. In a
conventional Second Wave office, when an executive wants to fire off
a letter or memo, an intermediary is called in — the secretary. This
person's first task is to capture the executive's words on paper — in a
notebook or a typed draft. Next the message is corrected to eliminate
errors, and perhaps retyped a few times. After that it is clean typed. A
carbon or Xerox copy is made. The original is dispatched to its
destination through the mailroom or the post office. The duplicate is
filed. Not counting the initial step of composing the message, five
distinct sequential steps are required.

BEYOND MASS PRODUCTION

189

Today's machines compress these five steps into one, making the
sequential all but simultaneous.

To learn how — and to speed up my own work — I bought a simple
computer, used it as a word processor, and wrote the latter half of this
book on it. To my pleasure, I found I could master the machine in a
single short session. Within a few hours I was using it fluently. After
more than a year at the keyboard I am still amazed by its speed and
power.

Today, instead of typing a draft of a chapter on paper, I type on a
keyboard that stores it in electronic form on what is known as a "floppy
disk." I see my words displayed before me on a TV-like screen. By
punching a. few keys I can instantly revise or rearrange what I have
written, shifting paragraphs, deleting, inserting, underlining, until I have
a version I like. This eliminates erasing, "whiting out," cutting, pasting,
stripping, Xeroxing, or typing successive drafts. Once I have corrected
the draft, I press a button, and a printer at my side makes a Jetter-
perfect final copy for me at vision-blurring speeds.

But making paper copies of anything is a primitive use of such
machines and violates their very spirit. For the ultimate beauty of the
electronic office lies not merely in the steps saved by a secretary in
typing and correcting letters. The automated office can file them in the
form of electronic bits on tape or disk. It can (or soon will) pass them
through an electronic dictionary that will automatically correct their
spelling errors. With the machines hooked up to one another and to the
phone lines, the secretary can instantly transmit the letter to its
recipient's printer or screen. The equipment thus can capture an
original, correct it, duplicate it, send it, and file it in what amounts
virtually to a single process. Speed increases. Costs go down. And the
five steps are compressed into one.

The implications of this compression extend far outside the office. For
among other things, this equipment, linked to satellites, microwave,
and other telecommunications facilities, makes it possible to end-run
that overworked, malfunctioning, classically Second Wave institution,

the Post Office. Indeed, the spread of office automation, of which word
processing is only a single small aspect, is integrally linked to the
creation of "electronic mail" systems to replace the postman and his
burdensome bag.

In the United States today, fully 35 percent of total domestic postal
volume consists of transaction reports: bills, receipts, purchase orders,
invoices, bank statements, checks,

190 THE THIRD WAVE

and the like. However, a vast amount of mail flows not between
individuals but between organizations. As the postal crisis has
deepened, more and more companies have sought an alternative to
the Second Wave postal system and begun to build pieces of a Third
Wave system instead.

Based on teleprinters, facsimile machines, word processor equipment,
and computer terminals, this electronic postal system is spreading very
rapidly, especially in the advanced industries, and will be given a
further tremendous boost by the new satellite systems.

Together, IBM, Aetna Casualty and Surety, and Comsat (the quasi-
governmental communications satellite agency) have set up a
company called Satellite Business Systems to provide integrated
information services to other companies. SBS plans to loft satellites for
client firms like General Motors, say, or Hoechst or Toshiba. Together
with cheap ground stations located at each company installation, the
SBS satellite makes it possible for each company to have, in effect, its
own electronic postal system, bypassing in good measure the public
postal services.

Instead of transporting paper, the new system moves electronic
pulses. Even today, notes Vincent Giuliano of the Arthur D. Little
research organization, electronics is the "hot" medium in many fields; it
is the electronic impulse that effectuates a transaction, with a paper bill
or receipt or statement going out afterward merely to validate it. How
long the paper will be needed is a matter of dispute.

Messages and memos move silently and instantaneously. Terminals at
every desk — thousands of them in any large organization — flicker
quietly as information flows through the system, bouncing up to a
satellite and down to an office halfway around the world or to a
terminal in an executive's home. Computers link the company's files
with those of other companies where necessary, and managers can
call up information stored in hundreds of outside data banks like the
New York Times Information Bank.

Just how far events move in this direction remains to be seen. The
image of the office of the future is too neat, too smooth, too
disembodied to be real. Reality is always messy. But it is clear that we
are rapidly on our way, and even a partial shift toward the electronic
office will be enough to trigger an eruption of social, psychological, and
economic consequences. The coming workquake means more than
just

BEYOND MASS PRODUCTION

191

new machines. It promises to restructure all the human relationships
and roles in the office as well.

It will, for a start, eliminate many of the secretary's functions. Even
typing becomes an obsolete skill in tomorrow's office, when speech-
recognition technology arrives. At first typing will still be necessary to
capture the messages and put them in transmittable form. But before
long, dictation equipment tuned to the distinctive accents of each
individual user will convert the sounds into written words, thus entirely
bypassing the typing operation.

"The old technology used a typist,*' says Dr. Oiuliano, "because it was
klutzy. When you had a clay tablet, you needed a scribe who knew
how to bake clay and chisel marks on it. Writing was not for the
masses. Today we have scribes called typists. But as soon as the new
technology makes it easier to capture the message, to correct it, store
it, retrieve it, send it and copy it, we will do all those things for
ourselves— just like writing and talking. Once the klutz-factor is
eliminated, we don't need the typist."

Indeed, one dearly held hope of many word-processing experts has
the secretary being upgraded and the executive taking on or sharing
the typing chore, at least until such time as it is totally eliminated.
When I delivered a speech at the International Word Processing
convention, for example, I was asked if my secretary uses the machine
for me. When I said I typed my own drafts and that, in fact, my
secretary could hardly get near my computer/word processor, cheers
rang through the room. They dream of a day when the classified
section in the newspaper may include ads like:

WANTED: GROUP VICE PRESIDENT Responsibilities include
coordinating finance, marketing, product line development in several
divisions. Must have demonstrated ability to apply sound management
control. Report to Exec. VP, multi-line international company. TYPING
REQUIRED.

Executives, by contrast, are likely to resist sullyins their fingertips, just
as they resist fetching their own mues of coffee. And knowing that
speech-recognition equipment is

192 THE THIRD WAVE

around the comer, so that they will be able to dictate and have the
machine do all the typing, they will resist learning how to handle a
keyboard all the more.

Whether they do so or not, the unevadable fact remains that Third
Wave production in the office, as it collides with the old Second Wave
systems, will produce anxiety and conflict as well as reorganization,
restructuring, and — for some — rebirth into new careers and
opportunities. The new systems will challenge all the old executive

turfs, the hierarchies, the sexual role divisions, the departmental
barriers of the past.

All of this has raised many fears. Opinion divides sharply between
those who insist that millions of jobs will simply vanish (or that today's
secretaries will mainly be reduced to mechanical slaves) and a more
sanguine view widely held in the word processing industry, and
expressed by Randy Gold-field, a principal of the Booz Allen &

Hamilton consulting firm. According to Ms. Goldfield, secretaries, far
from being reduced to mindless, repetitive processors, will become
"para-principals," sharing in some of the professional work and
decision-making from which they have been largely excluded until now.
More likely we will see a sharp division between those white-collar
workers who move up to more responsible positions and those who
move down — and eventually out.

What, then, happens to these people — and to the economy in general?
During the late 1950's and early 1960's, when automation first began
arriving on the scene, economists and trade unionists in many
countries forecast massive unemployment. Instead, employment in the
high-technology nations expanded. As the manufacturing sector
shrank the white-collar and service sectors expanded, taking up the
slack. But if manufacturing continues to shrink, and if office
employment is to be put through the wringer at the same time, where
will the jobs of tomorrow come from?

Nobody knows. Despite endless studies and vehement claims, the
forecasts and the evidence are contradictory. Attempts to relate
investment in mechanization and automation to levels of manufacturing
employment show what the Financial Times of London calls an "almost
complete lack of correlation." Between 1963 and 1973 Japan had the
highest rate of investment in new technology, as a percentage of value
added, of any country in a seven-nation study. It also had the highest
growth in employment. Britain, whose investment in machinery was the
lowest, showed the greatest loss of jobs.

BEYOND MASS PRODUCTION

193

The American experience roughly paralleled that of Japan — iirlmology
and new jobs both increasing — while Sweden, l-ranee, West Germany,
and Italy all showed markedly individual patterns,

It is clear that the level of employment is not merely a re-flrciion of
technological advance. It does not simply rise and full as we automate
or fail to do so. Employment is the net result of many converging
policies.

Pressures on the job market may well increase dramatically in the
years ahead. But it is naive to single out the computer as their source.

What is certain is that both the office and the factory are destined to be
revolutionized in the decades ahead. The twin revolutions in the white-
collar sector and in manufacture add up to nothing less than a wholly
new mode of production for society — a giant step for the human race.

This step carries with it indescribably complex implications. It will affect
not only such things as the level of employment and the structure of
industry but also the distribution of political and economic power, the
size of our work units, the international division of labor, the role of
women in the economy, the nature of work, and the divorce of
producer from consumer; it will even alter so seemingly simple a fact
as the "where" of work.

THE

ELECTRONIC

COTTAGE

Hidden inside our advance to a new production system is a potential
for social change so breathtaking in scope that few among us have
been willing to face its meaning. For we are about to revolutionize our
homes as well.

Apart from encouraging smaller work units, apart from permitting a
decentralization and de-urbanization of production, apart from altering
the actual character of work, the new production system could shift
literally millions of jobs out of the factories and offices into which the
Second Wave swept them and right back where they came from
originally: the home. If this were to happen, every institution we know,
from the family to the school and the corporation, would be
transformed.

Watching masses of peasants scything a field three hundred years
ago, only a madman would have dreamed that the time would soon
come when the fields would be depopulated, when people would
crowd into urban factories to earn their daily bread. And only a
madman would have been right. Today it takes an act of courage to
suggest that our biggest factories and office towers may, within our
lifetimes, stand half empty, reduced to use as ghostly warehouses or
converted into living space. Yet this is precisely what the new mode of
production makes possible: a return to cottage industry on a new,
higher, electronic basis, and with it a new emphasis on the home as
the center of society.

To suggest that millions of us may soon spend our time at home,
instead of going out to an office or factory, is to unleash an immediate
shower of objections. And there are many 194

THE ELECTRONIC COTTAGE

195

sensible reasons for skepticism. "People don't want to work at home,
even if they could. Look at all the women struggling to get out of the
home and into a job!" "How can you get imy work done with kids
running around?" "People won't be motivated unless there's a boss
watching them." "People need l;ice-to-face contact with each other to
develop the trust and confidence necessary to work together." "The
architecture of the average home isn't set up for it." "What do you
mean work til home — a small blast furnace in every basement?" "What

iibout zoning restrictions and landlords who object?" "The unions will
kill the idea." "How about the tax collector? The tax people are getting
tougher on deductions claimed for working at home." And the ultimate
stopper: "What, and slay home all day with my wife (or husband)?"

Even old Karl Marx would have frowned. Working at home, he
believed, was a reactionary form of production because "the
agglomeration in one workshop" was "a necessary condition for the
division of labor in society." In short, there were, and are, many
reasons (and pseudoreasons) for regarding the whole idea as silly.

DOING HOMEWORK

Yet there were equally, if not more, compelling reasons three hundred
years ago to believe people would never move out of the home and
field to work in factories. After all, they had labored in their own
cottages and the nearby land for 10,000 years, not a mere 300. The
entire structure of family life, the process of child-rearing and
personality formation, the whole system of property and power, the
culture, the daily struggle for existence were all bound to the hearth
and the soil by a thousand invisible chains. Yet these chains were
slashed in short order as soon as a new system of production
appeared.

Today that is happening again, and a whole group of social and
economic forces are converging to transfer the locus of work.

To begin with, the shift from Second Wave manufacturing to the new,
more advanced Third Wave manufacturing reduces, as we just saw,
the number of workers who actually have to manipulate physical
goods. This means that even in the manufacturing sector an increasing
amount of work is being done that — given the right configuration of
telecommu-

19S

THE THIRD WAVE

nicatiom and other equipment — could be accomplished anywhere,
including one's own living room. Nor is this just a science fiction
fantasy.

When Western Electric shifted from producing electromechanical
switching equipment for the phone company to making electronic
switching gear, the work force at its advanced manufacturing facility in
northern Illinois was transformed. Before the changeover, production
workers outnumbered white-collar and technical workers three to one.
Today the ratio is one to one. This means that fully half of the 2,000
workers now handle information instead of things, and much of their
work can be done at home. Dorn Cuomo, director of engineering at the
Northern Illinois facility, put it flatly: "If you include engineers, ten to
twenty-five percent of what is done here could be done at home with
existing technology."

Cuomo's manager of engineering, Gerald Mitchell, went even further.
"All told," he stated, "600 to 700 of the 2,000 could now — with existing

technology — work at home. And in five years, we could go far beyond
that."

These informed "guesstimates" are remarkably similar to those made
by Dar Howard, manufacturing manager of the Hewlett-Packard factory
in Colorado Springs: "We have 1,-000 in actual manufacturing.
Technologically, maybe 250 of them could work at home. The logistics
would be complicated, but the tooling and capital equipment would not
prevent it. In white collar research and development, if you're willing to
invest in [computer] terminals, one half to three quarters could also
work at home." At Hewlett-Packard that would add up to an additional
350 to 520 workers.

All told, it means that fully 35 to 50 percent of the entire work force in
this advanced manufacturing center could even now do most, if not all,
their work at home, providing one chose to organize production that
way. Third Wave manufacturing, Marx notwithstanding, does not
require 1 00 percent of the work force to be concentrated in the
workshop.

Nor are such estimates found in electronic industries alone or in giant
enterprises. According to Peter Tattle, vice-president of Ortho
Pharmaceutical (Canada) Ltd., the question is not "How many can be
permitted to work at home?" but rather, "How many have to work in the
office or factory?" Speaking of the 300 employed in his plant, Tattle
says: "Fully 75 percent could work at home if we provided the
necessary communications technology." Clearly, what applies

THE ELECTRONIC COTTAGE

197

to electronics and Pharmaceuticals also applies to other advanced
industries.

If significant numbers of employees in the manufacturing sector could
be shifted to the home even now, then it is safe to say that a
considerable slice of the white-collar sector — where there are no
materials to handle — could also make that transition.

Indeed, an unmeasured but appreciable amount of work is already
being done at home by such people as salesmen and saleswomen
who work by phone or visit, and only occasionally touch base at the
office; by architects and designers; by a burgeoning pool of specialized
consultants in many industries; by large numbers of human-service
workers like therapists or psychologists; by music teachers and
language instructors; by art dealers, investment counselors, insurance
agents, lawyers, and academic researchers; and by many other
categories of white-collar, technical, and professional people.

These are, moreover, among the most rapidly expanding work
classifications, and when we suddenly make available technologies
that can place a low-cost "work station" in any home, providing it with a
"smart" typewriter, perhaps, along with a facsimile machine or
computer console and teleconferencing equipment, the possibilities for
home work are radically extended.

Given such equipment, who might be the first to make the transition
from centralized work to the "electronic cottage"? While it would be a
mistake to underestimate the need for direct face-to-face contact in
business, and all the subliminal and nonverbal communication that
accompanies that contact, it is also true that certain tasks do not
require much outside contact at all — or need it only intermittently.

Thus "low-abstraction" office workers for the most part perform tasks —
entering data, typing, retrieving, totaling columns of figures, preparing
invoices, and the like — that require few, if any, direct face-to-face
transactions. They could perhaps be most easily shifted into the
electronic cottage. Many of the "ultrahigh-abstraction" workers —
researchers, for example, and economists, policy formulators,
organizational designers — require both high-density contact with peers
and colleagues and 'times to work alone. There are times when even
deal-makers need to back off and do their "homework."

Nathaniel Samuels, an advisory director of the Lehman Brothers Kuhn
Loeb investment banking house, agrees. Sam-

198

THE THIRD WAVE

uels, who already works at home 50 to 75 days a year, contends that
"future technology will increase the amount of 'homework.'" Indeed,
many companies are already relaxing their insistence that work be
done in the office. When Weyerhaeuser, the great timber-products
company, needed a new brochure on employee conduct not long ago,
Vice-President R. L. Siegel and three of his staff members met at his
home for almost a week until they had hammered out a draft. "We felt
we needed to get out [of the office], to avoid the distractions," says
Siegel. "Working at home is consistent with our shift toward flexible
hours," he adds. "The important thing is getting your job done. It's
incidental to us where you do it."

According to the Wall Street Journal, Weyerhaeuser is not alone.
"Many other companies also are letting their employees work at
home," the newspaper reports, among them United Airlines, whose
director of public relations allows his staff people to write at home as
much as 20 days a year. Even McDonald's, whose lower-rung
employees are needed to staff the hamburger grills, encourages home
work among some top executives.

"Do you really need an office as such at all?" asks Booz Allen &
Hamilton's Harvey Poppel. In an unpublished forecast, Poppel
suggests that "by the 1990s, two-way communications capability [will
have been] enhanced sufficiently to encourage a widespread practice
of working at home." His view is supported by many other researchers,
like Robert F. Latham, a long-range planner at Bell Canada in
Montreal. According to Latham, "As information jobs proliferate and
communications facilities improve, the number of people who may
work at home or at local work centres will also increase."

Similarly, Hollis Vail, a management consultant for the United States
Department of the Interior, asserts that by the mid-1980's, "tomorrow's
word-processing centers" could easily be in one's own home"; he has
written a scenario describing how a secretary, "Jane Adams,"
employed by the "Afgar Company" could work at home, meeting her
boss only periodically to "talk over problems, and, of course, to attend
office parties."

This same view is shared by the Institute for the Future, which, as early
as 1971, surveyed 150 experts in "leading edge" companies dealing
with the new information technologies, and spelled out five different
categories of work that could be transferred to the home.

THE ELECTRONIC COTTAGE

199

Given the necessary tools, the IFF found, many of the present duties of
the secretary "could be done from home as well as in the office. Such a
system would increase the labor pool by allowing married secretaries
caring for small children ;it home to continue to work. . . . There may be
no overriding reason why a secretary could not just as well, in many
instances, take dictation at home and type the text on a home terminal
which produces a clean text at the author's home or office."

In addition, IFF continued, "Many of the tasks performed by engineers,
draftsmen, and other white-collar employees might be done from home
as readily as, or sometimes more readily than, from the office." One
"seed of the future" exists nlready in Britain, for example, where a
company called F. International Ltd. (the "F" stands for Freelance)
employs 400 part-time computer programmers, all but a handful of
whom work in their own homes. The company, which organizes teams
of programmers for industry, has expanded to Holland and
Scandinavia and counts among its clients such giants as British Steel,
Shell, and Unilever. "Home computer programming," writes the
Guardian newspaper, is "the cottage industry of the 1980s."

In short, as the Third Wave sweeps across society, we find more and
more companies that can be described, in the words of one
researcher, as nothing but "people huddled around a computer." Put
the computer in people's homes, and they no longer need to huddle.
Third Wave white-collar work, like Third Wave manufacturing, will not
require 1 00 percent of the work force to be concentrated in the
workshop.

One should not-underestimate the difficulties entailed in transferring
work from its Second Wave locations in factory and office to its Third
Wave location in the home. Problems of motivation and management,
of corporate and social reorganization will make the shift both
prolonged and, perhaps, painful. Nor can all communication be
handled vicariously. Some jobs — especially those involving creative
deal-making, where each decision is nonroutine — require much face-
to-face contact. Thus Michael Koerner, President of Canada Overseas
Investments, Ltd,, says, "We all need to be within a thousand feet of
one another."

THE TELECOMMUTERS

Nevertheless, powerful forces are converging to promote the electronic
cottage. The most immediately apparent is the economic trade-off
between transportation and telecommunication. Most high-technology
nations are now experiencing a transportation crisis, with mass transit
systems strained to the breaking point, roads and highways clogged,
parking spaces rare, pollution a serious problem, strikes and
breakdowns almost routine, and costs skyrocketing.

The escalating costs of commuting are borne by the individual workers.
But they are, of course, indirectly passed on to the employer in the
form of higher wage costs, and to the consumer in higher prices. Jack
Nilles and a team sponsored by the National Science Foundation have
worked out both the dollar and the energy savings that would flow from
any substantial shift of white-collar jobs out of centralized downtown
offices. Instead of assuming the jobs would go into the homes of
employees, the Nilles group used what might be termed a halfway-
house model, assuming only that jobs would be dispersed into
neighborhood work centers closer to employee homes.

The implications of their findings are startling. Studying 2,-048
insurance company employees in Los Angeles, the Nilles group found
that each person, on average, traveled 21 .4 miles a day to and from
work (as against a national average of 18.8 miles for urban workers in
the United States). The higher up the managerial scale, the longer the
commute, with top executives averaging 33.2 miles. All told, these
workers drove 12.4 million miles each year to get to work, using up
nearly a half-century's worth of hours to do so.

At 1974 prices, this cost twenty-two cents per mile, or a total of
$2,730,000 — an amount borne indirectly by the company and its
customers. Indeed, Nilles found that the company was paying its
downtown workers $520 a year more than the going rate in the
dispersed locations — in effect, "a subsidy of transportation costs." It
was also providing parking spaces and other costly services made
necessary by the centralized location. If we now assume a secretary
was earning in the neighborhood of $10,000 a year, the elimination of
this commuting cost could have permitted the company to hire nearly
300 additional employees or, alternatively, to add a substantial amount
to profits.

The key question is: When will the cost of installing and
THE ELECTRONIC COTTAGE
201

operating telecommunications equipment fall below the present cost of
commuting? While gasoline and other transport costs (including the
costs of mass-transit alternatives to the auto) are soaring everywhere,
the price of telecommunications is shrinking spectacularly.* At some
point the curves must cross.

But these are not the only forces subtly moving us toward the
geographical dispersal of production and, ultimately, the electronic

cottage of the future. The Nilles team found that the average American
urban commuter uses the gasoline equivalent of 64.6 kilowatts of
energy to get back and forth to work each day. (The Los Angeles
insurance employees burned 37.4 million kilowatts a year in
commuting.) By contrast, it takes far less energy to move information.

A typical computer terminal uses only 100 to 125 watts or less when it
is in operation, and a phone line consumes only one watt or less while
it is in use. Making certain assumptions about how much
communications equipment would be needed, and how long it would
operate, Nilles calculated that "the relative energy consumption
advantage of telecommuting over commuting (i.e., the ratio of
commuting energy consumption to telecommuting consumption) is at
least 29:1 when the private automobile is used; 1 1 :1 when normally
loaded mass transit is used; and 2:1 for 100 per cent utilized mass
transit systems."

Carried to their conclusion, these calculations showed that in 1975,
had even as little as 12 to 14 percent of urban commuting been
replaced by telecommuting, the United States would have saved
approximately 75 million barrels of gasoline — and would have thereby
completely eliminated the need to import any gasoline from abroad.
The implications of that one fact for the U.S. balance of payments and
for Middle East politics might also have been more than trivial.

As gasoline prices and energy costs in general rise in the decades
immediately ahead, both the dollar cost and energy costs of operating
"smart" typewriters, telecopiers, audio and video links, and home-size
computer consoles will plummet,

* Satellites slash the cost of long-distance transmission, bringing it so
near the zero mark per signal that engineers now speak of "distance-
independent" communications. Computer power has multiplied
exponentially and prices have dropped so dramatically that engineers
and Investors alike are left gasping. With fiber optics and other new
breakthrough technologies hi the wings, it is clear that still further cost
reductions lie ahead — per unit of memory, per processing step, and
per signal transmitted.

still further increasing the relative advantage of moving at least some
production out of the large central workshops that dominated the
Second Wave era.

All these mounting pressures toward telecommuting will intensify as
intermittent gas shortages, odd-even days, long lines at the fuel pump,
and perhaps rationing disrupt and delay normal commuting, further
jacking up its cost in both social and economic terms.

To this we can add even more pressures tending in the same direction.
Corporate and government employers will discover that shifting work
into the home — or into local or neighborhood work centers as a
halfway measure — can sharply reduce the huge amounts now spent
for real estate. The smaller the central offices and manufacturing
facilities become, the smaller the real estate bill, and the smaller the
costs of heating, cooling, lighting, policing, and maintaining them. As

land, commercial and industrial real estate, and the associated tax load
all soar, the hope of reducing and/or externalizing these costs will favor
the farming-out of work.

The transfer of work and the reduction of commuting will also reduce
pollution and therefore the tab for cleaning it up. The more successful
environmentalists become at compelling companies to pay for their
own pollution, the more incentive there will be to shift to low-polluting
activities, and therefore from large-scale, centralized workplaces to
smaller work centers or, better yet, into the home.

Beyond this, as environmentalists and conservation-minded citizens
groups battle against the destructive effects of the auto, and oppose
road and highway construction, or succeed in banning cars from
certain districts, they unwittingly support the transfer of work. The net
effect of their efforts is to force up the already high cost and personal
inconvenience of transport as against the low cost and convenience of
communication.

When environmentalists discover the ecological disparities between
these two alternatives, and as the shift of work to the home begins to
look like a real option, they will throw their weight behind this important
decentralist move and help coax us into the civilization of the Third
Wave.

Social factors, too, support the move to the electronic cottage. The
shorter the workday becomes, the longer the commuting time in
relationship to it. The employee who hates to spend an hour getting to
and from the job in order to spend eight hours working may very well
refuse to invest the same

THE ELECTRONIC COTTAGE

203

commuting time if the hours spent on the job are cut. The higher the
ratio of commuting time to working time, the more irrational, frustrating,
and absurd the process of shuttling back and forth. As resistance to
commuting rises, employers will indirectly have to increase the
premium paid to workers in the big, centralized work locations, as
against those willing to take less pay for less travel time,
inconvenience, and cost. Once again there will be greater incentive to
transfer work.

Finally, deep value changes are moving in the same direction. Quite
apart from the growth of privatism and the new allure of small-city and
rural life, we are witnessing a basic shift in attitude toward the family
unit. The nuclear family, the standard, socially approved family form
throughout the Second Wave period, is clearly in crisis. We shall
explore the family of the future in the next chapter. For now, we need
only note that in the United States and Europe — wherever the
transition out of the nuclear family is most advanced — there is a
swelling demand for action to glue the family unit together again. And it
is worth observing that one of the things that has bound families tightly
together through history has been shared work.

Even today one suspects that divorce rates are lower among couples
who work together. The electronic cottage raises once more on a mass
scale the possibility of husbands and wives, and perhaps even
children, working together as a unit. And when campaigners for family
life discover the possibilities inherent in the transfer of work to the
home we may well see a rising demand for political measures to speed
up the process — tax incentives, for example, and new conceptions of
workers! rights.

During the early days of the Second Wave era, the workers' movement
fought for a "Ten Hour Day," a demand that would have been almost
incomprehensible during the First Wave period. Soon we may see the
rise of movements demanding that all work that can be done at home
be done at home. Many workers will insist on that option as a right.
And, to the degree that this relocation of work is seen as strengthening
family life, their demand will receive strong support from people of
many different political, religious, and cultural persuasions.

The fight for the electronic cottage is part of the larger super-struggle
between the Second Wave past and the Third Wave future, and it is
likely to bring together not merely

204

THE THIRD WAVE

technologists and corporations eager to exploit the new technical
possibilities but a wide range of other forces — environmentalists, labor
reformers of a new style, and a broad coalition of organizations, from
conservative churches to radical feminists and mainstream political
groups — in support of what may well be seen as a new, more
satisfactory future for the family. The electronic cottage may thus
emerge as a key rallying point of the Third Wave forces of tomorrow.

THE HOME-CENTERED SOCIETY

If the electronic cottage were to spread, a chain of consequences of
great importance would flow through society. Many of these
consequences would please the most ardent environmentalist or
techno-rebel, while at the same time opening new options for business
entrepreneurship.

Community Impact: Work at home involving any sizeable fraction of the
population could mean greater community stability — a goal that now
seems beyond our reach in many high-change regions. If employees
can perform some or all of their work tasks at home, they do not have
to move every time they change jobs, as many are compelled to do
today. They can simply plug into a different computer.

This implies less forced mobility, less stress on the individual, fewer
transient human relationships, and greater participation in community
life. Today when a family moves into a community, suspecting that it
will be moving out again in a year or two, its members are markedly
reluctant to join neighborhood organizations, to make deep friendships,
to engage in local politics, and to commit themselves to community life
generally. The electronic cottage could help restore a sense of

community belonging, and touch off a renaissance among voluntary
organizations like churches, women's groups, lodges, clubs, athletic
and youth organizations. The electronic cottage could mean more of
what sociologists, with their love of German jargon, call gemeinschaft.

Environmental Impact: The transfer of work, or any part of it, into the
home could not only reduce energy requirements, as suggested
above, but could also lead to energy decentralization. Instead of
requiring highly concentrated amounts of energy in a few high-rise
offices or sprawling factory complexes, and therefore requiring highly
centralized energy generation, the electronic cottage system would
spread

THE ELECTRONIC COTTAGE
205

out energy demand and thus make it easier to use solar, wind, and
other alternative energy technologies. Small-scale energy generation
units in each home could substitute for at least some of the centralized
energy now required. This implies a decline in pollution as well, for two
reasons: first, the switch to renewable energy sources on a small-scale
basis eliminates the need for high-polluting fuels, and second, it means
smaller releases of highly concentrated pollutants that overload the
environment at a few critical locations.

Economic Impact: Some businesses would shrink in such a system,
and others proliferate or grow. Clearly, the electronics and computer
and communications industries would flourish. By contrast, the oil
companies, the auto industry, and commercial real estate developers
would be hurt. A whole new group of small-scale computer stores and
information services would spring up; the postal service, by contrast,
would shrink. Papermakers would do less well; most service industries
and white-collar industries would benefit.

At a deeper level, if individuals came to own their own electronic
terminals and equipment, purchased perhaps on credit, they would
become, in effect, independent entrepreneurs rather than classical
employees — meaning, as it were, increased ownership of the "means
of production" by the worker. We might also see groups of home-
workers organize themselves into small companies to contract for their
services or, for that matter, unite in cooperatives that jointly own the
machines. All sorts of new relationships and organizational forms
become possible.

Psychological Impact: The picture of a work world that is increasingly
dependent upon abstract symbols conjures up an overcerebral work
environment that is alien to us and, at one level, more impersonal than
at present. But at a different level, work at home suggests a deepening
of face-to-face and emotional relationships in both the home and the
neighborhood. Rather than a world of purely vicarious human
relationships, with an electric screen interposed between the individual
and the rest of humanity, as imagined in many science fiction stories,
one can postulate a world divided into two sets of human
relationships — one real, the other vicarious — with different rules and
roles in each.

No doubt we will experiment with many variations and halfway
measures. Many people will work at home part-time and outside the
home as well. Dispersed work centers will no doubt proliferate. Some
people will work at home for months

206

THE THIRD WAVE

or years, then switch to an outside job, and then perhaps switch back
again. Patterns of leadership and management will have to change.
Small firms would undoubtedly spring up to contract for white-collar
tasks from larger firms and take on specialized responsibilities for
organizing, training, and managing teams of homeworkers. To
maintain adequate liaison among them, perhaps such small companies
will organize parties, social occasions, and other joint holidays, so that
the members of a team get to know one another face-to-face, not
merely through the console or keyboard.

Certainly not everyone can or will (or will want to) work at home.
Certainly we face a conflict over pay scales and opportunity cost. What
happens to the society when an increased amount of human
interaction on the job is vicarious while face-to-face, emotion-to-
emotion interaction intensifies in the home? What about cities? What
happens to the unemployment figures? What, in fact, do we mean by
the terms "employment" and "unemployment" in such a system? It
would be naive to dismiss such questions and problems.

But if there are unanswered questions and possibly painful difficulties,
there are also new possibilities. The leap to a new system of
production is likely to render irrelevant many of the most intractable
problems of the passing era. The misery of feudal toil, for example,
could not be alleviated within the system of feudal agriculture. It was
not eliminated by peasant revolts, by altruistic nobles, or by religious
Utopians. Toil remained miserable until it was altered entirely by the
arrival of the factory system, with its own strikingly different drawbacks.

In turn, the characteristic problems of industrial society — from
unemployment to grinding monotony on the job, to overspecialization,
to the callous treatment of the individual, to low wages — may, despite
the best intentions and promises of job enlargers, trade unions, benign
employers, or revolutionary workers' parties, be wholly unresolvable
within the framework of the Second Wave production system. If such
problems have remained for 300 years, under both capitalist and
socialist arrangements, there is cause to think they may be inherent in
the mode of production.

The leap to a new production system in both manufacturing and the
white-collar sector, and the possible breakthrough to the electronic
cottage, promise to change all the existing terms of debate, making
obsolete most of the issues over

THE ELECTRONIC COTTAGE

207

which men and women today argue, struggle, and sometimes die.

We cannot today know if, in fact, the electronic cottage will become the
norm of the future. Nevertheless, it is worth recognizing that if as few
as 10 to 20 percent of the work force as presently defined were to
make this historic transfer over the next 20 to 30 years, our entire
economy, our cities, our ecology, our family structure, our values, and
even our politics would be altered almost beyond our recognition.

It is a possibility — a plausibility, perhaps — to be pondered.

It is not possible to see in relationship to one another a number of
Third Wave changes usually examined in isolation. We see a
transformation of our technological system and our energy base into a
new techno-sphere. This is occurring at the same time that we are de-
massifying the mass media and building an intelligent environment,
thus revolutionizing the info-sphere as well. In turn, these two giant
currents flow together to change the deep structure of our production
system, altering the nature of work in factory and office and, ultimately,
carrying us toward the transfer of work back into the home.

By themselves, such massive historical shifts would easily justify the
claim that we are on the edge of a new civiliza-lion. But we are
simultaneously restructuring our social life ns well, from our family ties
and friendships to our schools nnd corporations. We are about to
create, alongside the Third Wave techno-sphere and info-sphere, a
Third Wave socio-sphere as well.

17

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE

During the Great Depression of the 1930's millions of men were thrown
out of work. As factory doors clanged shut against them, many plunged
into extremes of despair and guilt, their egos shattered by the pink
layoff slip.

Eventually unemployment came to be seen in a more sensible light —
not as the result of individual laziness or moral failure but of giant
forces outside the individual's control. The maldistribution of wealth,
myopic investment, runaway speculation, stupid trade policies, inept
government — these, not the personal weakness of laid-off workers,
caused unemployment. Feelings of guilt were, in most cases, naively
inappropriate.

Today, once more, egos are breaking like eggshells against the wall.
Now, however, the guilt is associated with the frac- ture of the family
rather than the economy. As millions of men and women clamber out
of the strewn wreckage of their marriages they, too, suffer agonies of
self-blame. And once more, much of the guilt is misplaced.

When a tiny minority is involved, the crack-up of their families may
reflect individual failures. But when divorce, separation, and other
forms of familial disaster overtake millions at once in many countries, it
is absurd to think the causes are purely personal.

The fracture of the family today is, in fact, part of the general crisis of
industrialism — the crack-up of all the institutions spawned by the
Second Wave. It is part of the ground-clearing for a new Third Wave
socio-sphere. And it is this 208

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE

209

traumatic process, reflected in our individual lives, that is alining the
family system beyond recognition.

Today we are told repeatedly that "the family" is falling iipart or that
"the family" is our Number One Problem. I'resident Jimmy Carter
declares, "It is clear that the national Kovernment should have a pro-
family policy. . . . There can in- no more urgent priority." Substitute
preachers, prime min-isiers, or the press, and the pious rhetoric comes
out very much the same. When they speak of "the family," however,
ilicy typically do not mean the family in all its luxuriant variety of
possible forms, but one particular type of family: the Second Wave
family.

What they usually have in mind is a husband-breadwinner, n wife-
housekeeper, and a number of small children. While many other family
types exist, it was this particular family form — the nuclear family — that
Second Wave civilization idealized, made dominant, and spread
around the world.

This type of family became the standard, socially approved model
because its structure perfectly fitted the needs of a mass-production
society with widely shared values and life-Niyles, hierarchical,
bureaucratic power, and a clear separation of home life from work life
hi the marketplace.

Today, when the authorities urge us to "restore" the family it is this
Second Wave nuclear family they usually have hi mind. By thinking so
narrowly they not only misdiagnose the entire problem, they reveal a
childish naivete about what Nil ps would actually be required to restore
the nuclear family to its former importance.

Thus the authorities frantically blame the family crisis on everything
from "smut peddlers" to rock music. Some tell us dial opposing
abortion or wiping out sex education or resist-mi' feminism will glue the
family back together again. Or 1 1 iey urge courses in "family
education." The chief United Males government statistician on family
matters wants "more rllective training" to teach people how to marry
more wisely, «>i else a "scientifically tested and appealing system for
select-iiii- a marriage partner." What we need, say others, are more
marriage counselors or even more public relations to give the i innly a
better image! Blind to the ways in which historical I wuvcs of change
influence us, they come up with well-inten-i M 'iied, often inane
proposals that utterly miss the target.

210 THE THIRD WAVE

THE PRO-NUCLEAR CAMPAIGN

If we really want to restore the nuclear family to its former dominance,
there are things we could do. Here are a few:

1) Freeze all technology in its Second Wave stage to maintain a
factory -based, mass-production society. Begin by smashing the
computer. The computer is a greater threat to the Second Wave family
than all the abortion laws and gay rights movements and pornography
in the world, for the nuclear family needs the mass-production system
to retain ite dominance, and the computer is moving us beyond mass
pro* duction.

2) Subsidize manufacture and block the rise of the service sector in the
economy. White-collar, professional, and technical workers are less
traditional, less family-oriented, more intellectually and psychologically
mobile than blue-collar workers. Divorce rates have risen along with
the rise service occupations.

3) "Solve" the energy crisis by applying nuclear and other highly
centralized energy processes. The nuclear family fits better in a
centralized than a decentralized society, and energy systems heavily
affect the degree of social and political centralization.

4) Ban the increasingly de-massified media, beginning with cable
television and cassette, but not overlooking local a regional
magazines. Nuclear families work best where there is a national
consensus on information and values, not in a society based on high
diversity. While some critics naively attack the media for allegedly
undermining the family, it was the mass media that idealized the
nuclear family form hi the first place.

5) Forcibly drive women back into the kitchen. Reduce the wages of
women to the absolute minimum. Strengthen, rather than relax, all
union seniority provisions to assure that women are further
disadvantaged in the labor force. The m* clear family has no nucleus
when there are no adults left ai home. (One could, of course, achieve
the same effect by reversing matters, permitting women to work while
compellinl men to stay home and rear the children.)

6) Simultaneously slash the wages of young workers tc make them
more dependent, for a longer time, on thei] families — and thus less
psychologically independent. The nu-

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE

211

• li-;ir family is further denuclearized when the young leave I'.m-ntal
control to go to work.

7) Ban contraception and research into reproductive biology. These
make for the independence of women and for ex-ii ,imarital sex, a
notorious loosener of nuclear ties.

«S) Cut the standard of living of the entire society to pre-l"S5 levels,
since affluence makes it possible for single people, divorced people,
working women, and other unat-i.u hcd individuals to "make it"
economically on their own. i in; nuclear family needs a touch of poverty
(not too much, 1 1 «i loo little) to sustain it.

I>) Finally, re-massify our rapidly de-massifying society, by (existing all
changes — in politics, the arts, education, business, or other fields — that
lead toward diversity, freedom of movement and ideas, or individuality.
The nuclear family remains

• lominant only in a mass society.

In short, this is what a pro-family policy would have to be II we insist on
defining family as nuclear. If we truly wish to it-store the Second Wave
family, we had better be prepared lo restore Second Wave civilization
as a whole — to freeze not only technology but history itself.

For what we are witnessing is not the death of the family us such, but
the final fracture of the Second Wave family sys-feni in which all
families were supposed to emulate the ideal-i/ed nuclear model, and
the emergence in its place of a iliversity of family forms. Just as we are
de-massif ying our media and our production, we are de-massifying the
family NY stem in the transition to a Third Wave civilization.

NON-NUCLEAR. LIFE-STYLES

The coming of the Third Wave, of course, does not mean i IK; end of
the nuclear family any more than the coming of flu; vSecond Wave
meant the end of the extended family. It means, rather, that the nuclear
family can no longer serve as UK- ideal model for society.

The little-appreciated fact is that, at least in the United Slates where
the Third Wave is most advanced, most people already live outside the
classical nuclear family form.

If we define the nuclear family as a working husband, a housekeeping
wife, and two children, and ask how many Americans actually still live
in this type of family, the answer i'i astonishing: 7 percent of the total
United States popula-

212

THE THIRD WAVE

tion. Ninety-three percent of the population do not fit this ideal Second
Wave model any longer.

Even if we broaden our definition to include families in which both
spouses work or in which there are fewer or more than two children,
we find the vast majority — as many as two thirds to three quarters of
the population — living outside the nuclear situation. Moreover, all the
evidence suggests that nuclear households (however we choose to
define them) are still shrinking in number as other family forms rapidly
multiply.

To begin with, we are witnessing a population explosion of "solos" —
people who live alone, outside a family altogether. Between 1970 and
1978 the number of persons aged fourteen to thirty-four who lived
alone nearly tripled in the United States — rising from 1.5 million to 4.3
million. Today, a fifth of all households in the United States consists of
a person living solo. Nor are all these people losers or loners, forced
into the solo life. Many deliberately choose it, at least for a time. Says a
legislative aide to a Seattle councilwoman, "I would consider marriage
if the right person came along, but I would not give up my career for it."
In the meantime she lives alone. She is part of a large class of young
adults who are leaving home earlier but marrying later, thus creating
what census specialist Arthur Norton says is a "transitional living
phase" that is "becoming an acceptable part of one's life cycle.'*

Looking at an older slice of the population, we find a large number of
formerly married people, often "between mar-* riages," living on their
own and, in many cases, decidedly liking it. The growth of such groups
has created a nourishing "singles" culture and a much publicized
proliferation of bars; ski lodges, travel tours, and other services or
products designed for the independent individual. Simultaneously, the
real estate industry has come up with "singles only" condo-minia, and
has begun to respond to a need for smaller apartments and suburban
homes with fewer bedrooms. Almost a fifth of all home buyers in the
United States today are single.

We are also experiencing a headlong growth in the number of people
living together without bothering about legal formalities. This group has
more than doubled in the past decade, according to United States
authorities. The practice has become so common that the United
States Department of Housing and Urban Development has
overthrown tradition and changed its rules to permit such couples to
occupy public housing. The courts, meanwhile, from Connecticut to
Califor A

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE
213

nia, are wrestling with the legal and property complications (hat spring
up when such couples "divorce." Etiquette columnists write about
which names to use in addressing partners, and "couple counseling"
has sprouted as a new professional service alongside marriage
counseling.

THE CHILD-FREE CULTURE

Another significant change has been the growth in the number of those
consciously choosing what is coming to be known as a "child-free" life-
style. According to James Ramey, senior research associate at the
Center for Policy Research, we are seeing a massive shift from "child-
centered" to "adult-centered" homes. At the turn of the century there
were few singles in society, and relatively few parents lived very long
after their youngest child left the home. Thus most households were, in
fact, child-centered. By contrast, as early as 1970 in the United States
only one in three adults lived in a home with children under eighteen.

Today organizations are springing up to promote the child-free life, and
a reluctance to have children is spreading in many industrial nations. In
1960 only 20 percent of "ever-married" American women under age
thirty were child-free. By 1975 this had shot up to 32 percent — a 60
percent jump in fifteen years. A vocal organization, the National
Alliance for Optional Parenthood, has arisen to protect the rights of the
childless and to combat pronatalist propaganda.

A similar organization, the National Association for the Childless, has
sprouted in Britain, and many couples across Europe are also
deliberately choosing to remain childless. In Bonn, West Germany, for
example, Theo and Agnes Rohl, both in their mid-thirties, he a city
official, she a secretary, say, "We don't think well have children . . ."
The Rohls are modestly affluent. They own a small home. They
manage a vacation trip to California or Southern France now and then.
Children would drastically alter their way of life. "We're used to our life-
style the way it is," they say, "and we like being independent." Nor is
this reluctance to bear children a sign of capitalist decadence. Ijt is
present in the Soviet Union, too, where many young Russian couples
echo the sentiments of the Rohls and explicitly reject parenthood — a
fact that worries Soviet officialdom in view of the still-high birth rates
among several non-Russian national minorities.

214

THE THIRD WAVE

Turning now to those with children, the breakdown of the nuclear
family is even more sharply evidenced in the spectacular increase in
single-parent families. So many divorces, breakups, and separations
have occurred in recent years — mainly in nuclear families — that today
a staggering one-in-seven American children is raised by a single
parent, and the number is even higher — one in four — in urban areas.*

The increase in such households has brought a growing recognition
that, despite severe problems, a one-parent household can, under
certain circumstances, be better for the child than a nuclear household
continually torn by bitter strife. Newspapers and organizations now
serve single parents and are heightening their group consciousness
and political clout.

Nor, once again, is the phenomenon purely American. In Britain today
nearly one family in ten is headed by a single parent — nearly a sixth of
them headed by men — and one-parent households form what New
Society magazine calls "the fastest growing group in poverty." A
London-based organization, the National Council for One-Parent
Families, has sprung up to champion their cause.

In Germany, a housing association in Cologne has constructed a
special block of apartments for such families and provided them with
day-time child care so the parents can work. And in Scandinavia a
network of special welfare rights has grown up to support these
families. The Swedes, for example, give one-parent households first
crack at nursery and day-care facilities. In both Norway and Sweden,
in fact, it is sometimes possible for a single-parent family to enjoy a
higher standard of living than that of the typical nuclear family.

A challenging new form of family has arisen in the meantime that
reflects the high rate of remarriage after divorce. In Future Shock I
identified this as the "aggregate family," in which two divorced couples
with children remarry, bringing the children of both marriages (and the
adults as well) into a new, expanded family form. It is now estimated
that 25 percent of American children are, or will soon be, members of
such family units. According to Davidyne Mayleas, such units, with
their "poly-parents," may be the mainstream family form of tomorrow.
"We're into economic polygamy," says Mayleas — meaning that the two
merged family units

* The total is also fed by out-of-wedlock births and by adoptions by
single women and (increasingly) single men.

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE

215

typically transfer money back and forth in the form of child support or
other payments. The spread of this family form, she reports, has been
accompanied by a rising incidence of sexual relations between parents
and nonblood-related children.

The technologically advanced nations today are honeycombed with a
bewildering array of family forms: Homosexual marriages, communes,
groups of elderly people banding together to share expenses (and
sometimes sex), tribal groupings among certain ethnic minorities, and
many other forms coexist as never before. There are contract
marriages, serial marriages, family clusters, and a variety of intimate
networks with or without shared sex, as well as families in which
mother and father live and work in two different cities.

Even these family forms barely hint at the even richer variety bubbling
under the surface. When three psychiatrists — Kellam, Ensminger, and
Turner — attempted to map the "variations of families" found in a single
poor black neighborhood in Chicago, they identified "no less than 86
different combinations of adults," including numerous forms of "mother-
grandmother" families, "mother-aunt" families, "mother-stepfather
families," and "mother-other" families.

Faced with this veritable maze of kinship arrangements, even fairly
orthodox scholars have come around to the once radical view that we
are moving out of the age of the nuclear family and into a new society
marked by diversity hi family life. In the words of sociologist Jessie
Bernard, "The most characteristic aspect of marriage in the future will
be precisely the array of options available to different people who want
different things from their relationships with one another."

The frequently asked question, "What is the future of the family?"
usually implies that as the Second Wave nuclear family loses its
dominance some other form will replace it. A more likely outcome is
that during Third Wave civilization no single form will dominate the
family mix for any long period. Instead we will see a high variety of

family structures. Rather than masses of people living in uniform family
arrangements, we shall see people moving through this system,
tracing personalized or-"customized" trajectories during the course of
their lives.

Again, this does not mean the total elimination or "death" of the nuclear
family. It merely means that from now on the nuclear family will be only
one of the many socially accepted

216

THE THIRD WAVE

and approved forms. As the Third Wave sweeps in, the family system
is becoming de-massified right along with the production system and
the information system in society.

"HOT" RELATIONSHIPS

Given this flowering of a multiplicity of family forms, it is too early to tell
which will emerge as significant styles in a Third Wave civilization.

Will our children live alone for many years, perhaps decades? Will they
go childless? Will we retire into old-age communes? What about more
exotic possibilities? Families wit several husbands and one wife? (That
could happen if genetic tinkering lets us preselect the sex of our
children, and too many parents choose boys.) What about homosexual
families raising children? The courts are already debating this issue.
What about the potential impact of cloning?

If each of us moves through a trajectory of family experiences in our
lives, what will the phases be? A trial marriage, followed by a dual-
career marriage with no children, then a homosexual marriage with
children? The possible permutations are endless. Nor, despite the
cries of outrage, should any of these be regarded as unthinkable. As
Jessie Bernard has put it, "There is literally nothing about marriage
that' anyone can imagine that has not in fact taken place. ... All these
variations seeemed quite natural to those who lived with them."

Which specific family forms vanish and which ones proliferate will
depend less on pulpit-pounding about the "sanctity, of the family" than
on the decisions we make with respect to i technology and work. While
many forces influence family structure — communication patterns,
values, demographic changes, religious movements, even ecological
shifts — the linkage between family form and work arrangements is
particularly strong. Thus, just as the nuclear family was pro-moted by
the rise of the factory and office work, any shift away from the factory
and office would also exert a heavy in-fluence on the family.

It is impossible, in the space of a single chapter, to spell out all the
ways in which the coming changes in the labor force and in the nature
of work will alter family life. But one change is so potentially
revolutionary, and so alien to our ex-perience, it needs far more
attention than it has received so

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE

217

far. This is, of course, the shift of work out of the office and factory and
back into the home.

Assume for a moment that twenty-five years from now 15 percent of
the work force is employed part- or full-time in the home. How would
working at home change the quality of our personal relationships or the
meaning of love? What would life be like in the electronic cottage?

Whether the work-at-home task is programming a computer, writing a
pamphlet, monitoring distant manufacturing processes, designing a
building, or typing electronic correspondence, one immediate change
is clear. Relocating work into the home means that many spouses who
now see each other only a limited number of hours each day would be
thrown together more intimately. Some, no doubt, would find this
prolonged proximity hateful. Many others, however, would find then*
marriages saved and their relationships much enriched through shared
experience.

Let us visit several electronic cottages to see how people might adapt
to so fundamental a change in society. Such a tour would no doubt
reveal a wide diversity of living and working arrangements.

In some houses, perhaps the majority, we might well find couples
dividing things up more or less conventionally, with one person doing
the "job-work" while the other keeps house — he, perhaps, writing
programs while she looks after the kids. The very presence of work hi
the home, however, would probably encourage a sharing of both job-
work and housekeeping. We would find many homes, therefore, in
which man and wife split a single full-tune job. For example, we might
find both husband and wife taking turns at monitoring a complex
manufacturing process on the console screen in the den, four hours
on, four hours off.

Down the street, by contrast, we would likely discover a couple holding
not one, but two quite different jobs, with each spouse working
separately. A cellular physiologist and a CPA might each work at his or
her craft. Even here, however, with the jobs differing sharply hi
character, there is still likely to be some sharing of problems, some
learning of each other's work vocabulary, some common concerns and
conversation relating to work. It is almost impossible under such
conditions for the work life of an individual to be strictly segregated
from personal life. By the same token, it is next to impossible to freeze
one's mate out of a whole dimension of one's existence.

218

THE THIRD WAVE

Right next door (continuing our survey) we could well come upon a
couple holding two different jobs but sharing both, the husband
working as a part-time insurance planner and part-time as an
architect's assistant, with the wife doing the same work on alternating

shifts. This arrangement would provide more varied, and therefore
more interesting, work for both.

In such homes, whether one or several jobs are shared, each partner
necessarily learns from the other, participates in the problem-solving,
engages in complex give-and-take, all of which cannot help but deepen
intimacy. Forced proximity, it goes without saying, does not guarantee
happiness. The extended family units of the First Wave era, which
were also economic production units, were hardly models of
interpersonal sensitivity and mutual psychological support. Such
families had their own problems and stresses. But there were few
uncommitted or "cooled out" relationships. Working together assured, if
nothing else, tight, complex, "hot" personal relationships — a
committedness many people envy today.

In short, the spread of work-at-home on a large scale could not only
affect family structure but transform relationships within the family. It
could, to put it simply, provide a common set of experiences and get
marriage partners talking to one another again. It could shift their
relationships along the spectrum from "cool" to "hot." It could also
redefine love itself and bring with it the concept of Love Plus.

LOVE PLUS

We saw how, as the Second Wave progressed, the family unit
transferred many of its functions to other institutions — education to the
school, care of the ill to hospitals, and so on. This progressive stripping
away of the functions of the family unit was accompanied by the rise of
romantic love.

A First Wave person looking for a mate might properly have asked "Is
my proposed spouse a good worker? A good healer? A good teacher
for the children to come? Can we work together compatibly? Will she
(or he) carry a full load or prove to be a shirker?" Peasant families
actually asked "Is she strong, good at bending and lifting, or is she
sickly and weak?"

As the functions of the family were hived off during the Second Wave
era, those questions changed. The family was

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE

219

no longer a combination of production team, school, field hospital, and
nursing home. Instead, its psychological functions became more
important. Marriage was supposed to supply companionship, sex,
warmth, and support. Soon this shift in the functions of the family was
reflected in new criteria for choosing a mate. They were summed up in
the single word love. It was love, the popular culture assured us, that
makes the world go round.

Of course, real life seldom lived up to romantic fiction. Class, social
status, and income continued to play a role in the choice of a mate. But
all such considerations were supposed to be secondary to Love with a
capital L.

Tomorrow's rise of the electronic cottage may very well overthrow this
single-minded logic. Those who look ahead to working at home with a
spouse, instead of spending the main part of their waking lives away,
are likely to take more into consideration than simple sexual and
psychological gratification — or social status, for that matter. They may
begin to insist on Love Plus — sexual and psychological gratification
plus brains (as then- grandfathers once favored brawn), love plus
conscientiousness, responsibility, self-discipline, or other work-related
virtues. We may — who knows? — hear some John Denver of the future
croon lyrics like:

I love your eyes, your cherry lips, the love that always lingers, your way
with words and random blips, your skilled computer fingers.

More seriously, one can imagine at least some families of the future
taking on additional functions rather than shedding them, and serving
as a multipurpose, rather than a narrowly specialized, social unit. With
such a change the criteria for marriage, the very definition of love
would be transformed.

THE CAMPAIGN FOR CHILD LABOR

Children, meanwhile, would also be likely to grow up differently in the
electronic cottage, if for no other reason than that they would actually
see work taking place. First Wave children, from then: first blink of
consciousness, saw their parents at work. Second Wave children, by
contrast — at least in recent generations — were segregated in schools
and di-

220

THE THIRD WAVE

vorced from real work life. Most today have only the foggiest notion of
what their parents do or how they live while at work. One possibly
apocryphal story makes the point: An executive decides to bring his
son to his office one day and to take him out to lunch. The boy sees
the plushly carpeted office, the indirect lighting, the elegant reception
room. He sees the fancy expense-account restaurant with its
obsequious waiters and exorbitant prices. Finally, picturing their home
and unable to restrain himself, the boy blurts out: "Daddy, how come
you're so rich and we're so poor?"

The fact is that children today — especially affluent children — are totally
divorced from one of the most important dimensions of their parents'
lives. In an electronic cottage kids not only observe work, they may,
after a certain age, engage in it themselves. Second Wave restrictions
on child labor — originally well-intentioned and necessary, but now
largely an anachronistic device to keep young people out of the
crowded job market — become more difficult to enforce in the home
setting. Certain forms of work, indeed, might be specifically designed
for youngsters and even integrated with their education. (Anyone who
underestimates the capacity of even very young people to understand
and cope with sophisticated work has not run into the fourteen- or
fifteen-year-old boys who serve, probably illegally, as "salesmen" in

California computer stores. I have had kids with braces still on their
teeth explain the intricacies of home computing to me.)

The alienation of youth today flows in large measure from being forced
to accept a nonproductive role in society during an endlessly prolonged
adolescence. The electronic cottage would counteract this situation.

In fact, integrating young people into work in the electronic cottage
may offer the only real solution to the problems of high youth
unemployment. This problem will grow increasingly explosive in many
countries .in the years ahead, with all the attendant evils of juvenile
crime, violence, and psychological immiseration, and cannot be solved
within the framework of a Second Wave economy except by totalitarian
means — drafting young people, for example, for war or forced service.
The electronic cottage opens an alternative way to bring youth back
into socially and economically productive roles, and we may see,
before long, political campaigns for, rather than against, child labor,
along with struggles over the necessary measures to protect them
against gross economic exploitation.

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE 221

THE ELECTRONIC EXPANDED FAMILY

Beyond this, one can easily imagine the work-at-home household
becoming something radically different: an "electronic expanded
family."

Perhaps the most common family form in First Wave societies was the
so-called extended family, which brought several generations together
under the same roof. There were also "expanded families" which, in
addition to the core members, included an unrelated orphan or two, an
apprentice or additional farm hand, or others. One can likewise picture
the work-at-home family of tomorrow inviting an outsider or two to join
it — for example, a colleague from the husband's or wife's firm, or
perhaps a customer or supplier engaged in related work, or, for that
matter, a neighbor's child who wants to learn the trade. One can
foresee the legal incorporation of such a family as a small business
under special laws designed to foster the cornmune-cum-corporation
or the cooperative. For many the household would become an
electronic expanded family.

It is true that most of the communes formed in the 1960's and 1970's
fell rapidly apart, seeming to suggest that communes, as such, are
inherently unstable in high-technology societies. A closer look reveals,
however, that the ones that disintegrated most rapidly Were those
organized primarily for psychological purposes — to promote
interpersonal sensitivity, to combat loneliness, to provide intimacy, or
the like. Most had no economic base and saw themselves as Utopian
experiments. The communes that have succeeded over time — and
some have — are, by contrast, those that have had a clear external
mission, an economic base, and a practical, rather than purely
Utopian, outlook.

An external mission welds a group together. It may, indeed, provide
the necessary economic base. If this external mission is to design a

new product, to handle the "electronic paper work" for a hospital, to do
the data processing for an insurance company department, to set up
the scheduling for a commuter airline, to prepare catalogs, or to
operate a technical information service, the electronic commune of
tomorrow may, in fact, turn out to be a quite workable and stable family
form.

Moreover, since such electronic expanded families would not be
designed as a rebuke to everyone else's life-style or for demonstration
purposes but rather as an integral part of the

222 THE THIRD WAVE

main wiring of the economic system, the chances for their survival
would be sharply improved. Indeed, we may find expanded households
linking up to form networks. Such networks of expanded families could
supply some needed business or social service, cooperating to market
their work or setting up their own version of a trade association to
represent them. Internally, they might or might not share sex across
marriage lines. They might or might not be heterosexual. They might
be childless or child-ful.

In brief, what we see is the possible resurrection of the expanded
family. Today some 6 percent of American adults live in ordinary
extended families. One might easily imagine a doubling or tripling of
this number in the next generation, with some units expanding to
include outsiders. This would be no trivial event but a movement
involving millions in the United States alone. For community life, for
patterns of love and marriage, for the reconstitution of friendship
networks, for the economy and the consumer marketplace, as well as
for our psyches and personality structure, the rise of the electronic
expanded family would be momentous.

This new version of the extended family is not presented here as
inevitable, not as better or worse than some other type of family, but
simply as one example of the many new family forms likely to find
viable niches in the complex social ecology of tomorrow.

PARENTAL MALPRACTICE

This rich diversity of family forms won't come into being without pain
and anguish. For any change in family structure also forces change hi
the roles we live. Every society, through its institutions, creates its own
architecture of roles or social expectations. The corporation and trade
union between them more or less defined what was expected of
workers and bosses. Schools fixed the respective roles of teachers
and pupils. And the Second Wave family allocated the roles of
breadwinner, housekeeper, and child. As the nuclear family goes
critical, so to speak, the roles associated with it begin to shiver and
crack — with excruciating personal impact.

From the day that Betty Friedan's bombshell book, The Feminine
Mystique, launched the modern feminist movement in many nations,
we have seen a painful struggle to redefine the roles of men and
women in terms appropriate to a post-

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE

223

nuclear-family future. The expectations and the behavior of both sexes
have shifted with respect to jobs, legal and financial rights, household
responsibilities, and even sexual performance. "Now," writes Peter
Knobler, editor of Crawdaddy, a rock music magazine, "a guy's got to
contend with women breaking all the rules. . . . Many regulations need
breaking," he adds, "but that doesn't make it much easier."

Roles are shaken by the battle over abortion, for instance, as women
insist that they — not politicians, not priests, not doctors or even
husbands — have a right to control their bodies. Sexual roles are further
blurred as homosexuals demand and partially win "gay rights." Even
the role of the child in society is changing. Suddenly advocates spring
up to lobby for a Children's Bill of Rights.

Courts are swamped by cases involving role redefinition, as
alternatives to the nuclear family multiply and gain acceptability. Do
unmarried spouses have to share their property after they break up?

Can a couple legally pay a woman to bear a child for them by artificial
insemination? (A British court said no — but for how long?) Can a
lesbian be a "good mother" and retain custody of her child after a
divorce? (An American court says yes.) What is meant by being a good
parent? Nothing underlines the changing role structure more than the
lawsuit filed in Boulder, Colorado, by an angry twenty-four-year-old
named Tom Hansen. Parents can make mistakes, Hansen's lawyers
argued, but they must be held legally — and financially — responsible for
the results. Thus Han-sen's court action claimed $350,000 hi damages
on an unprecedented legal ground: parental malpractice.

EASING INTO TOMORROW

Behind all this confusion and turmoil, a new Third Wave family system
is coalescing, based on a diversity of family forms and more varied
individual roles. This de-massification of the family opens many new
personal options. Third Wave civilization will not try to stuff everyone
willy-nilly into a single family form. For this reason the emergent family
system could free each of us to find his or her own niche, to select or
create a family style or trajectory attuned to individualized needs.

But before anyone can perform a celebratory dance, the

224 THE THIRD WAVE

agonies of transition must be dealt with. Caught in the crack-up of the
old, with the new system not yet in place, millions find the higher level
of diversity bewildering rather than helpful. Instead of being liberated,
they suffer from overchoice and are wounded, embittered, plunged into
a sorrow and loneliness intensified by the very multiplicity of their
options.

To make the new diversity work for us instead of against us, we will
need changes on many levels at once, from morality and taxes to
employment practices.

In the field of values we need to begin removing the unwarranted guilt
that accompanies the breakup and restructuring of families. Instead of
exacerbating unjustified guilt, the media, the church, the courts, and
the political system should be working to lower the guilt level.

The decision to live outside a nuclear family framework should be
made easier, not harder. Values change more slowly, as a rule, than
social reality. Thus we have not yet developed the ethic of tolerance for
diversity that a de-massified society will both require and engender.
Raised under Second Wave conditions, firmly taught that one kind of
family is "normal" and others somehow suspect, if not "deviant," vast
numbers remain intolerant of the new variety hi family styles. Until that
changes, the pain of transition will remain unnecessarily high.

In economic and social life, individuals cannot enjoy the benefits of
widened family options so long as laws, tax codes, welfare practices,
school arrangements, housing codes, and even architectural forms all
remain implicitly biased toward the Second Wave family. They take
little account of the special needs of women who work, of men who
stay home to take care of their children, of bachelors and "spinsters"
(hateful term!), or of between-marrieds, or "aggregate families," or
widows living alone or together. All such groupings have been subtly or
openly discriminated against in Second Wave societies.

Even while it piously praised housekeeping, Second Wave civilization
denied dignity to the person performing that task. Housekeeping is
productive, indeed crucial, work, and needs to be recognized as part of
the economy. To assure the enhanced status of housekeeping,
whether done by women or by men, by individuals or by groups
working together, we will have to pay wages or impute economic value
to it.

In the out-of-the-home economy, employment practices in

FAMILIES OF THE FUTURE

225

many places still are based on the obsolete assumption that (he man is
the primary breadwinner and the wife a supplemental, expendable
earner, instead of a fully independent participant in the labor market.

By easing seniority requirements, by spreading flextime, by opening
part-time opportunities, we not only humanize production, we adapt it
to the needs of a multistyle family system. Today there are many
indications that the work system is beginning to accommodate itself to
the new diversity of family arrangements. Shortly after Citibank, one of
the largest banks in the United States, began to promote women to
managerial jobs, it found that its male executives were marrying their
new colleagues. The bank had a long-standing rule barring the
employment of couples. It had to change that rule. According to
Business Week, the "company couple" is now flourishing with benefits
both for company and for family life.

It is likely that before long we will go far beyond such minor
adaptations. We may see demands not merely for the hiring of
"company couples" but of whole families to work together as a
production team. Because this was inefficient hi the Second Wave
factory doesn't mean it is necessarily inappropriate today. No one
knows how such policies would work out but, as in other family
matters, we ought to encourage, perhaps even publicly fund, small-
scale experiments.

Such measures could help us ease our way into tomorrow, minimizing
for millions the pain of transition. But whether painful or not, a new
family system is emergying to supplant the one that characterized the
Second Wave past. This new family system will be a core institution in
the novel socio-sphere taking shape alongside the new techno-sphere
and info-sphere. It is part of the act of social creation by which our
generation is adapting to and constructing a new civilization.

18

: CORPORATE
DENT1TY CRISIS

The big corporation was the characteristic business organiza tion of
the industrial era. Today several thousand such behe moths, both
private and public, bestride the earth, producing a large proportion of
all the goods and services we buy.

Seen from the outside they present a commanding appar-ance. They
control vast resources, employ millions of workers, and they deeply
influence not merely our economies but our political affairs as well.

Their computers and corporate jets, their unmatched ability to plan, to
invest, to execute projects on a grand scale, make them seem
unshakably powerful and permanent. At a time when most of us feel
powerless, they appear to dominate our destinies.

Yet that is not the way they look from the inside, to the men (and a few
women) who run these organizations. Indeed, many of our top
managers today feel quite as frustrated and powerless as the rest of
us. For exactly like the nuclear family, the school, the mass media, and
the other key institutions of the industrial age, the corporation is being
hurled about, shaken and transformed by the Third Wave of change.

And a good many top managers do not know what has hit them.

KABUKI CURRENCY

The most immediate change affecting the corporation is the crisis in
the world economy. For three hundred years Second Wave civilization
worked to create an integrated global marketplace. Periodically these
efforts were set back by wars, 226

THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS

227

depressions, or other disasters. But each time the world economy
recovered, emerging larger and more closely integrated than before.

Today a new crisis has struck. But this one is different. Unlike all
previous crises during the industrial era, it involves not only money but
the entire energy base of the society. Unlike the crises of the past, it
brings inflation and unemployment simultaneously, not sequentially.
Unlike those of the past, it is directly linked to fundamental ecological
problems, to an entirely new species of technology, and to the
introduction of a new level of communications into the production
system. Finally, it is not, as Marxists claim, a crisis of capitalism alone,
but one that involves the socialist industrial nations as well. It is, in
short, the general crisis of industrial civilization as a whole.

The upheaval in the world economy threatens the survival of the
corporation as we know it, throwing its managers into a wholly
unfamiliar environment. Thus from the end of World War II until the
early 1970's the corporation functioned in a comparatively stable
environment. Growth was the key word. The dollar was king.

Currencies remained stable for long periods. The postwar financial
structure laid in place at Bretton Woods by the capitalist industrial
powers, and the COMECON system created by the Soviets, seemed
solid. The escalator to affluence was still ascending, and economists
were so confident of their ability to predict and control the economic
machine that they spoke casually about "fine tuning" it.

Today the phrase evokes only derisive snorts. The President
wisecracks that he knows a Georgia fortune-teller who is a -better
forecaster than the economists. A former Secretary of the Treasury, W.
Michael Blumenthal, says that "the economics profession is close to
bankruptcy in understanding the present situation — before or after the
fact" Standing in the tangled wreckage of economic theory and the
rubble of the postwar economic infrastructure, corporate decision-
makers face rising uncertainties.

Interest rates zigzag. Currencies gyrate. Central banks buy and sell
money by the carload to damp the swings, but the gyrations only grow
more extreme. The dollar and the yen perform a Kabuki dance, the
Europeans promote their own new currency (quaintly named the
"ecu"), while Arabs frantically off-load billions of dollars worth of
American paper. Gold prices break all records.

228 THE THIRD WAVE

While all of this is occurring, technology and communications
restructure world markets, making transnational production both
possible and necessary. And to facilitate such operations, a jet -age
money system is taking form. A global electronic banking network —
impossible before the computer and satellite — now instantaneously
links Hong Kong, Manila, or Singapore with the Bahamas, the Cayman
Islands, and New York.

This sprawling network of banks, with its Citibanks and Barclays, its
Sumitomos and Narodnys, not to mention Credit Suisse and the
National Bank of Abu Dhabi, creates a balloon of "stateless

currency" — money and credit outside the control of any individual
government — which threatens to blow up in everyone's face.

The bulk of this stateless currency consists of Eurodollars — dollars
outside the United States. In 1975, writing about the accelerated
growth of Eurodollars, I warned that this new currency was a wild card
in the economic game. "Here the 'Euros' contribute to inflation, there
they shift the balance of payments, in another place they undermine
the currency — as they stampede from place to place" across na- :
tional boundaries. At that time there were an estimated 180 j billion
such Eurodollars.

By 1978 a panicky Business Week was reporting on "the , incredible
state" of the international finance system and the 180 billion had
mushroomed into some 400 billion dollars worth of Eurodollars,
Euromarks, Eurofrancs, Euroguilders, and Euroyen. Bankers dealing
with the supranational cur- : rency were free to issue unlimited credit
and — not being required to hold any cash reserves — were able to lend
out at bargain-basement rates. Today's estimates put the Eurocurrency
total as high as a trillion dollars.

The Second Wave economic system in which the corporation grew up
was based on national markets, national I currencies, and national
governments. This nation-based infra- j structure, however, is utterly
unable to regulate or contain the new transnational and electronic
"Eurobubble." The structures designed for a Second Wave world are
no longer adequate.

Indeed, the entire global framework that stabilized world trade relations
for the giant corporations is rattling and in danger of coming apart. The
World Bank, the International Monetary Fund, and the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade are all under heavy attack. Europeans
scramble to bolt j

THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS
229

together a new structure to be controlled by them. The "less developed
countries" on one side, and the Arabs brandishing their petrodollars on
the other, clamor for influence in the financial system of tomorrow and
speak of creating their own counterparts to the IMF. The dollar is
dethroned, and jerks and spasms rip through the world economy.

All this is compounded by erratic shortages and gluts of energy and
resources; by rapid changes in the attitudes of consumers, workers,
and managers; by rapidly shifting imbalances of trade; and above all
by the rising militancy of the non-industrial world.

This is the volatile, confusing environment in which today's
corporations struggle to operate. The managers who run them have no
wish to relinquish corporate power. They will battle for profits,
production, and personal advancement. But faced with soaring levels
of unpredictability, with mounting public criticism and hostile political
pressures, our most intelligent managers are questioning the goals,
structure, responsibility, the very raison d'etre of their organizations.

Many of our biggest corporations are experiencing something
analogous to an identity crisis as they watch the once stable Second
Wave framework disintegrate around them.

THE ACCELERATIVE ECONOMY

This corporate identity crisis is intensified by the speed at which events
are moving. For the very speed of change introduces a new element
into management, forcing executives, already nervous in an unfamiliar
environment, to make more and more decisions at a faster and faster
pace. Response times are honed to a minimum.

At the financial level the speed of transactions is accelerating as banks
and other financial institutions computerize. Some banks even relocate
geographically to take advantage of time zone differences. Says
Euromoney, the international bankers' journal, "Time zones can be
used as a competitive edge."

In this hotted-up environment, the big corporations are driven almost
willy-nilly to invest and borrow in various currencies not on an annual,
a ninety-day, or even a seven-day basis, but literally on an overnight or
minute-to-minute basis. A new corporate officer has appeared in the
executive suite — the "international cash manager," who remains

230

plugged into the worldwide electronic casino twenty-four hours a day,
searching for the lowest interest rates, the best currency bargains, the
fastest turnaround.*

In marketing, a similar acceleration is evident. "Marketers must
respond quickly in order to insure survival for tomorrow," declares
Advertising Age, reporting that "Network TV programmers ... are
accelerating their decisions on killing new TV series that show rating
weaknesses. No more waiting six or seven weeks, or a season. . . .
Another example: Johnson & Johnson learns that Bristol-Myers is
determined to undersell J&J's Tylenol.. . Does J&J adopt a wait-and-
see attitude? No. In an amazingly short time, it moves to cut Tylenol's
prices in the stores. No more weeks or months for procrastination."

The very prose is breathless.

In engineering, in manufacture, in research, in sales, in training, in
personnel, in every department and branch of the corporation the
same quickening of decision-making can be detected.

And once more we see a parallel process, though less advanced, in
the socialist industrial nations. COMF.CON. which used to revise its
prices every five years when it issued its five-year plan, has been
forced to revise its prices annually in an attempt to keep up with the
faster pace. Before long it will be six months, then even less.

The results of this generalized speedup of the corporate metabolism
are multiple: shorter product life-cycles, more leasing and renting,
more frequent buying and selline, more ephemeral consumption
patterns, more fads, more training time for workers (who must
continually adjust to new procedures), more frequent changes in

contracts, more negotiations and legal work, more pricing changes,
more job turnover, more dependence on data, more ad hoc
organization — all of it exacerbated by inflation.

The result is a high-stakes, high-adrenaline business environment.
Under these escalating pressures it is easy to see why so many
businessmen, bankers, and corporate executives wonder what exactly
they are doing and why. Brought up with Second Wave certainties,
they see the world they knew tearing apart under the impact of an
accelerating wave of change.

* Nor is this function trivial. Like farmers who make more from selling
land than from growing food, some major corporations are making
more profit — or racking up greater losses — from currency and financial
manipulation than from actual production.

THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS

THE DE-MASSIFIED SOCIETY

231

Even more mystifying and upsetting for them is the crack-up of the
industrial mass society hi which they were trained to operate. Second
Wave managers were taught that mass production is the most
advanced and efficient form of production . . . that a mass market
wants standardized goods . . . that mass distribution is essential . . .
that "masses" of uniform workers are basically all alike and can be
motivated by uniform incentives. The effective manager learned that
synchronization, centralization, maximization, and concentration are
necessary to achieve his goals. And in a Second Wave environment
these assumptions are basically correct.

Today, as the Third Wave strikes, the corporate manager finds all his
old assumptions challenged. The mass society itself, for which the
corporation was designed, is beginning to de-massify. Not merely
information, production, and family life, but the marketplace and the
labor market as well are beginning to break into smaller, more varied
pieces.

The mass market has split into ever-multiplying, ever-changing sets of
mini-markets that demand a continually expanding range of options,
models, types, sizes, colors, and customizations. Bell Telephone,
which once hoped to put the same black telephone in every American
home — and very nearly succeeded — now manufactures some one
thousand combinations or permutations of telephone equipment from
pink, green, or white phones to phones for the blind, phones for people
who have lost the use of their larynx, and explosion-proof phones for
construction sites. Department stores, originally designed to massify
the market, now sprout "boutiques" under their roofs, and Phyllis
Sewell, a vice president of Federated Department Stores, predicts that
"we will be going into greater specialization . . . with more different
departments."

The fast-increasing variety of goods and services in the high-
technology nations is often explained away as an attempt by the

corporation to manipulate the consumer, to invent false needs, and to
inflate profits by charging a lot for trivial options. No doubt, there is
truth to these charges. Yet something deeper is at work. For the
growing differentiation of goods or services also reflects the growing
diversity of actual needs, values, and life-styles in a de-massified Third
Wave society.

This rising level of social diversity is fed by further divi -
232

THE THIRD WAVE

sions in the labor market, as reflected in the proliferation of new
occupations, especially in the white-collar and service fields.
Newspaper want ads clamor for "Vydec Secretary" or "Mini-computer
Programmer," while at a conference on the service professions I
watched a psychologist list 68 new occupations from consumer
advocate, public defender, and sex therapist to psycho-chemotherapist
and ombudsman.

As our jobs become less interchangeable, people do too. Refusing to
be treated as interchangeable, they arrive at the workplace with an
acute consciousness of their ethnic, religious, professional, sexual,
subcultural, and individual differences. Groups that throughout the
Second Wave era fought to be "integrated" or "assimilated" into mass
society now refuse to melt their differences. They emphasize instead
their unique characteristics. And Second Wave corporations, still
organized for operation in a mass society, are still uncertain how to
cope with this rising tide of diversity among their employees and
customers.

Though sharply evident in the United States, social de-mas-sification is
progressing rapidly elsewhere as well. In Britain, which once regarded
itself as highly homogeneous, ethnic minorities, from Pakistanis, West
Indians, Cypriots, and Ugandan Asians to Turks and Spaniards now
intermingle with a native population itself becoming more
heterogeneous. Meanwhile, a tidal influx of Japanese, American,
German, Dutch, Arab, and African visitors leave in their wake
American hamburger stands, Japanese tempura restaurants, and
signs in store windows that read "Se Habla Espanol."

Around the world, ethnic minorities reassert their identities and
demand long-denied rights to jobs, income, and advancement in the
corporation. Australian Aborigines, New Zealand Maoris, Canadian
Eskimos, American Blacks, Chicanos, and even Oriental minorities
once regarded as politically passive are on the move. From Maine to
the Far West, Native Americans assert "Red Power," demand the
restoration of tribal lands, and dicker with the OPEC countries for
economic and political support.

Even in Japan, long the most homogeneous of the nidus-trial nations,
the signs of de-massification are mounting. An uneducated convict
overnight emerges as spokesman for the small minority of Ainu people.
The Korean minority grows restless, and sociologist Masaaki Takane
of Sophia University says, "I have been haunted by an anxiety . . .

Japanese society today is quickly losing its unity and its
disintegrating.**

THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS

233

In Denmark scattered street fights break out between Danes and
immigrant workers and between leather-jacketed motorcyclists and
long-haired youth. In Belgium the Walloons, the Remish, and the
Bruxelloises reactivate ancient, indeed preindustrial, rivalries. In
Canada Quebec threatens to secede, corporations padlock their
headquarters in Montreal, and English-speaking executives throughout
the country take crash courses in French.

The forces that made mass society have suddenly been thrown into
reverse. Nationalism in the high-technology context becomes
regionalism instead. The pressures of the melting pot are replaced by
the new ethnicity. The media, instead of creating a mass culture, de-
massify it. In turn all these developments parallel the emerging
diversity of energy forms and the advance beyond mass production.

All these interrelated changes create a totally new framework within
which the production organizations of society, whether called
corporations or socialist enterprises, will function. Executives who
continue to think in terms of the mass society are shocked and
confused by a world they no longer recognize.

REDEFINING THE CORPORATION

What deepens the identity crisis of the corporation still further is the
emergence, against this already unsettling background, of a worldwide
movement demanding not merely modest changes hi this or that
corporate policy but a deep redefinition of its purposes.

In'the United States, writes David Ewing, an editor of the Harvard
Business Review, "public anger at corporations is beginning to well up
at a frightening rate." Ewing cites a 1977 study by a research affiliate of
the Harvard Business School whose findings, he says, "sent tremors
throughout the corporate world." The study revealed that about half of
all consumers polled believe they are getting worse treatment in the
marketplace than they were a decade earlier; three fifths say that
products have deteriorated; over half mistrust product guarantees.

Ewing quotes a worried businessman as saying, "It feels like sitting on
a San Andreas fault."

Worse yet, Ewing continues, "growing numbers of people are not
simply disenchanted, irritated or angry, but. . . irra-

234 THE THIRD WAVE

tionally and erratically afraid of new technologies and business
ventures."

According to John C. Biegler, an executive of Price Water-house, one
of the giant blue-chip accounting firms, "public confidence in the

American corporation is lower than at any time since the Great
Depression. American business and the accounting profession are
being called on the carpet for a kind of zero-based rejustification of just
about everything we do. ... Corporate performance is being measured
against new and unfamiliar norms."

Similar tendencies are visible in Scandinavia, Western Europe, and
even, sotto voce, in the socialist industrial nations. In Japan, as
Toyota's official magazine puts it, "A citizens' movement of a type
never before seen in Japan is gradually gathering momentum, one that
criticizes the way corporations disrupt everyday life."

Certainly corporations have come under scorching attack at other
times in their history. Much of today's clamor of complaint, however, is
crucially different and arises from the emerging values and
assumptions of Third Wave civilization, not the dying industrial past.

Throughout the Second Wave era corporations have been seen as
economic units, and the attacks on them have essentially focused on
economic issues. Critics assailed them for underpaying workers,
overcharging customers, forming cartels to fix prices, making shoddy
goods, and a thousand other economic transgressions. But no matter
how violent, most of these critics accepted the corporation's self-
definition: they shared the view of the corporation as an inherently
economic institution.

Today's corporate critics start from a totally different premise. They
attack the artificial divorce of economics from politics, morality, and the
other dimensions of life. They hold the corporation increasingly
responsible, not merely for its economic performance but for its side
effects on everything from air pollution to executive stress.

Corporations are thus assailed for asbestos poisoning, for using poor
populations as guinea pigs in drug testing, for distorting the
development of the non-industrial world, for racism and sexism, for
secrecy and deception. They are pilloried for supporting unsavory
regimes or political parties, from the fascist generals in Chile and the
racists in South Africa to the Communist party in Italy.

What is at issue here is not whether such charges are justi-

THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS

235

fled — all too often they are. What is far more important is I he concept
of the corporation they imply. For the Third Wave brings with it a rising
demand for a new kind of institution altogether — a corporation no
longer responsible simply lor making a profit or producing goods but for
simultaneously contributing to the solution of extremely complex
ecological, moral, political, racial, sexual, and social problems.

Instead of clinging to a sharply specialized economic function, the
corporation, prodded by criticism, legislation, and its own concerned
executives, is becoming a multipurpose institution.

A PENTAGON OF PRESSURES

The redefinition is not a matter of choice but a necessary response to
five revolutionary changes in the actual conditions of production.
Changes in the physical environment, in the lineup of social forces, in
the role of information, in government organization, and in morality are
all pounding the corporation into a new, multi-faceted, multipurposeful
shape.

The first of these new pressures springs from the biosphere.

In the mid-1950's, when the Second Wave reached its mature stage in
the United States, world population stood at only 2.75 billion. Today it
is over 4 billion. In the mid-1950's the earth's population used a mere
87 quadrillion Btu of energy a year. Today we use over 260 quadrillion.
In the mid-50's, our consumption of a key raw material like zinc was
only 2.7 million metric tons a year. Today it is 5.6 million.

Measured any way we choose, our demands on the planet are
escalating wildly. As a result the biosphere is sending us alarm
signals — pollution, desertification, signs of toxification in the oceans,
subtle shifts in climate — that we ignore at the risk of catastrophe.
These warnings tell us we can no longer organize production as we did
during the Second Wave past.

Because the corporation is the main organizer of economic production,
it is also a key "producer" of environmental impacts. If we want to
continue our economic growth — indeed if we wish to survive — the
managers of tomorrow will have to assume responsibility for converting
the corporation's environmental impacts from negatives into positives.
They will assume this added responsibility voluntarily or they will be
compelled to do so, for the changed conditions of the biosphere make
it necessary. The corporation is being trans-

236

THE THIRD WAVE

formed into an environmental, as well as an economic, institution — not
by do-gooders, radicals, ecologists, or government bureaucrats, but by
a material change in the relationship of production to the biosphere.

The second pressure springs from a little-noticed change in the social
environment in which the corporation finds itself. That environment is
now far more organized than before. At one time each firm operated in
what might be termed an un-derorganized society. Today the socio-
sphere, especially in the United States, has leaped to a new level of
organization. It is packed with a writhing, interacting mass of well-
organized, often well-funded, associations, agencies, trade unions, and
other groupings.

In the United States today, some 1,370,000 companies interact with
well over 90,000 schools and universities, 330,000 churches, and
hundreds of thousands of branches of 13,000 national organizations,
plus countless purely local environmental, social, religious, athletic,
political, ethnic, and civic groups, each with its own agenda and
priorities. It takes 144,-000 law firms to mediate all these relationships!

In this densely crowded socio-sphere, every corporate action has
repercussive impacts not merely on lonely or helpless individuals but
on organized groups, many of them with professional staffs, a press of
their own, access to the political system, and resources with which to
hire experts, lawyers, and other assistance.

In this finely strung socio-sphere, corporate decisions are closely
scrutinized. "Social pollution” produced by the corporation in the form
of unemployment, community disruption, forced mobility, and the like is
instantly spotted, and pressures are placed on the corporation to
assume far greater responsibility than ever before for its social, as well
as economic, "products."

A third set of pressures reflects the changed info-sphere. Thus, the de-
massification of society means that far more information must be
exchanged between social institutions — including the corporation — to
maintain equilibria! relationships among them. Third Wave production
methods further intensify the corporation's hunger for information as
raw material. The firm thus sucks up data like a gigantic vacuum
cleaner, processes it, and disseminates it to others in increasingly
complex ways. As information becomes central to production, as
"information managers" proliferate hi industry, the corpora-

THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS

237

tion, by necessity, impacts on the informational environment exactly as
it impacts on the physical and social environment.

The new importance of information leads to conflict over the control of
corporate data— battles over disclosure of more information to the
public, demands for open accounting (of oil company production and
profit figures, for example), more pressures for "truth in advertising*" or
"truth in lending." For in the new era, "information impacts" become as
serious a matter as environmental and social impacts, and the
corporation is seen as an information producer as well as an economic
producer.

A fourth pressure on the corporation arises from politics and the
power-sphere. The rapid diversification of society and the acceleration
of change are everywhere reflected in a tremendous complexification
of government. The differentiation of society is mirrored in the
differentiation of government, and each corporation must therefore
interact with more and more specialized units of government. These
units, badly coordinated and each with its own priorities, are,
moreover, in a perpetual turmoil of reorganization.

Jayne Baker Spain, a senior vice-president of Gulf Oil, has pointed out
that as recently as ten or fifteen years ago, "There was no EPA. There
was no EEOC. There was no ER-ISSA. There was no OSHA. There
was no ERDA. There was no FEA." All these and many other
government agencies have sprouted up since then.

Every company thus finds itself increasingly ensnarled hi politics —
local, regional, national, or even transnational. Conversely, every
important corporate decision "produces" at least indirect political
effects along with its other output, and is increasingly held responsible
for them.

Finally, as Second Wave civilization wanes and its value system
shatters, a fifth pressure arises, affecting all institutions — including the
corporation. This is a heightened moral pressure. Behavior once
accepted as normal is suddenly reinterpreted as corrupt, immoral, or
scandalous. Thus the Lockheed bribes topple a government in Japan.
Olin Corporation is indicted for shipping arms to South Africa. Gulf Oil's
chairman is forced to resign in the wake of a bribery scandal. The
reluctance of Distillers Company in Britain to repay the victims of
Thalidomide adequately, the failures of McDonnell Douglas with
respect to the DC-10 — all trigger tidal waves of moral revulsion.

The ethical stance of the corporation is increasingly seen as

238

THE THIRD WAVE

having a direct impact on the value system of the society, just as
significant to some as the corporation's impact on the physical
environment or the social system. The corporation is increasingly seen
as a "producer" of moral effects.

These five sweeping changes in both the material and non-material
conditions of production make untenable the Second Wave school-
book notion that a corporation is nothing but an economic institution.
Under the new conditions the corporation can no longer operate as a
machine for maximizing some economic function — whether production
or profit. The very definition of "production" is being drastically
expanded to include the side, as well as the central, effects, the long-
range as well as the immediate effects, of corporate action. Put simply,
every corporation has more "products" (and is now held responsible for
more) than Second Wave managers ever had to consider —
environmental, social, informational, political, and moral, not just
economic products.

The purpose of the corporation is thus changed from singular to
plural — not just at the level of rhetoric or public relations but at the level
of identity and self-definition as well.

In corporation after corporation we can expect to see an internal battle
between those who cleave to the single-purpose corporation of the
Second Wave past and those who are ready to cope with the Third
Wave conditions of production and to fight for the multipurpose
corporation of tomorrow.

THE MULTIPURPOSE CORPORATION

Those of us brought up in Second Wave civilization nave a difficult
time thinking of institutions in this way. We find it hard to think of a
hospital as having economic as well as medical functions, a school as

having political as well as educational functions — or a corporation as
having powerful non-economic or "trans-economic" functions. That
recently retired exemplar of Second Wave thinking, Henry Ford II,
insists that the corporation "is a specialized instrument designed to
serve the economic needs of society and is not well equipped to serve
social needs unrelated to its business operations." But while Ford and
other defenders of the Second Wave resist the redefinition of the
production organiza-

THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS

239

tion, many firms are, in fact, altering both their words and their policies.

Lip service and public relations rhetoric often substitute for real
change. Fancy promotional brochures proclaiming a new era of social
responsibility very often camouflage a robber-baron rapacity.
Nevertheless, a fundamental "paradigm shift" — a reconceptualization —
of the structure, goals, and responsibilities of the corporation is taking
place in response to new pressures brought by the Third Wave. The
signs of this change are numerous.

Amoco, a leading oil company, for example, states that "it is the policy
of our company, with respect to plant locations, to supplement the
routine economic evaluation with a detailed exploration of the social
consequences. . . . We look at many factors, among them the impact
on the physical environment, the impact on public facilities . . . and the
impact on local employment conditions, particularly with respect to
minorities." Amoco continues to weight economic considerations most
heavily, but it assigns importance to other factors as well. And where
alternative locations are simitar in economic terms but '.'different in
terms of the social impact," these social factors can prove decisive.

In the event of a merger proposal, the directors of Control Data
Corporation, a top U.S. computer manufacturer, explicitly take into
account not merely financial or economic considerations but "all
relevant" factors — including the social effects of the merger and its
impact on employees and the communities in which Control Data
operates. And while other companies have been racing into the
suburbs, Control Data has deliberately built its new plants in inner city
areas of Washington, St. Paul, and Minneapolis, to help provide
employment for minorities and to help revive urban centers. The
corporation states its mission as "improving the quality, equality, and
potential of people's lives" — equality being an unorthodox goal for a
corporation.

In the United States, the advancement of women and non-whites has
become a long overdue matter of national policy, and some companies
go so far as to reward their managers financially for meeting
"affirmative action" targets. At Pillsbury, a leading food, company, each
of its three product groups must present not only a sales plan for the
following year but a plan relating to the hiring, training, and promotion
of women and minority group members. Executive incentives are
linked to the attainment of these social goals. At AT&T

240

THE THIRD WAVE

all managers are evaluated annually. Fulfillment of affirmative action
objectives counts as part of a positive appraisal. At Chemical Bank in
New York, 10 to 15 percent of a branch manager's job performance
appraisal is based on her or his social performance — sitting on
community agency boards, making loans to not-for-profit organizations,
hiring and upgrading minorities. And at the Gannett chain of
newspapers, chief executive Allen Neuharth brusquely tells editors and
local publishers that "a major portion" of their bonuses will "be
determined on the basis of progress in these . . . programs."

Similarly, in many top corporations we see a distinct upgrading of the
status and influence of executives concerned with the environmental
consequences of corporate behavior. Some now report directly to the
president. Other companies have set up special committees on the
board of directors to define the new corporate responsibilities.

This social responsiveness of the corporation is not all substance.

Says Rosemary Bruner, director of community affairs at Hoffmann-
LaRoche's American subsidiary, "Some of this is pure public relations,
of course. Some is self-serving. But much of it actually does reflect a
changed perception of corporate functions." Grudgingly, therefore,
driven by protests, lawsuits, and fear of government action as well as
by more laudable motives, managers are beginning to adapt to the
new conditions of production and are accepting the idea that the
corporation has multiple purposes.

MANY BOTTOM LINES

The multipurpose corporation that is emerging demands, among other
things, smarter executives. It implies a management capable of
specifying multiple goals, weighting them, interrelating them, and
finding synergic policies that accomplish more than a single goal at a
time. It requires policies that optimize not for one, but for several
variables simultaneously. Nothing could be further from the single-
minded style of the traditional Second Wave manager.

Moreover, once the need for multiple goals is accepted we are
compelled to invent new measures of performance. Instead of the
single "bottom line" on which most executives have been taught to
fixate, the Third Wave corporation requires attention to multiple bottom
lines — social, environmen-

THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS

241

lal, informational, political, and ethical bottom lines — all of Hi em
interconnected.

Faced with this new complexity, many of today's managers are taken
aback. They lack the intellectual tools necessary for Third Wave
management. We know how to measure the profitability of a

corporation, but how do we measure or evaluate the achievement of
non-economic goals? Price Waterhouse's John C. Biegler says,
managers "are being asked to account for corporate behavior in areas
where no real standards of accountability have been established —
where even the language of accountability has yet to be developed."

This explains today's efforts to develop a new language of
accountability. Indeed, accounting itself is on the edge of revolution
and is about to explode out of Its narrowly economic terms of
reference.

The American Accounting Association, for example, has issued reports
of a "Committee on Non-Financial Measures of Effectiveness" and of a
"Committee on Measures of Effectiveness for Social Programs." So
much work is being done along these lines that each of these reports
lists nearly 250 papers, monographs, and documents in its
bibliography.

In Philadelphia, a consulting firm called the Human Resources Network
is working with twelve major U.S. corporations to develop cross-
industry methods for specifying what might be called the "trans-
economic" goals of the corporation. It is trying to integrate these goals
into corporate planning and to find ways of measuring the company's
trans-economic performance. In Washington, meanwhile, the
Secretary of Commerce, Juanita Kreps, raised a storm of controversy
by suggesting that the government itself should prepare a "Social
Performance Index," which she described as a "mechanism companies
could use to assess their performance and its social consequences."

Parallel work is under way in Europe. According to Meinolf Dierkes and
Rob Coppock of the Berlin-based International Institute for
Environment and Society, "Many large and medium-sized companies
in Europe have been experimenting with [the social report] concept. ...
In the Federal Republic of Germany, for example, about 20 of the
largest firms now publish social reports regularly. In addition, more
than a hundred others draw up social reports for internal management
purposes."

Some of these reports are no more than puff — accounts of the
corporation's "good works," carefully overlooking contro-

242

THE THIRD WAVE

versial problems like pollution. But others are remarkably open,
objective, and tough. Thus a social report issued by the giant Swiss
food firm, Migros-Genossenschafts-Bund self-criti-cally confesses that
it pays women less than men, that many of its jobs are "extremely
boring," and that its nitrous dioxide emissions have risen over a four-
year period. Says the company's managing director, Pierre Arnold, "It
takes courage for an enterprise to point out the differences between its
goals and its actual results."

Companies like STEAG and the Saarbergwerke AG have pioneered
the effort to relate company expenditures to specific social benefits.

Less formally, companies like Bertelsmann AG, the publisher; Rank
Xerox GmbH, the copier firm; and Hoechst AG, the chemical
manufacturer, have radically broadened the kind of social data they
make available to the public.

A much more advanced system is employed by companies in Sweden
and Switzerland and by Deutsche Shell AG in Germany. The latter,
instead of publishing an annual report, now issues what it calls an
Annual and Social Report in which both economic and trans-economic
data are interrelated. The method used by Shell, termed "goal
accounting and reporting" by Dierkes and Coppock, stipulates concrete
economic, environmental, and social goals for the corporation, spells
out the actions taken to achieve them, and reports the expenditures
allocated to them.

Shell also lists five overall corporate goals — only one of which is to
achieve a "reasonable return on investment" — and specifically states
that each of the five goals, economic and non-economic, must "carry
the same weight" in corporate decision-making. The goal accounting
method forces companies to make their trans-economic objectives,
explicit, to specify time periods for their attainment, and to open this up
to public review.

On a broader theoretical level, Trevor Gambling, professor of
accounting at the University of Birmingham in the United Kingdom, in a
book called Societal Accounting has called for a radical reformulation
of accounting that begins to integrate the work of economists and
accountants with that of the social scientists who have developed
social indicators and methods of social accounting.

In Holland the Dean of the Graduate School of Management in Delft,
Cornelius Brevoord, has designed a set of multidimensional criteria for
monitoring corporate behavior. This

THE CORPORATE IDENTITY CRISIS

243

is made necessary, he suggests, by deep value changes in the
society, among them the change from "an economic production
orientation" in society to "a total well-being orientation." Similarly, he
notes a shift from "functional specialization to an interdisciplinary
approach." Both these changes strengthen the need for a more
rounded concept of the corporation.

Brevoord lists 32 different criteria by which a corporation must
measure its effectiveness. These range over its relationships with
consumers, shareholders, and unions to those with ecology
organizations and its own management. But, he points out, even these
32 are only "a few" of the parameters along which the emerging
corporation of the future will test itself.

With the Second Wave economic infrastructure in a shambles, with
change accelerating as de-massification spreads, with the biosphere
sending danger signals, with the level of organization in society rising,

and the informational, political, and ethical conditions of production
changing, the Second Wave corporation is obsolete.

What is happening, therefore, is a thoroughgoing reconcep-tualization
of the meaning of production and of the institution that, until now, has
been charged with organizing it. The result is a complex shift to a new-
style corporation of tomorrow. In the words of William Halal, professor
of management at American University, "Just as the feudal manor was
replaced by the business corporation when agrarian societies were
transformed into industrial societies, so too should the older model of
the firm be replaced by a new form of economic institution. . . This
new institution will combine economic and trans -economic objectives.

It will have multiple bottom lines.

The transformation of the corporation is part of the larger
transformation of the socio-sphere as a whole, and this in turn parallels
the dramatic changes in the techno-sphere and info-sphere. Taken
together, they add up to a massive historical shift. But we are not
merely altering these giant structures. We are also changing the way
ordinary people, in their daily lives, behave. For when we change the
deep structure of civilization, we simultaneously rewrite all the codes
by which we live.

DECODING THE NEW RULES

In millions of middle-class homes a ritual drama is enacted: the
recently graduated son or daughter arrives late for dinner, snarls, flings
down the want ads, and proclaims the nine-to-five job a degrading
sham and a shuck. No human being with even a shredlet of self-
respect would submit to the nine-to-five regimen.

Enter parents:

The father, just returned from his own nine-to-five job, and the mother,
exhausted and depressed from paying the latest batch of bills, are
outraged. They have been through this before. Having seen good
times and bad, they suggest a secure job with a big corporation. The
young person sneers. Small companies are better. No company is best
of all. An advanced degree? What for? It's all a terrible waste!

Aghast, the parents see their suggestions dismissed one after another.
Their frustration mounts until, at last, they utter the ultimate parental
cry: "When are you going to face the real world?"

Such scenes are not limited to affluent homes in the United States or
even Europe. Japanese corporate moguls mutter in their sake" about
the swift decline of the work ethic and corporate loyalty, of industrial
punctuality and discipline among the young. Even in the Soviet Union
middle-class parents face similar challenges from the youth.

Is this just another case of epater les parents — the traditional
generational conflict? Or is there something new here? Can it be that
young people and their parents are simply not talking about the same
"real world"? 244

DECODING THE NEW RULES

245

The fact is that what we are seeing is not merely the classical
confrontation of romantic youth and realistic elders. Indeed, what was
once realistic may no longer be. For the basic code of behavior,
containing the ground rules of social life, is changing rapidly as the
onrashing Third Wave arrives.

We saw earlier how the Second Wave brought with it a "code book" of
principles or rules that governed everyday behavior. Such principles as
synchronization, standardization, or maximization were applied hi
business, in government, and in a daily life obsessed with punctuality
and schedules.

Today a countercode book is emerging — new ground rules for the new
life we are building on a de-massified economy, on de-massified
media, on new family and corporate structures. Many of the seemingly
senseless battles between young and old, as well as other conflicts in
our classrooms, boardrooms, and political backrooms are, in fact,
nothing more than clashes over which code book to apply.

The new code book directly attacks much of what the Second Wave
person has been taught to believe in — from the importance of
punctuality and synchronization to the need for conformity and
standardization. It challenges the presumed efficiency of centralization
and professionalization. It compels us to reconsider our conviction that
bigger is better and our notions of "concentration." To understand this
new code, and how it contrasts with the old one, is to understand
instantly many of the otherwise confusing conflicts that swirl around us,
exhausting our energies and threatening our personal power, prestige,
or paycheck.

THE END OF NINE-TO-FIVE

Take the case of the frustrated parents. Second Wave civilization, as
we saw, synchronized daily life, tying the rhythms of sleep and
wakefulness, of work and play, to the underlying throb of machines.
Raised in this civilization, the parents take for granted that work must
be synchronized, that everyone must arrive and work at the same tune,
that rush-hour traffic is'unavoidable, that meal times must be fixed, and
that children must, at an early age, be indoctrinated with time-
consciousness and punctuality. They cannot understand why their
offspring seem so annoyingly casual about keeping appointments and
why, if the nine-to-five job (or other fixed-

246

THE THIRD WAVE

schedule job) was good enough in the past, it should suddenly be
regarded as intolerable by their children.

The reason is that the Third Wave, as it sweeps in, carries with it a
completely different sense of tune. If the Second Wave tied life to the
tempo of the machine, the Third Wave challenges this mechanical

synchronization, alters our most basic social rhythms, and in so doing
frees us from the machine.

Once we understand this, it comes as no surprise that one of the
fastest-spreading innovations in industry during the 1970's was
"fiextime" — an arrangement that permits workers, within predetermined
limits, to choose their own working hours. Instead of requiring
everyone to arrive at the factory gate or the office at the same time, or
even at pre-fixed staggered times, the company operating on fiextime
typically sets certain core hours when everyone is expected to show
up, and specifies other hours as flexible. Each employee may choose
which of the flexible hours he or she wishes to spend working.

This means that a "day person" — a person whose biological rhythms
routinely awaken him or her early in the morning — can choose to arrive
at work at, say, 8:00 A.M., while a "night person," whose metabolism is
different, can choose to start working at 10:00 or 10:30 A.M. It means
that an employee can take tune off for household chores, or to shop, or
to take a child to the doctor. Groups of workers who wish to go bowling
together early in the morning or late in the afternoon can jointly set
then* schedules to make it possible. In short, time itself is being de-
classified.

The flextime movement began in 1965 when a woman economist in
Germany, Christel Kammerer, recommended it as a way to bring more
mothers into the job market. In 1967 Masserschmitt-Bolkow-Blohm, the
"Deutsche Boeing," discovered that many of its workers were arriving
at work worn out from fighting rush-hour traffic. Management gingerly
experimented by allowing 2,000 workers to go off the rigid eight-to-five
schedule and to choose their own hours. Within two years all 12,000 of
its employees were on flextime and some departments had even given
up the requirements for everyone to be there during core time.

In 1972 Europa magazine reported that ". . . in some 2,-000 West
German firms, the national concept of rigid punctuality has vanished
beyond recall. . . . The reason is the introduction of Gleitzeit"; i.e.,
"sliding" or "flexible" hours. By 1977 fully a fourth of the West German
work force, more

DECODING THE NEW RULES

247

than 5,000,000 employees in all, were on one or another form of
flextime, and the system was being used by 22,000 companies with an
estimated 4,000,000 workers in France, Finland, Denmark, Sweden,
Italy, and Great Britain. In Switzerland, 15 to 20 percent of all industrial
firms had switched to the new system for all or part of their work force.

Multinational firms (a major force for cultural diffusion in today's world)
soon began exporting the system from Europe. Nestle and Lufthansa,
for example, introduced it to their operations in the United States. By
1977, according to a report prepared for the American Management
Association by Professor Stanley Nollen and consultant Virginia Martin,
13 percent of all U.S. companies were using flexible hours. Within a
few years, they forecast, the number will reach 17 percent,

representing more than 8,000,000 workers. Among the American firms
trying out flextime systems are such giants as Scott Paper, Bank of
California, General Motors, Bristol-Myers, and Equitable Life.

Some of the more moss-backed trade unions — preservers of the
Second Wave status quo — have hesitated. But individual workers, by
and large, see flextime as a liberating influence. Says the manager of
one London-based insurance firm: "The young married women were
absolutely rapturous about the change-over." A Swiss survey found
that fully 95 percent of affected workers approve. Thirty-five percent —
men more than women — say they now spend more time with the
family.

One Black mother working for a Boston bank was on the verge of
being fired because — although a good worker in other respects — she
was continually turning up late. Her poor attendance record reinforced
racist stereotypes about the "unreliability" and "laziness" of Black
workers. But when her office went on flextime she was no longer
considered late. It turned out, reported sociologist Allen R. Cohen, "that
she'd been late because she had to drop her son in a day-care center
and could just never get to the office by starting time."

Employers, for their part, report higher productivity, reduced
absenteeism, and other benefits. There are, of course, problems, as
with any innovation, but according to the AMA survey only 2 percent of
the companies trying it have gone back to the old rigid time structure.
One Lufthansa manager summed it up succinctly: "There's no such
thing now as a punctuality problem."

248 THE: THIRD WAVE

THE SLEEPLESS GORGON

But flextime, while widely publicized, is only a small part of the general
restructuring of time that the Third Wave carries with it. We are also
seeing a powerful shift toward increased night work. This is occurring
not so much in the traditional manufacturing centers like Akron or
Baltimore, which have always had a lot of workers on night shifts, but
in the rapidly expanding services and in the advanced, computer-
based industries.

"The modern city," declares the French newspaper Le Monde, "is a
Gorgon that never sleeps and in which ... a growing proportion of the
citizens work outside the [normal] diurnal rhythms." Across the board in
the technological nations the number of night workers now runs
between 15 and -25 percent of all employees. In France, for example,
the percentage has soared from only 12 in 1957 to 21 by 1974. In the
United States the number of full-time night workers jumped 13 percent
between 1974 and 1977; the total, including part-timers, reached 13.5
million.

Even more dramatic has been the spread of part-time work — and the
active preference for it expressed by large numbers of people. In the
Detroit area an estimated 65 percent of the total work force at the J. L.
Hudson department stores consists of part-timers. Prudential
Insurance employs some 1,600 part-timers in its U.S. and Canadian

offices. In all, there is now one voluntary part-time worker for every five
full-timers in the United States, and the part-time work force has been
growing twice as fast as the full-time force since 1954.

So far has this process advanced that a 1977 study by researchers at
Georgetown University suggested that in the future almost all jobs
could be part-time. Entitled Permanent Part-Time Employment: The
Manager's Perspective, the study covered 68 corporations, more than
half of which already used part-timers. Even more noteworthy is the
fact that the percentage of unemployed workers who want only part-
time work has doubled in the past twenty years.

The opening up of part-time jobs is particularly welcomed by women,
by the elderly and semi-retired, and by many young people who are
willing to settle for a smaller paycheck in return for time to pursue their
own hobbies, sports, or religious, artistic, or political interests.

What we see, therefore, is a fundamental break with Sec-

DECODING THE NEW RULES

249

ond Wave synchronization. The combination of flextime, part-time, and
night work means that more and more people are working outside the
nine-to-five (or any fixed schedule) system, and that the entire society
is shifting to round-the-clock operations.

New consumer patterns, meanwhile, directly parallel changes in the
time structure of production. Note, for instance, the proliferation of all-
night supermarkets. "Will the 4 A.M. shopper, long considered a
hallmark of California kook-iness, become a regular feature of life in
the less flamboyant East?" asks The New York Times. The answer is a
resounding "Yes!"

A spokesman for a supermarket chain in the eastern United States
says his company will keep its stores open all night because ‘‘people
are staying up later than they used to." The Times feature writer
spends a night at a typical store and reports on the varied customers
who take advantage of the late hours: a truck driver whose wife is ill
shops for his family of six, a young woman on her way to a
postmidnight date pops by to purchase a greeting card, a man up late
with a sick daughter rushes in to buy her a toy banjo and stops to pick
up a hibachi as well, a woman drops by after her ceramics class to do
the week's shopping, a motorcyclist roars up at 3:00 A.M. to buy a
deck of cards, two men straggle in at dawn on their way to go fishing....

Mealtimes are also affected by these changes and are similarly
desynchronized. People do not all eat at the same time, as most of
them once did. The rigid three-meal-a-day pattern is broken as more
and more fast-food shops spring up, serving billions of meals at all
hours. Television watching changes, too, as programmers devise
shows specifically aimed at "urban adults, night workers, and just plain
insomniacs." Banks, meanwhile, give up their celebrated "bankers'
hours."

Manhattan's giant Citibank runs television commercials for its new
automated banking system: "You are about to witness the dawn of a
revolution in banking. This is Citibank's new twenty-four-hour service . .

. where you can do most of your everyday banking anytime you want.
So if Don Slater wants to check his balance at the crack of dawn, he
can do it. And Brian Holland can transfer money from savings into
checking anytime he wants to. ... You know and I know that life doesn't
stop at three P.M. Monday to Friday — The Citi never sleeps."

If, therefore, we look across the board at the way our soci-

250 THE THIRD WAVE

ety now treats time, we find a subtle but powerful shift away from the
rhythms of the Second Wave and toward a new temporal structure in
our lives. In fact, what is happening is a de-massification of time that
precisely parallels the de-massif i -cation of other features of social life
as the Third Wave sweeps in.

SCHEDULE-A-FRIEND

We are only just beginning to feel the social consequences of this
restructuring of time. For example, while the increasing
individualization of time patterns certainly makes work less onerous, it
also can intensify loneliness and social isolation. If friends, lovers, and
family all work at different hours, and new services are not laid in place
to help them coordinate their personal schedules, it becomes
increasingly difficult for them to arrange face-to-face social contact.

The old social centers — the neighborhood pub, the church clambake,
the school prom — are losing their traditional significance. In their place,
new Third Wave institutions must be invented to facilitate social life.

One can, for example, easily imagine a new computerized service-
call it "Pers-Sched" or "Friend-Sched" — that not only reminds you of
your own appointments but stores the schedules of various friends and
family members so that each person in the social network can, by
pushing a button, find out where and when his or her friends and
acquaintances will be, and can make arrangements accordingly. But
far more significant social facilitators will be needed.

The de-massification of time has other consequences, too. Thus we
can already begin to see its effects in transportation. The Second
Wave insistence on rigid, mass work schedules brought with it the
characteristic rush-hour crush. The de-massification of time
redistributes traffic flows in both space and time.

In fact, one crude way to judge just how far the Third Wave has
advanced in any community is to look at the traffic flows. If the peak
hours are still heavily accented, and if all the traffic moves one way in
the morning and reverses itself in the evening, Second Wave
synchronization still prevails. If traffic flows all day long, as it does in an
increasing number of cities, and moves in all directions, rather than
merely back and forth, it is safe to assume that Third Wave industries

DECODING THE NEW RULES

251

have taken root, that service workers far outnumber manufacturing
workers, that flextime has begun to spread, that part-time and night
work are prevalent, and that all-night services — superettes, banks, gas
stations, and restaurants — will not be far behind.

The shift toward more flexible and personalized schedules also
reduces energy costs and pollution by leveling out peak loads. Electric
utilities in a dozen states are now using "time-of-day" pricing for
industrial and residential customers to discourage energy use during
traditional peak hours, while Connecticut's Department of
Environmental Protection has urged companies to institute flextime as
a means of complying with federal environmental requirements.

These are among the most obvious implications of the time shift As the
process continues to unfold in the years and decades ahead, we will
see far more powerful and as yet unimag-ined consequences. The new
time patterns will affect our daily rhythms in the home. They will affect
our art. They will affect our biology. For when we touch on time we
touch on all of human experience.

COMPUTERS AND MARIJUANA

These Third Wave rhythms spring from deep psychological, economic,
and technological forces. At one level they arise from the changed
nature of the population. People today — more affluent and educated
than their parents and faced with more life choices — simply refuse to
be massified. The more people differ in terms of the work they do or
the products "they consume, the more they demand to be treated as
individuals — and the more they resist socially imposed schedules.

But at another level the new, more personalized Third Wave rhythms
can be traced to a wide range of new technologies moving into our
lives. Video cassettes and home video recording, for example, make it
possible for televiewers to tape programs off the air and view them at
times of their own choosing. Writes columnist Steven Brill, "Within the
next two or three years television will probably stop dictating the
schedules of even the worst tube addicts." The power of the great
networks — the NBCs, the BBCs or NHKs — to synchronize viewing is
coming to an end.

The computer, too, is beginning to recast our schedules
252 THE THIRD WAVE

and even our conceptions of time. Indeed it is the computer which has
made flextime possible in large organizations. At its simplest it
facilitates the complex interweaving of thousands of personalized,
flexible schedules. But it also alters our communications patterns in
time, permitting us to access data and exchange it both
"synchronously" (i.e., simultaneously) and "asynchronously."

What that means is illustrated by the growing number of computer
users who are today engaged in "computer conferencing." This permits
a group to communicate with one another through terminals in their

homes or offices. Some 660 scientists, futurists, planners, and
educators today in several countries conduct lengthy discussions of
energy, economics, decentralization, or space satellites with one
another through what is known as the Electronic Information Exchange
System. Teleprinters and video screens in their homes and offices
provide a choice of either instant or delayed communication. Many
time zones apart, each user can choose to send or retrieve data
whenever it is most convenient. A person, can work at 3:00 A.M. if he
or she feels like it. Alternatively, several can go on line at the same
time if they so choose.

But the computer's effect on time goes much deeper, influencing even
the way we think about it. The computer introduces a new vocabulary
(with terms like "real-time," for example) that clarifies, labels, and
reconceptualizes temporal phenomena. It begins to replace the clock
as the most important timekeeping or pace-setting device in society.

Computer operations take place so rapidly that we routinely process
data in what might be termed "subliminal time" — intervals far too short
for the human senses to detect or for human neural response times to
match. We now have computer-operated microprinters capable of
turning out 10-000 to 20,000 lines per minute — more than 200 times
faster than anyone can read them, and this is still the slowest part of
computer systems. In twenty years computer scientists have gone from
speaking in terms of milliseconds (thousandths of a second) to
nanoseconds (billionths of a second) — a compression of tune almost
beyond our powers to imagine. It is as though a person's entire
working life of, say 80,000 paid hours — 2,000 hours per year for forty
years — could be crunched into a mere 4.8 minutes.

Beyond the computer we find other technologies or products that also
move in the direction of de-massifying time. Mood-influencing drugs
(not to speak of marijuana) alter the

DECODING THE NEW RULES

253

perception of time within us. As far more sophisticated mood drugs
appear it is likely that, for good or for ill, even our interior sense of time,
our experience of duration, will become further individualized and less
universally shared.

During Second Wave civilization machines were clumsily synchronized
to one another, and people on the assembly line were then
synchronized to the machines, with all the many social consequences
that flowed from this fact. Today, machine synchronization has
reached such exquisitely, high levels, and the pace of even the fastest
human workers is so ridiculously slow by comparison, that full
advantage of the technology can be derived not by coupling workers to
the machine but only by decoupling them from it.

Put differently, during Second Wave civilization, machine
synchronization shackled the human to the machine's capabilities and
imprisoned all of social life in a common frame. It did so in capitalist
and socialist societies alike. Now, as machine synchronization grows

more precise, humans, instead of being imprisoned, are progressively
freed.

One of the psychological consequences of this is a change in the very
meaning of punctuality in our lives. We are moving now from an
across-the-board punctuality to selective or situational punctuality.
Being on time — as our children perhaps dimly sense — no longer
means what it used to mean.

Punctuality, as we saw earlier, was not terribly important during First
Wave civilization — basically because agricultural work was not highly
interdependent. With the coming of the Second Wave one worker's
lateness could immediately and dramatically disrupt the work of many
others in factory or office. Hence the enormous cultural pressure to
assure punctuality. -

Today, because the Third Wave brings with it personalized instead of
universal or massified schedules, the consequences of being late are
less clear. To be late may inconvenience a friend or co-worker, but its
disruptive effects on production, while still potentially severe in certain
jobs, are less and less obvious. It is harder — especially for young
people — to tell when punctuality is really important and when it is
demanded out of mere force of habit, courtesy, or ritual. Punctuality
remains vital in some situations but, as the computer spreads and
people are permitted to plug into and out of round-the-clock cycles at
will, the number of workers whose effectiveness depends on it
decreases.

The result is less pressure to be "on time" and the spread
254

TWE THIRD WAVE

of more casual attitudes toward time among the young. Punctuality,
like morality, becomes situational.

In short, as the Third Wave moves in, challenging the old industrial
way of doing things, it changes the relationship of the entire civilization
to time. The old mechanical synchronization that destroyed so much of
the spontaneity and joy of life and virtually symbolized the Second
Wave is on its way out. The young people who reject the nine-to-five
regime, who are indifferent to classical punctuality, may not understand
why they behave as they do. But time itself has changed in the "real
world," and along with it we have changed the ground rules that once
governed us.

THE POST-STANDARDIZED MIND

The Third Wave does more than alter Second Wave patterns of
synchronization. It attacks another basic feature of industrial life:
standardization.

The hidden code of Second Wave society encouraged a steamroller
standardization of many things — from values, weights, distances,
sizes, time, and currencies to products and prices. Second Wave

businessmen worked hard to make every widget identical, and some
still do.

Today's sawiest businessmen, as we have seen, know how to
customize (as opposed to standardize) at lowest cost, and find
ingenious ways of applying the latest technology to the
individualization of products and services. In employment the numbers
of workers doing identical work grows smaller and smaller as the
variety of occupations increases. Wages and fringe benefits begin to
vary more from worker to worker. Workers themselves become more
different from one another, and since they (and we) are also
consumers, the differences immediately translate into the marketplace.

The shift away from traditional mass production thus is accompanied
by a parallel de-massification of marketing, merchandising, and of
consumption. Consumers begin to make their choices not only
because a product fulfills a specific material or psychological function
but also because of the way it fits into the larger configuration of
products and services they require. These highly individualized
configurations are transient, as are the life-styles they help to define.
Consumption, like production, becomes configurational- Post-

DECODING THE NEW RULES

255

standardized production brings with it post-standardized consumption.

Even prices, standardized during the Second Wave period, begin to be
less standard now, since custom products require custom pricing. The
price tag for an automobile depends on the particular package of
options selected; the price of a hi-fi set similarly depends on the units
that are plugged together and on how much work the buyer wishes to
do; the prices of aircraft, offshore oil rigs, ships, computers, and other
high-technology items vary from one unit to the next.

In politics we see similar trends. Our views are increasingly non-
standard as consensus breaks down in nation after nation and
thousands of "issue groups" spring up, each fighting for its own narrow,
often temporary, set of goals. In turn, the culture itself is increasingly
de-standardized.

Thus we see the breakup of the mass mind as the new
communications media described in Chapter Thirteen come into play.
The de-massification of the mass media — the rise of mini-magazines,
newsletters, and small scale, often Xeroxed, communications along
with the coming of cable, cassette, and computer — shatters the
standardized image of the world propagated by Second Wave
communications technologies, and pumps a diversity of images, ideas,
symbols, and values into society. Not only are we using customized
products, we are using diverse symbols to customize our view of the
world.

Art News summarized the views of Dieter Honisch, director of the
National Gallery in West Berlin: "What is admired hi Cologne may not
be accepted in Munich and a Stuttgart success may not impress the

Hamburg public. Ruled by sectional interests, the country is losing its
sense of national culture."

Nothing underlines this process of cultural de-standardization more
crisply than a recent article in Christianity Today, a leading voice of
conservative Protestantism in America. The editor writes, "Many
Christians seem confused by the availability of so many different
translations of the Bible. Older Christians did not face so many
choices." Then conies the punch line. "Christianity Today recommends
that no version should be the 'standard.'" Even within the narrow
bounds of Biblical translation, as in religion generally, the notion of a
single standard is passing. Our religious views, like our tastes, are
becoming less uniform and standardized.

The net effect is to carry us away from the Huxleyan or Orwellian
society of faceless, de-individualized humanoids

258

that a simple extension of Second Wave tendencies would suggest
and, instead, toward a profusion of life-styles and more highly
individualized personalities. We are watching the rise of a "post-
standardized mind" and a "post-standardized public."

This will bring its own social, psychological, and philosophical
problems, some of which we are already feeling in the loneliness and
social isolation around us, but these are dramatically different from the
problems of mass conformity that exercised us during the industrial
age.

Because the Third Wave is not yet dominant even in the most
technically advanced nations, we continue to feel the tug of powerful
Second Wave currents. We are still completing some of the unfinished
business of the Second Wave. For example, hard-cover book
publishing in the United States, long a backward industry, is only now
reaching the stage of mass-merchandising that paperback publishing
and most other consumer industries attained more than a generation
ago. Other Second Wave movements seem almost quixotic, like the
one that urges us at this late stage to adopt the metric system in the
United States to bring American measurements into conformity with
those used in Europe. Still others derive from bureaucratic empire
building, like the effort of Common Market technocrats in Brussels to
"harmonise" everything from auto mirrors to college diplomas —
"harmonisa-tion” being the current gobbledygook for industrial-style
standardization.

Finally, there are movements aimed at literally turning back the clock —
like the back-to-basics movement in United States schools.
Legitimately outraged by the disaster in mass education, it does not
recognize that a de-massified society calls for new educational
strategies, but seeks instead to restore and enforce Second Wave
uniformity in the schools.

Nevertheless, all these attempts to achieve uniformity are essentially
the rearguard actions of a spent civilization. The thrust of Third Wave
change is toward increased diversity, not toward the further

standardization of life. And this is just as true of ideas, political
convictions, sexual proclivities, educational methods, eating habits,
religious views, ethnic attitudes, musical taste, fashions, and family
forms as it is of automated production.

An historic turning point has been reached, and standard-

DECODING THE NEW RULES

257

ization, another of the ruling principles of Second Wave civilization, is
being replaced.

THE NEW MATRIX

Having seen how swiftly we are moving away from industrial-style
synchronization and standardization, it should surprise no one that we
are also rewriting other sections of the social code.

We saw earlier that, while all societies need some measure of both
centralization and decentralization, Second Wave civilization was
heavily biased toward the former and against the latter. The Great
Standardizes who helped build industrialism marched hand in hand
with the Great Centralizers, from Hamilton and Lenin down to
Roosevelt.

Today a sharp swing in the opposite direction is evident New political
parties, new management techniques, and new philosophies are
springing up that explicitly attack the centralist premises of the Second
Wave. Decentralization has become a hot political issue from
California to Kiev.

In Sweden a coalition of largely decentralist small parties drove the
centralist Social Democrats from power after 44 years in office.
Struggles over decentralization and regionalism have shaken France in
recent years, while across the Channel and to the north the Scottish
Nationalists now include a wing committed to "radical economic
decentralization." Similar political movements can be identified
elsewhere in Western Europe, while in New Zealand a still-small
Values Party has sprouted, demanding "an expansion of the functions
and autonomy of local and regional government . . . with a consequent
reduction in the functions and size of central government."

In the United States, too, decentralism has picked up support, and
supplies at least some of the fuel for the tax revolt that is, for good or
for ill, surging across the country. On the municipal level, too,
decentralism gains force, with local politicos demanding "neighborhood
power." Activist, neighborhood-based groups are proliferating, from
ROBBED (Residents Organized for Better and Beautiful Environmental
Development) in San Antonio, to CBBB (Citizens to Bring Broadway
Back) in Cleveland and the People's Firehouse in Brooklyn. Many see
the central government in Washington as the source of local ills rather
than the potential cure.

258 THE THIRD WAVE

According to Monsignor Geno Baroni, himself a former neighborhood
and civil rights activist and now the Assistant Secretary for
Neighborhoods in the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development, such small, decentralized groups reflect the breakdown
of machine politics and the inability of big government to cope with the
wide diversity of local conditions and people. Says The New York
Times, neighborhood activists are winning "victories in Washington and
across the country."

The decentralist philosophy is being spread, moreover, in schools of
architecture and planning, from Berkeley to Yale in the United States to
the Architectural Association in London, where students are, among
other things, exploring new technologies for environmental control,
solar heating, or urban agriculture with the aim of making communities
partially self-sufficient in the future. The impact of these young
planners and architects will be increasingly felt in the years to come as
they move into responsible positions.

More important, however, the term "decentralization" has also become
a buzzword in management, and large companies are racing to break
their departments down into smaller, more autonomous "profit
centers." A typical case was the reorganization of Esmark, Inc., a huge
company with operations in the food, chemical, oil, and insurance
industries.

"In the past," declared Esmark's chairman, Robert Reneker, "we had
an unwieldly business. . . . The only way we could develop coordinated
effort was to divide it into bite-size bits." The result: an Esmark cut into
1,000 different "profit centers," each one largely responsible for its own
operations.

"The net effect," said Business Week, "is to lift the routine decision-
making from Reneker's shoulders. Decentralization is evident
everywhere but in Esmark's financial controls."

What is important is not Esmark — which has probably reorganized
itself more than once since — but the general tendency it illustrates.
Hundreds, perhaps thousands, of companies are also in the process of
continual reorganization, decentralizing, sometimes overshooting and
swinging back, but gradually, over time, reducing centralized control
over their day-to-day operations.

At an even deeper level, large organizations are changing the authority
patterns that underpinned centralism. The typical Second Wave firm or
government agency was organized around the principle of "one man,
one boss." While an em-

DECODING THE NEW RULES

259

ployee or an executive might have many subordinates, he or she
would never report to more than a single superior. This principle meant
that the channels of command all went to the center.

Today it is fascinating to watch that system crack under its own weight
in the advanced industries, in the services, the professions, and many
government agencies. The fact is, growing multitudes of us today have
more than a single boss.

In Future Shock I pointed out that big organizations were increasingly
honeycombed by temporary units like task forces, interdepartmental
committees, and project teams. I termed this phenomenon "ad-
hocracy." Since then, many large companies have moved to
incorporate these transient units into a radically new formal structure
called "matrix organization." Instead of centralized control, matrix
organization employs what is known as a "multiple command system."

Under this arrangement, each employee is attached to a department
and reports to a superior in customary fashion. But he or she is also
assigned to one or more teams for jobs that can't be done by a single
department. Thus a typical project team may have people from
manufacturing, from research, sales, engineering, finance, and from
other departments as well. The members of this team all report to the
project leader as well as to a "regular" boss.

The result is that vast numbers of people today report to one boss for
purely administrative purposes and another (or a succession of others)
for practical get-the-work-done purposes. This system lets employees
give attention to more than one task at a time. It speeds up the flow of
information and avoids their looking at problems through the narrow slit
of a single department. It helps the organization respond to different,
quickly changing circumstances. But it also actively subverts
centralized control.

Spreading from such early users as General Electric in the United
States and Skandia Insurance in Sweden, the matrix-style organization
is now found in everything from hospitals and accounting firms to the
U.S. Congress (where all sorts of new, semiformal "clearinghouses"
and "caucuses" are springing up across committee lines). Matrix, in the
words of Professors S. M. Davis of Boston University and P. R.
Lawrence of Harvard, "is not just another minor management
technique or a passing fad ... it represents a sharp break ... matrix
represents a new species of business organization."

260

THE THIRD WAVE

And this new species is inherently less centralized than the old one-
boss system that characterized the Second Wave era.

Most important, we are also radically decentralizing the economy as a
whole. Witness the rising power of small regional banks in the United
States as against that of the handful of traditional "money market"
giants. (As industry becomes more geographically dispersed, firms that
previously had to rely on "money center" banks have increasingly
turned to the regionals. Says Kenneth L. Roberts, president of First
American, a Nashville bank, "The future of U.S. banking no longer lies
with the money market banks.") And as with the banking system, so
too with the economy itself.

The Second Wave gave rise to the first truly national markets and the
very concept of a national economy. Along with these came the
development of national tools for economic management — central
planning in the socialist nations, central banks and national monetary
and fiscal policies in the capitalist sector. Today 'both these sets of
tools are failing — to the mystification of the Second Wave economists
and politicians who try to manage the system.

Although the fact is only dimly appreciated as yet, national economies
are swiftly breaking down into regional and sectoral parts — subnational
economies with distinctive and differing problems of their own.

Regions, whether the Sun Belt in the United States, the Mezzogiorno
in Italy, or Kansai in Japan, instead of growing more alike as they did
during the industrial era, are beginning to diverge from one another in
terms of energy requirements, resources, occupational mix,
educational levels, culture, and other key factors. Moreover, many of
these subnational economies have now reached the scale of national
economies only a generation ago.

Failure to recognize this accounts in good measure for the bankruptcy
of government efforts to stabilize the economy. Every attempt to offset
inflation or unemployment through nationwide tax rebates or hikes, or
through monetary or credit manipulation, or through other uniform,
undifferenti-ated policies, merely aggravates the disease.

Those who attempt to manage Third Wave economies with such
centralized Second Wave tools are like a doctor who arrives at a
hospital one morning and blindly prescribes the same shot of Adrenalin
for all patients — regardless of whether they have a broken leg, a
ruptured spleen, a brain tumor, or an ingrown toenail. Only
disaggregated, increas-

DECODING THE NEW RULES

261

ingly decentralized economic management can work in the new
economy, for it, too, is becoming progressively decentralized at the
very moment it seems most global and uniform.

All these anti-centralist tendencies — in politics, in corporate or
government organization, and in the economy itself (reinforced by
parallel developments hi the media, in the distribution of computer
power, in energy systems, and in many other fields) — are creating a
wholly new society and making yesterday's rules obsolete.

SMALL-WITHIN-BIG IS BEAUTIFUL!

Many other sections of the Second Wave social code are also being
drastically rewritten as the Third Wave arrives. Thus Second Wave
civilization's obsessive emphasis on maximization is also under sharp
attack. Never before have advocates of Bigger Is Better been so
assailed by advocates of Small Is Beautiful. It was only in the 1970's
that a book with that title could have become an influential, worldwide
best seller.

Everywhere we are seeing a dawning recognition that there are limits
to the much-vaunted economies of scale and that many organizations
have exceeded those limits. Corporations are now actively searching
for ways to reduce the size of their work units. New technologies and
the shift to services both sharply reduce the scale of operation. The
traditional Second Wave factory or office, with thousands of people
under a single roof, will be a rarity in the high-technology nations.

In Australia, when I asked the president of an auto company to
describe the auto plant of the future, he spoke with, utter conviction,
saying, "I would never, ever again build a plant like this one with seven
thousand workers under the same roof. I would break it into small
units — three hundred or four hundred in each. The new technologies
now make this possible." I have since heard similar sentiments from
the presidents or chairmen of companies producing food and many
other products.

Today, we are beginning to realize that neither big nor small is
beautiful, but that appropriate scale, and the intelligent meshing of both
big and small, is most beautiful of all. (This was something that E. F.
Schumacher, author of Small Is Beautiful, knew better than some of his
more avid follow-

262

THE THIRD WAVE

ers. He once told friends that, had he lived in a world of small
organizations, he would have written a book called Big Is Beautiful.)

We are also beginning to experiment with new forms of organization
that combine the advantages of both. For example, the rapid spread of
franchising in the United States, Britain, Holland, and other countries is
often a response to capital shortage or tax quirks and can be criticized
on various grounds. But it represents a method for rapidly creating
small units and linking them together in larger systems, with varying
degrees of centralization or decentralization. It is an attempt to mesh
large- and small-scale organizations.

Second Wave maximization is on its way out. Appropriate scale is in.

Society is also taking a hard look at Second Wave sped zation and
professionalism. The Second Wave code book p experts on a towering
pedestal. One of its basic rules "Specialize to succeed." Today, in
every field, including politics, we see a basic change in attitude toward
the expert. Once regarded as the trustworthy source of neutral
intelligence, specialists have been dethroned from public approval.

They are increasingly criticized for pursuing their own self-interest and
for being incapable of anything but tunnel vision. We see more and
more efforts to restrain the power of the expert by adding laymen to
decision-making bodies — in hospitals, for example, and many other
institutions.

Parents demand the right to influence school decisions, no longer
content to leave them to professional educators. After, studying citizen

political participation a few years ago, a task force hi the state of
Washington concluded, in a statement that summed up the new
attitude, "You don't have to be an expert to know what you want!"

Second Wave civilization encouraged yet another principle:
concentration. It concentrated money, energy, resources, and; people.
It poured vast populations into urban concentrationsJ Today this
process, too, has begun to turn around. We see uw creasing
geographical dispersal instead. At the level of enH ergy, we are
moving from a reliance on concentrated deposit! of fossil fuels to a
variety of more widely dispersed forms of energy and we are seeing
numerous experiments aimed at "de-concentrating" the populations of
schools, hospitals, aa mental institutions.

In short, one could move systematically through the entire code book
of Second Wave civilization — from standardization

DECODING THE NEW RULES 263

to synchronization right on down to centralization, maximization,
specialization, and concentration — and show, item by item, how the old
ground rules that governed our daily lives and our social decision-
making are in the process of being revolutionized as Third Wave
civilization sweeps in.

THE ORGANIZATION OF THE FUTURE

Earlier we saw that when all the Second Wave principles were put to
work in a single organization the result was a classical industrial
bureaucracy: a giant, hierarchical, permanent, top-down, mechanistic
organization, well designed for making repetitive products or repetitive
decisions in a comparatively stable industrial environment

Now, however, as we shift to the new principles and begin to apply
them together, we are necessarily led to wholly new kinds of
organizations for the future. These Third Wave organizations have
flatter hierarchies. They are less top-heavy. They consist of small
components linked together in temporary configurations. Each of these
components has its own relationships with the outside world, its own
foreign policy, so to speak, which it maintains without having to go
through the center. These organizations operate more and more
around the clock.

But they are different from bureaucracies in another fundamental
respect. They are what might be called "dual" or "poly" organizations,
capable of assuming two or more distinct structural shapes as
conditions warrant — rather like some plastic of the future that will
change shape when heat or cold is applied but spring back into a basic
form when the temperature is in its normal range.

One might imagine an army that is democratic and participatory in
peace time but highly centralized and authoritarian during war, having
been organized, in the first place, to be capable of both. We might use
the analogy of a football team whose members are not merely capable
of rearranging them-nelves in T formation and numerous other
arrangements for different plays but who, at the sound of a whistle, are

equally capable of reassembling themselves as a soccer, baseball, or
basketball squad, depending upon the game being played. I Such
organizational players need to be trained for instant nduptation, and
they must feel comfortable in a wider repertoire of available
organizational structures and roles.

264

THE THIRD WAVE

We need managers who can operate as capably in an open-door, free-
flow style as in a hierarchical mode, who can work in an organization
structured like an Egyptian pyramid ' as well as in one that looks like a
Calder mobile, with a few thin managerial strands holding a complex
set of nearly autonomous modules that move in response to the
gentlest breeze.

We do not yet have a vocabulary for describing these organizations of
the future. Terms like matrix or ad hoc are inadequate. Various
theorists have suggested different words. Advertising man Lester
Wunderman has said, "Ensemble groups, acting as intellectual
commandos, will . . . begin to replace the hierarchial structure." Tony
Judge, one of our most brilliant organization theorists, has written
extensively about the "network" character of these emerging
organizations of the future, pointing out, among other things, that "the
network is not 'coordinated* by anybody; the participating 'bodies
coordinate themselves so that one may speak of 'auto- ; coordination.'"
Elsewhere he has described them in terms Buckminster Fuller's
"tensegrity" principles.

But whatever terms we use, something revolutionary happening. We
are participating not merely in the birth o new organizational forms but
in the birth of a new civiliz tion. A new code book is taking form — a set
of Third Wave principles, fresh ground-rules for social survival.

It is hardly any wonder that parents — still mainly tied to the industrial-
era code book — find themselves hi conflict with children who, aware of
the growing irrelevance of the oldj rules, are uncertain, if not blindly
ignorant, of the new ones.] They and we alike are caught between a
dying Second Wave* order and the Third Wave civilization of
tomorrow.

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER

Giant historical shifts are sometimes symbolized by minute changes in
everyday behavior. One such change — its significance all but
overlooked — occurred early in the 1970's when a new product began
invading the pharmacies of France, England, Holland, and other
European countries. The new product was a do-it-yourself pregnancy
test kit. Within a few years an estimated 15 to 20 million such kits had
been sold to European women. Soon ads in American newspapers
were clamoring: "Pregnant? The sooner you know, the better." When
Warner-Lambert, an American firm, introduced the kit under its brand
name it found the response "overwhelmingly good." By 1980 millions of

women on both sides of the Atlantic were routinely performing for
themselves a task previously carried out for them by doctors and
laboratories.

They were not the only ones sidestepping the physician. According to
Medical World News, "Self-care — the idea that people can and should
be more medically self-reliant — is a fast rolling new bandwagon. . . .
Across the land, ordinary people are learning to handle stethoscopes
and blood pressure cuffs, administer breast self-examinations and Pap
smears, even carry out elementary surgical procedures."

Today mothers are taking throat cultures. Schools offer courses on
everything from foot care to "instant pediatrics." And people are
checking their own blood pressure in coin-operated machines located
in more than 1 ,300 shopping centers, airports, and department stores
in the United States.

As recently as 1972 few medical instruments were sold to non-
physicians. Today a growing share of the instrument

265

266

THE THIRD WAVE

market is destined for the home. Sales of otoscopes, ear-cleaning
devices, nose and throat irrigators, and specialized convalescent
products are all booming, as individuals take on more responsibility for
their own health, reduce the number of visits to the doctor, and cut
short their hospital stays.

On the surface all this might seem no more than a fad. Yet this rush to
treat one's own problems (instead of paying someone else to do so)
reflects a substantial change hi our values, in our definition of illness,
and in our perception of body and self. Even this explanation, however,
diverts attention from a still larger meaning. To appreciate the truly
historic significance of this phenomenon, we need to glance briefly
backward.

THE INVISIBLE ECONOMY

During the First Wave most people consumed what they themselves
produced. They were neither producers nor consumers in the usual
sense. They were instead what might be called "prosumers."

It was the industrial revolution, driving a wedge into society, that
separated these two functions, thereby giving birth to what we now call
producers and consumers. This split led to the rapid spread of the
market or exchange network — that maze of channels through which
goods or services, produced by you, reach me and vice versa.

Earlier I argued that, with the Second Wave, we went from an
agricultural society based on "production for use" — an economy of
prosumers, as it were — to an industrial society based on "production
for exchange." The actual situation was more complicated, however.

For just as a small amount of production for exchange — i.e., for the
market — existed during the First Wave, there continued to be a small
amount of production for self-use during the Second.

A more revealing way of thinking about the economy, therefore, is to
think of it as having two sectors. Sector A comprises all that unpaid
work done directly by people for themselves, their families, or their
communities. Sector B comprises all the production of goods or
services for sale or swap through the exchange network or market.

Seen this way, we can now say that during the First Wave, Sector A —
based on production for use — was enormous, while Sector B was
minimal. During the Second Wave the re-

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER

267

verse was true. In fact, the production of goods and services for the
market mushroomed to such an extent that Second Wave economists
virtually forgot the existence of Sector A. The very word "economy"
was defined to exclude all forms of work or production not intended for
the market, and the prosumer became invisible.

This meant, for example, that all the unpaid work done by women in
the home, all the cleaning, scrubbing, child-rearing, the community
organizing, was contemptuously dismissed as "non-economic," even
though Sector B — the visible economy — could not have existed
without the goods and services produced in Sector A — the invisible
economy. If no one were at home minding the children there would be
no next generation of paid workers for Sector B, and the system would
fall of its own weight

Can anyone imagine a functional economy, let alone a highly
productive one, without workers who, as children, have been toilet
trained, taught to speak, and socialized into the culture? What would
happen to the productivity of Sector B if the workers flowing into it
lacked even these minimal skills? Though ignored by Second Wave
economists, the fact is that the productivity of each sector depends
heavily on the other.

Today, as Second Wave societies suffer their terminal crisis, politicians
and experts still bandy about economic statistics based entirely on
Sector B transactions. They worry about declining "growth" and
"productivity." Yet so long as they continue to think in Second Wave
categories, so long as they ignore Sector A and regard it as outside the
economy — and so long as the prosumer remains invisible — they will
never be able to manage our economic affairs.

For if we look closely we find the beginnings of a fundamental shift in
the relationship of these two sectors or forms of production to one
another. We see a progressive blurring of the line that separates
producer from consumer. We see the rising significance of the
prosumer. And beyond that, we see an awesome change looming that
will transform even the role of the market itself in our lives and in the
world system.

All this takes us back to the millions of people who are beginning to
perform for themselves services hitherto performed for them by
doctors. For what these people are really doing is shifting some
production from Sector B to Sector A, from

263

THE THIRD WAVE

the visible economy that the economists monitor to the phantom
economy they have forgotten.

They are "presuming." And they are not alone.

OVEREATERS AND WIDOWS

In Britain hi 1970, a Manchester housewife named Kather-ine Fisher,
after suffering for years from a desperate fear of leaving her own
home, founded an organization for others with similar phobias. Today
that organization, The Phobics Society, has many branches and is one
of thousands of new groups cropping up in many of the high-
technology nations to help people deal directly with their own
problems — psychological, medical, social, or sexual.

In Detroit, some 50 "bereavement groups" have sprung up to aid
people suffering from grief after the loss of a relative or friend. In
Australia an organization called GROW brings together former mental
patients and "nervous persons." GROW now has chapters in Hawaii,
New Zealand, and Ireland. In 22 states an organization called Parents
of Gays and Lesbians is in formation to help those with homosexual
children. In Britain, Depressives Associated has some 60 chapters.
From Addicts Anonymous and the Black Lung Association to Parents
Without Partners and Widow-to-Widow, new groups are forming
everywhere.

Of course, there is nothing new about people in trouble getting
together to talk out their problems and learn from one another.
Nonetheless, historians can find little precedent for the wildfire speed
with which the self-help movement is spreading today.

Frank Riessman and Alan Gartner, co-directors of the New Human
Services Institute, estimate mat hi the United States alone there are
now over 500,000 such groupings — about one for every 435 in the
population — with new ones forming daily. Many are short-lived, but for
each, one that disappears several seem to take its place.

These organizations vary widely. Some share the new suspicion of
specialists and attempt to work without them. They rely entirely on
what might be termed "cross-counseling" — people swapping advice
based on then* own life experience, as distinct from receiving
traditional counseling from the professionals. Some see themselves as
providing a support system for people hi trouble. Others play a political
role,

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER

269

lobbying for changes in legislation or tax regulations. Still others have a
quasi-religious character. Some are intentional communities whose
members not only meet but actually live together.

Such groups are now forming regional, even transnational linkages. To
the extent that professional psychologists, social workers, or doctors
are involved at all, they increasingly undergo a role change, shifting
from the role of impersonal expert who is assumed to know best to that
of listener, teacher, ;md guide who works with the patient or client.
Existing voluntary or nonprofit groups — originally organized for the
purpose of helping others — are similarly struggling to see how they fit
in with a movement based on the principle of helping oneself.

The self-help movement is thus restructuring the socio-sphere.
Smokers, stutterers, suicide-prone people, gamblers, victims of throat
disease, parents of twins, overeaters, and other such groupings now
form a dense network of organizations that mesh with the emerging
Third Wave family and corporate structures.

But whatever their significance for social organization, they represent a
basic shift from passive consumer to active pro-sumer, and they thus
hold economic meaning as well. Though ultimately dependent on the
market and still intertwined with it, they are transferring activity from
Sector B of the economy to Sector A, from the exchange sector to the
pro-sumption sector. Nor is this burgeoning movement the only such
force: Some of the richest and largest corporations in the world are
also — for their own technological and economic reasons — accelerating
the rise of the prosumer.

THE DO-IT-YOURSELFERS

In 1956 the American Telephone & Telegraph Company, creaking
under the burden of exploding communications demand, began
introducing new electronic technology that made it possible for callers
to direct-dial their long-distance calls. Today it is even possible to
direct-dial many overseas calls. By punching in the appropriate
numbers, the consumer took on a task previously done for him by the
operator.

In 1973-74 the oil squeeze triggered by the Arab embargo sent
gasoline prices soaring. Giant oil companies reaped bonanza profits,
but local filling-station operators had to fight

270

THE THIRD WAVE

a desperate battle for economic survival. To cut costs many introduced
self-service fuel pumps. At first these were an oddity. Newspapers
wrote funny feature stories about the motorist who tried to put the fuel
hose into the car radiator. Soon, however, the sight of consumers
pumping their own gas became a commonplace.

Only 8 percent of U.S. gas stations were on a self-service basis in
1974. By 1977 the number reached nearly 50 percent. In West
Germany, of 33,500 service stations some 15 percent had shifted to
self-service by 1976, and this 15 percent accounted for 35 percent of
all the gasoline sold. Industry experts say that it will soon be 70
percent of the total. Once more the consumer is replacing a producer
and becoming a prosumer.

The same period saw the introduction of electronic banking, which not
only began to break down the pattern of "banker's hours" but also
increasingly eliminated the teller, leaving the customer to perform
operations previously done by the bank staff.

Getting the customer to do part of the job — known to economists as
"externalizing labor cost" — is scarcely new. That's what self-service
supermarkets are all about. The smiling clerk who knew the stock and
went and got it for you was replaced by the push-it-yourself shopping
cart. While some customers lamented the good old days of personal
service, many liked the new system. They could do their own
searching and they wound up paying a few cents less. In effect, they
were paying themselves to do the work the clerk had previously done.

Today this same form of externalization is occurring in many other
fields. The rise of discount stores, for example, represents a partial
step in the same direction. Clerks are far and few between; the
customer pays a bit less but works a bit harder. Even shoe stores, in
which a supposedly skilled clerk was long regarded as a necessity, are
moving to self-service, shifting work to the consumer.

The same principle can be found elsewhere, too. As Caroline Bird has
written in her perceptive book, The Crowding Syndrome, "More things
come knocked down for supposedly easy assembly at home . . . and
during the Christmas season shoppers in some of the proudest old
New York stores have to make out sales slips for clerks unable or
unwilling to write."

In January 1978 a thirty-year-old government worker in

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER

271

Washington, D.C., heard strange noises emanating from his
refrigerator. The customary thing to do in the past was to call in a
mechanic and pay him to fix it. Given the high cost and (he difficulty of
getting a repairman at a convenient hour, Barry Nussbaum read the
instructions that came with his refrigerator. On it he discovered an 800
telephone number that he could use to call the manufacturer —
Whirlpool Corporation of Benton Harbor, Michigan — free of charge.

This was the "Cool-Line" set up by Whirlpool to help customers with
service problems. Nussbaum called. The man at the other end then
"talked him through" a repair, explaining to Nussbaum exactly which
bolts to remove, which sounds to listen for and — later — what part
would be needed. "That guy," says Nussbaum, "was super-helpful. He

not only knew what I needed to do, he was a great confidence builder."
The refrigerator was fixed in no time.

Whirlpool has a bank of nine full-time and several part-time advisers,
some of them former service field men, who wear headsets and take
such calls. A screen in front of them Instantly displays for them a
diagram of whatever product is Involved (Whirlpool makes freezers,
dishwashers, air-conditioners, and other appliances in addition to
refrigerators) and permits them to guide the customer. In 1978 alone
Whirlpool lumdled 150,000 such calls.

The Cool-Line is a rudimentary model for a future system of
maintenance that permits the homeowner to do much of what a paid
outside mechanic or specialist once did. Made possible by advances
that have driven down the cost of longdistance telephoning, it suggests
future systems that might ac-l Inally display step-by-step fix-it-yourself
instructions on the home television screen as the adviser speaks. The
spread of mich systems would reserve the repair mechanic only for
major tasks, or turn the mechanic (like the doctor or social worker) into
a teacher, guide, and guru for prosumers.

What we see is a pattern that cuts across many indus-iiirs — increasing
externalization, increasing involvement of I ili«v consumer in tasks
once done for her or him by others — nnd once again, therefore, a
transfer of activity from Sector It of the economy to Sector A, from the
exchange sector to iln' prosumption sector.

All of this pales by comparison with what we see when we

I Inok at the dramatic changes that have hit other parts of the

»!n H-yourself industry. Do-it-yourselfers have always put-

272

THE THIRD WAVE

tered away at fixing cracked windowpanes, broken light fixtures, or
chipped flagstones. Nothing new about that. What's changed — and
changed astonishingly — is the relationship between the do-it-yourselfer
and the professional builder, carpenter, electrician, plumber, or what
have you.

As recently as ten years ago in the United States only 3( percent of all
electric power tools were sold to do-it-yoursel ers; 70 percent went to
carpenters or other professioi craftsmen. In a short ten years those
figures have been versed: Today only 30 percent are sold to
professionals; 70 percent are bought by consumers who, more and
mot are doing-it-themselves.

An even more significant milestone, according to Frost Sullivan, a
leading industrial research firm, was passed in United States between
1974 and 1976, when "for the time, more than half of all building
materials . . . were pi chased directly by homeowners rather than by
contractors dc ing work for them." And this did not include an

additional] $350,000,000 spent by the home craftsman for jobs costing]
under $25.

While overall expenditures for building materials rose 31 percent
during the first half of the seventies, those bought b} do-it-yourself
homeowners rose over 65 percent — more th? twice as fast. The
change, declares the F & S report, is "bot dramatic and continuing."

Another Frost & Sullivan study speaks of the "skyrocketii growth of
such expenditures and underscores the value shil toward self-
sufficiency. "Where working with one's hands looked down upon (at
least by the middle class) it is now sign of pride. People doing their
own work are proud of it."

Schools, universities, and publishers are busy offering at avalanche of
how-to courses and books. Says U.S. News & World Report: "Both rich
and poor are caught up hi boom. In Cleveland, home-repair instruction
is offered public-housing projects. In California, owner-installed saum
spas and decks are popular."

In Europe, too, the so-called "DIY revolution" is way — with a few
variations based on national temperamer (German and Dutch do-it-
yourselfers tend to treat then* prc ects very soberly, set high
standards, and equip themselve carefully. Italians, by contrast, are just
beginning to discove the DIY movement, many older husbands
insisting that it degrading to do the work themselves.)

Once more the reasons are multiple. Inflation. The dii

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER 273

mlty of getting a carpenter or plumher. Shoddy work. Expanded
leisure. All these play a part. A more potent reason, however, is what
might be called the Law of Relative Inefficiency. This holds that the
more we automate the production (if goods and lower their per-unit
cost, the more we increase (lie relative cost of handcrafts and
nonautomated services. (If a plumber gets $20 for a one-hour house
call and $20 will buy one hand calculator, his price, in effect, goes up
substantially when the same $20 will buy several hand calculators.
Relative to the cost of other goods, his price has risen several limes
over.)

For such reasons, we must expect the price of many services to
continue their skyrocketing climb in the years ahead. And as these
prices soar, we can expect people to do more nnd more for
themselves. In short, even without inflation, the Law of Relative
Inefficiency would make it increasingly "profitable" for people to
produce for their own consumption, thus transferring further activity
from Sector B to Sector A of the economy, from exchange production
to presumption.

OUTSIDERS AND INSIDERS

To glimpse the long-range future of this development, we need to look
not only at services, but at goods. And when we do we find that here,

too, the consumer is increasingly being drawn into the production
process.

Thus eager manufacturers today recruit — even pay — customers to help
design products. This is not merely true in industries that sell direct to
the public — food, soap, toiletries, et cetera — but even more so in the
advanced industries like elec -I ronics where de-massification is most
rapid.

"We've been most successful when we have worked closely with one
or two customers," says the manager of Texas Instruments' planning
system. "To go off and study an application by ourselves and then try
to come up with a standard product in that market has not been
successful."

Indeed, Cyril H. Brown of Analog Devices, Inc. divides all products into
two kinds: "inside-out" products and "outside-in” products. The latter
are defined not by the manufacturer hut by the potential customer, and
these outsider products, uccording to Brown, are ideal. The more we
shift toward advanced manufacture, and the more we de-massify and
custo-

274

THE THIRD WAVE

mize production, the stronger the customer's involvement in the
production process must necessarily grow.

Today members of Computer-aided Manufacturing International (CAM-
I) are hard at work classifying and coding parts and processes to
permit the full automation of production. The prospect is still no more
than a glint in the eye of such experts as Professor Inyong Ham of
Penn State's Department of Industrial and Manufacturing Systems
Engineer ing, but ultimately a customer will be able to feed his or her
specifications into a manufacturer's computer directly.

The computer will not only design the product the cus tomer wants,
Professor Ham explains, but select the manufactoring processes to be
used. It will assign the machines. It will sequence the necessary steps
from, say, milling or grind ing right down to painting. It will write the
necessary programs for the subcomputers or numerical control devices
that will run the machines. And it may even feed in an "adaptive
control" that will optimize these various processes for both economic
and environmental purposes.

In the end, the consumer, not merely providing the specs but punching
the button that sets this entire process in action will become as much a
part of the production process as the denim-clad assembly-line worker
was in the world now dying.

While such a customer-activated manufacturing system is still some
distance off, at least some of the hardware already exists. Thus, at
least in theory, the computer-run laser gun used in the garment
industry and described in Chapter Fif-teen could, if linked by telephone
to a personal computer permit a customer to feed in his or her various

dimensions select appropriate cloth, and then actually activate the
laser cutter — without leaving his or her own home.

Robert H. Anderson, head of the Information Services Department at
the RAND Corporation and a leading expert on computerized
manufacture, explains it this way: "The most creative thing a person
will do 20 years from now is to be a very creative consumer . . .

Namely, you'll be sitting there doing things like designing a suit of
clothes for yourself or making modifications to a standard design, so
the computers can cut one for you by laser and sew it together for you
by numerically controlled machine.. ..

"You really could, because of the computers, take your specs and turn
them into a car. They will, of course, have programmed within them all
the federal safety regulations

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER

275

and all the physics of the situation so they won't let you get too far out
of bounds."

And if to this we now add the possibility that many people may soon be
working at home anyway in the electronic cot-tages of tomorrow, we
begin to imagine a significant change in the "tools" available to the
consumer. Many of the same electronic devices we will use in the
home to do work for pay will also make it possible to produce goods or
services for our own use. In this system the prosumer, who dominated
in First Wave societies, is brought back into the center of economic
action — but on a Third Wave, high-technology basis.

In short, whether we look at self-help movements, do-it-yourself trends,
or new production technologies, we find the same shift toward a much
closer involvement of the consumer in production. In such a world,
conventional distinctions between producer and consumer vanish. The
"outsider" becomes an "insider," and even more production is shifted
from Sector B of the economy to Sector A where the pro-sumer reigns.

As this occurs we begin — glacially at first but then, perhaps, with
accelerating speed — to alter that most fundamental of our institutions:
the market.

PROSUMER LIFE-STYLES

The willing seduction of the consumer into production has staggering
implications. To understand why, it helps to remember that the market
is premised on precisely the split between producer and consumer that
is now being blurred. An elaborate market was not necessary when
most people consumed what they themselves produced. It only
became necessary when the task of consumption was separated from
that of production.

Conventional writers define the market narrowly as a capi-talist,
money -based phenomenon. Yet the market is merely mother word for
an exchange network, and there have been (and still are) many

different kinds of exchange networks. In the West the most familiar to
us is the profit-based, capitalist market. But there are also socialist
markets — exchange networks through which the goods or services
produced by Ivan Ivanovich in Smolensk are traded for goods or
services turned out by Johann Schmidt in East Berlin. There are

276 THE THIRD WAVE

markets based on money — but also markets based on barter. The
market is neither capitalist nor socialist. It is a direct, inescapable
consequence of the divorce of producer from consumer. Wherever this
divorce occurs the market arises. And wherever the gap between
consumer and producer narrows, the entire function, role, and power of
the market is brought into question.

The rise of presuming today, therefore, begins to change the role of
the market in our lives.

It is too early to know where this subtle but significant thrust is taking
us. Certainly the market is not going to go away. We are not going to
go back to premarket economies. What I have called Sector B — the
exchange sector — is not going to shrivel up and vanish. We will, for a
long time to come, continue to be heavily dependent upon the market.

Nevertheless, the rise of presuming points strongly toward a
fundamental change hi the relationships between Sector A and Sector
B — a set of relationships that Second Wave economists have until now
virtually ignored.

For presuming involves the "de-marketization" of at least certain
activities and therefore a sharply altered role for the market in society.

It suggests an economy of the future unlike any we have known — an
economy that is no longer lopsidedly weighted in favor of either Sector
A or Sector B. It points to the emergence of an economy that will
resemble neither First Wave nor Second Wave economies, but will, in-
stead, fuse the characteristics of both into a new historic syn thesis.

The rise of the prosumer, powered by the soaring cost of many paid
services, by the breakdown of Second Wave ser-vice bureaucracies,
by the availability of Third Wave technol-ogies, by the problems of
structural unemployment, and by many other converging factors, leads
to new work-styles and life arrangements. If we permit ourselves to
speculate, bear-1 ing in mind some of the shifts described earlier — such
as the move toward de-synchronization and part-time paid work, the
possible emergence of the electronic cottage, or the changed structure
of family life — we can begin to discern some of these life-style
changes.

Thus we are moving toward a future economy in which very large
numbers never hold full-time paid jobs, or in which "full-time" is
redefined, as it has been in recent years, to mean a shorter and
shorter workweek or work year. (In

277

Sweden, where a recent law guaranteed all workers five weeks of paid
vacation regardless of age or length of service, a normal work year
was considered to be 1840 hours. In fact, absenteeism has run so high
that a more realistic average per worker is 1600 hours per year.)

Large numbers of workers already do paid work for what averages out
to only three or four days a week, or they take six months or a year off
to pursue educational or recreational goals. This pattern may well grow
stronger as two-paycheck households multiply. More people in the paid
labor market — higher "labor participation rates," as the economists put
it — may very well go with reduced hours per worker.

This casts the whole question of leisure into a new light. Once we
recognize that much of our so-called leisure time is, in fact, spent
producing goods and services for our own use— presuming — then the
old distinction between work and leisure falls apart. The question is not
work versus leisure, but paid work for Sector B versus unpaid, self-
directed, and self-monitored work for Sector A.

In the Third Wave context new life-styles based half on production for
exchange, half on production for use, become practical. Such life-
styles were, in fact, common in the early days of the industrial
revolution among farm populations who were slowly being absorbed
into the urban proletariat. For a long transitional period millions of
people worked part-time in factories and part-time on the land, growing
their own food, buying some of their necessities, making the rest. This
pattern still prevails in many parts of the world — but usually on a
technologically primitive basis.

Imagine this life pattern — but with twenty-first century technology for
goods and food production, as well as immensely enhanced self-help
methods for the production of many services. Instead of a dress
pattern, for example, tomorrow's prosumer might well buy a cassette
with a program on it that will drive a "smart" electronic sewing machine.
Even the clumsiest househusband, with such a cassette, could make
his own custom-fitted shirts. Mechanically inclined tinkerers could do
more than tune up their autos. They could actually half-build them.

We saw that it "may become possible some day for the customer to
program his or her own specifications into the auto manufacturing
process via computer and telephone. But there is another way in which
the consumer, even now, can participate in producing an auto.

278

THE THIRD WAVE

A company called Bradley Automotive already offers a "Bradley GT kit"
that lets you "put together your own luxurious sports car." The
prosumer who buys the partly preas-sembled kit mounts the fiberglass
body on a Volkswagen chassis, connects the engine wires, sets up the
steering, plugs in the seats, and so on.

One can easily picture a generation brought up on part-time paid work
as the norm, eager to use their own hands, equipped with many cheap
mini-technologies in the home, forming a sizable segment of the

population. Half in the market, half out, working intermittently rather
than all year round, taking a year off now and then, they might well
earn less — but compensate by supplying their own labor for many
tasks that now cost money, thus mitigating the effects of inflation.

America's Mormons offer another clue to possible future life-styles.
Many Mormon stakes — a stake corresponds to, say, a Catholic
diocese — own and operate their own farms. Members of the stake,
including urban members, spend some of their free time as volunteer
farmers growing food. Most of the produce is not sold but stored for
emergency use or distributed to Mormons in need. There are central
canning plants, bottling facilities, and grain elevators. Some Mormons
grow their own food and take it to the cannery. Others actually buy
fresh vegetables at the supermarket, then take them to the local
cannery.

Says a Salt Lake City Mormon, "My mother will buy tomatoes and can
them. Her relief 'society,' the women's auxiliary society, will have a day
and they'll all go and can tomatoes for their own use." Similarly, many
Mormons not only contribute money to their church but actually
perform volunteer labor — construction work, for example.

None of this is to suggest that we are all going to become members of
the Mormon church, or that it will be possible in the future to re-create
on a wide scale the social and community bonds one finds in this
highly participatory yet theologically autocratic group. But the principle
of production for self-use, either by individuals or by organized groups,
is likely to spread farther.

Given home computers, given seeds genetically designed for urban or
even apartment agriculture, given cheap home tools for working
plastic, given new materials, adhesives, and membranes, and given
free technical advice available over the telephone lines, with
instructions perhaps flickering on the

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER

279

TV or computer screen, it becomes possible to create lifestyles that are
more rounded and varied, less monotonous, more creatively satisfying,
and less market-intensive than those that typified Second Wave
civilization.

It is still too early to know how far this shift of activity from exchange in
Sector B to presumption in Sector A will go, how the balance between
these sectors will vary from country to country, and which particular
life-styles will actually emerge from it. What is certain, however, is that
any significant change in the balance between production for use and
production for exchange will set off depth charges under our economic
system and our values as well.

THIRD WAVE ECONOMICS

Is it possible that the much-bewailed decline of the Protestant work
ethic is linked to this shift from production for others to production for

self? Everywhere we see the decay of the industrial ethos that
promoted hard work. Western executives mutter darkly about this
"English disease" which is supposed to reduce us all to penury if we do
not cure it. "Only the Japanese still work hard," they say. But I have
heard top leaders of Japanese industry say that their labor force is
suffering from the same infection. "Only the South Koreans work hard,"
they say.

Yet the very people who are supposedly unwilling to work hard on the
job are often the same people who are, in fact, working hard off the
job — laying bathroom tile, weaving carpets, lending their time and
talents to a political campaign, attending self-help meetings, sewing,
growing vegetables in the garden, writing short stories, or remodeling
the attic bedroom. Can it be that the driving motivation that powered
the expansion of Sector B is now being channeled into Sector A — into
presuming?

The Second Wave brought with it more than steam engines and
mechanical looms. It brought with it an immense charac-terological
change. Today we can still see this shift occurring among .populations
moving from First Wave to Second Wave societies — like the Koreans,
for example, who are still busy expanding Sector B at the expense of
Sector A.

By contrast, in the mature Second Wave societies reeling under the
impact of the Third Wave — as production moves back to Sector A and
the consumer is drawn back into the

280

THE THIRD WAVE

production process — another characterological shift begins. Later on
we will explore this fascinating change. For now we need only bear in
mind that the structure of personality itself is likely to be heavily
influenced by the rise of prosumption.

Nowhere, however, are the changes wrought by the rise of the
prosumer likely to be more explosive than in economics. Economists,
instead of training all their guns on Sector B, will have to develop a
new, more wholistic conception of an economy — will have to analyze
what happens in Sector A as well and learn how the two parts relate to
one another.

As the Third Wave has begun to restructure the world economy, the
economics profession has been savagely attacked for its inability to
explain what is happening. Its most sophisticated tools, including
computerized models and matrices, seem to tell us less and less about
how the economy really works. Indeed, many economists themselves
are concluding that conventional economic thought, both Western and
Marxist, is out of touch with a f ast-changing reality.

One key reason may be that, more and more, changes of great
significance lie outside Sector B — i.e., outside the entire exchange
process. To bring economists back in touch with reality Third Wave

economists will need to develop new models, measures, and indices
for describing processes in Sector A and will have to rethink many root
assumptions in the light of the rise of the prosumer.

Once we recognize that powerful relationships link the measured
production (and productivity) in Sector B and the unmeasured
production (and productivity) in Sector A, the invisible economy, we are
compelled to redefine these terms. As early as the mid-1960's,
economist Victor Fuchs of the National Bureau of Economic Research
sensed the problem, pointing out that the rise of services made
traditional measures of productivity obsolete. Declared Fuchs: "The
knowledge, experience, honesty, and motivation of the consumer
affects service productivity."

But even in these words the "productivity" of the consumer Is still seen
only in terms of Sector B — only as a contribution to production for
exchange. There is no recognition as yet that actual production also
takes place in Sector A — that goods and services produced for oneself
are quite real, and that they may displace or substitute for goods and
services turned out in Sector B. Conventional production figures,
especially GNP figures, will make less and less sense until we
explicitly expand them to include what happens in Sector A.

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER

281

An understanding of the rise of the prosumer also helps bring the
concept of cost into sharper focus. Thus we gain powerful insights
once we recognize that the effectiveness of the prosumer in Sector A
can lead to higher or lower costs to companies or government
agencies operating in Sector B.

For example, high rates of alcoholism, absenteeism, nervous
breakdowns, and mental disorder in the work force all add to the "cost
of doing business" as measured conveniently in Sector B. (Alcoholism
alone has been estimated to cost American industry $20 billion in
production time a year. In Poland or the Soviet Union, where this
disease is, if anything, more widespread, the comparable figures must
be even more appalling.) To the degree that self-help groups alleviate
such problems in the work force, they reduce these operating costs.
The efficiency of presumption thus affects the efficiency of production.

Subtler factors also influence the cost of production in business. How
literate or articulate are the workers? Do they all speak the same
language? Can they tell time? Are they culturally prepared for the job?
Do the social skills learned in family life add to or detract from their
competence? All these character traits, attitudes, values, skills, and
motivations necessary for high productivity in Sector B, the exchange
sector, are produced or, more accurately, presumed in Sector A. The
rise of the prosumer — the reintegration of the consumer into
production — will force us to look far more closely at such
interrelationships.

The same powerful change will compel us to redefine efficiency.

Today, in determining efficiency, economists compare alternative ways
of producing the same product or service. They seldom compare the
efficiency of producing it in Sector B as against that of presuming it in
Sector A. Yet this is precisely what millions of people — supposedly
innocent of economic theory — are doing. They are finding that, once a
certain level of money income is assured, it may be more profitable,
economically as well as psychologically, to pro-sume than to earn
more cash.

Nor do economists or businessmen systemically track the negative
effects of Sector B efficiency on Sector A — as for example when a
company demands extremely high mobility of its executives and
causes a wave of stress-related illness, family breakdown, or
increased alcohol intake as a result. We may very well find that what
appears to be inefficient in con-

282

THE THIRD WAVE

ventional Sector B terms is, in fact, tremendously efficient when we
look at the whole economy and not just part of it.

To make sense, "efficiency" must refer to secondary, not merely first
order, effects, and to both sectors of the economy, not just one.

What about concepts like "income," "welfare," "poverty," or
"unemployment"? If a person lives half-in and half-out of the market
system, which products, tangible or intangible, are to be regarded as
part of his or her income? How meaningful are income figures at all hi
a society in which presuming may account for much of what the
average person has?

How do we define welfare hi such a system? Should welfare recipients
work? If so, should all this work necessarily be in Sector B? Or should
welfare recipients be encouraged to presume?

What is the real meaning of unemployment? Is a laid-off auto worker
who puts a new roof on his house, or overhauls his car, unemployed in
the same sense as one who sits idly at home watching football on
television? The rise of the pro-sumer forces us to question our entire
way of looking at the twin problems of unemployment, on the one
hand, and bureaucratic waste and featherbedding, on the other.

Second Wave societies have attempted to cope with unemployment,
for example, by resisting technology, closing off immigration, creating
labor exchanges, increasing exports, decreasing imports, setting up
public works programs, cutting back on work hours, attempting to
increase labor mobility, deporting whole populations, and even waging
war to stimulate the economy. Yet the problem becomes more
complex and difficult every day.

Can it be that the problems of labor supply — both gluts and
shortages — can never be satisfactorily solved within the framework of
a Second Wave society, whether capitalist or socialist? By looking at

the economy as a whole, rather than focusing exclusively on one part
of it, can we frame the problem in a new way that helps us solve it?

If production occurs in both sectors, if people are busy producing
goods and services for themselves in one sector and for others in a
different sector, how does this affect the argument over a guaranteed
minimum income for all? Typically, in Second Wave societies income
has been inextricably linked to work for the exchange economy. But
are not pro-sumers also "working," even if they are not part of the
market or are only partially in it? Should not a man or

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER

283

woman who stays home and rears a child, thereby contributing to the
productivity of Sector B through his or her efforts in Sector A, receive
some income, even if he or she does not hold down a paid job in
Sector B?

The rise of the prosumer will decisively alter all our economic thinking.
It will also shift the basis of economic conflict. The competition
between worker-producers and manager-producers will no doubt
continue. But it will shrink in importance as presuming increases and
we move farther into Third Wave society. In its place new social
conflicts will arise.

Battles will flare over which needs will be met by which sector of the
economy. Struggles will sharpen, for example, over licensing, building
codes, and the like, as Second Wave forces attempt to hold on to jobs
and profits by preventing prosumers from moving in. Teachers' unions
typically fight to keep parents out of the classroom with all the zeal of
building tradesmen fighting to preserve obsolete building codes. Yet
just as a number of health problems (like those deriving from
overeating, lack of exercise, or smoking, for example) cannot be
solved by doctors alone but require instead the active participation of
the patient, so a number of educational problems cannot be resolved
without the parent. The rise of the prosumer changes the entire
economic landscape.

Thus all these effects will be intensified and the entire world economy
changed by a massive historical fact now staring us in the face— which
seems to have gone unnoticed by Second Wave economists and
thinkers. This last towering fact sets into perspective all we have so far
read in this chapter.

THE END OF MARKETIZATION

What has gone almost unnoticed is not merely a change in Ihe
patterns of participation in the market but, even more fundamentally,
the completion of the entire historical process of market-building. This
turning point is so revolutionary in its implications, yet so subtle, that
capitalist and Marxist thinkers alike, lost in their Second Wave
polemics, have scarcely noticed its signs. It fits into neither of their
theories and thus has remained undetectable by them.

The human race has been busy constructing a worldwide exchange
network — a market — for at least 10,000 years. In

284

THE THIRD WAVE

the past 300 years, ever since the Second Wave began, this process
has roared forward at very high speed. Second Wave civilization
"marketized" the world. Today — at the very moment when presuming
begins to rise again — this process is coming to an end.

The immense historical meaning of this cannot be appreciated unless
we are clear about what a market or exchange network is. It helps to
imagine it as a pipeline. When the industrial revolution burst forth on
the earth, launching the Second Wave, very few people on the planet
were tied into the money system. Trade existed but only the
peripheries of society were touched by it. The various networks of
jobbers, distributors, wholesalers, retailers, bankers, and other
elements of the trade system were small and rudimentary — providing
only a few narrow pipelines through which goods and money might
flow.

For 300 years we poured earth-cracking energies into building this
pipeline. It was accomplished in three ways. First the merchants and
mercenaries of Second Wave civilization spread around the globe,
inviting or coercing new populations to enter the market — to produce
more and presume less. Self-sufficient African tribesmen were induced
or compelled to grow cash crops and dig copper. Asian peasants who
once grew their own food were put to work on plantations instead,
tapping rubber trees to put tires on automobiles. Latin Americans
began growing coffee for sale hi Europe and the United States. With
each such development the pipeline was built or further elaborated and
more and more populations drawn into dependence on it.

The second way in which the market expanded was through the
increasing "commoditization" of life. Not only were larger populations
enmeshed in the market but more and more goods and services were
designed for the market, requiring a continual enlargement of the
"channel capacity" of the system — a widening, as it were, of the
diameter of the pipes.

Finally, the market expanded in another way. As society and the
economy grew more complex, the number of transac- I tions required
for, say, a single bar of soap to pass from producer to consumer
multiplied. The more intermediaries, the I more ramified the maze of
channels or pipes became. This growing elaborateness of the system
was itself a form of further development, like the addition of still more
special tubes and valves to a pipeline.

THE RISE OF THE PROSUMER

285

Today all these forms of market expansion are reaching their outer
limits. Few populations still remain to be brought into the market. Only

a handful of the remotest people remain untouched by the market.

Even the hundreds of millions of subsistence farmers in poor countries
are at least partially integrated into the market and the accompanying
money system.

What remains, therefore, is a mopping-up operation at best. The
market can no longer expand by engulfing vast new populations.

The second form of expansion is still at least theoretically possible.
With imagination, we can still, no doubt, think up additional services or
goods to to sell or barter. But it is precisely here that the rise of the
prosumer becomes significant. The relationships between Sector A
and Sector B are complex, and many of the activities of prosumers
depend on the purchase of materials or took from the market. But the
rise of self-help, in particular, and the de-marketization of many goods
and services suggests that here, too, the end of the process of
marketization may be in sight

Lastly, the increasing elaborateness of the ''pipeline" — the growing
complexity of distribution, the interpolation of more and more
middlemen — also appears to be reaching a point of no return. The
costs of exchange itself, even as conventionally measured, are now
outrunning the costs of material production in many fields. At some
point this process reaches a limit. Computers, meanwhile, and the
emergence of a pro-sumer-activated technology both point to smaller
inventories and simplified, rather than more complex, chains of
distribution. Once again, therefore, the evidence points to the end of
the process of marketization, if not in our time, then soon after.

If our "pipeline project" is nearing completion, what might (his mean for
our work, our values, and our psyches? A market, after all, does not
consist of the steel or shoes or cot-ion or canned food that flows
through it. The market is the siructure through which such goods and
services are routed. Moreover, it is not simply an economic structure. It
is a way of organizing people, a way of thinking, an ethos, and a
•shared set of expectations (e.g., the expectation that goods
purchased will indeed be delivered). The market is thus as much a
psychological structure as an economic reality. And its (•fleets far
transcend economics. «

By systematically interrelating billions of people to one an-
286

THE THIRD WAVE

other, the market produced a world in which no one had independent
control over his or her destiny — no person, no nation, no culture. It
brought with it the belief that integration into the market was
"progressive" while self-sufficiency was "backward." It spread vulgar
materialism and the belief that economics and economic motivation
were the primary forces in human life. It fostered a view of life as a
succession of contractual transactions, and of society as bound
together by the "marriage contract" or the "social contract."

Marketization thus shaped the thoughts and values, as well as the
actions, of billions and set the tone of Second Wave civilization.

It took an enormous investment of time, energy, capital, culture, and
raw materials to create a situation in which a purchasing agent in
South Carolina could do business with an unseen and unknown clerk
in South Korea — each with his or her own abacus or computer, each
with an internalized image of the market, each with a set of
expectations about the other, each performing certain predictable acts
because both have been life-trained to play certain prespecified roles,
each part of a giant global system involving millions, indeed billions, of
others.

One might plausibly argue that the construction of this elaborate
structure of human relationships, and its explosive diffusion around the
planet, was the single most impressive achievement of Second Wave
civilization, dwarfing even its spectacular technological achievements.
The step-by-step creation of this essentially sociocultural and
psychological structure for exchange (quite apart from the torrent of
goods and services that flowed through it) can be likened to the
building of the Egyptian pyramids, the Roman aqueducts, the Chinese
wall, and the medieval cathedrals, combined and multiplied a
thousandfold.

This grandest construction project of all history, the laying into place of
the tubes and channels through which much ol the economic life of
civilization pulsed and flowed, gave Sec* ond Wave civilization
everywhere its inner dynamism and propulsive thrust. Indeed, if this
now dying civilization can be said to have had a mission at all, it was to
marketize t world.

Today that mission is all but fulfilled.

The heroic age of market -building is over — to be replaced by a new
phase in which we merely maintain, renovate, and update the pipeline.
We will undoubtedly have to redesign

287

important pieces of it to accommodate radically increased Hows of
information. The system will increasingly depend on electronics,
biology, and new social technologies. This, too, will no doubt require
resources, imagination, and capital. But compared with the exhausting
effort of Second Wave marketization, this renewal program will absorb
a far smaller fraction of our time, energy, capital, and imagination. It
will use less, not more, hardware and fewer, not more, people lhan the
original process of construction. However complex conversion proves
to be, marketization will no longer be the central project of the
civilization.

The Third Wave will therefore produce history's first "trans -market"
civilization.

By trans-market I do not mean a civilization without exchange
networks — a world thrown back into small, isolated, completely self-
sufficient communities unable or unwilling to trade with one another. I

do not mean a move backward. By "trans -market" I mean a civilization
that is dependent on the market but is no longer consumed by the
need to build, extend, elaborate, and integrate this structure. A
civilization able to move on to a new agenda — precisely because the
market has already been laid in place.

And just as no one living in the sixteenth century could have imagined
how the growth of the market would change the world's agenda in
terms of technology, politics, religion, art, social life, law, marriage, or
personality development — so too it is extremely difficult for us today to
envision the long-range effects of the end of marketization.

Yet these are likely to radiate into every cranny of our children's lives, if
not our own. The marketization project exacted a price. Even in purely
economic terms this price was enormous. As the productivity of the
human race rose during the past three hundred years, a significant part
of that productivity — in both sectors — was set aside and allocated to
the market-building project.

With the basic construction task now virtually complete, the enormous
energies previously poured into building the world market system
become available for other human purposes. From this fact alone will
flow a limitless array of civil izafional changes. New religions will be
born. Works of art mi a hitherto unimagined scale. Fantastic scientific
advances. And, above all, wholly new kinds of social and political insti-
(niions. What is at stake today is more than capitalism or social-

288

THE THIRD WAVE

ism, more than energy, food, population, capital, raw material, or jobs;
what is at stake is the role of the market in our lives and the future of
civilization itself.

This, at its core, is what the rise of the prosumer is about.

Change in the deep-structure of the economy is part of the same wave
of interrelated changes now striking our energy base, our technology,
our information system, and our family and business institutions. These
are intertwined, hi turn, with the way we view the world. And in this
sphere, too, we are undergoing an historic upheaval. For the entire
world view of industrial civilization — indust-reality — is now being
revolutionized.

MENTAL MAELSTROM

Never before have so many people in so many countries — even
educated and supposedly sophisticated people — been so intellectually
helpless, drowning, as it were, in a maelstrom of conflicting, confusing,
and cacophonous ideas. Colliding visions rock our mental universe.

Every day brings some new fad, scientific finding, religion, movement,
or manifesto. Nature worship, ESP, holistic medicine, sociobiology,

anarchism, structuralism, neo-Marxism, the new physics. Eastern
mysticism, technophilia, technopho-bia, and a thousand other currents
and crosscurrents sweep across the screen of consciousness, each
with its scientific priesthood or ten-minute guru.

We see a mounting attack on establishment science. We see a wildfire
revival of fundamentalist religion and a desperate search for
something — almost anything — to believe in.

Much of this confusion is actually the result of an intensifying cultural
war — the collision of an emerging Third Wave culture with the
entrenched ideas and assumptions of industrial society. For just as the
Second Wave engulfed traditional views and spread the belief system I
call mdust-reality, so today we see the beginnings of a philosophical
revolt aimed at overthrowing the reigning assumptions of the past 300
years. The key ideas of the industrial period are being discredited,
discounted, superseded, or subsumed into much larger and moFe
powerful theories.

The core beliefs of Second Wave civilization did not win acceptance
during the past three centuries without a bitter struggle. In science, in
education, in religion, in a thousand

289

290 THE THIRD WAVE

fields, the "progressive" thinkers of industrialism fought against the
"reactionary" thinkers who reflected and rationalized agricultural
societies. Today it is the defenders of industrialism who have their
backs against the wall as a new, Third Wave culture begins to take
form.

THE NEW IMAGE OF NATURE

Nothing illustrates this clash of ideas more clearly than our changing
image of nature.

In the past decade a worldwide environmental movement has sprung
up in response to fundamental, potentially dangerous changes in the
earth's biosphere. And this movement has done more than attack
pollution, food additives, nuclear reactors, highways, and hair-spray
aerosols. It has also forced us to rethink our dependency on nature. As
a consequence, instead of conceiving ourselves as engaged in a
bloody war with nature, we are moving toward a fresh view that
emphasizes symbiosis or harmony with the earth. We are shifting from
an adversary to a nonadversary posture.

At the scientific level, this has led to thousands of studies aimed at
understanding ecological relationships so that we can soften our
impacts on nature or channel them in constructive ways. We have just
begun to appreciate the complexity and dynamism of these
relationships and to reconceptualize society itself in terms of recycling,
renewability, and the carrying capacity of natural systems.

All this is mirrored in a corresponding shift of popular attitudes toward
nature. Whether we examine opinion surveys or the lyrics of pop
songs, the visual imagery in advertising or the content of sermons, we
find evidence of a heightened, though often romantic, regard for
nature.

City dwellers by the millions yearn for the countryside, and the Urban
Land Institute reports a significant population shift toward rural areas.
Interest in natural foods and natural childbirth, in breastfeeding,
biorhythms, or body care has boomed in recent years. And public
suspicion of technology is so widespread that even the most single-
minded pursuers of GNP today pay at least lip service to the idea that
nature must be protected, not raped — that the adverse side effects of
technology on nature must be anticipated and prevented, not simply
ignored.

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM
291

Because our power to damage it has escalated, the earth now is
regarded as far more fragile than Second Wave civilization suspected.
At the same time, it is seen as a diminishing dot in a universe that
grows larger and more complex with every passing moment.

Since the Third Wave began some 25 years ago, scientists have
developed a whole battery of new tools for probing nature's most
distant reaches. In turn these lasers, rockets, accelerators, plasmas,
fantastic photographic capabilities, computers, and colliding-beam
devices have burst our conception of what surrounds us.

We are now looking at phenomena that are bigger, smaller, and faster
by orders of magnitude than any we examined during the Second
Wave past. Today we are probing phenomena that are as tiny as
I/I, 000, COO, 000, 000, OOOth of a centimeter in an explorable universe
whose edge lies at least 100,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 miles
away. We are studying phenomena so short-lived that they occur in
1/1 0,000, 000, -000, 000, 000, 000, OOOth of a second. By contrast, our
astronomers and cosmologists tell us the universe is some
20,000,000,000 years old. The sheer scale of explorable nature has
burst beyond yesterday's wildest assumptions.

Moreover, in this swirling vastness, we are told, the earth may not be
the only inhabited sphere. Says astronomer Otto Struve, "the vast
number of stars that must possess planets, the conclusions of many
biologists that life is an inherent property of certain types of
complicated molecules or aggregates of molecules, the uniformity
throughout the universe of the chemical elements, the light and heat
emitted by solar-type stars, and the occurrence of water not only on
the earth but on Mars and Venus, compel us to revise our thinking" and
consider the possibility of extraterrestrial life.

This doesn't mean little green humanoids. And it doesn't mean (or not
mean) UFOs. But by suggesting that life is not unique to the earth, it
further alters our perception of nature and our place in it. Since 1960,
scientists have been listening in the dark, hoping to detect signals from

some distant intelligence. The United States Congress has held
hearings on "The Possibility, of Intelligent Life Elsewhere in the
Universe." And the Pioneer 10 spacecraft, as it streaked into
interstellar space carried with it a pictorial greeting to extraterrestrials.

As the Third Wave dawns, our own planet seems much smaller and
more vulnerable. Our place in the universe seems

292

THE THIRD WAVE

less grandiose. And even the remote possibility that we are not alone
gives us pause.

Our image of nature is not what it used to be.

DESIGNING EVOLUTION

Neither is our image of evolution — or, for that matter, evolution itself.

Biologists, archaeologists, and anthropologists, attempting to unravel
the mysteries of evolution, similarly find themselves in a bigger and
more complex world than previously imagined and are discovering that
laws once regarded as universal in application are actually special
cases.

Says the Nobel Prize-winning geneticist Francois Jacob, "Since
Darwin, biologists have gradually developed a ... chart of the
mechanism of evolution, called natural selection. On that basis
attempts have often been made to portray all evolution — cosmic,
chemical, cultural, ideological, social — as governed by a similar
selection mechanism. But such understandings seem doomed,
inasmuch as the rules change at every plane."

Even on the biological plane, rales once thought to apply across the
board are in question. Thus scientists are being forced to ask whether
all biological evolution is a response to variation and natural selection
or whether, at the molecular level, it may depend instead on an
accumulation of variations which result in "genetic drift" without the
operation of Darwinian natural selection. Says Dr. Motoo Kimura of the
National Institute of Genetics in Japan, evolution at the molecular level
appears to be "quite incompatible with the expectations of neo-
Darwmism."

Other long held assumptions are being shaken as well. Biologists have
told us that eukaryotes (human beings and most other forms of life) are
ultimately descended from simpler cells called prokaryotes (among
which are bacteria and algae) . Fresh research is now undermining
that theory, leading to the unsettling notion that the simpler life forms
may have descended from the more complex.

Furthermore, evolution is supposed to favor adaptations that enhance
survival. Yet we are now finding striking examples of evolutionary
developments that seem to confer long-term benefit — at the cost of
short-term disadvantage. Which does evolution favor?

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM

293

Then there is the startling news from, of all places, the

< -I. ml Park Zoo in Atlanta, where the chance mating of two i'" H-S of
ape with two quite different sets of chromosomes

1 1 us produced the first known hybrid ape. Even though re-*H i re hers
are unsure whether the hybrid will be fertile, her bi--*, 1 1 n- genetics
lend support to the idea that evolution may <" nif in leaps and bounds
as well as through the accretion of •.iii.i II changes.

Indeed, instead of seeing evolution as a smooth process, ni.iiiy of
today's life scientists and archaeologists are studying i In- "theory of
catastrophes" to explain "gaps" and "jumps" in (he multiple branches of
the evolutionary record. Others MM- studying small changes that may
have been amplified through feedback into sudden structural
transformations. M.-;itcd controversies divide the scientific community
over ev-

< i y one of these issues.

Hut all such controversies are dwarfed by a single history -chnnging
fact.

One day in 1953 at Cambridge in England a young biolo-/*i-.i, James
Watson, was sitting in the Eagle pub when his col-lengtie, Francis
Crick, ran excitedly in and announced to "< vcryone within hearing
distance that we had found the '.< net of life." They had. Watson and
Crick had unraveled the structure of DNA.

liy 1957, as the first stirrings of the Third Wave were IH-MIJT felt, Dr.
Arthur Kornberg learned how DNA repro-. lures itself. Since then, as
one popular summary describes • In- sequence, "We have cracked the
DNA code . . . We Imvc learned how DNA transmits its instructions to
the cell , . . We have analyzed chromosomes to determine genetic -
function . . . We have synthesized a cell . . . We have fused «<lh from
two different species . . . We have isolated pure lum i an genes . . . We
have 'mapped' genes . . . We have syn-liicsi/cd a gene . . . We have
changed the heredity of a cell." I «>i lay genetic engineers in
laboratories around the world are < M pa hie of creating entirely novel
life forms. They have end-ii Ml evolution itself.

Second Wave thinkers conceived of the human species as Hn
culmination of a long evolutionary process; Third Wave H iink-ers must
now face the fact that we are about to become i In designers of
evolution. Evolution will never look the

I .ike the concept of nature, evolution too is in the process being
drastically reconceptualized.

294 THE THIRD WAVE
THE PROGRESS TREE

With Second Wave ideas about nature and evolution both changing, it
is hardly surprising that we are also sharply re-evaluating Second
Wave ideas about progress. The industrial period was characterized,
as we saw earlier, by a facile optimism that saw each scientific
breakthrough or "new improved product" as evidence of an inevitable
advance toward human perfection. Since the mid-1950's, when the
Third Wave began battering Second Wave civilization, few ideas have
taken as rough a beating as this cheery creed.

The "beats" of the fifties and the hippies of the sixties made pessimism
about the human condition, not optimism, a pervasive cultural theme.
These movements did much to replace knee-jerk optimism with knee-
jerk despair.

Soon pessimism became positively chic. Hollywood movies of the
1950's and 1960's, for example, replaced the jut -jawed i heroes of the
1930's and 1940's with alienated antiheroes — rebels without a cause,
stylish gunmen, dope pushers with eharm, angst-ridden motorcyclists,
and hard, inarticulate (but soulful) punks. Life was a game nobody
won.

Fiction, drama, and art also took on a graveyard hopelessness in many
Second Wave nations. By the early fifties, Camus had already defined
the themes that countless novelists would subsequently pursue. A
British critic summed these up as: "Man is fallible, political theories are
relative, auto-, matic progress is a mirage." Even science fiction, once
filled with Utopian adventures, turned bitter and pessimistic, gener-1
ating countless poor imitations of Huxley and Orwell.

Technology, instead of being portrayed as the engine of progress,
increasingly appeared as a juggernaut destroying\ both human
freedom and the physical environment. For! many environmentalists,
indeed, "progress" became a dirty \ word. Weighty volumes poured into
the bookshops, bearing] titles like The Stalled Society, The Coming
Dark Age, /rtl Danger of Progress, or The Death of Progress.

As Second Wave society lurched into the seventies, The j Club of
Rome report on The Limits to Growth set a funerealj tone for much of
the decade that followed, with its projeoJ tions of catastrophe for the
industrial world. UpheavalsJ unemployment, and inflation, intensified
by the oil embargo! of 1973, added to the spreading pall of pessimism
and the re«i jection of the idea of inevitable human progress. Henry
Kiss-] inger spoke in Spenglerian accents about the decline of thei

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM

295

West — sending yet another frisson of fear down a good many spines.

Whether such despair was, or is, justified remains for each lender to
decide. One thing is clear, however: the notion of inevitable single-
track progress, another pillar of indust-real-lty, found fewer takers as
the end of Second Wave civilization loomed closer.

Today there is a fast-spreading recognition around the world that
progress can no longer be measured in terms of technology or material
standard of living alone — that a society that is morally, aesthetically,
politically, or environmentally degraded is not an advanced society, no
matter how rich or technically sophisticated it may be. In short, we are
moving toward a far more comprehensive notion of progress —
progress no longer automatically achieved and no longer ill-lined by
material criteria alone.

We are also less inclined to think of societies as moving itlong one
track, each society traveling automatically from one cultural way-
station to the next, one more "advanced" limn another. There may be
many branch lines, as it were, milier than a single roadbed, and
societies may be able to nrliieve comprehensive development in a
variety of ways.

We are beginning to think of progress as the flowering of a tree with
many branches extending into the future, the very vniiety and richness
of human cultures serving as a measure. In (his light, today's shift
toward a more diverse, de-massified world may itself come to be seen
as an important forward Imp — analogous to the tendency toward
differentiation and • "inplexity so common in biological evolution.

Whatever happens next, it is unlikely that the culture will i \< i again
return to the naive, unilinear, Pollyannaish pro-jnrssivism that
characterized and inspired the Second Wave PI ii.

Hie past decades, therefore, have witnessed a forced i.-.
onecptualization of nature, evolution, and progress alike, i inc
concepts, however, were in turn based on still more el-rinrntal ideas —
our assumptions about time, space, matter, ninl rmisality. And the
Third Wave is dissolving even these H mnpiions — the intellectual glue
that held Second Wave civ-together.

298 THE THIRD WAVE

THE FUTURE OF TIME

Each emerging civilization brings with it not merely changes in how
people handle time in daily life but also changes in their mental maps
of time. The Third Wave is redrawing these temporal maps.

Second Wave civilization, from Newton on, assumed that time ran
along a single line from the mists of the past into the most distant
future. It pictured time as absolute, uniform throughout all parts of the
universe, and independent of matter and space. It assumed that each
moment, or chunk of tune, was the same as the next.

Today, according to John Gribbin, an astrophysicist-turned-science-
writer, "Sober scientists with impeccable academic credentials and

years of research experience calmly inform us that. . . time isn't
something that flows inexorably forward at the steady pace indicated
by our clocks and calendars, but that it can be warped and distorted in
nature, with the end product being different depending on just where
you are measuring it from. At the ultimate extreme, supercol-lapsed
objects — black holes — can negate time altogether, making it stand still
in their vicinity."

By the turn of the century Einstein had already proved that time could
be compressed and stretched, and had dynamited the notion that time
is absolute. He put forth the now classic case of the two observers and
the railroad track, which went more or less like this:

A man standing alongside a railroad track sees two bolts of lightning
strike at the same time — one at the far north end of the track, the other
at the south. The observer is mid-Way between the two. A second
fellow is sitting in a high-speed train rocketing northward along the
track. As he passes the observer outside he, too, sees the bolts of
lightning. But to him the two flashes do not appear as simultaneous.
Because the train is speeding him away from one and toward the
other, the light from one reaches him sooner than the light from the
other. To the man on the moving train it appears that the northern flash
occurs first.

While in daily life the distances are so small and the speed of light so
fast that the difference would be unnoticeable, the example dramatized
Einstein's point: that the chronological order of events — what comes
first, second, or later in time — depends upon the velocity of the
observer. Time is not absolute, but relative.

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM

297

This is a long way from the kind of time on which classical physics and
indust-reality were based. Both took for granted that "before" or "after"
had a fixed meaning hide-pendent of any observer.

Today physics is both exploding and imploding. Every day its
practitioners hypothesize — or find — new elementary particles or
astrophysical phenomena, from quarks to quasars, with amazing
implications, some of which are forcing additional changes in our
conceptions of time.

At one end of the scale, for example, black holes appear to punctuate
the skies, sucking into themselves everything, including light itself,
straining — if not smashing — the laws of physics. These dark
maelstroms, we are told, terminate in "singularities" into which energy
and matter simply vanish. Physicist Roger Penrose has even posited
the existence of "wormholes" and "white holes" through which the lost
energy and matter are spewed into another universe — whatever that
might mean.

A single moment in the vicinity of a black hole, it is believed, might be
the equivalent of eons on earth. Thus if some Interstellar Mission
Control were to send a spaceship to explore a black hole, we might

have to wait a million years for the ship to arrive. Yet because of
gravitational distortion In the vicinity of the black hole, not to mention
the effects of velocity, the ship's clock would show the passage of only
a few minutes or seconds.

When we leave the vast heavens and enter the world of microscopic
particles or waves, we find similarly puzzling phenomena. At Columbia
University Dr. Gerald Feinberg has oven hypothesized particles called
tachyons that move faster ihan light and for which — according to some
of his colleagues — time moves backward.

The British physicist J. G. Taylor tells us: "The microscopic notion of
time is very different from the macroscopic." An-oihcr physicist, Fritjof
Capra, puts it more simply. Time, he wiys, is "flowing at different rates
in different parts of the universe." Increasingly, therefore, we cannot
even speak of "lime" in the singular; there appear to be alternative and
plural "times" operating under different rules in different parts of the
universe or universes we inhabit. All of which knocks the props from
under the Second Wave idea of uni-;l linear time — without substituting
ancient notions of cy-< heal time.

Ai precisely the same moment, therefore, that we are radi-

298

THE THIRD WAVE

cally restructuring our social uses of time — by introducing flextime on
the job, by decoupling workers from the mechanical conveyor, and in
the other ways described in Chapter Nineteen — we are also
fundamentally reformulating our theoretical images of time. And while
these theoretical discoveries seem at the moment to have no practical
application to daily life, the same was true of those seemingly
speculative chalk marks on the blackboard — the formulas that led
ultimately to the smashing of the atom.

SPACE TRAVELERS

Many of these changes in our conception of time also blast holes in our
theoretical understanding of space, since the two are tightly
interwoven. But we are altering our image of space in more immediate
ways as well.

We are changing the actual spaces in which all of us live, work, and
play. How we get to work, how far and how frequently we travel, where
we live — all these influence our experience of space. And all these are
changing. In fact, as the Third Wave arrives we enter a new phase in
humanity's relationship to space.

The First Wave, which spread agriculture around the world, brought
with it, as we saw earlier, permanent farming settlements in which
most people lived out their entire lives within a few miles of their
birthplace. Agriculture introduced a stay -put, spatially intensive
existence, and fostered intensely local feelings — the village mentality.

Second Wave civilization, by contrast, concentrated huge populations
in great cities and, because it needed to draw resources from afar and
to distribute goods at a distance, it bred mobile people. The culture it
produced was spatially extensive and city- or nation- rather than
village-centered.

The Third Wave alters our spatial experience by dispersing rather than
concentrating population. While millions of people continue to pour into
urban areas in the still-industrializing parts of the world, all the high-
technology countries are already experiencing a reversal of this flow.
Tokyo, London, Zurich, Glasgow, and dozens of other major cities are
all losing population while middle-sized or smaller cities are showing
gains.

The American Council of Life Insurance declares: "Some urban experts
believe that the major U.S. city is a thing of the past." Fortune
magazine reports that "transportation and

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM

299

rommuication technology has cut the cords that bound big •
orporations to the traditional headquarters cities." And Huxiness Week
entitles an article "The Prospect of a Nation With No Important Cities.'*

This redistribution of and de-concentration of population will, in due
time, alter our assumptions and expectations nhout personal as well as
social space, about acceptable commuting distances, about housing
density, and many other (liings.

In addition to such changes, the Third Wave also appears to be
generating a new outlook that is intensely local, yet global — even
galactic. Everywhere we find a new concentration on "community" and
"neighborhood," on local politics nnd local ties at the same time that
large numbers of people — often the same ones who are most locally
oriented — concern themselves with global issues and worry about
famine or war 10,000 miles away.

As advanced communications proliferate and we begin to shift work
back into the electronic cottage, we will encourage this new dual focus,
breeding large numbers of people who remain reasonably close to
home, who migrate less often, who travel more perhaps for pleasure
but far less often for business — while their minds and messages range
across the entire planet and into outer space as well. The Third Wave
mentality combines concern for near and far.

We are also rapidly adopting more dynamic and relativistic Images of
space. I have in my office several large blowups of satellite and U-2
photographs of New York City and the surrounding area. The satellite
photos look like fantastically In-.-mtiful abstractions, the sea a deep
green, the coastline detailed against it. The U-2 photos show the city in
infrared, find in such exquisite detail that the Metropolitan Museum nnd
even individual planes parked on the ramps at La < inardia Airport are
clearly visible. Referring to the planes at Tn Guardia, I asked a NASA
official if, by further enlarging Ihe photos, one could actually see the

stripes or symbols painted on the wings. He looked at me with amused
tolerance and corrected me. "The rivets," he replied.

But we are no longer limited to exquisitely refined still pic-inrcs.
Professor Arthur H. Robinson, a cartographer at the I iniversity of
Wisconsin, says that within a decade or so r;:d<-Mites will permit us to
look at a living map — an animated , I, splay — of a city or a country and
watch the activities on it n*; i hey take place.

300

THE THIRD WAVE

When this happens the map will no longer be a static representation
but a movie — indeed an X ray in motion, since it will show not merely
what is on the surface of the earth but also reveal, layer by layer, what
lies below the surface and above it at each level of altitude. It will
provide a sensitive, continually changing image of terrain and our
relationships to it.

Some map makers, meanwhile, are rebelling against the conventional
world map seen in every Second Wave classroom. Since the industrial
revolution the most commonly used map of the world has been based
on Mercator's projection. While this type of map is convenient for
ocean navigation, it wildly distorts the scale of land surfaces. A quick
look at your handy atlas will — if it uses a Mercator map — show
Scandinavia as larger than India, even though the latter is actually
almost three times larger.

Hot controversy rages among map makers over a new projection
developed by Arno Peters, a German historian, to show land surfaces
in proper proportion to one another. Peters charges that the distortions
of the Mercator map have fostered the arrogance of the industrial
nations and made it difficult for us to see the non-industrialized world in
proper political, as well as cartographic, perspective.

"Developing countries have been cheated with regard to their surface
and their importance," Peters contends. His map, strange to the
European or American eye, shows a shrunken Europe, a flattened and
squashed Alaska, Canada, and Soviet Union, and a much elongated
South America, Africa, Arabia, and India. Sixty thousand copies of the
Peters map have been distributed in the non-industrial countries by the
Weltmission, a German evangelical mission and other religious
organizations.

What this controversy underscores is the recognition that there is no
single "right" map, but merely different images of space that serve
different purposes. In the most literal sense the arrival of the Third
Wave brings a new way of looking at the world.

WHOLISM AND HALFISM

These deep changes in our views of nature, evolution, progress, time,
and space begin coming together as we move from, a Second Wave
culture that emphasized the study of

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM

301

things in isolation from one another to a Third Wave culture <li;it
emphasizes contexts, relationships, and wholes.

In the early fifties, at almost precisely the same time that biologists
were breaking the genetic code, communications theorists and
engineers at the Bell Labs, computer specialists ni IBM, physicists at
Britain's Post Office Laboratory, and specialists at Le Centre National
de Recherche Scientifique in l-ranee, also began a period of intense
and exciting work.

Drawing on "operations research" conducted during World War II, but
advancing far beyond it, this work gave birth to the automation
revolution and a whole new phylum or species of technology that
underpins Third Wave production In factory and office. Along with the
hardware, however, i-.ime a new way of thinking. For a key product of
the automation revolution was the "systems approach."

Whereas Cartesian thinkers emphasized the analysis of components,
often at the expense of context, systems thinkers stressed what Simon
Ramo, an early advocate of systems theory, called a "total, rather than
a fragmentary, look fit problems." Emphasizing the feedback
relationships among •ubsystems and the larger wholes formed by
these units, systems thinking has had a pervasive cultural impact since
the nml-1950's when it first began to seep out of the laboratories. Its
language and concepts have been employed by social HI i entists and
psychologists, by philosophers and foreign policy analysts, by logicians
and linguists, by engineers and administrators.

But the advocates of systems theory are not the only ones In the past
decade or two who have urged a more integrative wny of looking at
problems.

The revolt against narrow overspecialization also received a IK>ost
from the environmental campaigns of the 1970's, as « » logists
increasingly discovered the "web" of nature, the in-i(nclatedness of
species, and the wholeness of ecosystems. "Non-environmentalists
tend to want to separate things into • "inponents and to solve one thine
at a time," wrote Barry I »|H-7 in Environmental Action. By contrast,
"Environmen-i iM MS tend to see things quite differently. . . . Their
instinct IN In balance the whole, not to solve a single part." The eco-il
approach and the systems approach overlapped and Mi.nrtl the same
thrust toward synthesis and the integration ni Knowledge.

In universities, meanwhile, more and more calls were heard f'i
interdisciplinary thinking. While departmental barriers

302

THE THIRD WAVE

still block the cross-fertilization of ideas and the integration of
information in most universities, this demand for inter- or multi-
disciplinary work is now so widespread it has an almost ritual quality.

These changes in intellectual life were mirrored elsewhere in the
culture as well. Eastern religions, for example, had long had a tiny
fringe following among the European middle classes, but it was not
until the disintegration of industrial society began in earnest that
thousands of Western young people began lionizing Indian swamis,
jamming the Astrodome to hear a 16-year-old guru, listening to ragas,
opening Hindu-style vegetarian restaurants, and dancing down Fifth
Avenue. The world, they suddenly chanted, was not broken into
Cartesian chips: it was a "oneness."

In the field of mental health, psychotherapists searched for ways to
cure the "whole person" by employing gestalt therapy. A gestalt
explosion erupted that saw the establishment of gestalt therapists and
institutes throughout the United States. The goal of mis activity,
according to psychotherapist Frederick S. Peris, was "to increase
human potential through the process of integration" of the individual's
sensory awareness, perceptions, and relationships with the outside
world.

In medicine, a "holistic health" movement has sprung up based on the
notion that the well-being of the individual depends on an integration of
the physical, the spiritual, and the mental. Mixing quackery with serious
medical innovation, the movement gained enormous strength in the
late 1970's.

"A few years ago," reports Science, "it would have been unthinkable for
the federal government to lend its sponsorship to a conference on
health that featured such topics as faith healing, iridology,
acupressure, Buddhist meditation, and electromedicine." Since then
there has been "a virtual explosion of interest in alternative healing
methods and systems, all of which go under the name of holistic
health."

With so much activity, on so many different levels, it is hardly
surprising that the terms "wholism" or "holism" should have crept into
the popular vocabulary. Today they are used almost indiscriminately. A
World Bank expert calls for "a holistic understanding of ... urban
shelter." A research group in the United States Congress demands
long-range "holistic" studies. A curriculum expert claims to employ
"holistic reading and scoring" in teaching school children to write. And
a Beverly Hills beauty gym offers "holistic exercise."

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM

303

Each of these movements, fads, and cultural currents is different. But
their common element is clear. All of them represent an attack on the
assumption that the whole can be understood by studying the parts in
isolation. Then* thrust is summed up in the words of philosopher Ervin
Laszlo, a leading systems theorist: we are "part of an interconnected
sys-lcm of nature, and unless informed 'generalists' make it their

business to develop systematic theories of the patterns of into
rconnection, our short-range projects and limited controllabilities may
lead us to our own destruction."

This attack on the fragmentary, on the partial and analytic has grown
so fierce, in fact, that many fanatic "holists" blithely forget the parts in
their pursuit of the ineffable whole. The result is not wholism at all but
yet another fragmentation. Their wholism is halfism.

More thoughtful critics, however, seek to balance Second Wave
analytic skills with a much greater emphasis on synthesis. This idea
was perhaps most clearly expressed by ecolo-gist Eugene P. Odum in
urging his colleagues to combine wholism with reductionism — to look
at whole systems as well ns their parts. "As components ... are
combined to produce larger functional wholes," he declared when he
and his more famous brother, Howard, jointly won the Prix de 1'lnstitut
de In Vie, "new properties emerge that were not present or not evident
at the next level below....

"This is not to say that we abandon reductionist science, since a great
deal of good has resulted for mankind from this approach," but that the
time has come to give equal backing to studies of "large-scale
integrated systems."

Taken together, systems theory, ecology, and the generalized
emphasis on wholistic thinking — like our changing conceptions of time
and space — are part of the cultural at-lfick on the intellectual premises
of Second Wave civilization. That attack reaches its culmination,
however, in the emerging new view of why things happen as they do:
the new causality.

THE COSMIC PLAYROOM

Second Wave civilization gave us the comfortable assurance Mint we
knew (or at least could know) what caused things to Imppcn. It told us
that every phenomenon occupied a unique, <l> iiTminable location in
space and time. It told us that the Nllme conditions always produced
the same results. It told us

304

THE THIRD WAVE

that the entire universe consisted, so to speak, of cue sticks and
billiard balls — causes and effects.

This mechanistic view of causality was — and still is — extremely useful.
It helps us cure disease, build giant skyscrapers, design ingenious
machines, and assemble huge organizations. Yet, powerful as it is in
explaining phenomena that work like simple machines, it has proved
far less satisfactory in explaining phenomena like growth, decay,
sudden breakthroughs to new levels of complexity, big changes that
suddenly fizzle out or, conversely, those tiny — often chance — events
that occasionally mushroom into giant, explosive forces. Today the
Newtonian pool table is being shoved into a corner of the cosmic
playroom. Mechanistic causality is seen as a special case applying to

some but not all phenomena, and scholars and scientists all over the
world are piecing together a new view of chance and causation more in
keeping with our rapidly changing views of nature, evolution, and
progress, of time, space, and matter.

The Japanese-born epistemologist Magoroh Maruyama, the French
sociologist Edgar Morin, information theorists like Stafford Beer and
Henri Laborit, and many others are providing clues to how causation
works in nonmechanical systems that live, die, grow, and undergo both
evolution and revolution. The Belgian Nobel Prize-winner, Ilya
Prigogine, offers us a staggering synthesis of the ideas of order and
chaos, chance and necessity, and how these relate to causation.

In part, the emerging Third Wave causality arises from a key concept
of systems theory: the idea of feedback. A classical example used to
illustrate this notion is the home thermostat that maintains room
temperature at an even level. The thermostat turns on the furnace,
then monitors the resulting temperature rise. When the room is warm
enough, it turns the furnace off. When the temperature falls, it senses
this change in its environment and flicks the furnace on again.

What we see here is a feedback process that preserves equilibrium,
damping down or suppressing change when it threatens to exceed a
given level. Called "negative feedback," its function is to maintain
stability.

Once negative feedback was defined and explored by information
theorists and systems thinkers in the late 1940's and early 1950's,
scientists began looking for examples or analogues of it. And with
rising excitement, they found similar stability-protecting systems in
every field from physiology (for example, the processes by which the
body maintains its

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM

305

temperature) to politics (as in the way an "establishment" damps out
dissent when it goes beyond an acceptable level). Negative feedback
seemed to be at work all around us, reusing things to retain their
equilibrium or stability.

By the early 1960's, however, critics like Professor M.iruyama began to
note that too much attention was being paid to stability and not enough
to change. What was needed, he argued, was more research on
"positive feedback" — processes that do not suppress change but
amplify it, do not maintain stability but challenge it, sometimes even
overwhelming it. Positive feedback, Maruyania emphasized, can lake a
small deviation or "kick" in the system and magnify it into a giant
structure-threatening shudder.

If the first kind of feedback was change-reducing or "nega-live," here
was a whole class of processes that were change-nmplifying or
"positive," and both needed equal attention. Positive feedback could
illuminate causation in many previously puzzling processes.

Because positive feedback breaks stability and feeds on it-Ncif, it helps
explain vicious circles — and virtuous ones. Imagine the thermostat
again, but with its sensor or its trigger mechanism reversed. Every time
the room got warm, the thermostat, instead of shutting off the furnace,
would click it on, forcing the temperature to hotter and hotter levels. Or
muj'ine the game of Monopoly (or, for that matter, the game of real-life
economics) in which the more money a pl.iycr has, the more property
he or she can buy, which means more rental income and therefore
more money with which to buy property. Both are examples of positive
feed-l-.irk at work.

Positive feedback helps explain any process that is self-ex-citntory —
like the arms race, for example, in which every lime the U.S.S.R. builds
a new weapon the U.S. builds a big-!'<-i one, which then motivates the
U.S.S.R. to build yet another

• •in-... to the point of global insanity.

And when we put negative and positive feedback together niul see how
richly these two different processes interplay in

• 'Miiplex organisms, from the human brain to an economy, «i. idling
insights emerge. Indeed, once we as a culture recog-

ihat any -truly complex system — whether a biological or-r ">iMII, a city,
or the international political order — is likely i" h:ive within it both change
amplifiers and change reducers, i-<--. Hive as well as negative feedback
loops interacting with OM<- another, we begin to glimpse a whole new
level of corn-

306

THE THIRD WAVE

plexity in the world with which we are dealing. Our understanding of
causation is advanced.

Yet another leap in understanding occurs when we further recognize
that these change reducers and amplifiers are not necessarily built into
biological or social systems from the beginning; they may be absent at
first, then grow into place, as it were, sometimes as a result of what
amounts to chance. A stray event can thus trigger a fantastic chain of
unexpected consequences.

This tells us why change is so often hard to track and extrapolate, so
filled with surprise. It is why a slow, steady process can suddenly
convert into an explosive change, or vice versa. And this in turn
explains why similar starting conditions may lead to sharply dissimilar
outcomes — an idea alien to the Second Wave mentality.

The Third Wave causality that is gradually taking shape pictures a
complex world of mutually interacting forces, a world filled with
astonishment, with change amplifiers as well as reducers and many
other elements as well — not just billiard balls clacking predictably and
endlessly against one another on the cosmic pool table. It is a world far
stranger than simple Second Wave mechanisms suggested.

Is everything predictable in principle, as Second Wave mechanical
causality implied? Or are things inherently, unavoidably unpredictable,
as critics of mechanism have insisted? Are we governed by chance or
necessity?

Third Wave causality has exciting new things to say about this ancient
contradiction as well. In fact, it helps us escape at last from the
either/or trap that for so long has pitted de-terminists against anti-
determinists — necessity against chance. And this may be its most
important philosophical breakthrough.

THE TERMITE LESSON

Dr. Ilya Prigogine and his teams of co-workers at the Free University of
Brussels and the University of Texas at Austin have struck directly at
Second Wave assumptions by showing how chemical and other
structures leap to higher stages of differentiation and complexity
through a combination of chance and necessity. It is for this work that
Prigogine was awarded the Nobel Prize.

Born in Moscow, brought to Belgium as a child, and fas-

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM

307

Hunted since youth by the problems of time, Prigogine was

I -I i/,/.led by a seeming contradiction. On the one hand, there uM , the
physicist's belief in entropy — that the universe is run-liiiij', down and
that all organized patterns must eventually de-* Av. On the other, there
was the biologist's recognition that hir itself is organization and that we
are continually giving i lie to higher and higher, more and more
complex organization. Entropy pointed in one direction, evolution in
another.

This led Prigogine to ask how higher forms of organization mine into
being, and to years of research hi chemistry and physics in pursuit of
the answer.

Today Prigogine points out that in any complex system,

II oin the molecules in a liquid to the neurons in a brain or i In- traffic in
a city, the parts of the system are always under-roing small-scale
change: they are in constant flux. The interior of any system is
quivering with fluctuation.

Sometimes, when negative feedback comes into play, these
fluctuations are damped out or suppressed and the equilib-nuin of the
system maintained. But, where amplifying or positive feedback is at
work, some of these fluctuations may In- tremendously magnified — to
the point at which the equilibrium of the entire system is threatened.
Fluctuations arising in the outside environment may hit at this moment
and I ml her amplify the mounting vibration — until the equilibrium «>l
the whole is destroyed and the existing structure is tmmshed.*

Whether the result of the runaway internal fluctuations or of r-Hk-rnal
forces, or both, this breakup of the old equilibrium iiiicii results not in
chaos or breakdown, but in the creation nl" ;t wholly new structure at a
higher level. This new strue-IMH- may be more differentiated, internally
interactive, and «oni pi ex than the old one, and needs more energy
and matter ( UK! perhaps information and other resources) to sustain
it-xi II. Speaking mainly about physical and chemical reactions, lint
occasionally calling attention to social analogues, Prigo-l'Mic calls
these new, more complex systems "dissipative *iiuctures."

* H is illuminating to think of the economy in these terms. Supply and

• !• in. UK! are maintained in equilibrium by various feedback
processes. Unemployment, if intensified by positive feedback and not
offset by ii. i iiivo feedback elsewhere in the system, can threaten the
stability of i tin whole. Outside fluctuations — such as oil price hikes —
may converge i" in :ike the internal swings and fluctuations wilder, until
the equi-III.IHUU of the whole system is shattered.

308

THE THIRD WAVE

He suggests that evolution itself may be seen as a process leading
toward increasingly complex and diversified biological and social
organisms, through the emergence of new, higher-order dissipative
structures. Thus, according to Prigogine, whose ideas have political
and philosophical resonance as well as purely scientific meaning, we
develop "order out of fluctuation" or, as the title of one of his lectures
expresses it, "Order out of Chaos."

This evolution, however, cannot be planned or predetermined in a
mechanistic fashion. Until quantum theory came along, many leading
Second Wave thinkers believed that chance played little or no role in
change. The starting conditions of a process predetermined its
outcome. Today in subatomic physics, for example, it is widely
believed that chance dominates change. In recent years many
scientists, like Jacques Monod in biology, Walter Buckley in sociology,
or Maruyama in epistemology and cybernetics, have begun to fuse
these opposites.

Prigogine's work not only combines chance and necessity but actually
stipulates their relationship to one another. In brief, he strongly
suggests that at the precise point at which a structure "leaps" to a new
stage of complexity, it is impossible, in practice and even in principle,
to predict which of many forms it will take.* But once a pathway has
been chosen, once the new structure comes into being, determinism
dominates once more.

In one colorful example he describes how termites create their highly
structured nests out of apparently unstructured activity. They begin by
crawling about a surface in random fashion, stopping here and there to
deposit a bit of "goo.** These deposits are distributed by chance, but
the substance contains a chemical attractant so that other termites are
drawn to it.

In this way, the goo begins to collect in a few places, gradually building
up into a pillar or wall. If these buildups are isolated, work stops. But if
by chance they are near one another, an arch results that then
becomes the basis for the complex architecture of the nest. What
begins with random activity turns into highly elaborate nonrandom
structures. We see, as Prigogine puts it, "the spontaneous formation of
coherent structures." Order out of chaos.

* This presumably goes for the leap from Second Wave to Third Wave
civilization as well as for chemical reactions.

THE MENTAL MAELSTROM

309

All this strikes hard at the old causality. Prigogine sums it up: "The laws
of strict causality appear to us today as limit-ing situations, applicable
to highly idealized cases, nearly as caricatures of the description of
change . . . The science of complexity... leads to a completely different
view."

Instead of being locked into a closed universe that func-tioned like a
mechanical clock, we find ourselves in a far more flexible system in
which, as he says, "there is always the possibility of some instability
leading to some new mecha-nism. We really have an- 'open universe.'

As we move beyond Second Wave causal thinking, as we begin to
think in terms of mutual influence, of amplifiers and reducers of system
breaks and sudden revolutionary leaps, of dissipative structures and
the fusion of chance and neces-sitty -in short, as we take off our
Second Wave blinders — we merge blinking into a wholly new culture,
the culture of the Third Wave.

This new culture — oriented to change and growing diver-sity — attempts
to integrate the new view of nature, of evolution and progress, the new,
richer conceptions of time and space, and the fusion of reductionism
and wholism, with a new causality.

Indust-reality, which once seemed so powerful and com-plete, so all-
encompassing an explanation of how the universe and its components
fitted together, turns out now to have herein immensely useful. But its
claims to universality are shattered. The super-ideology of the Second
Wave will be seen, from the vantage point of tomorrow, to have been
as provincial as it was self-serving.

The decay of the Second Wave thought system leaves millions of
people grasping desperately for something to hold on to- anything,
from Texas Taoism to Swedish Sufism, from Philippine faith healing to
Welsh witchcraft. Instead of consuming a new culture appropriate to
the new world, they at -temp to import and implant old ideas
appropriate to other times and places or to revive the fanatic faiths of
their own ancestors who lived under radically different conditions.

It is precisely the collapse of the industrial era mind-struc-

ture, its growing irrelevance in the face of the new technolog-
ical, social, and political realities, that gives rise to today's
search for old answers, and to the continual stream of
pseudo-intellectual fads that pop up, flash, and consume
themselves at high speed.

310 THE THIRD WAVE

In the very midst of this spiritual supermarket, with its depressing
razzmatazz and religious fakery, a positive new culture is being
seeded — one appropriate to our time and place. Powerful new
integrative insights are beginning to emerge, new metaphors for
understanding reality. It is possible to glimpse the earliest beginnings
of a new coherence and elegance as the cultural debris of industrialism
is swept away by history's Third Wave of change.

The super-ideology of Second Wave civilization that is now crumbling
was reflected in the way industrialism organized the world. An image of
nature based on discrete particles was mirrored in the idea of discrete,
sovereign nation-states. Today, as our image of nature and matter
change, the nation-state itself is being transformed — another step on
the path toward a Third Wave civilization.

THE CRACK-UP OF THE

NATION

At a time when the flames of nationalism burn fiercely n round the
world — when national liberation movements proliferate in places like
Ethiopia and the Philippines, when tiny islands like Dominica in the
Caribbean or Fiji in the South Pacific declare then* nationhood and
send delegates to the United Nations — a strange thing is happening in
the high-technology world: instead of new nations arising, old ones are
in danger of coming apart.

As the Third Wave thunders across the earth, the nation-utate — the
key political unit of the Second Wave era — is IK-ing squeezed by
viselike pressures from above and below.

One set of forces seeks to transfer political power downward from the
nation-state to subnational regions and groups. The others seek to
shift power upward from the nation to tiansnational agencies and
organizations. Together they are leading toward a crack-up of the high-
technology nations into Ninaller and less powerful units, as a look
around the world quickly reveals.

ABKHAZIANS AND TEXICANS

ft is August 1977. Three hooded men sit at a makeshift inMo, a lantern
at one end, a guttering candle at the oilu-i, a llnr draped across its
middle. On the flag: an angry man'* liH-c with a swirling headband, and

the letters FLNC. Pen IMP Hiiough their eye-slits, the men tell their
story to a huddle <>l n« w .men who have been brought blindfolded to
the u-n«i.-/.

311

312

THE THIRD WAVE

vous. The hooded ones announce that they are responsible for the
bombing of the Serra-di-Pigno television repeater station — the only
Corsican source of French telecasts. They want Corsica to secede
from France.

Seething because Paris traditionally looked down its nose at them and
because the French government had done little to develop then* island
economy, Corsicans were angered anew when units of the French
Foreign Legion were shipped to bases hi Corsica after the Algerian
war. The locals were further outraged when the government gave the
pieds noirs — ex-colonials from Algeria — subsidies and special rights to
settle in Corsica. Settlers arrived hi hordes and promptly bought up
many of the island's vineyards (the main industry, apart from tourism),
leaving the Corsicans to feel even more like strangers on their own
island. Today France has a small-scale Northern Ireland brewing on its
Mediterranean island.

At the opposite end of the country, too, long-simmering separatist
sentiments have flared up hi recent years. In Brittany, with high
unemployment and some of the lowest wage scales hi France, the
separatist movement has widespread popular support. It is split into
rival parties and has a terrorist arm whose members have been
arrested for bombing public buildings including the palace at Versailles.
Meanwhile Paris is beset with demands for cultural and regional
autonomy in Alsace and Lorraine, parts of the Languedoc, and other
sections of the country.

Across the Channel, Britain confronts comparable, though less violent,
pressures from the Scots. In the early 1970's, talk about Scottish
nationalism was regarded as a joke in London. Today, with North Sea
oil providing the potential for Scotland's independent economic
development, the issue is not funny at all. While a move to create a
separate Scottish assembly was defeated in 1979, pressures for
autonomy run deep. Long irked by government policies that favored
the economic development of the South, Scottish nationalists now
charge that then- own economy is poised for a takeoff, and that the
sluggish British economy is dragging them down.

They demand more control over their oil. They also seek to supplant
their depressed steel and shipbuilding industries with new ones based
on electronics and other advanced industries. Indeed, while Britain is"
torn with controversy over whether to go ahead with plans for a state-
backed semiconductor industry, Scotland is already, after California
and

THE CRACK-UP OF THE NATION

Massachusetts, the third largest assembler of integrated cir cuits in the
world.

Elsewhere hi Britain separatist pressures are evident in Wales, and
tiny autonomist movements are even surfacing in Cornwall and
Wessex, where local regionalists demand home rule, their own
legislative assembly, and a transition out of backward industry into high
technology.

From Belgium (where tension among the Walloons, ihe Flemish and
the Bruxelloises is rising) to Switzerland (where a split-away group
recently won a fight for their own canton in the Jura) to West Germany
(where Sudeten Germans are demanding the right to return to their
original homeland in nearby Czechoslovakia) to the South Tyrolese in
Italy, the Slovenes in Austria, the Basques and Catalans in Spain, the
Croatians in Yugoslavia, and dozens of lesser known groups, all of
Europe is feeling a relentless buildup of centrifugal pressures.

On the other side of the Atlantic, Canada's internal crisis over Quebec
is not yet over. The election of the Quebecois separatist premier, Rene
Levesque, the flight of capital and business from Montreal, the
heightened bitterness between French-speaking and English-speaking
Canadians have created the real possibility of national disintegration.
Former Prime Minister Pierre Trudeau, fighting to preserve national
unity, warned that "if certain centrifugal tendencies fulfill them-selves,
we will have permitted this country either to break up or to become so
divided that its existence and its ability to act as one nation will have
been destroyed." Quebec, moreover, is not the only source of divisive
pressures. Perhaps equally important, though less well known abroad,
is the swelling chorus of separatist or autonomist voices in oil-rich
Alberta. Across the Pacific, nations like Australia and New Zealand
display similar tendencies. In Perth a mining magnate named Hancock
has charged that mineral-rich Western Aus-tralia is compelled to pay
artificially high prices for eastern Australia's manufactured wares.
Among other things, Western Australia claims that it is politically
underrepresented in Can berra; that, in a country of vast distances,
airfares are rigged against her; and that national policies discourage
foreign in vestment in the West. The gold-lettered sign outside Lang
Hancock's office reads "Western Australia Secession Move ment."

Meanwhile New Zealand has its own troubles with break-aways. The
South Island's hydroelectric power provides much

316

sprouted in Texas, Oklahoma, and Louisiana during the heating-oil
shortages of the mid-1970's and declared: "Let the Bastards Freeze in
the Dark." The thinly veiled implication of secession could also be
found in the wording of an ad placed in The New York Times by the
state of Louisiana. It urged the reader to "Consider an America without
Louisiana."

Midwesterners today are being advised to stop "chasing smoke-
stacks," to move to more advanced industry, and to start thinking like
regionalists, while Northeastern governors are organizing themselves

to defend that region's interests. The public mood was hinted at in a
full-page ad placed by a Coalition to Save New York. The ad charged
that "New York Is Being Raped" by federal policies and that "New
Yorkers can fight back."

What does all this belligerent talk around the world, not to mention the
protests and violence, add up to? The answer is unmistakable:
potentially explosive internal stresses within the nations spawned by
the industrial revolution.

Some of these stresses obviously arise from the energy crisis and the
need to shift from a Second Wave to a Third Wave energy base.

Others can be traced to conflicts over the transition from a Second
Wave to a Third Wave industrial base. In many places we are also
witnessing, as suggested in Chapter Nineteen, the growth of
subnational or regional economies that are as large, complex, and
internally differentiated as national economies were a generation ago.
These form the economic launching pad for separatist movements or
drives for autonomy.

But whether taking the form of open secessionism, of regionalism,
bilingualism, home-rulism, or decentralism, these centrifugal forces
also gain support because national governments are unable to
respond flexibly to the rapid de-massifi -cation of society.

As the mass society of the industrial era disintegrates under the impact
of the Third Wave, regional, local, ethnic, social, and religious groups
grow less uniform. Conditions and needs diverge. Individuals, too,
discover or reassert their differences.

Corporations typically meet this problem by introducing more variety
into their product lines and by a policy of aggressive "market
segmentation."

National governments, by contrast, find it difficult to custo-

THE CRACK-UP OF THE NATION

317

mize their policies. Locked into Second Wave political and bureaucratic
structures, they find it impossible to treat each region or city, each
contending racial, religious, social, sexual, or ethnic group differently,
let alone to treat each citizen as an individual. As conditions diversify,
national decision-makers remain ignorant of fast-changing local
requirements. If they try to identify these highly localized or specialized
needs, they wind up deluged with overdetailed, indigestible data.

Pierre Trudeau, caught in the struggle against Canadian se-
cessionism, put it clearly as early as 1967 when he argued: "You can't
have an operative, operating system of federal government if one part
of it, province or state, is in a very important special status, if it has a
different set of relationships toward the central government than the
other provinces."

In consequence, national governments in Washington, London, Paris,
or Moscow continue, by and large, to impose uniform, standardized
policies designed for a mass society on increasingly divergent and
segmented publics. Local and individual needs are forgotten or
ignored, causing the flames of resentment to reach white heat As de-
massification progresses, we can expect separatist or centrifugal
forces to intensify dramatically and threaten the unity of many nation-
states.

The Third Wave places enormous pressures on the nation-state from
below.

FROM THE TOP DOWN

At the same time, we see equally powerful fingers clawing at the
nation-state from above. The Third Wave brings new problems, a new
structure of communications, and new actors on the world stage — all of
which drastically shrink the power of the individual nation-state.

Just as many problems are too small or localized for national
governments to handle effectively, new ones are fast arising that are
too large for any nation to cope with alone. "The nation state, which
regards itself as absolutely sovereign, is obviously too small to play a
real role at the global level," writes the French political thinker, Denis
de Rouge-n icnt. "No one of our 28 European states can any longer by
iisclf assure its military defense and its prosperity, its technological
resources, ... the prevention of nuclear wars and of

318

THE THIRD WAVE

ecological catastrophes." Nor can the United States, the Soviet Union,
or Japan.

Tightened economic linkages between nations make it virtually
impossible for any individual national government today to manage its
own economy independently or to quarantine inflation. The ever-
swelling bubble of Euromoney, for example, as suggested earlier, is
beyond the power of any individual nation to regulate. National
politicians who claim their domestic policies can "halt inflation" or "wipe
out unemployment" are either naive or lying, since most economic
infections are now communicable across national boundaries. The
economic shell of the nation-state is now increasingly permeable.

Furthermore, national borders that can no longer contain economic
flows are even less defensible against environmental forces. If Swiss
chemical plants dump wastes into the Rhine, the pollution flows
through Germany, through Holland, and ultimately into the North Sea.
Neither Holland nor Germany can, by itself, guarantee the quality of its
own waterways. Oil tanker spills, air pollution, inadvertent weather
modification, the destruction of forests, and other activities often
involve side effects that sweep across national borders. Frontiers are
now porous.

The new global communications system further opens each nation to
penetration from the outside. Canadians have long resented the fact
that some 70 U.S. television stations along the border telecast,
programs to Canadian audiences. But this Second Wave form of
cultural penetration is minor compared with that made possible by
Third Wave communications systems based on satellites, computers,
teleprinters, interactive cable systems, and dirt cheap ground stations.

"One way to 'attack' a nation," writes United States Senator George S.
McGovern, "is to restrain the flow of information — cutting off contact
between the headquarters and overseas branches of a multinational
firm . . . building information walls around a nation. ... A new phrase is
entering the international lexicon — 'infonnation sovereignty.'"

Yet it is questionable how effectively national borders can be sealed
off — or for how long. For the shift toward a Third Wave industrial base
requires the development of a highly ramified, sensitive, wide open
"neural network" or information system, and attempts by individual
nations to dam up data flows may interfere with, rather than accelerate,
their own economic development. Moreover, each technological

THE CRACK-UP OF THE NATION 319

breakthrough provides yet another way to penetrate the nation's outer
shell.

All such developments — the new economic problems, the new
environmental problems, and the new communications technologies —
are, converging to undermine the position of the nation-state in the
global scheme of things. What's more, they come together at precisely
the moment when potent new actors appear on the world scene to
challenge national power.

The best-publicized and most powerful of these new forces is the
transnational or, more commonly, the multinational corporation.

What we have seen in the past 25 years is an extraordinary
globalization of production, based not merely on the export of raw
materials or finished manufactured goods from one country to another,
but on the organization of production across national lines.

The transnational corporation (or TNC) may do research in one
country, manufacture components in another, assemble them in a
third, sell the manufactured goods in a fourth, deposit its surplus funds
in a fifth, and so on. It may have op-crating affiliates in dozens of
countries. The size, importance, and political power of this new player
in the global game has skyrocketed since the mid-1950's. Today at
least 10,000 companies based in the non-communist high-technology
nations have affiliates outside their own countries. Over 2,000 have
alliMates in six or more host countries.

Of 382 major industrial firms with sales over $1 billion, fully 242 had 25
percent or more "foreign content" measured in terms of sales, assets,
exports, earnings, or employment. And while economists disagree
wildly on how to define and evaluate (and therefore classify and count)

these corpora-lions, it is clear that they represent a crucial new factor
in the world system — and a challenge to the nation-state.

To glimpse their scale, it helps to know that on a given day In 1 971
they held $268 billion hi short-term liquid assets. Tliis, according to the
International Trade Subcommittee of I ho United States Senate, was
"more than twice the total of nil international monetary institutions in
the world on the »»mo date." The total annual U.N. budget, by
comparison, i« i > resented less than 1/268 or 0.0037 of that amount.

320

THE THIRD WAVE

By the early 1 970's, General Motors' annual s ales revenue was larger
than the Gross National Product of Belgium or Switzerland. Such
comparisons led economist Lester Brown, president of the Worldwatch
Institute, to note A hat "It was once said that the sun never set on the
British Ennpire. Today the sun does set on the British Empire, but not
on the scores of global corporate empires including those of IB31,
Unilever, Volkswagen and Hitachi."

Exxon alone has a tanker fleet 50 percent larger than that of the Soviet
Union. The East-West specialist Josef Wilczynski, an economist at the
Royal Military College of Australia, once whimsically pointed out that in
1973 "The proceeds from the sales" of only ten of these transnational
corporations would have been "enough to give the 58,000,000
members of the Communist Parties in all the 14 Socialist countries a
six-month holiday at the American standard of

living."

While typically thought of as a capitalist invention, the fact is that some
50 "socialist transnationals" operate through the COMECON countries,
laying pipelines, making chemicals and ball bearings, extracting potash
and asbestos, and running ship lines. Moreover, socialist banks and
financial institutions — ranging from the Moscow Narodny Bank to the
Black Sea and Baltic General Insurance Company — do business in
Zurich, Vienna, London, Frankfurt, or Paris. Some Marxist theorists
now regard the "internationalization of production" as necessary and
"progressive." In addition, of the 500 Western-based, privately owned
TNCs whose sales in 1973 exceeded $500 million, fully 140 had
"significant commercial dealings" with one or more of the COMECON

countries.

Nor are the TNCs only based in the rich nations. The 25 countries in
the Lathi American Economic System recently moved to create
transnationals of their own in the fields of agri-business, low-cost
housing, and capital goods. Philippine-based companies are
developing deepwater ports in the Persian Gulf, and Indian
transnationals are building electronics plants hi Yugoslavia, steel mills
in Libya, and a machine tool industry in Algeria. The rise of the TNC
alters the position of the nation-state on the planet.

Marxists tend to see national governments as handmaidens of
corporate power, and therefore stress the commonality of interests
between the two, yet the TNCs very often have then*

THE CRACK-UP OF THE NATION 321

own interests that run counter to those of their "home" nations, and
vice versa.

"British" TNCs have violated British embargos. "American" TNCs have
violated U.S. regulations concerning the Arab boycott of Jewish firms.
During the OPEC embargo the transnational oil companies rationed
deliveries between countries according to their own, not national,
priorities. National loyalties fade quickly when opportunities present
themselves elsewhere, so that TNCs transfer jobs from country to
country, escape environmental rules, and play off host countries
against one another.

"For the past few centuries," Lester Brown has written, "the world has
been neatly divided into a set of independent, sovereign nation-states.

. . . With the emergence of literally hundreds of multinational or global
corporations, this organization of the world into mutually exclusive
political entities is now being overlaid by a network of economic
institutions."

In this matrix, the power that once belonged exclusively to the nation-
state when it was the only major force operating on the world scene is,
at least in relative terms, sharply reduced.

Indeed, transnationals have already grown so large that they have
taken on some of the features of the nation-state itself— including then*
own corps of quasi-diplomats and their own highly effective intelligence
agencies.

"The multinationals' intelligence needs ... are not much different from
those of the United States, France or any other country. . . . Indeed,
any discussion of the intelligence battles among the CIA, KGB, and
their satellite agencies will be incomplete if it doesn't describe the
increasingly important roles played by the apparats of Exxon, Chase
Manhattan, Mitsubishi, Lockheed, Phillips and others," writes Jim
Hougan in Spooks, an analysis of the private intelligence agencies.

Sometimes cooperating with their "home" nation, sometimes exploiting
it, sometimes executing its policies, sometimes using it to execute their
own, the TNCs are neither all good nor all bad. But with their ability to
shunt billions back and forth instantly across national boundaries, their
power to deploy technology and to move relatively quickly, they have
often outflanked and outrun national governments.

"It is not just, or even mainly, a question of whether international
companies can circumvent particular regional laws and regulations,"
writes Hugh Stephenson in a study of the

322

THE THIRD WAVE

impact of TNCs on the nation-state. "It is that our whole framework of
thought and reaction is found in the . . . concept of the sovereign nation
state [while] international corporations are rendering this notion
invalid."

In terms of the global power system, the rise of the great transnationals
has reduced, rather than strengthened, the role of the nation-state at
precisely the time when centrifugal pressures from below threaten to
part it at the seams.

THE EMERGING "T-NET"

Though they are the best known, the transnational corporations are not
the only forces on the global stage. We are witnessing, for example,
the rise of transnational trade union groupings — the mirror image, as it
were, of the corporations. We are also seeing a growth of religious,
cultural, and ethnic movements that flow across national lines and link
up with one another. We observe an antinuclear movement whose
demonstrations in Europe draw protesters together from several
countries at a time. We also are witnessing the emergence of
transnational political party groupings. Thus Christian Democrats and
Socialists alike speak of forming themselves into "Europarties" that
transcend individual national boundaries — a move accelerated by the
creation of the European Parliament.

Paralleling these developments, meanwhile, is a rapid proliferation of
nongovernmental transnational associations. Such groups devote
themselves to everything from education to ocean exploration, sports
to science, horticulture to disaster relief. They range from the Oceania
Football Confederation to the International Red Cross, the International
Federation of Small and Medium-Sized Commercial Enterprises, and
the International Federation of Women Lawyers. In aggregate, such
"umbrella" organizations or federations represent millions of members
and tens of thousands of branches in many countries. They reflect
every conceivable shade of political interest or lack of interest

In 1963 some 1,300 such organizations operated across national lines.
By the mid-1970's the number had doubled to 2,-600. The total is
expected to zoom to 3,500 — 4,500 by 1985 — with a new one springing
up approximately every three days.

If the United Nations is the "world organization," these

THE CRACK-UP OF THE NATION

323

less visible groups form, in effect, a "second world organization." Their
aggregate budgets in 1975 amounted to a mere $1.5 billion — but this is
only a tiny fraction of the resources controlled by their subordinate
units. They have their own "trade association" — the Brussels-based
Union of International Associations. They relate to one another
vertically, with local, regional, national, and other groupings coming
together under the transnational organization. They also relate

horizontally through a dense mesh of consortia, working groups ;
interorganizational committees, and task forces.

So dense are these transnational ties that, according to a study by the
Union of International Associations, there were an estimated 52,075
identifiable, interlocking relationships and cross-linkages among 1,857
such groups in 1977. And this number is soaring upward, too. Literally
thousands of transnational meetings, conferences, and symposia bring
the members of these different groupings into contact with one
another.

Though still relatively underdeveloped, this fast-growing transnational
network (or T-Net) adds yet another dimension to the emerging Third
Wave world system. Even this does not complete the picture, however.

The nation-state's role is still further diminished as nations themselves
are forced to create supranational agencies. Nation-states fight to
retain as much sovereignty and freedom of action as they can. But
they are being driven, step by step, to accept new constraints on their
independence.

European countries, for example, grudgingly but inevitably have been
driven to create a Common Market, a European parliament, a
European monetary system, and specialized agencies like CERN — the
European Organization for Nuclear Research. Richard Burke, the
Common Market's tax commissioner, brings pressure to bear on
member nations to alter their domestic tax policies. Agricultural and
industrial policies once determined in London or Paris are hammered
out in Brussels. Members of the European Parliament actually ram
through an $840-million increase in the EEC budget over the
objections of their national governments.

The Common Market is perhaps the prime example of the gravitation
of power to a supranational agency. But it is not the only example. We
are, in fact, seeing a population explosion of such inter-governmental
organizations (or IGOs) — groupings or consortia of three or more
nations. They range from the World Meteorological Organization and

324

the International Atomic Energy Agency to the International Coffee
Organization or the Latin American Free Trade Association, not to
mention OPEC. Today such agencies are needed to coordinate global
transport, communications, patents, and work in dozens of other fields
from rice to rubber. And the number of such IGOs has also doubled,
shooting up from 139 in 1960 to 262 in 1977.

Through these IGOs, the nation-state seeks to cope with larger than
national problems, while retaining maximum de-cisional control at the
national level. Bit by bit, however, a steady gravitational shift occurs as
more decisions are transferred to — or constrained by — these larger
than national organizational entities.

From the rise of the transnational corporation to the population
explosion of transnational associations to the creation of all these
IGOs, we see a set of developments all moving in the same direction.

Nations are less and less able to take independent action — they are
losing much of their sovereignty.

What we are creating is a new multilayered global game in which not
merely nations but corporations and trade unions, political, ethnic, and
cultural groupings, transnational associations and supranational
agencies are all players. The nation-state, already threatened by
pressures from below, finds its freedom of action constrained, its
power displaced or diminished, as a radically new global system takes
form.

PLANETARY CONSCIOUSNESS

The shrinkage of the nation-state reflects the appearance of a new-
style global economy that has emerged since the Third Wave began its
surge. Nation-states were the necessary political containers for nation-
sized economies. Today the containers have not only sprung leaks,
they have been made obsolete by their own success. First, there is the
growth within them of regional economies that have attained a scale
once associated with national economies. Second, the world economy
to which they gave rise has exploded in size and is taking on strange
new forms.

Thus the new global economy is dominated by the great transnational
corporations. It is serviced by a ramified banking and financial industry
that operates at electronic speeds. It breeds money and credit no
nation can regulate. It moves toward transnational currencies — not a
single "world

THE CRACK-UP OF THE NATION
325

money” but a variety of currencies or "meta-currencies," each based
on a "market basket" of national currencies or commodities. It is torn
by a world-scale conflict between resource suppliers and users. It is
riddled with shaky debt on a hitherto unimaginable scale. It is a mixed
economy, with private capitalist and state-socialist enterprises forming
joint ventures and working side by side. And its ideology is not laissez
faire or Marxism, but globalism — the idea that nationalism is obsolete.

Just as the Second Wave created a slice of the population that had
larger than local interests and became the base for nationalist
ideologies, so the Third Wave gives rise to groups with larger than
national interests. These form the base of the emerging globalist
ideology sometimes called "planetary consciousness."

This consciousness is shared by multinational executives, long-haired
environmental campaigners, financiers, revolutionaries, intellectuals,
poets, and painters, not to mention members of the Trilateral
Commission. I have even had a famous U.S. four-star general assure
me that "the nation-state is dead." Globalism presents itself as more
than an ideology serving the interests of a limited group. Precisely as
nationalism claimed to speak for the whole nation, globalism claims to
speak for the whole world. And its appearance is seen as an

evolutionary necessity — a step closer to a "cosmic consciousness" that
would embrace the heavens as well.

In sum, therefore, at every level, from economics and politics to
organization and ideology, we are witnessing a devastating attack,
from within and without, on that pillar of Second Wave civilization: the
nation-state.

At the exact historical moment when many poor countries are
desperately fighting to establish a national identity because nationhood
hi the past was necessary for successful industrialization, the rich
countries, racing beyond industrialism, are diminishing, displacing, or
derogating the role of the nation.

We can expect the next decades to be torn by struggle over the
creation of new global institutions capable of fairly representing the
prenational as well as the postnational peoples of the world.

326 THE THIRD WAVE

MYTHS AND INVENTIONS

No one today, from the experts in the White House or the Kremlin to
the proverbial man in the street, can be sure how the new world
system will shake out — what new kinds of institutions will arise to
provide regional or global order. But it is possible to dispel several
popular myths.

The first of these is the myth propagated by such films as Rollerball
and Network, in which a steely-eyed villain announces that the world
is, or will be, divided up and run by a group of transnational
corporations. In its most common form this myth pictures a single
worldwide Energy Corporation, a single Food Corporation, a single
Housing Corporation, a single Recreation Corporation, and so forth. In
a variant, each of these is seen as a department of an even larger
mega-corporation.

This simplistic image is based on straight-line extrapolations from
Second Wave trends: specialization, maximization, and centralization.

Not only does this view fail to take into account the fantastic diversity of
of real life conditions, the A clash of cultures, religions, and traditions in
the world, the speed of change, and the historic thrust now carrying the
high-technology nations toward de-massification; not only does it
naively presuppose that such needs as energy, housing, or food can
be neatly compartmentalized; it ignores the fundamental changes now
revolutionizing the structure and purpose of the corporation itself. It is
based, in short, on an obsolete, Second Wave image of what a
corporation is and how it is structured.

The other, closely related fantasy pictures a planet run by a single,
centralized World Government. This is usually imagined as an
extension of some existing institution or government — a "United States
of the World," a "Planetary Proletarian State," or simply the United
Nations writ large. Again the thinking is based on simplistic extensions
of Second Wave principles.

What appears to be emerging is neither a corporation-dominated future
nor a global government but a far more complex system similar to the
matrix organizations we saw springing up hi certain advanced
industries. Rather than one or a few pyramidal global bureaucracies,
we are weaving nets or matrices that mesh different kinds of
organizations with common interests.

We may, for example, see the emergence over the next dec-

THE CRACK-UP OF THE NATION 327

ade of an Oceans Matrix, composed not solely of nation-states but of
regions, cities, corporations, environmental organizations, scientific
groups, and others with an interest in the sea. As changes occur new
groupings would emerge and plug into the matrix, while others would
drop out. Similar organizational structures may well emerge — are, in
some sense, already emerging — to deal with other issues: a Space
Matrix, a Food Matrix, a Transport Matrix, an Energy Matrix, and the
like, all flowing into and out of one another, overlapping and forming a
messily open, rather than a neatly closed, system.

In short, we are moving toward a world system composed of units
densely interrelated like the neurons in a brain rather than organized
like the departments of a bureaucracy.

As this happens, we can expect a tremendous struggle to break out
within the United Nations over whether that organization shall remain a
"trade association of nation-states" or whether other types of units —
regions, perhaps religions, even corporations or ethnic groups — should
be represented in

it.

As nations are torn apart and restructured, as JTNCs and other new
factors move onto the global scene, as instabilities and the threats of
war erupt, we shall be called upon to invent wholly new political forms
or "containers" to bring a semblance of order to the world — a world in
which the nation-state has become, for many purposes, a dangerous
anachronism.

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES

"Convulsive shudders" . . . "unexpected uprising'* . . . "wild swings" ...
The headline writers search frantically for terms to describe what they
perceive as mounting world disorder. The Islamic uprising hi Iran stuns
them. The sudden reversal of Maoist policies in China, the collapse of
the dollar, the new militancy of the poor countries, outbreaks of
rebellion in El Salvador or Afghanistan are all seen as startling,
random, unconnected events. The world, we are told, is careening
toward chaos.

Yet much that appears anarchic is not. The eruption of a new
civilization on the earth could not but shatter old relationships,
overthrow regimes, and send the financial system spiraling. What

seems like chaos is actually a massive realignment of power to
accommodate the new civilization.

We will look back on today as the twilight of Second Wave civilization,
and be saddened by what we see. For as it came to a close, industrial
civilization left behind a world hi which one quarter of the species lived
in relative affluence, three quarters in relative poverty — and

800.000. 000 hi what the World Bank terms "absolute" poverty. Fully

700.000. 000 people were underfed and 550,000,000 illiterate. An
estimated 1,200,000,000 human beings remained without access to
public health facilities or even safe, drinkable water, as the industrial
age ended.

It left behind a world hi which some 20 to 30 industrialized nations
depended on the hidden subsidies of cheap energy and cheap raw
materials for much of then* economic success. It left a global
infrastructure — the International 328

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES 329

Monetary Fund, GATT, the World Bank, and COMECON — which
regulated trade and finance for the benefit of the Second Wave
powers. It left many of the poor countries with one-crop economies
twisted to serve the needs of the rich.

The rapid emergence of the Third Wave not only foreshadows the end
of the Second Wave imperium, it also explodes all our conventional
ideas about ending poverty on the planet.

THE SECOND WAVE STRATEGY

Ever since the late 1940's a single dominant strategy has governed
most efforts to reduce the gap between the world's rich and poor. I call
this the Second Wave strategy.

This approach starts with the premise that Second Wave societies are
the apex of evolutionary progress and that, to solve their problems, all
societies must replay the industrial revolution essentially as it
happened in the West, the Soviet Union, or Japan. Progress consists
of moving millions of people out of agriculture into mass production. It
requires urbanization, standardization, and all the rest of the Second
Wave package. Development, in brief, involves the faithful imitation of
an already successful model.

Scores of governments in country after country have, in fact, tried to
carry out this game plan. A few, like South Korea or Taiwan, where
special conditions prevail, appear to be succeeding in establishing a
Second Wave society. But most such efforts have met with disaster.

These failures in one impoverished country after another have been
blamed on a mind-bending multiplicity of reasons. Neo-colonialism.
Bad planning. Corruption. Backward religions. Tribalism. Transnational
corporations. The CIA. Going too slowly. Going too fast. Yet, whatever
the reasons, the grim fact remains that industrialization according to
the Second Wave model has flopped far more frequently than it has
succeeded.

Iran offers only the most dramatic case in point.

As late as 1975 a tyrannical Shah boasted he would make Iran into the
most advanced industrial state in the Middle East by pursuing the
Second Wave strategy. "The Shah's builders," reported Newsweek,
"toiled over a glorious array of mills, dams, railroads, highways and all
the other trimmings

330

THE THIRD WAVE

of a full-fledged industrial revolution." In June 1978 international
bankers were still scrambling to lend billions at hair-thin interest rates
to the Persian Gulf Shipbuilding Corporation, to the Mazadern Textile
Company, to Tavanir, the state-owned power utility, to the steel
complex at Isfahan and the Iran Aluminium Company, among others.

While this buildup was supposedly turning Iran into a "modern" nation,
however, corruption ruled Teheran. Conspicuous consumption
aggravated the contrast between rich and poor. Foreign interests —
mainly, but not exclusively, American — had a field day. (A German
manager in Teheran was paid a third more than he could have earned
at home, but his employees worked for one tenth a German worker's
pay-packet.) The urban middle class existed as a tiny island within a
sea of misery. Apart from oil, fully two thirds of all the goods produced
for the market were consumed in Teheran by one tenth the country's
population. In the countryside, where income was barely a fifth of that
in the city, the rural masses continued to live under revolting and
repressive conditions.

Nurtured by the West, attempting to apply the Second Wave strategy,
the millionaires, generals, and hired technocrats who ran the Teheran
government conceived of development as a basically economic
process. Religion, culture, family life, sexual roles — all these would
take care of themselves if only the dollar signs were got right. Cultural
authenticity meant little because, steeped in indust-reality, they saw
the world as increasingly standardized rather than moving toward
diversity. Resistance to Western ideas was simply dismissed as
"backward” by a cabinet 90 percent of whose members had been
educated at Harvard, Berkeley, or European universities.

Despite certain unique circumstances — like the combustive mixture of
oil and Islam — much of what happened in Iran was common to other
countries pursuing the Second Wave strategy. With some variation,
much the same might be said of dozens of other poverty-stricken
societies from Asia and Africa to Latin America.

The collapse of the Shah's regime in Teheran has sparked a
widespread debate in other capitals from Manila to Mexico City. One
frequently asked question has to do with the pace of change. Was the
pace too accelerated? Did the Iranians suffer from future shock? Even
with oil revenues, can governments create a large enough middle class
rapidly enough to

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES

331

nvoid revolutionary upheaval? But the Iranian tragedy and iln-
substitution of an equally repressive theocracy for the Shah's regime
compel us to question the very root premises of the Second Wave
strategy.

Is classical industrialization the only path to progress? And does it
make any sense to imitate the industrial model at a time when
industrial civilization itself is caught in its terminal agonies?

THE BROKEN SUCCESS MODEL

So long as the Second Wave nations remained "successful" — stable,
rich, and getting richer — it was easy to look upon them as a model for
the rest of the world. By the late 1960's, however, the general crisis of
industrialism had exploded.

Strikes, blackouts, breakdowns, crime, and psychological distress
spread throughout the Second Wave world. Magazines did cover
pieces on "why nothing works any more." Energy and family systems
shook. Value systems and urban structures crumbled. Pollution,
corruption, inflation, alienation, loneliness, racism, bureaucratism,
divorce, mindless consumerism, all came under savage attack.
Economists warned of the possibility of a total collapse of the financial
system.

A global environmental movement, meanwhile, warned that pollution,
energy, and resource limits might soon make it impossible for even the
existing Second Wave nations to continue normal operations. Beyond
this, it was pointed out, even if the Second Wave strategy did,
miraculously, work in the poor nations, it would turn the entire planet
into a single giant factory and wreak ecological havoc.

Gloom descended on the richest nations as the general crisis of
industrialism deepened. And suddenly millions around the world asked
themselves not merely if the Second Wave strategy could work but
why anyone would want to emulate a civilization that was itself in the
throes of such violent disintegration.

Another startling development also underminded the belief that the
Second Wave strategy was the only path from rags to riches. Always
implicit in this strategy was the assumption that "first you 'develop,'
then you grow rich" — that affluence

332

THE THIRD WAVE

was the result of hard work, thrift, the Protestant Ethic, and a long
process of economic and social transformation.

However, the OPEC embargo and the sudden flood of pet-ro-dollars
into the Middle East stood this Calvinist notion on its pointed head.

Within mere months unexpected billions spewed, splashed, and
spumed into Iran, Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, Libya, and other Arab
countries, and the world saw seemingly limitless wealth preceding,
rather than following, transformation. In the Middle East, it was the
money that produced the drive to "develop," rather than "development"
that produced the money. Nothing like that, on so vast a scale, had
ever happened before.

Meanwhile, competition among the rich nations themselves was
heating up. "With South Korean steel being used at California
construction sites, television sets from Taiwan being marketed in
Europe, tractors from India being sold hi the Middle East and . . . China
emerging dramatically as a major potential industrial force, concern is
mounting over how far developing economies will undercut established
industries in the advanced nations of Japan, the United States and
Europe," wrote a Tokyo correspondent for The New York Times.

Striking French steelworkers, as one might expect, put it more
colorfully. They called for an end to "the massacre of industry" and
protesters occupied the Eiffel Tower. In one after another of the older
industrial nations, Second Wave industries and their political allies
attacked the "export of jobs" and policies that spread industrialization
to the poorer countries.

In short, doubts mushroomed on all sides as to whether the much-
trumpeted Second Wave strategy could — or even should work.

THE FIRST WAVE STRATEGY

Faced by the failures of the Second Wave strategy, rocked by angry
demands by the poor countries for a total overhaul of the global
economy, and deeply worried about their own future — the rich nations
hi the 1970's began to hammer out a new strategy for the poor.

Almost overnight many governments and "development agencies,"
including the World Bank, the Agency for Interna-

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES

333

tional Development, and the Overseas Development Council, switched
to what can only be called a First Wave strategy.

This formula is almost a carbon copy reverse of the Second Wave
strategy: Instead of squeezing the peasants and forcing them into the
overburdened cities, it calls for a new emphasis on rural development.
Instead of concentrating on cash crops for export, it urges food self-
sufficiency. Instead of striving blindly for higher GNP in the hopes that
benefits will trickle down to the poor, it calls for resources to be
channeled directly into "basic human needs."

Instead of pushing for labor-saving technologies, the new approach
stresses labor-intensive production with low capital, energy, and skill
requirements. Instead of building giant steel mills or large-scale urban

factories, it favors decentralized, small-scale facilities designed for the
village.

Turning Second Wave arguments upside down, the advocates of the
First Wave strategy were able to show that many industrial
technologies were a disaster when transferred to a poor country.
Machines broke down and went unrepaired. They needed high-cost,
often imported raw materials. Trained labor was in short supply.

Hence, the new argument ran, what was needed were "appropriate
technologies." Sometimes called "intermediate," "soft," or "alternative,"
these would lie, as it were, "between the sickle and the combine
harvester."

Centers for the development of such technologies soon sprang up all
over the United States and Europe — the Intermediate Technology
Development Group founded in 1965 in Britain serving as an early
model. But the developing countries, too, created such centers and
began pouring out low-scale technological innovations.

The Mochudi Farmers Brigade in Botswana, for example, has
developed an ox- or donkey -drawn device that can be used for
plowing, planting, and spreading fertilizer in single or double row
cultivation. The Department of Agriculture in Gambia has adopted a
Senegalese tool-frame which can be used with a single moldboard
plow, a groundnut lifter, a seeder, and a ridger. In Ghana work is going
forward on a pedal-driven rice thresher, a screw press for spent
brewer's grain, and an all-wood squeezer to extract water from banana
fiber.

The First Wave strategy has been applied on a much broader basis as
well. Thus hi 1978 the new government of India, still reeling from oil
and fertilizer price hikes and from disappointment with the Second
Wave strategies followed by

334

THE THIRD WAVE

Nehru and Indira Gandhi, actually banned further expansion of its
mechanized textile industry and urged increased production of fabrics
on handlooms instead of power looms. The intent was not merely to
increase employment but to retard urbanization by favoring rural
cottage industry.

There is much about this new formula that admittedly makes excellent
sense. It confronts the need to slow down the massive migration to the
cities. It aims to make the villages — where the bulk of the world's poor
dwell — more livable. It is sensitive to ecological factors. It stresses the
use of cheap local resources rather than expensive imports. It
challenges conventional, all-too-narrow definitions of "efficiency." It
suggests a less technocratic approach to development, taking local
custom and culture into account. It emphasizes improving the
conditions of the poor rather than passing capital through the hands of
the rich in the hopes that some will trickle down.

Yet after all due credit is given, the First Wave formula remains just
that — a strategy for ameliorating the worst of First Wave conditions
without ever transforming them. It is a Band-Aid, not a cure, and it is
perceived in exactly these terms by many governments around the
world.

Indonesian President Suharto expressed a widely held view when he
charged that such a strategy "may be the new form of imperialism. If
the West contributes only to small-scale grassroots projects, our plight
may be alleviated somewhat but we will never grow."

The sudden love affair with labor-intensivity is also subject to the
charge that it is self-serving for the rich. The longer the poor countries
remain under First Wave conditions, the fewer competitive goods they
are likely to shove onto an overloaded world market. The longer they
stay down on the farm, so to speak, the less oil, gas, and other scarce
resources they will siphon off, and the weaker and less troublesome
they will remain politically.

There is also, built deep into the First Wave stragegy, a paternalistic
assumption that while other factors of production need to be
economized, the time and energy of the laborer needn't be — that
unrelieved backbreaking toil in the fields or rice paddies is fine — so
long as it is done by somebody else.

Samir Amin, director of the Institute of African Economic Development
and Planning, sums up, many of these views, saying that labor-
intensive techniques have suddenly been

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES

335

rendered attractive, "thanks to a medley of hippie ideology, return to
the myth of the golden age and the noble savage, and criticism of the
reality of the capitalist world."

Worse yet, the First Wave formula dangerously de-emphasizes the
role of advanced science and technology. Many of the technologies
now being promoted as "appropriate" are even more primitive than
those available to the American farmer of 1776 — closer by far to the
sickle than to the harvester. When American and European farmers
began to employ more "appropriate technology" 150 years ago, when
they shifted from wooden to steel harrow teeth or to the iron plow, they
did not turn their back on the world's accumulated knowledge of
engineering and metallurgy — they seized it.

At the Paris Exposition of 1855, according to a contemporary account,
newly-invented threshing machines were dramatically demonstrated.
"Six men were set to threshing with flails at the same moment that the
different machines commenced operations, and the following were the
results of an hour's work:

"Six threshers with flails 36 liters of wheat

Belgian threshing machine '

150 liters of wheat

French threshing machine 250 liters of wheat

English threshing machine 410 liters of wheat

American threshing machine 740 liters of wheat"

Only those who have never spent years at grueling manual labor can
lightly brush aside machinery that, as early as 1855, could thresh grain
123 times faster than a man.

Much of what we now call "advanced science" was developed by
scientists in rich countries to solve the problems of the rich countries.
Precious little research has been addressed to the everyday problems
of the world's poor. Nonetheless, any "development policy" that begins
by blinding itself to the potentials of advanced scientific and
technological knowledge condemns hundreds of millions of desperate,
hungry, toiling peasants to perpetual degradation.

In some places, and at certain times, the First Wave strategy can
improve life for large numbers of people. Yet there is painfully little
evidence to show that any sizable country can ever produce enough,
using premechanized First Wave methods, to invest in change. Indeed,
a mass of evidence suggests the exact opposite.

By dint of heroic effort, Mao's China — which invented and

336

THE THIRD WAVE

tried out basic elements of the First Wave formula — almost, but not
quite, managed to prevent famine. This was a towering achievement.
But by the late sixties, the Maoist emphasis on rural development and
backyard industry had gone as far as it could go. China had reached a
dead end.

For the First Wave formula, by itself, is ultimately a recipe for
stagnation and is no more applicable to the entire range of poor
countries than the Second Wave strategy.

In a world of exploding diversity we shall have to invent scores of
innovative strategies and stop looking for models either in the industrial
present — or in the preindustrial past. It is time we began to look at the
emergent future.

THE THIRD WAVE QUESTION

Must we remain forever trapped between two obsolete visions? I have
deliberately caricatured these alternative strategies to sharpen the
differences. In real life, few governments can afford to follow abstract
theories, and we find many attempts to combine elements of both
strategies. Yet the rise of the Third Wave strongly suggests that we no
longer need to Ping-Pong back and forth between these two formulas.

For the arrival of the Third Wave drastically alters everything. And
while no theory emanating from the high-technology world, whether
capitalist or Marxist in bias, is going to solve the problems of the
"developing world," and no existing models are wholly transferable, a
strange new relationship is springing up between First Wave societies
and the fast-forming Third Wave civilization.

More than once we have seen naive attempts to "develop" a basically
First Wave country by imposing on it highly incongruous Second Wave
forms — mass production, mass media, factory-style education.
Westminster-style parliamentary government, and the nation-state, to
name a few — without recognizing that for these to operate
successfully, traditional family and marriage customs, religion, and role
structures would all have to be crushed, the entire culture ripped up by
its roots.

By astonishing contrast, Third Wave civilization turns out to have many
features — decentralized production, appropriate scale, renewable
energy, de-urbanization, work in the home, high levels of presumption,
to name just a few — that actually

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES

337

resemble those found in First Wave societies. We are seeing
something that looks remarkably like a dialectical return.

This is why so many of today's most startling innovations arrive with a
comet's tail of trace memories. It is this eerie sense of deja vu which
accounts for the fascination with the rural past that we find in the most
rapidly emergent Third Wave societies. What is so striking today is that
First and Third Wave civilizations seem likely to have more in common
with each other than with Second Wave civilization. They are, in short,
congruous.

Will this strange congruity make it possible for many of today's First
Wave countries to take on some of the features of Third Wave
civilization — without swallowing the whole pill, without totally
surrendering their culture or first passing through the "stage" of Second
Wave development? Will it, in fact, be easier for some countries to
introduce Third Wave structures than to industrialize in the classical
manner?

Is it now possible, moreover, as it was not in the past, for a society to
attain a high material standard of living without obsessively focusing all
its energies on production for exchange? Given the wider range of
options brought by the Third Wave, cannot a people reduce infant
mortality and improve life span, literacy, nutrition, and the general
quality of life without surrendering its religion or values and necessarily
embracing the Western materialism that accompanies the spread of
Second Wave civilization?

Tomorrow's "development" strategies will come not from Washington
or Moscow or Paris or Geneva but from Africa, Asia, and Latin
America. They will be indigenous, matched to actual local needs. They

will not overemphasize economics txt the expense of ecology, culture,
religion, or family structure and the psychological dimensions of
existence. They will not imitate any outside model. First Wave, Second
Wave or, lor that matter, Third.

But the ascent of the Third Wave places all our efforts in a new
perspective. For it provides the world's poorest nations, as well as the
richest, with wholly new opportunities.

SUN, SHRIMP, AND CHIPS

The surprising congruence between many of the structural features of
First Wave and Third Wave civilizations suggests

338

THE THIRD WAVE

that it may be possible in the decades ahead to combine elements of
past and future into a new and better present.

Take, for example, the issue of energy.

With all the talk about an energy crisis in the countries transitioning into
Third Wave civilization, it is often forgotten that First Wave societies
are facing an energy crisis of their own. Starting from an extremely low
base, what kind of energy systems should they create?

Certainly they need big centralized fossil-fuel-based power plants of
the Second Wave type. But in many of these societies, as the Indian
scientist Amulya Kumar N. Reddy has shown, the most urgent need is
for decentralized energy in the countryside rather than vast, centralized
supplies for the cities.

The family of a landless Indian peasant now spends about six hours a
day merely rinding the firewood it needs for cooking and heating.
Another four to six hours are spent bringing water from a well, and a
similar amount to graze cattle, goats, or sheep. "Since such a family
cannot afford to hire labour and cannot buy labour-saving gadgets, its
only rational response is to have at least three children to satisfy its
energy needs," says Reddy, pointing out that rural energy "may prove
an excellent contraceptive."

Reddy has studied rural energy needs and concluded that the
requirements of a village can easily be met by a tiny, cheap bio-gas
plant that uses human and animal waste from the village itself. He has
gone on to demonstrate that many thousands of such units would be
far more useful, ecologically sound, and economical than a few giant,
centralized generating plants.

Precisely this reasoning lies behind bio-gas research and installation
programs hi countries from Bangladesh to Fiji. India already has
12,000 plants hi operation and has targeted for 100,000 units. China
plans to have 200,000 family-si/e bio-gas plants at work in Szechuan.
Korea has 29,450 and hopes to reach a total of 55,000 by 1985.

Just outside New Delhi, the prominent futurist writer ami businessman,
Jagdish Kapur, has turned ten arid, miserably unproductive acres into
a world-renowned model "solar farm" with a bio-gas plant. The farm
now produces enouph grains, fruits, and vegetables to feed his family
and employees as well as tons of food to sell at a profit to the m place.

The Indian Institute of Technology, meanwhile, him

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES

339

designed a ten-kilowatt solar plant for village use to provide electricity
for lighting homes, operating water pumps, and powering community
television or radio sets. In Madras in Tamil Nadu, the authorities have
installed a solar-powered desalinization plant. And Central Electronics
near New Delhi has set up a demonstration home using photovoltaic
solar cells to produce electricity.

In Israel molecular biologist Haim Aviv has proposed a joint Egyptian-
Israeli agro-industrial project in the Sinai. Using Egyptian water and
Israel's advanced irrigation technology, it would be possible to grow
cassava or sugar cane, which in turn could be converted into ethanol
for use in car fuel. His plan calls for sheep and cattle to be fed on the
sugar cane by-products and for paper plants to make use of the
cellulose wastes, creating an integrated ecological cycle. Similar
projects, Aviv suggests, could be built hi parts of Africa, Southeast
Asia, and Latin America.

The energy crisis which is part of the breakdown of Second Wave
civilization is generating many new ideas for both centralized and
decentralized, large-scale and small-scale energy production in the
poorer regions of the planet. And there is a clear parallel between
some of the problems facing First Wave and emergent Third Wave
societies. Neither can rely on energy systems designed for the Second
Wave era.

What about agriculture? Once again, the Third Wave leads us in
unconventional directions. At the Environmental Research Lab in
Tucson, Arizona, shrimp are being grown in long troughs in
greenhouses, right alongside cucumbers and lettuce — with the shrimp
waste recycled to fertilize the vegetables. In Vermont experimenters
are raising catfish, trout, and vegetables in a similar manner. The water
in the fish tank collects solar heat and releases it at night to keep
temperatures up. Again, the fish waste is used to fertilize the
vegetables.

In Massachusetts, at the New Alchemy Institute chickens are being
raised atop the fish tank. Their droppings fertilize algae, which the fish
then eat. These are only three of countless examples of innovation in
food production and food processing — many of-which have special,
exciting relevance for today's First Wave societies.

A forecast of 20-year trends in world food supply prepared by the
Center for Futures Research (CFR) at the University of Southern
California suggests, for example, that several key

340

THE THIRD WAVE

developments are likely to slash, rather than increase, the need for
artificial fertilizers. According to the CFR study, chances are nine out of
ten that by 1996 we will have cheap controlled-release fertilizer which
will reduce the need for nitrogenous fertilizer by 15 percent. There is a
substantial likelihood that nitrogen-fixing grains will also be available by
then, further reducing demand.

The report regards as "virtually certain" new grain varieties which
produce higher yields per acre on non-irrigated land — with gains as
high as 25 to 50 percent. It suggests that "trickle-drip” irrigation
systems, with decentralized wind-powered wells and water distributed
by draft animals, could substantially increase yields while cutting year-
to-year fluctuations in the harvest.

Furthermore, it tells of forage grass that, because it needs only minimal
water, could double the livestock carrying capacity of arid regions; of a
potential 30 percent jump in non-grain yields in tropical soils as a result
of a better understanding of nutrient combinations; of breakthroughs in
pest control that will cut crop losses drastically; of new low-cost water
pumping methods; of the control of the tsetse fly, which would open up
vast new regions to livestock farming; and many other advances.

On a longer time-scale, one can imagine much of agriculture devoted
to "energy farms" — the cultivation of crops for energy production.
Ultimately we may see the convergence of weather modification,
computers, satellite monitoring, and genetics to revolutionize the
world's food supply.

While such possibilities put no food in a hungry peasant's belly today,
First Wave governments must consider these potentials in their long-
range agricultural planning, and must search for ways to combine, as it
were, the hoe and the computer.

New technologies, associated with the shift to Third Wave civilization,
also open fresh possibilities. The late futurist John McHale and his wife
and colleague, Magda Cordell McHale, in their excellent study Basic
Human Needs, concluded that the emergence of super-advanced
biotechnologies hold great promise for transforming First Wave
societies. Such technologies include everything from ocean farming to
the use of insects and other organisms for productive work, the
processing of cellulose wastes into meat via microorganisms, and the
conversion of plants like euphorbia into sul-

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES

341

phur-free fuel. "Green medicine" — the manufacture of Pharmaceuticals
from previously unknown or under-utilized plant life — also holds high
potential for many First Wave countries.

Advances in other fields also cast doubt on traditional development
thinking. An explosive issue facing many First Wave countries is
massive unemployment and underemployment. This has triggered a
global debate between First Wave and Second Wave advocates. One
side argues that mass-production industries do not use enough labor,
and that the emphasis in development should be placed on smaller-
scale, more technologically primitive factories that use more people
and less capital and energy. The other side urges the introduction of
precisely the Second Wave industries now moving out of the most
technologically advanced nations — steel, auto, shoes, textiles, and the
like.

But rushing off to build a Second Wave steel mill may be (he
equivalent of constructing a buggy -whip factory. There may be
strategic or other reasons to build a mill but, with wholly new composite
materials many times stronger, stiffer, :md lighter than aluminum, with
transparent materials that are as strong as steel, with reinforced plastic
mortar to replace galvanized water pipes, how long before the demand
for steel peaks and production capacity is excessive? According to
Indian scientist M. S. Iyengar, such advances may "make the linear
expansion in steel and aluminium production redundant." Perhaps,
instead of seeking loans or foreign investment to build steel capability,
the poorer countries ought to be preparing now for the "materials age"?

The Third Wave brings more immediate possibilities as well. Ward
Morehouse of the Research Policy Program, University of Lund,
Sweden, argues that the poor nations should be looking beyond First
Wave small-scale industry or Second Wave centralized, large-scale
industry, and should focus instead on one of the key industries of the
emerging Third Wave: microelectronics.

"Over emphasis on labor-intensive technology with low productivity
could become a trap for poor countries," More-house writes. Pointing
out that productivity is rising spectacularly in the computer chip
industry, he argues that "it is certainly an advantage to capital-poor
developing countries to get greater output per unit of capital invested."

More important, however, is the compatibility between Third Wave
technology and existing social arrangements.

342

THE THIRD WAVE

Thus, Morehouse says, the great product diversity in microelectronics
means that "developing countries can take a basic technology and
adapt it more easily to suit their own social requirements or raw
materials. Microelectronic technology lends itself to decentralization of
production."

This also means reduced population pressures on the big cities, and
the rapid miniaturization in this field cuts transportation costs as well.
Best of all, this form of production has low energy requirements, and
the growth of the market is so rapid — and the competition so keen —
that even though rich nations attempt to monopolize these industries
they are unlikely to succeed.

Morehouse is not alone in pointing out how the most advanced Third
Wave industries dovetail with the needs of the poor countries. Says
Roger Melen, Associate Director of Stanford University's Integrated
Circuit Laboratory: "The industrial world moved everybody into the
cities for production, and now we're moving the factories and work
forces back into the country, but many nations have never really
switched from a 17th century agrarian economy, including China. It
now appears they can integrate new manufacturing techniques into
their society without moving entire populations."

If this is so, the Third Wave offers a fresh technological strategy for the
war on want.

The Third Wave throws the need for transportation and communication
into a new perspective as well. At the time of the industrial revolution,
roads were a prerequisite for social, political, and economic
development. Today an electronic communications system is
necessary. It was once thought that communications were the
outgrowth of economic development. Now, says John Magee,
president of Arthur D. Little, the research firm, this "is an outmoded
thesis . . . telecommunications is more of a precondition than a
consequence."

Today's plummeting cost of communications suggests the substitution
of communications for many transport functions. It may be far cheaper,
more energy -conserving, and more appropriate in the long run to lay in
an advanced communications network than a ramified structure of
costly roads and streets. Clearly, road transport is needed. But to the
degree that production is decentralized, rather than centralized,
transport costs can be minimized without isolating villages

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES

343

from one another, from the urban areas, or from the world at large.

That more and more leaders of First Wave countries are aware of the
importance of communications is clear from the fight they are waging
for a redistribution of the world's electronic spectrum. Because the
Second Wave powers developed telecommunications early, they have
captured control of the available frequencies. The U.S. and the
U.S.S.R. alone use up 25 percent of the available shortwave
broadcasting spectrum, and a bigger chunk of the more sophisticated
parts of the spectrum.

This spectrum, however, like the ocean floor and the planet's
breathable air, belongs — or should belong — to everyone, not just a
few. Thus many of the First Wave countries insist the spectrum is a
limited resource and want to be assigned a share of it — even if at the
moment they lack the equipment to use it. (They assume they can
"rent out" their part until such time as they are ready to use it
themselves.) Facing resistance from both the U.S. and the U.S.S.R.,
they call for a "New World Information Order."

The larger issue they face, however, is internal: how to divide their
limited resources between telecommunications and transport. It is the
same question that the most technically sophisticated of nations also
must confront. Given low-cost ground stations, computerized kibbutz-
size irrigation systems, perhaps even ground sensing devices, and
super-cheap computer terminals for village use and cottage industry, it
may be possible for First Wave societies to avoid some of the
enormous expenditure for heavy transport that the Second Wave
nations had to bear. Such ideas no doubt sound Utopian today. But the
time will soon be on us when they are commonplace.

Not long ago, Indonesian President Suharto pressed the tip of a
traditional sword against an electronic push button and thereby
inaugurated a satellite communications system aimed at linking the
parts of the Indonesian archipelago together — much as the railroads
with their golden spike linked the two coasts of America a century ago.
In so doing, he symbolized the new options that the Third Wave
presents to countries seeking transformation.

Developments like these in energy, agriculture, technology, and
communications suggests something even deeper — whole

344

THE THIRD WAVE

new societies based on the fusion of past and future, of First Wave and
Third Wave.

One can begin to picture a transformation strategy based on the
development of both low-stream, village-oriented, capital-cheap, rural
industries and certain carefully selected, high-stream technologies,
with an economy zoned to protect or promote both.

Jagdish Kapur has written: "A new balance has now to be struck
between" the most advanced science and technology available to the
human race and "the Gandhian vision of the idyllic green pastures, the
village republics." Such a practical combination, Kapur declares,
requires a "total transformation of the society, its symbols and values,
its system of education, its incentives, the flow of its energy resources,
its scientific and industrial research and a whole lot of other
institutions."

Yet an increasing number of long-range thinkers, social analysts,
scholars, and scientists believe that just such a transformation is now
under way, carrying us toward a radical new synthesis: Gandhi, in
short, with satellites.

THE ORIGINAL PROSUMERS

Implied in this approach is another synthesis at an even deeper level.
This involves the entire economic relationship of people to the
market — irrespective of whether that market is capitalist or socialist in
form. It forces us to question how much of any individual's total time
and labor should be devoted to production and how much to

prosumption — i.e., how much to working for pay in the marketplace as
against working for self.

Most First Wave populations have already been drawn into the money
system. They have been "marketized." But while the wretched money
income earned by the world's poorest people may be vital to their
survival, production for exchange provides only part of their income;
prosumption provides the rest.

The Third Wave encourages us to look at this situation, too, in a fresh
way. In country after country millions are jobless. But is full
employment in these societies a realistic goal? What combination of
policies can possibly, within our lifetime, provide full-time jobs for all
these surging millions? Is the very notion of "unemployment" itself a
Second Wave

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES
345

concept, as hinted at by the Swedish economist Gunnar Myr-dal?

The problem, writes Paul Streeten of the World Bank, is "not
'unemployment,' which is a Western concept that presupposes modern
sector wage employment, labor markets, labor exchanges and scoial
security payments. . . . The problem [is] rather, unremunerative,
unproductive work of the poor, particularly of the rural poor." The
remarkable rise of the prosumer in the affluent nations today, a striking
phenomenon of the Third Wave, leads us to question the deepest
assumptions and goals of most Second Wave economists.

Perhaps it is a mistake to emulate the industrial revolution in the West,
which saw the transfer of most economic activity out of Sector A (the
prosumer sector) and into Sector B (the market sector).

Perhaps presumption needs to be seen as a positive force, rather than
a regrettable holdover from the past.

Perhaps what is needed for most people is part-time employment for
wages (possibly with some transfer payments) plus imaginative new
policies aimed at making their pro-sumption more "productive." Indeed,
linking these two economic activities more intelligently to one another
may be the missing key to survival for millions.

Practically speaking, this might mean providing "capital tools for
presumption"— just as the rich countries now do. In the affluent
countries we see a fascinating synergy springing up between the two
sectors, with the marketplace providing powerful capital tools for use
by the prosumer: everything from washing machines to handdrills to
battery testers. Misery in the. poor countries is often so extreme that to
speak of washing machines or power tools seems, at first glance,
wildly out of place. Yet is there no analogue here for societies moving
beyond First Wave civilization?

The French architect-planner Yona Friedman reminds us that the
world's poor do not necessarily want jobs — they want "food and a roof."

The job is only a means to this end. But one can often grow one's own
food and build one's own roof, or at least contribute to that process.
Thus in a paper for UNESCO, Friedman has argued that governments
should encourage what I have called presumption by relaxing certain
land laws and building codes. These make it hard (often, indeed,
impossible) for squatters to build or improve their own housing.

346

THE THIRD WAVE

He strongly urges governments to remove these ohstacles and to help
people supply their own housing, offering them "assistance in
organization, the provision of some materials otherwise difficult to
obtain . . . and, if possible, site development" — i.e., water or electricity.
What Friedman and others are beginning to say is that anything that
helps the individual presume more effectively may be just as important
as production measured in conventional GNP terms.

To increase the "productivity" of the prosumer, governments need to
focus scientific and technological research on presumption. But even
now they could, at remarkably low cost, provide simple hand tools,
community workshops, trained craftsmen or teachers, limited
communications facilities and, where possible, power generation
equipment — plus favorable propaganda or moral support for those who
invest "sweat equity" hi building their own homes or improving their bits
of land.

Second Wave propaganda today unfortunately conveys to even the
world's most remote and poorest people the idea that the things they
make themselves are inherently inferior to the worst mass-produced
junk. Rather than teaching people to despise their own efforts, to value
Second Wave products and downgrade what they themselves create,
governments should be offering prizes for the best or most imaginative
self-built homes and goods, the most "productive" presumption. The
knowledge that even the world's richest people are increasingly
presuming may help change attitudes among the very poorest. For the
Third Wave casts into a dramatic new light the entire relationship of
market to nonmarket activities in all the societies of the future.

The Third Wave also raises non-economic and non-technological
concerns to primary importance. It makes us look at education, for
example, with fresh eyes. Education, everyone agrees, is central to
development. But what kind of education?

When the colonial powers introduced formal education into Africa,

India, and other parts of the First Wave world, they transplanted either
factory-style schools or set up miniature, tenth-rate imitations of their
own elite schools. Today Second Wave education models are being
questioned everywhere. The Third Wave challenges the Second Wave
notion that education necessarily takes place in a classroom. Today
we need to combine learning with work, political struggle,

GANDHI WITH SATELLITES

347

community service, and even play. All our conventional assumptions
about education need to be re-examined both in the rich countries and
the poor.

Is literacy, for example, an appropriate goal? If so, what does literacy
mean? Does it mean both reading and writing? In a provocative paper
for the Nevis Institute, a futures research center in Edinburgh, the
eminent anthropologist Sir Edmund Leach has argued that reading is
easier to learn and more useful than writing, and that not everyone
needs to learn to write. Marshall McLuhan has spoken of a return to an
oral culture more in keeping with many First Wave com* munities.
Speech recognition technology opens incredible new vistas. New,
extremely cheap communications "buttons" or tiny tape recorders built
into simple agricultural equipment may ultimately be able to give oral
instructions to illiterate farmers. In the light of these, even the definition
of functional literacy requires fresh thinking.

Finally, the Third Wave encourages us to look behind conventional
Second Wave assumptions with respect to motivation as well. Better
nutrition is likely to raise the entire level of intelligence and functional
competence among millions of children — at the same time that it
increases drive and motivation.

Second Wave people often speak of the passivity and lack of
motivation of, say, an Indian villager or a Colombian peasant. Leaving
aside the demotivating effects of malnutrition, intestinal parasites,
climate, and oppressive political control, might not a part of what
seems like lack of motivation be an unwillingness to tear up one's
home, family, and life in the present in return for the dubious hope of a
better life many years down the road? So long as "development"
means the superimposition of a totally alien culture on an existing one,
and so long as actual improvements seem impossibly beyond reach,
there is every reason to hang on to the little one has.

Because many features of Third Wave civilization are consonant with
those of First Wave civilization, whether in China or Iran, they imply the
possibility of change with less, not more, disruption, pain, and future
shock. And they therefore may strike at the roots of what we have
called demotiva-tion.

And so, not merely in the fields of energy or technology, agriculture or
economics, but in the very brain and behavior

348 THE THIRD WAVE

of the individual, the Third Wave brings the potential for revolutionary
change.

THE STARTING LINE

The emerging Third Wave civilization does not provide a ready-made
model for emulation. Third Wave civilization is itself not yet fully
formed. But for the poor as well as the rich it opens novel, perhaps
liberating, possibilities. For it calls attention not to the weaknesses,
poverty, and misery of the First Wave world, but to some of its inherent

strengths. The very features of this ancient civilization that seem so
backward from the standpoint of the Second Wave appear as
potentially advantageous when measured against the template of the
advancing Third Wave.

The congruity of these two civilizations must, in the years ahead,
transform the way we think about the relations between rich and poor
on the planet. Samir Amin, the economist, speaks of the "absolute
necessity" of breaking out of the "false dilemma: modern techniques
copied from the West of today, or old techniques corresponding to
conditions in the West a century ago." This is precisely what the Third
Wave makes possible.

The poor as well as the rich are crouched at the starting line of a new
and startlingly different race into the future.

CODA: THE GREAT CONFLUENCE

We are no longer where we stood a decade ago, dazzled by changes
whose relationships to one another were unknown. Today, behind the
confusion of change, there is a growing coherence of pattern: the
future is taking shape.

In a great historical confluence, many raging rivers of change are
running together to form an oceanic Third Wave of change that is
gaining momentum with every passing hour.

This Third Wave of historical change represents not a straight-line
extension of industrial society but a radical shift of direction, often a
negation, of what went before. It adds up to nothing less than a
complete transformation at least as revolutionary in our day as
industrial civilization was 300 years ago.

Furthermore, what is happening is not just a technological revolution
but the coming of a whole new civilization in the fullest s,ense of that
term. Thus, if we briefly look back over the ground we have covered,
we find profound and frequently parallel changes at many levels
simultaneously.

Every civilization operates in and on the biosphere, and reflects or
alters the mix of populations and resources. Every civilization has a
characteristic techno-sphere — an energy base linked to a production
system which in turn is linked to a distribution system. Every civilization
has a socio-sphere consisting of interrelated social institutions. Every
civilization has an info-sphere — channels of communication through
which necessary information flows. Every civilization has its own
power-sphere.

349

350

THE THIRD WAVE

Every civilization, in addition, has a set of characteristic relationships
with the outside world — exploitative, symbioiu. militant or pacific. And
every civilization has its own super-ideology — a kit of powerful cultural
assumptions that structure its view of reality and justify its operations.

The Third Wave, it should now be apparent, is bringing revolutionary
and self-reinforcing changes at all these dillci ent levels at once. The
consequence is not merely the disintegration of the old society but the
creation of foundations for the new.

Often, as Second Wave institutions crash about our heads, as crime
mounts, as nuclear families fracture, as once reliable bureaucracies
sputter and malfunction, as health delivery systems crack and
industrial economies wobble dangerously, we see only the decay and
breakdown around us. Yet social decay is the compost bed of the new
civilization. In energy, technology, family structure, culture, and many
other fields, we are laying into place the basic structures that will define
the main features of that new civilization.

In fact, we can now for the first time identify these main features and
even, to some extent, the interrelationships among them.
Encouragingly, the embryonic Third Wave civilization we find is not
only coherent and workable in both ecological and economic terms,
but — if we put our minds to it — could be made more decent and
democratic than our own.

In no way is this to suggest inevitability. The period of transition will be
marked by extreme social disruption, as well as wild economic swings,
sectional clashes, secession attempts, technological upsets or
disasters, political turbulence, violence, wars, and threats of war. In a
climate of disintegrating institutions and values, authoritarian
demagogues and movements will arise to seek, and possibly attain,
power. No intelligent person can be smug about the outcome. The
clash of two civilizations presents titanic dangers.

Yet the odds lie not with destruction but with ultimate survival. And it is
important to know where the main thrust of change is taking us — what
kind of world is likely if we manage to avoid the worst of the short-term
perils that lie before us. Briefly then, what kind of society is taking
form?

CODA: THE GREAT CONFLUENCE TOMORROW'S BASICS
351

Third Wave civilization, unlike its predecessor, must (and will) draw on
an amazing variety of energy sources — hydro-pen, solar, geothermal,
tidal, biomass, lightning discharges, ul-nmately perhaps advanced
fusion power, as well as other mergy sources not yet imagined in the
1980's. (While some nuclear plants will no doubt continue to operate,
even if we NiilFcr a succession of disasters worse than Three Mile
Island, nuclear will, on the whole, turn out to have been a costly and
dangerous digression.)

The transition to the new diverse energy base will be er-rntic in the
extreme, with a staccato succession of gluts, short-nj-ics, and lunatic

price swings. But the long-term direction *a i ins clear enough — a shift
from a civilization based heavily on a single source of energy to one
based more securely on many. Ultimately we see a civilization founded
once more on Nc-lf-sustaining, renewable rather than exhaustible
energy lources.

Third Wave civilization will rely on a far more diversified technological
base as well, springing from biology, genetics, electronics, materials
science, as well as on outer space and iinder-the-sea operations.

While some new technologies will require high energy inputs, much
Third Wave technology will In- designed to use less, not more, energy.
Nor will Third Wave technologies be as massive and ecologically
dangerous as those of the past. Many will be small in scale, simple to
operate, with the wastes of one industry predesigned for recycling into
primary materials for another.

For Third Wave civilization, the most basic raw material of all — and one
that can never be exhausted — is information, Including imagination.
Through imagination and information, Nlinstitutes will be found for
many of today's exhaustible resources — although this substitution,
once more, will all too frequently be accompanied by drastic economic
swings and lurches.

With information becoming more important than ever before, the new
civilization will restructure education, redefine scientific research and,
above all, reorganize the media of communication. Today's mass
media, both print and electronic, are wholly inadequate to cope with
the communications load and to provide the requisite cultural variety
for survival. Instead of being culturally dominated by a few mass
media, Third Wave civilization will rest on inter-active, de-

352

THE THIRD WAVE

massified media, feeding extremely diverse and often highly
personalized imagery into and out of the mind-stream of the society.

Looking far ahead, television will give way to "indi-video" — narrow-
casting carried to the ultimate: images addressed to a single individual
at a time. We may also eventually use drugs, direct brain-to-brain
communication, and other forms of electrochemical communication
only vaguely hinted at until now. All of which will raise startling, though
not insoluble, political and moral problems.

The giant centralized computer with its whirring tapes and complex
cooling systems — where it still exists — will be supplemented by myriad
chips of intelligence, embedded in one form or another in every home,
hospital, and hotel, every vehicle and appliance, virtually every
building-brick. The electronic environment will literally converse with
us.

Despite popular misconceptions, this shift toward an information-
based, highly electronic society will still further reduce our need for
high-cost energy.

Nor must this computerization (or, more properly, in-
formationaliza]tion) of society mean a further depersonaliza-tion of
human relationships. As we shall see in the next chapter, people will
still hurt, cry, laugh, take pleasure in each other, and play — but they
will do all these in a much altered context.

The fusion of Third Wave energy forms, technologies, and information
media will speed revolutionary changes in the way we work. Factories
are still being built (and in some parts of the world they will continue to
be built for decades to come), but the Third Wave factory already
bears little resemblance to those we have known until now, and — in the
rich nations — the number of people in factory jobs will continue to
plummet.

In Third Wave civilization the factory will no longer serve as a model for
other types of institutions. Nor will its primary function be that of mass
production. Even now the Third Wave factory produces de-massified —
often customized — end products. It relies on advanced methods such
as wholistic or "presto" production. It will ultimately use less energy,
waste less raw material, employ fewer components, and demand far
more design intelligence. Most significantly, many of its machines will
be directly activated not by workers but at a distance, by consumers
themselves.

Those who do work in Third Wave factories will perform

CODA: THE GREAT CONFLUENCE

353

far less brutalizing or repetitive work than those still trapped in Second
Wave jobs. They will not be paced by mechanical conveyor belts.

Noise levels will be low. Workers will come and go at hours convenient
for them. The actual workplace will be far more humane and
individualized, often with flowers and greenery sharing the space with
machines. Within fixed limits, payment and fringe benefit packages will
be increasingly tailored to individual preference.

Third Wave factories will increasingly be found outside the giant urban
metropolises. They are also likely to be much smaller than those of the
past, with smaller organizational units as well, each enjoying a greater
degree of self-management.

Similarly, the Third Wave office will no longer resemble the office of
today. A key ingredient of office work — paper — will be substantially
(though not wholly) replaced. The chattering banks of typewriters will
fall silent. The file cabinets will shrink away. The role of the secretary
will be transfigured as electronics eliminates many old tasks and opens
new opportunities. The sequential movement of papers back and forth
across many desks, the endlessly repetitious typing of columns of
numbers — all this will become less important and the making of
discretionary decisions more important, and more widely shared.

To operate these factories and offices of the future, Third Wave
companies will need workers capable of discretion and
resourcefulness rather than rote responses. To prepare such

employees, schools will increasingly shift away from present methods
still largely geared to producing Second Wave workers for highly
repetitive work.

The most striking change in Third Wave civilization, however, will
probably be the shift of work from both office and factory back into the
home.

Not all jobs can, will, or should be carried out in people's homes. But
as low-cost communications are substituted for high-cost
transportation, as we increase the role of intelligence and imagination
in production, further reducing the role of brute force or routine mental
labor, a significant slice of the work force in Third Wave societies will
perform at least part of its work at home, factories remaining only for
those who must actually handle physical materials.

This gives us a clue to the institutional structure of Third Wave
civilization. Some scholars have suggested that, with I he increasing
importance of information, the university will

354

THE THIRD WAVE

replace the factory as the central institution of tomorrow. This notion,
however, which comes almost exclusively from academics, is based on
the provincial assumption that only the university can, or does, house
theoretical knowledge. It is little more than a professorial wish-
fulfillment fantasy.

Multinational executives, for their part, see the executive suite as the
pivot of tomorrow. The new profession of "information managers"
pictures their computer rooms as the center of the new civilization.
Scientists look to the industrial research laboratory. A few remaining
hippies dream of restoring the agricultural commune to the center of a
neo-medieval future. Others may nominate the "gratification chambers"
of a leisure-drenched society.

My own nomination, for reasons outlined earlier, is none of these. It is,
in fact, the home.

I believe the home will assume a startling new importance in Third
Wave civilization. The rise of the prosumer, the spread of the electronic
cottage, the invention of new organizational structures in business, the
automation and de-massifi -cation of production, all point to the home's
re-emergence as a central unit in the society of tomorrow — a unit with
enhanced rather than diminished economic, medical, educational, and
social functions.

Yet it is unlikely that any institution — not even the home — will play as
central a role as the cathedral or the factory did in the past. For the
society is likely to be built around a network rather than a hierarchy of
new institutions.

This suggests also that the corporations (and the socialist production
organizations) of tomorrow will no longer tower over other social

institutions. In Third Wave societies, corporations will be recognized as
the complex organizations they are, and will pursue multiple goals
simultaneously — not just profit or production quotas. Instead of
focusing on a single bottom line, as many of today's managers have
been trained to do, the shrewd Third Wave manager will watch over
(and will be held personally responsible for) multiple "bottom lines."

Executive paychecks and bonuses will gradually come to reflect this
new multi-functionality, as the corporation, either through voluntary
means or because it is compelled to, becomes more responsive to
what today are regarded as non-economic and hence largely irrelevant
factors — ecological, political, social, cultural, and moral.

Second Wave conceptions of efficiency — usually based on

CODA: THE GREAT CONFLUENCE

355

the ability of the corporation to foist its indirect costs off on the
consumer or the taxpayer — will be recast to take account of hidden
social, economic, and other costs which often, indeed, translate into
deferred economic costs as well. "Econo-think" — a characteristic
deformation of the Second Wave manager — will be less common.

The corporation — like most other organizations — will also undergo
drastic restructuring as the ground rules of Third Wave civilization
come into play. Instead of a society synchronized to the tempo of the
assembly line, a Third Wave society will move to flexible rhythms and
schedules. Instead of the mass society's extreme standardization of
behavior, ideas, language, and life-styles, Third Wave society will be
built on segmentation and diversity. Instead of a society that
concentrates population, energy flows, and other features of life, Third
Wave society will disperse and de-concentrate. Instead of opting for
maximum scale on the "bigger is better" principle, Third Wave society
will understand the meaning of "appropriate s«ale." Instead of a highly
centralized society, Third Wave society will recognize the value of
much decentralized decision-making.

Such changes imply a striking shift away from standard old-fashioned
bureaucracy, and the emergence in business, government, the
schools, and other institutions of a wide variety of new-style
organizations. Where hierarchies remain they will tend to be flatter and
more transient. Many new organizations will do away with the old
insistence on "one man, one boss" — all of which suggests a work world
in which more people share temporary decisional power.

All the societies moving through the transition to the Third Wave -face
deepening short-term unemployment problems. From the 1950's on,
vast increases in white-collar and service work absorbed millions of
workers laid off by the shrinking manufacturing sector. Today, as
white-collar work is in its turn automated, there is serious question as
to whether further expansion of the conventional service sector can
take up the slack. Some countries mask the problem through feather-
bedding, enlarging public and private bureaucracies, exporting excess

workers, and the like. But the problem remains insoluble within the
framework of Second Wave economies.

This helps explain the significance of the coming fusion of producer
and consumer — what I have called the rise of the prosumer. Third
Wave civilization brings with it the re-emergence of a huge economic
sector based on production

356

THE THIRD WAVE

for use rather than for exchange, a sector based on do-it-for-yourself
rather than do-it-for-the-market. This dramatic turnabout, after 300
years of "marketization," will both demand and make possible radically
fresh thinking about all our economic problems, from unemployment
and welfare to leisure and the role of work.

It will also bring with it a changed appreciation of the role of
"housework" in the economy, and subsequent fundamental changes in
the role of women, who still comprise the vast majority of
houseworkers. The powerful surge of marketization across the earth is
cresting, with many as yet unimaginable consequences for future
civilizations.

Third Wave people, meanwhile, will adopt new assumptions about
nature, progress, evolution, time, space, matter, and causation. Their
thinking will be less influenced by analogies based on the machine,
more shaped by concepts like process, feedback, and disequilibrium.
They will be more aware of the discontinuities that flow directly out of
continuities.

A host of new religions, new conceptions of science, new images of
human nature, new forms of art will arise — in far richer diversity than
was possible or necessary during the industrial age. The emerging
multiculture will be torn by turmoil until new forms of group conflict
resolution are developed (present-day legal systems are unimaginative
and woefully inadequate for a high diversity society).

The increasing differentiation of society will also mean a reduced role
for the nation-state — until now a major force for standardization. Third
Wave civilization will be based on a new distribution of power in which
the nation, as such, is no longer as influential as it once was, while
other institutions — from the transnational corporation to the
autonomous neighborhood or even city-state — assume greater
significance.

Regions will gain greater power as national markets and economies
fracture into pieces, some of which are already larger than the national
markets and economies of the past. New alliances may spring up
based less on geographical nearness than on common cultural,
ecological, religious, or economic affinities, so that a region in North
America may develop closer ties with a region in Europe or Japan than
with its own next-door neighbor or — eventually — its own national
government. Tying this all together will be not a unitary world
government but a dense network of new transnational organizations.

CODA: THE GREAT CONFLUENCE

857

Outside the rich nations, the non-industrial three quarters <>! humanity
will struggle against poverty with new tools, no i.'iij-er blindly attempting
to imitate Second Wave society nor Mitislied with First Wave
conditions. Radical new "development strategies" will arise, reflecting
the special religious or. ml rural character of each region and
consciously geared to minimizing future shock.

No longer ruthlessly tearing up their own religious traditions, family
structure, and social life in the hope of creating H mirror image of
industrial Britain, Germany, the U.S. or, lor that matter, the U.S.S.R.,
many countries will attempt to build on their past, noting the
congruence between certain i>.ilures of First Wave society and those
only now re-rmcrging (on a high-technology basis) in the Third Wave
Countries.

THE CONCEPT OF PRACTOPIA

What we see here are the outlines, therefore, of a wholly new way of
life, affecting not only individuals but the planet MS well. The new
civilization sketched here can hardly be termed a Utopia. It will be
agitated by deep problems, some of which we will explore in the
remaining pages. Problems of iclf and community. Political problems.
Problems of justice, equity, and morality. Problems with the new
economy (and especially the relationship between employment,
welfare, and prosumption). All these and many more will arouse
fighting passions.

But Third Wave civilization is also no "anti-utopia." It is not 1984 writ
large or Brave New World brought to life. Moth these brilliant books —
and hundreds of derivative defence fiction stories — paint a future
based on highly central-l/.i-d, bureaucratized, and standardized
societies, in which individual differences are eradicated. We are now
heading in exactly the opposite direction.

While the Third Wave carries with it deep challenges for humanity,
from ecological threats to the danger of nuclear terrorism and
electronic fascism, it is not simply a nightmarish linear extension of
industrialism.

We glimpse here instead the emergence of what might be mlled a
"practopia" — neither the best nor the worst of all possible worlds, but
one that is both practical and preferable to the one we had. Unlike a
Utopia, a practopia is not free of

358

THE THIRD WAVE

disease, political nastiness, and bad manners. Unlike most Utopias, it
is not static or frozen in unreal perfection. Nor is it reversionary,
modeling itself on some imagined ideal of the past.

Conversely, a practopia does not embody the crystalized evil of a
Utopia turned inside out. It is not ruthlessly antidemocratic. It is not
inherently militarist. It does not reduce its citizens to faceless
uniformity. It does not destroy its neighbors and degrade its
environment.

In short, a practopia offers a positive, even a revolutionary alternative,
yet lies within the range of the realistically attainable.

Third Wave civilization, in this sense, is precisely that: a practopian
future. One can glimpse in it a civilization that makes allowance for
individual difference, and embraces (rather than suppresses) racial,
regional, religious, and sub-cultural variety. A civilization built in
considerable measure around the home. A civilization that is not frozen
hi amber but pulsing with innovation, yet which is also capable of
providing enclaves of relative stability for those who need or want
them. A civilization no longer required to pour its best energies into
marketization. A civilization capable of directing great passion into art.
A civilization facing unprecedented historical choices — about genetics
and evolution, to choose a single example — and inventing new ethical
or moral standards to deal with such complex issues. A civilization,
finally, that is at least potentially democratic and humane, hi better
balance with the biosphere and no longer dangerously dependent on
exploitative subsidies from the rest of the world. Hard work to achieve,
but not impossible.

Flowing together in grand confluence, today's changes thus point to a
workable countercivilization, an alternative to the increasingly obsolete
and unworkable industrial system.

They point, in a word, to practopia.

THE WRONG QUESTION

Why is this happening? Why is the old Second Wave suddenly
unworkable? Why is this new civilizational tide rushing in to collide with
the old?

Nobody knows. Even today, 300 long years after the fact, historians
cannot pin down the "cause" of the industrial revolution. As we have
seen, each academic guild or philosophical

CODA: THE GREAT CONFLUENCE 359

Nchool has its own preferred explanation. The technological
»lc(crminists point to the steam engine, the ecologists to the
destruction of Britain's forests, the economists to fluctuations in the
price of wool. Others emphasize religious or cultural changes, the
Reformation, the Enlightenment, and so on.

In today's world, too, we can identify many mutually causal forces.
Experts point to the rising demand for exhaustible supplies of
petroleum, and mushrooming growth of world population, or the
escalated threat of global pollution as key forces for structural change
on a planetary scale. Others point to the incredible advances in

science and technology since the end of World War II and to the social
and political changes trailing in their wake. Still others emphasize the
awakening of the non-industrial world and the ensuing political
upheavals that threaten our life lines of cheap energy and raw
materials.

One can cite striking value changes — the sexual revolution, the youth
upheaval of the 1960's, the swiftly shifting attitudes toward work. One
might single out the arms race which has greatly accelerated certain
types of technological change. Alternatively, one might look for the
cause of the Third Wave in the cultural and epistemological changes of
our time — perhaps as profound as those wrought by the Reformation
and Enlightenment combined.

We could, in short, find scores, even hundreds of streams of change
feeding into the grand confluence, all of them interrelated in mutually
causal ways. We could find amazing positive feedback loops in the
social system, vastly accelerating and amplifying certain changes, as
well as negative loops that suppress other changes. We could find, in
this period of turbulence, analogies to the grand "leap'' described by
scientists like Ilya Prigogine, by which a simpler structure, in part by
chance, suddenly breaks through to a wholly new level of complexity
and diversity.

What we cannot find is "the" cause of the Third Wave hi the sense of a
single independent variable or link that pulls the chain. Indeed, to ask
what "the" cause is may be the wrong way of phrasing the question or
even the wrong question altogether. "What is the cause of the Third
Wave?" may be a Second Wave question.

To say this is not to discount causation but to recognize its complexity.
Nor does it suggest historical inevitability. Second Wave civilization
may be shattered and unworkable, but that does not mean that the
Third Wave civilization pictured here

360

THE THIRD WAVE

must necessarily take form. Any number of forces could radically
change the outlook. War, economic collapse, ecological catastrophe
come immediately to mind. While no one can stop the latest historical
wave of change, necessity and chance are both at work. This,
however, does not mean we cannot influence its course. If what I have
said about positive feedback is correct, often a little "kick" to the
system can bring about large-scale changes.

The decisions we take today, as individuals, groups, or governments,
can deflect, divert, or channel the racing currents of change. Each
people will react differently to the challenges posed by the super-
struggle that pits advocates of the Second Wave against those of the
Third. Russians will respond one way, Americans another, Japanese,
Germans, French, or Norwegians in still other ways, and countries are
likely to grow more different from one another rather than more alike.

Within countries the same is true. Little changes can trigger large
consequences — in corporations, schools, churches, hospitals, and
neighborhoods. And this is why, despite everything, people — even
individuals — still count.

This is especially true because the changes that lie ahead are the
consequences of conflict, not automatic progression. Thus in every
one of the technologically advanced nations, backward regions
struggle to complete then- industrialization. They attempt to protect
then' Second Wave factories and the jobs based on them. This places
them in frontal conflict with regions that are already far advanced in
building the technological base for Third Wave operations. Such
battles tear society apart, but they also open many opportunities for
effective political and social action.

The super-struggle now being waged hi every community between the
people of the Second Wave and the people of the Third Wave does not
mean that other struggles lose their importance. Class conflict, racial
conflict, the conflict of young and old against what I have elsewhere
called "the imperialism of the middle-aged," the conflict among regions,
sexes, religions — all these continue. Some, indeed, will be sharpened.

, But all of them are shaped by, and subordinated to, the su-per-
struggle. It is the super-struggle that most basically determines the
future.

Meanwhile, two things cut through everything as the Third Wave
thunders in our ears. One is the shift toward a higher level of diversity
in society — the de-massification of mass society. The second is
acceleration — the faster pace at which

CODA: THE GREAT CONFLUENCE

361

historical change occurs. Together these place tremendous strains on
individuals and institutions alike, intensifying the super-struggle as it
rages about us.

Accustomed to coping with low diversity and slow change, individuals
and institutions suddenly find themselves trying to cope with high
diversity and high-speed change. The cross-pressures threaten to
overload their decisional competence. The result is future shock.

We are left with only one option. We must be willing to reshape
ourselves and our institutions to deal with the new realities.

For that is the price of admission to a workable and decently humane
future. To make the necessary changes, however, we must take a
totally fresh and imaginative look at two blazing issues. Both are
crucial to our survival, yet all but ignored in public discussion: the
future of personality and the politics of the future.

To which we now turn...

CONCLUSION

THE NEW PSYCHO-SPHERE

A new civilization is forming. But where do we fit into it? Don't today's
technological changes and social upheavals mean the end of
friendship, love, commitment, community, and caring? Won't
tomorrow's electronic marvels make human relationships even more
vacuous and vicarious than they are today?

These are legitimate questions. They arise from reasonable fears, and
only a naive technocrat would brush them lightly aside. For if we look
around us we find widespread evidence of psychological breakdown. It
is as though a bomb had gone off in our communal "psycho-sphere."
We are, in fact, experiencing not merely the breakup of the Second
Wave techno-sphere, info-sphere, or socio-sphere but the crack-up of
its psycho-sphere as well.

Throughout the affluent nations the litany is all too familiar: rising rates
of juvenile suicide, dizzyingly high levels of alcoholism, widespread
psychological depression, vandalism, and crime. In the United States,
emergency rooms are crowded with "potheads," "speed freaks" and
"Quaalude kids," "coke sniffers" and "heroin junkies," not to mention
people having "nervous breakdowns."

Social work and mental health industries are booming everywhere. In
Washington a President's Commission on Mental Health announces
that fully one fourth of all citizens hi Ihe United States suffer from some
form of severe emotional stress. And a National Institute of Mental
Health psychologist, charging that almost no family is free of some
form of

365

366

THE THIRD WAVE

mental disorder, declares that "psychological turbulence ... is rampant
in an American society that is confused, divided and concerned about
its future."

It is true that spongy definitions and unreliable statistics make such
sweeping generalizations suspect, and it is doubly true that earlier
societies were scarcely models of good mental health. Yet something
is terribly wrong today.

There is a harassed, knife-edge quality to daily life. Nerves are ragged,
and — as the scuffles and shootings in subways or on gas queues
suggest — tempers are barely under hair-trigger control. Millions of
people are terminally fed up.

They are, moreover, increasingly hassled by an apparently swelling
army of heavy breathers, kooks, flakes, weirdos, and psychos whose
antisocial behavior is frequently glamorized by the media. In the West
at least, we see a pernicious romanti-cization of insanity, a glorification

of the "cuckoo nest" inmate. Best-sellers proclaim that madness is a
myth, and a literary journal springs up in Berkeley dedicated to the
notion that "Madness, Genius and Sainthood all lie in the same realm,
and should be given the same name and prestige."

Meanwhile, millions of individuals search frantically for their own
identities or for some magic therapy to re-integrate their personalities,
provide instant intimacy or ecstasy, or lead them to "higher" states of
consciousness.

By the late 1970's a human potential movement, spreading eastward
from California, had spawned some 8,000 different "therapies"
consisting of odds and ends of psychoanalysis, Eastern religion,
sexual experimentation, game playing, and old-time revivalism. In the
words of one critical survey, "these techniques were neatly packaged
and distributed coast to coast under names like Mind Dynamics, Arica,
and Silva Mind Control. Transcendental Meditation was already being
peddled like speed reading; Scientology's Dianetics had been mass-
marketing its own popular therapy since the fifties. At the same time,
America's religious cults got into the swing, fanning out quietly across
the country in massive fund-raising and recruitment drives."

More important than the growing human-potential industry is the
Christian evangelical movement. Appealing to poorer and less
educated segments of the public, making sophisticated use of high-
powered radio and television, the "bora again" movement is ballooning
in size. Religious hucksters, riding its crest, send their followers
scrambling for salvation in a society they picture as decadent and
doomed.

THE NEW PSYCHO-SPHERE
367

This wave of malaise has not struck all parts of the technological world
with equal force. For this reason, readers in Europe and elsewhere
may be tempted to shrug it off as a largely American phenomenon,
while in the United States itself some still regard it as just another
manifestation of California's fabled flakiness.

Neither view could be further from the truth. If psychic distress and
disintegration are most strikingly evident hi the United States, and
especially California, it merely reflects the fact that the Third Wave has
arrived a bit earlier than elsewhere, causing Second Wave social
structures to topple sooner and more spectacularly.

Indeed, a kind of paranoia has settled over many communities, and not
just in the United States. In Rome and Turin, terrorists stalk the streets.
In Paris, and even in once peaceful London, muggings and vandalism
increase. In Chicago, elderly people are afraid to walk the streets after
dark. In New York, schools and subways crackle with violence. And
hack in California, a magazine offers its readers a supposedly practical
guide to "handguns and gun courses, attack-trained dogs, burglar
alarms, personal-safety devices, self-defense courses and
computerized security systems."

There is a sick odor hi the air. It is the smell of a dying Second Wave
civilization.

THE ATTACK ON LONELINESS

To create a fulfilling emotional life and a sane psycho-sphere for the
emerging civilization of tomorrow, we must recognize three basic
requirements of any individual: the needs for commmumty, structure,
and meaning. Understanding how the collapse of Second Wave
society undermines all three suggests how we might begin designing a
healthier psychological environment for ourselves and our children in
the future.

To begin with, any decent society must generate a feeling of
community. Community offsets loneliness. It gives people a vitally
necessary sense of belonging. Yet today the institutions on which
community depends are crumbling in all the techno-societies. The
result is a spreading plague of loneliness.

From Los Angeles to Leningrad, teen-agers, unhappy married couples,
single parents, ordinary working people, and the

368

THE THIRD WAVE

elderly, all complain of social isolation. Parents confess that their
children are too busy to see them or even to telephone. Lonely
strangers in bars or launderettes offer what one sociologist calls "those
infinitely sad confidences." Singles' clubs and discos serve as flesh
markets for desperate divorcees.

Loneliness is even a neglected factor in the economy. How many
upper-middle-class housewives, driven to distraction by the clanging
emptiness of then* affluent suburban homes, have gone into the job
market to preserve their sanity? How many pets (and carloads of pet
food) are bought to break the silence of an empty home? Loneliness
supports much of our travel and .entertainment business. It contributes
to drug use, depression, and declining productivity. And it creates a
lucrative "lonely-hearts" industry that purports to help the lonely locate
and lasso Mr. or Ms. "Right."

The hurt of being alone is, of course, hardly new. But loneliness is now
so widespread it has become, paradoxically, a shared experience.

Community demands more than emotionally satisfying bonds between
individuals, however. It also requires strong ties of loyalty between
individuals and their organizations. Just as they miss the
companionship of other individuals, millions today feel equally cut off
from the institutions of which they are a part. They hunger for
institutions worthy of their respect, affection, and loyalty.

The corporation offers a case in point.

As companies have grown larger and more impersonal and have
diversified into many disparate activities, employees have been left

with little sense of shared mission. The feeling of community is absent.
The very term "corporate loyalty" has an archaic ring to it. Indeed,
loyalty to a company is considered by many a betrayal of self. In The
Bottom Line, Fletcher Knebel's popular novel about big business, the
heroine snaps to her executive husband: "Company loyalty! It makes
me want to vomit."

Except in Japan, where the lifetime employment system and corporate
paternalism still exist (though for a shrinking percentage of the labor
force), work relationships are increasingly transient and emotionally
unsatisfying. Even when companies make an effort to provide a social
dimension to employment — an annual picnic, a company-sponsored
bowling team, an office Christmas party — most on-the-job relationships
are no more than skin-deep.

For such reasons, few today have any sense of belonging to

THE NEW PSYCHO-SPHERE
369

something bigger and better than themselves. This warm participatory
feeling emerges spontaneously from time to time tluring crisis, stress,
disaster, or mass uprising. The great student strikes of the sixties, for
example, produced a glow of communal feeling. The antinuclear
demonstrations today do the same. But both the movements and the
feelings they arouse are fleeting. Community is in short supply.

One clue to the plague of loneliness lies in our rising level of social
diversity. By de-massifying society, by accentuating differences rather
than similarities, we help people individualize themselves. We make it
possible for each of us more nearly to fulfill his or her potential. But we
also make human contact more difficult. For the more individualized we
are, the more difficult it becomes to find a mate or a lover who has
precisely matching interests, values, schedules, or tastes. Friends are
also harder to come by. We become choosier in our social ties. But so
do others. The result is a great many ill-matched relationships. Or no
relationships at all.

The breakup of mass society, therefore, while holding out the promise
of much greater individual self-fulfillment, is at least for the present
spreading the pain of isolation. If the emergent Third Wave society is
not to be icily metallic, with a vacuum for a heart, it must attack this
problem frontally. It must restore community.

How might we begin to do this?

Once we recognize that loneliness is no longer an individual matter but
a public problem created by the disintegration of Second Wave
institutions, there are plenty of things we can do about it. We can begin
where community usually begins — in the family, by expanding its
shrunken functions.

The family, since the industrial revolution, has been progressively
relieved of the burden of its elderly. If we stripped this responsibility

from the family, perhaps the time has come to restore it partially. Only
a nostalgic fool would favor dismantling public and private pension
systems, or making old people completely dependent on their families
as they once were. But why not offer tax and other incentives for
families — including non-nuclear and unconventional families — who
look after their own elderly instead of farming them out to impersonal
old-age "homes." Why not reward, rather than economically punish,
those who maintain and solidify family bonds across generational
lines?

370

THE THIRD WAVE

The same principle can be extended to other functions of the family as
well. Families should be encouraged to take a larger — not smaller —
role in the education of the young. Parents willing to teach their own
children at home should be aided by the schools, not regarded as
freaks or lawbreakers. And parents should have more, not less,
influence on the schools.

At the same time much could be done by the schools themselves to
create a sense of belonging. Instead of grading students purely on
individual performance, some part of each student's grade could be
made dependent on the performance of the class as a whole or some
team within it. This would give early and overt support to the idea that
each of us has responsibility for others. With a bit of encouragement,
imaginative educators could come up with many other, better ways to
promote a sense of community.

Corporations, too, could do much to begin building human ties afresh.
Third Wave production makes possible decentralization and smaller,
more personal work units. Innovative companies might build morale
and a sense of belonging by asking groups of workers to organize
themselves into mini-companies or cooperatives and contracting
directly with these groups to get specific jobs done.

This breakup of huge corporations into small, self-managed units could
not merely unleash enormous new productive energies but build
community at the same time.

Norman Macrae, deputy editor of The Economist, has suggested that
"Semi-autonomous teams of perhaps six to 17 people, who choose to
work together as friends, should be told by market forces what module
of output will be paid for at what pay rates per unit of output, and then
should increasingly be allowed to produce it in their own way."

Indeed, continues Macrae, "those who devise successful group
friendship cooperatives will do a lot of social good, and perhaps will
deserve some subsidies or tax advantages." (What is particularly
interesting about such arrangements is that one could create
cooperatives within a profit-making corporation or, for that matter,
profit-making companies within the framework of a socialist production
enterprise.)

Corporations could also look hard at their retirement practices. Ejecting
an elderly worker all at once not only deprives the individual of a
regular, full-size paycheck, and takes away what society regards as a
productive role, but also truncates many social ties. Why not more
partial retirement plans, and

THE NEW PSYCHO-SPHERE

371

programs that assign semi-retired people to work for understaffed
community services on a volunteer or part-pay basis?

Another community-building device might draw retired people into
fresh contact with the young, and vice versa. Older people in every
community could be appointed "adjunct teachers" or "mentors," invited
to teach some of their skills in local schools on a part-time or volunteer
basis or to have one student, let's say, regularly visit them for
instruction. Under school supervision, retired photographers could
teach photography, car mechanics how to repair a recalcitrant engine,
bookkeepers how to keep books, and so on. In many cases a healthy
bond would grow up between mentor and "mentee" that would go
beyond instruction.

It is not a sin to be lonely and, in a society whose structures are fast
disintegrating, it should not be a disgrace. Thus a letter writer to the
Jewish Chronicle in London asks: "Why does it seem 'not quite nice' to
go to groups where it is perfectly obvious that the reason that everyone
is there is to meet people of the opposite sex?" The same question
would apply to singles' bars, discos, and holiday resorts.

The letter points out that hi the shtetls of Eastern Europe the institution
of shadchan or matchmaker served a useful purpose in bringing
marriageable people together, and that dating bureaus, marriage
services, and similar agencies are just as necessary today. "We should
be able to admit openly that we need help, human contact and a social
life."

We need many new services — both traditional and innovative — to help
bring lonely people together in a dignified way. Some people now rely
on "lonely-hearts" ads in the magazines to help them locate a
companion or mate. Before long we can be sure local or neighborhood
cable television services •will be running video ads so prospective
partners can actually see each other before dating. (Such programs,
one suspects, will have enormously high ratings.)

But should dating services be limited to providing romantic contacts?
Why not services — or places — where people might come simply to
meet and make a friend, as distinct from a lover or potential mate?
Society needs such services and, so long as they are honest and
decent, we should not be embarrassed to invent and use them.

372 THE THIRD WAVE

TELECOMMUNITY

At the level of longer-term social policy we should also move rapidly
toward "telecommunity." Those who wish community restored should
concentrate attention on the socially fragmenting impact of commuting
and high mobility. Having written in detail about this in Future Shock, I
will not retrace the argument. But one of the key steps that can be
taken toward building a sense of community into the Third Wave is the
selective substitution of communication for transportation.

The popular fear that computers and telecommunications will deprive
us of face-to-face contact and make human relations more vicarious is
naive and simplistic. In fact, the reverse might very well be the case.
While some office or factory relationships might be attenuated, bonds
in the home and the community could well be strengthened by these
new technologies. Computers and communications can help us create
community.

If nothing else, they can free larger numbers of us to give up
commuting — the centrifugal force that disperses us hi the morning,
throws us into superficial work relationships, while weakening our more
important social ties in the home and community. By making it possible
for large numbers of people to work at home (or in close-by
neighborhood work centers), the new technologies could make for
warmer, more bonded families and a closer, more finely grained
community life. The electronic cottage may turn out to be the
characteristic mom-and-pop business of the future. And it could lead,
as we have seen, to a new work-together family unit involving children
(and sometimes even expanded to take in outsiders as well).

It is not unlikely that couples who spend a lot of time working together
hi the home during the day will want to go out in the evening. (Today
the more typical pattern is for the commuter to collapse on returning
home and refuse to set foot outside.) As communications begin to
replace commuting, we can expect to see a lively proliferation of
neighborhood restaurants, theaters, pubs, and clubs, a revitalization of
church and voluntary group activity — all or mostly on a face-to-face
basis.

Nor, for that matter, are all vicarious relationships to be despised. The
issue is not simply vicariousness, but passivity and powerlessness. For
a shy person or an invalid, unable to

THE NEW PSYCHO-SPHERE

373

leave home or fearful about meeting people face to face, the emerging
info-sphere will make possible interactive electronic contact with others
who share similar interests — chess players, stamp collectors, poetry
lovers, or sports fans — dialed up instantly from anywhere in the
country.

Vicarious though they may be, such relationships can provide a far
better antidote to loneliness than television as we know it today, in
which the messages all flow one way and the passive receiver is
powerless to interact with the flickering image on the screen.

Communications, selectively applied, can serve the goal of
telecommunity.

In short, as we build a Third Wave civilization there are many things we
can do to sustain and enrich, rather than destroy, community.

THE HEROIN STRUCTURE

The reconstruction of community, however, must be seen as only a
small part of a larger process. For the collapse of Second Wave
institutions also breaks down structure and meaning in our lives.

Individuals need life structure. A life lacking in comprehensible
structure is an aimless wreck. The absence of structure breeds
breakdown.

Structure provides the relatively fixed points of reference we need.

That is why, for many people, a job is crucial psychologically, over and
above the paycheck. By making clear demands on their time and
energy, it provides an element of structure around which the rest of
their lives can be organized. The absolute demands imposed on a
parent by an infant, the responsibility to care for an invalid, the tight
discipline demanded by membership in a church or, in some countries,
a political party — all these may also impose a simple structure on life.

Faced with an absence of visible structure, some young people use
drugs to create it. "Heroin addiction," writes psychologist Rollo May,
"gives a way of life to the young person.. Having suffered under
perpetual purposelessness, his structure now consists of how to
escape the cops, how to get the money he needs, where to get his
next fix — all these give him a new web of energy in place of his
previous structureless world."

374

THE THIRD WAVE

The nuclear family, socially imposed schedules, well-defined roles,
visible status distinctions, and comprehensible lines of authority — all
these factors created adequate life structure for the majority of people
during the Second Wave era.

Today the breakup of the Second Wave is dissolving the structure in
many individual lives before the new structure-providing institutions of
the Third Wave future are laid into place. This, not merely some
personal failing, explains why for millions today daily life is experienced
as lacking any semblance of recognizable order.

To this loss of order we must also add the loss of meaning. The feeling
that our lives "count" comes from healthy relationships with the
surrounding society — from family, corporation, church, or political
movement. It also depends on being able to see ourselves as part of a
larger, even cosmic, scheme of things.

The sudden shift of social ground rules today, the smudging of roles,
status distinctions, and lines of authority, the immersion hi blip culture

and, above all, the breakup of the great thought -system, indust-reality,
have shattered the world-image most of us carry around in our skulls.

In consequence, most people surveying the world around them today
see only chaos. They suffer a sense of personal powerlessness and
pointlessness.

It is only when we put all this together — the loneliness, the loss of
structure, and the collapse of meaning attendant on the decline of
industrial civilization — that we can begin to make sense of some of the
most puzzling social phenomena of our time, not the least of which is
the astonishing rise of the cult

THE SECRET OF THE CULTS

Why do so many thousands of apparently intelligent, seemingly
successful people allow themselves to be sucked into the myriad cults
sprouting today in the widening cracks of the Second Wave system?
What accounts for the total control that a Jim Jones was able to
exercise over the lives of his followers?

It is loosely estimated today that some 3,000,000 Americans belong to
about 1 ,000 religious cults, the largest of which bear names like the
Unification Church, the Divin*

THE NEW PSYCHO-SPHERE

375

Light Mission, the Hare Krishna, and the Way, each of which has
temples or branches in most major cities. One of them alone, Sun
Myung Moon's Unification Church, claims 60,000 to 80,000 members,
publishes a daily newspaper in New York, owns a fish-packing plant in
Virginia, and has many other money -creating enterprises. Its
mechanically cheerful fund raisers are a common sight.

Nor are such groups confined to the United States. A recent
sensational lawsuit in Switzerland called international attention to the
Divine Light Center in Winterthur. "The cults and sects and
communities ... are most numerous in the United States because
America is, in this matter, too, 20 years ahead of the rest of the world,"
says the London Economist. "But they are to be found in Europe, west
and east, and in many other places." Just why is it that such groups
can command almost total dedication and obedience from their
members? Their secret is simple. They understand the need for
community, structure, and meaning. For these are what all cults
peddle.

For lonely people, cults offer, in the beginning, indiscriminate
friendship. Says an official of the Unification Church: "If someone's
lonely, we talk to them. There are a lot of lonely people walking
around." The newcomer is surrounded by people offering friendship
and beaming approval. Many of the cults require communal living. So
powerfully rewarding is (his sudden warmth and attention that cult
members are often willing to give up contact with their families and
former friends, to donate their life's earnings to the cult, to forego drugs
and even sex in return.

But the cult sells more than community. It also offers much-needed
structure. Cults impose tight constraints on behavior. They demand
and create enormous discipline, some apparently going so far as to
impose that discipline through heatings, forced labor, and their own
forms of ostracism or Imprisonment. Psychiatrist H. A. S. Sukhdeo of
the New Jer-Nt-y School of Medicine, after interviewing survivors of the
Jonestown mass suicide and reading the writings of members <»f Hie
Peoples Temple, concludes: "Our society is so free and l« u nissive,
and people have so many options to choose from they cannot make
their own decisions effectively. They others to make the decision and
they will follow." A man named Sherwin Harris, whose daughter and
ex-wife among the men and women who followed Jim Jones to «i. .nil
in Guyana, has summed it up in a sentence. "This is an

376

THE THIRD WAVE

example," Harris said, "of what some Americans will subject
themselves to in order to bring some structure into their lives."

The last vital product marketed by the cults is "meaning." Each has its
own single-minded version of reality — religious, political, or cultural.

The cult possesses the sole truth and those living in the outside world
who fail to recognize the value of that truth are pictured as either
misinformed or Satanic. The message of the cult is drummed into the
new member at all-day, all-night sessions. It is preached incessantly,
until he or she begins to use its terms of reference, its vocabulary,
and — ultimately — its metaphor for existence. The "meaning" delivered
by the cult may be absurd to the out* sider. But that doesn't matter.

Indeed, the exact, pinned-down content of the cult message is almost
incidental. Its power lies in providing synthesis, in offering an
alternative to the fragmented blip culture around us. Once the
framework is accepted by the cult recruit, it helps organize much of the
chaotic information bombarding him or her from the outside. Whether
or not that framework of ideas corresponds to outer reality, it provides
a neat set of cubbyholes in which the member can store incoming
data. It thereby relieves the stress of overload and confusion. It
provides not truth, as such, but order, and thus meaning:

By giving the cult member a sense that reality is meaningful — and that
he or she must carry that meaning to outsiders — the cult offers
purpose and coherence in a seemingly incoherent world.

The cult, however, sells community, structure, and meaning at an
extremely high price: the mindless surrender of self. For some, no
doubt, this is the only alternative to personal disintegration. But for
most of us title cult's way out is too costly.

To make Third Wave civilization both sane and democratic, we need to
do more than create new energy supplies or plug in new technology.
We need to do more than create community. We need to provide
structure and meaning as well. And once again there are simple things
we can do to get started.

LIFE-ORGANIZERS AND SEMI-CULTS At the very simplest and most
immediate level, why not

THE NEW PSYCHO-SPHERE

377

create a cadre of professional and paraprofessiomal "life-or-ganizers"?
For example, we probably need fewer psychother-apists burrowing
mole-like into id and ego, and more people who can help us, even in
little ways, to pull our daily lives to-gether. Among the most widely
heard don't -you-believe-it phrases in use today are: "Tomorrow I'll get
myself or-ganized" or "I'm getting my act together."

Vet structuring one's life under today's conditions of high social and
technological turmoil is harder and hajder to do. The breakup of normal
Second Wave structures., the over-choice of life-styles, schedules, and
educational opportunities — all, as we have seen, increase the difficulty.
For the less affluent, economic pressures impose high structure. For
the middle class, and especially their children, the reverse is true. Why
not recognize this fact?

Some psychiatrists today perform a life-organizing function. Instead of
years on the couch, they offer practical assistance in finding work,
locating a girl or boyfriend, budgeting one's money, following a diet,
and so forth. We need many more such consultants, structure-
providers, and we need feel no shame about seeking their services.

In education, we need to begin paying attention to matters routinely
ignored. We spend long hours trying to teach a variety of courses on,
say, the structure of government or the structure of the amoeba. But
how much effort goes into studying the structure of everyday life — the
way time is allocated, the personal uses of money, the places to go for
help in a society exploding with complexity? We take for granted that
young people already know their way around our social structure. In
fact, most have only the dimmest image of the way the world of work or
business is organized. Most students have no conception of the
architecture of their own city's economy, or the way the local
bureaucracy operates, or the place to go to lodge a complaint against
a merchant. Most do not even understand how their own schools —
even universities — are structured, let alone how much structures are
changing under the impact of the Third Wave.

We also need to take a fresh look at structure-providing institutions —
including cults. A sensible society should provide a spectrum of
institutions, ranging from those that are free-form to those that are
tightly structured. We need open classrooms as well as traditional
schools. We need easy-come-easy-go organizations as well as rigid
monastic orders (secular as well as religious).

378

THE THIRD WAVE

Today the gap between the total structure offered by the cult and the
seemingly total structurelessness of daily life may well be too wide.

If we find the complete subjugation demanded by many cults to be
repellent, we should perhaps encourage the formation of what might
be called "semi-cults" that lie somewhere between structureless
freedom and tightly structured regimentation. Religious organizations,
vegetarians, and other sects or groupings might actually be
encouraged to form communities in which moderate to high structure is
imposed on those who wish to live that way. These semi-cults might be
licensed or monitored to assure that they do not engage in physical or
mental violence, embezzlement, extortion, or other such practices, and
could be set up so that people in need of external structure can join
them for a six-month or one-year hitch — and then leave without
pressure or recriminations.

Some people might find it helpful to live within a semi-cult for a time,
then return to the outside world, then plug back into the organization
for a time, and so forth, alternating between the demands of high,
imposed structure and the freedom offered by the larger society.

Should this not be possible for them?

Such semi-cults also suggest the need for secular organizations that
lie somewhere between the freedom of civilian life and the discipline of
the army. Why not a variety of civilian service corps, perhaps
organized by cities, school systems, or even private companies to
perform useful community services on a contract basis, employing
young people who might live together under strict disciplinary rules and
be paid army-scale wages. (To bring these paychecks up to the
prevailing minimum wage, corps members might receive
supplementary vouchers good for university tuition or training.) A
"pollution corps," a "public sanitation corps," a "paramedic corps,'* or a
corps designed to assist the elderly — such organizations could yield
high dividends for both community and individual.

In addition to providing useful services and a degree of life-structure,
such organizations could also help bring much-needed meaning into
the lives of their members — not some spurious mystical or political
theology but the simple ideal of service to community.

Beyond all such measures, however, we shall need to integrate
personal meaning with larger, more encompassing world views. It is
not enough for people to understand (or think

THE NEW PSYCHO-SPHERE

379

they understand) their own small contributions to society. They must
also have some sense, even if inarticulate, of how they fit into the
larger scheme of things. As the Third Wave arrives we will need to
formulate sweeping new integrative world views — coherent syntheses,
not merely blips — that tie things together.

No single world view can ever capture the whole truth. Only by
applying multiple and temporary metaphors can we gain a rounded (if

still incomplete) picture of the world. But to acknowledge this axiom is
not the same as saying life is meaningless. Indeed, even if life is
meaningless hi some cosmic sense, we can and often do construct
meaning, drawing it from decent social relations and picturing
ourselves as part of a larger drama — the coherent unfolding of history.

In building Third Wave civilization, therefore, we must ga beyond the
attack on loneliness. We must also begin providing a framework of
order and purpose in life. For meaning, structure, and community are
interrelated preconditions for a livable future.

In working toward these ends, it will help to understand that the
present agony of social isolation, the impersonality, structurelessness,
and sense of meaninglessness from which so many people suffer are
symptoms of the breakdown of the past rather than intimations of the
future.

It will not be enough, however, for us to change society. For as we
shape Third Wave civilization through our own daily decisions and
actions, Third Wave civilization will hi turn shape us. A new psycho-
sphere is emerging that will fundamentally alter our character. And it is
to this — the personality of the future — that we next turn.

THE PERSONALITY OF THE FUTURE

As a novel civilization erupts into our everyday lives we are left
wondering whether we, too, are obsolete. With so many of our habits,
values, routines, and responses called into question, it is hardly
surprising if we sometimes feel like people of the past, relics of Second
Wave civilization. But if some of us are indeed anachronisms, are there
also people of the future among us — anticipatory citizens, as it were, of
the Third Wave civilization to come? Once we look past the decay and
disintegration around us, can we see the emerging outlines of the
personality of the future — the coming, so to speak, of a "new man"?

If so, it would not be the first time un homme nouveau was supposedly
detected on the horizon. In a brilliant essay, Andre Reszler, director of
the Center for European Culture, has described earlier attempts to
forecast the coming of a new type of human being. At the end of the
eighteenth century there was, for example, the "American Adam" —
man born anew in North America, supposedly without the vices and
weaknesses of the European. In the middle of the twentieth century,
the new man was supposed to appear in Hitler's Germany. Nazism,
wrote Hermann Rauschning, "is more than a religion; it is the will to
create the superman." This sturdy "Aryan" would be part peasant, part
warrior, part God. "I have seen the new man," Hitler once confided to
Rauschning. "He is intrepid and cruel. I stood in fear before him."

The image of a new man (few ever speak of a "new woman," except as
an afterthought) also haunted the Com-380

THE PERSONALITY OF THE FUTURE

381

munists. The Soviets still speak of the coming of "Socialist Man." But it
was Trotsky who rhapsodized most vividly about the future human.

"Man will become incomparably stronger, wiser and more perceptive.
His body will become more harmonious, his movements more
rhythmical, his voice more melodious. His ways of life will acquire a
powerfully dramatic quality. The average man will attain the level of an
Aristotle, of a Goethe, of a Marx."

As recently as a decade or two ago, Frantz Fanon heralded the coming
of yet another new man who would have a "new mind." Che Guevara
saw his ideal man of the future as having a richer interior life. Each
image is different.

Yet Reszler persuasively points out that behind most of these images
of the "new man" there lurks that familiar old fellow, the Noble Savage,
a mythic creature endowed with all sorts of qualities that civilization
has supposedly corrupted or worn away. Reszler properly questions
this romanticization of the primitive, reminding us that regimes which
set out consciously to foster a "new man" have usually brought
totalitarian havoc in then* wake.

It would be foolish, therefore, to herald yet once more the birth of a
"new man" (unless, now that the genetic engineers are at work, we
mean that in a frightening, strictly biological sense). The idea suggests
a prototype, a single ideal model that the entire civilization strains to
emulate. And in a society moving rapidly toward de-massification,
nothing is more unlikely.

Nevertheless, it would be equally foolish to believe that fundamentally
changed material conditions of life leave personality or, more
accurately, social character, unaffected. As we change the deep
structure of society, we also modify people. Even if one believed in
some unchanging human nature, a commonly held view I do not share,
society would still reward and elicit certain character traits and penalize
others, leading to evolutionary changes in the distribution of traits in
the population.

The psychoanalyst Erich Fromm, who has perhaps written best about
social character, defines it as "that part of their character structure that
is common to most members of the group." In any culture, he tells us,
there are widely shared traits that make up the social character. In
turn, social character shapes people so that "men* behavior is not a
matter of conscious decision as to whether or not to follow the social
pattern, but one of wanting to act as they have to act and at

382

THE THIRD WAVE

the same time finding gratification in acting according to the
requirements of the culture."

What the Third Wave is doing, therefore, is not creating some ideal
superman, some new heroic species stalking through our midst, but
producing dramatic changes in the traits distributed through society —
not a new man but a new social character. Our task, therefore, is not to

hunt for the mythic "man” but for the traits most likely to be valued by
the civilization of tomorrow.

These character traits do not simply arise from (or reflect) outside
pressures on people. They spring from the tension that exists between
the inner drives or desires of many individuals and the outer drives or
pressures of the society. But once formed, these shared character
traits play an influential role in the economic and social development of
the society.

The coming of the Second Wave, for example, was accom panied by
the spread of the Protestant Ethic with its emphasis on thrift,
unremitting toil, and the deferral of gratification-traits which channeled
enormous energies into the tasks of economic development. The
Second Wave also brought changes in objectivity-subjectivity,
individualism, attitudes toward authority, and the ability to think
abstractly, to empathize and to imagine.

For peasants to be machined into an industrial work force, they had to
be given the rudiments of literacy. They had to be educated, informed,
and molded. They had to understand that another way of life was
possible. Large numbers of people were needed, therefore, with the
capacity to imagine themselves in a new role and setting. Their minds
had to be liberated from the proximate present. Thus, just as to some
extent it had to democratize communications and politics, industrialism
was also forced to democratize the imagination.

The result of such psychocultural changes was a changed distribution
of traits — a new social character. And today we are once more at the
edge of a similar psychocultural upheaval.

The fact that we are racing away from Second Wave Orwellian
uniformity makes it difficult to generalize about the emerging psyche.
Here, even more than elsewhere in dealing with the future, we can only
speculate.

Nevertheless, we can point to powerful changes that are likely to
influence psychological development in Third Wave society. And this
leads us to fascinating questions, if not con-

THE PERSONALITY OF THE FUTURE

383

fusions. For these changes affect child-rearing, education,
adolescence, work, and even the way we form our own self-images.

And it is impossible to change all these without deeply altering the
entire social character of the future.

GROWING UP DIFFERENT

To begin with, the child of tomorrow is likely to grow up In a society far
less child-centered than our own.

The "graying" or aging of the population in all high-technology
countries implies greater public attention to the needs of the elderly

and a correspondingly reduced focus on the young. Furthermore, as
women develop jobs or careers in the exchange economy, the
traditional need to channel all their energies into motherhood is
diminished.

During the Second Wave, millions of parents lived out their own
dreams through their children — often because they could reasonably
expect their children to do better socially and economically than they
themselves had done. This expectation of upward mobility encouraged
parents to concentrate enormous psychic energies on their children.
Today many middle-class parents face agonizing disillusionment as
their children — in a far more difficult world — move down, rather than
up, the socio-economic scale. The likelihood of surrogate fulfillment is
evaporating.

For these reasons, the baby born tomorrow is likely to enter a society
no longer obsessed with — perhaps not even terribly interested in — the
needs, wants, psychological developments, and instant gratification of
the child. If so, the Dr. Spocks of tomorrow will urge a more structured
and demand-ing childhood. Parents will be less permissive.

Nor, one suspects, will adolescence be as prolonged and painful a
process as it is today for so many. Millions of children are being
brought up in single-parent homes, with working mothers (or fathers)
squeezed by an erratic economy, and with less of the luxury and time
available to the flower child generation of the 1960's.

Others, later on, are likely to be reared in work -at-home or electronic-
cottage families. Just as in many Second Wave families built around a
mom-and-pop business, we can expect the children of tomorrow's
electronic cottage to be drawn directly into the family's work tasks and
given growing responsibility from an early age.

384

THE THIRD WAVE

Such facts suggest a shorter childhood and youth but a more
responsible and productive one. Working alongside adults, children in
such homes are also likely to be less subject to peer pressures. They
may well turn out to be the high achievers of tomorrow.

During the transition to the new society, wherever jobs remain scarce,
Second Wave labor unions will undoubtedly fight to exclude young
people from the job market outside the home. Unions (and teachers,
whether unionized or not) will lobby for ever-longer years of
compulsory or near-compulsory schooling. To the extent that they
succeed, millions of young people will continue to be forced into the
painful limbo of prolonged adolescence. We may, therefore, see a
sharp contrast between young people who grow up fast because of
early work responsibilities in the electronic cottage and those who
mature more slowly outside.

Over the long pull, however, we can expect education also to change.
More learning will occur outside, rather than inside, the classroom.
Despite the pressure from unions, the years of compulsory schooling

will grow shorter, not longer. Instead of rigid age segregation, young
and old will mingle. Education will become more interspersed and
interwoven with work, and more spread out over a lifetime. And work
itself — whether production for the market or presumption for use in the
home — will probably begin earlier hi life than it has in the last
generation or two. For just such reasons, Third Wave civilization may
well favor quite different traits among the young — less responsiveness
to peers, less consumption-orientation, and less hedonistic self-
involvement.

Whether this is so or not, one thing is certain. Growing up will be
different. And so will the resultant personalities.

THE NEW WORKER

As the adolescent matures and enters the job arena, new forces come
into play on his or her personality, rewarding some traits and punishing
or penalizing others.

Throughout the Second Wave era, work in the factories and offices
steadily grew more repetitive, specialized, and time-pressured, and
employers wanted workers who were obedient, punctual, and willing to
perform rote tasks. The corresponding traits were fostered by the
schools and rewarded by the corporation.

THE PERSONALITY OF THE FUTURE 385

As the Third Wave cuts across our society, work grows less, not more,
repetitive. It becomes less fragmented, with each person doing a
somewhat larger, rather than smaller, task. Flextime and self-pacing
replace the old need for mass synchronization of behavior. Workers
are forced to cope with more frequent changes in their tasks, as well
as a blinding succession of personnel transfers, product changes, and
reorganizations.

What Third Wave employers increasingly need, therefore, are men and
women who accept responsibility, who under-stand how their work
dovetails with that of others, who can handle ever larger tasks, who
adapt swiftly to changed circumstances, and who are sensitively tuned
hi to the people around them.

The Second Wave firm frequently paid off for plodding bureaucratic
behavior. The Third Wave firm requires people who are less pre-
programmed and faster on their feet. The difference, says Donald
Conover, general manager of Corporate Education for Western
Electric, is like that between classical musicians who play each note
according to a predetermined, pre-set pattern, and jazz improvisers
who, once having decided what song to play, sensitively pick up cues
from one another and, on the basis of that, decide what notes to play
next.

Such people are complex, individualistic, proud of the ways in which
they differ from other people. They typify the de-massified work force
needed by Third Wave industry.

According to opinion researcher Daniel Yankelovich, only 56 percent of
U.S. workers — mainly the older ones — are still motivated by traditional
incentives. They are happiest with strict work guidelines and clear
tasks. They do not expect to find "meaning" in their work.

By contrast, as much as 17 percent of the work force already reflects
newer values emerging from the Third Wave. Largely young middle-
managers, they are, declares Yankelovich, the "hungriest for more
responsibility and more vital work with a commitment worthy of their
talent and skills." They seek meaning along with financial reward.

To recruit such workers, employers are beginning to offer
individualized rewards. This helps explain why a few advanced
companies (like TRW Inc., the Cleveland-based high-technology firm)
now offer employees not a fixed set of fringe benefits but a
smorgasbord of optional holidays, medical benefits, pensions, and
insurance. Each worker can tailor

388

THE THIRD WAVE

a package to his or her own needs. Says Yankelovich, "There is no
one set of incentives with which to motivate the full spectrum of the
work force." Moreover, he adds, in the mix of rewards for work, money
no longer has the same motivating power it once did.

No one suggests these workers don't want money. They certainly do.
But once a certain income level is reached they vary widely in what
they want. Additional increments of money no longer have their former
impact on behavior. When the Bank of America in San Francisco
offered assistant vice-president Richard Easley a promotion to a
branch only 20 miles away, Easley refused to accept the carrot. He
didn't want to commute. A decade ago, when Future Shock first
described the stress of job mobility, only an estimated 10 percent of
employees resisted a corporate move. The number has Jumped to
between a third and a half, according to Merrill Lynch Relocation
Management, Inc., even though moves are often accompanied by a
fatter-than-usual raise. "The balance has definitely shifted away from
saluting the company and marching off to Timbuctu toward a greater
emphasis on family and life-style," says a vice-president of the
Celanese Corporation. Like the Third Wave corporation, which must
respond to more than profit, the employee, too, has "multiple bottom
lines."

Meanwhile, the most ingrained patterns of authority are also changing.
In Second Wave firms every employee has a single boss. Disputes
among employees are taken to the boss to be resolved. In the new
matrix organizations the style is entirely different. Workers have more
than one boss at a time. People of different rank and different skills
meet in temporary, "ad-hocratic" groups. And in the words of Davis and
Lawrence, authors of a standard text on the subject: "Differences . ..
are resolved without a common boss readily available to arbitrate. ...
The assumption in a matrix is that this conflict can be healthy . . .
differences are valued and people express their views even when they
know that others may disagree."

This system penalizes workers who show blind obedience. It rewards
those who — within limits — talk back. Workers who seek meaning, who
question authority, who want to exercise discretion, or who demand
that their work be socially responsible may be regarded as
troublemakers in Second Wave industries. But Third Wave industries
cannot run without them.

Across the board, therefore, we are seeing a subtle but pro-

THE PERSONALITY OF THE FUTURE

387

found change in the personality traits rewarded by the economic
system — a change which cannot help but shape the emerging social
character.

THE PROSUMER ETHIC

It is not just child-rearing, education, and work that will influence
personality development in Third Wave civilization. Even deeper forces
are playing on tomorrow's psyche. For there is more to the economy
than jobs or paid work.

I suggested earlier that we might conceive of the economy as having
two sectors, one in which we produce goods for exchange, the other in
which we do things for ourselves. One is Ihe market or production
sector, the other the prosumer sector. And each has its own
psychological effects on us. For each promotes its own ethic, its own
set of values, and its own definition of success.

During the Second Wave the vast expansion of the market economy —
both capitalist and socialist — encouraged an acquisitive ethic. It gave
rise to a narrowly economic definition of personal success.

The advance of the Third Wave, however, is accompanied, as we have
seen, by a phenomenal increase in self-help and do-it-yourself activity,
or presumption. Beyond mere hobby-ism, this production for use is
likely to assume greater economic significance. And as it comes to
occupy more of our time and energy, it too begins to shape lives and
mold social character.

Instead of ranking people by what they own, as the market ethic does,
the prosumer ethic places a high value on what they do. Having plenty
of money still carries prestige. But other characteristics count, too.
Among these are self-reliance, the ability to adapt and survive under
difficult conditions, and the ability to do things with one's own hands —
whether to build a fence, to cook a great meal, to make one's own
clothes, or to restore an antique chest.

Moreover, while the production or market ethic praises
singlemindness, the prosumer ethic calls for roundedness instead.
Versatility is "in." As the Third Wave brings production for exchange
and production for use into a better balance in the economy, we begin
to hear a crescendo of demands for a "balanced" way of life.

388

THE THIRD WAVE

This shift of activity from the production sector to the pro-sumption
sector also suggests the coming of another kind of : balance into
people's lives. Growing numbers of workers engaged in producing for
the market spend their time dealing with abstractions — words,
numbers, models — and people known only slightly, if at all.

For many, such "headwork" can be fascinating and rewarding. But it is
often accompanied by the sense of being dissociated — cut off, as it
were, from the down-to-earth sights, sounds, textures, and emotions of
everyday existence. Indeed, much of today's glorification of handcrafts,
gardening, peasant or blue-collar fashions, and what might be called
"truck-driver chic" may be a compensation for the rising tide of
abstraction in the production sector.

By contrast, in presumption we usually deal with a more concrete,
immediate reality — in firsthand contact with things and people. As more
people divide their time, serving as part-time workers and part-time
prosumers, they are in a position to enjoy the concrete along with the
abstract, the complementary pleasures of both headwork and
handwork. The prosumer ethic makes handwork respectable again,
after 300 years of being looked down upon. And this new balance, too,
is likely to influence the distribution of personality traits.

Similarly, we have seen that with the rise of industrialism, the spread of
highly interdependent factory work encouraged men to become
objective, while staying home and working at low-interdependency
tasks promoted subjectivity among women. Today, as more women
are drawn into jobs producing for the marketplace, they too are
increasingly objec-tivized. They are encouraged to "think like a man.**
Conversely, as more men stay home, undertaking a greater share of
the housework, their need for "objectivity" is lessened. They are
"subjectivized."

Tomorrow, as many Third Wave people divide their lives between
working part-time in big, interdependent companies or organizations
and working part-time for self and family hi small autonomous,
presuming units — we may well strike a new balance between
objectivity and subjectivity in both sexes.

Instead of finding a "male" attitude and a "female" attitude, neither of
them well-balanced, the system may reward people who are healthily
able to see the world through both perspectives. Objective
subjectivists — and vice versa.

In short, with the rising importance of presumption to the
THE PERSONALITY OF THE FUTURE

389

overall economy, we touch off another racing current of psy-chological
change. The combined impact of basic changes in production and
presumption, added to the deep changes in child-rearing and
education, promises to remake our social character at least as
dramatically as the Second Wave did 100 years ago. A new social
character is cropping up in our very midst.

In fact, even if every one of these insights were to prove mistaken, if
every one of the shifts we are beginning to see were to reverse itself,
there is still one final, giant reason to expect an eruption in the psycho-
sphere. That reason is summed up in the two words "communications
revolution."

THE CONFIGURATIVE ME

The link between communications and character is complex, but
unbreakable. We cannot transform all our media of communication and
expect to remain unchanged as a people. A revolution in the media
must mean a revolution in the psyche.

During the Second Wave period, people were bathed in a sea of mass-
produced imagery. A relatively few centrally produced newspapers,
magazines, radio and television broadcasts, and movies fed what
critics termed a ""monolithic consciousness." Individuals were
continually encouraged to compare themselves to a relatively small
number of role models, and to evaluate their life-styles against a few
preferred possibilities. In consequence, the range of socially approved
personality styles was relatively narrow.

The de-massification of the media today presents a dazzling diversity
of role models and life-styles for one to measure oneself against.
Moreover, the new media do not feed us fully formed chunks, but
broken chips and blips of imagery. Instead of being handed a selection
of coherent identities to choose among, we are required to piece one
together: a con-figurative or modular "me." This is far more difficult,
and it explains why so many millions are desperately searching for
identity.,

Caught up in that effort, we develop a heightened awareness of our
own individuality — of the traits that make us unique. Our self-image
thus changes. We demand to be seen as, and treated as, individuals,
and this occurs at pre-

390

THE THIRD WAVE

cisely the time when the new production system requires more
individualized workers.

Beyond helping us to crystallize what is purely personal in us, the new
communications media of the Third Wave turn us into producers — or
rather prosumers — of our own self-imagery.

The German poet and social critic Hans Magnus En-zensberger has
noted that in yesterday's mass media the "technical distinction

between receivers and transmitters reflects the social division of labor
into producers and consumers." Throughout the Second Wave era this
meant that professional communicators produced the messages for
the audience. The audience remained powerless to respond directly to,
or to interact with, the message senders.

By Contrast, the most revolutionary feature of the new means of
communication is that many of them are interactive — permitting each
individual user to make or send images as well as merely to receive
them from the outside. Two-way cable, video cassette, cheap copiers
and tape recorders, all place the means of communication into the
hands of the individual.

Looking ahead, one can imagine a stage at which even ordinary
television becomes interactive, so that instead of merely watching
some Archie Bunker or Mary Tyler Moore of the future, we are actually
able to talk to them and influence their behavior in the show. Even
now, the Qube cable system makes it technologically possible for
viewers of a dramatic show to call on the director to speed up or slow
down the action or to choose one story ending over another.

The communications revolution gives us each a more complex image
of self. It differentiates us further. It speeds the very process by which
we "try on" different images of self and, in fact, accelerates our
movement through successive images. It makes it possible for us to
project our image electronically to the world. And nobody fully
understands what all this will do to our personalities. For in no previous
civilization have we ever had such powerful tools. We increasingly own
the technology of consciousness.

The world we are fast entering is so remote from our past experience
that all psychological speculations are admittedly shaky. What is
absolutely clear, however, is that powerful forces are streaming
together to alter social character — to

THE PERSONALITY OF THE FUTURE

391

elicit certain traits, to suppress others, and in the process to transform
us all.

As we move beyond Second Wave civilization we are doing more than
shifting from one energy system to another, or from one technological
base to the next We are revolutionizing inner space as well. In the light
of this, it would be absurd to project the past upon the future — to
picture the people of Third Wave civilization in Second Wave terms.

If our assumptions are even partially correct, individuals will vary more
vividly tomorrow than they do today. More of them are likely to grow up
sooner, to show responsibility at an earlier age, to be more adaptable,
and to evince greater individuality. They are more likely than their
parents to question authority. They will want money and will work for
it — but, except under conditions of extreme privation, they will resist
working for money alone.

Above all, they seem likely to crave balance hi their lives — balance
between work and play, between production and presumption,
between headwork and handwork, between the abstract and the
concrete, between objectivity and subjectivity. And they will see and
project themselves in far more complex terms than any previous
people.

As Third Wave civilization matures, we shall create not a Utopian man
or woman who towers over the people of the past, not a superhuman
race of Goethes and Aristotles (or Genghis Khans or Hitlers) but
merely, and proudly, one hopes, a race— and a civilization — that
deserves to be called human.

No hope for such an outcome, no hope for a safe transition to a decent
new civilization is possible, however, until we face one final imperative:
the need for political transformation. And it is this prospect — both
terrifying and exhilarating — that we explore in these final pages. The
personality of the future must be matched by a politics of the future.

THE

POLITICAL

MAUSOLEUM

It is impossible to be simultaneously blasted by a revolution in energy,
a revolution in technology, a revolution in family life, a revolution in
sexual roles, and a worldwide revolution in communications without
also facing — sooner or later — a potentially explosive political
revolution.

All the political parties of the industrial world, all our congresses,
parliaments, and supreme Soviets, our presidencies and prime
ministerships, our courts and our regulatory agencies, and our layer
upon geological layer of government bureaucracy — in short, all the
tools we use to make and enforce collective decisions — are obsolete
and about to be transformed. A Third Wave civilization cannot operate
with a Second Wave political structure..

Just as the revolutionaries who created the industrial age could not
govern with the leftover apparatus of feudalism, so today we are faced
once more with the need to invent new political tools. This is the
political message of the Third Wave.

THE BLACK HOLE

Today, although its gravity is not yet recognized, we are witnessing a
profound crisis not of this or that government but of representative
democracy itself, in all its forms. In one country after another, the
political technology of the Second Wave is sputtering, groaning, and
malfunctioning dangerously. 392

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM

393

In the United States we find an almost total paralysis of political
decision-making in connection with the life-and-death questions facing
society. Fully six years after the OPEC embargo, despite its
sledgehammer impact on the economy, despite its threat to
independence and even military security, despite interminable
congressional study, despite repeated reorganization of the
bureaucracy, despite passionate presidential pleas, the U.S. political
machinery still spins helplessly on its axis, unable to produce anything
remotely resembling a coherent energy policy.

This policy vacuum is not unique. The United States also has no
comprehensive (or comprehensible) urban policy, environmental
policy, family policy, technology policy. It does not even have — if we
listen to critics abroad — a discernible foreign policy. Nor would the
American political system have the capacity to integrate and prioritize
such policies even if they did exist. This vacuum reflects so advanced
a breakdown in decision-making that President Carter, in a wholly
unprecedented speech, was forced to condemn the "paralysis . . .
stagnation... and drift" of his own government.

This collapse of decision-making is, however, not the monopoly of one
party or one president. It has been deepening since the early 1960's,
and reflects underlying structural problems that no president —
Republican or Democrat — can overcome within the framework of the
present system. These political problems have destabilizing effects on
the other main social institutions such as the family, the school, and
the corporation.

Dozens of laws with immediate impact on family life cancel and
contradict one another, worsening the family crisis. The educational
system was flooded with construction funds at precisely the moment
when school-age population began to plummet, thus provoking an orgy
of useless school building, followed by a cutoff of funds when they are
most desperately needed for other purposes. Corporations,
meanwhile, are compelled to operate in a political environment so
volatile that they literally cannot tell from one day to-the next what
government expects of them.

First, Congress demands that General Motors and the other auto
manufacturers install catalytic converters on all new cars in the
interests of a cleaner environment. Then, after GM spends $300 million
on converters and signs a $500-million ten-year contract for the
precious metals needed for their manufacture, the government
announces that cars with

394

THE THIRD WAVE

catalytic converters emit 35 times more sulphuric acid than cars
without them.

At the same time, a runaway regulatory machine generates an
increasingly impenetrable mesh of rules — 45,000 pages of complex
new regulations a year. Twenty-seven different government agencies
monitor some 5,600 federal regulations that pertain to the manufacture

of steel alone. (Thousands of additional rules apply to the mining,
marketing, and transport operations of the steel industry.) A leading
pharmaceutical firm, Eli Lilly, spends more time filling out government
forms than doing heart-disease and cancer research. A single report
from Exxon, the oil company, to the Federal Energy Agency runs
445,000 pages — the equivalent of a thousand volumes!

This mandarin complexity weighs the economy down, while the jerky,
on-again-off-again responses of government decision-makers add to
the prevailing sense of anarchy. The political system, erratically
zigzagging from day to day, greatly complicates the struggle of our
basic social institutions for survival.

Nor is this decisional breakdown a purely American phenomenon.
Governments in France, Germany, Japan, and Britain — not to mention
Italy — exhibit similar symptoms, as do those in the Communist
industrial nations. And in Japan, a prime minister declares: "We
increasingly hear about the worldwide crisis of democracy. Its problem-
solving capability, or the so-called governability of a democracy, is
being challenged. In Japan, too, parliamentary democracy is on trial.**

The political decision-making machinery in all those countries is
increasingly strained, overworked, overloaded, drowned in irrelevant
data, and faced with unfamiliar perils. What we are seeing, therefore,
are government policy makers unable to make high priority decisions
(or making them very badly) while they chase frenziedly about making
thousands of lesser, often trivial, ones.

Even when important decisions are extruded they usually come too
late, and seldom accomplish what they are designed to do. "We've
solved every problem with legislation," says one hard-pressed British
lawmaker. "We've passed seven acts against inflation. We've
eliminated injustice numerous times. We've solved the ecology
problem. Every problem has been solved countless times by
legislation. But the problems remain. Legislation doesn't work."

An American TV announcer, reaching into the past for an analogy, puts
it differently: "Right now I feel the nation is a

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM

395

stagecoach with the horses running headlong, and a guy trying to pull
in the reins, and they are not responding."

This is why so many people — including those in high office — feel so
powerless. A leading American senator privately tells me of his deep
frustration and the feeling that he cannot accomplish anything useful.
He questions the ruin of his family life, the frantic pace of his existence,
the long hours, hectic travel, endless conferences, and perpetual
pressure. He asks, "Is it worth it?" A British M.P. poses the same
question, adding that "the House of Commons is a museum piece — a
relic!" A top White House official complains to me that even the
President, supposedly the most powerful man in the world, feels

impotent. "The President feels as though he is shouting into the
telephone — with nobody at the other end."

This deepening breakdown of the ability to make timely and competent
decisions changes the deepest power relationships in society. Under
normal, nonrevolutionary circumstances, the elites in any society use
the political system to reinforce their rule and further their ends. Their
power is defined by the ability to make certain things happen, or to
prevent certain things from happening. This presupposes, however,
their ability to predict and control events — it assumes that when they
yank on the reins, the horses will stop.

Today the elites can no longer predict the outcomes of their own
actions. The political systems through which they operate are so
antiquated and creaky, so outraced by events, that even when closely
"controlled" by the elites for their own benefit, the results often backfire.

This does not mean, one hastens to add, that the power lost by the
elites has accrued to the rest of society. Power is not transferred: it is
increasingly randomized, so that no one knows from moment to
moment who is responsible for what, who has real (as distinct from
nominal) authority, or how long that authority will last. In this seething
semi-anarchy, ordinary people crow bitterly cynical not merely about
their own "representatives" but — more ominously — about the very
possibility of being represented at all.

As a result, the Second Wave "reassurance ritual" of voting begins to
lose its power. Year by year, American voting participation decreases.
In the 1976 presidential election fully 46 percent of eligible voters
stayed home, meaning that a president was elected bv roughly one
quarter of the electorate — in reality only about one eighth of the total
popula-

396

THE THIRD WAVE

tion of the country. More recently, pollster Patrick Caddell found that
only 12 percent of the electorate still felt that voting matters at all.

Similarly, political parties are losing their drawing power. In the period
1960-1972 the number of "independents" unaf-filiated with any party in
the United States shot up 400 percent, making 1972 the first time in
more than a century that the number of independents equaled the
membership of one of the major parties.

Parallel tendencies are apparent elsewhere, too. The Labour Party,
which governed Britain until 1979, has atrophied to the point at which,
in a country of 56,000,000 people it is lucky if it can claim 100,000
active members. In Japan the Yomiuri Shimbun reports that "voters
have little faith in their governments. They feel detached from their
leaders." A wave of political disenchantment sweeps Denmark. Asked
why, a Danish engineer speaks for many when he says, "Politicians
appear useless in stopping the trends."

In the Soviet Union, writes the dissident author Victor Nekipelov, the
last decade has seen "ten years of deepening chaos, militarization,
catastrophic economic disorder, increases hi the cost of living,
insufficient basic food products, increases in crime and drunkenness,
corruption and thieving, but above all of an uncontrollable drop in
prestige of the present leadership in the eyes of the people."

In New Zealand, the vacuity of mainstream politics prompted one
protester to change his name to Mickey Mouse and enter himself as a
candidate. So many others did likewise — adopting names like Alice in
Wonderland — that Parliament rushed through a law banning anyone
from running for office if he or she had legally changed a name within
six months prior to an election.

More than anger, citizens are now expressing revulsion and contempt
for their political leaders and government officials. They sense that the
political system, which should serve as a steering wheel or stabilizer in
a change-tossed, runaway society, is itself broken, spinning and
flapping out of control.

Thus when a team of political scientists investigated Washington, D.C.,
recently to find out "who runs this place?" they came up with a simple,
crushing answer. Then* report, published by the American Enterprise
Institute, was summed up by Professor Anthony King of the University
of Essex in Britain: "The short answer . . . would have to be, 'No one.
Nobody is in charge here.'"

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM

397

Not just in the United States but in many of the Second Wave countries
being battered by the Third Wave of change, there is a spreading
power vacuum — a "black hole" in society.

PRIVATE ARMIES

The dangers implicit in this power vacuum can be gauged by glancing
briefly backward at the mid-1970's. Then, as energy and raw material
flows faltered in the wake of the OPEC embargo, as inflation and
unemployment spurted, as i he dollar plunged and Africa, Asia, and
South America began to demand a new economic deal, signs of
political pathology flared in one after another of the Second Wave
nations.

In Britain, celebrated as the home of tolerance and civility, retired
generals began to recruit private armies to impose order, and a
resurgent fascist movement, the National Front, fielded candidates in
some 90 parliamentary constituencies. Fascists and left-wingers came
close to fighting a massed battle in the London streets. In Italy the
fascists of the left, the Red Brigades, escalated their reign of
kneecapping, kidnapping, and assassination. In Poland, the
government's attempt to hike food prices to keep up with inflation
brought the country to the edge of revolt. In West Germany, wracked
by terrorist murders, a jittery establishment rushed through a series of
McCarthyite laws to suppress dissent.

It is true that these signs of political instability receded as the industrial
economies partially (and temporarily) recovered in the late 1970's.
Britain's private armies never came into play. The Red Brigades, after
killing Aldo Moro, appeared for a time to pull back for regrouping. A
new regime took over smoothly in Japan. The Polish government
made an uneasy peace with its rebels. In the United States, Jimmy
Carter, who won office by running against "the system" (and then
embraced it), managed to hang on by his fingernails despite a
disastrous decline in popularity.

Nevertheless, these evidences of instability must make us wonder
whether existing Second Wave political systems in each of the
industrial nations can survive the next round of crises. For the crises of
the 1980's and 1990's are likely to be even more severe, disruptive,
and dangerous than those just

S98 THE THIRD WAVE

past. Few informed observers believe the worst is over, and ominous
scenarios abound.

If turning off the oil spigots for a few weeks in Iran could cause
violence and chaos on gas lines in the United States, what is likely to
happen, not only in the U.S., when the present rulers of Saudi Arabia
are kicked off the throne? Is it likely that this tiny clique of ruling
families, who control 25 percent of the world's oil reserves, can cling to
power indefinitely, while intermittent warfare rages between North and
South Yemen nearby, and their own country is destabilized by floods of
petrodollars, immigrant workers, and radical Palestinians? Just how
wisely will the shell-shocked (and future-shocked) politicians in
Washington, London, Paris, Moscow, Tokyo, or Tel Aviv respond to a
coup d'etat, a religious upheaval, or a revolutionary uprising in
Riyadh — let alone to the sabotage of the oil fields at Ghawar and
Abqaiq?

How would these same overworked, nervously twitching Second Wave
political leaders, East and West, respond if, as Sheikh Yamani
predicts, frogmen were to sink a ship or mine the waters of the Strait of
Hormuz, thereby blocking half the oil shipments on which the world
depends for survival? It is scarcely reassuring to look at a map and
note that Iran, barely able to maintain domestic law and order, sits on
one bank of that strategically vital, all too narrow channel.

What happens, asks another chilling scenario, when Mexico begins in
earnest to exploit its oil — and faces a sudden, overpowering influx of
petro-pesos? Will its ruling oligarchy have the desire, much less the
technical skills, to distribute the bulk of that new wealth to Mexico's
malnourished and long-suffering peasantry? And can it do so rapidly
enough to prevent today's low-level guerrilla activity there from
exploding into a full-scale war on the doorstep of the United States? If
such a war were to break out, how would Washington respond? And
how would the huge population of Chicanes in the ghettos of Southern
California or Texas react? Can we expect even semi-intelligent
decisions about crises of such magnitude, given today's disarray in
Congress and the White House?

Economically, will governments already incapable of managing macro-
economic forces be able to cope with even wilder swings in the
international money system, or with its complete breakdown? With
currencies hardly under control, the Eurocurrency bubble still
expanding unchecked, and consumer, corporate, and government
credit ballooning, can any-

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM

399

one look forward to economic stability in the years ahead? Uiven
skyrocketing inflation and unemployment, a credit «.-i ash, or some
other economic catastrophe, we may yet see pi i vale armies in action.

Finally, what happens when, among the myriad religious cults now
flowering, some spring up to organize for political purposes? As the
major organized religions splinter under the ilc-massifyirig impact of the
Third Wave, armies of self-or-«l. lined priests, ministers, preachers, and
teachers are likely to appear — some with disciplined, perhaps even
paramilitary, political followings.

In the United States, it is not hard to imagine some new political party
running Billy Graham (or some facsimile) on a crude "law-and-order" or
"anti-porn" program with a strong authoritarian streak. Or some as yet
unknown Anita Bryant demanding imprisonment for gays or "gay-
symps." Such examples provide only a fault, glimmering intimation of
the religio-politics that may well lie ahead, even in the most secular of
societies. One can imagine all sorts of cult-based political movements
headed by Ayatollahs named Smith, Schultz, or Santini.

I am not saying these scenarios will necessarily materialize. They
could all turn out to be farfetched. But if these don't, we must assume
that other dramatic crises will erupt, even more dangerous than those
just past. And we must face the fact that our present crop of Second
Wave leaders is grotesquely unprepared to cope with them.

In fact, because our Second Wave political structures are even more
deteriorated today than they were in the 1970's, we must assume that
governments will be less competent, less imaginative, and less
farsighted in dealing with the crises of the 1980's and 1990's than they
were in the decade just past.

And this tells us that we must re-examine, from the roots up, one of our
most deeply held and dangerous political illusions.

The-Messiah Complex is the illusion that we can somehow save
ourselves by changing the man (or woman) on top.

Watching Second Wave politicians stumble and flail drunk-enly at the
problems arising from the emergence of the Third Wave, millions of
people, spurred on by the press, have ar-

400

THE THIRD WAVE

rived at a single, simple, easy-to-understand explanation of our woes:
the "failure of leadership." If only a messiah would appear on the
political horizon and put things back together again!

This craving for a masterful, macho leader is voiced today by even the
most well-meaning of people as their familiar world crumbles, as their
environment grows more unpredictable and their hunger for order,
structure, and predictability increases. Thus we hear, as Ortega y
Gasset put it during the 1930's when Hitler was on the march, "a
formidable cry, rising like the howling of innumerable dogs to the stars,
asking for someone or something to take command."

In the United States, the President is violently condemned for "lack of
leadership." In Britain, Margaret Thatcher is elected because she offers
at least the illusion of being "the Iron Lady." Even hi the Communist
industrial nations, where leadership is anything but timid, the pressure
for still "stronger leadership” is intensifying. In the U.S.S.R., a novel
appears that baldly glorifies Stalin's ability to draw the "necessary
political conclusions." The publication of Victory by Alexander
Chakovsky is seen as part of a "restalinization" drive. Little pictures of
Stalin sprout on windshields, in homes, hotels, and kiosks. "Stalin on
the windshield today," writes Victor Nekipelov, author of Institute of
Fools, "is an upsurge from below ... a protest, however paradoxical,
against the present disintegration and lack of leadership."

As a dangerous decade opens, today's demand for "leadership" strikes
at a moment when long-forgotten dark forces are stirring anew in our
midst. The New York Times reports that in France, "after more than
three decades hi hibernation, small but influential right-wing groups are
again seeking the* intellectual limelight, expounding theories on race,
biology and political elitism discredited by the defeat of Fascism in
World War II."

Prating of Aryan racial supremacy, and violently anti-American, they
control a major journalistic outlet in Le Figaro's weekly. They argue that
the races are born unequal and should be kept that way by social
policy. They lace their arguments with references to E. O. Wilson and
Arthur Jensen to lend supposedly scientific color to their virulently
antidemocratic biases.

Across the globe in Japan, my wife and I not long ago spent 45
minutes in a massive traffic pile-up watching a procession of trucks
crawl by, bearing uniformed and helmeted

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM

401

political toughs, chanting and flinging their fists skyward to protest
some government policy. Our Japanese friends tell us these proto-
storm troopers are linked to the mafia-like yakuza gangs and are

financed by powerful political figures eager to see a return to prewar
authoritarianism.

Each of these phenomena in turn has its "left" counterpart — terrorist
gangs who mouth the slogans of socialist democracy but are prepared
to impose their own brand of totalitarian leadership on society with
Kalashnikovs and plastic bombs.

In the United States, among other unsettling signs, we see the rebirth
of unabashed racism. Since 1978 a resurgent Ku Klux Klan has burned
crosses in Atlanta; ringed the city hall of Decatur, Alabama, with armed
men; fired shots at Black churches and a synagogue in Jackson,
Mississippi; and shown signs of renewed activity in twenty-one states
from California to Connecticut. In North Carolina, Klansmen who are
also avowed Nazis have killed five left-wing anti-Klan activists.

In short, the surge of demand for "stronger leadership” coincides
precisely with the recrudescence of highly authoritarian groups who
hope to profit from the breakdown of representative government. The
tinder and the spark are coming perilously close to one another.

This intensifying cry for leadership is based on three misconceptions,
the first of which is the myth of authoritarian efficiency. Few ideas are
more widely held than the notion that dictators, if nothing else, "make
the trains run on time." To-day so many institutions are breaking down
and unpredictability is so rife that millions of people would willingly
trade some freedom (someone else's, preferably) to make their
economic, social, and political trains run on time.

Yet strong leadership — and even totalitarianism — has little to do with
efficiency. There is not much evidence to suggest that the Soviet Union
today is efficiently run, though its lead-ership is assuredly "stronger"
and more authoritarian than that in the United States, France, or
Sweden. Apart from the military, the secret police, and a few other
functions vital to the perpetuation of the regime, the U.S.S.R. is, by all
ac -counts — including many in the Soviet press — a sloppy ship indeed.

It is a society crippled by waste, irresponsibility, iner-tia, and
corruption — in short, by "totalitarian inefficiency."

Even Nazi Germany, so marvelously efficient at wiping out Poles,
Russians, Jews and other "non-Aryans," was anything

402

THE THIRD WAVE

but efficient in other ways. Raymond Fletcher, a member of the British
Parliament who was educated in Germany and has remained a close
observer of German social conditions, reminds us of a forgotten reality:

"We think of Nazi Germany as a model of efficiency. In fact, Britain was
better organized for war than the Germans. In the Ruhr, the Nazis
continued to turn out tanks and armored personnel carriers well after
they no longer could find rail transport to take them away. They used
their scientists very poorly. Of 16,000 inventions of military significance
made during the war, few ever actually got into production because of

the prevailing inefficiency. The Nazi intelligence agencies wound up
spying on each other, while British intelligence was superb. While the
British were organizing everyone to contribute wrought iron fences and
saucepans to the war effort, the Germans were still producing luxury
goods. While the British drafted women early on, the Germans didn't.
Hitler himself was a paragon of indecision. The Third Reich as an
example of military or industrial efficiency is a ludicrous myth."

It takes more than strong leadership, as we shall see, to make the
trains run on time.

The second fatal fallacy in the cry for strong leadership is its unspoken
assumption that a style of leadership that worked in the past will work
in the present or future. We are continually dredging up images from
the past when we think about leadership — Roosevelt, Churchill, de
Gaulle. Yet different civilizations require vastly different leadership
qualities. And what is strong in one may be inept and disastrously
weak in another.

During First Wave, peasant-based civilization, leadership typically
derived from birth, not achievement. A monarch needed certain limited
practical skills — the ability to lead men hi combat, the shrewdness to
play off his barons against one another, the cleverness to consummate
an advantageous marriage. Literacy and broad powers of abstract
thought were not among the basic requirements. Moreover, the leader
was typically free to exercise sweeping personal authority in the most
capricious, even whimsical fashion, unchecked by constitution,
legislature, or public opinion. If approval was needed, it was only from
a small coterie of nobles, lords, and ministers. The leader able to
mobilize this support was "strong."

The Second Wave leader, by contrast, dealt hi impersonal

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM 403

and increasingly abstract power. He had many more decisions to make
on a far wider \ariety of matters, from manipulating toe media to
managing the macro-economy. His decisions had to be implemented
through a chain of organizations and agencies whose complex
relationships to one another he understood and orchestrated. He had
to be literate and capable of abstract reasoning. Instead of a handful of
barons, he had to play off a complex array of elites and sub-elites.
Moreover, his authority — even if he were a totalitarian dictator — was at
least nominally constrained by constitution, legal precedent, party
political requirements, and the force of mass opinion.

Given these contrasts, the "strongest" First Wave leader plunged into a
Second Wave political framework would have appeared even more
weak, confused, erratic, and inept than the "weakest" Second Wave
leader.

Similarly today, as we race into a new stage of civilization, Roosevelt,
Churchill, de Gaulle, Adenauer (or for that matter, Stalin) — the "strong"
leaders of industrial societies-would be as out of place and inept as
Mad King Ludwig in the White House. The search for seemingly
decisive, jut -jawed, sharply opinionated leaders — whether Kennedys,

Con-nallys, or Reagans, Chiracs or Thatchers — is an exercise in
nostalgia, a search for a father- or mother-figure based on obsolete
assumptions. For the "weakness" of today's leaders is less a reflection
of personal qualities than it is a consequence of the breakdown of the
institutions on which their power depends.

In fact, their seeming "weakness" is the exact result of their increased
"power." Thus, as the Third Wave continues to transform society,
raising it to a much higher level of diversity and complexity, all leaders
become dependent on increasing numbers of people for help in
making and implementing decisions. The more powerful the tools at a
leader's command — supersonic fighters, nuclear weapons, computers,
telecommunications — the more, not less, dependent the leader
becomes.

This is an unbreakable relationship because it reflects the rising
complexity on which power today necessarily rests. This is why the
American President can sit next to the nuclear push button, which
gives him the power to pulverize the planet, and still feel as helpless as
though there were "nobody at the other end" of his telephone line.
Power and powerless-ness are opposite sides of the same
semiconductor chip.

The emerging civilization of the Third Wave demands, for

404

THE THIRD WAVE

these reasons, a wholly new type of leadership. The requisite qualities
of Third Wave leaders are not yet entirely clear. We may well find that
strength lies not in a leader's assertiveness but precisely in his or her
ability to listen to others; not in bulldozer force but in imagination; not in
megalomania but in a recognition of the limited nature of leadership in
the new world.

The leaders of tomorrow may well have to deal with a far more
decentralized and participatory society — one even more diverse than
today's. They can never again be all things to all people. Indeed, it is
unlikely that one human being will ever embody all the traits required.
Leadership may well prove to be more temporary, collegia!, and
consensual.

Jill Tweedie, in a perceptive column in The Guardian, has sensed this
shift "It is easy to criticize ... Carter," she wrote. **lt is possible he was
(is?) a weak and vacillating man. ... But it is also just possible ... that
Jimmy Carter's major sin is his tacit recognition that, as the planet
shrinks, the problems ... are so general, so basic and so
interdependent that they cannot be solved, as once problems were, by
one man or one Government's initiative." In short, she suggests, we
are moving painfully toward a new kind of leader not because
someone thinks this is a good thing but because the nature of the
problems make it necessary. Yesterday's strong man may turn out to
be tomorrow's 90-pound weakling.

Whether or not this proves to be the case, there is one final, even more
damning flaw in the argument that some political messiah is needed to
save us from disaster. For this notion presupposes that our basic
problem is personnel. And it isn't. Even if we had saints, geniuses, and
heroes in charge, we would still be facing the terminal crisis of
representative government — the political technology of the Second
Wave era.

THE WORLD WEB

If choosing the "best" leader were all we had to worry about, our
problem could be solved within the framework of the existing political
system. In fact, however, the problem cuts far deeper. In a nutshell,
leaders — even the "best" — are crippled because the institutions they
must work through are obsolete.

Our political and governmental structures, to begin with,

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM

405

wore designed at a time when the nation-state was still coming into its
own. Each government could make more or less independent
decisions. Today, as we have seen, this is no longer possible, though
We retain the myth of sovereignty. In-ilation has become so
transnational a disease that not even Mr. Brezhnev or his successor
can prevent the contagion from crossing the border. The Communist
industrial countries, even though partially severed from the world
economy and rigidly controlled from within, are dependent upon
external sources for oil, food, technology, credit, and other necessities.
In 1979 the U.S.S.R. was forced to hike many consumer prices.
Czechoslovakia doubled the price of fuel oil. Hungary daggered its
consumers by boosting the price of electricity 51 percent. Each
decision in one country forces problems or calls for responses from the
next.

France builds a nuclear reprocessing plant at Cap de la Hague (which
is closer to London than the British Wind-scale reactor) at a place
where radioactive dust or gas, if released, would be wafted toward
Britain by the prevailing winds. Mexican oil spills imperil the Texas
coastline 500 miles away. And if Saudi Arabia or Libya raises or lowers
petroleum production quotas, it has immediate or long-range effects on
the ecology of many nations.

In this tightly wired web national leaders lost much of their
effectiveness no matter what rhetoric they employ or sabers they rattle.
Their decisions typically trigger costly, unwanted, frequently dangerous
repercussions at both the global and the local level. The scale of
government and the distribution of decision-making authority are
hopelessly wrong for today's world.

This, however, is only one of the reasons why existing political
structures are obsolete.

THE INTER-WEAVE PROBLEM

Our political institutions also reflect an out-of-date organization of
knowledge. Every government has ministries or departments devoted
to discrete fields such as finance, foreign affairs, defense, agriculture,
commerce, post office, or transportation. The United States Congress
and other legislative bodies have committees similarly set aside to deal
with problems in these fields. What no Second Wave government —
even the most centralized and authoritarian — can solve is

the inter-weave problem: how to integrate the activities of all these
units so they can produce orderly, wholistic programs instead of a
mishmash of contradictory and self-canceling

effects.

If there is one thing we should have learned in the past few decades, it
is that all social and political problems are interwoven — that energy, for
example, affects economics, which in turn affects health, which in turn
affects education, work, family life, and a thousand other things. The
attempt to deal with neatly defined problems in isolation from one
another — itself a product of the industrial mentality — creates only
confusion and disaster. Yet the organizational structure of government
mirrors precisely this Second Wave approach to

reality.

This anachronistic structure leads to interminable jurisdic-
tional power struggles, to the externalization of costs (each agency
attempting to solve its own problems at the expense of another), and to
the generation of adverse side effects. This is why each attempt by
government to cure a problem leads to a rash of new problems, often
worse than the original one.

Governments typically attempt to solve this inter-weave problem
through further centralization — by naming a "czar" to cut through the
red tape. He makes changes, blind to their destructive side effects — or
he piles on so much additional red tape himself that he is soon
dethroned. For centralization of power no longer works. Another
desperation measure is the creation of innumerable interdepartmental
committees to coordinate and review decisions. The result, however, is
the construction of yet another set of baffles and filters through which
decisions have to pass — and a further complexification of the
bureaucratic labyrinth. Our existing governments and political
structures are obsolete because they view the world through Second
Wave lenses. In turn, this aggravates another problem.

THE DECISIONAL SPEEDUP

Second Wave governments and parliamentary institutions were
designed to make decisions at a leisurely pace, suited to a world in
which it might take a week for a message to travel from Boston or New
York to Philadelphia. Today if an Ay-atollah seizes hostages in
Teheran or coughs in Qom, officials

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM

407

in Washington, Moscow, Paris, or London may have to respond with
decisions within minutes. The extreme speed of change catches
governments and politicians off guard and contributes to their sense of
helplessness and confusion, as the press makes plain. "Only three
months ago," writes Advertising Age, "the White House was telling
consumers to shop hard before spending then* bucks. Now the
government is going all out to prod consumers into spending more
freely." Oil experts foresaw the petroleum price explosion, reports Aus-
senpolitik, the German foreign policy journal, but *'not the speed of
developments." The 1974-1975 recession hit U.S. policy makers with
what Fortune magazine terms "stunning speed and severity."

Social change, too, is accelerating and putting additional pressure on
the political decision-makers. Business Week declares that in the
United States, "as long as the migration of industry and population was
gradual ... it helped to unify the nation. But within the past five years
the process has burst beyond the bounds that can be accommodated
by existing political institutions."

The politicians' own careers have accelerated, often catching them by
surprise. As recently as 1970 Margaret Thatcher forecast that, within
her lifetime, no woman would ever be appointed to a high Cabinet post
in the British government. In 1979 she herself was the Prime Minister.

In the United States, Jimmy Who? shot into the White House hi a
matter of months. What's more, although a new president does not
take office until the January following the election, Carter became the
de facto president immediately. It was Carter, not the out-going Ford,
who was battered with questions about the Middle East, the energy
crisis, and other issues almost before the ballots were counted. The
lame-duck Ford instantaneously became, for practical purposes, a
dead *luck, because political time is now too compressed, history
moving too fast to permit the traditional delays.

Similarly, the "honeymoon" with the press that a new president once
enjoyed was truncated in time. Carter, even In-fore inauguration, was
blasted for his Cabinet selections nIK! forced to withdraw his choice for
head of the CIA. I aier, less than halfway through the four-year term,
the in-'Hf'htful political correspondent Richard Reeves was already
forecasting a short career for the President because "instant
lummunications have telescoped time so much that a four-y.ir
Presidency today produces more events, more troubles,

408

THE THIRD WAVE

more information, than any eight-year Presidency did in the past."

This hotting up of the pace of political life, reflecting the generalized
speedup of change, intensifies today's political and governmental

breakdown. Put simply, our leaders — forced to work through Second
Wave institutions designed for a slower society — cannot churn out
intelligent decisions as fast as events require. Either the decisions
came too late or indecision takes over.

For example, Professor Robert Skidelsky of the School for Advanced
International Studies, Johns Hopkins University, writes, "Fiscal policy
has been virtually unusable because it takes too long to get
appropriate measures through Congress, even when a majority exists."
And this was written in 1974, long before the energy stalemate in
America entered its sixth interminable year.

The acceleration of change has overpowered the decisional capacity of
our institutions, making today's political structures obsolete, regardless
of party ideology or leadership. These institutions are inadequate not
only in terms of scale and structure but in terms of speed as well. And
even this is not all.

THE COLLAPSE OF CONSENSUS

As the Second Wave produced a mass society, the Third Wave de-
classifies us, moving the entire social system to a much higher level of
diversity and complexity. This revolutionary process, much like the
biological differentiation that occurs in evolution, helps explain one of
today's most widely noted political phenomena — the collapse of
consensus.

From one end of the industrial world to the other we hear politicians
lamenting the loss of "national purpose," the absence of the good old
"Dunkirk spirit," the erosion of "national unity," and the sudden,
bewildering proliferation of high-powered splinter groups. The latest
buzzword in Washington is "single issue group," referring to the
political organizations springing up by the thousands, usually around
what each perceives as a single burning issue: abortion, gun control,
gay rights, school busing, nuclear power, and so on. So diverse are
these interests at both the national and local levels that politicians and
officials can no longer keep track of them.

409

Mobile-home owners organize to fight for county zoning changes.
Farmers battle power transmission lines. Retired people mobilize
against school taxes. Feminists, Chicanes, M rip miners, and anti-strip
miners organize, as do single l>u rents and anti-porn crusaders. A
midwest magazine even icports formation of an organization of "gay
Nazis" — an embarrassment, no doubt, to both the heterosexual Nazis
and (lie Gay Liberation Movement

Simultaneously, national mass organizations are having trouble
holding together. Says a participant at a conference of voluntary
organizations, "Local churches are not following the national lead any
more." A labor expert reports that instead of a single unified political
drive by the AFL-CIO, affiliated unions are increasingly mounting their
own campaigns for their own ends.

The electorate is not merely breaking into splinters. The splinter groups
themselves are increasingly transitory, springing up, dying out, turning
over more and more rapidly, and forming a yeasty, hard-to-analyze
flux. "In Canada," says one government official, "we now assume the
life-span of the new voluntary organizations will be six to eight months.
There are more groups and they are more ephemeral." In this way,
acceleration and diversity combine to create a totally new kind of body
politic.

These same developments also sweep into oblivion our notions about
political coalitions, alliances, or united fronts. In a Second Wave
society a political leader could glue together half a dozen major blocs,
as Roosevelt did in 1932, and expect the resulting coalition to remain
locked in position for many years. Today it is necessary to plug
together hundreds, even thousands, of tiny, short-lived special interest
groups, and the coalition itself will prove short-lived as well. It may
cleave together just long enough to elect a president, then break apart
again the day after election, leaving him without a base of support for
his programs.

This de-massification of political life, reflecting all the deep trends we
have discussed in technology, production, communications, and
culture, further devastates the politicians' ability to make vital
decisions. Accustomed to juggling a few well-organized and clearly
organized constituencies, they suddenly find themselves besieged. On
all sides, countless new constituencies, fluidly organized, demand
simultaneous attention to real but narrow and unfamiliar needs.

Specialized demands flood in to legislatures and bureau-

410

THE THIRD WAVE

cracies through every crack, with every mailbag and messenger, over
the transom and under the door. This tremendous pile-up of demands
leaves no time for deliberation. Furthermore, because society is
changing at an accelerating pace and a decision delayed may be far
worse than no decision at all, everyone demands instant response.
Congress, as a result, is kept so busy, according to Representative N.
Y. Mineta, a California Democrat, that "guys meet each other coming
and going. It doesn't allow for a coherent train of thought"

Circumstances differ from country to country, but what does not differ
is the revolutionary challenge posed by the Third Wave to obsolete
Second Wave institutions — too slow to keep up with the pace of
change and too undifferentiated to cope with the new levels of social
and political diversity. Designed for a much slower and simpler society,
our institutions are swamped and out of synch. Nor can this challenge
be met by merely tinkering with the rules. For it strikes at that most
basic assumption of Second Wave political theory: the concept of
representation.

Thus the rise of diversity means that, although our political systems are
theoretically founded on majority rule, it may be impossible to form a
majority even on issues crucial to survi\al. In turn, this collapse of
consensus means that more and more governments are minority
governments, based on shifting and uncertain coalitions.

The missing majority makes a mockery of standard democratic
rhetoric. It forces us to question whether, under the convergence of
speed and diversity, any constituency can ever be "represented." In a
mass industrial society, when people and their needs were fairly
uniform and basic, consensus was an attainable goal. In a de-
massified society, we not only lack national purpose, we also lack
regional, statewide, or city-wide purpose. The diversity in any
congressional district or parliamentary constituency, whether in France
or Japan or Sweden, is so great that its "representative" cannot
legitimately claim to speak for a consensus. He or she cannot
represent the general will for the simple reason that there is none.

What, then, happens to the very notion of "representative democracy"?

To ask this question is not to attack democracy. (We shall shortly see
how the Third Wave opens the way to an enriched and enlarged
democracy.) But it makes one fact inescapably plain: not only our
Second Wave institutions but the very assumptions on which they were
based are obsolete.

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM

411

Built to the wrong scale, unable to deal adequately with transnational
problems, unable to deal with interrelated problems, unable to keep up
with the accelerative drive, unable to cope with the high levels of
diversity, the overloaded, obsolete political technology of the industrial
age is breaking up under our very eyes.

THE DECISIONAL IMPLOSION

Too many decisions, too fast, about too many strange and unfamiliar
problems — not some imagined "lack of leadership" — explain the gross
incompetence of political and governmental decisions today. Our
institutions are reeling from a decisional implosion.

Working with out-of-date political technology, our capacity for effective
governmental decision-making is deteriorating rapidly. "When all the
decisions had to be made in the White House,*' wrote William
Shawcross in Harper's magazine, discussing the Nixon-Kissinger
Cambodian policy, "there was little time for considering fully any one of
them." In fact, the White House is so squeezed for decisions — on
everything from air pollution, hospital costs, and nuclear power to the
elimination of hazardous toys (!) — that one presidential adviser
confided to me, "We are all suffering from future shock here!"

Nor are the executive agencies much better off. Each department is
crushed under the mounting decision load. Each is compelled to
enforce countless regulations and to generate vast numbers of
decisions daily, under tremendous accelerative pressures.

Thus, a recent investigation of the U.S. National Endowment for the
Arts found that its council spent all of four and i half minutes
considering each class of grant applications. "The number of
applications . . . have far outstripped the ability of the NBA to make
quality decisions," the report declared.

Few good studies of this decisional logjam exist. One of the best is
Trevor Armbrister's analysis of the 1968 Pueblo incident involving the
capture of a U.S. spy ship by the North Koreans and a dangerous
showdown between the two countries. According to Armbrister, the
Pentagon official who performed the "risk evaluation" on the Pueblo
mission, and approved it, had only a few hours to appraise the risks of
76

412

THE THIRD WAVE

different proposed military missions. The official subsequently refused
to estimate how much time he had actually spent considering the
Pueblo.

But, in a revealing quote cited by Armbrister, a Defense Intelligence
Agency official explained: "The way it probably worked ... is that he got
the book on his desk one morning at nine o'clock with orders to return
it by noon. That book is the size of a Sears, Roebuck catalogue. It
would be a physical impossibility for him to study each mission hi
detail." Nevertheless, under the pressure of time, the risk on the
Pueblo mission was termed "minimal." On average, if the DIA agent is
correct, each military mission evaluated that morning received less
than two and a half minutes' consideration. No wonder things don't
work.

Pentagon officials, for example, have lost track of $30 billion in foreign
weapons orders and do not know whether this reflects colossal errors
in accounting, or a failure to bill the purchasers for the full amounts
due, or whether the money was dribbled away on other things entirely.
This multibillion-dollar bungle, according to a Department of Defense
comptroller, has the "lethal potential of a loose cannon rolling around
our deck." He confesses, "The sad fact is that we don't really know
how big this [confusion] really is. It will probably be five years before
we'll be able to sort [it all] out." And if the Pentagon, with its computers
and surefire information systems, is becoming too large and complex
to manage properly, as may well be the case, what about the
government as a whole?

The old decision-making institutions increasingly mirror the disarray hi
the outside world. Carter adviser Stuart Eizenstat speaks of "the
fragmentation of society into interest groups" and the corresponding
"fragmentation of congressional authority into subgroups." Faced with
this new situation, a president can no longer easily impose his will on
Congress.

Traditionally, an incumbent president could cut a deal with half a dozen
elderly and powerful committee chairmen, and expect them to deliver

the votes necessary to approve his legislative program. Today
congressional committee chairmen and women can no more deliver
the votes of the junior members of Congress than the AFL-CIO or the
Catholic Church can deliver the votes of their followers. Unfortunate as
It may seem to old-timers and hard-pressed president”, people —
including members of Congress — are doing more of their own thinking,
and taking orders less submissively. All

THE POLITICAL MAUSOLEUM

413

this makes it impossible, however, for Congress, as presently
structured, to devote sustained attention to any issue or to respond
quickly to the nation's needs.

Referring to the "frenetic schedule," a report by the Congressional
Clearinghouse on the Future summarizes the situation vividly:
"Increasing complexity and speed-of-light crises, such as votes in one
week on gas deregulation, Rhodesia, the Panama Canal, a new
Department of Education, food stamps, AMTRAK authorization, solid
waste disposal, and endangered species, are turning Congress, once
a center for careful and thoughtful debate . . . into the laughing stock of
the nation."

Obviously, political processes vary from one industrial country to the
next, but similar forces are at work on all of them. "The United States is
not the only country that seems confused and stagnant," declares U.S.
News & World Report. "Take a look at the Soviet Union. ... No
response to U.S. nuclear-arms-control proposals. Long delays in
negotiating trade agreements with both socialist and capitalist nations.
Confused treatment of French President Giscard d'Estaing during a
state visit. Indecision over the Mideast policy. Contradictory calls for
West Europe's Communists to confront and cooperate with home
governments. . . . Even in a one-party system it is almost impossible to
project firm policies — or re-ipond quickly on complex issues."

In London a member of Parliament tells us that central government is
"grossly overloaded," and Sir Richard Marsh, a former Cabinet
minister, now head of the British Newspaper Publishers Association,
declares that "the Parliamentary •Iructure has remained relatively
unchanged over the past 250 years and it's just not geared to the sort
of managerial decision-making necessary today. . . . The whole thing is
to-lully ineffectual," he says, and the "Cabinet is not much I bptter."

What about Sweden, with its shaky coalition government hnrely able to
resolve the nuclear issue that has torn the country apart for nearly a
decade? Or Italy, with its terrorism Km I recurrent political crises —
unable even to form a govern-

-iii for six months?

What we confront is a new and menacing truth. The po-||lllcal shudders
and crises we face cannot be solved by lead-|r» — strong or weak — so
long as those leaders are compelled operate through inappropriate,
broken down, overloaded iNlifutions.

414

THE THIRD WAVE

A political system must not only be able to make and enforce
decisions; it must operate on the right scale, it must be able to
integrate disparate policies, it must be able to make decisions at the
right speed, and it must both reflect and respond to the diversity of
society. If it fails on any of these points it courts disaster. Our problems
are no longer a matter of "left-wing" or "right-wing," "strong leadership”
or "weak." The decision system itself has become a menace.

The truly astonishing fact today is that our governments continue to
function at all. No corporation president would try to run a large
company with a table of organization first sketched by the quill pen of
some eighteenth-century ancestor whose sole managerial experience
consisted of running a farm. No sane pilot would attempt to fly a
supersonic jet with the antique navigation and control instruments
available to Bleriot or Lindbergh. Yet this is approximately what we are
trying to do politically.

The rapid obsolescence of our Second Wave political systems, in a
world bristling with nuclear weapons and poised delicately on the edge
of economic or ecological collapse, creates an extreme threat for the
entire society — not merely for the "outs" but for the "ins," not merely for
the poor but for the rich, and for the non-industrial parts of the world as
well. For the immediate danger to all of us lies not so much in the
calculated uses of power by those who have it, as in the uncalculated
side effects of decisions ground out by politico-bureaucratic decision
machines so dangerously anachronistic that even the best of intentions
can eventuate in murderous outcomes.

Our so-called "contemporary" political systems are copied from models
invented before the advent of the factory system — before canned food,
refrigeration, gaslight, or photography, before the Bessemer furnace or
the introduction of the typewriter, before the invention of the telephone,
before Or-ville and Wilbur Wright took whig, before the automobile and
the airplane shrunk distance, before radio and television began
working their alchemy on our minds, before Auschwitz industrialized
death, before nerve gas and nuclear missiles, before computers,
copying machines, birth control pills, transistors, and lasers. They were
designed in an intellectual world that is almost unimaginable — a world
that was pre-Marx, pre-Darwin, pre-Freud and pre-Einstein.

This, then, is the single most important political issue fac-

415

ing us: the obsolescence of our most basic political and governmental
institutions.

As we are jolted by crisis after crisis, aspiring Hitlers and Siulins will
crawl from the wreckage and tell us that the time lias come to solve our
problems by throwing away not only our obsolete institutional hulks but
our freedom as well. As we race into the Third Wave era, those of us

who want to ex-p.md human freedom will not be able to do so by
simply defending our existing institutions. We shall — like America's
founding parents two centuries ago — have to invent new ones.

TWENTY-FIRST

CENTURY

DEMOCRACY

To the Founding Parents:

You are the revolutionists dead. You are the men and women, the
farmers, merchants, artisans, lawyers, printers, pamphleteers,
shopkeepers, and soldiers who together created a new nation on the
distant shores of America. You include the fifty-five who came together
in 1787 to hammer out, during a broiling summer in Philadelphia, that
astonishing document called the Constitution of the United States. You
are the inventors of a future that became my present.

That piece of paper, with the Bill of Rights added in 1791, is clearly one
of the stunning achievements of human history. I, like so many others,
am continually forced to ask myself how you managed — how you were
able, in the midst of bitter social and economic turmoil, under the most
immediate pressures — to muster so much awareness of the emerging
future. Listening to the distant sounds of tomorrow, you sensed that a
civilization was dying and a new one was being born.

I conclude you were driven to it — were compelled, carried along by the
tidal force of events, fearing the collapse of an ineffectual government
paralyzed by inappropriate principles and obsolete structures.

Seldom has so majestic a piece of work been done by men of such
sharply divergent temperaments — brilliant, antagonistic, and egotistic
men — men passionately committed to diverse regional and economic
interests, yet so upset and outraged by the terrible "inefficiencies" of an
existing government as to draw together and propose a radically new
one based on startling principles. 416

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY

417

Even now these principles move me, as they have moved «mmtless
millions around the planet. I confess it difficult for ilK to read certain
passages of Jefferson or Paine, for exam-HO, without being brought to
the edge of tears by their IM .inly and meaning.

I want to thank you, the revolutionary dead, for having inmle possible
for me a half-century of life as an American i iir/.en under a
government of laws, not men, and particularly for that precious Bill of
Rights, which has made it possible for me to think, to express
unpopular views, however foolish ui mistaken at times — indeed, to
write what follows without fi-iir of suppression.

For what I now must write can all too easily be misunder-ilood by my
contemporaries. Some will no doubt regard it as Ni-ditious. Yet it is a
painful truth I believe you would have quickly grasped. For the system
of government you fash-hmcd, including the very principles on which
you based it, is Increasingly obsolete, and hence increasingly, if
inadvertently, oppressive and dangerous to our welfare. It must be
radically changed and a new system of government invented — a
democracy for the twenty-first century.

You knew, better than we today, that no government, no political
system, no constitution, no charter or state is permanent, nor can the
decisions of the past bind the future forever. Nor can a government
designed for one civilization tope adequately with the next.

You would have understood, therefore, why even the Con-Niilution of
the United States needs to be reconsidered, and nliered — not to cut
the federal budget or to embody this or i hat narrow principle, but to
expand its Bill of Rights, taking necount of threats to freedom
unimagined in the past, and to create a whole new structure of
government capable of making intelligent, democratic decisions
necessary for our survival In a new world.

I come with no easy blueprint for tomorrow's constitution. I mistrust
those who think tfiey already have the answers when we are still trying
to formulate the questions. But the time has come for us to imagine
completely novel alternatives, to discuss, dissent, debate, and design,
from the ground up, the democratic architecture of tomorrow.

Not in a spirit of anger or dogmatism, not hi a sudden impulsive spasm,
but through the widest consultation and peaceful public participation,
we need to join together to reconstitute America.

418

THE THIRD WAVE

You would have understood this need. For it was one of your
generation — Jefferson — who, in mature reflection, declared: "Some
men look at constitutions with sanctimonious reverence and deem
them like the ark of the covenant, too sacred to be touched. They
ascribe to the men of the preceding age a wisdom more than human,
and suppose what they did to be beyond amendment.... I am certainly
not an advocate for frequent and untried changes in laws and
constitutions . . / But I also know that laws and institutions must go
hand in hand with the progress of the human mind. . . .As new
discoveries are made, new truths disclosed, and manners and opinions
change with the change of circumstances, institutions must advance
also, and keep pace with the times."

For this wisdom, above all, I thank Mr. Jefferson, who helped create
the system that served us so well for so long, and that now must, hi its
turn, die and be replaced.

Alvin Tomer Washington, Connecticut

An imaginary letter . . . Surely in many nations there must be others
who, given the opportunity, would express similar sentiments. For the
obsolescence of many of today's governments is not some secret I
alone have discovered. Nor is it a disease of America alone.

The fact is that building a new civilization on the wreckage of the old
involves the design of new, more appropriate political structures in
many nations at once. This is a painful yet necessary project that is
mind-staggering in scope and will no doubt take decades to complete.

In all likelihood it will require a protracted battle to radically overhaul —
or even scrap — the United States Congress, the Central Committees
and Politburos of the Communist industrial states, the House of
Commons and the House of Lords, the French Chamber of Deputies,
the Bundestag, the Diet, the giant ministries and entrenched civil
services of many nations, the constitutions and court systems — in
short, much of the unwieldy and increasingly unworkable apparatus of
supposedly representative governments.

Nor will this wave of political struggle stop at the national level. Over
the months and decades ahead, the entire "global law machine" — from
the United Nations at one end to the local city or town council at the
other — will eventually face a mounting, ultimately irresistible, demand
for restructuring

All these structures will have to be fundamentally altere

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY

419

not because they are inherently evil, nor even because they are
controlled by this or that class or group, but because they are
increasingly unworkable — no longer fitted to the needs a radically
changed world.

This task will involve multimillions of people. I ais radical overhaul is
rigidly resisted it may well trigger bloodshed How peaceful the process
turns out to be will depen-many factors, therefore — on how flexible or
intransigent tn< existing elites prove to be, on whether the change is
acce ated by economic collapse, on whether or not external t and
military interventions occur. Clearly the risks are great.

Yet the risks of not overhauling our political instit are even greater, and
the sooner we begin, the safer

To build workable governments anew — and to carry out what may well
be the most important political task of our lifetimes — we will have to
strip away the accumulated cliches of the Second Wave era. And we
will have to rethink political life in terms of three key principles. .

Indeed, these may well turn out to be the root prin the Third Wave
governments of tomorrow.

MINORITY POWER

The first, heretical principle of Third Wave government is that of
minority power. It holds that majority rule, the key 1< gitimating
principle of the Second Wave era, is increasingly obsolete. It is not
majorities but minorities that count. And our political systems must
increasingly reflect that fact. A

Expressing the beliefs of his revolutionary generation, n was Jefferson,
once again, who asserted that governments must behave with
"absolute acquiescence in the decisions ol the majority." The United
States and Europe — still at tl dawn of the Second Wave era — were just
beginning the long process that would turn them eventually into
industrial masi societies. The concept of majority rule perfectly 1 needs
of these societies. . r

Today, as we have seen, we are leaving mdusti behind and rapidly
becoming a de-massified society. In conse quence it is growing
increasingly difficult — often impossible — to mobilize a majority or even
a governing coalition. This why Italy for six months and the
Netherlands for five have gone without governments altogether. In the
United States,

420

THE THIRD WAVE

says political scientist Walter Dean Burnham of the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, "I don't see the basis for any positive majority
on anything today."

Because their legitimacy depended on it, Second Wave elites always
claimed to speak on behalf of the majority. The United States
government was "of ... by ... and for the people." The Soviet
Communist Party spoke for the "working class." Mr. Nixon claimed to
represent America's "Silent Majority." And in the United States today,
neo-Conservative intellectuals attack the demands of newly vocal
minorities like Blacks, feminists, or Chicanes, and claim to speak for
the interests of the great, solid, moderate, middle-of-the-road majority.

Headquartered in the great universities of the Northeast and think
tanks in Washington, seldom setting foot in places like Marietta, Ohio,
or Salina, Kansas, academic neo-Conser-vatives apparently regard
"Middle America" as a great, unwashed, uniform "mass" of more or
less ignorant, anti-intellectual blue-collar hardhats and white-collar
suburbanites. Yet these groups are far less uniform or monochromatic
than they appear to intellectuals and politicians at a distance.
Consensus is just as hard to find in Middle America as elsewhere — at
best it is flickering, intermittent, and limited to a very few issues. The
neo-Conservatives may well be cloaking their anti-minority policies in
the mantle of a mythical, rather than real, majority.

Indeed, the very same is true at the other end of the political spectrum.
In many Western European countries, socialist and communist parties
claim to speak for the "working J masses." Yet the farther we move
beyond industrial mass society, the less tenable the Marxist
assumptions. For both masses and classes lose much of their
significance in the emerging Third Wave civilization.

In place of a highly stratified society, in which a few major blocs ally
themselves to form a majority, we have a configur- ' ative society — one
in which thousands of minorities, many of | them temporary, swirl and
form highly novel, transient patterns, seldom coalescing into a 51
percent consensus on major; issues. The advance of Third Wave
civilization thus weakens the very legitimacy of many existing
governments.

The Third Wave also challenges all of our conventional assumptions
about the relationship of majority rule to social \ justice. Here too, as in
so many other matters, we are watching a startling historic flip-flop.
Throughout the era of;

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY

421

Second Wave civilization the fight for majority rule was humane and
liberating. In still-industrializing countries, like Nouth Africa today, it
remains so. In Second Wave societies, majority rule almost always
meant a fairer break for the poor. For the poor were the majority.

Today, however, in countries shaken by the Third Wave, precisely the
opposite is often the case. The truly poor no longer necessarily have
numbers on their side. In a good many countries they — like everyone
else — have become a minority. And barring economic holocaust, they
will remain so.

Not only is majority rule, therefore, no longer adequate as it
legitimating principle, it is no longer necessarily humanizing or
democratic in societies moving into the Third Wave.

Second Wave ideologues routinely lament the breakup of mass
society. Rather than seeing in this enriched diversity an opportunity for
human development, they attack it as "fragmentation" and
"Balkanization" and attribute it to the moused "selfishness" of
minorities. This trivial explanation nubstitutes effect for cause. For the
rising activism of minorities IN not the result of a sudden onset of
selfishness; it is, among olher things, a reflection of the needs of a new
system of production which requires for its very existence a far more
varied, colorful, open, and diverse society than any we have ever
known.

The implications of this fact are enormous. It means, for example, that
when the Russians try to suppress the new diversity, or cork up the
political pluralism that comes with it, they actually (to use their own
jargon) "fetter the means of production" — they slow down the economic
and technological transformation of society. And we hi the noncommu-
nist world face the same choice: we can either resist the Ihrust toward
diversity, in a futile last-ditch effort to save our* Second Wave political
institutions, or we can acknowledge diversity and change those
institutions accordingly.

The former strategy can only be implemented by totali-tnrian means
and must result in economic and cultural stagnation; the latter leads

toward social evolution and a minority-based twenty-first-century
democracy.

To reconstitute democracy in Third Wave terms, we need lo jettison
the frightening, but false, assumption that increased diversity
automatically brings increased tension and conflict in society. Indeed,
the exact reverse can be true. Con-lliet in society is not only
necessary, it is, within limits, desir-

422

THE THIRD WAVE

able. But if one hundred men all desperately want the same brass ring,
they may be forced to fight for it. On the other hand, if each of the
hundred has a different objective, it is for more rewarding for them to
trade, cooperate, and form symbiotic relationships. Given appropriate
social arrangements, diversity can make for a secure and stable
civilization.

It is the lack of appropriate political institutions today that unnecessarily
sharpens conflict between minorities to the knife-edge of violence. It is
the lack of such institutions that makes minorities intransigent. It is the
absence of such institutions that makes the majority harder and harder
to find.

The answer to these problems is not to stifle dissent or to charge
minorities with selfishness (as though the elites and their experts are
not similarly self-interested). The answer lies in imaginative new
arrangements for accommodating and le-gitimating diversity — new
institutions that are sensitive to the rapidly shifting needs of changing
and multiplying minorities.

The rise of a de-massified civilization brings to the surface deep,
unsettling questions about the future of majority rule and the entire
mechanistic system of voting to express prefer-ences. Some day,
future historians may look back on voting, and the search for majorities
as an archaic ritual engaged in by communicational primitives. Today,
however, in a dangerous world, we cannot afford to delegate total
power to anyone, we cannot surrender even the weak popular
influence that exists under majoritarian systems, and we cannot allow
tiny minorities to make vast decisions that tyrannize all other minorities.

This is why we must drastically revise the crude Second Wave
methods by which we pursue the elusive majority. We need new
approaches designed for a democracy of minori-ties — methods whose
purpose is to reveal differences rather than to paper them over with
forced or fake majorities based on exclusionary voting, sophistic
framing of the issues, Of rigged electoral procedures. We need, in
short, to modernize the entire system so as to strengthen the role of
diverse mi norities yet permit them to form majorities.

To do so, however, will require radical changes in many our political
structures — starting with the very symbol of democracy, the ballot box.

In Second Wave societies, voting to determine the popular will
provided an important source of feedback for the ruling elites. When
conditions for one reason or another became in

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY 423

tolerable for the majority, and 51 percent of the voters registered their
pain, the elites could, at a minimum, shift parties, alter policies, or
make sOnie other accommodation.

Even m yesterday's iflass society, however, the 51 percent principle
was a decidedly blunt, purely quantitative instrument. Voting to
determine the majority tells us nothing about the quality of people's
views. It can tell us how many people, at a given moment, want X, but
not how badly they want it. Above all, it tells us oothing about what
they would be willing to trade off for X— crucial information in a society
made up of many minorities.

Nor does it signal us when a minority feels so threatened, or attaches
such life-and-death significance to a single issue, that its views should
perhaps receive more than ordinary weight.

In a mass society these well-known weaknesses of majority rule were
tolerated because, among other things, most minorities lacked
strategic power to disrupt the system. In today's finely wired society, in
tvhich all of us are members of minority groups, that is no longer true.

For a de-massified Third Wave society the feedback systems of the
industrial p A st are entirely too crude. Thus we will have to use voting,
and the polls, in a radically new way.

Instead of seeking simpleminded yes-or-no votes, we need to identify
potential tradeoffs with questions like: "If I give up my position on
abortion* will you give up yours on defense spending or nucleaf
power?" or "If I agree to a small additional tax on my personal income
next year, to be earmarked for your project, what will you offer in
return?"

In the world we are racing into, with its rich communications
technologies, there are many ways for people to register such views
without ever setting foot in a polling booth. And there are also ways, as
v A e shall see in a moment, to feed these into the political decision-
making process.

We may also want to de-rig our voting laws to eliminate anti-minority
biases. There are many ways to do this. One quite conventional
method would be to adopt some variant of cumulative voting, as used
by many corporations today to protect the rights of minofity
stockholders. Such methods allow voters to register not tf»ly their
preferences but the intensity and rank order of their choices.

We shall almost certainly have to discard our obsolete party structures,
designed for a slowly changing world of mass movements and mass
merchandising, and invent tern-

porary modular parties that service changing configurations of
minorities — plug-in/plug-out parties of the future.

We may need to appoint "diplomats" or "ambassadors" whose job is
not to mediate between countries but between minorities within each
country. We may have to create quasi-political institutions to help
minorities — whether professional, ethnic, sexual, regional, recreational,
or religious — to form and break alliances more quickly and easily.

We may, for instance, need to provide arenas in which different
minorities, on a rotating, perhaps even random basis, are brought
together to trade problems, negotiate deals, and resolve disputes. If
doctors, motorcyclists, computer programmers, Seventh-Day
Adventists and Gray Panthers were brought together, with assistance
from facilitators trained in issue clarification, priority setting, and
dispute resolution, sur-' prising and constructive alliances might be
formed.

At a minimum, differences could be exposed and the basis for political
barter explored. Such measures will not (and should not) eliminate all
conflict. But they can elevate social and political strife to a more
intelligent, potentially construe-tive level — especially if they are linked
to long-range goal setting.

Today the very complexity of issues inherently provides a greater
variety of bargainable points. Yet the political system is not structured
to take advantage of this fact Potential alliances and trades go
unnoticed — thus unnecessarily raising; tensions between groups while
further straining and overloading existing political institutions.

Finally, we may well need to empower minorities to regulate more of
their own affairs, and encourage them to formulate long-range goals.

We might, for example, help the people in a specific neighborhood, in a
well-defined subculture, or in an ethnic group, to set up their own youth
courts under the supervision of the state, disciplining their own young
people rather than relying on the state to do so. Such institutions would
build community and identity, and contribute to law and order, while
relieving the overburdened government institutions of unnecessary
work.

We may, however, find it necessary to go far beyond such reformist
measures. To strengthen minority representation in a political system
designed for a de-massified society, we may even eventually have to
elect at least some of our officials in the oldest way of all: by drawing
lots. Thus some people

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY

425

have seriously suggested choosing members of the legislature or
parliament of the future the way we choose jury members or armies
today.

Theodore Becker, professor of law and political science at the
University of Hawaii, asks, "Why is it that important life and death

decisions can be made by the people serving on. . . * juries, but
decisions on how much money should be spent on child care centers
and defense spending are reserved for their 'representatives'?"

Charging that the existing political arrangements systematically
shortchange minorities, Becker, a constitutional authority, reminds us
that while nonwhites make up some 20 percent of the American
population, they held (in 1976) only 4 percent of the seats in the House
of Representatives and only 1 percent in the Senate. Women, who
comprise over 50 percent of the population, held only 4 percent of the
seats in the House — and none in the Senate. Poor people, young
people, smart but inarticulate people, and many other groups are
similarly disadvantaged. Nor is this merely true of the United States. In
the Bundestag only 7 percent of the seats are held by women, and
similar biases are evident in many other governments as well. Such
gross distortions cannot but blunt the sensitivity of the system to the
needs of underrep-resented groups.

Says Becker, "Between 50 and 60 percent of the American Congress
should be chosen at random from the American people in much the
same way they are pressed into "military service through drafts when
they are deemed necessary." Startling as the suggestion is at first
blush, it forces us to consider seriously whether randomly chosen
representatives would (or could) do worse than those chosen through
today's methods.

If we let ourselves imagine freely for the moment, we can come up with
many other surprising alternatives. Indeed, we now have the
techniques necessary to choose far more truly representative samples
than the jury system or the draft, with their preferential exclusions, ever
did. We can build an even more innovative congress or parliament of
the future — and do it, paradoxically, with less disturbance of tradition.

,We don't have to pick a group of people by lot and literally trundle
them off, like so many Mr. Smiths, to Washington, London, Bonn,
Paris, or Moscow. We could, if we chose, keep our elected
representatives, allowing them, however, to cast only 50 percent of the
votes on any issue, while turning

426

THE THIRD WAVE

the other 50 percent of the votes over to a random sample of the
public.

By using computers, advanced telecommunications, and polling
methods, it has become simple not only to select a random sample of
the public but to keep updating that sample from day to day and to
provide it with up-to-the-minute information on the issues at hand.

When a law is needed, the full complement of traditionally elected
representatives, meeting together in the traditional way, under the
Capitol dome or in Westminster, or in the Bundeshaus or the Diet
building, could deliberate and discuss, amend and frame the
legislation.

But when the time for decision arrived, the elected representatives
would cast only 50 percent of the votes, while the current random
sample — who are not in the capital but geographically dispersed in
their own homes or offices — would electronically cast the remaining 50
percent. Such a system would not merely provide a more
representative process than "representative" government ever did, but
would strike a devastating blow at the special interest groups and
lobbies who infest the corridors of most parliaments. Such groups
would have to lobby the people — not just a few elected officials.

Going even further, one might conceive of voters hi a district electing
not a single individual as their "representative" but, in fact, a random
sample of the population. This random sample could "serve in
Congress" directly — as though it were a person — its opinions
statistically tallied into votes. Or it could choose a single individual, in
turn, to "represent" if, 'instructing him or her how to vote. Or ...

The permutations offered by the new communications technologies are
endless and extraordinary. Once we recognize that our present
institutions and constitutions are obsolete and we begin searching for
alternatives, all sorts of breathtaking political options, never before
possible, suddenly open up to us. If we are to govern societies racing
into the twenty-first century, we ought to at least consider the
technologies and conceptual tools made available to us by the
twentieth.

What is important here are not these specific suggestions. By working
at it together, we can no doubt come up with far better ideas, easier to
implement, less drastic in design. What is important is the general path
we choose to travel. We can fight a losing battle to suppress or
submerge today's burgeoning minorities, or we can reconstitute our
political systems to

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY
427

accommodate the new diversity. We can continue to use the crude,
bludgeonlike tools of Second Wave political systems, or we can design
sensitive new tools for a minority-based democracy of tomorrow.

As the Third Wave de-massifies the old Second Wave mass society,
its pressures, I believe, will dictate that choice. For if politics were "pre-
majoritarian" during the First Wave, and "majoritarian" during the
Second, they are likely to be "mini-majoritarian" tomorrow — a fusion of
majority rule with minority power.

SEMI-DIRECT DEMOCRACY

The second building-block of tomorrow's political systems must be the
principle of "semi-direct democracy" — a shift from depending on
representatives to representing ourselves. The mixture of the two is
semi-direct democracy.

The collapse of consensus, as we have already seen, subverts the
very concept of representation. Without agreement among the voters

back home, whom does the representative really "represent"? At the
same time, legislators have come to rely increasingly on staff support
and on outside experts for advice in shaping the laws. British M.P.s are
notoriously weak vis-d-vis the Whitehall bureaucracy because they
lack adequate staff support, thus shifting more power away from
Parliament to the unelected civil service.

The United States Congress, in an effort to counterbalance the
influence of the executive bureaucracy, has created its own
bureaucracy — a Congressional Budget Office, an Office of Technology
Assessment, and other necessary agencies and appendages. Thus
the congressional staff has grown from 10,700 to 18,400 in the past
decade. But this has merely transferred the problem from extramural to
intramural. Our elected representatives know less and less about the
myriad measures on which they must decide, and are compelled to
rely more and more on the judgment of others. The representative no
longer even represents him- or herself.

More basically, parliaments, congresses, or assemblies were places in
which, theoretically, the claims of rival minorities could be reconciled.
Their "representatives" could make trade-offs for them. With today's
antiquated, blunt-edged political tools, no legislator can even keep
track of the many grouplets he or she nominally represents, let alone
broker or

428

THE THIRD WAVE

trade effectively for them. And the more overloaded the American
Congress or the German Bundestag or the Norwegian Storting
becomes, the worse this situation grows.

This helps explain why single-issue political pressure groups become
intransigent. Seeing limited opportunity for sophisticated trading or
reconciliation through Congress or the legislatures, their demands on
the system become non-negotiable. The theory of representative
government as the ultimate broker collapses too.

The breakdown of bargaining, the decision crunch, the worsening
paralysis of representative institutions mean, over the long term, that
many of the decisions now made by small numbers of pseudo-
representatives may have to be shifted back gradually to the electorate
itself. If our elected brokers can't make deals for us, we shall have to
do it ourselves. If the laws they make are increasingly remote from or
unresponsive to our needs, we shall have to make our own. For this,
however, we shall need new institutions and new technologies as well.

The Second Wave revolutionaries who invented today's basic
represento-kit institutions were well aware of the possibilities of direct
as against representative democracy. There were traces of direct, do-
it-yourself democracy in the French revolutionary constitution of 1793.
American revolutionists knew all about New England town halls and
small-scale organic consensus formation. In Europe later on, Marx and
his followers frequently invoked the Paris Commune as a model of
citizen participation in the making and execution of the laws. But the

shortcomings and limitations of direct democracy were also well-
known — and, at that time, more persuasive.

"In The Federalist two objections to such an innovation were raised,"
write McCauley, Rood, and Johnson, authors of a proposal for a
National Plebiscite in the United States. "First, direct democracy
allowed for no check or delay on temporary and emotional public
reactions. And second, the communications of that day could not
handle the mechanics."

These are legitimate problems. How would a frustrated and inflamed
American public in the mid-1960's, for example, have voted on whether
or not to drop a nuclear bomb on Hanoi? Or a West German public,
furious at the Baader-Meinhof terrorists, on a proposal to set up camps
for "sympathizers"? What if Canadians had held a plebiscite over

Quebec the week after Rene Levesque took power? Elected
representatives are presumed to be less emotional and more
deliberative than the public.

The problem of overemotional public response, however, can be
overcome in various ways, such as requiring a cooling-off period or
second vote before implementation of major decisions taken via
referendum or other forms of direct democracy.

One imaginative approach is suggested by an actual program carried
out by the Swedes in the mid-1970's when the government called upon
the public to participate in the formulation of a national energy policy.
Recognizing that most citizens lacked adequate technical knowledge
of the various energy options, from solar or nuclear or geothermal, the
government created a ten-hour course on energy and invited any
Swede who took it, or an equivalent course, to make formal
recommendations to the government.

Simultaneously, trade unions, adult education centers, and parties
from one end of the political spectrum to the other all created their own
ten-hour courses. It was hoped that as many as 10,000 Swedes would
participate. To everyone's surprise, some 70,000 to 80,000 flocked to
discussions in homes and community facilities — the equivalent (on the
American scale) of some 2,000,000 citizens trying to think together
about a national problem. Similar systems could easily be employed to
cancel out the objections to "overemotionalism" in referenda or other
forms of direct democracy.

The other objection can also be met. For the old communication
limitations no longer stand in the way of expanded direct democracy.
Spectacular advances in communications technology open, for the first
time, a mind-boggling array of possibilities for direct citizen
participation in political Decision-making.

Not long ago, I had the pleasure of keynoting an historic event — the
world's first "electronic town hall" — over the Qube cable TV system in
Columbus, Ohio. Using this interactive communications system,
residents of a small Columbus suburb actually took part via electronics
in a political meeting of their local planning commission. By pushing a
button in their living rooms they were able to vote instantly on

proposals relating to such practical issues as local zoning, housing
codes, and proposed highway construction. They were able not only to
vote yes or no but to participate in the discussion and speak up on the
air. They were even able, by

430 THE THIRD WAVE

push button, to tell the chairperson when to move on to the next point
on the agenda.

This is only the first, most primitive indication of tomorrow's potential
for direct democracy. Using advanced computers, satellites,
telephones, cable, polling techniques, and other tools, an educated
citizenry can, for the first time in history, begin making many of its own
political decisions.

The issue is not either/or. It is not a question of direct democracy
versus indirect, representation by self versus representation by others.

For both systems have advantages, and there are highly creative, as
yet underutilized, ways to combine direct citizen participation with
"representation" into a new system of semi-direct democracy.

We might, for example, decide to hold a referendum on a controversial
issue like nuclear development, as California and Austria have already
done. Instead of turning the ultimate decision over directly to the
voters, however, we might still want a representative body — Congress
for example — to debate and ultimately decide the issue.

Thus if the public voted pro-nuclear, a certain predesig-nated "bundle"
of votes could be delivered to the pro-nuclear advocates in Congress.
They might, on the strength of the public response, be given an
automatic "edge" of 10 percent or 25 percent in Congress itself,
depending on the strength of the pro vote in the plebescite. In this way,
there is no purely automatic implementation of the citizens' wishes, but
these wishes do carry some specific weight. This is a variation of the
National Plebescite proposal mentioned above.

Many other imaginative arrangements can be invented to combine
direct and indirect democracy. Right now members of Congress and
most other parliaments or legislatures set up their own committees.
There is no way for citizens to force lawmakers to create a committee
to deal with some neglected or highly controversial issue. But why
couldn't voters be empowered directly, through petition, to compel a
legislative body to set up committees on topics the public — not the
lawmakers — deems important?

I hammer away at these "blue-sky" proposals not because I
unhesitatingly favor them but merely to underscore the more general
point: There are powerful ways to open and democratize a system that
is now near breakdown and in which few, if any, feel adequately
represented. But we must begin thinking outside the worn grooves of
the past 300 years. We

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY

431

can no longer solve our problems with the ideologies, the models, or
the left-over structures of the Second Wave past.

Fraught with uncertain implications, such novel proposals warrant
careful local experimentation before we apply them on a broad scale.
But however we may feel about this or that suggestion, the old
objections to direct democracy are growing weaker at precisely the
time that the objections to representative democracy are growing
stronger. Dangerous or even bizarre as it may seem to some, semi-
direct democracy is a moderate principle that can help us design
workable new institutions for the future.

DECISION DIVISION

Opening the system to more minority power and allowing citizens to
play a more direct role in their own governance are both necessary,
but carry us only part of the way. The third vital principle for the politics
of tomorrow is aimed at breaking up the decisional logjam and putting
decisions where they belong. This, not simply reshuffling leaders, is
the antidote to political paralysis. I call it "decision division."

Some problems cannot be solved on a local level. Others cannot be
solved on a national level. Some require action at many levels
simultaneously. Moreover, the appropriate place to solve a problem
doesn't stay put. It changes over time.

To cure today's decision logjam resulting from institutional overload,
we need to divide up the decisions and reallocate them — sharing them
more widely and switching the site of decision-making as the problems
themselves require.

Today's political arrangements violate this principle wildly. The
problems have shifted, but the decisional power hasn't. Thus, too many
decisions are still concentrated, and the institutional architecture is
most elaborate at the national level. By contrast, not enough decisions
are being made at the transnational level, and the structures needed
there are radically underdeveloped. In addition, too few decisions are
left for the subnational level — regions, states, provinces, and localities,
or non-geographical social groupings.

Many of the problems that national governments are grappling with
are, as we saw earlier, simply beyond their grasp— too big for any
individual government. We desperately need, therefore, to invent
imaginative "ew institutions at the transnational level to which many
decisions can be trans-

432

THE THIRD WAVE

ferred. We cannot, for example, expect to cope with the far-reaching
power of the transnational corporation — itself a rival of the nation-
state — through strictly national legislation. We need new transnational

arrangements to establish, and if need be enforce, codes of corporate
conduct on the global level.

Take the issue of corruption. American corporations selling abroad are
badly hurt by U.S. anti-bribery laws because other governments
permit, indeed encourage, their manufacturers to bribe foreign
customers. Similarly, multinational companies pursuing responsible
environmental policies will continue to face unfair competition from
firms that do not, so long as there is no adequate infrastructure at the
transnational level.

We need transnational food stockpiles and "hot spot" disaster-relief
organizations. We need new global agencies to provide early warnings
of impending crop failures, to level out swings in the price of key
resources, and to control the wildfire spread of the arms trade. We
need consortia and teams of nongovernmental organizations to attack
various global problems.

We need far better agencies to regulate out-of-control currencies. We
shall need alternatives to— or complete transformations of — the IMF,
the World Bank, COMECON, NATO, and other such institutions. We
shall have to invent new agencies to spread the advantages and limit
the side effects of technology. We must speed the construction of
strong transnational agencies for governing outer space and the
oceans. We shall have to overhaul the ossified, bureaucratic United
Nations from the ground floor up.

At the transnational level, we are as politically primitive and
underdeveloped today as we were at the national level when the
industrial revolution began 300 years ago. By transferring some
decisions "up" from the nation-state, we not only make it possible to
act effectively at the level where many of our most explosive problems
lie, but simultaneously reduce the decision burden at the overloaded
center — the nation-state. Decision division is essential.

But moving decisions up the scale is only half the task. It is also clearly
necessary to move a vast amount of decision-making downward from
the center.

Again the issue is not "either/or" in character. It is not decentralization
versus centralization in some absolute sense. The issue is rational
reallocation of decision-making in a system that has overstressed
centralization to the point at which

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY

433

new information flows are swamping the central decision-makers.

Political decentralization is no guarantee of democracy — quite vicious
localist tyrannies are possible. Local politics are frequently even more
corrupt than national politics. Moreover, much that passes for
decentralization — Nixon's government reorganization, for example — is
a kind of pseudo-decentralization for the benefit of the centralizers.

Nevertheless, with all these cavils, there is no possibility of restoring
sense, order, and management "efficiency" to many governments
without a substantial devolution of central power. We need to divide
the decision load and shift a significant part of it downward.

This is not because romantic anarchists want us to restore "village
democracy" or because angry affluent taxpayers want to cut back on
welfare services to the poor. The reason is that any political structure —
even with banks of IBM 370 computers — can handle only so much
information and no more, can produce only a certain quantity and
quality of decisions, and that the decisional implosion has now pushed
governments beyond this breakpoint.

Moreover, the institutions of government must correlate with the
structure of the economy, the information system, and other features of
the civilization. Today, little noticed by conventional economists, we
are witnessing a fundamental decentralization of production and
economic activity. Indeed, it may well be that the basic unit is no longer
the national economy.

What we are seeing, as I have already stressed, is the emergence of
very large, more and more cohesive regional sub-economies within
each national economy. These sub-economies are increasingly
different from one another, with sharply divergent problems. One may
be suffering from un-employment, another from labor shortages.
Wallonia in Belgium protests the shift of industry to Flanders; the
Rocky Mountain states refuse to become "energy colonies" of the West
Coast.

Uniform economic policies stamped out in Washington, Paris, or Bonn
have radically different impacts on these sub-economies. The same
national economic policy that aids one region or industry increasingly
damages others. For this rea-son, a great deal of economic policy
making must be dena-tionalized and decentralized.

At the corporate level, we not only see efforts at internal

434

THE THIRD WAVE

decentralization (witness a recent meeting of 280 of General Motors'
top executives who spent two days talking about how to break up
bureaucratic patterns and move more decisions out from the center),
but also an actual geographical decentralization as well. Business
Week reports a "geographical tilt of the U.S. economy, as more
companies build plants and move offices to less readily accessible
parts of the country."

All this reflects, in part, a gigantic shift of information flows in society.
We are, as noted earlier, undergoing a fundamental decentralization of
communications, as the power of the central networks wanes. We are
seeing a stunning proliferation of cable, cassette, computers, and
private electronic mail systems, all pushing in the same decentralist
direction.

It is not possible for a society to decentralize economic activity,
communications, and many other crucial processes without also,
sooner or later, being compelled to decentralize government decision-
making as well.

All this demands more than cosmetic changes in existing political
institutions. It implies massive battles over control of budgets, taxes,
land, energy, and other resources. Decision division will not come
easily — but it is absolutely unavoidable in country after overcentralized
country.

So far we have looked at decision division as a way to break the
bottleneck, to unfreeze the political system so it can function again. But
there is far more here than greets the eye. For application of this
principle does more than reduce the decision load of national
governments. In a fundamental way, it changes the very structure of
elites, bringing them into conformity with the needs of the emerging
civilization.

THE EXPANDING ELITES

The concept of "decision load" is crucial to any understanding of
democracy. All societies require a certain quantity and quality of
political decisions in order to function. Indeed, each society has its own
unique decision structure The more numerous, varied, frequent, and
complex the decisions required to run it, the heavier its political
"decision load." And the way this load is shared fundamentally
influences the level of democracy in society.

In preindustrial societies, where the division of labor was rudimentary
and change was slow, the number of political oj administrative
decisions actually required to keep things run-

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY

435

ning was minimal. The decision load was small. A tiny, semi-educated,
unspecialized ruling elite could more or less run things without help
from below, carrying the entire decision load by itself.

What we now call democracy burst forth only when the decision load
suddenly swelled beyond the capacity of the old elite to handle it. The
arrival of the Second Wave, bringing expanded trade, a greater
division of labor, and a leap to a whole new level of complexity in
society, caused the same kind of decision implosion in its time that the
Third Wave is causing today.

As a result, the decisional capabilities of the old ruling groups were
overwhelmed, and new elites and sub-elites had to be recruited to
cope with the decision load. Revolutionary new political institutions had
to be designed for that purpose.

As industrial society developed, becoming ever more complex, its
integrating elites, the "technicians of power," were in their turn
continually compelled to recruit new blood to help them carry the

expanding decision load. It was this invisible but inexorable process
that drew the middle class more and more into the political arena. It
was this expanded need for decision-making that led to an ever-wider
franchise and created more niches to be filled from below.

Many of the bitterest political battles in Second Wave countries — the
struggle of American Blacks for integration, of British trade unionists for
equal educational opportunity, of women for their political rights, the
hidden class warfare in Poland or the Soviet Union — concerned the
distribution of these new slots in the elite structures.

At any given time, however, there was a definite limit to how many
additional people could be absorbed into the governing elites. And this
limit was essentially fixed by the size of the decision load.

Despite the Second Wave society's meritocratic pretensions, therefore,
whole subpopulations were screened out on racist, sexist, and similar
grounds. Periodically, whenever the society jumped to a new level of
complexity and the decision load swelled, the excluded groups,
sensing the new opportunities, would intensify their demand for equal
rights, the elites would open the doors a bit wider, and the society
would experience what seemed like a wave of further democratization.

If this picture is even roughly correct, it tells us that the extent of
democracy depends less on culture, less on Marxist class, less on
battlefield courage, less on rhetoric, less on po-

436

THE THIRD WAVE

litical will, than on the decision load of any society. A heavy load will
ultimately have to be shared through wider democratic participation. So
long as the decision load of the social system expands, therefore,
democracy becomes not a matter of choice but of evolutionary
necessity. The system cannot run without it.

What all this further suggests is that we may well be on the edge of
another great democratic leap forward. For the very implosion of
decision-making now overwhelming our presidents, prime ministers,
and governments unlocks — for the first time since the industrial
revolution — exciting prospects for a radical expansion of political
participation.

THE COMING SUPER-STRUGGLE

The need for new political institutions exactly parallels our need for
new family, educational, and corporate institutions as well. It is deeply
wired into our search for a new energy base, new technologies, and
new industries. It reflects the upheaval in communications and the
need to restructure relationships with the non-industrial world. It is, in
short, the political reflection of accelerating changes in all these
different spheres.

Without seeing these connections, it is impossible to make sense of
the headlines around us. For today the single most important political

conflict is no longer between rich and poor, between top-dog and
underdog ethnic groups, or even between capitalist and communist.
The decisive struggle today is between those who try to prop up and
preserve industrial society and those who are ready to advance
beyond it. This is the super-struggle for tomorrow.

Other, more traditional conflicts between classes, races, and
ideologies will not vanish. They may even — as suggested earlier —
grow more violent, especially if we undergo large-scale economic
turbulence. But all these conflicts will be absorbed into, and play
themselves out within, the super-struggle as it rages through every
human activity from art and sex to business and balloting.

This is why we find two political wars raging around us simultaneously.
At one level, we see a politics-as-usual clash of Second Wave groups
battling each other for immediate gain. At a deeper level, however,
these traditional Second

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY 437

Wave groups cooperate to oppose the new political forces of the Third
Wave.

This analysis explains why our existing political parties, as obsolete in
structure as in ideology, seem so much like blurry mirror images of one
another. Democrats and Republicans, as well as Tories and
Labourites, Christian Democrats and Gaullists, Liberals and Socialists,
Communists and Conservatives, are all — despite their differences —
parties of the Second Wave. All of them, while jockeying for power
within it, are basically committed to preserving the dying industrial
order.

Put differently, the most important political development of our time is
the emergence in our midst of two basic camps, one committed to
Second Wave civilization, the other to Third. One is tenaciously
dedicated to preserving the core institutions of industrial mass
society — the nuclear family, the mass education system, the giant
corporation, the mass trade union, the centralized nation-state, and the
politics of pseu-dorepresentative government. The other recognizes
that today's most urgent problems, from energy, war, and poverty to
ecological degradation and the breakdown of familial relationships, can
no longer be solved within the framework of an industrial civilization.

The lines between these two camps are not yet sharply drawn. As
individuals, most of us are divided, with a foot in each. Issues still
appear murky and unconnected to one another. In addition, each camp
is composed of many groups pursuing their own narrowly perceived
self-interest, without any overarching vision. Nor does either side have
a monopoly on moral virtue. There are decent people ranged on both
sides. Nevertheless, the differences between these two subsurface
political formations are enormous.

The defenders of the Second Wave typically fight against minority
power; they scoff at direct democracy as "populism"; they resist
decentralization, regionalism, and diversity; they oppose efforts to de-
massify the schools; they fight to preserve a backward energy system;

they deify the nuclear family, pooh-pooh ecological concerns, preach
traditional industrial-era nationalism, and oppose the move toward a
fairer world economic order.

By contrast, the forces of the Third Wave favor a democracy of shared
minority power; they are prepared to experiment with more direct
democracy; they favor both transnationalism and a fundamental
devolution of power. They call for a crack-up of the giant
bureaucracies. They de-

438

THE THIRD WAVE

mand a renewable and less centralized energy system. They want to
legitimate options to the nuclear family. They fight for less
standardization, more individualization in the schools. They place a
high priority on environmental problems. They recognize the necessity
to restructure the world economy on a more balanced and just basis.

Above all, while the Second Wave defenders play the conventional
political game, Third Wave people are suspicious qf all political
candidates and parties (even new ones), and sense that decisions
crucial to our survival cannot be made within the present political
framework.

The Second Wave camp still includes a majority of the nominal power-
holders in our society — politicians, businessmen, union leaders,
educators, the heads of the mass media — although many of them are
deeply troubled by the inadequacies of the Second Wave world view.
Numerically, the Second Wave camp undoubtedly still claims the
unthinking support of most ordinary citizens as well, despite fast-
spreading pessimism and disillusionment in their ranks.

The advocates of the Third Wave are more difficult to characterize.
Some head up major corporations while others are zealous
anticorporate consumerists. Some are worried environmentalists;
others are more concerned with the issues oi sexual roles, family life,
or personal growth. Some focus almost exclusively on the
development of alternative energy-forms; others are mainly excited by
the democratic promis of the communications revolution.

Some are drawn from the Second Wave "right," others from the
Second Wave "left" — free marketeers and libertarKf ans, neo-
socialists, feminists, and civil rights activists, former flower children and
the straightest of straight-arrows. Some' are long-time activists in the
peace movement; others have never marched or demonstrated for
anything in their lives. Some are devoutly religious, others diehard
atheists.

Scholars may debate at length over whether or not so seemingly
formless a group constitutes a "class," or whether, if so, it is the "new
class" of educated information-workers, tellectuals, and technicians.
Surely many of those in the Third Wave camp are college-educated,
middle-class people. Surely many are directly engaged in the
production and dissemi-j nation of information, or in the services, and,

by twisting the term, one could probably call them a. class. Yet to do so
obscures more than it reveals.

For among the key groups pressing toward the de-massifi-
TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY

439

cation of industrial society are relatively uneducated ethnic minorities,
many of whose members hardly fit the picture of the attache-case-
carrying knowledge-worker.

How does one characterize women struggling to break out of confining
roles in Second Wave society? How, moreover, does one describe the
fast-expanding millions in the self-help movement? And what about
many of the "psychologically oppressed" — the millions of victims of the
epidemic of loneliness, the broken families, the single parents, the
sexual minorities — who do not fit neatly into the notion of class? Such
groups come from virtually all the ranks and occupations of society, yet
are important sources of strength for the Third Wave movement.

Indeed even the term movement can be misleading — partly because it
implies a higher level of shared consciousness than so far exists, partly
because Third Wave people properly mistrust all the mass movements
of the past.

Nevertheless, whether they comprise a class, a movement, or simply a
changing configuration of individuals and transient groups, all of them
share a radical disillusionment with the old institutions — a common
recognition that the old system is now broken beyond repair.

The super-struggle between these Second and Third Wave forces,
therefore, cuts like a jagged line across class and party, across age
and ethnic groups, sexual preferences and subcultures. It reorganizes
and religns our political life. And, instead of a harmonious, classless,
conflict-free, non-ideological future society, it points toward escalating
crises and deep social unrest in the near-term future. Pitched political
battles will be waged in many nations, not merely over who will benefit
from what is left of industrial society but over who participates in
shaping, and ultimately controlling, its successor.

This sharpening super-struggle will decisively influence the politics of
tomorrow and the very form of the new civilization. It is as a partisan in
this super-struggle, aware or unwitting, that each of us plays a role.

That role can be either destructive or creative.

A DESTINY TO CREATE

Some generations are born to create, others to maintain a civilization.
The generations who launched the Second Wave of historic change
were compelled, by force of circumstance,

440

THE THIRD WAVE

to be creators. The Montesquieus, Mills, and Madisons invented most
of the political forms we still take for granted. Caught between two
civilizations, it was their destiny to create.

Today in every sphere of social life, in our families, our schools, our
businesses and churches, in our energy systems and communications,
we face the need to create new Thii Wave forms, and millions of
people in many countries are already beginning to do so. Nowhere,
however, is obsolescenc more advanced or more dangerous than in
our political life And in no field today do we find less imagination, less
expe ment, less willingness to contemplate fundamental change.

Even people who are daringly innovative in their own work — in their
law offices or laboratories, their kitchens, classrooms, or companies —
seem to freeze up at any sugge tion that our Constitution or political
structures are obsolet and in need of radical overhaul. So frightening is
the pi pect of deep political change, with its attendant risks, that status
quo, however surrealistic and oppressive, sudder seems like the best
of all possible worlds..

Conversely we have in every society a fringe of pseudorev- ;
olutionaries, steeped hi obsolete Second Wave assumptions, for whom
no proposed change is radical enough. Archaeo-Marxists, anarcho-
romantics, right-wing fanatics, armchs guerrillas, and honest-to-God
terrorists, dreaming of tot tarian technocracies or medieval Utopias.
Even as we spe into a new historical zone, they nurse dreams of
revolutic drawn from the yellowed pages of yesterday's political tracts.

Yet what lies ahead as the super-struggle intensifies is not replay of
any previous revolutionary drama — no centrally rected overthrow of the
ruling elites by some "vanguai party" with the masses in tow; no
spontaneous, supposedlj cathartic, mass uprising triggered by
terrorism. The creation of new political structures for a Third Wave
civilization will not come in a single climactic upheaval, but as a
consequence of a thousand innovations and collisions at many levels
in many places over a period of decades.

This does not rule out the possibility of violence along the way to
tomorrow. The transition from First Wave to Second, Wave civilization
was one long blood-drenched drama wars, revolts, famines, forced
migrations, coups d'etat, calamities. Today the stakes are much higher,
the time shoi er, the acceleration faster, the dangers even greater.

Much depends on the flexibility and intelligence of todaj

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY

441

elites, sub-elites and super-elites. If these groups prove to be as
shortsighted, unimaginative, and frightened as most ruling groups in
the past, they will rigidly resist the Third Wave and thereby escalate
the risks of violence and their own destruction.

If, by contrast, they flow with the Third Wave, if they recognize the
need for a broadened democracy, they in fact can join in the process of
creating a Third Wave civilization, just as the most intelligent First
Wave elites anticipated the coming of a technologically based
industrial society and joined in its creation.

Most of us know, or sense, how dangerous a world we live in. We
know that social instability and political uncertainties can unleash
savage energies. We know what war and economic cataclysm mean,
and we remember how often totalitarianism has sprung from noble
intentions and social breakdown. What most people seem to ignore,
however, are the positive differences between present and past.

Circumstances differ from country to country, but never in history have
there been so many reasonably educated people, collectively armed
with so incredible a range of knowledge. Never have so many enjoyed
so high a level of affluence, precarious perhaps, yet ample enough to
allow them time and energy for civic concern and action. Never have
so many been able to travel, to communicate, and to learn so much
from other cultures. Above all, never have so many had so much to
gain by guaranteeing that the necessary changes, though profound, be
made peacefully.

Elites, no matter how enlightened, cannot by themselves make anew
civilization. The energies of whole peoples will be required. But those
energies are available, waiting to be tapped. Indeed if we, particularly
in the high-technology countries, took as our explicit goal for the next
generation the creation of wholly new institutions and constitutions, we
could release something far more powerful even than energy: the
collective imagination.

The sooner we begin to design alternative political institutions based
on the three principles described above — minority power, semi-direct
democracy, and decision division — the better our chances for a
peaceful transition. It is the attempt to block such changes, not the
changes themselves, that raises the level of risk. It is the blind attempt
to defend obsolescence that creates the danger of bloodshed.

This means that to avoid violent upheaval we must begin

442

THE THIRD WAVE

now to focus on the problem of structural political obsolescence around
the world. And we must take this issue not merely to the experts, the
constitutionalists, lawyers, and politicians, but to the public itself— to
civic organizations, trade unions, churches, to women's groups, to
ethnic and racial minorities, to scientists and housewives and
businessmen.

We must, as a first step, launch the widest public debate over the need
for a new political system attuned to the needs of a Third Wave
civilization. We need conferences, television programs, contests,
simulation exercises, mock constitutional conventions to generate the

broadest array of imaginative proposals for political restructuring, to
unleash an outpouring of fresh ideas. We should be prepared to use
the most advanced tools available to us, from satellites and computers
to video-disc and interactive television.

No one knows in detail what the future holds or what will work best in a
Third Wave society. For this reason we should think not of a single
massive reorganization or of a single revolutionary, cataclysmic
change imposed from the top, but of thousands of conscious,
decentralized experiments that permit us to test new models of political
decision-making at local and regional levels in advance of their
application to the national and transnational levels.

But, at the same time, we must also begin to build a constituency for
similar experimentation — and radical redesign — of institutions at the
national and transnational levels as well. Today's widespread
disillusionment, anger, and bitterness against the world's Second
Wave governments can either be whipped into fanatic frenzy by
demagogues calling for authoritarian leadership or it can be mobilized
for the process of democratic reconstruction.

By launching a vast process of social learning — an experiment in
anticipatory democracy in many nations at once — we can head off the
totalitarian thrust. We can prepare millions for the dislocations and
dangerous crises that lie before us. And we can place strategic
pressure on existing political systems to accelerate the necessary
changes.

Without this tremendous pressure from below, we should not expect
many of today's nominal leaders — presidents and politicians, senators
and central committee members — to challenge the very institutions
that, no matter how obsolete, give them prestige, money, and the
illusion, if not the reality, of power. Some unusual, far-seeing politicians
or officials will

TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY DEMOCRACY
443

lend their early support to the struggle for political transformation. But
most will move only when the demands from outside are irresistible or
when the crisis is already so advanced, and so close to violence, that
they see no alternative.

The responsibility for change, therefore, lies with us. We must begin
with ourselves, teaching ourselves not to close our minds prematurely
to the novel, the surprising, the seemingly radical. This means fighting
off the idea-assassins who rush forward to kill any new suggestion on
grounds of its imprac-ticality, while defending whatever now_ exists as
practical, no matter how absurd, oppressive, or unworkable it may be.

It means fighting for freedom of expression — the right of people to
voice their ideas, even if heretical.

Above all, it means starting this process of reconstruction now, before
the further disintegration of existing political systems sends the forces

of tyranny jackbooting through the streets, and makes impossible a
peaceful transition to Twenty-first Century Democracy.

If we begin now, we and our children can take part in the exciting
reconstitution not merely of our obsolete political structures, but of
civilization itself.

Like the generation of the revolutionary dead, we have a destiny to
create.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

In writing The Third Wave I have drawn on several streams of
information. The first and most conventional comes from the reading of
books, journals, newspapers, reports, documents, magazines, and
monographs from many countries. The second has its source in
interviews with change-makers around the world. I have visited them in
then* laboratories, executive suites, schoolrooms, and studios, and
they have been generous with then* time and ideas. They range from
family experts and physicists to Cabinet members and prime ministers.

Finally, in traveling I have relied on what I trust is an alert eye and ear.
Often, firsthand experience or chance conversation sheds a revealing
light on abstraction. A taxi driver in a Latin American capital told me
more than all his government's cheery statistics: When I asked him
why his people were not doing something to protest a soaring inflation
rate, he simply imitated the stuttering of a machine gun.

It is clearly impossible for me to thank individually all those who have
been helpful. However, three friends, Donald F. Klein, Harold L.

Strudler, and Robert I. Weingarten, have taken the trouble to read the
entire manuscript and offer perceptive criticism and advice.

In addition, Lea Guyer Gordon and Eleanor Nadler Schwartz, who are
certainly among the best and and most professional editorial
researchers, fact-checked the completed manuscript to weed out
inaccuracies. Mrs. Schwartz stayed through the final, harried days to
give good-humored, be-yond-the-call-of-duty assistance during
preparation of the 444

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

445

manuscript for the publisher. Special thanks, too, are owed to Betsy
Cenedella of William Morrow for her excellent round-the-clock
copyreading and correction. Finally, to Karen Tof-fler, who helped
format the conceptual entries in the index and committed them to the
computer/word processor during the long, late hours of the night.

Needless to say, I alone remain responsible for any errors that may
have crept into these pages, despite our best efforts to avoid them.

NOTES

Bracketed [ ] numbers indicate items listed in the accompanying
Bibliography. Thus, in the Notes [1] will stand for the first item in the
Bibliography: Boucher, Frangois. 20,000 Years of Fashion.

PAGE CHAPTER ONE

9 On the origins of agriculture see Cipolla, [103], p. 18.

9 For various terms used to describe the emerging society

see Brzezinski, [200], and Bell, [198]. Bell traces the term "post-
industrial" back to its use by an English writer named Arthur J. Penty in
1 91 7. For Marxist terminology see [21 1 ].

10 I wrote of "super-industrial civilization" in [502] and
[150],

13 Tribes without agriculture are described in, among other
sources, Niedergang, [95]; also Cottow, [74],

22

22 22 22
22

446

CHAPTER TWO

For sea trade see [504], p. 3. Geoffrey Blarney's perceptive book
analyzes the effects of isolation and great continental distances on the
development of Australia.

Greek factories are noted briefly in [237], p. 40.

On early oil drilling see [155], p. 30.

Ancient bureaucracies are described in [17], Vol. 1, p. 34.

The Alexandrian steam engine is mentioned in a chapter by Ralph
Linton in [494], p. 435; also, Lilley, [453], pp. 35-36.

NOTES

447

22 On pre-industrial civilization, see [171], p. 15.

23 On Japan's Meiji Era: [262], p. 307.

25 Estimates of Europe's horse and oxen population are in

[244], p. 257.

25 Newcomen's steam engine is described in Lilley, [453],
p. 94, and Cardwell, [433], p. 69.

26 Vitruvius is quoted in [171], p. 23.

26 Precision instruments: [438], Preface and Introduction.

26 The role of machine tools is discussed in [237], p. 41 .

27 Early trade is colorfully pictured in [259], pp. 64-71.

27 Advances in mass distribution are described in [29], p.

85. For the rise of the A&P chain, see pp. 159 and 162.

28 On early multigenerational households see [191], Vol.

I.p.64.

28 The immobility of the agricultural family is described in
[508], p. 196.

29 Andrew Ure is quoted in [266], pp. 359-360.

29 Nineteenth-century schooling in the U.S. is discussed in

[528], pp. 450-451 . 29 The increasing length of the school year is from
Histor*

ical Statistics of the United States, p. 207. 29 For compulsory
schooling see [528], p. 451.

29 The mechanics' declaration is quoted in [492], p. 391 .

30 Dewing is from [14], p. 15.

30 The number of U.S. corporations before 1800 is cited in
[101], p. 657.

30 The immortality of corporations was established by

Chief Justice John Marshall in Dartmouth College v. Woodward, 4
Wheat. 518, 4 L. Ed. 629 (1819).

30 Socialist corporations are the subject of a paper by Leon
Smolinski in Survey (London), Winter 1974.

30 In the socialist industrial nations of Eastern Europe,

as in the Soviet Union, the dominant form is the so-called "production
enterprise" — more accurately described as the "socialist corporation."
The produc-' tion enterprise is typically owned by the state rather than
by private investors, and it is subject to direct political controls in the
framework of a planned economy. But, like the capitalist corporation,
its prime functions are to concentrate capital and organize mass
production. Moreover, like its capitalist counterparts, it shapes the lives
of its employees; it exerts informal but powerful political influence; it
creates a new managerial elite; it relies on bureaucratic administrative
methods; it rationalizes production. Its position in the social order
was — and is — no less central.

32 The evolution of the orchestra is described in Sachs,

[7], p. 389, and in Mueller, [6].

448 THE THIRD WAVE

33 Postal history is the subject of Zilliacus's book, [56];

seep. 21 . 33 Edward Everett's paean to the Post Office is in [385], p.
257.

33 The world avalanche of mail is described in [41], p. 34.

See also the UNESCO Statistical Yearbook for 1965, p. 482.

34 On the telephone and telegraph, see Singer, [54], pp.

18-19. Also, Walker, [268], p. 261. 34 Telephone statistics are from
[39], p. 802.

Servan-Schreiber is quoted from [52], p. 45. 36 An account of Utopian
socialism is found in [476],

Chapter 8.

CHAPTER THREE

38 The role of the market is discussed in Polanyi's seminal

work, [115], p. 49. 38 The Tlatelolco marketplace is vividly pictured hi
[246],

p. 133. 38 The pepper merchant's comments are found in [259],
pp. 64-71.

38 Braudel is from his magnificent work [245], Vol. 1, pp.

247, 425.

39 On the fusion of production and consumption, see
[265], p. 30.

39 The social and political role of the consumer is bril-
liantly explored in Horace M. Kallen's forgotten work, [61], p. 23.

42 I am indebted to my friend Bertrand de Jouvenel for the

observation that the same person is pulled in opposite psychological
directions by the roles of worker and consumer.

44 On objectivity-subjectivity: the idea was first suggested

to me by a reading of Zaretsky [196].

CHAPTER FOUR

47 Theodore Vail's story is in [50]. Vail was a formidable

figure whose career tells much about early industrial development.

47 Frederick Winslow Taylor's influence is described in

Friedmann, [79], and Dickson, [525]. Also, the Taylor Collection,
Stevens Institute of Technology. Lenin's view of Taylorism is from [79],
p. 271.

47 Standardized intelligence testing is described in [527],
pp. 226-227.

NOTES

449

48 On the repression of minority languages, see Thomas,

[290], p. 31. Also "Challenge to the Nation-State," Time (European
edition), October 27,1975.

48 The French Revolution's actions with respect to the met-
ric system and a new calendar are described hi Moraze, [260], pp. 97-
98; and Klein, [449], p. 117.

48 Privately minted money and the standardization of cur-
rency are from [144], pp. 10, 33.

48 On one-price policy see [29],

49 The Advantages of the East India Trade is cited in
[138], Vol. I, p. 330.

49 Adam Smith's well-known observations about the phi

maker are in [149], pp. 3-7.

Smith attributed the startling increase hi productivity to the increased
dexterity developed by the worker who specialized, to the time saved
by not switching from task to task, and to the improvements that the
specialized worker could make in his or her tools. But Smith clearly
recognized what lay at the heart of things: the market. Without a
market to connect producer to consumer, who would need or want
48,000 pins a day? And, Smith continued, the bigger the marketplace
the more specialization could be expected.

Smith was right.

50 Henry Ford's cool calculations are from his autobiogra-
phy [442], pp. 108-109.

50 The number of occupations is from the Dictionary of
Occupational Titles published by the U.S. Department of Labor, 1977.

50 Lenin: from Christman, [474], p. 137.

51 The synchronizing role of work songs is from [8], p.

18.

52 E. P. Thompson's quote is from "Time, Work-Disci-
pline, and Industrial Capitalism," Past and Present (London), No. 38.

53 Stan Cohen made this observation in a review of David

J. Rothman's book The Discovery of the Asylum, in New Society
(London), February 7, 1974.

54 European auto production figures are from [126], p.

3917.

54 Concentration of the aluminum, cigarette, and breakfast

food industries is from Standard & Poor's Industry Surveys, 1978,
1979. Concentration in the beer industry is from "New Survival Plan for
Olympia Beer," The New York Times, May 15, 1979.

54 German industrial concentration is documented in

[126], p. 3972.

450 THE THIRD WAVE

54 The concentrative process in industry produced its mir-j

ror image in the labor movement. As unions in many | countries faced
larger and larger monopolies and trusts they, too, consolidated. After

the turn of the century the Industrial Workers of the World — the so-
called Wobblier — expressed the concentrative drive in a campaign for
what they called "O.B.U." — One Big Union.

54 For concentration as seen by Marxists, see Leon M.

Herman, "The Cult of Bigness in Soviet Economic Planning," [126], p.
4349 -K

This paper includes a well-known quotation from the American socialist
Daniel De Leon who, at the close of the last century, argued that "the
ladder by which humanity has risen to civilization is the progression hi
the methods of production, the growing power of the productive
instruments. The trust occupies the very top of this ladder. The social
storm of our times rages precisely around the trust. The capitalist class
is trying to retain it for its own exclusive use. The middle class is trying
to break it up, thereby delaying the course of civilization. The
proletariat will set for itself the goal to preserve it, improve it, i and
make it accessible to everyone."

54 The N. Lelyukhina article is reprinted in [126], p,

4362+.

55 The Matsushita song is quoted from "The Japanese
Dilemma" by Willard Barber, Survey (London), Autumn 1972.

55 AT&Ts employee figures are from [39], p. 702. French work force
statistics are hi [126], p. 3958.

On Soviet concentration and Stalin's "gigantomania,* see [126], pp.
4346-4352.

As this is written, the Soviets are racing to compk the world's biggest
track-manufacturing installation, which will require a whole new city of
160,000 with a complex of plants and conveyors extending over forty j
square miles, an area nearly twice the size of Manhat- ( tan island. The
truck complex is described hi Hedrick i Smith's vivid report, [484], pp.
58, 59, 106, and 220. Smith says the Soviets "have a Texan's love for
exag« j gerated bigness that outdoes the American love of j bigness,
much as the Soviet national economic growth'] ethic has surpassed the
now-shaken American faith in the automatic blessings of economic
growth."

56 With respect to the pursuit of GNP, an amusing fantasy

suggests that women undertake to do each otherl ! housework and pay
each other for it. If every Susie Smith paid every Barbara Brown one
hundred dollars

NOTES

451

a week for caring for her home and children, while receiving an
equivalent amount for providing the same services in return, the impact
on the Gross National Product would be astounding. If 50 million
American housewives engaged in this nonsense transaction it would
add about 10 percent to the U.S. GNP overnight.

57 Capitalization of American plants hi 1850 and railroads'

management innovations are from Alfred D. Chandler, Jr. and Stephen
Salisbury, "Innovations in Business Administration," in [454], pp. 130,
138-141.

57 On the case for a strong central government see [389],

p. 20.

58 In his book The Imperial Presidency [398], Schlesinger

says, "It must be said that historians and political scientists, this writer
among them, contributed to the rise of the presidential mystique."

58 Governments' response to political protest is in [482],

pp. 189-190.

58 Marx is quoted from Christman, [474], p. 359; Engels,
p. 324.

59 The rise of central banking in Britain, France, and Ger-
many is chronicled by Galbraith hi [127], pp. 31-35 and 39-41.

59 Hamilton's struggle to create a national bank is recount-
ed in [254], p. 187.

CHAPTER FIVE

63 Blumenthal is quoted in Korda [22], p. 46.

63 The rise of the integrational elite in the socialist nations

is the subject of a vast literature. For Lenin's views see [480], pp. 102-
105; Trotsky is from [475], p. 30, and [487], pp. 138, 249; Djilas was
jailed for his The New Class, [332]; Tito's own complaint about
technocracy is in "Social Stratification and Sociology in the Soviet
Union" by Seymour Martin Lipset and Richard B. Dobson, in Survey
(London), Summer 1973.

Since James Burnham's pathbreaking book, The Managerial
Revolution [330], appeared in 1941, a whole literature has sprung up
describing the climb to ' power of this new elite of integrators. See
Power Without Property by A. A. Berle, Jr. In The New Industrial State,
John Kenneth Galbraith further elaborated the idea, coining the term
"technostructure" to describe the new elite.

452

THE THIRD WAVE
CHAPTER SIX

71 For Newton's synthesis, see [433], p. 48.

71 De La Mettrie is quoted from Man a Machine, [30
p. 93.

71 Adam Smith on the economy as a system is from

crating Rules for Planet Earth" by Sam Love, in vironmental Action,
November 24, 1973; Smith's quote is from his posthumously published
[148], p. 60.

71 Madison is quoted from [388].

71 For Jefferson see [392], p. 161.

71 Lord Cromer is cited in [96], p. 44.

71 On Lenin, see [480], p. 163. Trotsky is quoted
[486], pp. 5,14.

73 Bihari's remark is from his book [347], pp. 102-103. For V. G.
Afanasyev see [344], pp. 186-187.

74 The number of elected public officials is given in [33
p. 167.

CHAPTER SEVEN

79 The Abaco take-over attempt is described in

Amazing New-Country Caper" by Andrew St.< in Esquire, February
1975.

80 Finer is from "The Fetish of Frontiers," in New Socit
(London), September 4, 1975.

80 On patchwork of small communities in empires,

Braudel, [245], Vol. 2, Chapter IV. Also Bottomo
[490], p. 155.

Voltaire's complaint is cited in Moraze, [260], p. 95. On Germany's 350
mini-states: [285], p. 13.

81 Various definitions of the nation-state are from [27
pp. 1 9 and 23. Ortega: [341 ], p. 171.

82 For the dates of the early railroads see [55], p. 13.

83 Moraze: [260], p. 154.

83 For Mazlish see [454], p. 29.

CHAPTER EIGHT

85 Foodstuffs from abroad: [1 1 9], p. 1 1 .

85 Chamberlain and Ferry are quoted in Birnie, [100],

242-243.

86 On Dervishes and other victims of the machine gun
John Ellis's first-rate monograph, [436].

NOTES

453

95

95

95 95

Re Ricardo on specialization [77], Introduction, pp. xii-xiiL

The value of world trade is from [119], p. 7.

The margarine story is told by Magnus Pyke in [461], PP.7-K

On the enslavement of the Amazonian Indians see Cot-low, [74], pp. 5-
6. The subject is treated in greater detail in Bodard, [70],

Woodruff is quoted from [119], p. 5.

On European political control: [497], p. 6.

World trade between 1913 and 1950 is described in [109], pp. 222-
223.

Creation of the IMF: [109], p. 240.

For U.S. gold holdings and World Bank loans to less developed
countries, see [87], pp. 63, 91.

On Lenin's views, see [89]; also Cohen, [73], pp. 36, 45-47. The Lenin
arguments and the Senin quote are from [146], pp. 22-23.

The political struggle in China today can be seen as a conflict over
whether it, too, should make or buy. One side, loosely called the
radicals, favors self-sufficiency and internal development; the other
favors wide trade with the outside world. The notion of self-sufficiency
will attract greater attention among non-industrial nations as they
increasingly come to recognize the hidden costs of entering into an
integrated world economy constructed to serve the needs of the
Second Wave nations.

On Soviet purchases of Guinean bauxite see "Success Breeds
Success," in The Economist, December 2, 1978; Soviet purchases
from India, Iran, and Afghanistan are detailed hi "How Russia Cons the
Third World," in To the Point (Sandton, Transvaal, South Afriqa),
February 23, 1979. This South African news-weekly, despite its evident
bias, provides heavy coverage of the Third World, especially Africa.

For Soviet imperialism, see also Edward Crankshaw in [80], p. 713.

Sherman is quoted from [147], pp. 316-317.

For a report on COMECON, see "COMECON Blues" by Nora Beloff, in
Foreign Policy, Summer 1978.

CHAPTER NINE

On our "dominion" over nature, see Clarence J.

Glacken, "Man Against Nature: An Outmoded

Concept," in [162], pp. 128-129. For Darwin and for early theories of
evolution, see Hy-

454 THE THIRD WAVE

man, [306], pp. 26-27, 56. On social Darwinism: pp.j
432-433. Views on progress of Liebniz, Turgot, et al. are exam-1
ined by Charles Van Doren in [184], General Intro-J
duction. Heilbroner is quoted from [234], p. 33.

103 Time measurement units are described in "Time, Work- (*

Discipline, and Industrial Capitalism," by E. P.» Thompson in Past and
Present, Number 38. See also Cardwell, [433], p. 13.

104 The adoption of Greenwich Mean Time is described in
[519], p. 115.

104 Buddhist and Hindu views of time are examined in
[509], p. 248.

104 For Needham on cyclical time in the East see [515], p. I

47. Whitrow from [520], p. 18.

105 The use of space by pre-Fifst Wave civilization is
described by Morrill in [514], pp. 23-24.

106 On peasant hut location, see "The Shaping of England's

Landscape" by John Patten, in Observer Magazine (London), April 21,
1974. Hale is quoted from [252], p. 32,

107 The differing lengths of a rood are from [449], pp. I
65-66.

107 For navigation prizes, refer to Coleman, [506], pp, f
103-104.

107 On the metric system: [449], pp. 116, 123-125.

108 Clay's observations are from [505], pp. 46-47.

108 The S-curve patterns are described by John Patten in I
Observer Magazine, cited above.

109 On people seen as part of nature, see Clarence J. I
Glacken in [162], p. 128.

109 For Democritus' atomism see Munitz, [310], p. 6; Asi- 1
mov, [427], Vol. 3, pp. 3-4; and Russell, [312], pp. 64-65.

109 Mo Ching and Indian atomism are from Needham, 1
[455], pp. 154-155.

110 For atomism as a minority view: [312], pp. 72-73. 110 Descartes:
[303], p. 19.

110 Dubos is quoted from [159], p. 331.

1 1 2 On Aristotle see Russell, [31 2], p. 1 69.

112 The yin and yang: Needham, [456], pp. 273-274.

112 Newton is quoted from his "Fundamental Principles of ;]

Natural Philosophy" in [310], p. 205.

113 Laplace is from Gellner, [305], p. 207. 113 Holbach is quoted in
Matson [309], p. 13.

NOTES 455

CHAPTER TEN

116 On the industrial revolution .in Europe see Williams,

[118]; Polanyi, [115]; and Lilley, [453].

1 1 7 The place of accounts in a process of social develop-
ment is described by D. R. Scott in [145].

1 18 For First and Second Wave smells: [420], pp. 125-
131.

118 Old manners are in Norbert Elias's remarkable The Civ-
ilizing Process, [250], pp. 120, 164.

119 First Wave communities as social "cesspools'* are
described in Hartwell, [107], and Hayek, [108].

119 Vaizey is from "Is This New Technology Irresistible?"

in the Times Educational Supplement (London), January 5,1973.

120 The Lamer review appeared in New Society (London),

January 1, 1976.

124 American Management Association survey summarized
in [33], pp. 1-2.

CHAPTER ELEVEN

128 For educational test scores, see "Making the Grades

More Schools Demand A Test of Competency for Graduating Pupils,"
The Wall Street Journal, May 9, 1978.

128 On remarriage rates: Social Indicators 1976, U.S. De-
partment of Commerce report, p. 53.

128 Counterfeminists are described in "Anti-ERA Evangelist
Wins Again," Time, July 3, 1978.

128 Conflict between homosexuals and Anita Bryant is re-
ported in "How Gay Is Gay?," Time, April 23,1979.

CHAPTER TWELVE

131 Rathbone's decision on oil prices, and the formation of
OPEC are described in [168], Chapter 8.

132 Nuclear plants at Seabrook and Grohnde: [163], pp. 7,

88 .

132 Two thirds of the world's energy supply from oil and
gas, based on [160], p. 17.

133 On shrinking oil reserves, see "The Oil Crisis is Real
This Time," Business Week, July 30, 1979.

133 Coal gasification and liquefaction plants are critically
described in Commoner, [157], pp. 67-68. See also

456

134 134

134 135

THE TH/f?D WAVE
Business

135 135

135 135 135

136 136
136 139
140 140

"A Desperate Search for Synthetic Fuels," Week, July 30, 1979.

Government subsidies for atomic power are described In [157], p. 65.

On terrorism and other dangers involving plutonium, see Thomas
Cochran, Gus Speth, and Arthur Tain-plin, "Plutonium: An Invitation to
Disaster," in [166], p. 102; also Commoner, [157], p. 96.

Carr is from [153], p. 7.

Texas Instruments* work on photovoltaic cells is described hi "Energy
Fuels of the Future," Time, June 11, 1979. Role of Solarex is hi The
New Business of Harnessing Sunbeams” by Edmund Fal-termayer, in
Fortune, February 1976. See also Energy Conversion Devices hi "A
New Promise of Cheap Solar Energy," Business Week, July 18, 1977.

On Soviets hi the tropopause: [153], p. 123.

Geothermal power developments are described in "The Coming
Energy Transition" by Denis Hayes, in The Futurist, October 1977.

Wave power hi Japan is from "Waking Up to Wave Power," Time,
October 16, 1978.

Southern California Edison's power tower: "Energy: Fuels of the
Future," Time, June 11, 1979.

Hydrogen power developments are summarized in "Can Hydrogen
Solve Our Energy Crisis?" by Roger Beardwood, in the Telegraph
Sunday Magazine (London), July 29, 1979.

"Redox" is described in "Washington Report," Product Engineering,
May 1979.

On superconductivity see "Scientists Create a Solid Form of
Hydrogen," The New York Times, March 2, 1979.

For a brief discussion of the implications of Tesla waves see Omni
interview with Alvin Toffler, November 1978.

On the transition from Second Wave to Third Wave industries see The
Cross of Lorraine," Forbes, April 16, 1979. Britain's nationalized coal,
rail, and steel in- j dustries are discussed in "The Grim Failure of
Britain's Nationalized Industries" by Robert Ball, in Fortune, December
1975. Strukturpolitik is from "How Schmidt Is Using His Economic
Leverage," Business Week, July 24, 1978.

Rolls-Royce ad was placed by CW Communications, Newton, Mass.,
in Advertising and Publishing News, September 1979.

The scope of the home computer business hi the spring of 1979 can
be judged by Micro Shopper: The Mi-

NOTES

457

crocomputer Guide, published by MicroAge Wholesale, Tempe, Ariz.
See also "Plugging in Everyman," Time, September 5,1977.

141 Fiber optics in the communications industry are

described in "Lightbeams in Glass — Slow Explosion Under the
Communications Industry" by Robin Lan-ier, in Communications
Tomorrow, November 1976. Fiber optics in the telephone business and
the comparison with copper are from an interview with Donald K.
Conover, General Manager, Corporate Education, Western Electric
Co., Hopewell, NJ.

141 Science is quoted from its issue of March 18, 1977.

142 On space shuttle program: "The Shuttle Opens the

Space Frontier to U.S. Industry," Business Week, August 22, 1977.

142 Urokinase information supplied by Abbott Laboratories,

North Chicago, 111.; Von Puttkamer is quoted in "The Industrialization
of Space," Futurics, Fall 1977.

142 TRW's identification of alloys is described in "Industry's

New Frontier in Space" by Gene Bylirisky, in Fortune, January
29,1979.

143 For Brian O'Leary's studies and the Princeton confer-
ences, see G. K. O'Neill, Newsletter on Space Studies June 12, 1977.

143 On protein from the sea, the threatened extinction of

marine life, and aquaculture: "The Oceans: World Breadbasket or
Breakdown?" by Robert M. Girling, in Friends Magazine, February
1977.

144 Raymond is quoted hi John P. Craven, "Tropical

Oceania: The Newest World," Problems of Journalism: Proceedings of
the 1977 Convention of the American Society of Newspaper Editors,
1977, p. 364. 144 Minerals in the sea: "Oceanic Mineral Resources” by

John L. Mero, hi Futures, December 1968. See also "The Sea-Bed" by
P. N. Ganapati, hi Seminar (New Delhi), May 1971; and "The Oceans:
Wild West Scramble for Control," Time, July 29, 1974; and "Seabed
Mining Consortia Hope to Raise the Political Anchor," The Financial
Times (London), August 7, 1979.

144 Drugs from the sea are described in a brochure from

the Roche Research Institute of Marine Pharmacology, Dee Why,
N.S.W., Australia.

145 For ocean platform technology see "Floating Cities," in
Marine Policy, July 1977.

145 D. M. Leipziger speaks of "homesteaders" and the

"common heritage" argument in "Mining the Deep Seabed," Challenge,
March-April 1977.

147 On genetics: Howard and Rifkin, [446]; also "Industry

458 THE THIRD WAVE

Starts To Do Biology With Its Eyes Open," The Economist (London),
December 2, 1978.

147 National policies for control of genetic research are out-
lined in Draft Information Document on Recom-binant DNA, May 1978,
Scientific and Technical Committee of the North Atlantic Assembly.

147 Cetus' president is quoted from [446], p. 190.

147 Official Soviet policy is from Socialism: Theory and

Practice, a Soviet monthly digest of the theoretical and political press,
January 1976.

149 The report to the National Science Foundation, Lawless,

[452],

150 On Luddite revolts against machines, see [453], p. 111. 152 The
antinuclear campaigns are described in "Crusading

Against the Atom," Time, April 25, 1977, and "Nuclear Power: The
Crisis in Europe and Japan,” Business Week, December 25, 1978.

152 Appropriate technology is reviewed in [425]; see also

Harper and Boyle, [444],

152 An example of the new interest hi the airship is the bro-
chure of Aerospace Developments, London; also "Lighter-Than-Air
Transport: Is the Revival for Real?" by James Wargo, in New Engineer,
December 1975.

CHAPTER THIRTEEN

158 Newspaper circulation figures from American Newspa-
per Publishers Association.

1 58 On percentage of Americans who read newspapers see

1972 and 1977 General Social Surveys, by the National Opinion
Research Center, University of Chicago. Newspaper circulation losses
are reported in "Newspapers Challenged as Never Before," Los
Angeles Times, November 26, 1976; see also *Time Inc. Buys
Washington Star; It Will Pay Allbritton $20 Million," The New York
Times, February 4, 1978. For Britain's experience with newspapers
see "Newspaper Sales” by Tom Forester, hi New Society (London),
October 16, 1975.

159 Decline in mass magazine circulations detailed hi Thi
Gallagher Report Supplement to its issue of August 22, 1977.

159 On the proliferation of regional and special-interest
magazines, see Folio magazine, December 1977.

1 60 Richard Reeves is quoted from "And Now a Word from
God ..." Washington Star, June 2, 1979.

NOTES

459

160 Teen-age radio habits are covered in Radio Facts, pub-
lished by Radio Advertising Bureau, New York.

161 CB radio: "Citizens Band: Fad or Fixture" by Leonard

M. Cedar in Financial World, June 1 , 1 976. Actual number of CBs in
use in 1977, from Radio Research Report, published by the Radio
Advertising Bureau, New York. Denial that CB has cut into radio
listener ship is in press release dated June 20, 1977, from CBS Radio
Network. See also Marsteller survey reported in Broadcasting, August
15, 1977.

161 Time: "The Year That Rain Fell Up," in its issue of
January 9, 1978.

162 NBC: "Webs Nailed for 'Stupidity'; Share Seen Dipping

50%" by Peter Warner, in The Hollywood Reporter* August 15, 1979.

162 On the expansion of cable TV, see "Cable TV: The

Lure of Diversity," Time, May 7, 1979; see also Media Decisions,
January 1978.

164 Satellite distribution of programming is described in

"New Flexibility in Programming Envisioned Resulting Jrom Upsurge in
Satellite Distribution" by John P. Taylor, in Television /Radio Age,
February 27, 1978.

164 John O'Connor is quoted from his "TV on the Eve of
Drastic Change," The New York Times, November 13, 1977.

CHAPTER FOURTEEN

168 Stages of computer development outlined in an inter-
view with Harvey Poppel, March 27, 1978.

169 Expenditures for distributed processing are from Inter-

national Data Corporation, Stamford, Conn. 169 On rise of personal
computers, note 'The Electronic

Home: Computers Come Home'' by Lee Edson, hi

The New York Times Magazine, September 30, 1979. 169 Cost of
home computers: "Tl Gets Set to Move Into

Home Computers," Business Week, March 19, 1979.

169 'The Source" is described in materials supplied by

Telecomputing Corporation of America, McLean, Va.; also interview
with Marshall Graham, vice-president, marketing, October 12, 1979.

170 "Fred the House" appeared in the Micro Shopper, pub-
lished by MicroAge, Tempe, Ariz., Spring 1979. 172 For the "Laws of
Robotics, '8 see Isaac Assimov's classic

[426],

Speech recognition technology is discussed in "Computers Can Talk to
You," The New York Times9 Au-

460 THE THIRD WAVE

gust 2, 1978. For companies working on voice data entry see Random-
Access Monthly, May 1979, a publication of Dean Witter Reynolds Inc.,
New York. Forecasts about talking computers are evaluated in
"Speech Is Another Microelectronics Conquest," Sd-ence, February
16, 1979. 174 "Weave problems" are described in [462], p. 113.

CHAPTER FIFTEEN

181 For figures on the decline of the manufacturing sector

in high-technology nations see the International Labor Organization's
'Yearbook of Labour Statistics, 1961, 1965, 1966, 1975.

181 On manufacturing being farmed out to developing

countries, read "Vast Global Changes Challenge Private-Sector Vision"
by Frank Vogl, in Financier, April 1978; also John E. Ullman, "Tides
and Shallows," in [12], p. 289.

182 De-massified production is described in Jacobs, [448], p.

2$9. Also: "Programmable Automation: The Bright Future of
Automation" by Robert H. Anderson, in Datamation, December 1972;
and A. E. Kobrinsky and N. E. Kobrinsky, "A Story of Production hi the
Year 2000," hi Fedchenko, [205], p. 64.

182 For high-volume goods as percentage of all manufac-

tured goods see "Computer-controlled Assembly" by James L. Nevins
and Daniel E. Whitney, in Scientific American, February 1978.

182 Short run of one-of-a-kind production is described in

"When Will Czechoslovakia Become an Underdeveloped Country"
reprinted from the Palach Press, London, hi Critique (Glasgow), a
Journal of Soviet Studies and Socialist Theory, Winter 1976-77, Also,
"New Programmable Control Anns at Smaller Tasks," American
Machinist, September 1976; "The Computer Digs Deeper Into
Manufacturing," Business Week, February 23, 1976; and "In the
Amsterdam Plant, The Human Touch" by Ed Grimm, in Think, August
1973.

182 Short-run production in Europe is covered in "Inescapa-
ble Problems of the Electronic Revolution," The Financial Times
(London), May 13, 1976; and "Aker Outlook," Northern Offshore (Oslo),
November 1 976.

183 Pentagon production runs are analyzed in Robert H.

Anderson and Nake M. Kamrany, Advanced Computer-Based
Manufacturing Systems for Defense Needs, published by the
Information Sciences Insti-

NOTES

461

tute, University of Southern California, September 1973.

183 Japanese car production methods described in correspon-
dence from Jiro Tokuyama, Nomura Research Institute of Technology
& Economics, Tokyo, June 14, 1974.

183 Anderson quote is from an interview with author.

185 Canon AE-1 camera: see Report of First Quarter and

Stockholders Meeting, Texas Instruments, 1977.

187 On the number of information transactions and the rise

in office costs see Randy J. Goldfield. "The Office of Tomorrow Is Here
Today!" Special Advertising Section, Time, November 13,1978.

187 Employment effects of office automation are discussed in

"Computer Shock: The Inhuman Office of the Future" by Jon Stewart,
in Saturday Review, June 23, 1972*

188 Micronet's paperless office is described in "Firms Spon-

sor Paperless Office," The Office, June 1979; and in "Paperless Office
Plans Debut,*' Information World, April 1979.

190 Alternatives to the postal system are discussed in "An-
other Postal Hike, and Then — ," U.S. News & World Report, May 29,
1978.

190 The growth of the pre-electronic postal system finally

peaked in the mid-1970s. UJS. News & World Report on December
29, 1975, noted: "The volume of mail handled by the Postal Service
declined in the last fiscal year for the first time in history. The decline —
about 830,000,000 pieces of mail last year — is expected to continue
and possibly accelerate." The paper-based Post Office — that
prototypical Second Wave institution — had finally reached its limits.

190 Satellite Business Systems is described in a "Special Re-
port" by Drs. William Ginsberg and Robert Golden, prepared for
Shearson Hayden Stone, New York.

190 Vincent Giuliano is quoted from interview with author.

192 Goldfield on "para-principals" is based on interview with
author.

1 92 Office automation and the seven-nation study are cov-
ered in "The Coming of the Robot Workplace," The Financial Times
(London), June 14, 1978.

CHAPTER SIXTEEN

Work at home, in companies like United Airlines and McDonald's, is
covered in "A Way to Improve Of-

462 THE THIRD WAVE

fice's Efficiency: Just Stay at Home," The Watt Street Journal,
December 14, 1976.

198 Harvey Poppel is quoted from an interview with the au-
thor and from his unpublished forecast, "The Incredible Information
Revolution of 1984." Latham is cited from [54], p. 30.

198 Changes hi white-collar work are discussed in "The Au-
tomated Office" by Hollis Vail, in The Futurist, April 1978.

198 Institute for the Future findings are reported in Paul

Baran, Potential Market Demand for Two-Way Information Services to
the Home 1970-1990, published by the Institute for the Future, Menlo
Park, Calif., 1971.

199 Computer programming at home is described in "Fitting

Baby Into the Programme," The Guardian (Manchester), September 9,
1977.

199 "People huddled around a computer" is drawn from

"Communicating May Replace Commuting," Electronics, March
7,1974. Michael Koerner cited in [26], Vol. I, p. 240.

200 For the Nilles group halfway-house model see Electron-
ics, March 7, 1974, cited above.

200 The key study on substitution of communications for
commuting is [49],

CHAPTER SEVENTEEN

209 The chief government statistician on family matters, Dr.

1977.

209 Carter is quoted from "Right Now," McCall's, May

Paul Glick of the U.S. Census Bureau, is quoted from Dr. Israel
Zwerling, "Is Love Enough to Hold a Family Together?" Cincinnati
Horizons, December 1977.

212 Percent of U.S. population in classical nuclear families

is from U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, Special
Labor Force Report 206, "Marital and Family Characteristics of the
Labor Force in March 1976," Monthly Labor Review, June 1977.

212 People living alone are described in "Today's Family —

Something Different," U-S. News & World Report, July 9, 1979; also
"trend to Living Alone Brings Economic and Social Change," The New
York Times* March 20, 1977; and 'The Ways 'Singles' Are Changing
U.S.," U.S. News & World Report, January 31, 1977.

212 Rise in unwed couples reported in "Unwed Couples Liv-

NOTES

463

ing Together Increase by 117%," The Washington Post, June 28,
1979; see also "H.U.D. Will Accept Unmarried Couples for Public
Housing," The New York Times, May 29, 1 977.

213 On courts wrestling with unwed couples' "divorces":

"How to Sue Your Live-in Lover,” by Sally Abrahms in New York,
November 13, 1978; also, "Unmarried Couples: Unique Legal Plight,"
Los Angeles Times, November 13, 1977.

213 Etiquette and "couple counseling" is from '"Living in

Sin* Is In Style," The National Observer, May 30, 1977.

213 Ramey is quoted from the November-December 1975

newsletter of the National Organization for Non-Parents, now renamed
the National Alliance for Optional Parenthood.

213 Childless couples are described in "In New German At-
titude on Family Life, Many Couples Decide to Forgo Children," The
New York Times, August 25, 1976; also "Marriage and Divorce,
Russian Style — 'Strange Blend of Marx and Freud,"' U.S. News &
World Report, August 30, 1976.

214 On children in single-parent households, see [194], p. 1 . 214 To
show how demography, technology, and other forces

influence the family is not to say the family is a passive element hi
society, merely reacting or adapting to changes elsewhere in the
system. It is also an active force. But the impact of outside events on
the family — war, for example, or technological change — is often
immediate, while the impact of the family on society may be long
delayed. The real impact of the family is not felt until its children grow
up and take their place in society.

214 The rise of one-parent households in Britain, Germany,

and Scandinavia is reported in "The Contrasting Fortunes of Europe's
One-parent Families," To The Point International (Sandton, Transvaal,
South Africa), August 23,1976.

214 "Aggregate family" is identified in [502], pp. 248-249.

214 Davidyne Mayleas is quoted from "About Women: The
Post-Divorce 'Poly-Family,'" Los Angeles Times, May 7, 1978.

215 The rich variety of family arrangements is explored in - "Family
Structure and the Mental Health of Children" by Sheppard G. Kellam,
M.D., Margaret E. Ensminger, M.A., and R. Jay Turner, Ph.D., hi the
Archives of General Psychiatry (American Medical Association),
September 1977.

464 THE THIRD WAVE

215 Jessie Bernard on family diversification is quoted from
[187], pp. 302 and 305.

223 For press coverage of woman hired for artificial insemi-
nation in Britain see "Astonishing Plan Says the Judge," Evening News
(London), June 20, 1978. Also, "Woman Hired to Have a Child," The
Guardian (Manchester), June 21, 1978.

223 Lesbian child-custody rights are discussed in "Judge

Grants a Lesbian Custody of 3 Children," The New York Times, June
3, 1978; also, "Victory for Lesbian in Child Custody Case," San
Francisco Chronicle, April 12, 1978.

223 "Parental malpractice" suit is covered by "Son Suea

Folks for Malpractice," Chicago Tribune, April 28, 1978.

225 On company couples as a phenomenon hi business, see

"The Corporate Woman: 'Company Couples' Flourish," Business
Week, August 2, 1976.

CHAPTER EIGHTEEN

227 Carter and Blumenthal are quoted in '"I Don't Trust

Any Economists Today'" by Juan Cameron, in For-tune, September 11,
1978.

227 On the "ecu," see Andre* M. Coussement, "Why the Ecu
Still Isn't Quite Real," Euromoney, October 1979.

228 The rise of Eurocurrencies and the global electronic

banking network are described in "Stateless Money: A New Force on
World Economies," Business Week, August 21, 1978; John B.
Caouette, "Time Zones and the Arranging Centre," Euromoney, July
1978; and "Clash over Stateless Cash," Time, November 5, 1979. ;

228 Eurodollars were discussed by the author in [150], p,

11 .

229 COMECON, centered on the Soviet Union, has its own

interrelated troubles. In an unprecedented move Erich Honecker, East
Germany's Communist head of state, i not long ago blasted
COMECON's rules as "one-sided and short-sighted," warning Moscow
that "nobody has the right to halt the production of East German I

products." (See Forbes, March 20, 1978.) The 1 U.S.S.R. economy
itself has split into four distinct and conflicting segments — a Third
Wave, high-technology military segment forever clamoring for bigger
budgets; a hopelessly backward Second Wave segment that is riddled
with mismanagement and shortages ai it attempts to meet rising
consumer demands; and an even more backward and malplanned
agricultural seg-

NOTES

465

229 229

229

230 230
232

ment beset with intractable problems of its own. Beneath all of these
stands a shadowy fourth segment — a "phantom economy" based on
payoffs, graft, and corruption, without which many of the operations in
the other three segments would grind to a halt.

Greatly dependent upon infusions of technology and capital from the
global economy (and susceptible to its illnesses), the socialist industrial
nations are also caught up in forces larger than they can control.

Poland, for example, Ping-Pongs back and forth between inflation-
induced food price hikes and angry worker protests. Having borrowed
$13 billion from the West, it stands poised on the knife-edge of
bankruptcy and pleads with its creditors to stretch out the terms of loan
repayment. The other socialist economies are similarly beginning to
de-massify and their productive organizations, too, are caught up in the
enormous wave of change.

On corruption in the U.S.S.R., see Smith, [484], p. 86 et seq. The
U.S.S.R.'s dependence on other countries for technology and capital is
discussed in "Rollback, Mark II" by Brian Crozier, in National Review,
June 8, 1978. Poland's food and worker problems are reported in
"Poland: Meat and Potatoes," Newsweek, January 2, 1978; its financial
problems are treated hi "Poland's Creditors Watch the Ripening Grain"
by Alison Macleod, in Euromoney, July 1978.

The Euromoney quote is from its article, "Time Zones and the
Arranging Center," cited above.

The international cash manager's role is described in "Stateless
Money: A New Force on World Economies/' Business Week, August
21,1978.

Acceleration in marketing and television are discussed in Editorial
Viewpoint," in Advertising Age, October 13, 1975.

COMECON's price revisions are noted in "L'inflation se generalise," Le
Figaro (Paris), March 4, 1975.

The British economist Graham Hutton, in a paper for the Institute of
Economic Affairs, writes that "as our inflation has accelerated, so all
government and business longer-term indebtedness is forced to get
younger and shorter . . . velocity of circulation rises faster; time-periods
for even three-year contracts ahead have to be re-worded to build-in
the expected inflation-rate of acceleration; wage bargains become
quicker and shorter." "Inflation and Legal Institutions," in [129], p. 120.

Canada's Eskimos: "Eskimos Seek Fifth of Canada as Province," The
New York Times, February 28, 1976.

466 THE THIRD WAVE

232 Indian demands are reported in "Settlement of Indian

Land Claim in Rhode Island Could Pave Way for Resolving 20 Other
Disputes," The Wall Street Jour-nal, September 13, 1978; and "A
Backlash Stalks the Indians," Business Week, September 11, 1978.

232 On Ainu minority in Japan see "Ainu's Appeal Printed

hi Book," Daily Yomiuri (Tokyo), November 15, 1973. On Koreans:
"Rightists Attack Korean Office; Six Arrested," Daily Yomiuri (Tokyo),
September 4, 1975.

233 David Ewing is quoted from "The Corporation As Pub-
lic Enemy No. 1," Saturday Review, January 21, 1978.

234 John C. Biegler is quoted from "Is Corporate Social Re-
sponsibility a Dead Issue?" Business and Society -Review, Spring
1978.

237 Jayne Baker Spain: "The Crisis in the American Board:

A More Muscular Contributor," audiotape produced by AMACOM, a
division of the American Management Associations, 1978.

237 Olin indicted: see Olin Shareholder Quarterly and An-
nual Meeting Report, May 1978.

237 On Thalidomide, see "A Scandal Too Long Concealed,"

Time, May 7,1979.

238 Henry Ford II is quoted from "Is Corporate Social Re-
sponsibility a Dead Issue?" Business and Society Review, Spring
1978.

239 Control Data's policies are described in "The Mounting

Backlash Against Corporate Takeovers” by Bob Ta-markin, hi Forbes,
August 7, 1978; and the company's "Mission Statement," 1978.

240 Allen Neuharth is quoted from "The News Mogul Who

Would Be Famous" by David Shaw, in Esquire, September 1979. 240
Rosemary Bruner is quoted from interview with author.

240 On the corporation's multiple purposes see "The New

Corporate Environmentalists," Business Week, May 28, 1979; also,
"MCSI: The Future of Social Responsibility" by George C. Sawyer, in
Business Tomorrow, June 1979.

241 The American Accounting Association reports are
described in [16], p. 13.

241 Juanita Kreps' suggestion is reported hi "A Bureaucratic

Brainstorm" by Marvin Stone, in U.S. News & World Report, January
9,1978.

242 The giant Swiss food firm and the quote from Pierre

Arnold are from "When Businessmen Confess Their Social Sins,"
Business Week, November 6, 1978. 242 On social reports of European
companies see "Europe

NOTES

467

Tries the Corporate Social Report" by Meinolf Dier-kes and Rob
Coppock, in Business and Society Review, Spring 1978.

243 Cornelius Brevoord is quoted from "Effective Manage-
ment in the Future" in [12].

243 William E. Halal's remarks are from his "Beyond
R.O.I.," Business Tomorrow, April 1979.

CHAPTER NINETEEN

246 Flextime has generated a large literature. Among the

sources used here are: "Workers Find 'Flextime* Makes for Flexible
Living," The New York Times, October 15, 1979; "Flexible Work Hours
a Success, Study Says," The New York Times, November 9, 1977;
"The Scheme That's Killing The Rat-Race Blues” by Robert Stuart
Nathan, hi New York, July 18, 1977; "Work When You Want To,"
Europa magazine, April 1972; "Flexing Time” by Geoffrey Sheridan, hi
New Society (London), November 1972; and Kanter, [529],

248 The increase in night work is described in "Le Sommeil

du Travailleur de Nuit," Le Monde (Paris), December 14, 1977; and in
Packard, [500], Chapter 4.

248 The growth in numbers of part-time workers is covered

in "In Permanent Part-Time Work, You Can't Beat the Hours” by
Roberta Graham, in Nation's Business, January 1979; see also
"Growing Part-Time Work Force Has Major Impact on Economy," The
New York Times, April 12, 1977.

249 The Citibank television commercial is quoted from a

transcript provided by the advertising agency, Wells, Rich, Greene,
Inc., New York.

.251 On service workers outnumbering manufacturing work-
ers, see [63], p. 3.

251 Time-of-day utilities pricing is reported in "Environmen-
talists Are Split Over Issue of Time-of-Day Pricing of Electricity," The
Wall Street Journal, October 5, 1978.

251 Connecticut's advocacy of flextime is from "Your

(Flex) Time May Come" by Frank T. Morgan, in Personnel Journal,
February 1977.

251 Impact of video recorders on televiewing is analyzed hi

"Will Betamax Be Busted?" by Steven Brill, in Esquire, June 20, 1978.

252 Computer conferencing is described from author's ex-
perience; materials supplied by the Electronic Information Exchange
System, New Jersey Institute of

468 THE THIRD WAVE

Technology, Newark, N.J.; and from Planet News, December 1978, a
publication of Infomedia Corporation, Palo Alto, Calif.

254 Varying wages and fringe benefit packages are exam-
ined in "Companies Offer Benefits Cafeteria-Style," Business Week,
November 13, 1978.

255 For trends in German art see Dieter Honisch, "What Is

Admired in Cologne May Not Be Appreciated in Munich," Art News,
October 1 978.

256 On the mass merchandising of hard-cover books, refer

to "Just A Minute, Marshall McLuhan" by Cynthia Saltzman, in Forbes,
October 30, 1978.

257 On decentralization in Kiev see [478], p. 67.

257 The defeat of Sweden's Socialist government is reported

in "Swedish Socialists Lose to Coalition After 44-Year Rule," The New
York Times, September 20, 1976.

257 Scottish nationalists' policies are analyzed in [370], p.

14.

257 New Zealand's Values Party program was laid out in

Values Party, Blueprint for New Zealand, 1972.

257 The rise of neighborhood power is tracked in "Cities Big and Small
Decentralize in Effort to Relieve Frustrations," The New York Times,
April 29, 1979; and "Neighborhood Planning: Designing for the Future,"
Self-Reliance, published by the Institute for Local Self-Reliance,
Washington, D.C., November 1976.

257 On ROBBED and other neighborhood groups note "Ac-
tivist Neighborhood Groups Are Becoming a New Political Force," The
New York Times, June 1 8, 1 979.

258 U.S. Senator Mark Hatfield (R., Ore.) once introduced

a bill designed to revive neighborhood and community government by
permitting a local resident to donate up to 80 percent of his federal
income tax to a duly organized local neighborhood government.

258 Esmark's reorganization was described in "Esmark

Spawns A Thousand Profit Centers," Business Week, August 3, 1974;
see also Esmark annual report, 1978.

259 Author's description of "Ad-hocracy" is from [502],

Chapter 7.

259 Matrix organizations are described in [13].

260 The surprising growth of regional banks is detailed in

"The Fancy Dans at the Regional Banks," Business Week, April
17,1978.

262 Franchising is discussed hi "The Right Way to Invest in

Franchise Companies," by Linda Snyder, in Fortune A April 24, 1978;
also, U.S. Department of Commerce, Industry and Trade
Administration, Franchising in the Economy 1976-1978. For franchising
in Holland:

NOTES

469

letter to author from G. G. Abeln, Secretariat, Neder-landse Franchise
Vereniging, Rotterdam.

262 An early report on the dispersal of population was "Cit-
ies: More People Moving Out Than In, New Census Confirms,"
Community Planning Report, Washington, D.C., November 17, 1975.

264 Lester Wunderman is quoted from The Village Voice,

August 14, 1978.

264 Anthony J. N. Judge is quoted from "Networking: The

Need for a New Concept," Transnational Associations (Brussels), No.
172, 1974; and "A Lesson in Organization From Building Design —
Transcending Duality Through Tensional Integrity: Part I,"

Transnational Associations, No. 248,1978.

CHAPTER TWENTY

265 The rise of self-help health services is documented in

"Doctoring Isn't Just for Doctors” by Robert C. Yeager, in Medical
World News, October 3, 1977.

265 Blood pressure machines: "Medical Robot: A Slot
Machine for Blood Pressure," Time, October 10, 1977.

266 Boom in sales of medical instruments: *The Revolution

in Home Health Care” by John J. Fried, in Free Enterprise, August
1978.

268 On self-help organizations: Interview with Dr. Alan

Gartner, co-director, New Human Services Institute. Also,
"Bereavement Groups Fill Growing Need," Los Angeles Times,
November 13, 1977; and various issues of the Self-Help Reporter,
published by the National Self-Help Clearinghouse, New York.

268 More than 500,000 self-help groups cited by Gartner

and Riessman, [58], p. 6. Riessman and Gartner have done some of
the most useful work on the service economy. Their 1974 book [59], is
indispensable.

270 Introduction of self-service gasoline pumps: "Save on

Gasoline: Pump It Yourself," Washington Star, June 6, 1975. Also,
"Now, the No-Service Station," Time, August 22, 1977; "Business
Around the World," U.S. News & World Report, February 9, 1976.

270 Customers doing bank tellers' work: "Tellers Work 24-

Hour Day, and Never Breathe a Word," The New 'York Times, May 14,
1976.

270 Stores shifting to self-service: "Futureshock/Store Ser-
vice: The Pressure on Payroll Overload," Chain Store Age, September
1975. Also: "Marketing Observer," Business Week, November 9, 1974.

470 THE THIRD WAVE

270 Caroline Bird from [489], p. 109.

271 Whirlpool "Cool-Line" material supplied by Warren

Baver, manager of customer relations, Whirlpool Corporation, Benton
Harbor, Michigan.

272 Sales of power tools: "Tools for the Home: Do-It-Your-
self Becomes a National Pastime” by John Ingersoll, in Companion,
September 1977. Also, "Psychograph-ics: A Market Segmentation
Study of the D-l-Y Customer," Hardware Retailing, October 1978. 272
Hie Frost & Sullivan data is from Study of the Market

for Home Improvement and Maintenance Products* 1976; Home
Center & Associated Home Improve men Products Market, 1978; and
The Do-lt-Your self Market in the E.E.C. Countries, 1978, Frost &
Sullivan, New York.

272 U.S. News & World Report: "A Fresh Surge in Do-It-
Yourself Boom," issue of April 23, 1979.

273 The Texas Instruments manager and Cyril Brown are

quoted from "Top Management Develops Strategy Aimed at
Penetrating New Markets," Electronics, October 25, 1978.

274 Professor Inyong Ham, from interview with author. 274 Robert
Anderson is quoted from interview with author. 276 One interesting
implication of the rise of the prosumer

is a change in what might be termed the "market in-tensivity" of daily
life. Are some societies more in- i volved with market activities than
others? One way to measure this is to see how people spend their
time. In the mid-1960's sociologists in a dozen countries studied how

urban people spent their hours. The "time-budget" researchers divided
daily life into thirty-seven different kinds of activity, from working and
watching television to eating, sleeping, or visiting friends.

Without pretending to be at all scientific about it, I loosely lumped these
thirty-seven activities into three categories: those that seemed to me
the most "market- : intense," those that are not, and those that lie
some-J where hi between.

For example, the time we spend working for pay,: shopping in a
department store, or commuting to our j jobs is clearly more "market-
intense" than the time i we spend watering geraniums in the window
box, playing fetch with the family dog, or chatting with the neighbors
over the back fence.

Similarly, some activities, while not done for market purposes, are
nevertheless so commercialized as to lie in between. (Packaged travel
tours, ski weekends, even some get-away-from-it-all camping, involve j

NOTES

471

277 278 280
282 285

so much purchased paraphernalia, so many paid-for services, and so
many economic transactions as to represent a modified form of
shopping.)

Using these crude categories I reviewed the time-budget studies. I
promptly discovered that some lifestyles — and some societies — are
more "market-intense** than others.

For instance, Americans in forty-four cities spent, on average, only 36
percent of their waking hours in market -connected activity. The
remaining 64 percent of their waking hours were spent cooking,
laundering, gardening, eating, brushing their teeth, studying, praying,
reading, volunteering in community organizations, watching TV,
chatting, or simply resting.

A similar pattern turned up in Western Europe: the average Frenchman
spent an equivalent amount of waking hours in market-connected
activity. For the Belgian it was a little more — 38 percent For the West
German a little less — 34 percent.

Ironically, as soon as we move eastward geographically and "leftward"
politically, numbers begin to climb. In East Germany, the most
technologically advanced of the Communist countries, the average
person spent 39 percent of his or her day in market-connected activity.
In Czechoslovakia the figure rose to 42 percent. In Hungary 44 percent
And in the Soviet Union it hit 47 percent.

It turns out, therefore, that mainly because of longer working hours but
for other reasons as well, the life-style of the ordinary citizen was more

market-intensive in Pskov than in its American counterpart Despite
socialist ideology, more of the average person's daily life was wrapped
up hi buying, selling, and exchanging goods, services and, indeed,
labor itself.

Sweden's work year and absenteeism: "Shorter Hours of Work" by
Birger Viklund, in Arbetsmiljo International — 78.

The Bradley GT Kit is described in materials supplied by the company:
Bradley Automotive Division of Thor Corporation, Edina, Minnesota.

Fuchs is quoted in "How Does Self-Help Work?” by Frank Riessman, in
Social Policy, September/October -1976.

How earlier societies coped with unemployment is described in [106].

A note on barter and money: The rise of the prosumer compels us to
rethink the future of barter, too. Barter

472 THE THIRD WAVE

is becoming big business these days. It is not limited to small
transactions between individuals, swapping a used sofa, let's say, for
some auto repair services, or exchanging legal services for dental
care. (Large numbers of people are discovering that barter can help
them avoid taxes.) Barter is becoming more important in the world
economy, too, as countries and corporations — uncertain about the fast-
changing relationships between hard and soft currencies — swap oil for
jet fighters, coal for electricity, Brazilian iron ore for Chinese oil. Such
barter is a form of exchange and therefore fits within Sector B.

But much of what self-help groups do can be characterized as a form
of psychic barter — the swapping of life experiences and advice. And
the housewife's traditional role can be interpreted as the barter of her
services for goods earned by a working husband. Are her services part
of Sector A or Sector B? Third Wave economists will begin to sort out
such questions — for until they do it will become increasingly impossible
to understand the real economy in which we live, as distinct from the
Second Wave economy now fading into history.

Similarly, we need to ask about the future of money. Money supplanted
barter in the past partly because it was so difficult to keep track of
complex swaps involving many different units of measurement Money
radically simplified record keeping. The growing availability of
computers, however, makes it easier to record extremely complex
trades and therefore makes money, as such, less essential. Again, we
have scarcely begun to think about such things. The rise of the
prosumer, its relationship to barter, and the new technology will
combine to make us think about old issues in new ways.

CHAPTER TWENTY -ONE

290 Urban Land Institute report summary in "Rural U.S.

Growing Faster Than Cities," International Herald Tribune, August 4-5,
1979.

291 Lasers, rockets, etc.: "Contemporary Frontiers in
Physics" by Victor F. Weisskopf, in Science, January

19, 1979. 291 Struve is quoted in "Negotiating with Other Worlds" by

Michael A. G. Michaud, in The Futurist, April 1973. 291 Listening for
signals: Sullivan, [468], p. 204.

NOTES

473

292 Francois Jacob from his article "Darwinism Recon-
sidered," Atlas World Press Review, January 1978.

292 "Genetic drift" and Dr. Motoo Kimura's comments are

from "The Neutral Theory of Molecular Evolution," Scientific American,
November 1 979.

292 On eukaryotes and prokaryotesi "What Came First?"

The Economist, July 28, 1979.

293 The Grant Park Zoo apes: "Ape Hybrid Produced,"

Daily Telegraph (London), July 28, 1979. Also, "Old Evolutionary
Doctrines Jolted by a Hybrid Ape," The New York Times, July 29,
1979.

293 The evolutionary record: Warshofsky, [470], pp.

122-125. Also, Jantsch and Waddington, [180], Introduction.

293 The discovery of the structure of DNA is described by
Watson in [471].

293 Kornberg's discovery and the "populary summary":

[446], pp. 24-26.

294 The British critic is S. Beynon John, "Albert Camus," in
[5], p. 312.

294 Club of Rome Report: [165], pp. 23-24. 296 Second Wave view of
time: Whitrow, [520], pp.

100-101; also, G. J. Whitrow, "Reflections on the

History of the Concept of Time," in [510], pp.

10 - 11 .

296 Gribbin, from [512], pp. xiii and xiv.

297 Black holes: "Those Baffling Black Holes," Time, Sep-
tember 4, 1978; 'The Wizard of Space and Time" by Dennis Overbye,
in Omni, February 1979. Also Warshofsky, [470], pp. 19-20.

297 Tachyons: [304], pp. 265-266.

297 Taylor is cited frpm his article, "Time in Particle Physics," in [510],
p. 53.

297 For Capra see [300], p. 52.

297 Alternative and plural times: John Archibald Wheeler,

"Frontiers of Time," lecture given at the International School of
Physics, "Enrico Fermi," Varenna, Italy, summer 1977.

298 Cities losing population: "Rush to Big Cities Slowing

Down: Poll," Daily Yomiuri (Tokyo), July 9, 1973; "Exploding Cities,"
New Society (London), July 5, 1973; "Swiss Kaleidoscope," Swiss
Review of World Affairs, April 1 974.

298 The American Council of Life Insurance report is

"Changing Residential Patterns and Housing," TAP Report 14, Fall
1976.

299 Fortune is quoted from "Why Corporations Are on the
Move" by Herbert E. Meyer, May 1976.

474 THE THIRD WAVE

299 Arthur Robinson: "A Revolution in the Art of Map-
making," San Francisco Chronicle, August 29, 1978.

300 The Arno Peters map is described in "The Peters World

Map: Is It an Improvement?" by Alexander Doro-zynski, in Canadian
Geographic, August/September 1978.

301 Simon Ramo is cited from [311], p. vi.

301 Barry Lopez's article ran in the March 31, 1973, issue

of Environmental Action.

302 Frederick S. Peris is quoted from his "Gestalt Therapy

and Human Potentialities," in [418], p. 1.

302 The holistic health movement is discussed in "Holistic

Health Concepts Gaining Momentum” by Constance Holden, hi
Science, June 2, 1978.

302 The World Bank expert is Charles Weiss, Jr., "Mobi-
lizing Technology for Developing Countries," Science9 March 16,1979.

303 Laszlo is quoted in [308], p. 161.

303 Eugene P. Odum: "The Emergence of Ecology as a
New Integrative Discipline," Science, March 25,1977.

304 Maruyama is cited from his much-quoted paper, "The

Second Cybernetics: Deviation-Amplifying Mutual Causal Processes,"
American Scientist, June 1963, pp. 164-179,250-256.

In "New Movements in Old Traps" published in Futurics, Fall 1977, pp.
59-62, Maruyama presents a critical typology of current
epistemologies, comparing them in terms of such variables as
causality, logic, perception, ethics, and cosmology. He has also
analyzed the systemic implications of differentiation in "Heterogenistics
and Morphogenetics" in Theory and Society, Vol. 5, No. 1, pp. 75-96,
1978.

306 The exposition on Prigogine is based on interviews and
private correspondence with the author, as well as [458).

308 The termite colony is described in Hya Prigogine, "Or-
der Through Fluctuation: Self-Organization and Social System," in
[180],

308 Prigogine is quoted from his paper, From Being to Be-
coming, published by the University of Texas Center for Statistical
Mechanics and Thermodynamics, Austin, Texas, April 1978.

See also: "Time, Structure, and Fluctuations," Science, September 1,
1978; "Order Out of Chaos" by I. Prigogine, Center for Statistical
Mechanics and Thermodynamics, University of Texas at Austin and
Facult6 des Sciences, Universite Libre de Bruxelles; and La Nouvelle
Alliance, Hya Prigogine and Isabelle Stengers (Paris: Gallimard, 1979).

/VOTES 475

CHAPTER TWENTY -TWO

312 On Corsican and other separatists: "Fissionable Particles

of State," Telegraph Sunday Magazine (London), June 11, 1978; also
"Europe's Passionate Separatists," San Francisco Sunday Examiner &
Chronicle, October 8, 1978.

312 Scottish assembly: "Home-Rule Plan Suffers Setback in
British Votes," The New York Times, March 3, 1979.

312 Pressures for autonomy run deep in Scotland: "The De-
volution Pledges Which Will Not Go Away," The Guardian
(Manchester), July 28, 1979.

313 Welsh nationalism: "Welsh Nationalists, Rebuffed, Fight

Fiercely for Their Language," The New York Times, November 6,

1979.

313 Regional problems in Belgium: "Belgium: New Govern-
ment Rides the Tiger," To The Point (Sandton, Transvaal, South
Africa), October 27, 1978.

313 Sudeten Germans: "Germany's Palestinians," Newsweek9
June 2, 1975.

313 South Tyrolese: "Conflict Within a Community" by
Frances Pinter, in New Society (London), March 22, 1973.

313 Slovenes, Basques, Catalans, and Croatians: "How Un-
happy Minorities Upset Europe's Calm," C7.S. News & World Report,
January 31, 1977.

313 Pierre Trudeau is- quoted from "Language Dispute is

Termed Threat to Canada's Unity," The New York Times, October 26,
1976.

313 Autonomy movement in Alberta: "Western Canadians

Plan Own Party," The New York Times, October 15, 1974; also
"Canada, a Vast, Divided Nation, Gets Ready for a Crucial Election,"
The New York Times, May 1 6, 1 979.

313 Western Australia's secession movement: "How the
West May Be Lost," The Bulletin (Sydney), January 26, 1974.

314 Amalrik's forecast is from [472].

314 Armenian nationalists: "Armenia: The USSR's Quiet

Little Hotbed of Terror," San Francisco Examiner, October 9, 1978.

314 Georgians and Abkhazians: "Georgian and Armenian

Pride Lead to Conflicts With Moscow," The New York Times, June 27,
1978. Abkhazian minority's demands: "Dispute hi Caucasus Mirrors
Soviet Ethnic Mosaic," The New York Times, June 25, 1978.

314 The underground novel in California: [275].

476 THE THIRD WAVE

315 Report for Kissinger was prepared by Professor Arthur
Corwin, Director of the Cooperative Study for Mexican Migration.

315 Texas Monthly is quoted from "Portillo's Revenge" by
John Bloom, in the magazine's issue of April 1979.

315 Puerto Rican separatism has produced an extensive

newspaper literature; see, for example, "F.A.L.N. Organization Asks
Independence for Puerto Rico/' The New York Times, November
9,1975.

315 For Alaskan separatism see "Alaska Self-Determina-
tion," Reason, September 1973.

315 Native Americans asking for a sovereign state: "Black

Elk Asks Young Americans: Recognize Indians as Sovereign Nation,"
The Colorado Daily (Boulder), October 18, 1974; also, "American
Indian Council Seeks U.N. Accreditation," The New York Times,
January 26,1975.

315 The National Conference of State Legislatures is quoted

from "America's Regional Economic War," State Legislatures,
July/August 1976.

315 The "economic equivalent of civil war" is from "Coal

and Oil States, Upset by Carter Plan, Prepare for 'Economic War* Over
Energy," The New York Times, AprU 27,1977.

315 Jeffrey Knight: "After Setbacks — New Tactics in Envi-
ronmental Crusade," US. News & World Report, June 9,1975.

316 "Let the Bastards Freeze in the Dark": editorial by

Phffip H. Abelson hi Science, November 16, 1973. 316 Mid westerners
urged to stop "chasing smokestacks": "Midwest, U.S. Heartland, Is

Found Losing Economic Vitality," The Cleveland Plain Dealer, October
9,1975,

316 Northeastern governors organize: "Playing Poorer Than

Thou: Sunbelt v. Snowbelt in Washington," Time, February 13, 1978.

317 Pierre Trudeau in 1967 is quoted from Shaw [287], p.

51.

317 Denis de Rougement is quoted from the Bulletin of the
Swiss Credit Bank, Zurich, May 1973.

318 Senator McGovern is quoted from his article "The In-
formation Age," The New York Times, June 9, 1977.

319 Statistics on transnational corporations are from Supple-
mentary Material on the Issue of Defining Transnational Corporations,
a Report of the Secretariat to the Commission on Transnational
Corporations, U.N. Economic and Social Council (UNESCO), March
23, 1979. 319 The extremely rapid spread of these TNCs may have al-

NOTES

477

ready peaked, according to research by Prof. Brent Wilson of the
University of Virginia. (Wilson shows that many large companies, in
such low-technology industries as leather goods, apparel, textile, and
rubber, are actually selling off foreign subsidiaries.) But this is not true
for the very high-technology industries. See "Why the Multinational
Tide Is Ebbing," by Sanford Rose, in Fortune, August 1977.

319 On relative scale of transnational corporations and

U.N.: testimony by Alvin Toffler before the U.S. Senate Committee on
Foreign Relations; see [294], p. 265. Also reprinted as The USA, the
UN and Transnational Networks," in International Associations
(Brussels), No. 593, 1975.

320 General Motors' sales revenue and Lester Brown:

[272J, pp. 214-216.

320 Exxon's tanker fleet: see Wilczynski, [297], p. 40.

320 Communist Party members on a holiday: [297], p. 40.

320 Socialist transnationals: [297], pp. 134-145.

320 Western-based TNCs and their transactions with COMB-

CON countries: [297], p. 57.

320 TNCs from non-industrialized nations: The Rise of

Third World Multinationals" by David A. Heenan and Warren J.
Keegan, in Harvard Business Review, January-February 1979.

321 British TNCs violating British embargoes: "BP Con-
fesses It Broke Sanctions and Covered Up,” Sunday Times (London),
August 27, 1978; also "Oil Chiefs Bust Sanctions," The Observer
(London), June 25, 1978; and Rhodesia (Oil Sanctions Inquiry), House
of Commons Hansard, pp. 1184-1186, December 15, 1978.

321 Violation of U.S. regulations regarding the Arab boy-
cott: Boycott Report: Developments and Trends Af~ fecting the Arab
Boycott, issued by the American Jewish Congress, New York,
February 1979.

321 Transnational oil companies favoring their own prior-
ities: [168], p. 312 -K
321 Lester Brown is from [272], p. 222*

321 TNC intelligence: see [390].

321 Hugh Stephenson: [289], p. 3.

322 Numbers of international organizations: [294], p. 270.

See also [298].

323 - Transnational organizations and IGOs from author's in-
terview with A. J. N. Judge, Union of International Associations,
Brussels.

323 Common Market's tax commissioner: see "An EEC

Flea in Russia's Ear," The Economist (London), January 13,1979.

478 THE THIRD WAVE

323 Agricultural and industrial policies made in Brussels:

"Farmer Solidarity Increase in Europe," The New York Times, October
6,1974.

323 Increase in the EEC budget rammed through: "A Win-
try Chill in Brussels," The Economist, January 20, 1979.

325 Trilateral Commission: "Oil Supplies 'Could Meet De-

mand Until Early 1990's,'" Financial Times (London), June 16,1978.
CHAPTER TWENTY -THREE

328 Figures on poverty, health, nutrition, and literacy are

from Robert S. McNamara, addresses to the Board of Governors of the
World Bank, September 24, 1973, and September 26, 1977.

329 Industrialization in Iran: "Iran's Race for Riches,"

Newsweek, March 24,1975.

330 For interest rates and loans to projects and companies in

Iran, see "Iranian Borrowing: The Great Pipeline Loan Will Be Followed
by Many More" by Nigel Bance, in Euromoney, June 1978.

330 German manager's pay: "Iran: A Paradise in a Powder

Keg" by Marion Donhoff, hi Die Zeit (Hamburg), October 10, 1976.

330 Percentage of Iran's goods consumed by one tenth of

the population: "Regime of the Well-Oiled Gun" by Darryl D'Monte, in
Economic & Political Weekly (India), January 12, 1974, extracted in
Iran Research (London), January 1975.

330 Rural income in Iran: Introduction to special section,

"Iran: The Lion That Stopped Roaring," Euromoney9 June 1978.

330 Though it caught Washington policy makers and inter-
national bankers off guard, the collapse of the Shah was not wholly
unexpected to those who followed the flow of "unofficial" information
coming out of Iran. As early as January 1975, fully four years before
his overthrow, Bulletin No. 8 of Iran Researcht a freely circulated left-
wing publication, reported that the movement to topple the Shah had
reached "a higher stage in the revolutionary struggle." The report
detailed armed actions against the regime, the bombing of the Irana
Tile Factory, the assassination of the "notorious owner of the Jahan
Chit factories," the escape of political prisoners with the aid of their
guard. It printed the message of an Air Force lieutenant calling upon
his "military brothers" to "take off this

NOTES

479

shameful uniform and take up a guerilla gun." Above all, it reported and
praised the latest Fatva or proclamation of the exiled Ayatollah
Khomeini in which he urged intensification of the drive against the
regime. 332 The New York Times article is "Third World Industrial-

izes, Challenging the West ..." in the issue of February 4, 1979.

332 French steelworkers: "Steel's Convulsive Retreat in Eu-

rope" by Agis Salpukas, in The New York Times International
Economic Survey, February 4, 1979.

333 "Between the sickle and the combine harvester" is from

"Second Class Capitalism" by Simon Watt, in Undercurrents (Reading,
Berkshire), October-November, 1976.

333 The Intermediate Technology Development Group and

examples of appropriate technology are from Appropriate Technology
in the Commonwealth: A Directory of Institutions, published by the
Food Production and Rural Development Division of the
Commonwealth Secretariat, London.

334 India's reversion to First Wave methods: "India Goes

Back to Using the Handloom," Financial Times (London), June 20,
1978.

334 Suharto is quoted by Mohammad Sadli, the Indonesian

minister of mines, in "A Case Study in Disillusion: U.S. Aid Effort in
India," The New York Times, June 25, 1974.

334 Samir Amin is quoted from [66], pp. 592-593.

Threshing contest in 1855: [101], pp. 303-304.

338 Reddy on energy is quoted from his background paper,

Simple Energy Technologies for Rural Families, prepared for the
UNICEF Seminar on Simple Technology for The Rural Family, Nairobi,
June 1976.

338 For bio-gas programs see: "Integrated Microbial Tech-
nology for Developing Countries: Springboard for Economic Progress"
by Edgar J. DaSilva, Reuben Olembo, and Anton Burgers, in Impact,
April-June 1978. Also: "Fuels from Biomass: Integration with Food and
Materials Systems" by E. S. Lipinsky, and "Solar Energy for Village
Development" by Norman L. Brown and James W. Howe, both in
Science, February 10, 1978.

339 Technology in India: "India Developing Solar Power
for Rural Electricity," The New York Times, May 11, 1979.

339 Haim Aviv's proposal is described in "Envisions Israel-
Egypt Joint Food-Fuel Project," New York Post, April 14, 1979.

339 Environmental Research Lab in Tucson: "Powdered

480 THE THIRD WAVE

Martinis and Other Surprises Coming in the Future," The New York
Times, January 10,1979.

339 Vermont catfish experiment and the New Alchemy Insti-
tute: "Future Farming" by Alan Anderson, Jr., in Omni, June 1979.

339 The twenty-year food forecasts of the Center for Fu-
tures Research at U.S.C. are in the report, Neither Feast nor Famine:
A Preliminary Report of the Second Twenty Year Forecast, by Selwyn
Enzer, Richard Drobnick, and Steven Alter.

340 John McHale and Magda Cordell McHale from [91],
pp. 188-190.

341 M. S. Iyengar is quoted from his paper, Post-Industrial

Society in the Developing Countries, presented to the Special
Conference on Futures Research in Rome, 1973.

341 Ward Morehouse, "Microelectronic Chips to Feed the

Third World" by Stephanie Yanchinski, hi New Scientist (London),
August 9, 1979.

342 Roger Melen: San Francisco Chronicle, January 31
1979.

342 John Magee is quoted from The New World Informa-
tion Order, a report by George Kroloff and Scott hen to the Senate
Committee on Foreign Rel; November 1977.

343 Suharto's sword: "Asia's Communications Boom: The

Promise of Satellite Technology," Asiaweek (Hong Kong), November
24,1978.

344 Jagdish Kapur is quoted from his lecture, "India — 2000

A.D.: A Framework for Survival," presented to the India International
Centre, New Delhi, January 17, 1974.

345 Myrdal's discussion of unemployment is found in [94]
p. 961.

345 A note here on the distinction between what I call "pre-

suming" and what some development economists term the "informal
sector." An intense debate has arisen over this informal economy
which springs up within many of the world's poor countries. In it,
desperate millions attempt to eke out a living by doing odd jobs,
peddling, street hustling, making furniture, driving, shining shoes, doing
small-scale construction and other tasks. Some economists believe the
existence of this sector is positive, since it opens a channel through
which people make the transition into the formal economy. Other
economists insist the informal economy merely locks people into
permanent misery.

Whichever view proves correct, this informal sector is properly
characterized as "petty commodity produc-

NOTES

481

tion" in the sense that it is part of the market economy. For this reason,
it differs fundamentally from what I have called the "prosumer sector,"
which is based on production for use instead. The informal sector fits
into what, in my terminology, is Sector B — production for exchange —
not Sector A — production for use, which I call prosumption.

345 Streeten of the World Bank is quoted from his paper,

Development Ideas in Historical Perspective: The New Interest in
Development (n.d.).

345 Yona Friedman is quoted from his paper No-Cost

Housing, presented to a meeting of UNESCO, November 14-18, 1977.

346 Some World Bank projects do emphasize self-help or

sweat-equity approaches. See, for example, "The Bank and Urban
Poverty" by Edward Jaycox, in Finance & Development, September
1978. Director of the Bank's Urban Projects Department, Jaycox points
out another implication of the sweat -equity approach: "Because the
beneficiaries are expected to pay the costs [in the form of their labor], it
often becomes not only desirable but essential that they participate in
the decisions in planning and implementing the project." Presuming,
indeed, implies a higher degree of self-determination than production.

347 Leach: Literacy, A Nevis Institute Working Paper, Ed-
inburgh, 1977.

347 Marshall McLuhan discusses oral culture in [46], p. 50.

348 Samir Amin is quoted from [66], p. 595.

CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR

(No notes are required for this chapter.)

CHAPTER TWENTY-FIVE

365 President's Commission on Mental Health, and National
Institute of Mental Health cited in [409], p. 6.

366 "Madness, Genius and Sainthood": "The Marketplace,"

PENewsletter, October 1974. 366 Eight thousand therapies: [404], p.
11 .

366 A The critical survey: [404], p. 56.

367 California magazine: "In Guns We Trust" by Karol
Greene and Schuyler Ingle, in New West, April 23, 1979.

368 Popular novel: [21], p. 377.

370 Norman Macrae is quoted from his excellent article,

482 THE THIRD WAVE

The Coming Entrepreneurial Revolution," The Economist, December
25, 1976.

371 Matchmaker: Jewish Chronicle, June 16, 1978.

372 Re: Future Shock, see [502], chapter 5.

373 Rollo May's comment is from [414], p. 34.

374 On cults, see [404], pp. 12,16, and 35.

374 Unification Church businesses: "Gone Fishing," News*
week, September 11, 1978.

375 Divine Light Center lawsuit: "Cuckoo Cult," Time, May
7, 1979.

375 The Unification Church official is quoted in "Honor Thy

Father Moon" by Berkeley Rice, in Psychology Today, January 1976.

375 Dr. Sukhdeo is quoted in "Jersey Psychiatrist, Studying

the Guyana Survivors, Fears Implications for U.S. Society From Other
Cults" by Jon Nordheimer, in The New York Times, December 1, 1978.

375 Sherwin Harris is quoted in "I Never Once Thought He

Was Crazy" by Jon Nordheimer, in The New York Times, November 27
1978.

CHAPTER TWENTY -SIX

380 Reszler's essay is "L'homme nouveau': esp£rance et
histoire," Cadmos (Geneva), Winter 1978.

381 Fromm is quoted from [406], p. 304; and from [407],
p. 77. Conover is quoted from an interview with author.

386 Flexible fringe benefits are described in "Companies Of-
fer Benefits Cafeteria-Style," Business Week, November 13,1978.

386 Reluctance of employees to move: "Mobile Society Puts
Down Roots," Time, June 12, 1978.

386 Matrix is described in [13], p. 104.

390 For Enzensberger, see [42], p. 97.

CHAPTER TWENTY -SEVEN

393 President Carter is quoted from his address to the coun-
try on energy problems, text in The New York Times, July 16, 1979.

394 General Motors* experience with catalytic converters

was covered in "Why Don't We Recall Congress for Defective Parts?"
by Robert I. Weingarten, in Financial World, March 26, 1975.

394 Forty-five thousand pages of new regulations a year:

Regulatory Failure 111 (Washington, D.C.: National Association of
Manufacturers, April 1978), p. A-2,

NOTES

483

394 Steel industry: advertisement of Bethlehem Steel, Time,

June 26, 1978.

394 Eli Lilly and government forms: "The Day the Paper

Stopped” by Robert Bendiner, The New York Times, March 16, 1977.

394 Exxon report to the FEA: Michael C. Jensen and

William H. Meckling, Can the Corporation Survive? (Rochester, N.Y.:
University of Rochester Graduate School of Management, May 1976),

p. 2.

394 On political paralysis: French voters speak of the politi-
cal "freeze" or the "blockage of politics." A former prime minister,

Michel Debr6, sees a "crisis of the regime." See Flora Lewis's report,
"Life's Not Bad, but French Foresee Disaster," The New York Times,
November 17, 1979.

394 The Japanese prime minister Takeo Miki is quoted in

"Fragility of Democracy Stirs Japanese Anxiety" by Richard Halloran in
The New York Times, November 9, 1975.

396 Election statistics for 1976 are from: Election Research

Center, America Votes 12 (Washington, D. C.: Congressional
Quarterly, 1977), and Bureau of the Census, U.S. Department of
Commerce.

396 Independent voters: "As the Parties Decline" by Freder-
ick G. Dutton, in The New York Times, May 8, 1972.

396 Decline of the Labour Party: "How Labour Lost Its

Legions,” by Dr. Stephen Haseler, in Daily Mail (London), August 9,
1979.

396 Japanese quote from The Daily Yomiuri (Tokyo), De-
cember 28, 1972.

396 Victor Nekipelov: from "Here a Stalin There a Stalin

Everywhere a Stalin Stalin," The New York Times, August 14, 1979.

396 New Zealand politics: "NZ Elections Give Rise to a

Time Like Alice" by Christopher Beck, in The Asian, November 22,
1972.

396 The American Enterprise Institute report is cited by

"TRB” in "Who's in Charge in Washington? No One's in Charge There,"
Philadelphia Inquirer, March 3, 1979.

397 Private armies in Britain: 'Thunder From the Right,"

Newsweek, August 26, 1974; also "Phantom Major Calls up an Anti-
Chaos Army" by John Murchie, in the Daily Mirror (London), August 23,
1974.

397 Red Brigades: See Curtis Bill Pepper, "The Possessed,"

New York Times Magazine, February 18, 1979.

397 Anti-terrorism laws in West Germany: Keesing's Con-

temporary Archives (London: Longman Group, 1979)

484 THE THIRD WAVE

pp. 29497-8; "Scissors in the Head" by David Zane Mairowitz, in
Harper's, May 1978; "Germany Passes Tough Terrorist Law,"
Indianapolis Star, April 14, 1978; "West Germany's Private Watch on
Political Morals" by James Fenton, in The Guardian (Manchester),
June 19, 1978.

397 Aldo Moro: "Roman Outrage," Time, May 14, 1979.

398 Instability in Saudi Arabia: "External Threats to Saudi
Stability," Business Week, February 12, 1979.

398 Sheikh Yamani: "Relax and Enjoy a Drive” by Julian

Snyder, in International Money line, August 11, 1979.

400 Publication of Victory: Michael Simmons, "Literary

Victory for Stalin in Russia," The Guardian (Manchester), August
4,1979.

400 Resurgence of the right wing hi France: "Rightist Intel-
lectual Groups Rise in France” by Jonathan Kandell, in The New York
Times, July 8, 1979; and "The New Right Raises Its Voice," Time,
August 6, 1979. Also William Pfaff column, International Herald
Tribune, August 3,1979.

401 The recrudescence of the Ku Klux Klan: "Violent Klan

Group Gaining Members" by Wayne King, in The New York Times,
March 15, 1979; also "Vengeance for Raid Seen as Motive for 4
Killings at Anti-Klan March," The New York Times, November 5, 1979;
and "Prosecutor in Klan-Protest Killings Terms 12 Suspects Equally
Guilty," The New York Times, November 7, 1979.

401 Totalitarian inefficiency: "What Does Russia Want?" by
Robin Knight, in U.S. News & World Report, July 16, 1979.

402 Fletcher quote: Interview with author.

404 Jill Tweedie: "Why Jimmy's Power Is Purely Peanuts,"

The Guardian (Manchester), August 2, 1979.

405 Price increases hi Czechoslovakia and Hungary: "Infla-
tion Exists," The Economist, July 28,1979. 407 The Advertising Age
article is: Stanley E. Cohen,

"President's Economic Switch Puts Emphasis on

Spending," January 20,1975. 407 Oil experts: See Helmut Bechtaldt,
"The Diktat of the

Oil Millions," Aussenpolitik, Third Quarter, 1974. 407 Speed of
economic change: Fortune is quoted from

"Business Roundup," January 1975.

407 Margaret Thatcher's clouded crystal ball is noted in

John Cunningham, "Guardian Women," The Guardian (Manchester),
July 31, 1979.

408 Richard Reeves is quoted from his article "The Next
Coming of Teddy," Esquire, May 9,1978.

NOTES

485

408 Robert Skidelsky is cited in "Keynes and Unfinished
Business," The New York Times, December 19, 1974.

409 Gay Nazis: "Out of Focus" column in Focus/Midwest,

Vol. 10, No. 66.

409 Labor's political drives: A. H. Raskin, "Mr. Labor: Ide-
ology is Baloney,"' book review of Joseph C. Goul-den's biography of
George Meany, The New York Times, October 23, 1972.

410 Representative Mineta is quoted in "The Great Con-
gressional Power Grab," Business Week, September 11, 1978.

411 The Harper's magazine article is William Shawcross,

"Dr. Kissinger Goes to War," May 1979.

411 Decision overload exists even in the arts bureaucracy:

"The National Endowment for the Arts Grows Up” by Malcolm N.
Carter, in Art News, September 1979.

412 For Pentagon decision-making see Armbrister, [379]

pp. 191-2. The reference to seventy-six as the number of missions the
Pentagon officer had to review is from Armbrister interview with author.

412 Multibillion dollar bungle: "The Case of the Misplaced
$30 Billion," Business Week, July 24, 1978.

412 Stuart Eizenstat is quoted in "The Great Congressional
Power Grab," Business Week, September 11, 1978.

413 Congress: see report by The Congressional Clearing-
house on the Future and the Congressional Institute for the Future,
Washington, D.C., July 1979. 413 Soviet decision paralysis:
"Worldgram," U.S. News &

World Report, November 24, 1975.

413 The Member of Parliament is Gerald T. Fowler, quoted

in "Devolution Will Ease Load at Whitehall, Minister Says" by Trevor
Fishlock, in The Times (London), January 16, 1976.

I 413 Sir Richard Marsh is quoted in his article "Why West-
minster Can't Take Business Decisions," Industrial Management
(Wembley, Middlesex), July 1979.

I 413 On Italy's political crisis: "Italy Seeks a Government,"

Financial Times (London), August 3, 1979; also "Italy's Coalition Gets
a Vote of Approval in Parliament" by Henry Tanner, in The New York
Times, August 12, 1979.

CHAPTER TWENTY-EIGHT

416 On the Constitutional Convention see Flexner [387], p
1 17. 418 Jefferson is quoted from £392], pp. 32, 67.

486 THE THIRD WAVE

420 Burnham: "A Disenchanted Electorate May Stay Home
in Droves," The New York Times, February 1, 1976.

420 Silent majority: [391], p. 410

421 South Africa: See interview with Roelof Frederik "Pik"

Botha in Starcke [378], p. 68.

South Africa is characterized as "still industrializ- 1 ing," even though it
has an advanced technological I base, because important sectors of its
population are I still outside the industrial system. As in Brazil, Mex-I

ico, India, and other such countries, an island of quite developed
industrialism exists in the middle of prein-dustrial conditions. 425
Becker from [380], pp. 183-185.

427 Growth of the Congressional staff: "Proxmire's Well-

Placed Jab” by Marvin Stone, in U.S. News & World Report,
September 10, 1979.

428 On traces of direct democracy in the French revolution*
ary constitution: [347], p. 18.

428 Marx invoking the Paris Commune is from [347], p.

61.

428 Federalist objections to direct democracy: See Clark

McCauley, Omar Rood and Tom Johnson, "The Next Democracy," in
the World Future Society Bulletin, November-December 1977.

429 Rene* Levesque taking power: "Business Has the Jitters
in Quebec” by Herbert E. Meyer, in Fortune, October 1977.

430 Nuclear referendum in California: "Atomic Reaction:

Voters in California Weigh Pros and Cons of Nuclear Energy," Wall
Street Journal, March 1, 1976. 433 Wallonia protests the shift of
industry to Flanders:

"Wallonia," Financial Times Survey (London), May 12, 1976.

433 Western states as energy colonies: "After Setbacks-

New Tactics in Environmental Crusade," U.S. News & World Report,
June 9, 1975.

434 Geographical tilt from "Corporate Flying: Changing

the Way Companies Do Business," Business Week$ i February 6,
1978.

435 The decision load concept leads to the dismal suspicion

that, regardless of political struggle, any given deci> sion load will be
borne by the fewest people capably of handling it — that a small number
of people will al« 1 : ways succeed in monopolizing decision-making
power, until they are overwhelmed by a decisional implosion and are
simply no longer able to carry the load them* selves.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Since articles, scientific and scholarly papers, and specialized reports
are fully described in the accompanying Notes, this listing is limited to

books and to a small number of monographs and proceedings. I have
grouped the entries under a few headings.

ARTS

[1] Boucher, Francois. 20,000 Years of Fashion. (New

York: Harry N. Abrams, 1968.) [2] Hading, Robert, ed. The Modern
Interior. (New York:

St. Martin's Press, 1964.) [3] Hauser, Arnold. The Social History of Art
(4 vols.),

trans. Stanley Godman. (New York: Alfred A.

Knopf, Vintage Books, 1951.)

[4] Klingender, Francis D. Art and the Industrial Revolu-
tion, ed. Arthur Elton. (London: Paladin, 1972.) [5J Kostelanetz,

Richard, ed. On Contemporary Literature.

(New York: Avon, 1974.) [6] Mueller, John H. The American Symphony
Orchestra.

(Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1951.) [7] Sachs, Curt The
History of Musical Instruments. (New

York: W. W. Norton, 1940.) [8] Thomson, George. Marxism and Poetry.
(New York:

International Publishers, 1946.)
HUSINESS/MANAGEMENT/ORGANI2JATION THEORY
19] Adams, T. F. M., and N. Kobayashi. The World of
Japanese Business. (Tokyo: Kodansha International, 1969.)

487

488 [101
[12] [13] [14]

[15] [16] [17]

[18]

[19]

[20] [21] [22] [23] [24]

[25] [26]

[27]

[28] [29]

THE TH/HD

Anthony, William P. Participative Management. (Reading, Mass.:
Addison-Wesley, 1978.)

Beer, 'Stafford. Brain of the Firm: The Managerial Cy-bernetics of
Organization. (London: Allen Lane, Penguin Press, 1972.)

Bentoii, Lewis, ed. Management for the Future. (Ne York: McGraw-Hill,
1978.)

Davis, Stanley M., and Paul R. Lawrence. Matn (Reading, Mass.:
Addison-Wesley, 1977.)

Dewing* Arthur S. Financial Policy of Corporatio Vote. I and H, 5th
edition. (New York: Ronald "

1953.) Drucker, Peter F. The Concept of the Corporation. (New

York: New American Library, Mentor, 1964.) Gambling* Trevor.

Societal Accounting. (Londo

George Allen & Unwin, 1974.)

Gross, Bertram M. The Managing of Organizatio The Administrative
Struggle, Vols. I and n. (Nev York: Free Press Macmillan, 1964.)
Gvishiani, D. Organisation and Management: A Socio* logical Analysis
of Western Theories, trans. Robert Daglish and Leonid Kolesnikov.
(Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1972.)

Janger, Allen R. Corporate Organization Structures:

Service Companies. (New York: Conference Board,

1977.)

ICahn, Herman, ed. The Future of the Corpora

(New York: Mason & Lipscomb, 1974.) Knebel, Fletcher. The Bottom
Line. (New York: Pock

Books, 1975.) Korda, Michael. Power! How To Get It, How To U&

It. (New York: Ballantine Books, 1975.) Labor Research Association.
Billionaire Corporate

(New York: International Publishers, 1954.) Lawrence, Paul R., and
Jay W. Lorsch. Developing gartizations: Diagnosis and Action.
(Reading, * Addison-Wesley, 1969.) Moore, Wilbert E. The Conduct of
the Corpora

(New York: Random House, Vintage Books, 1962.) Newman, Peter C.
The Canadian Establishment, * (Toronto: McClelland and Stewart-
Bantam, Books, 1977.)

Pattee, Howard H., ed. Hierarchy Theory: The Ch lenge of Complex
Systems. (New York: George ziller, 1973.) Roy, Robert H. The
Cultures of Management. (Ba

more: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1977.) Scull, Penrose, and
Prescott C. Fuller. From Peddlers \ Merchant Princes. (Chicago:
Follett, 1967.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

489

[30] Sloan, Alfred P., Jr. My Years With General Motors.

(New York: MacFadden-Bartell, 1965.)

[31] Stein, Barry A. Size, Efficiency, and Community Enter-
prise. (Cambridge, Mass.: Center for Community Economic
Development, 1974.)

[32] Tannenbaum, Arnold S., et si. Hierarchy in Organize** tions. (San
Francisco: Jossey-Bass Publishers, 1974.)

[33] Tarnowieski, Dale. The Changing Success Ethic: An AMA Survey
Report. (New York: Amacom, 1973.)

[34] Toffler, Alvin. Social Dynamics and the Bell System. Report to the
American Telephone & Telegraph Co.

[35] Van der Haas, Hans. La Mutation de L'Entreprise Eu-rope'enne,
trans. Pierre Rocheron. (Paris: Editions Robert Laffont, l/Usine
Nouvelle, 1971 .)

[36] Yoshino, M. Y. Japan's Managerial System: Tradition and
Innovation. (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1968.)

COMMUNICATIONS

[37] [38] [39]

Aranguren, J. L. Human Communication, trans. Frances Partridge.
(New York: McGraw-Hill, World University Library, 1967.)

Baran, Paul. Potential Market Demand for Two-Way Information
Services to the Home, 1970-1990. (Menlo Park, Cal.: Institute for the
Future, 1971.) Bell System Statistical Manual 1940-1969. American
Telephone & Telegraph Co., Corporate Results Analysis Division.

(New York, 1970.)

[40] Brunner, John. The Shockwave Rider. (New York: Harper & Row,
1975.)

[41] Cherry, Colin. World Communication: Threat or Promise?
(London: John Wiley, Wiley-lnterscience, 1971.)

[42] Enzensberger, Hans Magnus, The Consciousness Indus-
try: On Literature, Politics and the Media. (New York: Seabury Press,
Continuum, 1974.)

[43] Innis, Harold A. The Bias of Communication. (Toronto: University
of Toronto Press, 1951.)

[44] .. Empire and Communications, rev. Mary Q.

Innis. (Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1972.)

[45] Laborit, Henri. Decoding the Human Message, trans-Stephen
Bodington and Alison Wilson. (London: Allison & Busby, 1977.)

[46] - McLuhan, Marshall. Understanding Media: The Extensions of
Man. (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1965.)

[47] Martin, James. The Wired Society. (Englewood Cliffs,

N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1978.)

[48] Mathison, Stuart L., and Philip M. Walker. Computers
490 THE THIRD WAVE

and Telecommunications: Issues in Public Policy. (Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1970.)

[49] Nilles, J. M., et al. The Telecommunications-Transporta-

tion Tradeoff: Options for Tomorrow. (New York: John Wiley, 1976.)

[50] Paine, Albert Bigelow. In One Man's Life. (New York:

Harper & Brothers, 1921.)

[51] Pye, Lucian W., ed. Communications and Political De-
velopment. (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1963.)

[52] Servan-Schreiber, Jean Louis. Le Pouvoir d'lnformer.

(Paris: Editions Robert Laffont, 1972).

[53] Singer, Benjamin D. Feedback and Society: A Stucfy of

the Uses of Mass Channels for Coping. (Lexington, Mass.: D. C.
Heath, Lexington Boojcs, 1973.)

[54] 9 ed. Communications in Canadian Society. (To-

ronto: Copp Clark, 1972.)

[55] Soper, Horace N. The Mails: History, Organization and

. .Methods of Payment. (London: Keliher, Hudson and Kearns, 1946.)

[56] Zilliacus, Laurin. From Pillar to Post. (London: Heine-
mann, 1956.)

CONSUMER/SELF-HELP/SERVICES

[57] Friedman, Yona. Une Utopie Realisee. (Paris: Muse*e d'Art
Moderne, 1975.)

[58] Gartner, Alan, and Frank Riessman. Self-Help in the
Human Services. (San Francisco: Jossey-Bass Publishers, 1977.)

[59] .. The Service Society and the Consumer Van-

guard. (New York: Harper & Row, 1974.)

[60] Halmos, Paul. The Personal Society. (London: Con-
stable, 1970.)

[61] Kallen, Horace M. The Decline and Rise of the Con-
sumer. (New York: Appleton-Century, 1936.)

[62] Katz, Alfred H., and Eugene I. Bender. The Strength In

Us: Self-Help Groups in the Modern World. (New York: Franklin Watts,
New Viewpoints, 1976.)

[63] Lewis, Russell. The New Service Society. (London:

Longman, 1973.)

[64] Steidl, Rose E., and Esther Crew Bratton. Work in the
Home. (New York: John Wiley, 1968.)

DEVELOPMENT THEORY/IMPERIALISM

[65] Alatas, Syed Hussein. Modernization and Social Change.

(Sydney, Australia: Angus and Robertson, 1972.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

491

[66] Amin, Samir. Accumulation on a World Scale: A Cri-

tique of the Theory of Under development, trans*

Brian Pearce. (New York: Monthly Review Press,

1974.) [67] Aron, Raymond. The Industrial Society: Three Essays

on Ideology and Development. (New York: Simon

and Schuster, Clarion, 1967.) [68] Arrighi Giovanni. The Geometry of
Imperialism: The

Limits of Hobson's Paradigm, trans. Patrick Camiller.

(London: NLB, 1978.) [69] Bhagwati, Jagdish N., ed. The New
International

Economic Order: The North-South Debate. (Cambridge, Mass.: MET
Press, 1977.) [70] Bodard, Lucien. Green Hell: Massacre of the
Brazilian

Indians, trans. Jennifer Monaghan. (New York:

Outerbridge and Dienstfrey, 1971.) [711 Brown, Michael Barratt. The
Economics of Imperialism.

(Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1974.) [72] Brown,
Richard D. Modernization: The Transformation

of American Life 1600-1865, ed. Eric Foner. (New

York: Hill and Wang, American Century, 1976.) [73] Cohen, Benjamin
J. The Question of Imperialism: The

Political Economy of Dominance and Dependence.

(London: Macmillan, 1974.) [74] Cotlow, Lewis. The Twilight of the
Primitive. (New

York: Ballantine Books, 1973.) [75] Curtin, Philip D., ed. Imperialism.
(New York: Walker,

1971.) [76] Deutsch, Karl W., ed. Ecosocial Systems and Ecopol-

itics: A Reader on Human and Social Implications of

Environmental Management in Developing Countries.

(Paris: UNESCO, 1977.) [77] Emmanuel, Arghiri. Unequal Exchange:
A Study of the

Imperialism of Trade, trans. Brian Pearce. (London:

NLB, Monthly Review Press, 1972.)

[78] Erb, Guy F., and Valeriana Kallab, eds. Beyond De-

pendency: The Developing World Speaks Out.

(Washington, D.C.: Overseas Development Council,

1975.) [79] Friedmann, Georges. Industrial Society: The Emergence

of the Human Problems of Automation, ed. Harold

L. Sheppard. (Glencoe, 111.: Free Press, 1955.) [80] Goldwin, Robert
A., ed. Readings in Russian Foreign

Policy, (New York: Oxford University Press, 1959.) [81] Goulet, Denis.
The Cruel Choice: A New Concept in

the Theory of Development. (New York: Atheneum,

1971.) [82] Harvie, Christopher, Graham Martin, and Aaron Scharf,

492 THE THIRD WAVE

eds. Industrialisation and Culture 1830-1914. (London: Macmillan,
Open University Press, 1970.)

[83] Hobsbawm, E. J. Industry and Empire: From 1750 to
the Present Day. (Baltimore: Penguin Books, 1969.)

[84] Hoselitz, Bert F., and Wilbert E. Moore, eds. Industriali-
zation and Society. Proceedings of the Chicago Conference on Social
Implications of Industrialization and Technical Change, 15-22
September, 1960. (Mouton, France: UNESCO, 1963.)

[85] Howe, Susanne. Novels of Empire. (New York: Colum-
bia University Press, 1949.)

[86] Hudson, Michael. Global Fracture: The New Interna-
tional Economic Order. (New York: Harper & Row, 1977.)

[87] . Super Imperialism: The Economic Strategy of

American Empire. (New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1972.)

[88] Lean, Geoffrey. Rich World, Poor World. (London:

George Allen & Unwin, 1978.)

[89] Lenin, V. I. Imperialism, The Highest Stage of Capital-
ism. (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1975.)

[90] Lerner, Daniel. The Passing of Traditional Society:

Modernizing the Middle Z&w/. [New York: Free Press* 1958.)

[91] McHale, John, and Magda Cordell McHale. Basic Hu-
man Needs: A Framework for Action. (New Brunswick, N.J.:
Transaction Books, 1977.)

[92] Magdoff, Harry. The Age of Imperialism: The Econom-
ics of U.S. Foreign Policy. (New York: Monthly Review Press, Modern
Reader, 1969.)

[93] Mathias, Peter. The First Industrial Nation: An

Economic History of Britain 1700-1914. (London: Methuen, 1969.)

[94] Myrdal, Gunnar. An Approach to the Asian Drama:

Methodological and Theoretical. (New York: Vintage Books, 1970.)

[95] Nidergang, Marcel. The 20 Latin Americas, Vols, I and

II, trans. Rosemary Sheed. (Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin
Books, 1971.)

[96] Said, Edward W. Orientalism. (New York: Pantheon
Books, 1978.)

[97] Schumpeter, Joseph. Imperialism, and Social Classes:

Two Essays, trans. Heinz Norden. (New York: World, 1955.)

[98] Toynbee, Arnold. The Industrial Revolution. (Boston:

Beacon Press, 1956.)

[99] World Bank. Rural Development, Sector Policy Paper.
(Washington, D.C., 1975.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

493

ECONOMIC HISTORY [100]

[ 101 ] [ 102 ]

[103] [104] [105] [106] [107]

[108] [109]

[ 110 ]

[ 111 ] [ 112 ]

[113] [114] [115]

Birnie, Arthur. An Economic History of Europe 1760-1939. (London:
Methuen, University Paperbacks, 1962.)

Bogart, Ernest L., and Donald L. Kemmerer. Economic History of the
American People. (New York: Longmans, Green, 1942.)

Burton, Theodore E. Financial Crises and Periods of Industrial and
Commercial Depression. (Wells, Vt.2 Fraser, 1966.)

Cipolla, Carlo M. The Economic History of World Population.
(Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1964.)

Clough, Shepard B., Thomas Moodie, and Carol Moodie, eds.
Economic History of Europe: Twentieth Century. (New York: Harper &
Row, 1968.)

Fohlen, Claude. The Fontana Economic History of Europe, Vol. VI,
Chapter 2, France 1920-1970, trans. Roger Greaves. (London:
Fontana, 1973.)

Garraty, John A. Unemployment in History: Economic Thought and
Public Policy. (New York: Harper & Row, 1978.)

Hartwell, R. M., et al. The Long Debate on Poverty: Eight Essays on
Industrialization and "The Condition of England." (London: Institute of
Economic Affairs,

Hayek, Friedrich A., ed. Capitalism and the Historian.

(Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1954.) Kenwood, A. G., and A.
L, Lougheed. The Growth of

the International Economy 1820-1960. (London:

George Allen & Unwin, 1971.) Kindleberger, Charles P. Manias,
Panics, and Crashes:

A History of Financial Crises. (New York: Basic

Books, 1978.) . The World in Depression 1929-1939. (London:

Allen Lane, Penguin Press, 1973.) Le Clair, Edward E., Jr., and Harold
K. Schneider, eds.

Economic Anthropology: Readings in Theory and
Analysis. (New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston,

1968.) Maizels, Alfred. Growth & Trade. (London: Cambridge
University Press, 1970.)

Nove, Alec. An Economic History of the U.S.S.R. (Harmondsworth,
Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1969.) Polanyi, Karl. The Great
Transformation. (Bostons

Beacon Press, 1957.)

494 THE THIRD WAVE

[116] Ringer, Fritz K., ed. The German Inflation of 1923.

(New York: Oxford University Press, 1969.) [117] Sahlins, Marshall.
Stone Age Economics. (Chicago:

Aldine-Atherton, 1972.) [118] Williams, Glyndwr. The Expansion of
Europe in the

Eighteenth Century: Overseas Rivalry, Discovery and

Exploitation. (New York: Walker, 1967.) [119] Woodruff, William. The
Fontana Economic History of

Europe, Vol. IV, Chapter 2, The Emergence of an Zn-

ternational Economy 1700-1924. (London: Fontana,

1971.)

ECONOMICS

[120] Alampiev, P., O. Bogomolov, and Y. Shiryaev. A New Approach
to Economic Integration, trans. Y. Sdobni-kov. (Moscow: Progress
Publishers, 1974.)

[121] Aliber, Robert Z. The International Money Game, 2nd and
expanded edition. (New York: Basic Books, 1976.)

[122] Balassa, Bela. The Theory of Economic Integration. (London:
George Allen & Unwin, 1962.)

[123] Bozyk, Pawel. Poland as a Trading Partner. (Warsaw: Interpress
Publishers, 1972.)

[124] Brittan, Samuel. Participation Without Politics: An Analysis of the
Nature and the Role of Markets. (London: Institute of Economic Affairs,
1975.)

[125] Concentration in American Industry. Report of the Subcommittee
on Antitrust and Monopoly to the Committee on the Judiciary, U.S.
Senate. (Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1957.)

[126] Economic Concentration. Hearings before the Subcommittee on
Antitrust and Monopoly of the Committee on the Judiciary, U.S.

Senate. Parts 7 and 7A. (Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing
Office, 1968.)

[127] Galbraith, John Kenneth. Money: Whence It Came, Where It
Went. (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1975.)

[128] Henderson, Hazel. Creating Alternative Futures: The End of
Economics. (New York: Berkley Windhover, 1978.)

[129] Inflation: Economy and Society. (London: Institute for Economic
Affairs, 1972.)

[130] Ivens, Michael, ed. Prophets of Freedom and Enterprise.
(London: Kogan Page for Aims of Industry, 1975.)

[131] Kornai, Janos. Anti-Equilibrium: On Economic Systems Theory
and the Tasks of Research. (Amsterdam: North-Holland, 1971.)

[132] Kuznetsov, V. I. Economic Integration: Two Ap-

BIBLIOGRAPHY 495

proaches, trans. Bean Brian. (Moscow: Progress

Publishers, 1976.) [133] Leiss, William. The Limits to Satisfaction: On
Needs

and Commodities. (London: Marion Boyars, 1978.) [134] Little, Jane
Sneddon. Euro-Dollars: The Money-Market

Gypsies. (New York: Harper & Row, 1975.) [135] Loebl, Eugen.
Humanomics: How We Can Make the

Economy Serve Us — Not Destroy Us. (New York:

Random House, 1976.) [136] Mandel, Ernest. Decline of the Dollar: A
Marxist View

of the Monetary Crisis. (New York: Monad Press,

1972.) [137] Marris, Robin. The Economic Theory of "Managerial"

Capitalism. (London: Macmillan, 1967.) [138] Marx, Karl. Capital: A
Critical Analysis of Capitalist

Production, trans. Samuel Moore and Edward Aveling,

ed. Frederick Engels, (New York: International Publishers, 1939.) [139]
Mintz, Morton, and Jerry S. Cohen. America, Inc.:, Who

Owns and Operates the United States. (New York:

Dell, 1972.)

[140] Pasinetti, Luigi L. Lectures on the Theory of Production. (London:
Macmillan, 1977.) [141] Ritter, Lawrence S., and William L. Silber.
Money, 2nd

edition. (New York: Basic Books, 1973.) [142] Robertson, James. Profit
or People?: The New Social

Role of Money. (London: Calder & Boyars, 1974.) [143] Ropke,

Wilhelm. Economics of the Free Society, trans.

Patrick M. Boarman. (Chicago: Henry Regnery,

1963.) [144] Rothbard, Murray N., and I. W. Sylvester. What is

Money? (New York: Arno Press & The New York

Times, 1972.) [145] Scott, D. R. The Cultural Significance of Accounts.

(Columbia, Mo.: Lucas Brothers Publishers, un-4

dated.)

[146] Senin, M. Socialist Integration. (Moscow: Progress Publishers,
1973.) [147] Sherman, Howard. Radical Political Economy: Capital'

ism and Socialism from a Marxist-Humanist Perspective. (New York:
Basic Books, 1972.) [148] Smith, Adam. Essays on Philosophical
Subjects, with An

Account of the Life and Writings of the Author by

Dugald Stewart. (Dublin: Messrs. Wogan, Byrne, J.

Moore, Colbert, Rice, W. Jones, Porter, and

Folingsby, 1795.) [149] „ . The Wealth of Nations, ed. Edwin

Cannan.

(New York: Random House, Modem Library, 1937.)

496 THE THIRD WAVE

[150] Toffler, Alvin. The Eco-Spasm Report. (New York: Bantam
Books, 1975.)

[151] Ward, Benjamin. What's Wrong with Economics? (London:
Macmillan, 1972.)

ENERGY/ECOLOGY

[152] Brown, Lester R. In the Human Interest: A Strategy to Stabilize
World Population. (New York: W. W. Norton, 1974.)

[153] Carr, Donald E. Energy & the Earth Machine. (New York: W. W.
Norton, 1976.)

[154] Choosing Our Environment: Can We Anticipate the Future?
Hearings before the Panel on Environmental Science and Technology
of the Subcommittee on Environmental Pollution of the Committee on

Public Works, U.S. Senate. Parts 2 and 3. (Washington, D.C.: U.S.
Government Printing Office, 1976.)

[155] Clark, Wilson. Energy for Survival: The Alternative to Extinction.
(Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Anchor Books, 1974.)

[156] Commoner, Barry. The Closing Circle: Nature, Man, and
Technology. (New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1971.)

[157] . The Poverty of Power: Energy and the Economic Crisis.

(New York: Bantam Books, 1977.)

[158] Dansereau, Pierre. Inscape and Landscape. Massey Lectures,
Twelfth Series, Canadian Broadcasting Corporation. (Toronto: CBC
Learning Systems, 1973.)

[159] Dubos, Rene. Man Adapting. (New Haven: Yale University Press,
1965.)

[160] Energy: Global Prospects 1985-2000. Report of the Workshop on
Alternative Energy Strategies, sponsored by MIT (New York: McGraw-
Hill, 1977.)

[161] Hayes, Denis. The Solar Energy Timetable. (Washington, D.C.:
WorldWatch Institute, 1978.)

[162] Helfrich, Harold W., Jr., ed. The Environmental Crisis: Man's
Struggle to Live With Himself. (New Haven: Yale University Press,
1970.)

[163] Jungk, Robert. The New Tyranny: How Nuclear Power Enslaves
Us, trans. Christopher Trump. (New York: Grosset & Dunlap, Fred
Jordan Books, 1979.)

[164] Lyons, Barrow. Tomorrow's Birthright: A Political and Economic
Interpretation of Our Natural Resources. (New York: Funk & Wagnalls,
1955.)

[165] Meadows, Donella H., et al. The Limits to Growth: A Report for
the Club of Rome's Project on the Predicament of Mankind. (New York:
Universe Books, 1972.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

497

[166] Munson, Richard, ed. Countdown to a Nuclear Moratorium.
(Washington, D.C.: Environmental Action Foundation, 1976.)

[167] Odum, Howard T. Environment, Power, and Society. (New York:
John Wiley, Wiley-lnterscience, 1971.)

[168] Sampson, Anthony. The Seven Sisters: The Great Oil
Companies and the World They Shaped. (New York: Bantam Books,
1976.)

[169] Schumacher, E. F. Small Is Beautiful: Economics as if People
Mattered. (New York: Harper & Row, Perennial Library, 1973.)

[170] Tokyo Fights Pollution: An Urgent Appeal for Reform. Liaison and
Protocol Section, Bureau of General Affairs, Tokyo Metropolitan
Government. (Tokyo A 1971.)

[171] Ubbelohde, A. R. Man and Energy. (New York: George Braziller,
1955.)

[172] Universite de Montreal/McGill University, Conserver Society
Project. The Selective Conserver Society, Vol. 1 , The Integrating
Report. (Montreal: GAMMA, 1976.)

EVOLUTION & PROGRESS

[173] Bury, J. B. The Idea of Progress. (New York: Macmil-lan, 1932.)

[174] Calder, Nigel. The Life Game: Evolution and the New Biology.
(New York: Dell, Laurel, 1975.)

[175] Crozier, Michel. The Stalled Society. (New York: Viking Press,
1973.)

[176] De Closets, Francois, En Danger de Progres. (Paris: Editions
Denoel, 1970.)

[177] Evolution and the Fossil Record: Readings from Scientific
American. (San Francisco: W. H. Freeman, 1978.)

[178] James, Bernard. The Death of Progress. (New York: Alfred A.
Knopf, 1973.)

[179] Jantsch, Erich. Design for Evolution: Self-Organization and
Planning in the Life of Human Systems. (New York: George Braziller,
1975.)

[180] , and Conrad H. Waddington, eds. Evolution and

Consciousness: Human Systems in Transition. (Reading, Mass.:
Addison-Wesley, 1976.)

[181] - Kuznetsov, B. G. Philosophy of Optimism, trans. Ye. D. Khakina
and V. L. Sulima. (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1977.)

[182] Sorel, Georges. The Illusions of Progress, trans. John and
Charlotte Stanley. (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1969.)

498 THE THIRD WAVE

[183] Vacca, Roberto. The Coming Dark Age, trans. J. S.

Whale. (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1973.) [184] Van Doren,

Charles. The Idea of Progress. (New York:

Frederick A. Praeger, 1967.) [185] Williams, George C. Adaptation and
Natural Selection:

A Critique of Some Current Evolutionary Thought.

(Princeton, NX: Princeton University Press, 1966.)

FAMILY/SEX

[186] Beard, Mary R. Woman as Force in History: A Study
in Traditions and Realities. (New York: Macmillan,

1946.) [187] Bernard, Jessie. The Future of Marriage. (New York:
Bantam Books, 1973.)

[188] . The Future of Motherhood, (New York: Penguin Books,

1974.) [189] Francoeur, Robert T., and Anna K. Francoeur, eds. The

Future of Sexual Relations. (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:

Prentice-Hall, Spectrum, 1974.)

[190] Friedan, Betty. The Feminine Mystique, 10th anniversary edition.
(New York: W. W. Norton, 1974.) [191] Ginsberg, Eli, ed. The Nation's
Children. (New York:

Columbia University Press, 1960.) [192] Peck, Ellen, and Judith
Senderowitz, eds. Pronatalism:

The Myth of Mom & Apple Pie. (New York: Thomas

Y. Crowell, 1974.) [193] Rapoport, Rhona, and Robert N. Rappport.
Dual-Career

Families. (Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin

Books, 1971.) [194] Ross, Heather L., and Isabel V. Sawhill. Time of
Trans!"

tion: The Growth of Families Headed by Women.

(Washington, D.C.: Urban Institute, 1975.) [195] Tripp, Maggie, ed.
Woman in the Year 2000. (New

York: Arbor House, 1974.) [196] Zaretsky, Eli. Capitalism, the Family
and Personal Life.

(London: Pluto Press, 1976.)

FUTURE STUDiES/Forecasts

[197] Albrecht, Paul, et al, eds. Faith, Science and the Fu-

ture. Preparatory readings for a world conference.

(Geneva: World Council of Churches, 1978.) [198] Bell, Daniel. The
Coming of Post-Industrial Society: A

Venture in Social Forecasting. (New York: Basic

Books, 1973.) [199] Bonn, Anne-Marie. La Reverie Terrienne et
I'Espace de

laModernite. (Paris: Librairie Klincksieck, 1976.) [200] Brzezinski,
Zbigniew. Between Two Ages: America's

BIBLIOGRAPHY

499

Role in the Technetronic Era. (New York: Viking Press, 1970.)

[201] Clarkson, Stephen, ed. Visions 2020. (Edmonton, Alberta: M. G
Hurtig, 1970.)

[202] Cornish, Edward, ed. 1999 The World of Tomorrow: Selections
from The Futurist. (Washington, D.C.: World Future Society, 1978.)

[203] Daglish, Robert, ed. The Scientific and Technological Revolution
Social Effects and Prospects. (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1972.)

[204] Economic Commission for Europe. Overall Economic
Perspective for the ECE Region up to 1990. (New York: United
Nations, 1978.)

[205] Fedchenko, V., ed. Things to Come. (Moscow: Mir Publishers,
1977.)

[206] Ford, Barbara. Future Food: Alternate Protein for the Year 2000.
(New York: William Morrow, 1978.)

[207] Gross, Bertram M. Space-Time and Post-Industrial Society.
Paper presented to 1965 seminars of Comparative Administration
Group of the American Society for Public Administration. Syracuse
University, 1966.

[208] Harman, Willis W. An Incomplete Guide to the Future. (San
Francisco: San Francisco Book Company, 1976.)

[209] Laszlo, Ervin, et al. Goals for Mankind: A Report to the Club of
Rome on the New Horizons of Global Community. (New York: E. P.
Button, 1977.)

[210] Malita, Mircea. Chronik fur das jahr 2000. (Bucharest: Kriterion,
1973.)

[211] Man, Science, Technology: A Marxist Analysis of the Scientific
Technological Revolution. (Prague: Acade-mia Prague, 1973.)

[212] Maruyama, Magoroh, and Arthur Harkins, eds. Cultures Beyond
the Earth. (New York: Random House, Vintage Books, 1975.)

[213] — ~ — . Cultures of the Future. (The Hague: Mouton . Publishers,
1978.)

[214] Mesarovic, Mihajlo, and Eduard Pestel. Mankind at the Turning
Point: The Second Report to The Club of Rome. (New York: E. P.
Button, Reader's Digest Press, 1974.)

[215] 1985: La France Face au Choc du Futur. Plan et pros-pectives.
Commissariat General du Plan. (Paris: Li-brarie Armand Colin, 1972.)

[216] Royal Ministry for Foreign Affairs in Cooperation with the
Secretariat for Future Studies. To Choose a Future: A Basis for
Discussion and Deliberations on Future Studies in Sweden, trans.

Rudy Feichtner. (Stockholm: Swedish Institute, 1974.)

500 THE THIRD WAVE

[217] Sorrentino, Joseph N. The Moral Revolution. (New York: Manor
Books, 1974.)

[218] Spekke, Andrew A., ed. The Next 25 Years: Crisis & Opportunity.
(Washington, D.C.: World Future Society, 1975.)

[219] Stillman, Edmund, et al. L'Envol de la France: Portrait de la
France dans les annees 80. (Paris: Hachette Litterature, 1973.)

[220] Tanaka, Kakuei. Building a New Japan: A Plan for Remodeling
the Japanese Archipelago. (Tokyo: Simul Press, 1973.)

[221] Theobald, Robert. Habit and Habitat. (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall, 1972.)

[222] Thinking Ahead: UNESCO and the Challenges of Today and
Tomorrow. (Paris: UNESCO, 1977.)

FUTURE STUDiES/General

[223] Ackoff, Russell L. Redesigning the Future: A Systems Approach
to Societal Problems. (New York: John Wiley, 1974.)

[224] Arab-Ogly, E. In the Forecasters' Maze, trans. Kather-ine
Judelson. (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1975.)

[225] Bell, Wendell, and James A. Mau, eds. The Sociology of the
Future. (New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1971.)

[226] Boucher, Wayne I., ed. The Study of the Future: An Agenda for
Research. (Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1977.)

[227] Choosing Our Environment: Can We Anticipate the Future? See
[154],

[228] Cornish, Edward, ed. Resources Directory for America's Third
Century, Part 1, An Introduction to the Study of the Future.
(Washington, D.C.: World Future Society, 1977.)

[229] . Resources Directory for America's Third Century, Part 2,

Information Sources for the Study of the Future. (Washington, B.C.:
World Future Society, 1977.)

[230] , et al. The Study of the Future: An Introduction

to the Art and Science of Understanding and Shaping Tomorrow's
World. (Washington, D.C.: World Future Society, 1977.)

[231] Dickson, Paul. The Future File: A Guide for People -with One
Foot in the 21st Century. (New York: Raw-son Associates, 1977.)

[232] Emery, F. E., and E. L. Trist. Towards a Social Ecol-1 ogy:
Contextual Appreciation of the Future in the 1 Present. (London:
Plenum Press, 1973.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

501

[233] Feinberg, Gerald. The Prometheus Project: Mankind's Search for
Long-Range Goals. (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Anchor Books,

1969. )

[234] Heilbroner, Robert I. The Future as History. (New York: Grove
Press, 1961.)

[235] Jouvenel, Bertrand de. The Art of Conjecture, trans. Ni-kita Lary.
(New York: Basic Books, 1967.)

[236] Jungk, Robert. The Everyman Project: Resources for a Humane
Future, trans. Gabriele Annan and Renate Esslen. (New York:
Liveright, 1977.)

[237] McHale, John. The Future of the Future. (New York: George
Braziller, 1969.)

[238] • , and Magda Cordell McHale. Futures Studies:

An International Survey. (New York: United Nations Institute for
Training and Research, 1975.)

[239] Polak, Fred L. The Image of the Future, trans. Elise Boulding.
(Amsterdam: Elsevier Scientific, 1973.)

[240] . Prognostics. (Amsterdam: Elsevier, 1971.)

[241] Sullivan, John Edward. Prophets of the West: An Introduction to
the Philosophy of History. (New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston,

1970. )

HISTORY

[242] Bloch, Marc. Feudal Society, Vol. 1 , The Growth of Ties of
Dependence, trans. L. A. Manyon. (Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, Phoenix Books, 1964.)

[243] . Feudal Society, Vol. 2, Social Classes and Political

Organization, trans. L. A. Manyon. (Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, Phoenix Books, 1964.)

[244] Braudel, Fernand. Capitalism and Material Life: 1400-1800,
trans. Miriam Kochan. (New York: Harper & Row, Harper Colophon
Books, 1975.)

[245] . The Mediterranean and the Mediterranean

World in the Age of Philip II, Vols. I and II, trans. Sian Reynolds. (New
York: Harper & Row, 1973.)

[246] Collis, Maurice. Cortes and Montezuma. (London: Fa-berand
Faber, 1963.)

[247] Commager, Henry Steele, ed. Documents of American History,
3rd edition. (New York: F. S. Crofts, 1943.)

[248] Darlington, C. D. The Evolution of Man and Society. (London:
George Allen & Unwin, 1969.)

[249] Deane, Phyllis. The First Industrial Revolution. (London:
Cambridge University Press, 1965.)

[250] ' Elias, Norbert. The Civilizing Process: The Development of
Manners, trans. Edmund Jephcott. (New York: Urizen Books, 1978.)

[251] Glass, D. V., and D. E. C. Eversley, eds. Population in History.
(London: Edward Arnold, 1965.)

I

502 THE THIRD WAVE

[252] Hale, J. R. Renaissance Europe 1480-1520. (London: * Fontana,
1971.)

[253] Hill, Christopher. Reformation to Industrial Revolution: 1530-
1780. (Baltimore: Penguin Books, 1969.)

[254] Hofstadter, Richard, William Miller, and Daniel Aaron. The United
States: The History of a Republic, 2nd edition. (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall, 1967.)

[255] Huggett, Frank E. The Past, Present and Future of Factory Life
and Work: A Documentary Inquiry. (London: Harrap, 1973.)

[256] Kirchner, Walther. Western Civilization Since 1500. (New York:
Barnes & Noble, 1969.)

[257] Littlefield, Henry W. History of Europe 1500-1848, 5th edition.
(New York: Barnes & Noble, 1939.)

[258] Mannix, Daniel P. Those About to Die. (New York: Ballantine
Books, 1958.)

[259] Matthews, George T., ed. The Fugger Newsletter. (New York:
Capricorn Books, 1970.)

[260] Moraze, Charles. The Triumph of the Middle Classes: A Study of
European Values in the Nineteenth Century. (London: Weidenfeld and
Nicolson, 1966.)

[261] Plumb, J. H. The Growth of Political Stability in En-gland 1675-
1725. (Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1967.)

[262] Sansom, G. B. The Western World and Japan: A Study in the
Interaction of European and Asiatic Cultures. (New York: Random
House, Vintage Books, 1973.)

[263] Segal, Ronald. The Struggle Against History. (New York: Bantam
Books, 1973.)

[264] Stewart, Donald H. The Opposition Press of the Feder* alist
Period. (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1969.)

[265] Tawney, R. H. Religion and the Rise of Capitalism: A Historical
Study. (New York: New American Library, Mentor, 1954.)

[266] Thompson, E. P. The Making of the English Working Class. (New
York: Vintage Books, 1963.)

[267] Turner, Frederick J. The Significance of the Frontier in American
History. (New York: Readex Microprint, 1966.)

[268] Walker, James Blaine. The Epic of American Industry. (New
York: Harper & Brothers, 1949.)

[269] Weber, Max. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism,
trans, Talcott Parsons. (New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1958.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

503

NATIONS/SEPARATISM/TRANSNATIONAL INSTITUTIONS

[270] Barnet, Richard J., and Ronald E. Miiller. Global Reach: The
Power of the Multinational Corporations. (New York: Simon and
Schuster, 1974.)

[271] Bendix, Reinhard. Nation-Building and Citizenship: Studies of
Our Changing Social Order. (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Anchor
Books, 1969.)

[272] Brown, Lester R. World Without Borders. (New York: Random
House, 1972.)

[273] Brown, Seyom. New Forces in World Politics. (Washington, D.C.
Brookings Institution, 1974.)

[274] ., et al. Regimes for the Ocean, Outer Space, and

Weather. (Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1977.)

[275] Callenbach, Ernest. Ecotopia: The Notebooks and Reports of
William Weston. (New York: Bantam Books, 1977.)

[276] Cobban, Alfred. The Nation State and National Self-
Determination. (New York: Thomas Y. Crowell, 1969.)

[277] Deutsch, Karl W. Nationalism and Social Communication: An
Inquiry into the Foundations of Nationality. (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT
Press, 1966.)

[278] Falk, Richard A. A Study of Future Worlds. New York: Free
Press, 1975.)

[279] Fawcett, J. E. S. The Law of Nations. (New York: Basic Books,
1968.)

[280] Information, Perception and Regional Policy. Report prepared for
National Science Foundation, Research Applications Directorate,
RANN. (Washington, D.C.: National Science Foundation, 1975.)

[281] Kaldor, Mary. The Disintegrating West. (New York: Hill and
Wang, 1978.)

[282] Kohn, Hans. The Idea of Nationalism: A Study in Its Origins and
Background. (Toronto: Collier, 1944.)

[283] Lenin, V. I. The Right of Nations to Self-Determination. (Moscow:
Progress Publishers, 1947.)

[284] LeVesque, Rene. An Option for Quebec. (Toronto: McClelland
and Stewart, 1968.)

[285] Minogue, K. R. Nationalism. (Baltimore: Penguin Books, 1967.)

[286] Servan-Schreiber, Jean-Jacques. Le Pouvoir Regional. (Paris:
Editions Bernard Grasset, 1971.)

[287] Shaw, Brian. The Gospel According to Saint Pierre. (Richmond
Hill, Ont: Pocket Books Canada, 1969.)

[288] Smith, Anthony D. Theories of Nationalism. (New York: Harper &
Row, Harper Torchbooks, 1971.)

[289] Stephenson, Hugh. The Coming Clash: The Impact of

504 THE THIRD WAVE

Multinational Corporations on National States. (New York: Saturday
Review Press, 1972.)

[290] Thomas, Ned. The Welsh Extremist. (Talybont, Cardiganshire: Y
Lolfa, 1973.)

[291] Trudeau, Pierre Elliott. Federalism and the French Canadians.
(Toronto: Macmillan of Canada, 1968.)

[292] Turner, Louis. Multinational Companies and the Third World.

(New York: Hill and Wang, 1973.)

[293] The United Nations and the Future. Proceedings of UNTTAR
Conference on the Future, Moscow, June 10-14,1974. (Moscow,
UNITAR, 1976.)

[294] The United States and the United Nations. Hearings before the
Committee on Foreign Relations, U.S. Senate. (Washington, D.C.:

U.S. Government Printing Office, 1975.)

[295] Unterman, Lee D., and Christine W. Swent, eds. The Future of
the United States Multinational Corpora-tion. (Charlottesville:

University of Virginia Press, 1975.)

[296] Webb, Keith. The Growth of Nationalism in Scotland. (Glasgow:
Molendinar Press, 1977.)

[297] Wilczynski, J. The Multinationals and East-West Relations:
Towards Transideological Collaboration. (London: Macmillan, 1976.)

[298] Year-Book of World Problems and Human Potential, compiled by
the Secretariats of Union of International Associations. (Brussels,
1976.)

PHILOSOPHY

[299] Borodulina, T., ed. K. Marx, F. Engels, V. Lenin: On Historical
Materialism. (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1974.)

[300] Capra, Fritjof. The Tao of Physics: An Exploration of the Parallels
Between Modern Physics and Eastern Mysticism. (New York: Bantam
Books, 1977.)

[301] DeGreene, Kenyon B., ed. Systems Psychology. (New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1970.)

[302] De La Mettrie, Julien Offray. Man a Machine, annot Gertrude
Carman Bussey. (La Salle, 111.: Open Court, 1912.)

[303] Descartes, Ren6. Discourse on Method, trans. John Veitch. (La
Salle, HL: Open Court, 1962.)

[304] Feinberg, Gerald. What is the World Made Of?: Atoms, Leptons,
Quarks, and Other Tantalizing Particles A (Garden City, N.Y.:
Doubleday, Anchor Books, 1978.)

[305] Gellner, Ernest. Thought and Change. (Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1965.)

r

BIBLIOGRAPHY

505

[306] Hyman, Stanley Edgar. The Tangled Bank: Darwin, Marx, Frazer
and Freud as Imaginative Writers. (New York: Atheneum, 1974.)

[307] Lewio, Kurt. Field Theory in Social Science: Selected Theoretical
Papers, ed. Dorwin Cartwright. (New York: Harper & Row, Harper
Torchbooks, 1951.)

[3081 Lilienfeld, Robert. The Rise of Systems Theory: An Ideological
Analysis. (New York: John Wiley-lnter-science, 1978.)

[309] Matson, Floyd W. The Broken Image: Man, Science and Society.
(New York: Doubleday, Anchor Books, 1966.)

[310] Munitz, Milton K., ed. Theories of the Universe: From Babylonian
Myth to Modern Science. (Glencoe, 111.: Free Press, Falcon's Wing
Press, 1957.)

[311] Ramo, Simon. Cure for Chaos: Fresh Solutions to Social
Problems Through the Systems Approach. (New York: David McKay,
1969.)

[312] Russell, Bertrand. A History of Western Philosophy. (New York:
Simon and Schuster, 1945.)

[313] _ — . Human Knowledge: Its Scope and Limits. (New York: Simon
and Schuster, Touchstone, 1948.)

[314] Webb, James. The Flight from Reason. (London: Mac-donald,
1971.)

[315] Weizenbaum, Joseph. Computer Power and Human Reason:
From Judgment to Calculation. (San Francisco: W. H. Freeman, 1976.)

POLITICAL THEORY/General

[316] Jacker, Corinne. The Black Flag of Anarchy: Antistat*

ism in the United States. (New York: Charles

Scribner's Sons, 1968.) [317] Johnson, Chalmers. Revolutionary
Change. (Boston:

Little, Brown, 1966.) [318] Jouvenel, Bertrand de. On Power: Its Nature
and the.

History of Its Growth, trans. J. E. Huntington. (Boston: Beacon Press,
1962.) [319] Krader, Lawrence. Formation of the State. (Englewood

Cliffs, NX: Prentice-Hall, 1968.) [320] .Lenin, V. I. The State and
Revolution. (Moscow:

Progress Publishers, 1949.) [321] Oppenheimer, iFranz. The State,
trans. John Gitterman.

(New York: Free Life Editions, 1975.) [322] Ortega y Gasset, Jose.

Man and Crisis, trans. Mildred

Adams, (New York: W. W. Norton, 1958.) [323] Rousseau, Jean-
Jacques. The Social Contract, trans.

Maurice Cranston. (Baltimore: Penguin Books,

1968.)

506 THE THIRD WAVE

[324] Silvert, Kalman H. The Reason for Democracy. (New

York: Viking Press, 1977.) [325] Swartz, Marc J., Victor W. Turner, and
Arthur Tuden,

eds. Political Anthropology. (Chicago: Aldine-Ather-
ton, 1966.)

POLITICAL THEORY/EHteS

[326] Barber, Bernard. Social Stratification: A Comparative Analysis of
Structure and Process. (New York: Har-court, Brace & World, 1957.)

[327] Benveniste, Guy. The Politics of Expertise. (Berkeley, CaL:
Glendessary Press, 1972.)

[328] Bottomore, T. B. Elites and Society. (New York: Basic Books,
1964.)

[329] Brewer, Garry D. Politicians, Bureaucrats, and the Consultant: A
Critique of Urban Problem Solving. (New York: Basic Books, 1973.)

[330] Burnham, James. The Managerial Revolution. (Bloom-ington:
Indiana University Press, 1960.)

[331] Dimock, Marshall E. The Japanese Technocracy: Management
and Government in Japan. (New York: WalkerAVeatherhiU, 1968.)

[332] Djilas, Milovan. The New Class: An Analysis of the Communist
System. (New York: Frederick A. Prae-ger, 1957.)

[333] . . The Unperfect Society: Beyond the New Class,

trans. Dorian Cooke. (London: Unwin Books, 1972.)

[334] Dye, Thomas R., and L. Harmon Zeigler. The Irony of
Democracy: An Uncommon Introduction to American Politics, 2nd
edition. (Belmont, CaL: Duxbury Press, 1972.)

[335] Girvetz, Harry K. Democracy and Elitism: Two Essays with
Selected Readings. (New York: Charles Scrib-ner's Sons, 1967.)

[336] Gouldner, Alvin W. The Future of Intellectuals and the Rise of the
New Class. (New York: Seabury Press, Continuum, 1979.)

[337] Gvishiani, D. M., S. R. Mikulinsky, and S. A. Kugel, eds. The
Scientific Intelligentsia in the USSR: Structure and Dynamics of
Personnel, trans. Jane Sayers. (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1976.)

[338] Keller, Suzanne. Beyond the Ruling Class: Strategic Elites in
Modern Society. (New York: Random House* 1963.)

[339] Lederer, Emil. State of the Masses: The Threat of the Classless
Society. (New York: Howard Fertig, 1967.)

[340] Meynaud, Jean. Technocracy, trans. Paul Barnes. (London:
Faber and Faber, 1968.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

507

[341] Ortega y Gasset, Jose. The Revolt of the Masses. (New

York: W. W. Norton, 1957.) [3421 Phillips, Kevin P. Mediacracy:
American Parties and

Politics in the Communications Age. (Garden City,

N.Y.: Doubleday, 1975.) [343] Young, Michael. The Rise of the
Meritocracy

1870-2033: An Essay on Education and Equality.

(Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1961.)

POLITICAL THEORY/Representation/Participation

[344] Afanasyev, V. G. The Scientific Management of Society,

trans. L. Ilyitskaya. (Moscow: Progress Publishers,

1971.) [345] Araneta, Salvador. The Effective Democracy For AIL
(Manila: AIA, Bayanikasan Research Foundation,

1976.) [346] Bezold, Clement, ed. Anticipatory Democracy: People in
the Politics of the Future. (New York: Random

House/Vintage Books, 1978.) [347] Bihari, Ott6. Socialist
Representative Institutions, trans.

J6zef Dese*nyi and Imre M6ra. (Budapest: Akad&niai

Kiado, 1970.) [348] Birch, A. H. Representation. (London: Macmillan,

1972.) [349] Crick, Bernard. The Reform of Parliament. (London:

Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1970.) [350] Finletter, Thomas K. Can
Representative Government

Do the Job? (New York: Reynal & Hitchcock, 1945.) [351] Haefele,
Edwin T. Representative Government and Environmental
Management. (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins

University Press, 1973.) [352] International Labour Office. Participation
by Employers9

and Workers9 Organisations in Economic and Social

Planning: A General Introduction. (Geneva: ILO,

1971.) [353] lonescu, Ghita, and Ernest Gellner, eds. Populism: Its

Meanings and National Characteristics. (London:

Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1970.) [354] Jones, Charles O. Every
Second Year: Congressional

Behavior and the Two-Year Term. (Washington, D.C.:

Brookings Institution, 1967.) [355] Kozak, Jan. Without a Shot Being
Fired: The Role of

Parliament and the Unions in a Communist Revolution. (London:
Independent Information Centre, 1957.) [356] Langton, Stuart, ed.
Citizen Participation in America:

Essays on the State of the Art. (Lexington, Mass.: D.

C. Heath, Lexington Books, 1978.) [357] Loewenberg, Gerhard, ed.
Modern Parliaments: Change

or Decline? (Chicago: Aldine-Atherton, 1971.)

508 THE THIRD WAVE

[358] Mill, John Stuart. Utilitarianism, Liberty and Representative
Government. (New York: E. P. Dutton, 1951.)

[359] Partridge, P. H. Consent & Consensus. (New York: Praeger,
1971.)

[360] Pateman, Carole. Participation and Democratic Theory.
(Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1970.)

[361] Pitkin, Hanna Fenichel, ed. Representation. (New York: Atherton
Press, 1969.)

[362] Schramm, F. K., ed. The Bundestag: Legislation in the Federal
Republic of Germany. (Bonn: E. Beinhauer, 1973.)

[363] Spufford, Peter. Origins of the English Parliament. (New York:
Barnes & Noble, 1967.)

pOLmcs/Comparative

[364] Berkowitz, S. D., and Robert K. Logan, eds. Canada's Third
Option. (Toronto: Macmillan of Canada, 1978.)

[365] Blondel, Jean. Comparing Political Systems. (London:
Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1973.)

[366] Cohen, Ronald, and John Middleton, eds. Comparative Political
Systems: Studies in the Politics of Pre-indus-trial Societies. (Garden
City, N.Y.: Natural History Press, 1967.)

[367] Finer, S. E. Comparative Government. (Harmonds-worth,
Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1970.)

[368] Gorden, Morton. Comparative Political Systems: Managing
Conflict. (New York: Macmillan, 1972.)

[369] Hamilton, Alastair. The Appeal of Fascism: A Study of
Intellectuals and Fascism 1919-1945. (London: Anthony Blond, 1971.)

[370] Kennedy, Gavin, ed. The Radical Approach: Papers on an
Independent Scotland. (Edinburgh: Palingenesis Press, 1976.)

[371] McClelland, J. S., ed. The French Right: From De Maistre to
Maurras, trans. Frears, Harber, McClelland, and Phillipson. (London:
Jonathan Cape, 1970.)

[372] Macridis, Roy C., and Robert E. Ward, eds. Modern Political
Systems: Europe, 2nd edition. (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall,
1968.)

[373] Mosse, George L. The Crisis of German Ideology: Intellectual
Origins of the Third Reich. (London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1966.)

[374] Parti Socialiste Unifie. Controler Aujourd'hui pour Decider
Demain, manifesto. (Paris: Tema-£ditions, 1972.)

[375] Russett, Bruce M. Trends in World Politics. (New York:
Macmillan, 1965.)

[376] Scalapino, Robert A., and Junnosuke Masumi. Parties
BIBLIOGRAPHY

509

and Politics in Contemporary Japan. (Berkeley: University of California
Press, 1962.)

[377] Smith, Gordon. Politics in Western Europe: A Comparative
Analysis. (London: Heinemann Educational Books, 1972.)

[378] Starcke, Anna. Survival: Taped Interviews With South Africa's
Power mite. (Cape Town: Tafelberg, 1978.)

POLrncs/U.S.

[379] Armbrister, Trevor. A Matter of Accountability: The True Story of
the Pueblo Affair. (New York: Cow-ard-McCann, 1970.)

[380] Becker, Ted, et aL Un-Vote for a New America: A Guide to
Constitutional Revolution. (Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 1976.)

[381] Becker, Theodore L. American Government: Past, Present,
Future. (Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 1976.)

[382] Boorstin, Daniel J. The Decline of Radicalism: Reflections on
America Today. (New York: Random House, 1969.) /

[383] Brant, Irving. The Bill of Rights: Its Origin and Meaning. (New
York: New American Library, Mentor, 1965.)

[384] Cullop, Floyd G. The Constitution of the United States: An
Introduction. (New York: New American Library, Signet, 1969.)

[385] Everett, Edward. The Mount Vernon Papers, No. 27. (New York:
D. Appleton, 1860.)

[386] Fisher, Louis. President and Congress: Power and Pol" icy. (New
York: Free Press, 1972.)

[387] Flexner, James Thomas. George Washington and the New
Nation (1783-1793). (Boston: Little, Brown, 1970.)

[388] Gilpin, Henry D., ed. The Papers of James Madison, Vol. II.
(Washington, DXX: Langtree & O'Sullivan, 1840.)

[389] Hamilton, Alexander, John Jay, and James Madison. The
Federalist: A Commentary on the Constitution of the United States.
(New York: Random House, Modern Library.)

[390] Hougan, Jim. Spooks: The Haunting of America— The Private
Use of Secret Agents. (New York: William Morrow, 1978.)

[391] Nixon, Richard. The Memoirs of Richard Nixon. (New York:
Grosset & Dunlap, 1978.)

[392] Padover, Saul K., ed. Thomas Jefferson on Democracy. (New
York: New American Library, Mentor; Copyright 1939 D. Appleton-
Century.)

510 THE THIRD WAVE

[393] Paine, Thomas. Rights of Man: Being an Answer to

Mr. Burke's Attack on the French Revolution, ed.

Hypatia Bradlaugh Bonner. (London: C. A. Watts,

1937.) [394] Parrington, Vernon Louis. Main Currents in American

Thought: An Interpretation of American Literature

from the Beginnings to 1920. (New York: Harcourt,

Brace, 1927.) [395] Perloff, Harvey S., ed. The Future of the United
States

Government: Toward the Year 2000. (New York:

George Braziller, 1971.) [396] Saloma, John S., Ill, and Frederick H.
Sontag. Parties:

The Real Opportunity for Effective Citizen Politics.

(New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1972.) [397] Scammon, Richard M., and
Alice V. McGillivray, eds.

America Votes 12: A Handbook of Contemporary

Election Statistics. (Washington, D.C.: Elections

Research Center, Congressional Quarterly, 1977.) [398] Schlesinger,
Arthur M., Jr. The Imperial Presidency.

(New York: Popular Library, 1974.) [399] Smith, Edward Conrad, ed.
The Constitution of the

United States: With Case Summaries. (New York:

Barnes & Noble, 1972.) [400] Steinfels, Peter. The Neoconservatives:
The Men Who

Are Changing America's Politics. (New York: Simon

and Schuster, 1979.) [401] Tocqueville, Alexis de. Democracy in
America, te*

Henry Reeve, rev. Francis Bowen, and ed. Phillip
Bradley. (New York: Alfred A. Knopf, Via
Books, 1945.)

PSYCHOLOGY

[402] Allport, Gordon W. Personality: A Psychological Interpretation.
(New York: Henry Holt, 1937.)

[403] Back, Kurt W. Beyond Words: The Story of Sensitivity Training
and the Encounter Movement. (New York: Russell Sage Foundation,
1972.)

[404] Conway, Flo, and Jim Siegelman. Snapping: America's Epidemic
of Sudden Personality Change. (Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott, 1978.)

[405] Freedman, Alfred M., M.D., Harold I. Kaplan, M.D., and Benjamin
J. Sadock, M.D. Modern Synopsis of Comprehensive Textbook of
Psychiatry. (Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 1972.)

[406] Fromm, Erich. Escape from Freedom. (New York:

[407]

Avon Library, 1965.)

. The Sane Society. (Greenwich, Conn.: Fawcett Premier, 1955.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

511

[408] Gerth, Hans, and C. Wright Mills. Character and Social Structure:
The Psychology of Social Institutions. (New York: Harcourt, Brace &
World, Harbinger, 1953.)

[409] Gross, Martin L. The Psychological Society. (New York: Random
House, 1978.)

[410] Gross, Ronald, and Paul Osterman, eds. Individualism: Man in
Modern Society. (New York: Dell, Laurel, 1971.)

[411] Hall, Calvin S., and Gardner Lindzey. Theories of Per-sonality,

3rd edition. (New York: John Wiley, 1978.)

[412] Kardiner, Abram, et al. The Psychological Frontiers of Society.
(New York: Columbia University Press, 1945.)

[413] Kilpatrick, William. Identity & Intimacy. (New York: Delacorte
Press, 1975.)

[414] May, Rollo. Power and Innocence: A Search for the Sources of
Violence. (New York: W. W. Norton, 1972.)

[415] Reich, Wilhelm. The Mass Psychology of Fascism, trans. Vincent
R. Carfagno. (New York: Farrar, Straus & Giroux, 1971.)

[416] Ruitenbeek, Hendrik M., ed., Varieties of Personality Theory.
(New York: E. P. Button, 1964.)

[417] Smirnov, Georgi. Soviet Man: The Making of a Socialist Type of
Personality, trans. Robert Daglish. (Moscow: Progress Publishers,
1973.)

[418] Stevens, John O., ed. Gestalt Is — A Collection of Articles About
Gestalt Therapy and Living. (New York: Bantam Books, 1977.)

[419] Sullivan, Harry Stack, M.D. The Fusion of Psychiatry and Social
Science. (New York: W. W. Norton, 1964.)

[420] Winter, Ruth. The Smell Book. (Philadelphia: J, B. Lip-pincott,

1976. )

[421] Zurcher, Louis A., Jr. The Mutable Self: A Self-Concept for Social
Change. (Beverly Hills, Cal.: Sage Publications, 1977.)

SCIENCE/TECHNOLOGY

[422] Anderson, Robert H., and Nake M. Kamrany. Advanced
Computer-Based Manufacturing Systems for Defense Needs. (Marina
del Rey, Cal.: USC, Information - Sciences Institute, 1973.)

[423] The Application of Computer Technology for Development.

United Nations, Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Second
Report of the Secretary -General. (New York, 1973.)

[424] Appropriate Technology in the Commonwealth* A
512 THE THIRD WAVE

Directory of Institutions. Food Production & Rural Development
Division, Commonwealth Secretariat. (London, 1977.)

[425] Appropriate Technology in the United States: An EJC-ploratory
Study. Study conducted by Integrative Design Associates for the
National Science Foundation RANN program. (Washington, D.C.: U.S.
Government Printing Office, 1977.)

[426] Asimov, Isaac. /, Robot. (New York: Fawcett Crest, 1950.)

[427] . Understanding Physics, Vol. Ill, The Electron,

Proton, and Neutron. (New York: New American Library, Signet, 1966.)

[428] Baldwin, J., and Stewart Brand, eds. Soft-Tech. (New York:
Penguin Books, 1978.)

[429] Boorstin, Daniel J. The Republic of Technology: Reflections on
Our Future Community. (New York: Harper & Row, 1978.)

[430] Brand, Stewart, ed. Space Colonies. (New York: Penguin Books,

1977. )

[431] Buchholz, Hans, and Wolfgang Gmelin, eds. Science and
Technology and the Future, Parts 1 and 2. (Munich: K. G. Saur, 1979.)

[432] Butterfield, Herbert. The Origins of Modern Science: 1300-1800.
(New York: Free Press,, 1957.)

[433] Cardwell, D. S. L. Turning Points in Western Technology. (New
York: Neale Watson Academic Publications, Science History
Publications, 1972.)

[434] Cross, Nigel, David Elliot, and Robin Roy, eds. Man-Made
Futures: Readings in Society, Technology and Design. (London:
Hutchinson, 1974.)

[435] Einstein, Albert. Ideas and Opinions, trans. Sonja Bargmann.
(New York: Dell, Laurel. Copyright Crown, 1954.)

[436] Ellis, John. The Social History of the Machine Gun. (New York:
Pantheon Books, 1975.)

[437] Etzioni, Amitai. Genetic Fix. (New York: Macmillan, 1973.)

[438] Farago, F. T. Handbook of Dimensional Measurement. (New
York: Industrial Press, 1965.)

[439] Farrington, Benjamin. Head and Hand in Ancient Greece: Four
Studies in the Social Relations of Thought. (London: Watts, Thinker's
Library, 1947.)

[440] Feyerabend, Paul. Against Method: Outline of an Anarchistic
Theory of Knowledge. (London: NLB, Verso, 1975.)

[441] Fidell, Oscar H., ed. Ideas in Science. (New York: Washington
Square Press, Reader's Enrichment, 1966.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

513

[442] Ford, Henry. My Life and Work. (New York: Dou-bleday, Page,
1923.)

[443] H. B. Maynard and Company. Production: An International
Appraisal of Contemporary Manufacturing Systems and the Changing
Role of the Worker, ed. Rolf Tiefenthal. (London: McGraw-Hill, 1975.)

[444] Harper, Peter, and Godfrey Boyle, eds. Radical Technology.
(New York: Pantheon Books, 1976.)

[445] Heppenheimer, T. A. Colonies in Space. (Harrisburg, Pa.:
Stackpole Books, 1977.)

[446] Howard, Ted, and Jeremy Rifkin. Who Should Play God? The
Artificial Creation of Life and What It Means for the Future of the
Human Race. (New York: Dell, 1977.)

[447] Ulich, Ivan. Tools for Conviviality. (New York: Harper & Row,
1973.)

[448] Jacobs, Jane. The Economy of Cities. (New York: Random
House, 1969.)

[449] Klein, H. Arthur. The World of Measurements. (New York: Simon
and Schuster, 1974.)

[450] Kranzberg, Melvin, and Carroll W. Pursell, Jr. Technology in
Western Civilization, Vol. I. (New York: Oxford University Press, 1967.)

[451] Kuhn, Thomas S. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions.
(Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1962.)

[452] Lawless, Edward W. Technology and Social Shock. (New
Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1977.)

[453] Lilley, Samuel. Men, Machines and History. (New York:
International Publishers, 1966.)

[454] Mazlish, Bruce, ed. The Railroad and the Space Program: An
Exploration in Historical Analogy. (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press,
1965.)

[455] Needham, Joseph. Science and Civilization in China, Vol. I,
Introductory Orientations. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
1965.)

[456] . Science and Civilization in China, Vol. II, History of

Scientific Thought. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1969.)

[457] Newman, James R., ed. What Is Science? (New York:
Washington Square Press, 1961.)

[458] Nicolis, G., and I. Prigogine. Self-Organization in Non-equilibrium
Systems: From Dissipative Structures to Order Through Fluctuations.
(New York: John Wiley* ' Wiley-lnterscience, 1977.)

[459] Nikolaev, L. Space Chemistry, trans. Y. Nadler. (Moscow: Mir
Publishers, 1976.)

[460] O'Neill, Gerald K. The High Frontier: Human Colonies in Space.
(New York: Bantam Books, 1978.)

514 THE THIRD WAVE

[461] Pyke, Magnus. Technological Eating, or Where Does the Fish-
Finger Point? (London: John Murray, 1972.)

[462] Ritner, Peter. The Society of Space. (New York: Macmillan,
1961.)

[463] Schey, John A. Introduction to Manufacturing Processes. (New
York: McGraw-Hill, 1977.)

[464] Schofield, Robert E. The Lunar Society of Birmingham: A Social
History of Provincial Science and Industry in Eighteenth-Century
England. (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1963.)

[465] Sharlin, Harold I. The Convergent Century: The Unification of
Science in the Nineteenth Century. (New York: Abelard-Schuman,
1966.)

[466] Sorenson, James R. Social Science Frontiers, Vol. 3, Social
Aspects of Applied Human Genetics. (New York: Russell Sage
Foundation, 1971.)

[467] Stine, G. Harry. The Third Industrial Revolution. (New York: G. P.
Putnam's Sons, 1975.)

[468] Sullivan, Walter. We Are Not Alone: The Search for Intelligent
Life on Other Worlds. (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1964.)

[469] U.S. Department of Labor. Technological Change and Manpower
Trends in Five Industries: Pulp and Paper/Hydraulic
Cement/Steel/Aircraft and Missile/Wholesale Trade. (Washington,
D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1975.)

[470] Warshofsky, Fred. Doomsday: The Science of Catastrophe.

(New York: Reader's Digest Press, 1977.)

[471] Watson, James D. The Double Helix: A Personal Account of the
Discovery of the Structure of DNA. (New York: New American Library
Signet Books, 1968.)

SOCIALISM/COMMUNISM

[472] Amalrik, Andrei. Will the Soviet Union Survive until
1984? (New York: Harper & Row, Perennial Library,

1971.) [473] Brus, Wlodzimierz. The Economics and Politics of So

cialism: Collected Essays, trans. Angus Walker

(Chapter 3-6). (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul,

1973.) [474] Christman, Henry M., ed. Essential Works of Lenin.

(New York: Bantam Books, Matrix, 1966.) [475] Howe, Irving. The
Basic Writings of Trotsky. (New

York: Random House, Vintage Books, 1965.) [476] Laidler, Harry W.
History of Socialism. (New York:

Thomas Y. Crowell, 1968.)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

515

[477] Marx, Karl, and Friedrich Engels. The Communist Manifesto.
(Harmondswbrth, Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1967.)

[478] Nicolaus, Martin. Restoration of Capitalism in the USSR.
(Chicago: Liberator Press, 1975.)

[479] Nordhoff, Charles. The Communistic Societies of the United
States. (New York: Schocken Books, 1965.)

[480] Possony, Stefan T., ed. The Lenin Reader: The Outstanding
Works of V. I. Lenin. (Chicago: Henry Regnery, Gateway, 1969.)

[481] Revel, Jean-Francois. The Totalitarian Temptation, trans. David
Hapgood. (Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1978.)

[482] §s , Without Marx or Jesus, trans. J. F. Bernard.

(London: Paladin, 1972.)

[483] Smelser, Neil J., ed. Karl Marx on Society and Social Change,
with Selections by Friedrich Engels. (Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1973.)

[484] Smith, Hedrick. The Russians. (New York: Quadrangle/New York
Times, 1976.)

[485] Socialism Theory and Practice, Soviet Monthly Digest of the
Theoretical and Political Press, January 1976. (Moscow: Novosti Press
Agency.)

[486] Trotsky, Leon. Political Profiles, trans. R. Chappell. (London:

New Park Publications, 1972.)

[487] . The Revolution Betrayed, trans. Max Eastman,

5th edition. (New York: Pathfinder Press, 1972.)

[488] Wesson, Robert G. The Soviet State: An Aging Revolution. (New
York: John Wiley, 1972.)

SOCIOLOGY/SOCIAL THEORY

[489] Bird, Caroline. The Crowding Syndrome: Learning to

Live with Too Much and Too Many. (New York:

David McKay, 1972.) [490] Bottomore, T. B. Sociology: A Guide to
Problems and

Literature. (London: George Allen & Unwin, 1962.) [491] Chappie, Eliot
Dismore, and Carleton Stevens Coon.

Principles of Anthropology. (New York: Henry Holt,

1942.) [492] Davis* Kingsley, Harry C. Bredemeier, and Marion J.

Levy. Modern American Society. (New York: Rine-

hart, 1950.)

[493] Etzioni, Amitai. The Active Society: A Theory of Societal and
Political Processes. (New York: Free Press,

1968.) [494] , and Eva Etzioni, eds. Social Change: Sources,

Patterns, and Consequences. (New York: Basic

Books, 1964.)

516 THE THIRD WAVE

[495] Greet, Colin, ed. Divided Society: The Ethnic Experience in
America. (New York: Basic Books, 1974.) [496] Harris, Marvin. The
Rise of Anthropological Theory: A

History of Theories of Culture. (New York: Thomas

Y. Crowell, 1968.) [497] Isaacs, Harold R. Idols of the Tribe. (New
York: Har

per & Row, 1975.) [498] Kardiner, Abram, and Edward Preble. They
Studied

Man. (Cleveland: World Publishing, 1961.) [499] Moore, Wilbert E. The
Professions: Roles and Rules

(New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1970.) [500] Packard, Vance. A
Nation of Strangers. (New York:

David McKay, 1972.) [501] Raison, Timothy, ed. The Founding Fathers
of Soda

Science. (Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin

Books, 1969.) [502] Toffler, Alvin. Future Shock. (New York: Bantam

Books, 1971.)

TIME/SPACE

[503] Abler, Ronald, et al. Human Geography in a Shrinking World.
(Belmont, Cal.: Duxbury Press, 1975.)

[504] Blainey, Geoffrey. The Tyranny of Distance. (Melbourne: Sun
Books, 1971.)

[505] Clay, Grady. Close-Up: How to Read the American City. (New
York: Praeger, 1973.)

[506] Coleman, Lesley. A Book of Time. (London: Longman, 1971.)

[507] Dean, Robert D., William H. Leahy, and David L. McKee, eds.
Spatial Economic Theory. (New York: Free Press, 1970.)

[508] de Grazia, Sebastian. Of Time, Work and Leisure. (New York:
Twentieth Century Fund, 1962.)

[509] Fraser, J. T., ed. The Voices of Time. (New York: George
Braziller, 1966.)

[510] , F. C. Haber, and G. H. Miiller, eds. The Study

of Time. (New York: Springer-Verlag, 1972.)

[511] Gould, Peter, and Rodney White. Mental Maps. (Baltimore:
Penguin Books, 1974.)

[512] Gribbin, John. Timewarps. (New York: Delacorte Press/Eleanor
Friede, 1979.)

[513] Haggett, Peter, and Richard J. Chorley. Network Analysis in
Geography. (New York: St. Martin's Pres 1969.)

[514] Morrill, Richard L. The Spatial Organization of Socie (Belmont,
Cal.: Duxbury Press, 1970.)

[515] Needham, Joseph. Time and Eastern Man, the He Myers Lecture
1964, Royal Anthropological

BIBLIOGRAPHY

517

Occasional Paper No. 21 . (Glasgow: Royal Anthropological Institute of
Great Britain & Ireland, 1965.)

[516] Norberg-Schulz, Christian. Existence, Space & Architecture.
(New York: Praeger, 1971.)

[517] Sandow, Stuart A. Durations: The Encyclopedia of How Long
Things Take. (New York: Times Books, 1977.)

[518] Tooley, R. V., Charles Brisker, and Gerald Roe Crone.

Landmarks of Mapmaking. (Amsterdam: Elsevier, 1968.)

[519] Welch, Kenneth F. Time Measurement: An Introductory History.
(Newton Abbot, Devonshire: David & Charles, 1972.)

[520] Whitrow, G. J. What is Time? (London: Thames and Hudson,
1972.)

WORK/EDUCATION

[521] Anderson, Dennis, and Mark W. Leiserson. Rural Enterprise and
Non-farm Employment. (Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978.)

[522] Bartlett, Laile E. New Work/New Life. (New York: Harper & Row,
1976.)

[523] Best, Fred, ed. The Future of Work. (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall, 1973.)

[524] Bowman, Jim, et al. The Far Side of the Future: Social Problems
and Educational Reconstruction. (Washington, D.C.: World Future
Society, 1978.)

[525] Dickson, Paul. The Future of the Workplace: The Coming
Revolution in Jobs. (New York: Weybright and Talley, 1975.)

[526] Evans, Archibald A. Flexibility in Working Life: Opportunities for
Individual Choice. (Paris: Organisation for Economic Co-operation and
Development, 1973.)

[527] Gates, Arthur I., et al. Educational Psychology, a revision of
Psychology for Students of Education. (New York: Macmillan, 1942.)

[528] Good, H. G. A History of Western Education. (New York:
Macmillan, 1947.)

[529] Kanter, Rosabeth Moss. Social Science Frontiers, Vol. 9, Work
and Family in the United States: A Critical Review and Agenda for
Research and Policy. (New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1977.)

[530] Poor, Riva, ed. 4 Days, 40 Hours: And Other Forms of the
Rearranged Workweek. (New York: New American Library, Mentor,
1973.)

[531] Roberts, Paul Craig. Alienation and the Soviet Economy: Toward
a General Theory of Marxian Alienation, Organization Principles, and
the Soviet